| Dokumendiregister | Riigikogu |
| Viit | 1-2/26-592/1 |
| Registreeritud | 11.09.2026 |
| Sünkroonitud | 11.10.2026 |
| Liik | EL dokument |
| Funktsioon | |
| Sari | |
| Toimik | Ettepanek: EUROOPA PARLAMENDI JA NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS, millega kehtestatakse meetmete raamistik liidu innovatsiooniökosüsteemi tugevdamiseks ja muudetakse määrust (EL) 2017/1001 (Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus) - SEC(2026) 567, SWD(2026) 567, SWD(2026) 568, COM(2026) 567 |
| Juurdepääsupiirang | Avalik |
| Adressaat | |
| Saabumis/saatmisviis | |
| Vastutaja | |
| Originaal | Ava uues aknas |
| Taotle dokumendi eemaldamist või parandamist |
EN EN
EUROPEAN COMMISSION
Brussels, 9.9.2026 COM(2026) 567 final
2026/0264 (COD)
Proposal for a
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a framework of measures for strengthening the Union innovation ecosystem
and amending Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 (European Innovation Act)
{SEC(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 568 final}
(Text with EEA relevance)
EN 1 EN
EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM
1. CONTEXT OF THE PROPOSAL
1.1. Reasons for and objectives of the proposal
The European Union (EU) is a global leader in scientific research, producing a significant
share of the world’s high-quality scientific output. However, this strength does not translate
into a commensurate level of innovation performance and commercial success within the
Single Market and worldwide. Innovative ideas developed in Europe too often fail to reach
the market, scale across borders, or generate new growth sectors. As a result, the Union
captures only a limited share of the economic and societal value generated by its scientific and
technological strengths, constraining the emergence of globally competitive firms, weakening
Europe’s capacity to secure critical technologies and value chains and long-term productivity
growth.
Enhancing the conditions for the development, commercialisation, and scale-up of
innovative solutions has become a central priority of the Commission’s policy agenda for
2024–2029, which places research and innovation at the core of Europe’s competitiveness and
sustainable prosperity. It is also essential for strengthening the Union’s resilience, economic
security, and strategic autonomy in an increasingly contested geopolitical environment. In this
context, the proposed Regulation contributes to the implementation of the EU Startup and
Scaleup Strategy1 and responds to the mandate set out in the Mission Letter of Commissioner
Zaharieva develop a framework facilitating the testing, financing and scaling of innovative
solutions in the EU.
Over the past two decades, the EU’s economic growth has lagged that of other major
economies, notably the United States (US) and China, with a widening difference in GDP
levels. A key driver of this divergence is weaker productivity growth in the EU. As research
and innovation account for a substantial share of productivity gains, the Union’s ability to
translate knowledge into marketable innovations is a critical determinant of its long-term
competitiveness and prosperity. It is equally a determinant of the Union’s ability to reduce
excessive strategic dependencies, preserve its freedom of action, and ensure secure access to
critical technologies, products and industrial capabilities.
The underlying challenge lies in structural barriers along the innovation lifecycle. While the
EU performs strongly in early-stage research, it faces persistent difficulties in the transition
from research results to market-ready products and scalable businesses. Innovative firms
encounter two critical bottlenecks: a pre-commercialisation gap, where projects remain too
risky or fragmented to attract private investment, and a scaling gap, where firms struggle to
expand due to financial, regulatory and market constraints. These bottlenecks reduce
incentives for investment and limit the emergence of new innovative firms and sectors.
Over the past years, the Union has taken significant steps to address these challenges. EU
funding programmes, such as Horizon Europe, the Recovery and Resilience Facility, the
Innovation Fund, the Digital Europe Programme, and InvestEU, as well as initiatives aimed at
deepening capital markets and strengthening the European Research Area, have contributed to
improving framework conditions for innovation. These efforts also support the Union’s
1 Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament, the Council, the European
Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions, The EU Startup And Scaleup
Strategy Choose Europe To Start And Scale, COM/2025/270final, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-
content/EN/TXT/?uri=celex:52025DC0270
EN 2 EN
broader objective of reinforcing resilience, preparedness and technological capacity in sectors
of strategic importance.
However, despite this progress, important barriers and disparities between Member
States persist, particularly in the transition from research to market deployment. These
barriers not only undermine innovation performance but also delay the deployment at scale of
technologies that are essential for Europe’s security, resilience and economic sovereignty.
First, markets for R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, remain
underdeveloped because of the lack of a clear legal framework. The EU Public
Procurement Directives cover R&D services only where both of the following conditions are
met:
• the benefits accrue exclusively to the public buyer for use in its own affairs; and
• the public buyer wholly remunerates the service.
As a result, a substantial share of R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement,
falls outside their scope. Since the Commission clarified the concept of pre-commercial
procurement in 2007 in its Communication2, there has been an increase in these types of R&D
procurements and success cases show that strategic use of this instrument enables the EU to
regain leadership and strategic autonomy in high-tech markets. However, overall, across the
EU, the progress in raising investment levels is still too slow and fragmented. Key reasons are
that the absence of harmonised rules has contributed to divergent practices across Member
States, legal uncertainty, and limited use of joint cross-border R&D procurement, which is
often necessary to achieve the financial critical mass required for the development of
innovative technologies. This is particularly problematic in strategic sectors where fragmented
demand, duplicated national approaches, and dependence on non-EU suppliers can expose the
Union to vulnerabilities and supply risks. Moreover, the proposed revision of the EU public
procurement framework, the Public Procurement Act, proposes to exclude all forms of R&D
procurement.
Such public procurements of R&D are vital to create innovative solutions that can improve
the quality and efficiency of public services, address societal challenges and build sufficient
industrial capacity for innovative solutions and technologies in the EU to safeguard EU
economic security and strategic autonomy. They are also a key instrument for accelerating
market development in critical technologies, strengthening the European industrial and
technological base, improving security of supply, and ensuring that strategically relevant
capabilities are developed and deployed within the Union. Other leading economies in the
world are investing 5 to 8 times more in public procurement of R&D than the EU3. Raising
public investments in R&D procurement in the EU from 0,6% to 3% of total public
procurement or from €17,28Bn to €86,4Bn, would help the EU raise public R&D investments
with around 0,5% of GDP. Given that this could raise an equal additional amount of private
2 Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament, the Council, the European
Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions, ‘Pre-commercial Procurement:
Driving innovation to ensure sustainable high quality public services in Europe’, 14.12.2007,
COM(2007) 799 final 3 The EU spends 0,6% of public procurement on R&D, the US 3,5% and South Korea 5%. Raising
investments in the EU to 3% of total public procurement on R&D would generate additional public
R&D investments equalling 0,5% of GDP - EU wide benchmarking of innovation procurement policy
frameworks and investments
EN 3 EN
investments in R&D, total investments in R&D in the EU could thus rise from 2,2% to 3% of
GDP4.
Second, insufficient clarity and comparability in the valuation and monetisation of
intellectual property (IP) continue to hinder the commercialisation of research and
innovation results. Innovation is now largely driven by intangible assets, with over 90% of
corporate value in certain leading firms coming from intellectual property. Yet in the EU,IP
is still rarely used as collateral in financing. Because financial institutions in the EU still focus
mostly on tangible assets and traditional accounting, IP-rich companies struggle to secure
financing. As a result, EU startups raise around 50% less capital than US peers by their tenth
year. This mismatch has created a major growth financing gap for asset-light, innovative
firms, estimated at up to EUR 18 billion per year.5 One of the key reasons explaining the lack
of IP-back financing in the EU is the absence of a harmonised methodology for valuing
intellectual property assets. This created divergent conditions across Member States for the
use of such assets in company financing, including as collateral for debt financing and for
their consideration in equity investment and other financing decisions. Other key reasons are
the lack of a mature EU-wide secondary market for intangible assets and a lack of skills
regarding IP-backed financing among financial institutions and innovative startups. This
undermines companies' access to capital within the Single Market, impeding their cross-
border growth and investment. This makes EU companies less successful at scaling and
commercialising innovation, especially in deep tech and breakthrough sectors than those from
other jurisdictions such as the US, China and South Korea.
Addressing these two barriers through this proposal could thus have a sizeable impact on
improving the functioning of the Single Market for R&D investments and commercialising IP
assets, thereby supporting Europe’s independence and competitiveness. It would also help
ensure that Europe retains finances and scales critical technologies and related IP assets in
line with its security, resilience and strategic autonomy objectives. Against this background,
this proposal delivers on President von der Leyen’s 2024-2027 Commission Political
Guidelines that set priorities to put research and innovation at the heart of our economy. The
European Innovation Act was announced in the EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy and in the
Competitiveness Compass for the EU as one of the key initiatives to strengthen the EU’s
innovation ecosystem and enhance its ability to compete globally.
The general objective of this initiative is to improve the functioning of the Single Market for
innovation by reducing structural barriers to bring innovative solutions to the market, thereby
speeding up their commercialisation in the EU. This objective contributes directly to the
Union’s broader priorities of strengthening competitiveness, fostering sustainable economic
growth, and enhancing technological sovereignty, while also reinforcing economic security,
resilience and the Union’s capacity to act autonomously in strategically important areas.
To achieve this, the proposal pursues a set of specific objectives. These include strengthening
the role of public procurement as a driver of innovation and enhancing the valuation,
commercialisation and use of IP.
The European Innovation Act aims to achieve these objectives by:
4 In 2023, public and private investments into R&D was 2,2% of GDP in the EU, compared to 3,3% in
Japan, 3,46% in the US, 4,93% in South Korea - Science, Research and Innovation Performance (SRIP)
report, 2024 edition, European Commission 5 European Investment Bank. (2025). Investment Report 2024/2025: Innovation, integration and simplification in
Europe
EN 4 EN
• creating a harmonised framework at Union level for R&D procurement, including
pre-commercial procurement; and
• mandating the creation of a competence centre on IP-backed finance at Union level
as part of the European Union Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO), an Union-wide
framework for IP valuation and a Union-wide IP marketplace for commercialising
IP.
By addressing these challenges in a coherent and targeted manner, the proposed Regulation
seeks to ensure that innovative ideas developed in Europe can more effectively progress from
research to market, scale across borders, and contribute to the Union’s long-term
competitiveness and prosperity, as well as to its resilience, economic security and strategic
autonomy.
1.2. Consistency with existing policy provisions in the policy area
There is currently no comprehensive Union legislative framework specifically addressing the
cross-cutting barriers affecting the development, testing and scale-up of innovative solutions
across the Single Market. Existing Union policies in the area of research and innovation
primarily focus on supporting knowledge creation, fostering collaboration and providing
funding for research and innovation activities, while only partially addressing the framework
conditions governing the transition from research to market.
The proposed Regulation complements these existing initiatives by targeting the remaining
bottlenecks along the innovation lifecycle, in particular those related to the use of R&D
procurement, and commercialisation and use of IP in financing of innovative companies.
In this context, the most relevant Union policy provisions in the field of research and
innovation include:
The European Research Area (ERA) incentivises and structurally support cross-border
research and development (R&D) collaboration and researcher mobility, primarily targeting
the early stages of the research and innovation lifecycle. It is implemented in part through
Union programmes such as Horizon Europe, which provide funding for collaborative
research, mobility schemes and research infrastructures. In parallel, the ERA Forum serves as
a soft coordination tool through which Member States align national research policies,
priorities and reforms.
Union funding programmes provide substantial financial support to research and innovation
activities across the different stages of the innovation lifecycle. In particular, programmes
such as Horizon Europe, including the European Innovation Council, as well as InvestEU,
Digital Europe Programme, the European Defence Fund, the Cohesion Policy Funds and the
Innovation Fund support the development, demonstration and, to some extent, the scale-up of
innovative solutions through grants, blended finance, risk-sharing mechanisms and via
support for R&D procurements. Without prejudging the next Multiannual Financial
Framework (MFF) and the implementation of future EU funding programmes, the next MFF
may strengthen this financial support by enhancing the Union’s capacity to mobilise public
and private investment in innovation and strategic technologies. The proposed Regulation is
consistent with these Union programmes as it does not propose any funding measures but will
reinforce the legal framework conditions for innovation across the Member States, which can
complement and contribute to improve the impact of these Union funding programmes in a
number of ways:
• Several of these Union funding programmes provide support to public buyers to
conduct R&D procurement. These experiences have also highlighted a remaining
EN 5 EN
lack of confidence of public buyers in starting pre-commercial procurements due to
the absence of a clear EU wide legal framework for pre-commercial procurements,
and they have also highlighted the extra effort and time it takes for public buyers to
setup joint cross-border pre-commercial procurements due to fragmentation of
national procurement rules across Member States. The proposed Regulation helps
address this issue by establishing common rules for implementing R&D
procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, and a harmonised framework
for joint cross-border R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement.
• Some of these Union funding programmes support innovators in trying to
commercialise their IP or to use their intellectual property rights as collateral to
obtain financial investments. These experiences have highlighted that innovators face
issues in finding the right parties that are interested in buying or licensing their IP
and getting good value out of their IP for obtaining financial investments due to a
knowledge gap and the lack of a Union-wide accepted valuation framework and the
lack of a Union-wide marketplace for IP rights. The proposed Regulation helps
address this issue by extending the mandate of the European Union Intellectual
Property Office to establish a competence centre for IP-backed finance, a common
framework for the valuation of IP and a Union-wide marketplace for the
commercialisation of IP rights.
It follows that the proposed Regulation is consistent with existing Union policy provisions in
the field of research and innovation by complementing existing funding programmes with a
coherent framework for R&D procurement and with new tasks for European Union
Intellectual Property Office that will help innovators obtain IP-backed finance.
1.3. Consistency with other Union policies
The proposed Regulation is a cross-sector initiative aiming to deliver a Union-wide level
playing field for innovators across all sectors, rather than focusing on specific application
sectors, technology fields or industries. Its measures are horizontal by design and address
structural barriers across Member States that affect innovation-intensive activities.
The proposed Regulation complements the forthcoming 28th Regime corporate legal
framework – EU Inc., which provides a optional harmonised corporateu framework for
companies operating across the Union. The proposal also complements the reforms under the
Savings and Investments Union, which aim to deepen the Union capital markets and channel
more private savings into equity, venture capital and scale-up financing, thereby improving
access to finance for innovative firms. Despite the expected progress in regulatory
harmonisation under the European Commission’s EU Inc. proposal, significant fragmentation
is expected to persist in how companies can navigate the innovation lifecycle. This
fragmentation risks hampering companies to bring innovative solutions to the market which
could limit the growth potential of innovative companies, including those that are set up under
the harmonised EU Inc. framework. In other words, while the EU Inc. proposal aims to
facilitate setting up and operating a business across the Union and help companies attract
investment, the proposed Regulation is designed to address further bottlenecks in the
innovation lifecycle, ensuring that companies can develop and market their innovations more
easily across the Single Market.
Similarly, despite the expected progress under the Savings and Investments Union in
deepening the Union capital markets and mobilising private investment, significant
constraints persist in other parts of the innovation lifecycle. In particular, barriers related to
EN 6 EN
the development, testing, valuation and early adoption of innovative solutions continue to
limit the pipeline of investment-ready projects. As a result, while the Savings and Investments
Union aims to improve access to finance and support the scale-up of innovative companies,
the proposed Regulation removes bottlenecks that hamper innovative ideas to attract IP-
backed finance and helps innovators fully benefit from improved capital market integration.
The proposed Regulation also builds on the forthcoming European Business Wallets, which
streamline cross-border procurement procedures and digital interactions between economic
operators and public sector bodies. The European Business Wallets will establish a digital
identity for economic operators and allow for secure data exchange in the form of electronic
attestations of attributes and by means of a secure communication channel. This will simplify
licencing, registrations, tax filings and procurement authorisations, and economic operators
will no longer need to duplicate information across portals, thereby reducing administrative
burden and compliance costs. Consequently, the proposed Regulation foresees that R&D
procurement procedures shall be carried out exclusively in digital form, and where possible
by means of the European Business Wallets or by alternative electronic means that that are
interoperable with the European Business Wallets.
The proposed Regulation also complements sectoral initiatives, such as the existing Critical
Medicines Act, the Cloud and AI Development Act, the Biotech I Act and the forthcoming
Advanced Materials Act, Biotech II Act and Ocean Act, targeting strategic sectors or
technologies and aim to strengthen the Union’s position as a high-tech powerhouse. While
these initiatives provide tailored, sector-specific approaches where needed, the European
Innovation Act addresses the cross-cutting gaps affecting innovation across sectors and across
different technology fields. It does so without prejudging or interfering with sector-specific
frameworks, thereby ensuring coherence across the overall Union innovation policy
landscape.
The proposed Regulation also complements the EU Public Procurement Directives and their
proposed revision through the Public Procurement Act (PPA). The EU Public Procurement
Directives exclude pre-commercial procurement, while certain R&D service procurements
still fall within their scope and the procurement of R&D is a mandatory element of the
innovation partnership procedure. By contrast, the PPA proposal excludes all forms of R&D
services procurement and removes also the procurement of R&D as a mandatory component
from the current innovation partnership procedure by replacing this with a new innovation
challenge procedure having as mandatory elements a testing phase and a phase for procuring
commercial deployment, which can include volumes of innovative solutions.
2. LEGAL BASIS, SUBSIDIARITY AND PROPORTIONALITY
2.1. Legal basis
The legal basis for the proposed Regulation is Article 114 of the Treaty on the Functioning of
the European Union, which allows the Union to adopt harmonisation measures to ensure the
proper functioning of the internal market. This is needed to remove cross-border regulatory
and structural barriers that hinder the proper functioning of the Single Market. Diverging
national rules on R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, constitute
barriers that prevent companies from participating in and offering their services to public
buyers in different Member States. Similarly, different approaches to the valuation and
commercialisation of IP constitute barriers for innovators to attract IP-backed finance and
scaleup their businesses across the Union. These fragmented approaches to R&D procurement
and to the valuation and commercialisation of intellectual property impede cross-border
movement of goods, services and capital within the Single Market.
EN 7 EN
2.2. Subsidiarity (for non-exclusive competence)
The proposed Regulation is in conformity with the principle of subsidiarity as provided for in
Article 5(3) of the Treaty on the European Union.
Strengthening the Union’s capacity to develop, commercialise, and scale innovative solutions
is of high relevance for reinforcing the Union’s competitiveness and strategic autonomy.
Innovation ecosystems and markets for innovative companies are increasingly cross-border in
nature, while regulatory and framework conditions in the Union are fragmented along national
lines. In the absence of Union level measures, the competitiveness challenges currently facing
industry are likely to prompt Member States to implement even more unilateral measures.
While such efforts may be justified, leaving national measures uncoordinated and the cross-
border challenges that are not tackled in national measures unaddressed risks negatively
impacting the functioning and increasing the fragmentation of the Single Market, making the
Union more vulnerable and overdependent on innovative solutions and technologies from
third countries and unable to leverage the assets of the Single Market to deliver benefits to
national and European ecosystems.
In particular, the scale required to support the transition from research to market and to ensure
effective diffusion of innovation exceeds what individual Member States can achieve in
isolation. Divergent national approaches to the valuation and commercialisation of intellectual
property, to attract IP-backed finance, and to R&D procurement create legal uncertainty,
increase costs and limit cross-border activities for innovative firms. These divergencies have a
direct and demonstrable impact on the functioning of the Single Market, impeding cross-
border movement of goods, services and capital within the Union.
By contrast, action at Union level can establish common framework conditions and ensure
coordination across Member States, thereby enabling innovators to develop innovation, attract
IP-backed financing and scale across the Single Market. Union-level action allows for the
creation of a level playing field, reduces fragmentation and duplication, and facilitates
efficient allocation of resources across the Union.
No single Member State alone is capable of effectively addressing these issues due to the
integrated nature of the challenge and the need for proper functioning of the Internal market
for developing, testing, commercialising and scaling of innovative solutions across the Union.
A harmonised Union-level approach is therefore necessary to ensure the well-functioning of
the Single Market and to address the challenges of reinforcing the Union’s competitiveness
and strategic autonomy. The measures included in this initiative would not be as effective if
implemented by Member States acting alone, as the challenges they address concern the
Single Market. They are not limited to individual Member States or to a subset of Member
States, but they relate to the Union’s industrial base and Union-wide value chains. In addition,
measures implemented at Member States’ level are unlikely to adequately meet the needs of
closely interconnected supply chains within the Single Market and could lead to further
market fragmentation, innovation leakage and industrial relocation to other parts of the world
and overall weakening of the Union’s competitiveness and strategic autonomy.
Innovation is a trans-boundary challenge that requires Union-level action to effectively
complement and reinforce measures taken at regional, national and local levels. The cost of
inaction is pan-European. Without further Union action, the status quo is likely to persist,
increasing the risk of the Union losing strategic industrial capacities and capabilities, of the
Single Market to be further fragmented, and of the Union becoming critically dependent on
EN 8 EN
third countries for green, digital, defence, and economic security objectives. This in turn could
have negative implications on the Union’s economic security, defence, social and territorial
cohesion, primarily through impacts on employment, regional development, and equitable
access to industrial opportunities.
The proposed measures therefore focus on areas where there is clear added value in acting at
Union level due to the scale, speed and scope of the efforts needed. Actions aim at improving
the business case for innovators to bring innovations to the market by facilitating the
valuation, commercialisation and use of IP to obtain financing, and at making it easier to find
first customers through R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement. It
enhances efficiency by enabling better cross-border cooperation, ensures fairer access to
opportunities for innovative companies irrespective of their location, and strengthens the
Union’s capacity to compete globally. The proposed measures also enable to improve the
Union’s competitiveness and strategic autonomy, while respecting the Union’s international
commitments towards its trade partners.
2.3. Proportionality
The proposed Regulation is proportionate to its objective of improving the functioning of the
Single Market for innovation. Each of its components targets a specific objective and is
limited to what is appropriate and necessary to achieve that objective, without going beyond
what is required to address the identified barriers and without imposing disproportionate
burdens on Member States and affected entities in Member States that are excessive compared
to the benefits expected.
Firstly, common rules for R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, will
create significant time and cost savings for public buyers to conduct such procedures,
enabling public buyers to modernise public services faster. and companies to accelerate
business growth across the Single Market. A harmonised framework for joint cross-border
R&D procurement enables public buyers to form the critical mass required to trigger industry
to develop better value for money solutions and to enable companies to grow their business
faster across the Single Market. The made in EU requirements for R&D procurement are
proportionate to the European R&D capacities and designed as to not place significant
financial burdens on administrative budgets. Establishing lead markets is pivotal to increasing
EU competitiveness of across sectors and technologies, thereby strengthening the Union’s
industrial base and ensuring the Union’s strategic autonomy. This combination of measures
on R&D procurement is necessary to provide legal certainty, reinforce the Union’s
competitiveness and ensure effective implementation of the Treaty principles and the Union’s
international public procurement commitments. They are proportionate as they are limited to
what is needed to achieve those objectives, designed not to place additional burden on
Member States and public buyers, build on existing and widely used practices, and allow
flexibility in their practical implementation.
Secondly, entrusting the European Union Intellectual Property Office with the establishment
of a competence centre for IP-backed finance, as well as the development of a Union-wide IP
valuation framework and a digital IP marketplace enables innovators, companies, universities
and financial investors to lower valuation costs and increase the licensing and transfer of
intellectual property rights in the Union. This is pivotal for increasing the commercialisation
of research and innovation results across the Union. Building on the European Union
Intellectual Property Office’s existing mandate, expertise and resources ensures efficient
implementation of these measures. Ensuring that the valuation framework is based on best
practices for different types of IP rights and that the digital IP marketplace is designed to
EN 9 EN
complement existing ones while offering the additional EU added value, ensures that these
measures are proportionate, as they leverage existing structures, thereby reducing additional
burden on Member States, and limit EU intervention to what is necessary to improve
transparency, comparability and access in IP-related transactions.
2.4. Choice of the instrument
Article 114 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union gives the legislator the
possibility to adopt regulations and directives. For the present proposal, a regulation is
considered the most appropriate instrument as it is immediately applicable and makes it
possible to set requirements that apply directly to all the public and private actors targeted by
the proposed measures. This will help ensure that the requirements are implemented in a
timely and harmonised way, leading to greater legal certainty. It will ensure a consistent and
coherent framework across the Union and to prevent divergences between national rules that
hamper the development, testing and scale-up of innovation within the Single Market. A
regulation is necessary to establish uniform framework conditions, reduce legal uncertainty
and ensure a level playing field for innovators and innovative companies operating across
borders. A directive would not be sufficient to reach the envisaged objectives, as it would
require a time for transposition and may give rise to divergent transposition and
implementation across Member States, thereby perpetuating fragmentation in the framework
conditions for innovation.
A regulation is also a needed and appropriate legal instrument to amend Regulation (EU)
2017/1011 to enlarge the mandate of the European Union Intellectual Property Office and to
ensure the effective application of the Union’s exclusive competence in line with Article 207
of TFEU for those measures related to the access of economic operators from third countries
to R&D procurement procedures.
3. RESULTS OF EX-POST EVALUATIONS, STAKEHOLDER
CONSULTATIONS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENTS
3.1. Stakeholder consultations
This proposal is based on extensive stakeholder consultations carried out in line with the
Commission’s Better Regulation principles and minimum standards. The Commission started
consulting stakeholders on the barriers for innovation addressed by the European Innovation
Act already in the context of the EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy. The Call for Evidence on
the EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy was published on 17 February 2025 and closed on 17
March 2025. It gathered input from a broad range of stakeholders, including companies,
business associations, research organisations, public authorities and individual respondents.
The attracted 589 responses from stakeholders across 36 countries. The main barriers
identified by stakeholders included difficulties for innovative companies to access
procurements and underinvestment in innovation procurement in the EU, barriers to the
commercialisation of research and innovation results and to the valuation of intellectual
property, difficulties for innovative companies to access research and technology
infrastructures, lack of experimentation possibilities in legislation across the EU and
insufficient coordination between national and EU innovation policies and programmes. The
EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy that was adopted on 28 May 2025 set out a comprehensive
strategy to combine non-legislative as well as legislative measures to remove the identified
barriers to innovation, the latter to be addressed through the European Innovation Act.
In preparation of this proposal, the Commission then carried out a dedicated Call for
Evidence and Open Public Consultation to collect feedback on specific issues and to identify
possible solutions for the legal barriers that were previously identified in the EU Startup and
EN 10 EN
Scaleup Strategy. This Call for Evidence and Open Public Consultation were published on 8
July 2025 and closed on 3 October 2025. They gathered inputs from a broad range of
stakeholders, including companies, business associations, research organisations, public
authorities and individual respondents. In total, 336 responses were received to the Call for
Evidence, including 193 position papers. The Open Public Consultation received 202
responses, complemented by 54 additional supporting documents.
Responses to the public consultation on the European Innovation Act were well distributed
across stakeholder groups. Companies and businesses accounted for 27% of replies (55
responses), followed by business associations (23%, 47 responses) and academic and research
institutions (16%, 33 responses). Other contributions were received from EU citizens (8%, 17
responses), non-governmental organisations (8%, 17 responses), public authorities (4%, 8
responses), trade unions (2%, 4 responses), non-EU citizens (1%, 3 responses), and other
stakeholders (9%, 18 responses). Among participating companies, micro-enterprises (1-9
employees) represented the largest group (33%, 18 responses), followed by large companies
(29%, 16 responses), small companies (20%, 11 responses) and medium-sized companies
(18%, 10 responses).
The results of the Open Public Consultation and the corresponding synopsis report on the
European Innovation Act were published on 4 December 2025 and are available online.6
In addition, a targeted consultation on the European Innovation Act was carried out between
October and November 2025 to support the assessment of the expected costs and benefits of
the proposed measures. This consultation combined 18 semi-structured interviews with
selected stakeholders from the different sectors above, 55 responses to a targeted online
survey, and three online focus groups held on 24, 26 and 27 November 2025. The focus
groups were primarily aimed at validating the findings of the cost-benefit analysis.
Finally, a targeted consultation on the European Innovation Act was carried out with
representatives responsible for research and innovation policies and programmes in Member
States and Horizon Europe associate countries that participate in the EIC Forum. The EIC
Forum members adopted a joint Position paper and wish list for the European Innovation Act
in November 2025.7
In total, 1210 responses were collected across these different rounds and types of
consultations that helped prepare this proposal for the European Innovation Act. Overall,
stakeholders expressed broad support for EU action to address the identified barriers to
innovation. A large majority of respondents confirmed both the existence of the problems
identified and the relevance of the measures proposed for the European Innovation Act that
are aimed at improving the development, testing and scale-up of innovative solutions across
the Single Market.
3.2. Collection and use of expertise
The preparation of this proposal draws on a broad evidence base, including analytical work,
literature review, stakeholder input and expert advice.
6 Results of the Open Public Consultation and its Synopsis Report, 4 December 2025,
https://ec.europa.eu/info/law/better-regulation/have-your-say/initiatives/14593-European-Innovation-
Act/public-consultation_en 7 Position paper and wishlist for the European Innovation Act, EIC Forum, November 2025,
https://op.europa.eu/en/publication-detail/-/publication/b690e2af-d0bd-11f0-8da2-
01aa75ed71a1/language-en
EN 11 EN
The Commission carried out desk research and reviewed relevant academic literature, policy
reports and data sources to support the analysis of the problems and policy options. This
included, among others, data from Eurostat, the European Innovation Scoreboard, the
Community Innovation Survey, the European benchmarking of national policy frameworks
and investments in innovation procurement and the World Intellectual Property Organization
(WIPO), as well as reports from international organisations such as the OECD and the
European Patent Office (EPO), and peer-reviewed academic literature.
Inputs from the EIC Forum working groups and expert inputs were also used, including the
report8 of group of experts from 33 countries appointed by the Commission that formulated
recommendations for the EU and EIC Forum member countries on how to overcome legal
barriers that hamper wider implementation of innovation procurement, including R&D
procurement, in the Union compared to other leading economies in the world.
An external contractor supported the Commission in carrying out additional desk research,
analysing the results of the open public consultation and targeted consultations, organising
focus groups and stakeholder interviews, and contributing to the cost-benefit assessment of
the proposed measures.
The Commission’s Joint Research Centre (JRC) provided further analytical support, including
the analysis of the Call for Evidence and macroeconomic modelling to assess the potential
impacts of the initiative.
3.3. Impact assessment
In line with the Better Regulation Guidelines, this regulatory proposal is supported by
an impact assessment analysing the need to accelerate the commercialisation and uptake of
innovative solutions and to create an innovation-friendly level playing field for innovative
companies to scale up across the EU Single Market, in a context of growing global
competitiveness challenges. The impact assessment identifies policy options to address the
underlying problem drivers and assesses their likely impacts. It was developed in close
consultation with the Commission’s Inter-Service Steering Group on the European Innovation
Act.
The draft impact assessment was submitted to the Regulatory Scrutiny Board (‘the
Board’) on 23 December 2025. A meeting with the Board took place on 28 January 2026 and
was followed by a negative opinion. Following a substantial revision to address the Board’s
comments, the impact assessment was resubmitted on 20 February 2026. In the second
submission the Board acknowledged significant improvements, in particular regarding the
reduced range of the proposed measures, the clarification of the context and scope of the
initiative, and the overall presentation of the report. However, some substantive comments, in
particular those related to the avoiding overlap with the upcoming revision of the EU Public
Procurement Directives remained difficult to address, as the public consultation on the
revision of these Directives had not completed yet and the planned measures and impact
assessment of the revision of these Directives were not available yet at that time. The Board
therefore maintained a negative opinion on 27 February 2026 and identified three main areas
requiring further improvement in the Impact Assessment report for the European Innovation
Act, namely to:
(1) Ensure better coherence of the European Innovation Act’s public procurement
measures with the upcoming revision of the EU Public Procurement Directives and
8 Independent expert report, ‘Overcoming legal barriers for the uptake of innovation procurement in the
EU’, May 2026, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/4586624
EN 12 EN
further assess the proportionality and subsidiarity of the procurement measures,
particularly regarding mandatory innovation procurement targets and the inclusion of
public procurement below the financial thresholds established under the EU
framework.
(29) Ensure a more complete impact analysis by extending the assessment of the
European Innovation Act measures beyond the estimated population of innovative
companies, as the proposed measures are not legally limited to a specific category of
firms. Also requesting to address the absence of a legal definition of innovative
companies within the European Innovation Act.
(30) Provide a more in-depth assessment of the costs and benefits of some European
Innovation Act measures, with particular emphasis on:
• stronger estimation of the economic costs associated with mandatory
innovation procurement targets and the introduction of an EU preference in
public procurement;
• assessing the risk that too narrow definitions and principles for regulatory
sandboxes could exclude potentially beneficial experimentation opportunities.
Following the Board’s second negative opinion, the Impact Assessment was further
substantially revised to address the identified shortcomings. The above-mentioned points
were fully considered through a strengthened analysis and, where necessary, by adjusting the
scope of the proposal. In particular, the comments of the Board were addressed in the
following way:
• The procurement measures on innovation-friendly procurement procedures and
EU preference were narrowed down to focus exclusively on R&D procurement
carried out by public buyers. The innovation-friendly procurement techniques
applicable to other forms of public procurement more broadly, were removed from
the scope of the European Innovation Act. In addition, an EU financial threshold of
EUR 216 000 (corresponding to the EU financial threshold used in the main public
procurement Directive for sub-central authorities) was introduced, ensuring
compliance with the principles of proportionality and subsidiarity.
• The mandatory target for Member States to increase overall innovation
procurement spending was removed from the scope of the European Innovation
Act.
• Explanation on definitions of innovative companies, startups and scaleups was
added. The Impact Assessment clarifies that, following the adoption of the EU
Recommendation on definitions of innovative companies, innovative startups and
innovative scaleups, the European Innovation Act no longer includes these
definitions as part of the proposal. At the same time, it explains that, in line with the
Better Regulation Guidelines, costs and benefits are estimated on the economically
affected population (in particular innovative enterprises) rather than on all legally
eligible entities. It clarified the difference between legally eligible and economically
affected firms and explains more in depth how the number of affected entities was
estimated.
• Quantitative estimates were added. The Impact Assessment provided additional
cost and benefit analysis so that all measures included both Standard Cost Model and
elasticity-based quantitative estimations of costs and benefits. In particular, it added
the economic risk-related costs of procurement measures, refined the estimations for
EN 13 EN
IP valuation and included dedicated sections explaining more in-depth the
assumptions underlying each estimation.
• The definitions and principles for regulatory sandboxes were removed from the
scope of the European Innovation Act and moved to a proposal for a Council
Recommendation on regulatory sandboxes.
The Board’s opinions as well as the final impact assessment and its executive summary are
published together with this proposal.
The Commission carried out the impact assessment at the level of individual measures, with
up to four variants considered for each measure as alternative policy options. This approach
allowed for the identification of the most appropriate intervention for each specific problem
area.
Finally, the preferred policy option for the European Innovation Act is defined as a composite
package, combining the most effective variants of each of the nine measures assessed. For
each measure, the selected variant is the one that performs best in terms of effectiveness,
efficiency, coherence and proportionality. The preferred option therefore reflects a coherent
combination of the strongest-performing elements across all measures, rather than a single
predefined policy package.
The preferred policy option consists of the following measures.
First measure: the establishment, through the European Union Intellectual Property Office
(EUIPO), of a competence centre for IP-backed finance, as well as the development of a
Union-wide IP valuation framework and a digital marketplace. This measure is expected to
increase IP transfer and licensing activity and the ability of innovators to attract IP-backed
financing. It would entail administrative costs for EUIPO estimated at approximately EUR
712 000 and adjustment costs for EUIPO of around EUR 2.5 million, which will be covered
by EUIPO’s own resources, with no contribution from the Union budget. At the same time,
this measure is expected to generate administrative cost savings for companies of
approximately EUR 35 million. It is also estimated that the measure will generate
additional IP-backed venture capital and debit of EUR 10.2 billion every year for
companies.
Second measure: the introduction of a harmonised procedure for R&D procurement and for
joint cross-border R&D procurement. This measure is expected to generate EUR 1 billion
per year in cost saving for affected public buyers, as well as additional EUR 25.92 bn in
firm profit every year.
Third measure: the establishment of the EU preference for R&D procurement with opt-out
clauses that allow procurement from non-covered suppliers where no suitable alternative from
covered suppliers exists or where there are disproportionate cost differences between covered
and non-covered suppliers9. This measure is expected to contribute to strengthening the
EU’s open strategic autonomy, in particular for critical technologies and strategic
infrastructures, by reducing dependency risks and supporting the development of EU-based
supply chains. The opt-out clauses are also estimated to minimise the negative macro-
economic effects of the EU preference, estimated to be around EUR 464 million.
9 Covered suppliers are here suppliers from EU Member States and third countries that have concluded
international agreements with the Union and in which the Union has commitments to open R&D services
procurements to those third countries.
EN 14 EN
The combination of measures ensures coherence across the innovation lifecycle, addressing
both supply- and demand-side barriers. By jointly improving framework conditions, access to
resources and market opportunities, the preferred option maximises the effectiveness of
individual measures and generates cumulative impacts beyond their standalone effects.
Overall, macroeconomic simulation using the mentioned input costs and benefits estimate
translated into an EU GDP increase of 0.25-0.42% over a ten-year horizon relative to a
baseline scenario without the European Innovation Act, corresponding to up to 507,000 new
jobs created across the EU over this ten-year horizon.
3.4. Regulatory fitness and simplification
The proposal is in line with the Commission’s simplification objectives. By establishing more
harmonised approaches across the Union for carrying out R&D procurement and tasking
European Union Intellectual Property Office to establish a common framework for IP
valuation, an EU wide marketplace for commercialising IP and a competence centre for IP-
backed finance, it reduces duplication of costs, information asymmetries, and search and
transaction costs for innovators.
Where new activities are introduced, the proposal builds on existing frameworks and
processes, thereby limiting additional administrative burden.
For public authorities limited additional adjustment costs (EUR 45 million) are expected due
to the need for increased training to implement R&D procurement techniques and EU
preference. With the EU public sector expected to face adjustment cost (EUR 2.4 million) to
develop the EU IP valuation framework, IP centre, and matchmaking platform. However,
these additional administrative costs are offset by significant net administrative cost savings.
For firms and public buyers no additional administrative costs are expected as the proposed
regulation does not impose additional obligations on them. On the contrary, additional
administrative cost savings are expected for companies:
• EUR 1 billion per year for public buyers that aim to conduct R&D procurements, due
to a harmonised framework for R&D procurement, including for joint cross-border
R&D procurements;
• EUR 35 million per year for IP-rich firms, due to more harmonised approaches to IP
valuation and easier IP licensing and transfer via the IP marketplace;
Overall, the preferred policy option is therefore expected to generate yearly net annual
cost savings (administrative and adjustment costs combined) of approximately EUR 1.1
billion from the first year onwards, compared to the baseline, across both public and private
stakeholders. Net savings are expected to increase further in subsequent years, as one-off
adjustment costs are phased out and only recurring administrative costs remain.
4. FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS
The proposed Regulation is based on a non-discriminatory approach and promotes
transparency and equal treatment. It is not expected to significantly impact the fundamental
rights protected under the Union Treaties and the Charter on Fundamental Rights.
5. BUDGETARY IMPLICATIONS
The estimated impact on expenditure and staffing for 2028 and beyond is added for
illustrative purposes only and does not pre-judge the next Multiannual Financial Framework.
EN 15 EN
The source of financing and scope of Union financial commitment in the post-2027 period
remain subject to the outcome of interinstitutional negotiations on the MFF 2028-2034 and
thereafter shall be determined through the annual budgetary procedure. All appropriations and
staffing allocations as of 2028 are indicative. The proposal has budgetary implications for the
Commission. Specifically, it will require approximately 3 full-time equivalents per year to
implement. The budget implications are mainly to carry out the work foreseen to support and
monitor the implementation of the Regulation, including to prepare delegated and
implementing acts foreseen in the Regulation. The budget implications required for human
resources and other expenditure of an administrative nature will be met by appropriations
from the DG that are already assigned to management of the action and/or have been
redeployed within the DG, together, if necessary, with any additional allocation which may be
granted to the managing DG under the annual allocation procedure and in the light of
budgetary constraints.
6. OTHER ELEMENTS
• Implementation plans and monitoring, evaluation and reporting arrangements
Not Applicable
• Detailed explanation of the specific provisions of the proposal
The proposal consists of three Chapters. It is structured as follows:
Chapter I contains the general provisions setting out the subject matter and the scope of the
proposed Regulation, as well as lays down the definitions applicable to the proposed
Regulation. It clarifies that Chapter I of the Regulation only applies to R&D services
procurements that fall outside of the scope of Directive (EU) 2014/23, Directive (EU)
2014/24 and Directive (EU) 2014/25 and it clarifies that Chapter III of the Regulation only
applies to the European Union Intellectual Property Office.
Chapter II sets out common rules for implementing R&D procurement procedures, including
joint R&D procurement.
Chapter III sets out tasks entrusted by this Regulation to the European Union Intellectual
Property Office to establish a common framework for intellectual property (IP) valuation, an
EU wide marketplace for commercialising IP and a competence centre for helping innovators
access IP-backed finance.
EN 16 EN
2026/0264 (COD)
Proposal for a
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a framework of measures for strengthening the Union innovation ecosystem
and amending Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 (European Innovation Act)
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, and in particular
Article 114 thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the European Commission,
After transmission of the draft legislative act to the national parliaments,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee(1),
Having regard to the opinion of the Committee of the Regions(2),
Acting in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure,
Whereas:
(1) Important barriers remain, hindering access of innovations to the market and scaling of
innovative enterprises in the Union. Innovators face lack of opportunities to bring
innovative ideas to the Union-wide public procurement market due to the lack of a
common legal framework for procurement of research and development services
(‘R&D procurement’) and an underdeveloped internal market for intellectual property
(IP) backed finance. National measures aimed at tackling such complex barriers that
transcend national borders are fragmented and risk undermining the functioning of the
internal market. This fragmentation creates obstacles to cross-border trade within the
Union and distortions in the internal market. It is therefore necessary to establish
harmonised measures to ensure the proper functioning of the internal market.
(2) The European Court of Auditors10 has called on the Commission to address the low
level of competition for public procurement in the Union. With the increasing
digitalisation of the Union economy and the growing demand from public buyers
across the Union for innovative solutions made in the Union, there is an increased
cross-border interest from economic operators to participate in R&D procurement
carried out by public buyers from other Member States. While Directives
(1) OJ C [...], [...], p. [...] (2) OJ C [...], [...], p. [...] 10 Special Report 28/2023: Public procurement in the EU, European Court of Auditors, December 2023,
https://www.eca.europa.eu/ECAPublications/SR-2023-28/SR-2023-28_EN.pdf
EN 17 EN
2014/23/EU11, 2014/24/EU12, and 2014/25/EU13 of the European Parliament and of the
Council harmonise procedures for public procurements falling within their scope,
procedures for procurements falling outside their scope are currently primarily
governed by fragmented national rules or are exempt from national public
procurement rules and are only subject to the fundamental principles under the
Treaties as interpreted by the Court of Justice of the European Union. This concerns
the majority of R&D procurements, in particular those that fall outside the scope of
those Directives because the benefits resulting from the R&D services procured do not
accrue exclusively to the public buyer for its use in the conduct of its own affairs, as is
the case in pre-commercial procurement, or because the R&D services procured are
not wholly remunerated by the public buyer14. However, the application of those
principles alone does not provide sufficient legal clarity to public buyers, address
cross-border fragmentation in the implementation of R&D procurement or address
structural barriers for public buyers to engage in joint cross-border R&D procurement.
For that reason, for R&D procurements above a certain value, common rules should be
adopted to ensure that those principles are given practical effect to ensure the proper
functioning of the internal market.
(3) For R&D procurement procedures to which Article 25 of Directive 2014/23/EU,
Article 14 of Directive 2014/24/EU and Article 32 of Directive 2014/25/EU do not
apply, public buyers should be required to apply the provisions of this Regulation.
However, the particular characteristics of defence procurement makes the procurement
of R&D in that field especially sensitive, often requiring a high level of confidentiality
and greater flexibility for Member States. Public buyers should therefore not be
required to apply the provisions of this Regulation to R&D procurement falling under
exemptions for R&D procurements laid down in Directive 2009/81/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council15.
(4) The digitalisation of R&D procurement procedures is essential for the proper
functioning of the internal market, as it can significantly reduce administrative
burdens, increase efficiency, and enhance transparency. Therefore, all R&D
procurement procedures falling within the scope of this Regulation should be
conducted where possible through the European Business Wallets or by alternative
electronic means that that are interoperable with the European Business Wallets.
11 Directive 2014/23/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on the award
of concession contracts (OJ L 94, 28.3.2014, pp. 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/23/oj). 12 Directive 2014/24/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on public
procurement and repealing Directive 2004/18/EC (OJ L 94, 28.3.2014, pp. 65, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/24/oj). 13 Directive 2014/25/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on
procurement by entities operating in the water, energy, transport and postal services sectors and
repealing Directive 2004/17/EC (OJ L 94, 28.3.2014, pp. 243, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/25/oj). 14 By virtue of Article 25 of Directive 2014/23/EU, Article 14 of Directive 2014/24/EU and Article 32 of
Directive 2014/25/EU, those Directives only apply to R&D services procurements when the benefits
accrue exclusively to the public buyer for its use in the conduct of its own affairs, and the service
provided is wholly remunerated by the public buyer, 15 Directive 2009/81/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 July 2009 on the
coordination of procedures for the award of certain works contracts, supply contracts and service
contracts by contracting authorities or entities in the fields of defence and security, and amending
Directives 2004/17/EC and 2004/18/EC (Text with EEA relevance) (OJ L 216, 20.8.2009, pp. 76–136,,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2009/81/oj).
EN 18 EN
(5) To enhance access to business opportunities in R&D procurement and increase
competition for the award of R&D procurement contracts, the participation of groups
of economic operators should be further facilitated. This is of particular importance for
SMEs, innovative startups and innovative scaleup, which often face difficulties in
accessing larger R&D procurement opportunities. Therefore, the rules governing the
participation of groups of economic operators and the use of combined capacities
should be clarified and simplified, while ensuring that only requirements necessary for
the proper performance of the R&D procurement contract are imposed.
(6) Subcontracting parts of an R&D procurement contract remains a practical and
powerful tool of collaboration between economic operators. The rules for
subcontracting in this Regulation should preserve contractual freedom and facilitate
access for SMEs, innovative startups and innovative scaleup, enabling them to
participate effectively in R&D procurement and related supply chains. Subcontracting
the entirety of a R&D procurement contract should however not be allowed under this
Regulation, in particular in order to avoid that subcontracting is misused especially in
sectors which may be more vulnerable to labour exploitation owing to cost pressures
and complex subcontracting chains. Where a specific input, component or service that
is essential for the conduct of the R&D in the public interest is available only from an
economic operator established in country that does not have access to the R&D
procurement, the public buyer should be able to permit the use of that input,
component or service, including by way of subcontracting.
(7) Without consulting the market, public buyers risk launching R&D procurement
procedures on the basis of tender specifications that are insufficiently adapted to the
actual capabilities of market operators, that favour established solutions, or that do not
provide sufficient scope for innovative solutions. Common rules should therefore be
established to ensure that preliminary market consultations are conducted in a
transparent and publicly accessible manner in preparation for such procedures.
(8) Negotiations, with the possibility for negotiation in stages, can enable public buyers to
improve the quality, efficiency and overall value of the procured R&D services and
their intended results, especially where the subject matter requires adaptation of
procurement documents to operational and innovation needs or the balancing of other
strategic considerations. Such optional flexibility should be provided to public buyers
allowing them to decide to leave certain elements of the procurement documents open
for negotiation, including the payment schedule or the dispute resolution mechanism,
thereby lifting one of the major burdens for SME participation in public procurement.
(9) In accordance with the international and EU legal framework for public procurement,
R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, may include limited
production and supply of prototypes or first products, services or works in order to
incorporate the results of field testing and to demonstrate that the product, service or
work is suitable for production or supply in quantity to acceptable quality standards,
and public buyers may obtain ownership of this limited set of prototypes or first
products, services or works that were developed at the public buyer’s request in the
course of and for that particular R&D services procurement contract. During an R&D
services procurement, public buyers cannot obtain ownership of prototypes of first
products, services or works that were not developed at their own request or that were
developed for other contracts. To ensure transparency to economic operators, common
rules shall ensure that public buyers specify in the procurement documents of an R&D
procurement whether they include the possibility to obtain the ownership of this
limited set of developed prototypes or first products, services or works.
EN 19 EN
(10) For certain products, services or works that need to be procured after an R&D
procurement for safeguarding security or public safety interests of the Union or its
Member States, including to avoid shortages of supply for critical technologies, public
buyers should be able to ensure when they start an R&D procurement that they will be
able to purchase, via a separate procurement procedure, the necessary amounts of
products, services or works resulting from the R&D procurement. Therefore, common
provisions should enable public buyers to include in the R&D procurement contracts
provisions providing them with a priority right to purchase a predefined volume or
value of such products, services or works, before these are offered to other potential
buyers. Including a priority right to purchase in R&D procurement contracts does not
give public buyers the right to favour contractors that participated in the R&D
procurement in later purchases of those products, services or works. Any such
purchases need to be conducted in accordance with applicable Union public
procurement rules.
(11) As clarified by the case law of the Court of Justice, the rights derived from Union
public procurement law do not extend to economic operators having their origin in
third countries with which the Union has not concluded trade agreements opening its
public procurement market. To ensure the effective application of this case law and
reinforce the Union’s strategic autonomy, common provisions should be adopted that
open the access to R&D procurements, generally, only to economic operators having
their origin in third countries with which the Union has concluded trade agreements
opening is R&D procurement market. Where this would result in a lack of tenders or
disproportionate costs, public buyers should be allowed to open R&D procurement
also to economic operators having their origin in third countries with which the Union
has concluded international agreements that open its public procurement market
without commitments for opening its R&D procurement market. Where candidate
countries have concluded an agreement with the Union providing for access to public
procurement, economic operators originating from those countries should be regarded
as economic operators falling under Article 11, paragraph 4 of this Regulation, in
accordance with the terms and conditions set out in the relevant agreement. This
approach reflects the perspective of enlargement and the gradual integration of
candidate countries into the Union's internal market, and is intended to support closer
economic integration, encourage regulatory alignment, and strengthen the application
of the Union's rules and standards in its immediate neighbourhood. Where justified by
security and public safety interests of the Union or its Member States, public buyers
should be able to further restrict access to R&D procurements only to economic
operators that have their origin in Member States and that are not subject to control of
a third country. Where an R&D procurement procedure is supported by the Union
under Union programmes and instruments, including pilot projects or preparatory
actions, it should be clarified that public buyers must ensure compliance with
conditions attached to the Union support also in cases where these conditions
complement or derogate from rules established under this Regulation
(12) Clear and uniform rules on the determination of origin are necessary to ensure the
effective and consistent application of international coverage and the access to R&D
procurement provisions across all R&D procurement procedures. This Regulation
should therefore establish rules of origin for the application of the rules on access to
R&D procurement procedures set out herein.
(13) Economic operators should be excluded from participation in R&D procurement
procedures where they have been convicted by final judgment for serious offences
EN 20 EN
defined in Union legislation. Self-cleaning measures should not be permitted for
mandatory exclusion grounds, while for optional exclusion grounds, which are related
to the reliability of the economic operators, those operators should be able to
demonstrate their reliability by means of self-cleaning measures. In that context, due
account should be taken of any cooperation with the investigating authorities aimed at
clarifying the relevant facts and circumstances. Member States should not add other
grounds for exclusion based on criteria relating to the professional situation of the
tenderer: however, this should not prevent Member States from adding other
legitimate grounds for exclusion, such as those aiming at preventing or addressing
threats to national security.
(14) To ensure equal opportunities for all economic operators across the Union, it is
necessary to lay down common rules which provide that public buyers do not use
exclusion grounds, selection criteria and financial guarantee requirements in R&D
procurement procedures that are disproportionate to the scope and nature of the R&D
procurement contract. Where the use of mandatory exclusion grounds is required, the
use of selection criteria and financial guarantee requirements should remain optional
and should not be used where not needed to ensure good outcomes for the R&D
procurement. Public buyers should not require prior experience in R&D procurement
contracts as such, unless this is strictly justified by the nature of the R&D services
concerned, and should also avoid excessive administrative and financial requirements
which can unnecessarily exclude innovative enterprises from R&D procurement
opportunities. Where minimum financial capacity requirements are needed, innovative
startups or scaleups that do not have a track record of turnover or financial statements
but that are technically and financially viable as they possess other financial resources
such as venture capital investments or valuable intellectual property assets should not
be disqualified. Where financial guarantees are needed, they should be lowered for
innovative startups, scaleups and SMEs, and public buyers should timely reduce or
release financial guarantees once they are no longer justified.
(15) To ensure that innovation contributes to improving the quality of public services and
reinforcing strategic autonomy, in R&D procurement, public buyers should apply
award criteria and contract performance monitoring criteria based on the quality and
innovation impact of the tender rather than on price alone. Common rules should
therefore be established on how such criteria should be formulated in order to take
into account the added value of the tender for the internal market. R&D procurement
contracts should be awarded on the basis of the best price-quality ratio method. This
Regulation should therefore provide for a minimum weighting of 50% for quality
criteria and a minimum weighting of 15% for innovation-related award criteria in the
award phase.
(16) Excessively detailed requirements often contribute to unnecessarily reducing the
participation of economic operators and can hamper innovation. To facilitate
competitive R&D procurement markets, the characteristics of the R&D services that
are subject of the R&D procurement should, as a general rule be drafted by giving
preference to functional requirements and where needed performance requirements
instead of by designing prescriptive requirements. This could include specifying which
functionalities the testing shall have at minimum, such as either, neither or both load
testing and stress testing. It could also include which performance the intended results
of the testing shall have, for example what shall be the required accuracy level of the
test data to be produced by the testing.
EN 21 EN
(17) Allowing contractors to retain the ownership of their IP, attracts more and better-
quality offers to R&D procurements and saves public buyers IP registration,
maintenance and litigation costs. It also enables contractors to commercialise their
R&D results and sell developed products and services to the market through
economies of scale. Public buyers should be able to maintain their freedom to operate
and prevent supplier lock-in by obtaining appropriate rights to use the R&D results for
themselves and for their other contractors. Where contractors fail to commercialise
R&D results or abuse R&D results contrary to the public interest, public buyers should
be able to resort to licensing or transfer of R&D results of contractors, however this
should only be done in compliance with applicable national and Union law and other
international obligations on IP in order not to unduly deprive contractors from their IP
rights. Common rules should therefore be established to encourage that in R&D
procurement the risks and benefits related to the results and the IP rights are shared
between public buyers and contractors under market conditions. R&D procurements
that are not pre-commercial procurements should be able to derogate from risk-benefit
sharing under market conditions enabling public buyers to procure the ownership of IP
rights generated by contractors, in duly justified cases of overriding public interests.
(18) It is necessary to clarify certain aspects related to contract performance that have a
close link with the R&D procurement procedure itself, including payments,
termination of contracts, and contract modifications. Timely payments, appropriate use
of advance payments are important to minimise negatively affecting liquidity and
complicating the financial management of economic operators. Obligations to
terminate ongoing contracts should be defined to prevent infringements of Treaty
obligations or exclusion grounds. In addition to continuing to allow public buyers to
modify R&D procurement contracts for situations that were provided for from the
outset, it should be clarified how R&D procurement contracts can be modified in
unforeseen conditions. Those provisions should allow for better application in
situations justifying a modification without launching a new R&D procurement
procedure. The value of the modifications compared to the original R&D procurement
contract should however be considered only as threshold for ex ante publication and
potential review to combat potential misuse.
(19) It is necessary to provide legal certainty on how public buyers can correctly conduct
value engineering in R&D procurement, as this generates significant cost savings and
quality improvements for public buyers16by allowing the flexibility to modify R&D
procurement contracts in order to incorporate innovations emerging during the
performance of the contract. Common rules should therefore be established to foster
the use of value engineering in R&D procurement, particularly in large value R&D
procurement contracts where the potential impact on cost or quality improvements is
most significant.
(20) Multiple sourcing in R&D procurement facilitates market entry for new entrants and
enables public buyers to reduce the costs of the R&D and its intended results by
introducing competition in development (‘Competitive development’). It also helps
public buyers to retain a competitive supply chain after the R&D procurement and
reduce overdependencies on individual economic operators. Common rules for
multiple sourcing in R&D procurement should be therefore established. As regards
R&D procurements that are not pre-commercial procurements, public buyers should
16 Independent expert report, ‘Overcoming legal barriers for the uptake of innovation procurement in the
EU’, May 2026, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/4586624
EN 22 EN
be able to derogate from using multiple sourcing, in duly justified cases of overriding
public interests.
(21) Organising competitive development in phases also enables public buyers to reduce
the number of contractors after each R&D phase, which reduces the R&D and
investment risks for public buyers. A phased approach also enables contractors to
grow their business along the growing tasks and contract sizes of successive R&D
phases, which further eases market entry for smaller enterprises and new entrants. A
phased approach can also help to improve support for industrial research and
experimental development, in order to close the persistent gap between scientific
excellence and industrial deployment in the Union. Common rules for competitive
development in phases in R&D procurement should be therefore established. As
regards R&D procurements that are not pre-commercial procurements, public buyers
should be able to derogate from using competitive development in phases, in duly
justified cases of overriding public interests.
(22) Insufficient protection of confidential information and personal data in R&D
procurement can damage the contractor’s business growth, the safety of public
services and fundamental rights of third parties that participate in R&D activities.
Therefor, neither public buyers nor contractors should disclose confidential
information provided to them in the context of a R&D procurement. To ensure a
consistent and high level of protection of natural persons, public buyers may also
restrict the localisation of and access to the personal data that is processed in R&D
procurements to the Union, in accordance with limitations on the transfer of personal
data outside the Union set out in Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European
Parliament and of the Council 17 and Directive 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament
and of the Council 18.
(23) Security and public safety considerations may arise in a wide range of R&D
procurement procedures, including outside defence and sensitive security sectors.
Common rules should be established for public buyers on assessing and addressing
such risks in the design and conduct of R&D procurement procedures and in contract
performance.
(24) There is an increased interest from public buyers in different Member States to
cooperate in organising their R&D procurement procedures. Common rules for joint
procurement should therefore be established to overcome the hurdles that public
buyers face today due to fragmented national rules to organise R&D procurement
collaboratively, whether through central purchasing bodies or through joint
procurement, including across borders. There is also an increased interest of public
buyers in Member States to collaborate with Union entities on R&D procurement. As
many of the new provisions in this Regulation are also useful for Union entities but
Union entities are not subject to this Regulation, future revisions of the EU Financial
Regulation will aim to improve the provisions enabling Union institutions, bodies or
17 Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the
protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of
such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC (General Data Protection Regulation), OJ L 119, 4.5.2016,
pp. 1–88, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2016/679/oj/eng. 18 Directive 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 July 2002 concerning the
processing of personal data and the protection of privacy in the electronic communications sector
(Directive on privacy and electronic communications) (OJ L 201, 31.7.2002, p. 37, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2002/58/oj)..
EN 23 EN
agencies to carry out R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement, for
themselves, jointly with or on behalf of other Union entities and jointly with or on
behalf of public buyers in Member States.
(25) Economic operators face difficulties in leveraging IP assets to obtain growth financing
due to the lack of consistent and reliable approaches to the valuation of intangible
assets, of structured secondary markets for intangible assets and of skills on IP backed
finance. A Competence Centre to support IP-backed finance and commercialisation of
IP should therefore be established within the European Union Intellectual Property
Office (‘the Office’) to develop a voluntary Union framework for the valuation and
disclosure of IP rights, to set up and maintain a Union-wide, multi-lingual, digital
match-making platform19 that facilitates transparent and efficient IP transactions
between investors and IP holders, and to support the financial community in designing
and implementing financial instruments that are tailored to IP assets through advisory
support, helpdesk services and skills development programmes. Access to the services
provided by the Competence Centre should be voluntary. The Competence Centre
should, where possible, make use of European Business Wallets and enable economic
operators to interact fully digitally, securely and efficiently by means of European
Business Wallets, or by alternative electronic means that meet the requirements of this
Regulation and that shall be interoperable with the European Business Wallets,
thereby enabling fully digital procedures.
(26) The Office should be able to levy charges for specific services provided through the
Competence Centre for the individual benefit of users, in accordance with Article 178
of Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 of the European Parliament and of the Council20. Such
charges should be transparent, non-discriminatory and limited to the cost of the service
provided. Certain services, including access to the voluntary valuation framework,
basic access to the digital match-making platform and the Union-level helpdesk,
should remain free of charge.
(27) The effective use of the voluntary Union valuation framework requires assessments by
qualified, independent and trustworthy professionals. The Office should therefore
establish and administer a Union certification scheme for valuators of intellectual
property assets.
(28) The lack of accessible, consistent information across the Union on transactions in
which IP rights are used as collateral hinders evidence-based policymaking and the
development of new financial solutions. To that end, the Office should, through the
Competence Centre, cooperate with Member States and relevant public and private
stakeholders to collect and analyse Union-wide data on IP-collateralised transactions,
while ensuring appropriate safeguards for trade secrets and personal data.
(29) The tasks conferred on the Office by this Regulation should be reflected in a separate
section of its multiannual strategic programme and annual work programme, setting
out the relevant objectives, activities, expected results, performance indicators and
19 IT development and procurement strategy choices will be subject to pre-approval by the European
Commission Information Technology and Cybersecurity Board. 20 Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 June 2017 on the
European Union trade mark (OJ L 154, 16.6.2017, pp. 1,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2017/1001/oj).
EN 24 EN
estimated resources. The annual activity report should contain a corresponding
assessment of implementation, resources used and revenue from charges.
(30) Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 establishes the Office and lays down its tasks. That
Regulation should therefore be amended to reflect the new tasks entrusted to the
Office.
(31) In order to take account of technological development and maintain an efficient
framework of measures for strengthening the innovation ecosystem at Union level, the
power to adopt acts in accordance with Article 290 of the Treaty on the Functioning of
the European Union should be delegated to the Commission in respect of:
supplementing this Regulation by excluding tenders having their origin in a third-
country that failed to provide national treatment related to Union economic operators
in R&D procurement contrary to its commitments on public procurement in an
international agreement with the Union; amending the list of cases in which public
buyers can decide not to apply risk-benefit sharing, not to apply multiple sourcing or
not to apply competitive development in phases supplement this Regulation by
establishing mandatory technical specifications, selection criteria, award criteria or
contract performance clauses to address an identified specific security and public
safety interest of the Union for specific categories of R&D procurement services or
their intended results.. It is of particular importance that the Commission carries out
appropriate consultations during its preparatory work, including at expert level, and
that those consultations be conducted in accordance with the principles laid down in
the Inter-institutional Agreement on Better Law-Making of 13 April 201621. In
particular, to ensure equal participation in the preparation of delegated acts, the
European Parliament and the Council should receive all documents at the same time as
Member States’ experts, and their experts should systematically have access to
meetings of Commission expert groups dealing with the preparation of delegated acts.
(32) In order to ensure uniform conditions for the implementation of this Regulation,
implementing powers should be conferred on the Commission for the adoption of
technical specifications for the uniform application of the voluntary Union framework
for the valuation and disclosure of IP rights; common technical standards,
interoperability requirements and operational specifications of a digital match-making
platform; and detailed conditions for the implementation of the certification scheme of
intellectual property valuators. Those powers should be exercised in accordance with
Regulation (EU) No 182/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council.
(33) Where the power to adopt acts in accordance with Article 290 of the
Treaty is delegated to the Commission under this Regulation, it is of particular
importance that the Commission carries out appropriate consultations during its
preparatory work, including at expert level, and that those consultations be conducted
in accordance with the principles laid down in the Inter-institutional Agreement on
Better Law-Making of 13 April 2016. In particular, to ensure equal participation in the
preparation of delegated acts, the European Parliament and the Council should receive
all documents at the same time as Member States’ experts, and their experts should
systematically have access to meetings of Commission expert groups dealing with the
preparation of delegated acts.
(34) Since the objectives of this Regulation cannot be sufficiently achieved by the Member
States but can rather, by reason of its scale and effects, be better achieved at Union
21 OJ L 123, 12.5.2016, p. 1, http://data.europa.eu/eli/agree_interinstit/2016/512/oj.
EN 25 EN
level, the Union may adopt measures in accordance with the principle of
proportionality, as set out in Article 5 of the Treaty on European Union. Furthermore,
in accordance with the principle of proportionality, as set out in that Article, this
Regulation does not go beyond what is necessary in order to achieve those objectives.
(35) This Regulation should not affect the application of State aid and competition rules, in
particular Articles 101, 102 and 107 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European
Union. The measures provided for in this Regulation should not be used to restrict or
distort competition in a manner contrary to the Treaty on the Functioning of the
European Union.
HAVE ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Chapter 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 1
Subject matter
This Regulation lays down common rules for carrying out procurement of research and
development services (‘R&D procurement’) including a Union harmonised framework for
joint R&D procurement.
This Regulation also establishes a Competence Centre at the European Union Intellectual
Property Office and lays down the tasks of the European Union Intellectual Property Office in
relation to intellectual property-backed finance and commercialisation of intellectual property.
Article 2
Scope
1. Subject to paragraph 3, Chapter 2 of this Regulation applies to procurement of
research and development services by public buyers with a value net of value added
tax (VAT) estimated to be equal to or greater than the amount set out in Article 4(c)
of Directive 2014/24/EU.
2. By way of derogation from paragraph 1, and subject to paragraph 3, Chapter 2 of this
Regulation applies to procurement of research and development services by public
buyers, who are innovation agencies, with a value net of value added tax (VAT)
estimated to be equal to or greater than the amount set out in Article 15(a) of
Directive 2014/25/EU, provided that:
(a) the innovation agency acts on its own mandate and not merely on behalf of
another public buyer;
(b) the procurement of research and development services respects the principles
of transparency, non-discrimination and equal treatment.
3. Chapter 2 of this Regulation does not apply to:
(a) public procurement that falls within the scope of Directives 2014/23/EU,
2014/24/EU and 2014/25/EU;
(b) public procurement that falls within the scope of Directive 2009/81/EC;
(c) public procurement that is excluded from Directive 2009/81/EC by virtue of the
provisions of that Directive.
EN 26 EN
4. Chapter 3 applies to the European Union Intellectual Property Office.
Article 3
Definitions
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
(1) ‘procurement of research and development services (‘R&D procurement’)
means the procurement of fundamental research, industrial research and
experimental development up to original development, where
(a) original development of a first product, service or work may include limited
production or supply in order to incorporate the results of field testing and to
demonstrate that the product, service or work concerned is suitable for
production or supply in quantity to acceptable quality standards, but shall not
include quantity production or supply to establish commercial viability or to
recover research and development costs.
(b) procurement of research and development services may include obtaining the
ownership of prototypes or first products, services or works that are developed
at the public buyer’s request in the course of and for a particular R&D
procurement contract, but shall not include the commercial deployment of end-
products, services or works;
(2) ‘pre-commercial procurement means the procurement of research and
development services that involves risk-benefit sharing under market conditions, and
competitive development in phases.
(3) ‘public buyer’ means a contracting authority as defined in Article 6(1) of Directive
2014/23/EU, in Article 2(1), point (1), of Directive 2014/24/EU, in Article 3(1) of
Directive 2014/25/EU, or a contracting entity as defined in Article 7(1) of Directive
2014/23/EU and within the meaning of Article 4(1)of Directive (EU) 2014/25;
(4) ‘innovation agency’ means a specialised agency whose principal statutory task is the
financing or procurement of research and development;
(5) ‘R&D procurement contract’ means a contract concluded in writing between one
or more economic operators and one or more public buyers and having as its subject-
matter the provision of research and development services falling within the scope of
this Regulation;
(6) ‘tenderer’ means an economic operator that has submitted a tender;
(7) ‘contractor’ means an economic operator that has been awarded an R&D
procurement contract;
(8) ‘CPV codes for research and development services’ means the codes under
Division 73 of the Common Procurement Vocabulary laid down by Commission
Regulation (EC) No 213/200822.
22 Commission Regulation (EU) 213/2008 of 28 November 2007 amending Regulation (EC) No
2195/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council on the Common Procurement Vocabulary (CPV) and
Directives 2004/17/EC and 2004/18/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on public procurement
procedures, as regards the revision of the CPV (O L 74, 15.3.2008, pp. 1,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2008/213/oj).
EN 27 EN
(9) ‘economic operator’ means any natural or legal person, or public entity or group of
such persons and/or entities, including any temporary association of undertakings,
which offers the execution of works and/or a work, the supply of products or the
provision of services on the market;
(10) ‘procurement document’ means any document produced or referred to by the
public buyer to describe or determine elements of the procurement or the procedure,
including the contract notice, the prior information notice where it is used as a means
of calling for competition, the technical specifications, the descriptive document,
proposed conditions of contract, formats for the presentation of documents by
tenderers, information on generally applicable obligations and any additional
documents;;
(11) ‘multiple sourcing’ means an R&D procurement whereby one or more public
buyers award multiple R&D procurement contracts in parallel to multiple economic
operators and entrust them with the execution of identical or quasi-identical R&D
services to be performed in parallel;
(12) ‘minor informality or irregularity of a tender’ means an objectively identifiable
defect in a tender that is purely formal in nature and does not concern an essential
element of the tender, the correction or clarification of which does not result in a
modification of the tender, does not amount to the submission of a new tender, and
does not distort competition or infringe the principles of equal treatment and
transparency;
(13) ‘innovation’ means the implementation of a new or significantly improved product,
service, work or process, marketing method, or organisational method in business
practices, workplace organisation or external relations;
(14) ‘SME’ means a micro, small or medium-sized enterprise as defined in the Annex to
Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC23;
(15) ‘innovative startup’ means, for the purposes of this Act and without making such
definition binding for other purposes, an enterprise that fulfils the criteria of an
innovative startup set out in point 3 of the Annex to Commission Recommendation
(EU) 2026/72024;
(16) ‘innovative scaleup’ means, for the purposes of this Act and without making such
definition binding for other purposes, an enterprise that fulfils the criteria of an
innovative scaleup set out in point 4 of the Annex to Commission Recommendation
(EU) 2026/720;
(17) ‘innovative enterprise’ means, for the purposes of this Act and without making such
definition binding for other purposes, an enterprise that fulfils the criteria of an
innovative enterprise set out in point 2.1 of the Annex to Commission
Recommendation (EU) 2026/720;
(18) ‘emergency situation’ means a sudden, unexpected, and severe disruption to
economic operations, involving shortages of critical products, works or services,
23 Commission Recommendation of 6 May 2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium-
sized enterprises (OJ L 124, 20.5.2003, p. 36, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2003/361/oj). 24 Commission Recommendation (EU) 2026/720 of 18 March 2026 on the definition of innovative
enterprises, innovative startups and innovative scaleups, (OJ L, 2026/720, 24.03.2026, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2026/720/oj).
EN 28 EN
extreme price volatility, or supply chain breakdowns that necessitates immediate
action to prevent further harm to the economy, businesses, or consumers in the
Union;
(19) ‘functional requirement’ means a requirement that describes the functions to be
performed, without prescribing the specific technical means, design, solution or
methods by which those functions are to be achieved;
(20) ‘performance requirement’ means a requirement that defines the performance or
outcomes to be achieved, including criteria for verifying compliance, without
prescribing the specific technical means, design, solution or methods by which those
outcomes are to be achieved;
(21) ‘design requirement’ means a requirement that defines in detail technical
characteristics that prescribe how the products, services or works that are developed
at the public buyer’s request in the course of and for a particular R&D procurement
contract shall be designed, including materials, dimensions, and solutions, methods
or processes that are to be used;
(22) ‘results’ means any tangible or intangible outcomes of research, development and
innovation activities, such as data, knowledge or knowhow, whatever its form or
nature, whether or not it can be protected, as well as any rights attached to such
outcomes, including intellectual property rights, that are generated, in whole or in
part, through activities performed under the R&D procurement contract;
(23) ‘value engineering’ means a technique used by public buyers to require or allow
contractors to innovate during the performance of R&D procurement contract to
create additional value for the public buyer that improves the performance, quality,
cost or characteristics of the awarded research and development services and any
prototypes, first products, services or works that are developed in the course of and
for a particular R&D procurement contract, and to share any agreed resulting savings
between the public buyer and the contractor;
(24) ‘value engineering change proposal’ means a proposal submitted by contractors
during the performance of the R&D procurement contract to improve the awarded
research and development services and any prototypes, first goods, services or works
that are developed in the course of and for a particular R&D procurement contract or
to replace those research and development services or prototypes, first goods,
services or works by others that incorporate technological advances or innovations,
and which may involve replacing or adding a new consortium partner or
subcontractor;
(25) ‘value engineering clause’ means a contract clause in an R&D procurement contract
that defines the rights and oblig30ations of the buyer, contractors and subcontractors
regarding how value engineering shall be applied under that contract;
(26) ‘critical technologies’ means the technologies in the critical technology areas listed
in the Annex to Commission Recommendation (EU) 2023/211325;
(27) ‘critical raw material’ means a raw material listed in Annex II to Regulation (EU)
2024/1252 of the European Parliament and of the Council26;
25 Commission Recommendation (EU) 2023/2113 of 3 October 2023 on critical technology areas for the
EU’s economic security for further risk assessment with Member States (OJ L, 2023/2113, 11.10.2023,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2023/2113/oj)
EN 29 EN
(28) ‘public and private entities in the fields of finance and insurance’ means public
authorities, public sector bodies, public undertakings and other natural or legal
persons active in the provision, financing, regulation, supervision or intermediation
of financial services, as defined in of Article 2, point (120 of Directive 2011/83/EU
of the European Parliament and of the Council27.
Chapter 2
PROCUREMENT OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
SERVICES
SECTION 1
R&D PROCUREMENT PROCEDURE AND CONTRACT PERFORMANCE
Article 4
General principles
1. Public buyers shall carry out R&D procurement in accordance with the rules laid
down in this Regulation. Public buyers and economic operators shall not circumvent
or attempt to circumvent the obligations laid down in this Regulation.
2. Public buyers shall treat economic operators equally and without discrimination and
shall act in a transparent and proportionate manner. The R&D procurement shall not
be designed with the intention of excluding it from the scope of this Regulation or of
artificially narrowing competition. Competition shall be considered to be artificially
narrowed where the design of the R&D procurement is made with the intention of
unduly favouring or disadvantaging certain economic operators.
3. Public buyers may draw up the procurement documents and carry out R&D
procurement, including the market consultation, tendering and contract performance
activities, in any of the official languages of the Union and they may allow economic
operators to submit market consultation feedback, tenders, deliverables and any other
communication exchanges throughout the procurement in any of the official
languages of the Union.
4. Public buyers shall by electronic means ensure that economic operators that have
access to the procurement procedure have unrestricted and full direct access free of
charge to any electronic communication and to the procurement documents,
including documents prepared by public buyers for a market consultation, until three
years after the award of the R&D procurementcontract. Where for certain parts of
these documents access by electronic means cannot be provided, public buyers shall
26 Regulation (EU) 2024/1252 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 April 2024
establishing a framework for ensuring a secure and sustainable supply of critical raw materials and
amending Regulations (EU) No 168/2013, (EU) 2018/858, (EU) 2018/1724 and (EU) 2019/1020 (OJ L,
2024/1252, 3.5.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/1252/oj) 27 Directive 2011/83/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 October 2011 on consumer
rights, amending Council Directive 93/13/EEC and Directive 1999/44/EC of the European Parliament
and of the Council and repealing Council Directive 85/577/EEC and Directive 97/7/EC of the European
Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 304, 22.11.2011, p. 64, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/83/oj)
EN 30 EN
indicate how these parts of the documents will be made available by other than
electronic means. Public buyers shall carry out all direct communication for R&D
procurement where possible by means of the European Business Wallets or by
alternative electronic means that that are interoperable with the European Business
Wallets.
5. In R&D procurement procedures requiring publication in the Official Journal of the
European Union, public buyers shall use the applicable standard forms for notices
laid down in Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/178028.
6. Public buyers shall take appropriate measures to ensure that, in the performance of
R&D procurement contracts, economic operators comply with applicable obligations
relating to the strategic priorities of the Union set out in the second subparagraph of
this paragraph, as established by Union law, national law, or collective agreements
and by the international environmental, social and labour law.
In cases where there are obligations as referred to in subparagraph 1, public buyers
shall design and execute their R&D procurement in a manner that takes into account
the strategic priorities of the Union, in particular:
(a) boosting the Union’s competitiveness through a thriving internal market,
closing the innovation gap and reinforcing the Union’s manufacturing and
industrial base;
(b) the achievement of climate and environmental objectives of the Union;
(c) the pursuit of a fair and inclusive society;
(d) the Union's economic safety, security, resilience and economic security,
including through strategic independence.
Article 5
Economic operators
1. Public buyers shall not require economic operators to have a specific legal form in
order to participate in the R&D procurement procedure.
2. Economic operators that, under the law of the Member State in which they are
established, are entitled to provide the relevant R&D services, shall not be rejected
solely on the ground that, under the law of the Member State in which the contract
will be awarded, the economic operator would have been required to be either a
natural or legal person.
3. Public buyers may, in the case of R&D services, works or siting and installation
operations, require legal persons to indicate before the start of the execution of the
tasks concerned, the names and relevant qualifications of the staff responsible for the
performance of the contract in question.
28 Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2019/1780 of 23 September 2019 establishing standard
forms for the publication of notices in the field of public procurement and repealing Implementing
Regulation (EU) 2015/1986 (eForms) (OJ L 272, 25.10.2019, p. 7, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg_impl/2019/1780/oj).
EN 31 EN
Article 6
Groups of economic operators
4. Public buyers shall not define selection criteria pursuant to Article 15 for groups of
economic operators that differ from those for individual economic operators unless
otherwise laid down in this Article.
Groups of economic operators shall be deemed to fulfil a selection criterion where:
(a) one economic operator in the group possesses the necessary technical and
professional ability or economic and financial standing; or,
(b) where such ability or standing can be established by combining the relevant
technical and professional ability or economic and financial standing from two
or several members of the group, unless such combination will not achieve the
same level of ability or standing.
5. When justified by the nature of the contract and in accordance with the principle of
proportionality, public buyers may
(a) derogate from paragraph 1, second subparagraph, point (a) or (b) for selection
criteria relevant for certain critical tasks;
(b) require that certain critical tasks be performed directly by the member of the
group that fulfils the selection criterion relevant for that task.
Public buyers shall identify the critical tasks and related, requirements, clearly
indicating them and their justification in the procurement documents.
6. Conditions for the performance of the R&D procurement contract by groups may be
permitted to differ from those imposed on individual economic operators,
only where justified by objective reasons, which are proportionate and clearly
indicated in the procurement documents.
7. Without prejudice to Member States’ competence to organise their social security
systems, public buyers shall not require groups of economic operators to assume a
specific legal form once they have been awarded the R&D procurement contract.
8. Public buyers shall give particular consideration not to create unjustified or
disproportionate barriers related to the size of the economic operators participating in
a group, in particular for SMEs, innovative startups and innovative scaleups.
Article 7
Reliance on the capacity of other entities
1. With regard to selection criteria as set out pursuant to Article 15, economic operators
may rely on the capacities of other entities, regardless of the legal nature of the links
which it has with them.
2. The public buyer shall verify whether the entities on whose capacity the economic
operator intends to rely on fulfil the relevant selection criteria and whether there are
grounds for their exclusion.
3. The public buyer shall require the economic operator to replace an entity which does
not meet the relevant selection criteria, or in respect of which there are mandatory
grounds for exclusion. The public buyer may require the economic operator to
replace an entity in respect of which there are optional grounds for exclusion.
EN 32 EN
4. Public buyers may request in the procurement documents that the economic operator
proves that it will have the relevant resources of the entity it intends to rely on at its
disposal throughout the period of execution of the R&D procurement contract, for
example by a statement to that effect by those entities.
5. Where an economic operator relies on the capacities of other entities with regard to
criteria relating to economic and financial standing, the public buyer may require that
the economic operator and those entities be jointly liable to the public buyer for the
execution of the R&D procurement contract.
6. Where an economic operator relies on the capacities of other entities to prove
technical and professional ability, the public buyer may require in the procurement
documents that such other entity will perform the works or services for which these
capacities are required.
Article 8
Subcontracting
1. Parts of an R&D procurement contract may be subcontracted. A R&D procurement
contract awarded to an economic operator shall not be subcontracted in its entirety,
nor be further subcontracted in its entirety.
2. Public buyers shall require economic operators to indicate in their tender any share of
the R&D procurement contract that they envisage to subcontract to third parties, and
any proposed subcontractors.
Public buyers shall require the main contractor to inform them after the award of the
contract and before the start of the contract performance of the tasks and activities its
intends to subcontract. Public buyers shall also require information about the identity
of any subcontractors. The public buyer shall require the main contractor to notify
the public buyer as soon as possible of any changes to this information during the
course of the R&D procurement contract.
3. The public buyer shall require the economic operator to replace a subcontractor in
respect of which there are mandatory grounds for exclusion pursuant to Article 13.
The public buyer may require the economic operator to replace a subcontractor in
respect of which there are optional grounds for exclusion pursuant to Article 14.
4. When justified by the nature of the R&D procurement contract and in accordance
with the principle of proportionality, public buyers may require that certain critical
tasks be performed directly by the main contractor. Public buyers shall identify the
critical tasks and related requirements, clearly indicating them and their justification
in the procurement documents.
5. Subcontracting under the provisions in this Article shall be without prejudice to the
main contractor’s liability.
6. Observance of the obligations referred to in Article 4(6) by subcontractors is ensured
through appropriate action by the competent national authorities acting within the
scope of their responsibility and remit. Member States may adopt or retain additional
proportionate measures limiting subcontracting where they have identified a duly
substantiated higher risk of non-compliance with social and labour law obligations.
EN 33 EN
Article 9
Market consultation
1. Prior to launching the R&D procurement call for tenders referred to in Article 23,
public buyers shall conduct a market consultation to inform economic operators of
the forthcoming R&D procurement call for tenders, and gain market knowledge,
including about the availability of, or potential of developing, innovative solutions,
and about their views on the proposed scope, value, and modalities of the
implementation of the R&D procurement.
2. Prior to starting the market consultation, public buyers shall announce the market
consultation by means of a prior information notice. The notice shall:
(a) be published in the Official Journal of the European Union and, after that, be
published on the national public procurement portal of the Member State of the
public buyer;
(b) include references to the relevant CPV codes for research and development
services, indicate that the market consultation is conducted for a R&D
procurement and relates to innovation by marking the field ‘innovation’ in the
prior information notice and by including, where applicable the words ‘Pre-
Commercial Procurement’ in the field ‘title of the procurement’.
(c) include the format chosen by the public buyer for conducting the market
consultation, such as online questionnaires, online webinars or physical
meetings, and any relevant links or contacts where further information about
the conduct of the R&D procurement can be obtained.
3. Public buyers shall consult the market widely. To this effect, after announcing the
market consultation by means of a prior information notice, public buyers may
publish and promote the announcement of the market consultations through any
widely available media.
4. By way of derogation from paragraph 2 and 3 of this Article, where necessary and
justified for ensuring the protection of the security or public safety interests of the
Union or one or several of its Member States withing the meaning of Article 28(2),
public buyers shall publish and promote to the media the prior information notice
omitting all sensitive information and requesting economic operators to express their
interest to participate in the market consultation. Sensitive information shall be sent
only to economic operators who have expressed interest, meet the qualification
criteria and do not pose a security risk within the meaning of Article 28(4), point (d).
5. By way of derogation from paragraphs 2, 3 and 9 of this Article, where the
publication and promotion in the media of a prior information notice and the
publication of documents that explain the background and the logistical details for
organising the market consultation would be contrary to the security or public safety
interests of the Union or one or several of its Member States withing the meaning of
Article 28(2), the public buyer shall not announce the market consultation pursuant
to paragraph 2, 3 and 9 of this Article but shall send an invitation to participate in the
market consultation to potentially suitable economic operators identified through a
market research and share the market consultation documents only with those who
express an interest, meet the qualification criteria and do not pose a security risk
within the meaning of Article 28(4), point (d).
EN 34 EN
6. Public buyers shall not exclude any economic operators having their origin in
countries referred to in Article 11(1), from participation in the market consultation.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph of this paragraph, where necessary
and justified for protecting security and public safety interests of the Union or one or
several of its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2), public buyers may
restrict market consultation only to economic operators that have their origin in
Member States.
7. Public buyers shall ensure equal access to information during the market
consultation. They shall share any information on the R&D procurement provided to
one economic operator participating in the market consultation with all other
economic operators participating in the same market consultation.
8. During the market consultation, public buyers may seek or accept information and
advice from the general public, independent experts, public authorities, market
participants or other relevant parties. The market consultation may take the form of
written or verbal exchanges, online questionnaires, webinar of physical meetings, site
visits or demonstrations, or other suitable objective formats. Information and advice
sought or accepted may be used in the planning and conduct of the R&D
procurement, respecting the principles of equal treatment, non-discrimination, fair
competition and transparency.
9. Unless contrary to the security or public safety interests of the Union or one or
several of its Member States withing the meaning of Article 28(2), public buyers
shall publish on their website any documents related to the market consultation,
including any documents that explain the background and the logistical details for
organising the market consultation, questions posed by economic operators together
with the replies to those questions by the public buyer and where available a
summary on the outcome of the market consultation or written minutes, or a video or
audio recording of any market consultation meetings.
10. The participation of an economic operator in a market consultation shall not prejudge
its eligibility to participate in a subsequent call for tenders for the R&D procurement.
11. By way of derogation from paragraph 1, the obligation to conduct a market
consultation pursuant to this Article shall not apply to R&D procurement procedures
which have as their only subject the procurement of research and development
consultancy services as covered by CPV codes 73200000-4,73210000-7 and
73220000-0.
Article 10
Procurement documents
1. Public buyers shall specify in the procurement documents at least the following
elements:
(a) the R&D procurement need in accordance with paragraph 4;
(b) the estimated value of the R&D procurement established in accordance with
the methodology laid down in paragraph 5, and any cash or in-kind
contributions that public buyers intend or may make available to contractors
during the R&D procurement;
EN 35 EN
(c) the information on the conduct and the outcome of the market consultation
made available in accordance with Article 9(7) and Article 9(9);
(d) the conditions for access to the R&D procurement, in accordance with the
obligations laid down in Articles 11;
(e) the applicable exclusion grounds, selection criteria and financial guarantees in
accordance with the obligations laid down in Articles 13, 14, 15 and 16;
(f) the minimum requirements to be met by all tenderers;
(g) the innovation-related award criteria, including their respective weightings, to
be applied in the evaluation of tenders, in accordance with the obligations laid
down in Article 17;
(h) the division of the rights and obligations related to intellectual property rights
and the ownership of results, in accordance with the obligations laid down in
Article 19;
(i) the provisions for contract modifications and, where applicable, for value
engineering, in accordance with the obligations laid down in Articles 20 to 21;
(j) the provisions for the call for tenders, including applicable provisions on
negotiation laid down in paragraphs 2 to 3 of this Article and the minimum
number of contractors that are to be selected where lots and multiple sourcing
are used, in accordance with the provisions on the use for multiple sourcing
laid down in Article 22 and with the provisions for the launch of the call for
tenders laid down in Article 23;
(k) where applicable, the number of R&D phases over which the R&D activities
are split and whether the public buyer includes the option to make use of the
possibility to invite economic operators that have not participated in previous
phases of the R&D procurement to participate in later phases of the R&D
procurement, in accordance with the obligations for competitive development
in phases laid down in Article 24;
(l) whether and how the public buyer intends to obtain the ownership of results of
the R&D procurement, including any prototypes or first products, services or
works developed as a part of the R&D procurement;
(m) the innovation-related key performance indicators defined, to the maximum
extent practicable as performance requirements, and the method for assessing
them, to monitor the contract performance throughout the R&D procurement,
in accordance with the obligations laid down in Article 24(5);
(n) the provisions for payments, in accordance with the obligations laid down in
Article 25;
(o) the applicable confidentiality and data protection obligations, in accordance
with the obligations laid down in Article 26;
(p) where applicable, any requirements for contractors to contribute to
standardisation, certification or publication of results, including by making
them available as open data or open source, without prejudice to confidentiality
and data protection obligations referred to in Article 26 and to the obligations
in respect of the protection of intellectual property rights laid down in Article
19;
EN 36 EN
(q) the provisions on the termination of R&D procurement contracts, in
accordance with the obligations laid down in Articles 27 and 29;
(r) the applicable security and public safety obligations, in accordance with the
obligations laid down in Article 28, 29 and 30;
(s) where applicable, the provisions for conducting the procedure as a joint R&D
procurement, in accordance with the obligations laid down in Article 31;
(t) that the provisions of this Regulation apply to the R&D procurement.
2. Public buyers shall indicate in the procurement documents that the essential
conditions of the R&D procurement contract are not subject to negotiation. Public
buyers shall not substantially alter the subject matter of the R&D procurement
contract as a result of the negotiations. Negotiations may concern all characteristics
of the research and development activities and of the intended results to be developed
for the public buyer during those research and development activities as part of the
R&D procurement, including quality, quantities as well as social, environmental and
innovative aspects, may be subject to negotiation, provided that those characteristics
do not constitute minimum requirements.
3. Public buyers shall, in the procurement documents, indicate any specific elements
not listed in paragraph 1 for which they invite tenderers to indicate, in their tender,
their preferred approach, leaving the finalisation of those elements subject to
negotiation.
4. Public buyers shall draft the procurement documents for the R&D procurement
taking into account the findings of the market consultation and any market research
that the public buyer conducted on the state of the art of any ongoing research and
development and product planning roadmaps of economic operators. Public buyers
shall formulate the R&D procurement need referred to paragraph 1, point (a), of this
Article as a problem that needs to be solved without unduly restricting possible
approaches to solve the problem. Public buyers shall give preference to use
functional requirements or performance requirements in accordance with Article 18
to formulate the requirements for addressing the R&D procurement need. The
information provided in the procurement documents shall be sufficiently precise to
enable economic operators to identify the nature and scope of the R&D procurement
and to decide whether to submit a tender.
5. Public buyers shall calculate the estimated value of the R&D procurement procedure
based on the maximum estimated value net of VAT of the research and development
services to be provided in the context of the R&D procurement contract or contracts
that are expected to be awarded as part of the R&D procurement procedure,
including any lots, options or renewals. The calculation of the estimated value shall
take into account the estimated value of all types of research and development related
expenses, irrespective of their share in the total estimated value, including the value
of labour, materials, components and tools that are needed to deliver the expected
results, including, where relevant, research and development that was performed
before the start of the R&D procurement procedure. Where public buyers intend to
obtain the exclusive ownership of intellectual property rights to results generated by
contractors, the estimated value shall include the estimated value of those intellectual
property rights. The estimated value shall not include any cash or in-kind
contributions that public buyers intend or may make available to contractors during
the R&D procurement.
EN 37 EN
6. As regards products, services or works that result from the research and development
services procured and that are needed to safeguard security and public safety
interests of the Union or one or several of its Member States within the meaning of
Article 28(2), including to avoid security of supply issues, public buyers may, in the
procurement documents, specify that public buyers have a priority right to purchase a
predefined volume or value of those products, services or works before these are
offered to other potential buyers. In such case, public buyers shall set out the priority
right to purchase as a contractual obligation in the R&D procurement contract.
Article 11
Conditions for access to R&D procurement procedures and place of performance
requirements
1. Public buyers shall open the participation in R&D procurement only to:
(a) economic operators having their origin in Member States;
(b) economic operators having their origin in countries that have concluded an
international agreement with the Union, provided that R&D procurement falls
within the scope of the Union’s public procurement commitments in that
agreement.
2. The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 39
to supplement this Regulation by excluding, in whole or in part, subject to the
Union’s international obligations, a third country from the scope of paragraph 1,
point (b) based on any of the following criteria:
(a) that third country has failed to provide national treatment related to Union
R&D services or entities under the agreements referred to in paragraph 1, first
subparagraph, point (b);
(b) such exclusion is justified to avoid dependencies or any other developments
that may threaten the security of supply in the Union of the relevant products,
works or services in question;
(c) such restriction is justified under any other exception under the applicable
agreement.
3. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 of this Article, where necessary and justified
for ensuring the protection of the security interests of the Union or one or several of
its Member States within the meaning of article 28(2), public buyers may restrict
participation in R&D procurement only to economic operators that have their origin
in Member States and that are not subject to control of a third country or of a legal
entity that is subject to control of a third country.
4. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 point (b), public buyers may open the access
to the R&D procurement also only to economic operators that have their origin in
countries that have concluded an international agreement with the Union in which
the Union has made public procurement commitments but not for R&D
procurements, only in one of the following cases where:
(d) through a market research that includes an extensive, widely disseminated
market consultation, the public buyer can determine that the required R&D
services cannot be provided by economic operators in the countries listed in
paragraph 1, and no reasonable alternative or substitute exists;
EN 38 EN
(e) no suitable tenders or requests to participate have been submitted, including in
response to a similar R&D procurement procedure launched by any public
buyer in the countries listed in paragraph 1 in the two years preceding the
launch of the planned new R&D procurement procedure; or
(f) limiting the access to the R&D procurement procedures in accordance with
paragraph 1 would entail that the public buyer would have to procure the R&D
services at disproportionate costs.
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, point (b), an estimated difference of more
than 20 % between the estimated cost of an offer from an economic operator having
their origin in a country referred to in paragraph 1 and that from an economic
operator having their origin in a country that has concluded an international
agreement with the Union in which the Union has made public procurement
commitments but not for R&D procurements on the basis of on objective and
transparent data, may be presumed by public buyers to be disproportionate.
5. Subcontracting shall not be used with the intent or effect to circumvent the rules on
access to R&D procurement. The conditions for access to R&D procurement shall
not apply to entities on whose capacity the tenderer relies or to subcontractors, unless
public buyers limit subcontracting:
(a) where paragraph 1 or 4 applies, to subcontractors that have their origin in the
countries listed in paragraph 1; or
(b) where paragraph 3 applies and where necessary and justified for ensuring the
protection of the security and public safety interests of the Union or one or
several of its Member State within the meaning of Article 28(2), to
subcontractors that have their origin in Member States and that are not subject
to control of a third country or of a legal entity that is subject to control of a
third country.
6. Where paragraph 4 applies, public buyers may reserve a number of R&D
procurement contracts within the same R&D procurement procedure:
(a) for economic operators that have their origin in the countries referred to in
paragraph 1, first subparagraph points (a) and (b); or
(b) where necessary and justified for protecting the security or public safety
interests of the Union or one or several of its Member States within the
meaning of article 28(2), for economic operators that have their origin in
Member States and that are not subject to control of a third country or of a
legal entity that is subject to control of a third country.
7. Unless contrary to security or public safety interest of the Union or one or several of
its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2) for reasons justified in the
procurement documents, public buyers shall require that contractors perform at least
50% of the research and development activities under the R&D procurement contract
in the countries referred to in paragraph 1, including the work of principal research
and development staff with scientific responsibility for the R&D procurement
contract.
8. Where necessary and justified for protecting the security or public safety interests of
the Union or one or several of its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2),
public buyers may require, in addition to the measure in paragraph 7 of this Article,
contractors to perform all research and development activities relating to new
EN 39 EN
security components of the intended results in the Union, including the work of
principal research and development staff with scientific responsibility for the R&D
procurement contract.
9. Where an economic operator fails to provide information or documentation requested
by the public buyer related to the verification of the place of performance conditions
referred in paragraphs 7 and 8 without any reasonable explanation and thereby
prevents the verification of the economic operator’s compliance with the place of
performance conditions by public buyers or makes such a verification practically
impossible or very difficult, that economic operator shall be excluded from
participation in the R&D procurement procedure.
10. In addition to, or by derogation from any rules set out under this Regulation,
including or by derogation from the list of countries referred to in paragraph 1 and
paragraph 4, for the award and execution of R&D procurement contracts supported
by a Union programme or instrument, public buyers shall apply any conditions
necessary to comply with requirements for Union support in all management modes
established in Article 62 of Regulation (EU, EURATOM) 2024/250929.
11. The Commission shall establish and make available free of charge a publicly
accessible online tool, which sets out, in a comprehensive and up-to-date manner, the
Union’s public procurement commitments, including the R&D procurement
commitments, in international agreements.
Public buyers shall determine, for the purposes of a given R&D procurement
procedure, the countries referred to in paragraph 1, point (b), and paragraph 4 on the
basis of the applicable international agreements as reflected in the online tool
referred to in subparagraph 1 of this paragraph.
12. Public buyers shall determine, for the purposes of a given procurement procedure, on
the basis of the applicable international agreements as reflected in the online tool
referred to in paragraph 1 for the parameters entered, including the public buyer
concerned, the subject-matter and the estimated value of the contract in relation to
the applicable thresholds.
13. Public buyers shall:
(a) restrict participation in R&D procurement procedures in the case of groups of
economic operators referred to in Article 6, to groups which are composed
solely of economic operators having their origin incountries referred to in
paragraphs 1 to 4 in this Article;
(b) reject a tender in the course of a R&D procurement procedure where it is not
submitted by economic operators having their origin incountries referred to in
paragraphs 1 to 4 in this Article or groups thereof as referred to in point (a).
Article 12
Determination of origin
1. The origin of an economic operator shall be deemed to be:
29 Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2024/2509 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 September
2024 on the financial rules applicable to the general budget of the Union (OJ L, 2024/2509, 26.09.2024,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2509/oj).
EN 40 EN
(a) in the case of a natural person, the country of which the person is a national or
where that person has a right of permanent residence;
(b) in the case of a legal person, either of the following:
(i) the country under the laws of which the legal person is constituted or
otherwise organised and in the territory of which the legal person is engaged in
substantive business operations;
(ii) if the legal person is not engaged in substantive business operations in the
territory of the country in which it is constituted or otherwise organised, the
origin of the legal person is to be that of the person or persons who may
exercise, directly or indirectly, a dominant influence on the legal person by
virtue of their ownership of that legal person, their financial participation
therein, or the rules which govern that legal person.
2. For the purposes of the first subparagraph, point (b)(ii), that person or persons shall
be presumed to have a dominant influence on the legal person in any of the following
cases in which they, directly or indirectly:
(a) by holding the majority of the legal person’s subscribed capital;
(b) by controlling the majority of the votes attaching to shares issued by the legal
person; or
(c) by being able to appoint more than half of the legal person’s administrative,
management or supervisory body.
3. Public buyers may, at any time during a R&D procurement procedure, request the
economic operator to submit, supplement, clarify or complete the information or
documentation related to the verification of the economic operator’s origin within an
appropriate time limit, provided that such requests are made in compliance with the
principles of equal treatment and transparency. Where the economic operator fails to
provide such information or documentation without any reasonable explanation and
thereby prevents the verification of the economic operator’s origin by public buyers
or makes such a verification practically impossible or very difficult, that economic
operator shall be excluded from participation in the R&D procurement procedure
concerned.
Article 13
Mandatory exclusion grounds
1. Public buyers shall at any time exclude an economic operator, including individual
members of a group of economic operators, from participation in a R&D
procurement procedure where that economic operator, or a key person in the
functioning of a legal person as defined in the second subparagraph, has been the
subject, in any Member State, of a conviction by final judgment, for any of the
offences listed in this subparagraph, or, regarding Member States not bound by the
relevant Union legal act, offences as defined in equivalent national legislation:
EN 41 EN
(a) participation in a criminal organisation, as defined in Article 1, point 1, of
Council Framework Decision 2008/841/JHA30;
(b) corruption offences, within the meaning of Directive (EU) 2026/102131;
(c) fraud affecting the Union’s financial interests within the meaning of Article 1
of the Convention on the protection of the European Communities’ financial
interests and criminal offences referred to in Article 3, 4 and 5 under Directive
(EU) 2017/137132;
(d) terrorist offences and offences related to a terrorist group, as well as offences
related to terrorist activities, as defined in Articles 3 to 12 of Directive (EU)
2017/54133;
(e) Money laundering within the meaning of Article 3 of Directive
2018/1673/EU34;
(f) trafficking in human beings within the meaning of Article 2 of Directive (EU)
2011/3635;
(g) criminal offences concerning the employment of illegally staying third-country
nationals, as referred to in Articles 2, 3 and 9 of Directive 2009/52/EC36;
(h) environmental criminal offences as referred to in Articles 3 and 4 of Directive
(EU) 2024/120337;
(i) criminal offences concerning the violation of Union Restrictive Measures as
referred to in Article 3 and 4 of Directive (EU) 2024/122638;
30 Council Framework Decision 2008/841/JHA of 24 October 2008 on the fight against organised crime
(OJ L 300, 11.11.2008, p. 42, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dec_framw/2008/841/oj). 31 Directive (EU) 2026/1021 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2026 on
combatting corruption, replacing Council Framework Decision 2003/568/JHA and the Convention on
the fight against corruption involving officials of the European Communities or officials of Member
States of the European Union and amending Directive (EU) 2017/1371 of the European Parliament and
of the Council (OJ L, 2026/1021, 11.5.2026, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2026/1021/oj). 32 Directive (EU) 2017/1371 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 July 2017 on the fight
against fraud to the Union's financial interests by means of criminal law (OJ L 198, 28.7.2017, p. 29,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2017/1371/oj). 33 Directive (EU) 2017/541 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 March 2017 on
combating terrorism and replacing Council Framework Decision 2002/475/JHA and amending Council
Decision 2005/671/JHA (OJ L 88, 31.3.2017, p. 6, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2017/541/oj). 34 Directive (EU) 2018/1673 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2018 on
combating money laundering by criminal law (OJ L 284, 12.11.2018, p. 22, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2018/1673/oj). 35 Directive 2011/36/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 5 April 2011 on preventing and
combating trafficking in human beings and protecting its victims, and replacing Council Framework
Decision 2002/629/JHA (OJ L 101, 15.4.2011, p. 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/36/oj). 36 Directive (EU) 2024/1203 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 April 2024 on the
protection of the environment through criminal law and replacing Directives 2008/99/EC and
2009/123/EC (OJ L, 2024/1203, 30.4.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1203/oj). 37 Directive (EU) 2024/1203 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 April 2024 on the
protection of the environment through criminal law and replacing Directives 2008/99/EC and
2009/123/EC (OJ L, 2024/1203, 30.4.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1203/oj). 38 Directive (EU) 2024/1226 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 April 2024 on the
definition of criminal offences and penalties for the violation of Union restrictive measures and
amending Directive (EU) 2018/1673 (OJ L, 2024/1226, 29.4.2024, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1226/oj).
EN 42 EN
(j) fraudulent use of non-cash payment instruments as referred to in Articles 3 to 8
of Directive 2019/713/EU39
(k) offences in the area of sexual abuse and sexual exploitation of children and
child sexual abuse material as referred to in Article 3 to 9 of Directive
2011/93/EU40;
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, a key person in the functioning of a legal
person means a person having a leading position within the legal person, based on
any of the following:
(a) a power of representation of the legal person;
(b) an authority to take decisions on behalf of the legal person; or
(c) an authority to exercise control within the legal person.
2. The exclusion grounds set out in this Article shall apply for five years from the date
of the delivery of the final judgment, except where the period of exclusion has been
set by the final judgment, meaning that no exclusion decision shall be taken after the
expiry of the periods referred to in this sentence.
3. Public buyers shall at any time during the R&D procurement procedure exclude an
economic operator from participation in a R&D procurement procedure where it
becomes aware that the economic operator or contractor is in breach of its
obligations relating to the payment of taxes or social security contributions and this
has been established by final judicial or administrative decision, except if by that
moment in time, the economic operator has concluded a binding arrangement on
paying the taxes or social security contributions due, including, where applicable,
any interest accrued or fines.
Public buyers may derogate from the mandatory exclusion provided for in the first
subparagraph where an exclusion would be clearly disproportionate, in particular
where only minor amounts are unpaid.
4. Public buyers may decide to derogate from the mandatory exclusion provided for in
this Article, on an exceptional basis, for overriding reasons relating to the public
interest such as public health or protection of the environment. Any decision to
derogate and the justification therefore shall be documented in the individual
documentation of the R&D procurement procedures.
Article 14
Optional exclusion grounds
39 Directive (EU) 2019/713 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 April 2019 on combating
fraud and counterfeiting of non-cash means of payment and replacing Council Framework Decision
2001/413/JHA (OJ L 123, 10.5.2019, p. 18, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2019/713/oj). 40 Directive 2011/93/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 December 2011 on
combating the sexual abuse and sexual exploitation of children and child pornography, and replacing
Council Framework Decision 2004/68/JHA (OJ L 335, 17.12.2011, p. 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/93/oj.
EN 43 EN
1. Public buyers may at any time during the R&D procurement procedure exclude an
economic operator, including individual members of groups of economic operators,
from participation in a R&D procurement procedure, where:
(a) the public buyer can demonstrate by any appropriate means that the economic
operator has breached applicable obligations under relevant Union legislation,
as referred to in Article 4(6);
(b) the economic operator is bankrupt or is the subject of insolvency or winding-up
proceedings or a comparable situation;
(c) the public buyer can demonstrate by appropriate means grave professional
misconduct by the economic operator, which renders its integrity or reliability
questionable;
(d) the public buyer has sufficiently plausible indications to conclude that the
economic operator has entered into agreements with other economic operators
aimed at distorting competition;
(e) the economic operator has shown significant or persistent deficiencies in the
performance of a substantive requirement under a prior public contract, which
led to early termination of that prior contract, damages or other comparable
sanctions by the public buyer;
(f) the economic operator, in the context of the concerned R&D procurement
procedure, has been found accountable of serious misrepresentation with
regard to the information required for the verification of the absence of grounds
for exclusion or the fulfilment of the selection criteria; or has otherwise
undertaken to unduly obtain advantages in the R&D procurement procedure;
(g) the public buyer can demonstrate by any appropriate means, including but not
limited to classified information or non-publicly disclosable, assessments
provided by competent national authorities, that the economic operator does
not possess sufficient reliability to exclude risks to the security and public
safety interests of the Union or of one or more Member States.
(h) the economic operator has benefitted from foreign subsidies distorting the
internal market, established by an implementing act adopted by the
Commission pursuant to Article 31 (2) of Regulation (EU) 2022/256041, in the
three years preceding the public procurement procedure, and the public buyer
has sufficiently plausible indications to conclude that the foreign subsidies
concerned are likely to have an impact on the tender of the economic operator.
2. Any economic operator subject to an exclusion pursuant to paragraph1 may provide
evidence to rebut the existence of the exclusion ground or to demonstrate that it has
taken sufficient measures to demonstrate its reliability despite the existence of the
exclusion ground.
For this purpose, the economic operator shall, in particular, prove that it has
(a) paid or undertaken to pay compensation in respect of any damage caused by
the misconduct;
41 Regulation (EU) 2022/2560 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 December 2022 on
foreign subsidies distorting the internal market (OJ L 330, 23.12.2022, p. 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2560/oj).
EN 44 EN
(b) clarified the facts and circumstances in a comprehensive manner by actively
cooperating with the investigating authorities; and
(c) taken concrete technical, organisational and personnel measures that are
appropriate to prevent further misconduct.
If the public buyer considers the evidence provided as sufficient, the economic
operator concerned shall not be excluded from the R&D procurement procedure.
The measures taken by the economic operators shall be evaluated taking into account
the gravity and particular circumstances of the misconduct. In assessing the measures
taken by the economic operator public buyers shall take into account the nature,
extent and timing of the cooperation with the relevant investigating authorities.
Where the measures are considered to be insufficient, the economic operator shall
receive a statement of the reasons thereto.
An economic operator which has been excluded by final judgment in any Member
State from participating in procurement procedures shall not be entitled to make use
of the possibility provided for under this paragraph during the period of exclusion
resulting from that judgment.
3. Member States may designate a national authority competent to evaluate the
evidence and decide whether it is sufficient for the purposes of this paragraph. Public
buyers shall rely on a positive decision of the national competent authority for the
purpose of their procurement procedures.
4. Where no measures as specified in paragraph 2 are taken and where the period of
exclusion has not been set by final judgment, public buyers may exclude economic
operators pursuant to this Article during a period of five years from the date of the
conduct giving rise to exclusion or, in the case of continued or repeated acts, the date
on which the conduct ceases, but not after that maximum period.
5. Where a public buyer excludes an economic operator on the basis of paragraph 1,
point (h), it shall inform the Commission thereof.
Article 15
Selection criteria
1. Where public buyers decide to make use of selection criteria as requirements for
participation in R&D procurement procedures, they shall lay down such criteria in
accordance with the conditions in this Article.
2. Selection criteria for R&D procurement procedures shall only relate to:
(a) suitability to pursue the professional activity within the meaning of paragraph
4;
(b) technical and professional ability within the meaning of paragraph 5;
(c) economic and financial standing within the meaning of paragraphs 6, 7 and 8.
3. Public buyers shall limit any requirements for selection criteria to those that are
appropriate to ensure that an economic operator has the required capacities and
abilities to perform the R&D procurement contract. All requirements for selection
criteria shall be related and proportionate to the complexity of and the risks
associated with the subject-matter of the R&D procurement contract and comply
with the principles of transparency, non-discrimination and proportionality.
EN 45 EN
Each reference to be provided as means of proof of compliance with any of the
selection criteria shall be accompanied by the words ‘or equivalent’ to allow
tenderers to provide any type of alternative evidence of compliance.
4. In R&D procurement procedures, in so far as economic operators are required to
hold a particular authorisation or to be members of a particular organisation in order
to be able to perform the research and development activities concerned in the
country where the economic operator conducts its main activity, the public buyer
may require such economic operators to prove that they hold such authorisation or
membership.
Certified registration on official lists held by the competent bodies or a certificate
issued by the certification body shall constitute a presumption of compliance with
regard to the requirements laid down in the first and second subparagraphs.
5. Public buyers may impose requirements ensuring that economic operators possess
the necessary human and technical resources and experience to perform the R&D
procurement contract to an appropriate quality standard.
Unless justified by the complexity of the R&D procurement contract or the nature of
the subject-matter, public buyers shall not require prior experience in other
contracts as a condition for participation in an R&D procurement procedure.
A public buyer may assume that an economic operator does not possess the required
professional abilities in either of the following cases where:
(a) the public buyer has established by any means that the economic operator has
conflicting interests which may negatively affect the performance of the that
contract;
(b) the public buyer has been made aware by any means that the economic
operator presents a security concern for a Member State or the Union as a
whole.
Public buyers shall not require prior experience in other contracts without requiring
that contractors possess the necessary human and technical resources to perform the
R&D procurement contract. Public buyers shall not deem economic operators non-
compliant with the requirements on technical and professional ability solely due to
lack of prior experience in other contracts.
Any references to qualifications or qualification levels included in selection criteria
shall mention the European Qualifications Framework levels set out in Annex II to
Council Recommendation of 22 May 201742.
6. Where public buyers require economic operators to have minimum economic and
financial standing, they may require economic operators to have one or both of the
following:
(a) a certain minimum financial capacity;
(b) an appropriate level of professional risk indemnity insurance.
42 Council recommendation of 22 May 2017 on the European Qualifications Framework for lifelong
learning and repealing the recommendation of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April
2008 on the establishment of the European Qualifications Framework for lifelong learning (OJ C 189,
15.6.2017, p.15).
EN 46 EN
7. Where public buyers require economic operators to provide proof of minimum
economic and financial standing, public buyers shall allow economic operators to
provide such proof by any appropriate means, including any of the following:
(a) statements from banks or, where appropriate, evidence of relevant professional
risk indemnity insurance;
(b) financial statements or extracts from financial statements, where publication of
financial statements is required under the law of the country in which the
economic operator is established;
(c) a statement of the economic operator’s turnover for a maximum of the last
three financial years available, depending on the date on which the economic
operator was set up or started trading, as far as the information on such
turnovers is available;
(d) a business plan supported by statements or other evidence of the economic
operator’s tangible and intangible financial assets, including its intellectual
property assets, financial contributions from financial investors or funding
bodies, or evidence of own capital invested in the economic operator.
Where a minimum financial capacity is required, it shall not exceed 50% of the
estimated value of the R&D procurement contract, except in duly justified cases such
as relating to the special risks attached to the nature of the procured research and
development services. R&D procurement contract. The public buyer shall specify the
main reasons for such a requirement in the procurement documents.
In assessing the minimum financial and economic standing, public buyers may
consider information from the annual accounts of the economic operator only where
the public buyer has specified the methods and criteria for such consideration in the
procurement documents. Such methods and criteria shall be transparent, objective
and non-discriminatory.
Where public buyers impose economic and financial standing selection criteria in
accordance with paragraph 6, public buyers shall enable tenderers to provide the
proof referred to in this paragraph, first subparagraph, point (d), between the date
that the public buyer notifies tenderers about the decision to award the R&D
procurement contract and the date of signature of that contract.
8. Where public buyers require professional risk indemnity insurance, they shall ensure
and shall provide justification in the procurement documents that the required
liability coverage is proportionate to the reasonably foreseeable amount of loss or
damage that contractors and subcontractors may cause during or as a result of the
performance of the R&D procurement contract.
9. Where the R&D procurement procedure applied by the public buyer does not include
a preselection of economic operators on the basis of exclusion grounds or selection
criteria, the public buyer shall request full documentary evidence proving compliance
with applicable exclusion grounds and selection criteria only from the winning
tenders that ranked highest based on the award criteria. Information that can be
determined from existing national databases established by a public body, or from
the registration on official lists or certifications shall not be questioned without
sufficient justification.
10. Where information or documentation submitted by economic operators is or appears
to be incomplete or erroneous or where specific documents are missing, public
EN 47 EN
buyers, in compliance with the principles of equal treatment and transparency, shall
provide the economic operators concerned with the opportunity to submit,
supplement, clarify or complete the relevant information or documentation within an
appropriate time limit to remedy any deficiency resulting from a minor informality or
irregularity of a tender that does not put into question the decision to award R&D
procurement contracts.
Article 10
Financial guarantees
1. Public buyers may require tenderers to provide tender guarantees, performance
guarantees or retention guarantees provided that all of the following conditions are
met:
(a) the amount of the tender guarantees does not exceed 2% of the total estimated
R&D procurement contract value, with a maximum amount of the tender
guarantee of EUR 500 000 for R&D procurement contracts with an estimated
value above EUR 5 000 000 and EUR 100 000 for contracts with an estimated
value below EUR 5 000 000.
(b) for R&D procurement contracts with an estimated contract value above EUR
500000, the amount of the performance and retention guarantees does not
exceed 5% of the specific contract price, which may be increased to 10% for
highly complex or risky R&D procurement contracts when justified by a risk
analysis.
(c) For R&D procurement contracts with an estimated contract value below EUR
500000, no performance or retention guarantees shall be required.
2. The values of tender, performance and retention guarantees that public buyers
require from tenderers shall be reduced by 50% for SMEs, innovative startups and
innovative scaleups.
3. Public buyers shall ensure the timely reduction or release of financial guarantees
once they are no longer justified.
Article 17
Innovation-related award criteria
1. Public buyers shall award the contract to the economic operator that offers the best
quality for money. To that effect, public buyers shall evaluate the tenders received
according to the best price-quality ratio method. To determine the best price-quality
ratio, public buyers shall evaluate the tenders through a comparison of their price,
and quality, the latter based on quality criteria linked to the subject matter of the
R&D procurement contract. Costs can also be taken into account when determining
the best price-quality ratio. When evaluating the tenders based on the best price-
quality method, the combined weight of all quality award criteria shall represent at
least 50% of the total weighting of all award criteria. The price criterion shall only
relate to the price of the tender. The weighting given to criteria related to the total
cost of ownership shall be counted within the respective percentage share.
2. Quality criteria shall refer to any criteria used to assess the degree to which a tender
proposes beneficial, efficient or sustainable outcomes in relation to the subject-matter
of the R&D procurement contract.
EN 48 EN
The quality of the tender may, for instance, relate to the following aspects:
(a) technical merit, aesthetic and functional characteristics, accessibility, design
for all users, research and development methods;
(b) environmental, climate-related, social and innovation objectives in accordance
with Article 4(6), security and public safety interests in accordance with Article
28, or European preference requirements where a public buyer applies those
requirements in the form of an allocation of award points;
(c) quality of the staff assigned that can significantly impact the level of
performance of the contract, such as the organisation, qualification and
experience of the staff assigned to performing the R&D procurement contract;
(d) quality of the organisation of the work, quality of the allocation of resources
assigned to performing the R&D procurement contract;
3. Award criteria shall be non-discriminatory, proportionate, specific, objective and
measurable; they shall be evaluated in a process containing sufficient safeguards
against irregularities. They shall allow the public buyer to effectively compare the
strengths and weaknesses of the offered R&D services and shall not have the effect
of conferring an unrestricted freedom of choice on the public buyer.
4. In R&D procurement procedures, public buyers shall apply, as part of the quality
award criteria referred to in paragraph 2, specific quality award criteria designed to
measure the potential impact of the tenders on innovation and on creating added
value for the Union. Such innovation-related quality award criteria, as referred to in
paragraph 2(e) of this Article, shall include the following:
(a) the degree of innovativeness of the tender and the extent to which this degree
of innovativeness contributes to the overall quality of the proposal that is to be
researched, developed or tested during the R&D procurement, where possible
by using quality criteria that are specific to the intended results of the R&D
procurement;
(b) the total cost of ownership and long-term benefits of the tender, including the
impact of any value engineering approach that is proposed in the tender on
those costs and benefits;
(c) the impact of the tender on reinforcing the technology supply chain and
developing an innovation ecosystem in the Union, including for critical
technologies;
(d) the share of the value of the activities that are proposed to be carried out in the
Union as a part of the R&D procurement contract;
(e) where applicable, the extent to which the tender proposes to integrate
technologies developed in the Union, including research and development
results stemming from publicly funded research and development programmes
in the internal market and makes use of tools, such as standards, specifications,
software or models or other technology developed in the Union.
5. Public buyers may apply other innovation-related award criteria in addition to those
laid down in the paragraph 4. The combined weight of all innovation-related award
criteria shall be at least 15% of the total weight of all award criteria, and the
combined weight of the innovation-related award criteria referred to in paragraph 1,
points (c), (d) and (e) shall not exceed 15% of the total weight of all award criteria.
EN 49 EN
The innovation-related award criteria are part of the quality award criteria referred to
in paragraph 2.
6. By way of derogation from paragraph 4 and 5, the obligation to apply innovation-
related award criteria pursuant to this Article shall not apply to R&D procurement
procedures which have as their only subject the procurement of research and
development consultancy services as covered by CPV codes 73200000-4, 73210000-
7 and 73220000-0.
Article 18
Formulating requirements for the characteristics of the procured R&D services
1. Public buyers shall formulate the requirements for the characteristics of the research
and development services to be procured and of their intended results in the
procurement documents in the following order of precedence:
(a) requirements mandated by law;
(b) functional requirements;
(c) performance requirements;
(d) design requirements;
Public buyers shall apply the order of preference set out in the first subparagraph to
each characteristic individually.
Unless otherwise provided in applicable Union or national law, public buyers shall
draft all requirements referred to in this paragraph in a manner that allows the
tenderer to prove compliance by means of any alternative equivalent evidence.
2. Public buyers shall only formulate a requirement as a performance requirement, or
design requirement, where it is impracticable to draft such requirement as a
functional requirement.
3. Where for a specific characteristic there is no requirement mandated by law and
where a specific characteristic cannot be sufficiently described through the
requirements in paragraph 1, the requirements for that characteristic may be
formulated in any of the following ways by reference, in order of precedence, to:
(a) harmonised standards , as well as standards and standardisation deliverables
the references of which have been published for the purpose of this paragraph
in the Official Journal of the European Union or by any other means as
provided in accordance with Union legislation and common specifications,
understood as a technical specification other than a standard and adopted by the
Commission, and the conformity with which provides for a presumption of
conformity with the requirements set out in the relevant Union legislation;
(b) European standards as defined in Article 2 of Regulation (EU) No 1025/2012,
including national standards transposing European standards;
(c) European Assessments Documents;
(d) international standards;
(e) other standardisation deliverables established by a European standardisation
organisation as defined in Regulation (EU) No 1025/2012;
EN 50 EN
(f) where any of the references listed in points (a) to (f) does not exist, national
standards, national technical approvals or national technical specifications.
Each reference shall be accompanied by the words ‘or equivalent’ unless the
reference is made to mandatory harmonised technical specifications.
4. Public buyers shall ensure that the procurement documents do not refer to a specific
make, brand name or source, or a particular process which characterises the products,
services or works provided by a specific economic operator, or to trademarks,
patents, types or a specific origin or production with the effect of favouring or
eliminating certain economic operators or products, services or works.
By way of derogation from the first subparagraph, such references shall only be
allowed where a sufficiently precise and intelligible description of the subject-matter
of the R&D procurement contract pursuant to paragraph 1, 2 and 3 is not possible.
Public buyers shall not derogate from this obligation unless justified by the subject
matter of the R&D procurement contract, and in that case, the reference shall be
accompanied by the words ‘or equivalent’.
Article 19
Risk benefit sharing under market conditions
1. Public buyers shall ensure that intellectual property rights to the results generated by
a contractor in the performance of an R&D procurement contract do not accrue
exclusively to the public buyer for its use in the conduct of its own affairs but that the
public buyer shares with the contractor under market conditions the risks and
benefits related to those intellectual property rights. To meet this requirement, public
buyers and contractors shall fulfil the obligations set out in paragraphs 2 to 9:
2. Contractors shall have the right to retain ownership of the intellectual property rights
to the results they generated in the performance of an R&D procurement contract.
The R&D procurement contract shall provide this right to contractors subject to an
obligation on contractors to protect their results, to use their best efforts to
commercialise their results and not to use the results contrary to the public interest.
3. Contractors shall notify public buyers as soon as possible of any results that can be
exploited within a maximum period from the generation of the results specified in the
R&D procurement contract. This notification shall include the contractor’s decision
to protect and commercialise these results. Where contractors decide not to protect or
commercialise results as defined in the R&D procurement contract the public buyer
shall, by way of derogation from paragraph 2 and without any prejudice to the moral
rights of authors, have the right:
(a) to grant, in agreement with the contractor, to the staff of the contractor the right
to protect those results and obtain ownership of the intellectual property rights
to those results; or
(b) to protect itself those results, obtain itself ownership of the intellectual property
rights to those results, and to transfer or license the results under fair and
reasonable conditions and in a non-discriminatory way.
4. Public buyers shall obtain at least free access to the results generated by the
contractors in the context of a R&D procurement contract for their own use and for
use by their current and future contractors in the performance of any contracts
awarded by those public buyers. Public buyers may also require that such free access
EN 51 EN
includes in addition to usage rights other access rights such as rights to modify and
maintain the results.
5. In emergency situations where contractors are unable to satisfy subsequent demand
for the results of the R&D procurement contract on the Union market, public buyers
shall have the right to grant licences or to require contractors to grant licences to
third parties to commercially use the results of the R&D procurement contract on a
non-exclusive basis, without any right to sublicense, and under fair and reasonable
conditions.
6. Where contractors fail to commercialise their results within a reasonable period as
provided for in the R&D procurement contract but provide legitimate reasons for that
failure, public buyers shall:
(a) verify with the contractors whether they are able and willing to commercialise
the results if given a reasonable amount of additional time;
(b) only in case it is verified that the contractors are unable or unwilling to
commercialise the results, or fail to commercialise the results within the
additional time referred to in point (a), have the right to:
(i) grant licences or to require contractors to grant licences to third parties,
under fair and reasonable conditions, to commercially use the results of
the R&D procurement contract on a non-exclusive basis, without any
right to sublicense; or
(ii) only in case that a licensing action as referred to in point (i) is not
sufficient to achieve the commercialisation required by the R&D
procurement contract, require the contractor to transfer ownership of
those results to the public buyers, under fair and reasonable conditions,
without any prejudice to the moral rights of authors.
7. Where contractors fail to commercialise their results within a reasonable period
provided for in the R&D procurement contract and fail to justify this with legitimate
reasons or where contractors use those results in a manner contrary to the public
interest, and where efforts undertaken by public buyers to obtain within a reasonable
amount of time authorisation from the contractors to license the results on fair and
reasonable conditions have failed, public buyers shall have the right to:
(a) grant licences or to require contractors to grant licences to third parties to
commercially use the results of the R&D procurement contract on a non-
exclusive basis, without any right to sublicense without providing financial
compensation to the contractors; or
(b) in case that the action in point (a) is not sufficient to prevent the use of the
results in a manner contrary to the public interest or achieve the
commercialisation required by the R&D procurement contract, require the
contractor to transfer ownership without of those results to the public buyers,
without providing financial compensation to the contractors, without any
prejudice to the moral rights of authors.
8. For the purpose of paragraphs 6 and 7, legitimate reasons include where the
contractor demonstrates that it used its best efforts to commercialise the results and
to avoid abuse of the results in a manner that is contrary to the public interest.
9. Contractors shall notify public buyers in advance of any intention to undertake
exclusive licensing or transfer of ownership of R&D procurement results. Public
EN 52 EN
buyers shall have the right to object to exclusive licensing or transfer of ownership of
R&D procurement results by contractors in any of the following cases:
(a) where such licensing or transfer would negatively impact the access of the
public buyer to the results or the commercial exploitation of the results;
(b) where such licensing or transfer would be contrary to the public interest in
sectors of vital importance to the socio-economic or technological development
of the Union or of the Member States of the public buyers;
(c) where those results would become subject to control or other restrictions by a
country other than those referred to in Article 11(1), in a way that would
negatively impact the access of the public buyer to or the commercialisation of
the results, as referred to in point (a) of this paragraph, or in a way that would
be contrary to the public interest, as referred to in point (b) of this paragraph.
10. For R&D procurements that are not pre-commercial procurements, by way of
derogation from paragraphs 1 to 9, where justified by any of the following overriding
reasons of public interest which shall be specified in the procurement documents,
public buyers may obtain the ownership of the intellectual property rights to the
results generated by contractors in the context of an R&D procurement contract:
(a) where necessary and justified for ensuring the protection of the security and
public safety interests of the Union or one or several of its Member State
within the meaning of Article 28(2);
(b) where necessary to prevent abuse of the results by contractors or other third
parties and there is no other effective way to prevent such abuse.
(c) where the public buyer intends to have exclusive rights to exploit the
intellectual property rights to the results generated by contractors;
Where public buyers obtain ownership of intellectual property rights in accordance
with the first subparagraph:
(a) if they fail to exploit intellectual property rights obtained under point (c) of
paragraph 10 within a period of four years from the date of obtaining the
ownership of the intellectual property rights, they shall offer to transfer the
ownership of those intellectual property rights or licence them under fair and
reasonable conditions and in a non-discriminatory manner;
(b) if they decide to transfer the ownership of these intellectual property rights or
licence them, they shall do so under fair and reasonable conditions and in a
non-discriminatory manner;
(c) they shall ensure that all results which do not give rise to intellectual property
rights may be widely disseminated, without prejudice to confidentiality and
data protection obligations a referred to in Article 26.
The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 39
to amend the list of cases set out in the first subparagraph of this paragraph, taking
into account the following criteria:
(a) the impact on increasing the commercialisation of R&D results;
(b) the impact on improving the access of innovative enterprises, including in
particular innovative startups and scaleups, and new entrants to the market;
(c) the impact on socio-economic or technological development in the Union;
EN 53 EN
(d) the impact on the Union’s strategic autonomy and economic security;
(e) the impact on protecting public interests;
11. Public buyers shall:
(a) require contractors to stipulate in subcontracting agreements, that
subcontractors are bound by the same intellectual property rights and
obligations as those applicable to contractors under the R&D procurement
contract, in particular that in any transfer or licensing agreement the
contractor’s obligations under the R&D procurement contract are passed on to
the new owner or licensee and that the new owner or licensee has the
obligation to pass them on in any subsequent transfer or licensing.
(b) when drawing up and implementing obligations affecting the protection of
intellectual property rights in the context of R&D procurement contracts,
comply with the applicable Union law on intellectual property, the TRIPS
Agreement43 and other international obligations of the Union or the Member
States concerned.
For the purposes of the first subparagraph, point (b), where participation in the
R&D procurement is not restricted to economic operators that have their origin
in Member States, public buyers shall treat economic operators having their
origin in other WTO Member countries no less favourable than economic
operators that have their origin in the public buyer’s own country with regard
to the protection of intellectual property, except where otherwise provided for
in the TRIPS Agreement.
Article 20
Contract modifications
1. Public buyers may modify awarded R&D procurement contracts during their term
without a new R&D procurement procedure where that possibility, irrespective of the
modifications’ monetary value, has been provided for in the initial procurement
documents in clear, precise and unequivocal review clauses, which may include price
revision clauses or options. Such clauses shall state the scope and nature of possible
modifications or options as well as the conditions under which they may be used.
Such clauses shall not provide for modifications or options that would alter the
overall nature of the R&D procurement contract.
2. Public buyers may also modify awarded R&D procurement contracts during their
term without a new R&D procurement procedure provided that both the following
conditions are fulfilled:
(a) the modification is not substantial within the meaning of paragraph 3 or where
the modification is substantial but falls within any of the cases listed in
paragraph 4;
(b) the modification responds to objective needs arising during the performance of
the R&D procurement contract, is limited to what is necessary and appropriate
43 Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS), set out in Annex 1C to
the Agreement establishing the World Trade Organization, OJ L 336, 23.12.1994, p. 214, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/agree_internation/1994/800(16)/oj.
EN 54 EN
for ensuring its performance and continuity and not alter the initial economic
balance of the contract in favour of the contractor in a manner which was not
provided for in the original contract.
3. A modification shall be considered substantial in one or more of the following cases:
(a) the modification introduces conditions which, had they been part of the initial
procurement procedure, would have allowed for the admission of other
candidates than those initially selected or for the acceptance of a tender other
than that originally accepted or would have attracted additional participants in
the procurement procedure;
(b) where it changes essential terms or conditions of the contract, such as
(c) a change in the economic balance of the R&D procurement contract in favour
of the contractor in a manner which was not provided for in the original
contract as a consequence of either;
(i) a considerable extension of the scope of the R&D procurement contract;
(ii) the identity of the contractor in other cases than those provided for under
paragraph 4, point (c).
4. Provided that they do not alter the initial economic balance of the R&D procurement
contract in favour of the contractor in a manner which was not provided for in the
initial R&D procurement contract, substantial modifications shall be permissible
within the meaning of paragraph 2 only in the following cases:
(a) where additional services, or supplies have become necessary during
performance of the R&D procurement contract, provided that a change of
contractor is not technically or economically feasible, including due to
interdependence with existing works or services or substantial increase of
costs;
(b) where the modification is necessary due to circumstances which could not
reasonably be anticipated by a diligent public buyer at the time of the launch of
the R&D procurement procedure, and which significantly affect the
performance or feasibility of the contract, including:
(i) substantial changes in the applicable regulatory or legal framework;
(ii) major technological developments;
(iii) severe disruptions, emergencies or crises with significant economic,
societal or operational impact;
(c) where the original contractor is replaced by another entity in one of the
following cases:
(i) following a merger, takeover, acquisition, insolvency or other corporate
restructuring, another economic operator succeeds, wholly or partly, to
the rights and obligations of the original contractor, provided that the
new entity fulfils the original qualitative selection criteria, that no other
substantial modifications are made to the R&D procurement contract and
that the replacement is intended to circumventing the application of this
Regulation; or
EN 55 EN
(ii) in the event that the public buyer itself assumes the main contractor’s
obligations towards its subcontractors where this possibility is provided
for under national law.
5. Modification, the value of which does not exceed 15 % of the value of the initial
R&D procurement contract shall be considered non-substantial and may be made
without a new procurement procedure, provided that the modification does not alter
the initial economic balance of the R&D procurement contract in favour of the
contractor in a manner which was not provided for in the initial R&D procurement
contract.
Where several successive modifications are made, the thresholds shall be assessed on
the basis of the net cumulative value of the successive modifications.
6. Before modifying the R&D procurement contract, the public buyer shall establish, on
the basis of objective and verifiable elements, that the conditions set out in paragraph
2 are satisfied. Public buyers shall maintain detailed written records of the essential
elements of the modification, including its justification, its necessity or
appropriateness, and its impact on the economic balance of the contract, in particular
on the allocation of risks and economic advantages, to justify decisions to modify the
R&D procurement contract and to enable verification of compliance with this Article
by competent supervisory, audit and review bodies.
7. Before any modification of a R&D procurement contract that exceeds 50 % of the
initial estimated value of the contract, the public buyers shall publish a contract
modification notice to that effect. Such notice shall contain the justification for the
modification without a new procurement procedure. Consecutive modifications shall
not be aimed at circumventing this Regulation.
8. Where public buyers substantially modify an R&D procurement contract in
accordance with paragraph 4, and the modification does not exceed 50 % of the
initial estimated value of the contract, they shall publish a contract modification
notice within 20 calendar days from the date on which the modification was made.
9. Modifications of an R&D procurement contract shall not be used to remedy
deficiencies of the contractor’s performance that are not justified by circumstances
beyond its control.
Article 21
Value engineering
1. Public buyers shall insert a value engineering clause in all R&D procurement
contracts subject to this Regulation with an estimated value net of VAT exceeding:
(a) EUR 10 million from… [OP please insert date 1 year from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation];
(b) EUR 9 million from… [OP please insert date 2 years from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation];
(c) EUR 8 million from… [OP please insert date 3 years from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation];
(d) EUR 7 million from… [OP please insert date 3 years from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation];
EN 56 EN
(e) EUR 6 million from… [OP please insert date 4 years from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation];
(f) EUR 5 million from… [OP please insert date 5 years from the date of entry
into force of this Regulation].
Public buyers may include a value engineering clause in R&D procurement contracts
with a lower estimated value.
2. Public buyers shall include in the R&D procurement contract:
(a) value engineering clauses that encourage contractors to submit value
engineering change proposals throughout the performance of the R&D
procurement contract (‘voluntary value engineering clauses’); or
(b) value engineering clauses that require contractors to submit to the public buyer
value engineering change proposals at regular intervals throughout the
performance of the R&D procurement contract (‘mandatory value engineering
clauses’).
Public buyers may use the mandatory value engineering referred to in the first
subparagraph, point (b), for the entire R&D procurement contract or only for parts of
the R&D procurement contract.
Where public buyers use mandatory value engineering for parts of the R&D
procurement contract, they shall formulate, in the procurement documents, the
requirements related to those parts as functional or performance requirements.
Contractors shall include corresponding mandatory or voluntary value engineering
clauses in any subcontracting agreement exceeding the values referred to in
paragraph 1 on the date of conclusion of the subcontracting agreement. They may
include corresponding mandatory or voluntary value engineering clauses in
subcontracting agreements below those values.
3. Where contractors submit value engineering change proposals as referred to in the
first subparagraph of paragraph 2, they shall include in those proposals:
(a) all the proposed changes to any of the research and development services
procured as a part of the R&D procurement
(b) a description of any impacts that the proposed changes referred to in point (a) of
this paragraph may have on the rights and obligations of the parties to the R&D
procurement contract, including on the price of different parts of the R&D
procurement contract as referred to in paragraph 2, second subparagraph, or on
the tasks of the contractor;
(c) an evidence-based analysis of the expected cost and benefit of the proposed
changes;
(d) in the case of subcontracting, any value engineering change proposals from their
subcontractors, which are necessary for implementing the contractor’s value
engineering change proposal
4. Public buyers shall not accept value engineering change proposals that:
(a) alter the subject matter of the R&D procurement contract;
(b) impair essential functions or characteristics of the R&D services procured or
their intended results as described in the functional or performance
requirements;
EN 57 EN
(c) involve a change in deliverable quantities of the procured R&D services and
their intended results only;
(d) involve a change in research and development end items or research and
development test quantities that result solely from previous testing under the
R&D procurement contract.
5. Public buyers shall specify in the procurement documents that they may approve
amendments that may decrease or increase the price of the R&D procurement
contract following a value engineering change proposal from the contractor. The
procurement documents shall specify the limits of allowed increases in the price of
the R&D procurement contract due to contract amendments applying a value
engineering change proposal. Any such contract amendments for value engineering
shall be carried out in accordance with Article 20.
6. Public buyers shall set out in the procurement documents incentive sharing rates that
share between public buyers and contractors any net cost savings realised for public
buyers from accepted value engineering change proposals on the ongoing R&D
procurement contract. Where a value engineering change proposal creates net cost
savings for public buyers on potential future R&D procurement contracts, the
procurement documents shall specify whether the public buyer will pay the
contractor’s share of contract savings as a single payment or as a series of payments
over time as future R&D procurement contracts are awarded. Public buyers shall
ensure that the contractor’s share of cost savings that it pays to the contractor as part
of the R&D procurement does not equal to or exceed the cost of research and
development services performed as part of the R&D procurement contract.
7. Public buyers may unilaterally accept or reject any value engineering change
proposal, in whole or in part. If the public buyer does not accept a value engineering
change proposal, the public buyer shall notify the contractor in writing, explaining
the reasons for the rejection. The contractor may withdraw any value engineering
change proposal, in whole or in part, at any time before it is accepted by the public
buyer. Until a contract amendment applies a value engineering change proposal to
the ongoing R&D procurement contract, the contractor shall continue performing in
accordance with the existing R&D procurement contract.
Article 22
Multiple sourcing
1. Public buyers shall apply multiple sourcing in R&D procurement procedures and
shall award multiple R&D procurement contracts to multiple contractors.
2. Public buyers shall indicate in the procurement documents the minimum number of
R&D procurement contracts that are expected to be awarded in accordance with
paragraph 1.
3. R&D procurement contracts under multiple sourcing shall be awarded and signed in
the order of the ranked list of tenders from the highest to the lowest score based on
their evaluation in accordance with Article 11 unless there are duly justified reasons
to proceed otherwise, in full compliance with the principles of equal treatment and
transparency. All R&D procurement contracts shall be awarded within the same
R&D procurement procedure.
EN 58 EN
4. To determine the number of R&D procurement contracts to be awarded in
accordance with paragraph 1, public buyers shall take into account the benefits that
multiple sourcing can generate to:
(a) avoid the over-reliance on a single or a limited number of contractors for
products, works or services that are essential to the public buyer’ internal or
external operations, or for products, works or services that are based on critical
technologies or critical raw materials;
(b) reduce technology or innovation risks including by stimulating the development,
testing or integration of alternative results from different contractors;
(c) tackle situations where there is not sufficient competition on the market or
prevent or reduce supplier lock-in by stimulating more competition on the
market;
(d) mitigate service disruptions and single point of failure by ensuring technical
redundancy in the public buyer’s infrastructure, network or service delivery
system;
(e) where necessary and justified for protection of the security and public safety
interests of the Union or one or several of its Member States within the meaning
of Article 28(2), reserve a minimum number of R&D procurement contracts for
economic operators originating in Member States in accordance with Article
11(6).
5. By way of derogation from paragraph 1, where justified by any of the following
reasons, which shall be specified in the procurement documents, public buyers may
award a single R&D procurement contract without applying multiple sourcing in
accordance with this Article:
(a) R&D procurement procedures which have as their only subject the
procurement of research and development consultancy services covered by
CPV codes 73200000-4, 73210000-7 and 73220000-0;
(b) in R&D procurements that are not pre-commercial procurements, where any of
the following conditions are fulfilled:
(i) the results of the outcomes of the market consultation referred to in
Article 9 and market research indicate that the market is too small for
multiple contractors to participate in the R&D procurement procedure;
(ii) the long-term benefits of multiple sourcing as listed in paragraph 4 of this
Article do not outweigh the extra costs for the public buyer applying
multiple sourcing;
(iii) the award of a single R&D procurement contract is necessary and
justified for ensuring the protection of the security and public safety
interests of the Union or one or several of its Member States within the
meaning of Article 28(2);
The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 39
to amend the list of cases set out in the first subparagraph of this paragraph taking
into account the following criteria:
(a) the impact on increasing the commercialisation of R&D results;
EN 59 EN
(b) the impact on improving the access of innovative enterprises, including in
particular innovative startups and scaleups, and new entrants to the market;
(c) the impact on socio-economic or technological development in the Union;
(d) the impact on the Union’s strategic autonomy and economic security;
(e) the impact on protecting public interests;
Article 23
R&D procurement call for tenders
1. Public buyers shall announce the launch of the call for tenders for the R&D
procurement by means of a contract notice. That notice shall:
(a) be published in the Official Journal of the European Union and, after that, be
published also on the national procurement portal of the Member State of the
public buyer;
(b) contain the following elements:
(i) references to the relevant CPV codes for research and development
services
(ii) an indication, where relevant, that the call for tenders relates to
innovation by marking the field ‘innovation’ in the contract notice and by
including, where applicable, the words ‘Pre-Commercial Procurement’ in
the field ‘title of the procurement’;
(iii) the estimated value of the R&D procurement calculated pursuant to the
methodology laid down in Article 10(5).
2. Public buyers shall widely promote the launch of the R&D procurement call for
tenders to the market. To this effect, after announcing the launch of the call for
tenders by means of a contract notice, public buyers may publish and promote the
launch of the call for tenders through any widely available media.
3. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 and 2 of this Article, where necessary and
justified for ensuring the protection of the security or public safety interests of the
Union or one or several of its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2),
public buyers shall publish and promote the contract notice omitting all sensitive
information and requesting economic operators to express their interest to submit
tenders for the R&D procurement. Sensitive information shall be sent only to
economic operators who have expressed an interest, meet the selection criteria and
do not pose a security risk within the meaning of Article 28(4), point (d).
4. By way of derogation from paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article, where the publication
of a contract notice referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article and the
publication of other elements in the procurement documents referred to in Article 10
would be contrary to the security and public safety interests of the Union or one or
several of its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2), public buyers shall
invite to tender and share the procurement documents only with potentially suitable
economic operators who have been identified during the market consultation
referred to in Article 9 and during market research, meet the qualification criteria and
do not pose a security risk within the meaning of Article 28(4), point (d).
EN 60 EN
5. The minimum time limit for receipt of tenders shall be one month from the date on
which the contract notice was sent for publication in the Official Journal of the
European Union. This minimum time limit can be shortened by the public buyer
where an emergency mode has been activated pursuant Regulation (EU)
2024/274744, the emergency framework has been activated pursuant Council
Regulation (EU) 2022/237245, serious cross-border threats to health pursuant to
Regulation (EU) 2022/237146 exist, or the Commission has declared a crisis or a state
of emergency. The maximum time limit for public buyers to complete the evaluation
of the tenders and notify tenderers of the award decision shall be 60 calendar days
from the deadline for the reception of the tenders.
6. Public buyers shall verify, based on the information in the tender, which tenderers
have access to the R&D procurement in accordance with the conditions laid down in
Article 11.
7. Without prejudice to Article 15(9), public buyers shall evaluate all tenders submitted
by tenderers that have access to the R&D procurement on the basis of objective and
non-discriminatory criteria by applying the applicable exclusion grounds and
selection criteria laid down in Articles 13, 14 and 15, the minimum requirements to
be met by all tenderers and the applicable award criteria referred to in Article 17,
including the innovation-related award criteria, and they shall draft a ranked list of
evaluated tenders.
8. After the submission of the initial tenders, public buyers may conduct interviews
with the economic operators and may conduct negotiations in one or several rounds.
Public shall ensure that in any given round of negotiations the number of solutions
discussed allows for genuine competition. After each round, and depending on the
outcome of the negotiations, the economic operators participating in the negotiations
shall be invited to submit a revised tender and public buyers may decide to reduce
the number of participants based on the award criteria set in accordance with Article
17. Public buyers shall inform economic operators when a new round of negotiations
will start and whether or not they will be invited. Public buyers shall inform all
tenderers, whose tenders have not been eliminated, of any changes to the
specifications or changes to other parts of the procurement detail as a result of the
negotiations. Public buyers shall provide sufficient time for tenderers to modify and
re-submit amended tenders, as appropriate. Economic operators may submit revised
tenders depending on the outcome of the negotiations. Where a public buyer has
decided to conclude the negotiations and proceed to the award of the R&D
procurement contract, it shall invite the remaining economic operators to submit a
final tender.
44 Regulation (EU) 2024/2747 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 October 2024
establishing a framework of measures related to an internal market emergency and to the resilience of
the internal market and amending Council Regulation (EC) No 2679/98 (Internal Market Emergency
and Resilience Act) (OJ L, 2024/2747, 8.11.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2747/oj). 45 Council Regulation (EU) 2022/2372 of 24 October 2022 on a framework of measures for ensuring the
supply of crisis-relevant medical countermeasures in the event of a public health emergency at Union
level (OJ L 314, 6.12.2022, p. 64, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2372/oj). 46 Regulation (EU) 2022/2371 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 November 2022 on
serious cross-border threats to health and repealing Decision No 1082/2013/EU (OJ L 314, 6.12.2022,
p. 26, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2371/oj).
EN 61 EN
9. Not later than 30 days after the conclusion of the R&D procurement contract, public
buyers shall publish a contract award notice in the Official Journal of the European
Union and, after that,alsoon their national procurement portal, except where the
publication would be contrary to the security or public safety interests of the Union
or one or several of its Member States within the meaning of Article 28(2).
The contract award notice shall indicate that the procedure concerns an R&D
procurement and relates to innovation. The public buyer shall include, where
applicable, the words ‘pre-commercial procurement’ in the field ‘title of the
procurement’ and shall mark the field ‘innovation’ in the contract award notice.
The contract award notice shall include information on the value of the awarded
contract or contracts and any awarded lots.
Article 24
Competitive development in phases and assessment of contract performance
1. Public buyers shall procure the R&D in multiple successive research and
development phases that may include any combination of fundamental research,
industrial research and experimental development activities.
2. Public buyers may organise fast-track R&D procurement that combine any of the
phases related to development and testing that are part of industrial research and
experimental development into a single phase.
3. Public buyers shall organise the R&D phases in a way to ensure that the minimum
number of contracts planned for each phase of the R&D procurement allows for
genuine competition in R&D (‘Competitive Development’) between economic
operators.
4. During each R&D phase, public buyers shall assess any value engineering change
proposals and, where needed, amend ongoing R&D procurement contracts
accordingly in accordance with the provisions on value engineering laid down in
Article 21.
5. At the end of each R&D phase of the R&D procurement, public buyers shall assess
the performance of contractors on the basis of the innovation-related key
performance indicators referred to in Article 24(13) .
6. The assessment shall determine whether the contractor has successfully completed
the specific research and development phase based on whether the results of that
specific phase are innovative, capable of meeting the requirements and commercially
viable.
7. Where the assessment determines that the contractor has not successfully completed
a specific phase, the public buyer may terminate the R&D procurement contract with
that contractor. However, where such contractor has satisfactorily performed all the
requested tasks and submitted all the requested deliverables, that contractor shall be
eligible for the payment applicable for the specific phase as agreed in the R&D
procurement contract.
8. Where under an R&D procurement contract, contractors have implemented value
engineering change proposals that have resulted in net cost savings for the public
buyer, the public buyer shall pay the contractor its share of those savings in
accordance with the agreed value engineering payment method.
EN 62 EN
9. By terminating R&D procurement contracts at the end of a phase as referred to in
paragraph 7 and by selecting the best offers for the next phase, the public buyer may
reduce the number of contractors after the completion of each phase.
10. Where despite best efforts of the public buyer to ensure competitive development
across all phases referred to in paragraph 3, the public buyer terminated an R&D
procurement contract at the end of a phase as referred to in paragraph 7 or receives
insufficient good quality offers to allow for the selection of more than one contractor
for the next phase, the public buyer may allow economic operators who have not
participated in previous phases and who have not participated in the initial R&D
procurement procedure to submit tenders only for the remaining phase or phases with
a view to concluding specific contracts. Where the public buyer wants to make use of
this option, the public buyer shall keep the possibility for economic operators that
have not participated in previous phases to express their interest to participate in later
phases of the R&D procurement, up to the moment of selection of contractors for the
last R&D phase. Any such economic operators shall be selected based on the same
exclusion grounds, selection criteria, minimum requirements and award criteria as
other contractors that participated in previous phases.
11. Where despite best efforts of the public buyer to ensure competitive development
across all phases referred to in paragraphs 3 and 10, the public buyer terminated an
R&D procurement contract at the end of a phase as referred to in paragraph 7 or
receives insufficient good quality offers to allow for the selection of multiple
contractors for the next phase, the public buyer may proceed to the next phase with
only one contractor.
12. By way of derogation from paragraph 1 to 11, where justified by any of the
following reasons which shall be specified in the procurement documents, public
buyers may decide not to organise the R&D procurement procedure in multiple
successive research and development phases in the following cases:
(a) for R&D procurement procedures which have as their only subject the
procurement of research and development consultancy services covered by
CPV codes 73200000-4, 73210000-7 and 73220000-0;
(b) for R&D procurements that are not pre-commercial procurements, whose
subject matter concerns R&D services that are limited to one technology
readiness level and those R&D services are too narrow in scope to split the
R&D over multiple phases.
The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 39
to amend the list of cases set out in the first subparagraph of this paragraph taking
into account the following criteria:
(a) the impact on increasing the commercialisation of R&D results;
(b) the impact on improving the access of innovative enterprises, including in
particular innovative startups and scaleups, and new entrants to the market;
(c) the impact on socio-economic or technological development in the Union;
(d) the impact on the Union’s strategic autonomy and economic security;
(e) the impact on protecting public interests;
13. Public buyers shall:
EN 63 EN
(a) regularly assess the performance of contractors on the basis of innovation-
related key performance indicators that include keeping to the time schedule,
keeping the costs under control and delivering the expected quality in terms of
achievement of the minimum requirements referred to in Article 10(1), point
(f), the functional requirements or performance requirements referred to in
Article 18, and the award criteria, including the innovation-related award
criteria, referred to in Article 17;
(b) where, following the assessment referred to in point (a), it concludes that
contract performance does not comply with the innovation-related key
performance indicators, request the contractors to take corrective action to
reach the contract performance agreed in the R&D procurement contract;
where a contractor does not take the necessary corrective actions, public buyers
may terminate the R&D procurement contract with that contractor;
(c) where value engineering is used to improve contract performance throughout
the R&D procurement pursuant to Article 21, take accepted value engineering
proposals into account when assessing contract performance and when paying
the contractor its share of cost savings that result from accepted value
engineering proposals.
Article 25
Payments
1. Without prejudice to their obligations under Directive 2011/7/EU47 of the European
Parliament and of the Council, public buyers shall ensure the timely payment of
contractors and, where applicable, subcontractors.
2. As part of the conditions for the performance of the R&D procurement contract,
public buyers may provide that the contractors pass through the supply chain
equivalent payment terms. as laid down in the relevant provisions of Directive
2011/7/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council.
3. Unless justified by an overriding interest of the public buyer, the public buyer shall
provide for an appropriate advance payment to the contractor.
4. At the request of a subcontractor and where the nature of the R&D procurement
contract so allows, the public buyer shall transfer due payments directly to the
subcontractor for R&D services, supplies or works provided to the main contractor.
Such measures may include appropriate mechanisms permitting the main contractor
to object to undue payments. The arrangements concerning that mode of payment
shall be set out in the procurement documents.
Article 26
Confidentiality and data protection
1. Without prejudice to the applicable Union and national law, public buyers shall not
disclose without prior written agreement information provided to them by economic
operators in market consultations, by tenderers during or after the call for tenders, by
47 Directive 2011/7/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 February 2011 on combating
late payment in commercial transactions (recast) (OJ L 48, 23.2.2011, p. 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/7/oj).
EN 64 EN
contractors during contract performance or by former contractors after the end of the
R&D procurement, which such economic operators have designated as confidential,
including technical or trade secrets and the confidential aspects of tenders. Tenderers,
contractors or former contactors shall also not disclose without prior written
agreement information provided to them by public buyers, which public buyers have
designated as confidential. The prior written agreement shall not take the form of a
general waiver but shall be given with reference to the intended communication of
the specific confidential information.
2. Public buyers shall ensure compliance with the personal data protection rules laid
down in Regulation (EU) 2016/679 and Directive 2002/58/EC, and in applicable
national law in all exchanges and publication of information during the market
consultation, call for tenders, contract performance and after completion of the R&D
procurement.
3. Public buyers shall specify in the procurement documents referred to in Article 10
any requirements on the localisation of and access to the personal data processed by
the contractor. Such requirements may include that:
(a) the personal data shall only be processed within the territory of those countries
referred to in Article 11(1) and shall not be removed from not that territory;
(b) the data shall only be held in data centres located with the territory of those
countries referred to in Article 11(1);
(c) no access shall be given to such data outside of the countries referred to in
Article 11(1);
(d) the contractor may not change the location of data processing without the prior
written authorisation of the public buyer;
(e) any transfer of personal data under the R&D procurement contract to third
countries or international organisations shall comply fully with the requirements
laid down in Regulation (EU) 2016/679.
Article 27
Termination of R&D procurement contracts
Without prejudice to any other grounds for termination provided for in this Act or under
applicable national law, public buyers shall terminate the R&D procurement contract where:
(a) the economic operator becomes subject of a final conviction for one of the
mandatory exclusion grounds referred to in Article 13, except where the public buyer
establishes that such termination is not warranted for reasons of overriding public
interest and the final judgment does not preclude this;
(b) the R&D procurement contract or its modification should not have been awarded to
the contractor in view of a serious infringement of the obligations under the Treaties
and this Regulation that has been declared by the Court of Justice of the European
Union in a procedure pursuant to Article 258 of the Treaty.
EN 65 EN
SECTION 2
SECURITY
Article 28
Security considerations in R&D procurement
1. Public buyers shall take appropriate measures, in addition to measures required or
imposed by virtue of other Union legislation, where relevant, at any stage of the
R&D procurement procedure, from planning and market consultation to contract
award and contract performance, to ensure the protection of the security and public
safety interests of the Union or one or more Member States for any R&D
procurement procedure identified as presenting or including a risk for security or
public safety. This Chapter is without prejudice to other requirements under relevant
Union legislation.
2. Security and public safety interests of the Union or a Member State relevant for a
given R&D procurement contract may include, but are not limited to, the following:
(a) protection of critical infrastructure, strategic dual-use infrastructure, identified
by Member States in accordance with [Article 33 of the Military Mobility
Regulation], especially for those located on a military mobility corridor,
essential services, critical supply chains, critical technologies, resilience
against physical, cyber, or hybrid threats, and prevention across and protection
against risks of any disruption including due to harmful strategic dependencies
on third-country suppliers;
(b) prevention of espionage, sabotage or technology leakage;
(c) crisis preparedness, including business continuity and contingency planning for
disruptions in case of natural disasters or geopolitical instability, pandemics or
cyberattacks;
(d) the prevention of other harmful interference, including third-country and third-
country State-controlled influence;
(e) the cybersecurity of systems, networks, and data processed;
(f) the protection of classified information, sensitive data, research, or intellectual
property from unauthorised access or transfer;
(g) ensuring public health, including crisis-prepared and self-sufficient health
services; or
(h) protection of the environment and resilience to climate-related disruptions.
3. Risks for security and public safety in a R&D procurement contract may arise in
particular from:
(a) the subject matter of the R&D procurement contract, including:
(i) sensitivity of the assets involved or to be developed in its
implementation;
(ii) access to and handling sensitive data;
(iii) critical dependency or risk of critical dependency on a limited number of
third-country suppliers, goods, services or technologies;
EN 66 EN
(iv) risks associated with access to critical infrastructure, strategic dual-use
infrastructure identified by Member States in accordance with [Article 33
of the Military Mobility Regulation], research facilities, IT systems, or
critical materials;
(v) dual-use nature of the results of research and development services
procured;
(vi) the nature of the public interests attached to it and the potential
consequences of a malfunction or malperformance, such as harm to
public safety, national security, economic stability, health security or
fundamental rights.
(b) the characteristics of economic operators, including:
(i) ownership, control, or financing structure bearing risks of undue
interference or influence over the economic operator;
(ii) security track record, including past breaches, non-compliance with
security standards, or exclusion from other procurement procedures on
security grounds;
(iii) capacity to meet applicable security clearance, personnel vetting, or
information security requirements;
(iv) exposure to third-country legislation that may compel disclosure of
sensitive information or interference with contract performance.
4. Public buyers shall, to the extent possible specify in the procurement documents in a
clear and sufficiently detailed manner appropriate measures that are proportionate to
the risks referred to in paragraph 3 and non-discriminatory. Such measures may be
implemented, in particular through:
(a) specifications and market consultation documents, including mandatory
security standards, certifications, personnel vetting or security clearance
obligations, or risk management and assurance requirements;
(b) award criteria, such as evaluating bidders’ security management systems,
security compliance standards, incident response capabilities, supply chain
security;
(c) conditions for the performance of contracts, including clauses enabling security
oversight of suppliers through audits, inspections, or documentation reviews
and implementation of corrective measures in the case of breaches, as well as
provisions on subcontracting, ownership change notification, and the protection
of classified or sensitive information;
(d) selection criteria, where justified, such as possessing security clearances or
otherwise requiring tenderers to establish that they do not present risks for
security or public safety pursuant to paragraph 3, point (b) of this Article. This
shall be without prejudice to Article 14.
(e) invite to submit a tender only those economic operators who meet specific
objective and non-discriminatory security-related requirements, provided that
the public buyer has indicated its intention to do so, and the security-related
requirements it intends to apply, in the contract notice for the R&D
procurement in question.
EN 67 EN
Public buyers may also indicate in the procurement documents which security
measures they intend to implement where risks for security or public safety arise
during the R&D procurement procedure.
5. Public buyers shall at any time during an R&D procurement procedure exclude an
economic operator from participation in a R&D procurement procedure where the
operator has been identified as a high-risk supplier pursuant to Regulation (EU)
XXXX/XXX [Cyber Security Act 2] in relation to the provision of ICT components
or components that include ICT components to be used in key ICT assets.
6. Where there is evidence that disparities in measures affect the functioning of the
internal market, the Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance
with Article 39 in order to supplement this Regulation by establishing mandatory
technical specifications, selection criteria, award criteria or contract performance
clauses, for specific categories of R&D procurement services or their intended results
where such elements address an identified specific security and public safety interest
of the Union.
Article 29
Security measures during contract implementation
1. Without prejudice to contract law of the Member States, the public buyer may
terminate a R&D procurement contract in whole or in part where it determines that
the contractor has failed to comply with measures or obligations aiming at preventing
or mitigating risks for security and public safety, or a risk to security or public safety
has materialised or is likely to materialise. Under the same conditions, they may
exclude certain economic operators during contract implementation.
2. Termination and exclusion pursuant to this Article shall be proportionate in relation
to the risk for security or public safety. Before terminating a R&D procurement
contract or excluding an economic operator, the public buyer shall conduct a written
assessment. The public buyer shall take into account in particular:
(a) the severity of the risk for security or public safety;
(b) the impact of termination or exclusion on the delivery of public services;
(c) alternative mitigation measures such as contract amendments or enhanced
monitoring.
3. Unless justified by the severity of the risks involved, the imminence of the threat or
where notification may aggravate the risk, the public buyer shall notify the contractor
in writing of its intent to terminate or exclude, specifying:
(a) the grounds for termination or exclusion;
(b) the facts and evidence supporting the decision, with the exception of classified
information;
(c) the proposed date of termination or exclusion.
4. The contractor shall have an appropriate time, determined by the public buyer, which
shall not be shorter than at least 10 calendar days, to submit observations on the
grounds for termination and propose remedial actions. The public buyer may shorten
the deadline in case of emergency.
EN 68 EN
5. The contractor shall cooperate with the public buyer to secure or transfer data,
documents, or assets related to the R&D procurement contract and ensure continuity
of critical services until the termination or exclusion takes effect.
Article 30
Cybersecurity
1. For all products with digital elements used and developed as part of the research and
development services procured that fall within the scope of Regulation (EU)
2024/2847 of the European Parliament and of the Council48, public buyers shall
ensure compliance with the essential cybersecurity requirements set out in Annex I to
that Regulation, including the manufacturers’ ability to handle vulnerabilities
effectively are taken into consideration in the R&D procurement process.
2. This Regulation shall not prevent public buyers from subjecting products with digital
elements referred to in paragraph 1 to additional cybersecurity requirements for the
R&D procurement or use of those products for specific purposes, including where
those products developed, obtained or used for national security or defence purposes,
provided that such requirements are consistent with Member States’ obligations laid
down in Union law and that they are necessary and proportionate for the achievement
of those purposes.
3. Without prejudice to paragraph 1, and without prejudice to Directive (EU)
2022/2555 of the European Parliament and of the Council49 where applicable, public
buyers may specify in the procurement documents requirements relating to
cybersecurity for the research and development services procured and their intended
results. To that end, they may include specifications, selection criteria, exclusion
criteria, award criteria or conditions for the performance of contracts. Such
requirements shall be linked to the subject-matter of the R&D procurement contract
and comply with the principles of transparency, non-discrimination and
proportionality.
4. Public buyers shall at any time during an R&D procurement procedure exclude an
economic operator from participation in an R&D procurement procedure where the
operator has been identified as a high-risk supplier in relation to the provision of ICT
components or components that include ICT components to be used in key ICT
assets.
48 Regulation (EU) 2024/2847 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2024 on
horizontal cybersecurity requirements for products with digital elements and amending Regulations
(EU) No 168/2013 and (EU) 2019/1020 and Directive (EU) 2020/1828 (Cyber Resilience Act) (OJ L,
2024/2847, 20.11.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2847/oj). 49 Directive (EU) 2022/2555 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 14 December 2022 on
measures for a high common level of cybersecurity across the Union, amending Regulation (EU) No
910/2014 and Directive (EU) 2018/1972, and repealing Directive (EU) 2016/1148 (NIS 2 Directive)
(OJ L 333, 27.12.2022, p. 80, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2022/2555/oj).
EN 69 EN
SECTION 3
JOINT PROCUREMENT OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT SERVICES
Article 31
Common rules on joint R&D procurement
1. Public buyers carrying out joint R&D procurement shall comply with the rules laid
down in this Regulation.
2. Public buyers may organise joint R&D procurement with two or more public buyers
from one or more Member States. Public buyers. Where two or more public buyers
from one or more Member States wish to conduct a joint R&D procurement, they
shall conclude a joint procurement agreement establishing a buyers’ group and
appointing the lead buyer. That agreement shall specify at least the following:
(a) the financial commitments provided by each public buyer in the buyers’ group
for the joint R&D procurement;
(b) the division of roles and responsibilities between the lead buyer and the public
buyers that are members of the buyers’ group regarding the R&D procurement
procedure, contract performance and post-contract interactions with former
contractors as referred to in Chapter 2, Section 1 and 2;
(c) the applicable Union or national law related to dispute resolution, related to
any procedures or approvals needed for testing prototypes or first products,
services or works developed during the R&D procurement and any other
aspects of the conduct of the joint R&D procurement that are not governed by
this Regulation;
(d) the mechanism for the allocation and exploitation of the results of the joint
R&D procurement.
In addition to the elements listed in Article 10, the procurement documents for joint
R&D procurement shall include the information referred to in the first subparagraph,
points (b), (c) and (d), of this paragraph.
3. The members of the buyers’ group shall jointly provide the financial commitments
for the R&D procurement and jointly conduct the market consultation, draft
procurement documents for their common R&D procurement need, and carry out the
evaluation of tenders.
4. The lead buyer shall launch the joint R&D procurement procedure and award the
R&D procurement contracts in the name and on behalf of all public buyers that are
members of the buyers’ group. Public buyers that conduct joint R&D procurement
may do so in any of the official languages of the Union and they may allow tenderers
to submit tenders in any of those official languages.
5. Public buyers may organise joint R&D procurement through central purchasing
bodies of one or more Member States.
6. For the purpose of this Regulation, central purchasing bodies shall be any public
buyer that carries out the following R&D procurement related activities:
(a) acting as a wholesaler by buying and re-selling R&D services procured on the
market or results of those R&D services;
EN 70 EN
(b) acting as an intermediary, by publishing notices and awarding R&D
procurement contracts for public buyers;
Central purchasing bodies may also, in addition to the activities set out above, carry
out or take part in joint R&D procurement activities or provide ancillary R&D
related procurement support services to public buyers, including infrastructure,
advice or technical assistance, including the preparation and management of R&D
procurement procedures on behalf and for the account of the public buyer concerned.
Public buyers shall indicate in the notices referred to in Article 4(5) when they are
acting as a central purchasing body.
Any public buyer may procure R&D services and obtain their intended results from
or through any central purchasing body established in the Union offering centralised
purchasing activities. A public buyer shall be deemed to fulfil its obligations
pursuant to this Regulation when it procures research and development services from
or through a central purchasing body which for that R&D procurement was obliged
to and has applied this Regulation. Central purchasing bodies that are not themselves
a public buyer shall conduct R&D procurement procedures in accordance with this
Regulation.
7. Union institutions, bodies or agencies may carry out R&D procurement, including
pre-commercial procurement, for themselves, jointly with or on behalf of other
Union entities and jointly with or on behalf of public buyers in Member States
according to the rules set out in Regulation (EU, Euratom) 2024/2509 of the
European Parliament and of the Council.
Chapter 3
COMMERCIALISATION OF RESEARCH AND INNOVATION
RESULTS
Article 32
Union Competence Centre for intellectual property-backed finance and
commercialisation of intellectual property assets
1. The European Union Intellectual Property Office (‘the Office’) shall establish a
Competence Centre to support and promote intellectual property-backed finance and
commercialisation of intellectual property, including intellectual property resulting
from research and innovation and regulatory exclusivities for pharmaceuticals (‘the
Competence Centre’)
2. The Competence Centre shall support the following entities through its tasks:
(a) researchers established in a Member State;
(b) innovative enterprises established in a Member State, including innovative
startups, innovative scaleups and spin-offs, whose innovative and competitive
performance is driven by the ownership or use and commercialisation of
intellectual property rights;
(c) other public and private entities established in a Member State that have an
interest in the commercialisation of intellectual property assets;
EN 71 EN
(d) entities whose function is to support any of the entities referred to in points (a),
(b) and (c).
3. To improve access to finance for the entities referred to in paragraph 2, the Office
through the Competence Centre shall:
(a) by… [OP please insert date 4 years from the date of entry into force of this
Regulation], develop a voluntary Union framework for the valuation and
disclosure of intellectual property assets based on all types of intellectual
property rights and regulatory exclusivities for pharmaceuticals and designed
to facilitate its use across different sectors and its uptake by financial
stakeholders, where possible making use of the European Business Wallets,
established in accordance with [Regulation XXX of the European Parliament
and of the Council on the establishment of European Business Wallets], or
alternative electronic means that that are interoperable with the European
Business Wallets, including by:
(i) setting up and maintaining digital processes and services related to the
disclosure, screening and valuation of intellectual property assets;
(ii) identifying and compiling best practices to support the development of
the voluntary valuation framework;
(iii) establishing, as an integral part of the framework, a voluntary disclosure
arrangements enabling undertakings to present information on their
intellectual property assets in a comparable and structured manner for
financing purposes.
(b) by… [OP please insert date 4 years from the date of entry into force of this
Regulation], establish and maintain, in close cooperation with the Commission,
a Union-wide digital match-making platform, where possible making use of the
European Business Wallets or alternative electronic means that that are
interoperable with the European Business Wallets, to facilitate, on a voluntary
basis, the licensing and transfer of intellectual property rights protected in the
Union.
(c) facilitate the development of a secondary market to support the disposal of
intellectual property assets held by the entities referred to in paragraph 2;
(d) support the relevant public and private financial stakeholders, including Union
institutions, bodies, offices and agencies, as well as financial institutions and
commercial banks, in defining and implementing new public and private
financial instruments backed by intellectual property, including the provision
of sound evidence on market needs, the analysis of data stemming from the
implementation of such financial instruments and the provision of IP-related
technical advisory services;
(e) establish and implement skill development programmes across the innovation
ecosystem in relation to intellectual property-backed finance and
commercialisation of intellectual property assets;
(f) raise awareness about intellectual property rights as a driver for the Union’s
innovation, growth and competitiveness and about intellectual property-backed
finance;
(g) support the progressive development of an evidence database on intellectual
property-backed financing, including by collecting on a voluntary basis and
EN 72 EN
analysing anonymised or other non-personal data from intellectual property-
backed financing transactions and, where appropriate, by establishing
mechanisms to facilitate the availability and use of such data, including, where
possible, through the use of European Business Wallets or alternative
electronic means that that are interoperable with the European Business
Wallets;
(h) provide support to the persons and entities referred to in paragraph 2 in the
valorisation and commercialisation of intellectual property resulting from
publicly funded research and innovation, including through awareness raising
and capacity building in management of intellectual property, providing
assistance in defining intellectual property management and commercialisation
strategies;
(i) coordinate a Union-level helpdesk offering information and support services
related to intellectual property-backed financing to entities listed in paragraph
2.
The Commission shall, by means of implementing acts, lay down the technical
specifications necessary for the uniform implementation of the voluntary Union
framework referred to in the first subparagraph, point (a), of this paragraph,
including the specifications concerning the content, comparability and
interoperability of disclosures. Those implementing acts shall be adopted in
accordance with the examination procedure referred to in Article 38(2). The Office
shall, in accordance with the technical specifications laid down pursuant to the
second subparagraph, develop, maintain and, where necessary, update the templates
and related operational tools for the implementation of the voluntary Union
framework
The Commission shall, by means of implementing acts, lay down common technical
standards, interoperability requirements and operational specifications for the digital
match-making platform referred to in the first subparagraph, point (b), of this Article.
Those implementing acts shall be adopted in accordance with the examination
procedure referred to in Article 38(2).
4. Subject to the availability of an accumulated budgetary surplus and of the approval
of the Office’s Budget Committee, the Office may conclude contribution agreements
with the Commission for the implementation of clearly defined Union activities
falling within the scope of the tasks entrusted to the Office under this Regulation and
relating to intellectual property-backed finance and the commercialisation of
intellectual property assets. Such contribution agreements shall specify the respective
responsibilities and financial contributions of the parties, the activities and
deliverables to be financed, the eligible costs, implementation arrangements,
reporting obligations, internal control measures, audit rights and the treatment of any
unused amounts.
5. Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 shall apply to the fulfilment of the tasks entrusted to the
Office under this Article. The Competence Centre shall form part of the Office and
shall not have separate legal personality, financial autonomy or decision-making
powers. All activities carried out through the Competence Centre shall remain
subject to the governance, programming, budgetary, accounting, internal control and
reporting framework applicable to the Office.
EN 73 EN
6. The set-up costs of the Competence Centre and the running costs arising from the
tasks entrusted to the Office by this Regulation shall be covered by its operational
budget. The set-up costs may include, at least, the costs related to the development of
the IT support systems and the setting up of the corresponding administrative
infrastructure, as well as the time-limited preparation or setting up of new initiatives.
The Office’s Budget Committee may authorise the use of the accumulated budgetary
surplus of the Office for necessary, clearly defined, non-recurrent and time-limited
set-up costs.
7. The Executive Director of the Office may introduce charges for specific services
referred to in this Article provided to the entities referred to in paragraph 2 of this
Article in accordance with Article 178 of Regulation (EU) 2017/1001. Such charges
shall be transparent, non-discriminatory and limited to the cost of the specific
service.
Access to the voluntary valuation framework developed in accordance with
paragraph 3, first subparagraph, point (a), access to the digital match-making
platform developed in accordance with paragraph 3, first subparagraph, point (b),
support services referred to in paragraph 3, first subparagraph, point (d) provided to
public stakeholders, including the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies,
and access to the Union-level helpdesk referred to in paragraph 3, first subparagraph,
point (i) shall not be subject to fees or charges.
Article 33
Data collection
1. With a view to supporting the fulfilment of the tasks entrusted to the Office under
Article 32, and in particular those relating to the development of an evidence base,
the analysis of data and the support to improved access to finance for the entities
referred to in Article 32(2), the Office shall collect and analyse anonymised or other
non-personal data, provided on a voluntary basis, relating to transactions in which
intellectual property rights are used as collateral for credit or insurance purposes or
as in-kind contribution in equity investment scenarios, without prejudice to
applicable rules on classified information.
2. When collecting and analysing data in accordance with this Article, the Office shall,
in accordance with Union law, cooperate with Union institutions, bodies and
agencies, the competent public authorities of the Member States, national and
regional intellectual property offices, and relevant public and private stakeholders in
the fields of finance and insurance, with a view to facilitating the availability,
comparability and reuse of existing data, as well as to exploring, on the basis of
existing data sources and practices, possible approaches for improving transparency
and interoperability across the Union.
3. The data collected and analysed by the Office in accordance with this Article may
include, where available and appropriate, information originating from intellectual
property registers, business registers, registers of pledges or other rights in rem over
intellectual property and similar sources, as well as other relevant information made
available by public authorities or private sector actors, including information on how
intellectual property used as collateral for credit or insurance purposes or as in-kind
contribution in equity investment scenarios has been evaluated, on the size and
characteristics of the corresponding transaction, on the type of intellectual property
EN 74 EN
right concerned, and on relevant indicators such as equity valuation, collateralisation,
or loan-to-value ratios.
4. The Office shall, in cooperation with the stakeholders concerned, promote the
development of common standards and practices relating to data quality, formats and
access conditions, including differentiated and proportionate access modalities, and
shall provide guidance and support measures aimed at enabling innovative
enterprises, innovative startups, innovative scaleups and SMEs to benefit from the
improved evidence base and analytical outputs.
5. Where justified by experience gained through the activities referred to in this Article,
the Office may consider, in cooperation with the stakeholders concerned, the
development of digital tools or structured data systems to further support the
fulfilment of the tasks of the Competence Centre set out in Article 32, including by
investigating the feasibility of a Union-wide register of pledges over intellectual
property assets.
6. The Office shall put in place guidance and support measures to ensure that
innovative enterprises, innovative startups, innovative scaleups and SMEs can
effectively benefit from the data collected in accordance with this Article.
Article 34
Intellectual property valuators
1. The persons and entities referred to in Article 32(2) and relevant public and private
entities in the fields of finance and insurance may request an assessment of the value
of the intellectual property rights under the voluntary Union framework in
accordance with Article 32(3), first subparagraph, point (a). Such assessment may be
carried out by an intellectual property valuator certified in accordance with Article
35.
2. Where the assessment is commissioned in connection with a financing transaction,
the information necessary for the assessment shall be provided in accordance with
the arrangements agreed between the parties concerned and subject to applicable
rules on confidentiality and the protection of trade secrets.
3. When carrying out an assessment, the intellectual property valuator shall act
independently and shall avoid any conflict of interest with the persons or entities
concerned by the assessment.
4. The fees and other costs relating to an assessment shall be borne by the person or
entity commissioning the assessment, unless otherwise agreed between the parties.
They shall be transparent, reasonable and proportionate to the nature, scope and
complexity of the assessment.
Article 35
Certification of intellectual property valuators
1. The Office shall establish and administer a Union certification scheme for
intellectual property valuators. The certification shall attest that a valuator has
acquired the knowledge and professional competence necessary to carry out
EN 75 EN
valuations under the voluntary Union framework referred to in Article 32(3), first
subparagraph, point (a).
2. Certification under this Article shall be voluntary and shall attest competence in
applying the Union valuation framework. It shall not constitute a professional licence
or confer a right to exercise a regulated profession, nor shall it be a prerequisite for
carrying out intellectual property valuations under Union or national law. It shall be
without prejudice to national rules governing regulated professions, professional
qualifications and the provision of valuation services.
3. Certification by the Office shall not make the Office responsible for individual
valuations carried out by a certified valuer and shall not confer binding or
presumptive legal effect on such valuations.
4. To be eligible for certification, the prospective valuator shall:
(a) possess an appropriate educational or professional background and relevant
professional experience, and technical competence in the valuation of
intellectual property assets;
(b) successfully complete specialised training on the application of the voluntary
Union framework referred to in Article 32(3), first subparagraph, point (a), and
an assessment demonstrating sufficient knowledge and practical ability to
apply that framework;
(c) demonstrate objectivity, integrity and adherence to appropriate professional
standards or codes of conduct.
The training and assessment referred to in the first subparagraph, points (b) and (c)
shall be organised by the Office. The Office may develop and provide such training
and assessment in cooperation with national intellectual property offices and relevant
European or international professional organisations and valuation bodies.
5. The Commission shall, by means of implementing acts, lay down the following
detailed conditions for the implementation of the certification scheme established by
this Article:
(a) the minimum educational or professional background and professional
experience required for admission to the certification scheme and the evidence
to be submitted for that purpose;
(b) the minimum content, learning outcomes and practical components of the
specialised training referred to in paragraph 4, first subparagraph point (b),
including any requirements concerning attendance;
(c) the form, content, assessment methodology and minimum pass requirements
for the assessment referred to in paragraph 4, first subparagraph, point (c);
(d) the application procedure, including the documents and evidence to be
submitted and the arrangements for verifying compliance with the conditions
laid down in paragraph 4;
(e) the period of validity of the certification and the conditions and procedure for
its renewal, including requirements relating to continuing professional
development;
EN 76 EN
(f) the grounds and procedure for suspension and withdrawal of certification,
including appropriate procedural safeguards and the right of the person
concerned to be heard;
(g) the conditions governing the use, presentation and communication of the Union
certification and certified status, including rules intended to prevent any
misleading representation as to the scope or legal effects of the certification;
and
(h) the information concerning certified valuators to be included in the database
referred to in paragraph 7 of this Article.
Those implementing acts shall be adopted in accordance with the examination procedure
referred to in Article 38(2).
6. The Office, through the Competence Centre, shall grant, renew, suspend or withdraw
certification in accordance with this Article.
7. The Office, through the Competence Centre, shall establish and maintain a publicly
accessible Union database of intellectual property valuators certified in accordance
with this Article.
8. The Executive Director may introduce charges for the certification, assessment and
renewal services provided under this Article in accordance with Article 178 of
Regulation (EU) 2017/1001. Such charges shall be transparent, non-discriminatory
and shall not exceed the cost of the specific services concerned
Article 36
Programming and reporting
1. The Office shall reflect the activities necessary for the performance of the tasks
entrusted to the Office in accordance with this Regulation in a separate section of the
multiannual strategic programme and the annual work programme of the Office
referred to in Article 153(1), points (a) and (b), of Regulation (EU) 2017/1001.
2. The separate section referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article shall set out the
objectives, activities, expected results, performance indicators and estimated human
and financial resources relating to those tasks, taking into account the relevant Union
policies and priorities. The preparation, adoption, implementation and amendment of
the multiannual strategic programme and the annual work programme shall be
governed by Regulation (EU) 2017/1001.
3. The Office shall include in the annual report on the activities of the Office referred to
in Article 153(1), point (c), of Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 a specific section on the
tasks entrusted to the Office under this Article. That specific section shall contain all
of the following:
(a) a review of the main activities carried out during the preceding year;
(b) the results achieved in relation to the objectives and performance indicators set
out in the annual work programme;
(c) an overall assessment of the fulfilment of those tasks, including the financial and
staff resources used, any revenue obtained from charges and any material effect
on the performance of the other statutory tasks of the Office;
(d) an overview of the activities planned for the following years.
EN 77 EN
Article 37
Amendment to Regulation (EU) 2017/1001
In Article 151(1) of Regulation (EU) 2017/1001, the following point (f) is added:
‘(f) the tasks entrusted to it under Regulation (EU) 202X/XXXX of the European Parliament
and of the Council. *+’
_________________________
* Regulation (EU) 202X/XXXX of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ…,
ELI…).’.
Chapter 4
FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 38
Committee procedure
1. The Commission shall be assisted by the Committee on Implementation Rules
established by Regulation (EU) 2017/1001. That committee shall be a committee
within the meaning of Regulation (EU) No 182/2011.
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Article 5 of Regulation (EU) No
182/2011 shall apply.
Article 39
Exercise of the delegation
1. The power to adopt delegated acts is conferred on the Commission subject to the
conditions laid down in this Article.
2. The power to adopt delegated acts referred to in Article 11(2), Article19(10), Article
22(5), Article 24(12), Article 28(5) and Article 31(8) shall be conferred on the
Commission for a period of five years from the entry into force of this Regulation.
The Commission shall draw up a report in respect of the delegation of power not
later than nine months before the end of the five-year period. The delegation of
power shall be tacitly extended for periods of an identical duration, unless the
European Parliament or the Council opposes such extension not later than three
months before the end of each period.
3. The delegation of power referred to in Article 7(2), Article 19(11), Article 22(5),
Article 24(12), Article 28(5) and Article 31(8) may be revoked at any time by the
European Parliament or by the Council. A decision to revoke shall put an end to the
delegation of the power specified in that decision. It shall take effect on the day
following the publication of the decision in the Official Journal of the European
+ OJ: Please insert in the text the number, date, title and OJ reference of the present Regulation (European
Innovation Act) in the footnote.
EN 78 EN
Union or at a later date specified therein. It shall not affect the validity of any
delegated acts already in force.
4. Before adopting a delegated act, the Commission shall consult experts designated by
each Member State in accordance with the principles laid down in the
Interinstitutional Agreement of 13 April 2016 on Better Law-Making.
5. As soon as it adopts a delegated act, the Commission shall notify it simultaneously to
the European Parliament and to the Council.
6. A delegated act adopted pursuant to Article 11(2), Article 19(10), Article 22(5),
Article 24(12), Article 28(5) and Article 31(8) shall enter into force only if no
objection has been expressed either by the European Parliament or by the Council
within a period of two months of notification of that act to the European Parliament
and the Council or if, before the expiry of that period, the European Parliament and
the Council have both informed the Commission that they will not object. That
period shall be extended by two months at the initiative of the European Parliament
or of the Council.
Article 40
Evaluation
By [OP please insert date four years from the date of entry into force of this Regulation] and
every five years thereafter, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of this Regulation in
light of the objectives that it pursues, in particular on strengthening the role of public
procurement as a driver of innovation and enhancing the valuation, commercialisation and use
of IP, and shall present a report thereon to the European Parliament, to the Council and to the
European Economic and Social Committee. Where appropriate, this evaluation shall be
accompanied by a proposal for amendments to or a repeal of this Regulation.
Article 41
Entry into force
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in
the Official Journal of the European Union.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels,
For the European Parliament For the Council
The President The President
[...] [...]
EN 1 EN
LEGISLATIVE FINANCIAL AND DIGITAL STATEMENT
Contents
1. CONTEXT OF THE PROPOSAL ............................................................................... 1
1.1. Reasons for and objectives of the proposal .................................................................. 1
1.2. Consistency with existing policy provisions in the policy area ................................... 4
1.3. Consistency with other Union policies ........................................................................ 5
2. LEGAL BASIS, SUBSIDIARITY AND PROPORTIONALITY ............................... 6
2.1. Legal basis .................................................................................................................... 6
2.2. Subsidiarity (for non-exclusive competence)............................................................... 7
2.3. Proportionality ............................................................................................................. 8
2.4. Choice of the instrument .............................................................................................. 9
3. RESULTS OF EX-POST EVALUATIONS, STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS
AND IMPACT ASSESSMENTS ................................................................................ 9
3.1. Stakeholder consultations ............................................................................................ 9
3.2. Collection and use of expertise .................................................................................. 10
3.3. Impact assessment ...................................................................................................... 11
3.4. Regulatory fitness and simplification ........................................................................ 14
4. Fundamental rights ..................................................................................................... 14
5. BUDGETARY IMPLICATIONS .............................................................................. 14
6. OTHER ELEMENTS ................................................................................................ 15
• Implementation plans and monitoring, evaluation and reporting arrangements ........ 15
• Detailed explanation of the specific provisions of the proposal ................................ 15
1. FRAMEWORK OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE ................................................. 4
1.1. Title of the proposal/initiative ...................................................................................... 4
1.2. Policy area(s) concerned .............................................................................................. 4
1.3. Objective(s) .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3.1. General objective(s) ..................................................................................................... 4
1.3.2. Specific objective(s) ..................................................................................................... 4
1.3.3. Expected result(s) and impact ...................................................................................... 4
1.3.4. Indicators of performance ............................................................................................ 6
1.4. The proposal/initiative relates to: ................................................................................. 6
1.5. Grounds for the proposal/initiative .............................................................................. 6
1.5.1. Requirement(s) to be met in the short or long term including a detailed timeline for
roll-out of the implementation of the initiative ............................................................ 6
1.5.2. Added value of EU involvement (it may result from different factors, e.g.
coordination gains, legal certainty, greater effectiveness or complementarities). ....... 7
EN 2 EN
1.5.3. Lessons learned from similar experiences in the past .................................................. 7
1.5.4. Compatibility with the multiannual financial framework and possible synergies with
other appropriate instruments ....................................................................................... 8
1.5.5. Assessment of the different available financing options, including scope for
redeployment ................................................................................................................ 8
1.6. Duration of the proposal/initiative and of its financial impact .................................... 9
1.7. Method(s) of budget implementation planned ............................................................. 9
2. MANAGEMENT MEASURES................................................................................. 10
2.1. Monitoring and reporting rules .................................................................................. 10
2.2. Management and control system(s) ........................................................................... 10
2.2.1. Justification of the budget implementation method(s), the funding implementation
mechanism(s), the payment modalities and the control strategy proposed ................ 10
2.2.2. Information concerning the risks identified and the internal control system(s) set up
to mitigate them.......................................................................................................... 10
2.2.3. Estimation and justification of the cost-effectiveness of the controls (ratio between
the control costs and the value of the related funds managed), and assessment of the
expected levels of risk of error (at payment & at closure) ......................................... 10
2.3. Measures to prevent fraud and irregularities .............................................................. 11
3. ESTIMATED FINANCIAL IMPACT OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE ............ 12
3.1. Heading(s) of the multiannual financial framework and expenditure budget line(s)
affected ....................................................................................................................... 12
3.2. Estimated financial impact of the proposal on appropriations ................................... 13
3.2.1. Summary of estimated impact on operational appropriations.................................... 13
3.2.1.1. Appropriations from voted budget ............................................................................. 13
3.2.3. Summary of estimated impact on administrative appropriations ............................... 15
3.2.3.1. Appropriations from voted budget .............................................................................. 15
3.2.4. Estimated requirements of human resources.............................................................. 15
3.2.4.1. Financed from voted budget....................................................................................... 15
3.2.5. Overview of estimated impact on digital technology-related investments ................ 17
3.2.6. Compatibility with the current multiannual financial framework.............................. 17
3.2.7. Third-party contributions ........................................................................................... 18
3.2.8. Estimated human resources and the use of appropriations required in a
decentralised agency .................................................................................................. 18
3.3. Estimated impact on revenue ..................................................................................... 20
4. DIGITAL DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................... 20
4.1. Requirements of digital relevance .............................................................................. 20
4.2. Data ............................................................................................................................ 22
4.3. Digital solutions ......................................................................................................... 24
EN 3 EN
4.4. Interoperability assessment ........................................................................................ 24
4.5. Measures to support digital implementation .............................................................. 25
EN 4 EN
1. FRAMEWORK OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE
1.1. Title of the proposal/initiative
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a framework of measures for strengthening Europe’s innovation
ecosystem (European Innovation Act)
1.2. Policy area(s) concerned
Single market, competitiveness, research and innovation
1.3. Objective(s)
1.3.1. General objective(s)
The general objective of the initiative is to improve the functioning of the Single
Market for innovation by reducing barriers to the development, testing and scale-up
of innovative solutions, thereby speeding up their commercialisation in the Union.
1.3.2. Specific objective(s)
Specific objective No 1
Lower valuation costs and increase licensing and transfer of IPs in the EU in the next
4 years.
Specific objective No 2
Increase spending on procurement of R&D services in the next 5 years.
Specific objective No 3
Increase the procurement of EU-based R&D solutions in the next 5 years.
1.3.3. Expected result(s) and impact
Specify the effects which the proposal/initiative should have on the beneficiaries/groups targeted.
Economic benefits
The introduction of a harmonised EU-wide IP valuation framework,
complemented by an EU IP Training Centre and an IP matchmaking platform,
is expected to reduce the costs and complexity associated with the valuation,
management, and monetisation of intellectual property assets. By providing
standardised valuation methodologies, specialised expertise, and improved market
infrastructure, these measures would reduce information asymmetries between firms
and external financiers regarding the economic value of IP assets.
Improved transparency and credibility in IP valuation are expected to facilitate the
use of patents and other IP assets as collateral, thereby increasing access to both debt
and equity financing. In particular, standardised valuation systems can strengthen the
collateral function of IP for banks and the signalling function of IP for venture
capital investors, contributing to greater volumes of IP-backed finance. As firms
become better able to capture and communicate the economic value of their
intellectual property, the expected returns from patenting are likely to increase,
creating stronger incentives to invest in innovation and seek formal IP protection.
The literature suggests that this relationship may generate a virtuous cycle between
patenting and financing. Stronger IP portfolios facilitate access to external finance,
EN 5 EN
while improved financing conditions support additional R&D investments and
innovation activities, leading to further patent generation. Beyond increasing the
quantity of patent applications, more reliable valuation mechanisms may also
improve patent quality by encouraging firms to focus on inventions with greater
technological and commercial potential.
Several strands of evidence support this mechanism. From a real-options perspective,
credible valuation systems and secondary IP markets increase the reversibility of
patent-related investments by transforming patents into tradable assets rather than
purely legal instruments. This reduces the effective risk of patenting and encourages
firms to file patents that can subsequently be licensed, sold, or used to support
financing transactions. Evidence from the United States shows that exposure to
secondary patent markets increases patenting activity, particularly under conditions
of economic uncertainty, while also encouraging firms to patent inventions that
would otherwise be kept as trade secrets.
The introduction of a harmonised EU-level framework for R&D procurement is
expected to significantly reduce the legal uncertainty and procedural complexity
currently associated with R&D procurement across Member States. This is expected
to facilitate the implementation of cross-border R&D procurement projects, enabling
public buyers to pool demand and achieve greater critical mass, thereby unlocking
the full potential of the Single Market for innovation procurement.
Embedding proven innovation-oriented procurement practices within a common
framework would also improve the effectiveness and efficiency of R&D
procurement processes, increasing the return on public investment in innovation.
Clearer procedures would enhance public buyers' capacity to design and manage
R&D procurement projects, while lowering participation costs and barriers for
suppliers. This is expected to encourage a larger number of firms, including those
from different Member States, to participate in R&D procurement call for tenders,
thereby increasing competition, improving the quality of proposed solutions, and
broadening access to innovative technologies.
Furthermore, the introduction of an EU preference within R&D procurement
procedures would increase the likelihood that significant economic and technological
benefits generated through publicly funded R&D procurement remain within the
European Union. Strengthening demand for innovative solutions developed by EU-
based firms would support private R&D investment, foster the growth of European
innovation ecosystems, and contribute to the creation of high-value jobs. In doing so,
it would reinforce the EU's strategic autonomy and technological sovereignty in
critical technologies and sectors.
Overall, the European Innovation Act is estimated to increase EU GDP by between
0.25% and 0.42% over a ten-year horizon relative to a baseline scenario without the
European Innovation Act.
Beyond its effects on GDP and employment, the European Innovation Act is
expected to generate broader societal benefits by strengthening the translation of
research and innovation into marketable solutions. A substantial body of empirical
evidence shows that sustained public and private investment in research and
innovation accelerates the development, diffusion, and cost reduction of clean
technologies, contributing to lower greenhouse gas emissions, improved energy
efficiency, and more sustainable production processes. These benefits are likely to
EN 6 EN
generate positive environmental and social externalities that are only partially
captured by conventional macroeconomic indicators such as GDP.
1.3.4. Indicators of performance
Specify the indicators for monitoring progress and achievements.
Progress towards the specific objective of reducing IP valuation costs and increasing
the licensing, transfer, and financial utilisation of intellectual property rights (IP
rights) in the EU will be monitored through several indicators. These include the
number of Member States integrating the European Union Intellectual Property
Office valuation standards into their national valuation practices, the number of
transactions applying the EU IP valuation methodology, the average IP valuation
costs borne by firms, and the number of companies using IP assets as collateral or in
financing transactions.
Progress towards the specific objective of increasing expenditure on the procurement
of R&D services will be measured by the share of R&D expenditure in total public
procurement and the number and value of cross-border R&D procurement contracts.
Progress towards the specific objective of increasing the procurement of EU-based
R&D solutions will be monitored through the number and value of R&D
procurement contracts awarded to EU-based suppliers and solutions.
1.4. The proposal/initiative relates to:
a new action
a new action following a pilot project / preparatory action50
the extension of an existing action
a merger or redirection of one or more actions towards another/a new action
1.5. Grounds for the proposal/initiative
1.5.1. Requirement(s) to be met in the short or long term including a detailed timeline for
roll-out of the implementation of the initiative
The proposal responds to the need to address the existing fragmentations in the
Single Market in the field of R&D procurement by establishing a harmonised
procedure for R&D procurements and joint cross-border R&D procurements to be
implemented by public buyers in all Member States in accordance with this
Regulation once it enters into force.
Furthermore, the entrusts new tasks to the European Union Intellectual Property
Office, including the establishment of a European Union Competence Centre for
intellectual property-backed finance and commercialisation of intellectual
property once the Regulation enters into force. Once established within the
European Union Intellectual Property Office, the Competence Centre will start
discharging the tasks conferred upon it by the Regulation including providing
support to various stakeholders in the fields of intellectual property-backed financing
and commercialisation of intellectual property assets. Finally, by 1 September 2028
(to be intended as tentative date, as IT development require time), the European
Union Intellectual Property Office, through the Competence Centre, will develop a
valuation framework for all intangible assets and establish a digital matchmaking
50 As referred to in Article 58(2), point (a) or (b) of the Financial Regulation.
EN 7 EN
platform to facilitate the licensing and transfer of all types of intellectual property
rights protected at Union level.
1.5.2. Added value of EU involvement (it may result from different factors, e.g.
coordination gains, legal certainty, greater effectiveness or complementarities).
For the purposes of this section 'added value of EU involvement' is the value resulting from
EU action, that is additional to the value that would have been otherwise created by Member
States alone.
Reasons for action at EU level (ex-ante)
The proposed measures focus on areas where there is clear added value in acting at
Union level due to the scale, speed and scope of the efforts needed. Actions aim at
improving the business case for innovators to bring innovations to the market by
facilitating the valuation, commercialisation and use of IP rights as a collateral to
obtain IP-backed finance and by making it easier to find first customers through
R&D procurement. It enhances efficiency by enabling better cross-border
cooperation, ensures fairer access to opportunities for innovative companies
irrespective of their location, and strengthens the Union’s capacity to compete
globally.
Expected generated EU added value (ex-post)
EU intervention will generate lasting benefits through economies of scale, lower
transaction costs, and improved legal certainty for public buyers, companies and
investors. It will strengthen Europe’s capacity to place innovative solutions on the
market and to commercialise intellectual property assets and leverage them in
company financing. Harmonised and digitalised procedures for R&D procurement
will reduce transaction costs and administrative burden for public buyers and
companies participating in R&D procurements, while providing uniform market
conditions across Member States. Establishment of the Competence Centre within
the European Union Intellectual Property Office will increase the uptake of
intellectual property-backed financing in Europe, increasing financing opportunities
for innovative companies.
1.5.3. Lessons learned from similar experiences in the past
The European Union Intellectual Property Office has gathered a significant expertise
in the field of IP rights through its tasks related to the protection of EU trademarks,
designs and geographic indications, as well as monitoring infringements of all types
of intellectual property rights through the European Observatory on Infringements of
Intellectual Property Rights. Taking into account this experience, the proposal builds
on European Union Intellectual Property Office’s expertise by entrusting to it
additional tasks related to valuation and commercialisation of IP.
The Innovation Partnership procedure, which was introduced in the 2014 EU public
procurement directives, is used only to a very limited extent. The evaluation of the
2014 EU public procurement directives concluded that in the ongoing revision of the
EU public procurement directives the obligation that this procedure must involve the
procurement of R&D should be removed, because public buyers do not like buying
R&D as part of a procedure that buys commercial volumes of solutions and that is
open to providers from all third countries with who the Union has an international
agreement on public procurement. Taking into account this experience, the European
the proposal aims to provide a procedure for R&D procurement for buying R&D
EN 8 EN
services that does not involve the procurement of commercial volumes of solutions
and that can be open only to providers from Member States, EEA countries and
Western Balkan countries.
1.5.4. Compatibility with the multiannual financial framework and possible synergies with
other appropriate instruments
The proposal is fully consistent with the 2021-2027 Multiannual Financial
Framework and will be implemented through existing Union programmes without
creating new spending envelopes or financial obligations beyond existing resources.
Should the co-legislators approve the proposal and decide that the EUIPO sets up,
runs the Center and contributes funds (either from the operational or the surplus), it
should be noted that this EUIPO contribution would not come from the EU budget (it
is not EU contribution) but from the EUIPO’s budget and therefore, it does not
depend on the MFF.
In that sense, the decision on the specific budgetary elements would be subject to the
decision and approval of the Management Board and Budgetary Committee (MBBC)
of the EUIPO.
1.5.5. Assessment of the different available financing options, including scope for
redeployment
All financing will be ensured through redeployments from programmes. Without
prejudice to the outcome of negotiations on the next MFF, the appropriations
foreseen from 2028 onwards are strictly indicative.
EN 9 EN
1.6. Duration of the proposal/initiative and of its financial impact
limited duration
– in effect from [DD/MM]YYYY to [DD/MM]YYYY
– financial impact from YYYY to YYYY for commitment appropriations and
from YYYY to YYYY for payment appropriations.
unlimited duration
– Implementation with a start-up period from YYYY to YYYY,
– followed by full-scale operation.
1.7. Method(s) of budget implementation planned51
Direct management by the Commission
– by its departments, including by its staff in the Union delegations;
– by the executive agencies
Shared management with the Member States
Indirect management by entrusting budget implementation tasks to:
– third countries or the bodies they have designated
– international organisations and their agencies (to be specified)
– the European Investment Bank and the European Investment Fund
– bodies referred to in Articles 70 and 71 of the Financial Regulation
– public law bodies
– bodies governed by private law with a public service mission to the extent that
they are provided with adequate financial guarantees
– bodies governed by the private law of a Member State that are entrusted with
the implementation of a public-private partnership and that are provided with
adequate financial guarantees
– bodies or persons entrusted with the implementation of specific actions in the
common foreign and security policy pursuant to Title V of the Treaty on
European Union, and identified in the relevant basic act
– bodies established in a Member State, governed by the private law of a
Member State or Union law and eligible to be entrusted, in accordance with
sector-specific rules, with the implementation of Union funds or budgetary
guarantees, to the extent that such bodies are controlled by public law bodies or
by bodies governed by private law with a public service mission, and are provided
with adequate financial guarantees in the form of joint and several liability by the
controlling bodies or equivalent financial guarantees and which may be, for each
action, limited to the maximum amount of the Union support.
51 Details of budget implementation methods and references to the Financial Regulation may be found on
the BUDGpedia site: https://myintracomm.ec.europa.eu/corp/budget/financial-rules/budget-
implementation/Pages/implementation-methods.aspx.
EN 10 EN
2. MANAGEMENT MEASURES
2.1. Monitoring and reporting rules
This Statement includes staff expenditures. Standard rules for this type of
expenditure apply. The Commission will evaluate the output, results and impact of
this proposal every three years after the date on which it becomes applicable. The
evaluation will assess the contribution of this Regulation to the functioning of the
single market, including the objectives specified in in this Regulation.
2.2. Management and control system(s)
2.2.1. Justification of the budget implementation method(s), the funding implementation
mechanism(s), the payment modalities and the control strategy proposed
The management mode for the initiative is direct management by the Commission.
This is the most appropriate approach given the limited scope of Union expenditure,
which is confined to standard administrative and monitoring-related costs. Using
established internal procedures ensures effective and efficient controls, low error
rates, fast processing of transactions and minimal control costs
2.2.2. Information concerning the risks identified and the internal control system(s) set up
to mitigate them
Overall, the initiative requires staff expenditure. Standard rules for this type of
expenditure apply. Most aspects of the initiative follow established procedures for
monitoring the implementation of this Regulation.
The main operational risk is insufficient administrative capacity to monitor the
implementation of the obligations laid down in the Regulation. This proposal is
accompanied by an impact assessment report, which provides the analytics
underpinning the chosen policy approach. The preparation of the initiative also drew
on a public consultation as well as targeted consultations with industry stakeholders,
Member States and trade associations, which ensured the collection of relevant data,
information and feedback. Nonetheless, unintentional consequences or unforeseen
impacts may still occur during implementation. These will be identified through the
monitoring procedures set out in the Regulation, allowing the Commission to address
them in an appropriate and timely manner.
2.2.3. Estimation and justification of the cost-effectiveness of the controls (ratio between
the control costs and the value of the related funds managed), and assessment of the
expected levels of risk of error (at payment & at closure)
The initiative involves limited administrative expenditure. Standard Commission
control procedures apply. As no funding programmes or multi-layered delivery
mechanisms are created, control activities remain straightforward and cost-effective.
Controls are carried out entirely under direct management, using standard ex-post
audits under the Commission’s internal control framework. This ensures an
appropriate balance between control effort and the limited value of funds managed.
Given the simplified set-up and the absence of high-risk financial operations, the
expected error rate at payment and at closure is low and comfortably below the
materiality threshold. The control system therefore provides a high level of assurance
at proportionate cost.
EN 11 EN
2.3. Measures to prevent fraud and irregularities
The initiative does not establish funding programmes or financial support schemes. It
therefore relies on the Commission’s existing internal control framework and Anti-
Fraud Strategy. Standard preventive and detective measures apply, including risk-
based internal controls, segregation of duties and established workflows for
administrative expenditure.
The Office shall ensure, in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 and the
financial rules applicable to the Office, that appropriate measures are in place to
protect the financial interests of the Union in the performance of the tasks entrusted
to it under this Regulation, including measures to prevent, detect and address fraud,
corruption, conflicts of interest and other irregularities. The Commission shall
exercise the oversight and monitoring functions conferred on it under the applicable
governance framework.
As with all Commission-managed activities, the European Anti-Fraud Office
(OLAF) and the European Public Prosecutor’s Office (EPPO) may exercise their
powers in accordance with their respective legal bases to investigate fraud,
corruption or other illegal activities affecting the EU’s financial interests. The
European Court of Auditors retains its standard audit rights over Commission
expenditure.
EN 12 EN
3. ESTIMATED FINANCIAL IMPACT OF THE PROPOSAL/INITIATIVE
The estimated impact on expenditure and staffing for 2028 and beyond is added for
illustrative purposes only and does not pre-judge the next Multiannual Financial
Framework. The source of financing and scope of Union financial commitment in the
post-2027 period remain subject to the outcome of interinstitutional negotiations on
the MFF 2028-2034 and thereafter shall be determined through the annual budgetary
procedure. All appropriations and staffing allocations as of 2028 are indicative. As
regards the EUIPO budget, the figures are indicative and subject to approval by the
EUIPO governing bodies in accordance with the EUTMR.
3.1. Heading(s) of the multiannual financial framework and expenditure budget
line(s) affected
• Existing budget lines
In order of multiannual financial framework headings and budget lines.
Heading of
multiannual
financial
framework
Budget line Type of
expenditure Contribution
Number
Diff./Non-
diff.52
from
EFTA
countries 53
from
candidate
countries
and
potential
candidates 54
From
other
third
countries
other assigned
revenue
02 01 01 01 01
Non-diff. YES YES NO NO
• New budget lines requested
In order of multiannual financial framework headings and budget lines.
Heading of
multiannual
financial
framework
Budget line Type of
expenditure Contribution
Number
Diff./Non-
diff.
from
EFTA
countries
from
candidate
countries
and
potential
candidates
from
other
third
countries
other assigned
revenue
N/A
52 Diff. = Differentiated appropriations / Non-diff. = Non-differentiated appropriations. 53 EFTA: European Free Trade Association. 54 Candidate countries and, where applicable, potential candidates from the Western Balkans.
EN 13 EN
3.2. Estimated financial impact of the proposal on appropriations
3.2.1. Summary of estimated impact on operational appropriations
– The proposal/initiative does not require the use of operational appropriations
– The proposal/initiative requires the use of operational appropriations, as explained below
3.2.1.1. Appropriations from voted budget
EUR million (to three decimal places)
Heading of multiannual financial framework Number 02
DG: RTD Year Year Year Year Year Year Year
TOTAL MFF 2028-2034 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Operational appropriations
Budget line Commitments (1a) 0
Payments (2a) 0
Budget line Commitments (1b) 0
Payments (2b) 0
Appropriations of an administrative nature financed from the envelope of specific programmes55
Budget line 01 01 01 01 (3) 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 4.074
TOTAL appropriations Commitments =1a+1b+3 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 4.074
for DG RTD Payments =2a+2b+3 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 4.074
55 Technical and/or administrative assistance and expenditure in support of the implementation of EU programmes and/or actions (former ‘BA’ lines), indirect research, direct research.
EN 14 EN
EUR million (to three decimal places)
Year Year Year Year Year Year Year TOTAL
MFF 2028-
2034 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
TOTAL
appropriations under
HEADINGS 1 to 4
Commitments 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 4.074
of the multiannual
financial framework Payments 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 4.074
EN 15 EN
3.2.3. Summary of estimated impact on administrative appropriations
– The proposal/initiative does not require the use of appropriations of an
administrative nature
– The proposal/initiative requires the use of appropriations of an administrative
nature, as explained below
3.2.3.1. Appropriations from voted budget
VOTED APPROPRIATIONS Year Year Year Year Year Year Year TOTAL
2028 -
2034 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
HEADING 4
Human resources 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.0000.0000.000 0.000
Other administrative expenditure 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.0000.0000.000 0.000
Subtotal HEADING 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Outside HEADING 4
Human resources 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.582 0.5820.5820.582 4.074
Other expenditure of an administrative
nature 0
0 0 0 000 0
Subtotal outside HEADING 4 0.5820.5820.5820.5820.5820.5820.582 4.074
TOTAL 0.5820.5820.5820.5820.5820.5820.582 4.074
The estimated impact on expenditure and staffing for 2028 and beyond is added for illustrative
purposes only and does not pre-judge the next Multiannual Financial Framework. The source of
financing and scope of Union financial commitment in the post-2027 period remain subject to the
outcome of interinstitutional negotiations on the MFF 2028-2034 and thereafter shall be determined
through the annual budgetary procedure. All appropriations and staffing allocations as of 2028 are
indicative.
3.2.4. Estimated requirements of human resources
– The proposal/initiative does not require the use of human resources
– The proposal/initiative requires the use of human resources, as explained
below
3.2.4.1. Financed from voted budget
Estimate to be expressed in full-time equivalent units (FTEs)56
VOTED APPROPRIATIONS Year Year Year Year Year Year Year
2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Establishment plan posts (officials and temporary staff)
20 01 02 01 (Headquarters and Commission’s Representation
Offices)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 01 02 03 (EU Delegations) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Indirect research) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(Direct research) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
56 Please specify below the table how many FTEs within the number indicated are already assigned to the
management of the action and/or can be redeployed within your DG and what are your net needs.
EN 16 EN
Other budget lines (specify) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• External staff (in FTEs)
20 02 01 (AC, END from the
‘global envelope’) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 02 03 (AC, AL, END and JPD
in the EU Delegations) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Admin. Support
line
• at Headquart ers
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[XX.01.YY.YY] • in EU
Delegations 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(AC, END - Indirect research) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(AC, END - Direct research) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Other budget lines (specify) -
Heading 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Other budget lines (specify) -
Outside Heading 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The staff required to implement the proposal (in FTEs):
To be covered by
current staff
available in the
Commission services
Exceptional additional staff*
To be financed
under Heading
4 or Research
To be financed
from BA line
To be financed
from fees
Establishment
plan posts
3
[N.B. Considering the
overall strained
situation in Heading 4,
in terms of both
staffing and the level
of appropriations, the
human resources
required will be met by
staff from the DG who
are already assigned to
the management of the
action and/or have
been redeployed within
the DG or other
Commission services]
N/A
External staff
(CA, SNEs, INT)
Description of tasks to be carried out by:
Officials and temporary staff 3 FTEs are needed to monitor the implementation and enforcement of
the Regulation.
EN 17 EN
External staff
3.2.5. Overview of estimated impact on digital technology-related investments
Compulsory: the best estimate of the digital technology-related investments entailed
by the proposal/initiative should be included in the table below.
Exceptionally, when required for the implementation of the proposal/initiative, the
appropriations under Heading 4 should be presented in the designated line.
The appropriations under Headings 1-3 should be reflected as “Policy IT expenditure
on operational programmes”. This expenditure refers to the operational budget to be
used to re-use/ buy/ develop IT platforms/ tools directly linked to the implementation
of the initiative and their associated investments (e.g. licences, studies, data storage
etc). The information provided in this table should be consistent with details
presented under Section 4 “Digital dimensions”.
TOTAL Digital
and IT
appropriations
Year Year Year Year Year Year Year TOTAL
MFF
2028 -
2034 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
HEADING 4
IT expenditure (corporate)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Subtotal
HEADING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Outside HEADING 4
Policy IT expenditure on operational programmes
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Subtotal outside
HEADING 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOTAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.2.6. Compatibility with the current multiannual financial framework
The proposal/initiative:
– can be fully financed through redeployment within the relevant heading of the
multiannual financial framework (MFF)
– requires use of the unallocated margin under the relevant heading of the MFF
and/or use of the special instruments as defined in the MFF Regulation
– requires a revision of the MFF
3.2.7. Third-party contributions
The proposal/initiative:
– does not provide for co-financing by third parties
EN 18 EN
– provides for the co-financing by third parties estimated below:
Appropriations in EUR million (to three decimal places)
Year Year Year Year Year Year Year
Total 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Specify the co-
financing body
TOTAL
appropriations
co-financed
3.2.8. Estimated human resources and the use of appropriations required in a decentralised
agency
The Competence Centre would provide support in areas such as IP exploitation,
commercialisation and access to finance. The implementation of these activities is estimated
to require 10 FTEs per year during the implementation phase, assuming a two-year
development period. If the Act enters into force in 2028, this phase would therefore cover
2028 and 2029. Once the Competence Centre becomes fully operational, the estimated
staffing requirement would decrease to 8 FTEs per year.
Staff requirements (full-time equivalent units)
Agency: EUIPO Year
2028
Year
2029
Year
2030
Year
2031
Year
2032
Year
2033
Year
2034
Temporary agents
(AD Grades) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
Temporary agents
(AST grades) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Temporary agents
(AD+AST) subtotal 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
Contract agents 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Seconded national
experts 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Contract agents and
seconded national
experts subtotal
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
EN 19 EN
TOTAL staff 10 10 8 8 8 8 8
Overview/summary of human resources and appropriations (in EUR million) required by the
proposal/initiative in a decentralised agency
Agency: EUIPO Year
2028
Year
2029
Year
2030
Year
2031
Year
2032
Year
2033
Year
2034
Temporary agents
(AD+AST) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
Contract agents 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Seconded national experts 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total staff 10 10 8 8 8 8 8
Appropriations covered by
the EU budget 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Appropriations covered by
fees
(if applicable)
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Appropriations covered by
EUIPO operative budget /
surplus
(as applicable)
0.746 1.523 1.173 1.196 1.220 1.245 1.269
Appropriations co-
financed
(if applicable)
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
TOTAL appropriations 0.746 1.523 1.173 1.196 1.220 1.245 1.269
The Office reserves its position as regards the calculation of the revenue derivable from the
relevant EIA provision.
3.3. Estimated impact on revenue
– The proposal/initiative has no financial impact on revenue.
– The proposal/initiative has the following financial impact:
EN 20 EN
– on own resources
– on other revenue
– please indicate, if the revenue is assigned to expenditure lines
EUR million (to three decimal places)
Budget revenue line:
Appropriations
available for
the current
financial year
Impact of the proposal/initiative57
Year
2028
Year
2029
Year
2030
Year
2031
Year
2032
Year
2033
Year
2034
Article ………….
For assigned revenue, specify the budget expenditure line(s) affected.
Other remarks (e.g. method/formula used for calculating the impact on revenue or
any other information).
4. DIGITAL DIMENSIONS
4.1. Requirements of digital relevance
Reference to
the
requirement
Requirement
description
Actor(s)
affected or
concerned by
the
requirement
High-level
Processes
Categories
Article 4(4) R&D
procurements
to be carried
out through the
TED platform
(digital
interface to
upload
procurement
notices in the
Official Journal
of the European
Union)
Public buyers
Economic
operators
R&D
procurement
Data
Digital Solution
Digital Public
Service
Process
digitalisation and
automation
Interoperability
Articles 4(4) Requirement to
use electronic
format for
Public buyers
Economic
R&D
procurement
Data
Digital Solution
57 In the case of traditional own resources (customs duties, sugar levies), the amounts indicated must be
net amounts, i.e. gross amounts after deduction of 10 % for collection costs, as proposed in
COM(2025)574.
EN 21 EN
procurement
documents
operators Digital Public
Service
Process
digitalisation and
automation
Interoperability
Article 10 Requirement on
public buyers to
specify
requirements
on contractors
to contribute to
publication of
results, where
appropriate, as
open data or
open source
Public buyers
Economic
operators
R&D
procurement
Data
Digital Solution
Digital Public
Service
Process
digitalisation and
automation
Article 26 Requirement to
respect data
protection
rules, including
those for
electronic
communication
Public buyers
Economic
operators
R&D
procurement
Data
Digital Solution
Digital Public
Service
Process
digitalisation and
automation
Article 32(3)(a) European
Union
Intellectual
Property Office
to develop a
valuation
framework for
valuation of
intangible
assets and
related digital
processes and
services related
to the
disclosure,
screening and
valuation of IP
Economic
operators
Member States
Union entities
IP valuation Data
Digital Solution
Digital Public
Service
Process
digitalisation and
automation
Article 32(3)(b) European
Union
Intellectual
Property Office
Union entities
Economic
operators
Facilitation of
IP licensing and
transfer
Data
Digital Solution
Digital Public
EN 22 EN
to establish and
maintain a
digital match-
making
platform to
facilitate the
licensing and
transfer of all
types of IP
rights protected
at Union level.
Service
Article 32(3)(g)
and Article 35
Development
of an evidence
database on IP-
backed
financing
Member States
Competent
authorities
Economic
operators
Union entities
Data processing
and analysis
Data
4.2. Data
Type of data Reference to
requirement(s)
Standard and/or specification (if
applicable)
Data related to R&D
procurement procedures on
the scope of the
procurement, on public
buyers and on
tenderers/contractors
Articles 4(4), 6, 16 and
17
Standards and specifications used
in the EU public procurment portal
(eForms, OASIS UBL, TED APIs,
eProcurement ontology)
Data related to IP-backed
financing, including
information on how
intellectual property used
as collateral for credit or
insurance purposes or as
in-kind contribution in
equity investment
scenarios has been
evaluated, on the size and
characteristics of the
corresponding transaction,
on the type of intellectual
property right concerned,
and on relevant indicators
such as equity valuation,
collateralisation, or loan to
value ratios.
Article 32(3)g) and
Article 33
Standards and specifications to be
defined by the European Union
Intellectual Property Office
Competence Centre for IP-backed
finance, in cooperation with the
Commission, covering:
harmonised data requirements for
IP asset type, collateral structure,
transaction size, and loan
outcomes; data sharing and access
protocols consistent with
applicable data protection rules;
interoperability requirements
enabling linkage between IP
registries, commercial registries,
and public instrument records; and
standards for the anonymisation
and aggregation of transaction-
EN 23 EN
level data collected through EU-
supported IP-backed finance
instruments.
Alignment with the European Data Strategy
Explain how the requirement(s) are aligned with the European Data Strategy
• The proposal promotes the use of digital tools for R&D procurement procedures and
for valuation and commercialisation of IP, which is in line with the European Data
Strategy's objective of promoting digitalization and data-driven innovation.
• The proposal builds on the existing digital tools for public procurement, including the
national procurement portals. This is consistent with the European Data Strategy's goal
of improving data sharing and interoperability.
• The proposal promotes transparency while respecting data protection and data
confidentiality rules, the protection of intellectual property rights and the safeguarding
of trade secrets. This is in line with the European Data Strategy's objective of
promoting transparency and trust in data-driven ecosystems.
• The proposal aims to create a favorable environment for startups and scaleups, which
is consistent with the European Data Strategy's goal of promoting innovation and
entrepreneurship through data-driven technologies.
Explanation of how newly created data is findable, accessible, interoperable and reusable, and
meets high-quality standards
The accessibility, findability, interoperability and reusability of data and the data-quality
requirements related to R&D procurements is currently defined in the rules for
publication of and access to data on the TED portal
Data collected under the Act will be managed by European Union Intellectual Property
Office. The European Union Intellectual Property Office Competence Centre will
maintain a structured repository with defined metadata standards to support discoverability
and reuse. The Office is the legal entity that will maintain the repository. Access will be
governed by clear protocols, distinguishing between publicly available data and data
accessible only to authorised bodies. Interoperability with existing IP registries and
commercial registers will be pursued through common data formats and shared identifiers.
Data quality standards, including validation rules and reporting obligations for participating
entities, will be defined by the Competence Centre in cooperation with the Commission.
Data flows
High-level description of the data flows
Type of data Reference(s)
to the
requirement(s)
Actor who
provides the
data
Actor
who
receives
the data
Trigger for
the data
exchange
Frequency
(if
applicable)
Procurement
documents
and notices
Articles 4(4),
6, 16 and 17
Public buyer Tenderers Publication of
notices and
link to
procurement
EN 24 EN
documents
IP valuation
tools
Article
32(3)(a)
EUIPO Economic
operators
Public
bodies
IP valuation
request
IP
matchmaking
information
Article
32(3)(b)
EUIPO Economic
operators
Public
bodies
Matchmaking
request
IP-based
finance
related
evidence
Article
32(3)(g)
National
guarantee
institutions
Financial
intermediaries
EUIPO Request for
collection of
evidence
4.3. Digital solutions
4.4. Interoperability assessment
Under this proposal, R&D procurements will be carried out through the digital solutions
used in the TED portal.
Under this proposal, European Union Intellectual Property Office is tasked with developing
the following digital solutions:
• digital tools supporting the disclosure, screening and indicative valuation of IP
assets, accessible to economic operators and financial institutions
• an IP licensing and transfer platform facilitating the licensing and transfer of IP
rights protected at Union level
• IP-backed finance evidence database collecting transaction-level data on IP-backed
finance instruments
All three solutions will be operated by European Union Intellectual Property Office and
will comply with applicable cybersecurity requirements and relevant Union digital rules.
Where AI-assisted tools are used, in particular for screening and indicative valuation,
compliance with rules applicable to use of AI will be ensured and the relevant risk
classification will be assessed at design stage.
The digital solutions mandated by the Act require interaction across Member State borders
and involve multiple EU entities and public sector bodies, satisfying both conditions for an
interoperability assessment.
Currently the TED portal provides an interoperable way for public buyers to upload R&D
procurements notices that were published on national public procurement portals also on
the TED portal. In the future, the EU digital market place for public procurements is
expected to further improve interoperability between different national and EU public
procurement portals and databases, enabling economic operators from one Member State to
participate more easily in a R&D procurement procedure of a public buyer in another
EN 25 EN
4.5. Measures to support digital implementation
58 Regulation (EU) 2024/903 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 March 2024 laying
down measures for a high level of public sector interoperability across the Union (Interoperable Europe
Act) (OJ L, 2024/903, 22.03.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/903/oj).
Member State, and simplifying the process for public buyers from two or more Member
States to carry out R&D procurement procedures jointly. The TED portal will remain the
interface for public buyers to launch R&D procurement procedures and for economic
operators to find R&D procurement business opportunities. Therefore, the interactions
between national and EU public procurement portals and databases are not part of this
interoperability assessment.
The European Union Intellectual Property Office valuation tools and matchmaking platform
will be accessible to economic operators and public bodies across all Member States,
requiring semantic interoperability with national IP registries and commercial registers. The
IP-backed finance evidence database will aggregate data from national guarantee
institutions and financial intermediaries, requiring harmonised data formats and shared
identifiers. Relevant interoperability solutions available at EU level will be assessed for
reuse during the design and implementation phase. Key remaining barriers include
divergent national IP registry formats and the absence of a central EU-level IP pledge
register.
Since this proposal introduces new binding requirements for cross-border digital public
services within the meaning of Regulation (EU) 2024/903 of the European Parliament and
of the Council58, an interoperability assessment has been carried out, and the resulting
report is to be published on the Interoperable Europe Portal.
The following implementation measures are planned to support the implementation of the
digital solutions under this proposal:
For R&D procurement:
• the use of existing features for launching R&D procurement procedures through the
TED portal, and the integration of new digital features for launching R&D
procurement procedures through the EU digital market place for public
procurements
• capacity building activities targeting Member States, public buyers and economic
operators to support wide and correct use of launching R&D procurements through
the TED portal
For the European Union Intellectual Property Office activities:
• the establishment and operationalisation of the European Union Intellectual
Property Office Competence Centre for IP-backed finance, responsible for the
digital tools, the matchmaking platform, and the evidence database.
• capacity building programme targeting financial institutions, developed jointly by
European Union Intellectual Property Office and the Commission, to support uptake
of the valuation framework and digital tools.
• pilot phase for the evidence database involving selected national guarantee
institutions and financial intermediaries, enabling iterative refinement before full
EN 26 EN
deployment.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION
27.2.2026
SEC(2026) 567
REGULATORY SCRUTINY BOARD OPINION
{COM(2026) 567}
{SWD(2026) 567-568}
European Innovation Act
________________________________ Commission européenne/Europese Commissie, 1049 Bruxelles/Brussel, BELGIQUE/BELGIË - Tel. +32 22991111 [email protected]
EUROPEAN COMMISSION REGULATORY SCRUTINY BOARD
Brussels, RSB
Opinion
Title: Impact assessment / European Innovation Act
Overall 2nd opinion: NEGATIVE
(A) Policy context The European Innovation Act aims to remove barriers that hinder the proper functioning of the Single Market and prevent EU innovative companies from scaling up. It proposes establishing cross-sectoral framework conditions to facilitate the commercialisation of research results, strengthen collaboration between industry, academia and the public sector, and improve access to markets and infrastructures. In doing so, it seeks to create a more coherent regulatory, policy, and investment environment across the EU.
(B) Key issues The Board notes the significant changes in the range of the proposed measures, clarifications of the context and scope of the initiative, and improvements to the presentation of the report. However, the Board maintains its negative opinion, because the revised report still contains the following significant shortcomings: (1) There are apparent overlaps with the public procurement Directives and the
report lacks the assessment of the coherence with the upcoming revision of the public procurement rules. The subsidiarity and proportionality of the measures in the area of public procurement are not demonstrated.
(2) The analysis of impacts focusses on innovative companies while the measures covering the definitions of innovative companies, startups and scaleups have been discarded and the proposed measures in this initiative are not limited to specific company categories. This makes the overall analysis incomplete and potentially misleading.
(3) Some measures are not sufficiently specified to allow for their assessment. The analysis of costs and benefits of the specific measures is not adequate.
2
(C) What to improve (1) The relation to the EU public procurement framework remains ambiguous. On the one hand the report claims that the scope is restricted to the areas outside of the public procurement Directives’ remit (i.e. below the established financial thresholds and covering also the exempted sectors), on the other hand some proposed measures seem to go beyond the pre-commercial procurement. In view of the upcoming revision of the EU public procurement framework, the rationale and the value added for supplementing it with additional elements in the European Innovation Act should be better assessed and justified, also in the light of stakeholders’ concerns. The establishment of mandatory innovation procurement targets would extend to public procurement at large, which could create an overlap with the public procurement framework, add legal complexity and unnecessary administrative burden which is not sufficiently analysed in the report. In addition, the inclusion of public procurement below the financial thresholds established in the EU framework (currently subject to national procurement law) in the measures proposed by the European Innovation Act requires further analysis in terms of their proportionality and subsidiarity. (2) In the revised report the measures for ‘operationalising the definitions of innovative companies, startups and scaleups’ have been discarded, arguing that the proposed measures would apply to all companies. Yet the issue of establishing the definitions of such companies in the overall innovation framework remains unresolved: the report refers to the forthcoming EU level company definition whereas the analysis of impact of the measures focusses heavily on innovative companies. However, the potential consequences resulting from overlaps with the existing definitions of SMEs, micro-companies and small mid-caps are not assessed. Furthermore, the impact on legal certainty for companies as well as the impact on establishing a threshold in terms of innovation spending for SMEs should be analysed. (3) Several of the options and measures analysed, (including measures 1, 2, 5, 7 and 8), are not specified at a sufficient level of detail. This makes it difficult to assess what impacts would follow from introducing these measures, including their feasibility, effectiveness, efficiency and proportionality. (4) The report should investigate the indirect effects of some measures that may have significant consequences. For instance, the costs of mandatory innovation procurement targets and other measures related to procurement are not limited to the administrative and adjustment costs of establishing the targets. The report would need to assess whether the fact that the targets would have to be met may lead to procuring (innovative) products and services at higher costs. Similarly, the EU preference in private and public procurement outside the EU procurement framework may induce higher costs to public and private stakeholders, which are not properly analysed in the report. The risk that preset or too narrow definitions and principles for sandboxes could lead to the exclusion of some potentially beneficial experiments should also be assessed. (5) The magnitude(s) of the benefits alleged to result from several of the proposed measures, (including measures 1, 2 and 3), are neither sufficiently assessed nor credibly demonstrated. The assumptions behind such benefit estimates are not always robust. (6) Given the above, the report does not provide a sufficient evidence base to be informative for the decision making.
3
(D) Conclusion The Board’s opinion is as a rule final. The lead Service can seek political guidance on whether, and under which conditions, this initiative may proceed further.
Full title European Innovation Act
Reference number PLAN/2024/2791
Submitted to RSB on 20 February 2026
Date of RSB meeting Written procedure
4
EUROPEAN COMMISSION REGULATORY SCRUTINY BOARD
Brussels, RSB
Opinion
Title: Impact assessment / European Innovation Act
Overall opinion: NEGATIVE
(A) Policy context The European Innovation Act aims to remove barriers that hinder the proper functioning of the Single Market and prevent EU innovative companies from scaling up. It proposes establishing cross-sectoral framework conditions to facilitate the commercialisation of research results, strengthen collaboration between industry academia, and the public sector, and improve access to markets, and infrastructures. In doing so, it seeks to create a more coherent regulatory, policy, and investment environment across the EU.
(B) Key issues The Board notes the additional information provided and commitments to make changes to the report.However, the Board gives a negative opinion because the report contains the following serious shortcomings that the lead Service must address: (1) The scope of the intervention is not clear. (2) The problems, their scale and their drivers are not well identified and are not
supported with the appropriate evidence. (3) The report lacks a clear logic of the intervention. The objectives are not S.M.A.R.T..
The policy measures are not clearly defined and it is not demonstrated that they address those problems at their roots causes.
(4) The report does not provide sufficient evidence supporting the feasibility, effectiveness and efficiency of many of the proposed policy measures; their proportionality is not sufficiently assessed.
(5) The report does not appropriately assess the external coherence of this initiative with other horizontal initiatives contributing to the European competitiveness and functioning of the Single Market.
(6) The level of administrative burden is not sufficiently analysed.
5
(C) What to improve (7) The report must clarify the scope of the intervention. It should better set the context of the initiative and other initiatives that the Commission is preparing in parallel, that delineate the scope of the European Innovation Act and could potentially support or complement it. A better description of the scope will enable to strictly base the impact assessment on problems identified inside this scope. (8) Currently most of the problems and problem drivers overlap. The report should better differentiate between the presented problems and their drivers, striving to identify root causes as exhaustively as possible. The report should then transparently consider what can be addressed better by parallel or future initiatives. The large divergence in the identified issues among Member States is not analysed. The problem identification should be corroborated by evidence and should focus on the issues that cannot be solved at the national/regional or local level, that have a cross-border dimension and could be addressed at the EU level. The specificities of innovative companies as opposed to SMEs should be explained and supported by evidence. The report does not provide compelling evidence that support the rationale for regulating sandboxes at the EU level, rather than proposing general guidance. (9) The logic of the intervention is not well established in the report. Once the problems and their drivers are better identified, the general and specific objectives should be aligned and narrowed down to the adjusted scope of the intervention. Formulating a general objective that is too multifaceted and vast makes it hardly possible to demonstrate causal links between the intervention and the future results. The specific objectives, selected based on a refined problem definition, should be S.M.A.R.T. to clearly understand what is expected to be achieved and to enable the assessment of the impact of the policy options. (10) The report should propose policy measures that are based on evidence demonstrating that they can solve the underlying problems/drivers and achieve the desired objectives. The feasibility of those measures should be checked upfront. Many of the measures proposed in the report are not well specified, often relying on terms that may be subject to interpretation, or are simply not fully defined. It is therefore not possible to assess their feasibility, effectiveness, efficiency, and proportionality. The evidence supporting the effectiveness of some measures is incomplete or missing. The causal links between a measure and the problem drivers it is intended to address are often not established. (11) More specifically, the feasibility of establishing a common and future proof definition of an innovative company across different sectors should be demonstrated better. The feasibility and consequences of establishing a common definition of a startup, scaleup and an innovative company and their co-existence with the established definitions of SMEs, micro companies, and small mid-caps, should be discussed in the report in view of possible overlaps as regards access to (EU) funding or any other special treatment of such companies. The report should analyse the risk that the proposed policy measures and their implementation could add more burdens than benefits. (12) The report should better analyse the external coherence with other horizontal initiatives contributing to improving European competitiveness by promoting innovation and functioning of Single Market. The report should assess the coherence with the simplification agenda (Omnibus IV); measure 2 and the supporting recommendation should describe how they would be implemented. It should discuss the coherence of the proposals on public procurement and in particular the revision of the public procurement rules, in light of the concerns of stakeholders. The discussion on the external coherence should also cover the coming European Research Area act and the “28th regime for innovative companies”.
6
(13) The report should be clear on what success will look like; targets and benchmarks for the specified monitoring indicators should be introduced. Some more technical comments have been sent directly to the author DG.
(D) Conclusion The DG must revise the report in accordance with the Board’s findings and resubmit it for a final RSB opinion.
Full title European Innovation Act
Reference number PLAN/2024/279
Submitted to RSB on 23 December 2025
Date of RSB meeting 28 January 2026
Electronically signed on 27/02/2026 13:05 (UTC+01) in accordance with Article 11 of Commission Decision (EU) 2021/2121
EN EN
EUROPEAN COMMISSION
Brussels, 9.9.2026
SWD(2026) 567 final
COMMISSION STAFF WORKING DOCUMENT
IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Accompanying the document
Proposal for a
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a framework of measures for strengthening the Union innovation ecosystem
and amending Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 (European Innovation Act)
{COM(2026) 567 final} - {SEC(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 568 final}
EN EN
1. INTRODUCTION: POLITICAL AND POLICY CONTEXT ............................................................. 2
1.1. Low private R&D spending, insufficient scaleup funding & capital market
fragmentation in the EU .................................................................................... 5
1.2. Fragmented and complex rules for companies operating across the EU ........... 7
1.3. EU fragmentation of research systems across Member States .......................... 7
2. PROBLEM DEFINITION AND PROBLEM DRIVERS FOR THE EIA ............................................ 8
2.1. How likely is the problem to persist? .............................................................. 21
3. WHY SHOULD THE EU ACT? ........................................................................................................ 24
3.1. Legal basis ....................................................................................................... 24
3.2. Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action ............................................................... 24
3.3. Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action .......................................................... 25
4. OBJECTIVES: WHAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED? ............................................................................... 25
4.1. General objectives ........................................................................................... 26
4.2. Specific objectives ........................................................................................... 27
5. WHAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS? .................................................................... 28
5.1. What is the baseline from which options are assessed? .................................. 29
5.2. Description of the policy options .................................................................... 31
5.3. Options discarded at an early stage ................................................................. 36
6. WHAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS? ........................................................... 37
6.1. Estimates of economically affected population ............................................... 38
6.2. Costs and benefits by stakeholder by measure ................................................ 40
6.2.1. Costs for Measure 1 - Promote valuation of IP ................................................ 40
6.2.2. Benefits for Measure 1 - Promote valuation of IP ............................................ 43
6.2.3. Costs for Measure 2 – Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public
buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of
innovation-friendly techniques within R&D procurement ............................................... 48
6.2.4. Benefits for Measure 2 – Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public
buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of
innovation-friendly techniques within R&D procurement ............................................... 50
6.2.5. Costs for Measure 3 – Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement
for public buyers ............................................................................................................... 53
6.2.6. Benefits bundled with indirect economic costs for Measure 3 – Preference for
EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public buyers ............................................ 55
7. HOW DO THE OPTIONS COMPARE? ............................................................................................ 58
8. PREFERRED OPTION ...................................................................................................................... 62
9. HOW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND EVALUATED? .................................. 67
ANNEX 1: PROCEDURAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 69
1. LEAD DG, DECIDE PLANNING/CWP REFERENCES .................................................................. 69
2. ORGANISATION AND TIMING ...................................................................................................... 69
3. CONSULTATION OF THE RSB....................................................................................................... 70
2
5. EVIDENCE, SOURCES AND QUALITY ......................................................................................... 82
ANNEX 2: STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION (SYNOPSIS REPORT) ................................................ 84
ANNEX 3: WHO IS AFFECTED AND HOW? .......................................................................................... 88
1. SUMMARY OF COSTS AND BENEFITS ....................................................................................... 88
2. RELEVANT SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS ............................................................... 91
ANNEX 4: ANALYTICAL METHODS ..................................................................................................... 93
ANNEX 5: COMPETITIVENESS CHECK .............................................................................................. 132
1. OVERVIEW OF IMPACTS ON COMPETITIVENESS ................................................................. 132
2. SYNTHETIC ASSESSMENT .......................................................................................................... 132
3. COMPETITIVE POSITION OF THE MOST AFFECTED SECTORS ........................................... 134
ANNEX 6: SME CHECK .......................................................................................................................... 135
ANNEX 7: SUPPORTING GRAPHS AND TABLES .............................................................................. 138
ANNEX 8: MACROECONOMIC MODELING - JRC B.7 ...................................................................... 158
ANNEX 9: ANALYSIS OF RESPONSES TO THE EIA CALL FOR EVIDENCE – JRC T.5 ................ 162
ANNEX 10: TARGETED CONSULTATION SURVEY EVIDENCE FOR MEASURES RELATIVE
COSTS AND BENEFITS ................................................................................................................. 165
ANNEX 11: POLICY MAPPING (OVERVIEW OF THE STATUS QUO) ............................................. 175
ANNEX 12: ANALYSIS OF RESPONSES TO THE STARTUP AND SCALEUP STRATEGY CALL
FOR EVIDENCE .............................................................................................................................. 183
ANNEX 13: MONITORING AND EVALUATON FRAMEWORK ........................................................ 185
ANNEX 14: POLICY MAPPING (DETAILED LIST OF MAPPED POLICES) ..................................... 191
3
Glossary
Term or acronym Meaning or definition
Innovation
It means the implementation of a new or significantly
improved product, service or process, marketing
method, or organisational method in business practices,
workplace organisation or external relations
EU public procurement
directives’
It means Directives 2014/24/EU, 2014/25 EU,
2014/23/EU and 2009/81/EC;
Innovation procurement
Innovation procurement is an umbrella term covering
both public procurement of R&D services and public
procurement of innovative solutions (PPI).
Public Procurement of
Innovation (PPI)
It refers to the procurement by public authorities of
innovative goods, services, or works that are not yet
widely available on the market, with the aim of
improving public services or addressing societal
challenges.
R&D procurement
It refers to the procurement by a public buyer of
research and development services aimed at
developing, testing or validating new or significantly
improved solutions. It may include the development
and acquisition of prototypes, demonstrators or limited
test volumes, but its objective is the procurement of
R&D services rather than the acquisition of products or
services for commercial-scale deployment.
Pre-commercial procurement
(PCP)
It refers to the procurement of research and
development (R&D) services involving risk-benefit
sharing under market conditions, where the procurer
does not reserve all the results and benefits of the R&D
exclusively for its own use.
4
1. INTRODUCTION: POLITICAL AND POLICY CONTEXT
For over two decades the EU has grappled with the paradox that its excellent research is not
resulting in equally excellent commercialisation of innovative products and services on its
internal market. Different measures have been tried to overcome the barriers, and the “valley
of death” along the innovation lifecycle that entrepreneurs and industries are facing.
The effect of this innovation gap is manifold. It prevents disruptive innovations from reaching
the market and creating new growth industries, indispensable for creating global champions,
growth and jobs and fiscal revenues to fund the EU social model. It also makes the EU economy
less productive compared to other economies, because of later introduction of new technologies
into public and private sector entities.
Over the past two decades the EU’s economic growth has lagged behind both the United
States and China. The EU-US gap in the level of GDP at constant 2015 prices has widened
from 17% in 2002 to 30% in 2023.1
The main reasons behind the EU’s GDP growth underperformance are a weakening
productivity growth, an ageing workforce and different working patterns, with employees in
Europe generally working fewer hours and taking longer holidays than in the United States.2 3.
Productivity growth in the EU depends heavily on research and innovation: research and
innovation drive around two-thirds of productivity growth in the EU4, driven not only by R&D
activities but also by non-R&D intangibles such as skills, software, organisational capital, and
technological efficiency gains from how labour and capital are combined.5
This is why the President of the Commission has underlined the need to place research and
innovation at the core of the EU economy, in order to achieve the Commission’s political
priority for 2024-2029 to strengthen the EU’s sustainable prosperity and competitiveness.
Nevertheless, the EU's innovation output in 2025 remained below that of leading global
innovators, notably the United States, South Korea, and Japan.6 The EU’s innovation capacity
is held back by a number of barriers along the innovation lifecycle. Figure 1 provide a
simplified visualization of where the most important barriers reside along the EU innovation
lifecycle. The problems in “blue” are those currently addressed by other EU initiatives, while
1 Draghi, M. (2024). The Future of European Competitiveness - A Competitiveness Strategy for Europe.
https://commission.europa.eu/document/97e481fd-2dc3-412d-be4c-f152a8232961_en 2 Darvas, Z. (2023). The European Union’s remarkable growth performance relative to the United States. Bruegel
(Brüssel)(https://www. bruegel. org/analysis/european-unions-remarkable-growth-performance-relative-united-states. 3 Draghi, M. (2024). The Future of European Competitiveness - A Competitiveness Strategy for Europe.
https://commission.europa.eu/document/97e481fd-2dc3-412d-be4c-f152a8232961_en 4 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2022). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU 2022: building a sustainable future in uncertain times. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/78826. 5 Roth, F., & Mitra, A. (2025). EU competitiveness: the critical role of intangible assets in labour productivity growth. Journal
of Economic Policy Reform, 1-20. 6 Bello, M., Ravanos, P. and Tessarin, M., Tracking country innovation performance: The Innovation Output Indicator 2025,
Publications Office of the European Union, Luxembourg, 2026, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2760/0461350, JRC145507.
5
the problems in “orange” are those that the EIA aim to address.Below it will follow a more
detailed explanation of such problems and initiatives. The problems numbered 1 to 4 in Figure
1, addressed by the EIA, are explained in more detail in Chapter 2.
Figure 1: Position of the European Innovation Act within The European innovation
lifecycle
Source: RTD A5
The innovation lifecycle describes how ideas progress from early research to mature, market-
ready products. Each stage involves different actors and risks: uncertainty and failure risks are
highest at the beginning and decline as innovations mature. In the early phases (research and
initial prototypes), where ideas are highly uncertain and rarely resemble viable businesses,
public funding dominates. As prototypes mature, incubators, business angels and venture
capital progressively step in to support market entry. At later stages, when products are proven
and revenues are more predictable, banks, capital markets and public procurement of innovative
solutions finance scale-up and expansion.
European innovative companies commonly face two “valleys of death” during the innovation
lifecycle. The pre-commercialisation gap arises when innovations are no longer basic
research but remain too risky or fragmented to attract private investment. The scaling gap
occurs later, when firms have viable products but struggle to expand due to high capital needs,
regulatory complexity and limited access to late-stage finance. These gaps explain why market
forces alone often fail to carry innovation through the full cycle and why targeted public
intervention is needed to translate research into competitive, scalable solutions.
6
Several problems - identified by the Letta Report7, the Draghi Report8, and the 2024
Science, research and innovation performance (SRIP) Report9 - reinforce these gaps in
the EU and interrupt or slow down the innovation cycle. Addressing these problems requires a
comprehensive set of legal, financial and policy measures.
The following summarises the main such problems, also listing the main EU initiatives aiming
to address them. Section 2 will then set out the remaining problems (not addressed by other
initiatives) to be addressed by the EIA.
1.1. Low private R&D spending, insufficient scaleup funding & capital market
fragmentation in the EU
Despite being a strong global player in research and innovation, the EU continues to lag
behind its main competitors in R&D investment, primarily due to lower private sector
contributions. The public and private investment into R&D in the EU is 2.2% of GDP, below
that of the US (3.5%), Japan (3.3%) and South Korea (4.9%).10 Behind this gap there is the
sectoral composition of the EU economy: it is dominated by mid-tech industries such as
automotive, whereas the US economy has a larger share of high-tech sectors including health,
ICT hardware, and ICT services. Since high-tech sectors typically have much higher R&D
intensity, their greater weight in the US economy translates into substantially higher private
R&D investment overall. This structural imbalance is often referred to as the EU’s “middle-
technology trap”.11 Evidence of the EU’s “middle technology trap” can be seen in the
stagnation of its corporate leadership: for more than twenty years, the top three EU
companies have repeatedly been automotive firms, with almost no turnover at the top. In stark
contrast, R&D leaders have changed in the US over time. In the early 2000s, the top three US
companies spanned the automobile and pharmaceutical industries. By the 2010s, they had
shifted to the software and hardware sectors; and in the 2020s, the top-three companies included
Alphabet and Meta, global leaders in the digital sector. This dynamic business evolution has
been notably absent in the EU.
The EU also faces a persistent shortage of risk finance for innovation compared to the
US. Venture capital investment in the EU is around seven times lower than in the United States,
limiting the capacity of European start-ups and scale-ups to grow rapidly and compete globally.
This gap reflects, in part, the EU capital market fragmentation, the limited role of institutional
investors such as pension funds and insurance companies, which in the EU allocate a much
smaller share of their portfolios to high-risk, high-reward innovation finance than their US
counterparts. As a result, innovative firms in Europe continue to depend disproportionately on
7 Letta, E. (2024). Much more than a market – Speed, Security, Solidarity. Empowering the Single Market to deliver a
sustainable future and prosperity for all EU Citizens. https://www.consilium.europa.eu/media/ny3j24sm/much-more-than-a-
market-report-by-enrico-letta.pdf 8 Draghi, M. (2024). The Future of European Competitiveness - A Competitiveness Strategy for Europe.
https://commission.europa.eu/document/97e481fd-2dc3-412d-be4c-f152a8232961_en 9 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU, 2024: a competitive Europe for a sustainable future. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/965670. 10 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU, 2024: a competitive Europe for a sustainable future. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/965670. 11 Fuest, C, D Gros, P-L Mengel, G Presidente and J Tirole (2024), “EU Innovation Policy: How to Escape the Middle
Technology Trap”, Report by the European Policy Analysis Group, Institute for European Policymaking at Bocconi University.
7
a bank-based financial system, which is less suited to financing intangible, high-risk assets
typical of breakthrough innovation.12
Measures to address these problems: at EU level, these problems are mainly addressed through
funding programmes such as Horizon Europe, Invest EU, Digital Europe, Innovation Fund,
and in particular the EIC (including the recently established Scaleup Europe Fund). In
addition, the forthcoming Advance Materials Act or Biotech Act target strategic
technologies to help the EU move beyond medium-technology specialisation. While reforms
under the Savings and Investments Union aim to deepen EU capital markets and channel
more private savings into equity, venture capital and scale-ups.
Remaining gap: Despite important progress through the European Innovation Council and the
growth of private venture capital markets, a significant scale-up financing gap persists in the
EU. While funding rounds of EUR 50-100 million are now more common, rounds above EUR
100 million remain comparatively rare, especially in capital-intensive and deep-tech sectors.13
Forthcoming initiatives, including the Savings and Investment Union and reinforced national
scale-up schemes, are expected to mobilise additional capital, but are likely to address only part
of the structural shortfall. There are remaining bottlenecks to the speed and scale of
commercialisation of research results in the EU, which negatively affect the ability to attract
innovation investments to the Union. Those bottlenecks are: fragmented and complex rules
across Member States on valuation and monetisation of intellectual property as a guarantee for
investments. Together, these barriers increase costs, dampen incentives for public and
private R&D investment, and weaken the scalability of innovative firms across the Single
Market.
Furthermore, while the EU Public Procurement Directives harmonise procedures for
contracts above defined financial thresholds, they do not cover R&D procurement where
either the benefits do not accrue exclusively to the public buyer or the services are not
wholly remunerated by it. Such R&D procurement, including pre-commercial procurement
(PCP), is therefore governed by national rules. Moreover, under the Commission proposal for
the Public Procurement Act (PPA), all forms of R&D procurement would be excluded from its
scope. However, as the proposal remains subject to the legislative process, the scope and
provisions of the PPA ultimately adopted by the European Parliament and the Council may
differ from those currently proposed.
The absence of harmonised R&D procurement rules has contributed to divergent
practices across Member States, legal uncertainty, and limited use of cross-border R&D
procurement, which is often necessary to achieve the financial critical mass required for the
development of modern technologies. The European Innovation Act therefore focuses on R&D
procurement precisely because they lie outside the harmonised EU framework, thereby
complementing rather than duplicating existing EU legislation, while enhancing legal certainty
and strengthening policy coherence in support of cross-border innovation.
12 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU, 2024: a competitive Europe for a sustainable future. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/965670. 13 Startup and Scaleup Strategy, European Commission
8
1.2. Fragmented and complex rules for companies operating across the EU
Regulatory fragmentation across Member States makes it difficult for innovative companies,
including startups and scaleups, to operate efficiently and grow within the Single Market.
Different national legal systems, especially in areas like taxation, company law and
securities law, as well as fragmented digital systems create barriers for investors, limiting the
flow of capital. Innovative companies also face difficulties navigating varying labour laws,
high failure costs and administrative burdens, adding uncertainty and costs for both founders
and investors.
Measures to address these problems: some of these problems are expected to be addressed at
the EU level in the forthcoming proposal for the 28th regime corporate legal framework,
EU Inc., which will introduce an optional common corporate framework for companies using
the EU Inc. legal form, digital corporate rules and procedures throughout their lifecycle and an
enabling framework to invest into such companies. It also provides rules applicable to
employee stock options issued by EU Inc. companies, including the moment of their taxation,
and a simplified insolvency regime for such companies that are innovative startups. The
introduction of the European Business Wallets14 will play a crucial role in simplifying the
administrative and digital landscape for innovative companies, making it possible for them to
operate more efficiently and effectively across the EU, by providing a secure and harmonised
digital environment for identity verification, data exchange, and document management.. The
administrative burden is being further reduced by various omnibus legislations.
1.3. EU fragmentation of research systems across Member States
The EU produces almost one-fifth of the world’s scientific publications, ranking ahead of
the US and second only to China15. In terms of high-quality publications (the 10% most cited),
the EU is on par with the US, but lags behind China.
The innovation potential of the EU remains underused, as researchers and innovators do
not fully exploit economies of scale and cooperate with other partners across the EU16.
Collaboration networks for R&I activities rarely extend across national – or even regional –
borders. Today, about 70% of all co-owned patents are the result of collaboration within the
same region and almost one-in-five are created by partners in different regions of the same
country. Only around 13% of the co-patents filed each year involve organisations located in
two different European countries. By contrast, in the US, R&I collaborations across States are
much more common, accounting for almost one-third of collaborations overall. All in all, the
US has almost 2.5 times more R&I collaborations than the EU.
Measures to address these problems: at EU level, this problem is mainly addressed through
Horizon Europe and the European Research Area (ERA), including the forthcoming
ERA Act, which incentivise and structurally support cross-border R&I collaboration and
14 Proposal for a Regulation on the establishment of European Business Wallets | Shaping Europe’s digital future. 15 Draghi, M. (2024), The future of European competitiveness. Part B: In-depth analysis and recommendations, European
Commission, Brussels. 16 Draghi, M. (2024), The future of European competitiveness. Part B: In-depth analysis and recommendations, European
Commission, Brussels.
9
researcher mobility. In addition, the EIT and Important Projects of Common European
Interest. (IPCEIs) promote large-scale, transnational innovation ecosystems that help
overcome national and regional fragmentation.
Remaining gap: Despite progress under the European Research Area in promoting the free
circulation of researchers and cross-border research collaboration, significant fragmentation
persists in the valuation methods and monetisation opportunities of intellectual property.
As a result, bottlenecks remain in the stages following basic research, particularly in the
transition from laboratory results to prototyping and early commercial development. This
fragmentation contributes to a structural under-exploitation of publicly funded research. In
2019, only 43% of patented inventions originating from universities and public research
organisations in the EU reached the implementation or operational stage, while SMEs achieved
roughly twice that rate.17 This indicates that substantial potential for knowledge diffusion and
economic impact remains untapped.
2. PROBLEM DEFINITION AND PROBLEM DRIVERS FOR THE EIA
The European Innovation Act is intended to address the specific problems causing the EU
innovation gap, which are not addressed by other existing or forthcoming measures. The scope
of the European Innovation Act has therefore been framed by the mission letter of
Commissioner Zaharieva and a number of policy documents adopted by the Commission such
as the Competitiveness Compass18 and the EU Startup & Scaleup Strategy19.
The purpose of this Impact Assessment is to provide an ex-ante, evidence-based analysis
of remaining problems causing the European innovation gap. It identifies a specific set of
problems – not addressed by other initiatives - that hinder innovative companies from scaling
up within the EU Single Market, examines their underlying drivers, and identifies and assesses
the impacts of the policy options available to address those problems.
2.1 General problem
The general problem of the EU is the lack of speed and scale for innovative products and
services to commercialise within the EU, thereby contributing to counter stagnation of EU GDP
growth.
There is a set of persistent regulatory and market failures that arise at specific stages of
the innovation lifecycle, in particular during testing, product development, and early
market entry.
17 EPO (2020), Valorisation of scientific results, p. 22. 18 Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament, the European Council, the Council, the European
Economic and Social Committee and the Committee of the Regions: A Competitiveness Compass for the EU, COM(2025)30
final, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/ALL/?uri=CELEX:52025DC0030. 19 Communication from the Commission to the European Parliament, the Council, the European Economic and Social
Committee and the Committee of the Regions: The EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy - Choose Europe to start and scale,
COM(2025)270 final, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=celex:52025DC0270.
10
Figure 2 summarises the problems and consequences of the EU innovation gap.
Figure 2.Problem tree EIA
There are a number of sub-problems at different steps and levels of the innovation cycle that
are driving the problem.
Problem 1: The EU underperforms in converting research and intangible assets into
commercially scalable innovation and tech leaders.
The Draghi report highlighted that Europe’s innovation deficit isn’t a lack of ideas or
research capacity, but a systemic inability to turn those ideas into commercially successful
products. Despite representing only about 7% of the world’s population, the EU produces
roughly 20% of global scientific publications and has a strong (yet eroding) position in
patenting. In 2021, it accounted for 17% of the world’s patent applications, compared with a
share of 21% for the US and 25% for China. The EU share in patents is not reflected in patenting
for important technologies, and it does not necessarily lead to industrial applications.20
Indeed, the EU disciplinary composition of its scientific and innovation output is skewed
toward less technology-intensive fields, such as social sciences and humanities, while the
United States leads in health and biomedical sciences and China in natural and applied sciences.
20 Draghi, M. (2024), The future of European competitiveness. Part B: In-depth analysis and recommendations, European
Commission, Brussels.
11
A similar pattern appears in patenting: EU activity lags behind the US and China in several key
enabling technologies and is more concentrated in mature, lower technology-intensity domains,
which typically offer more limited potential for productivity growth and global
competitiveness. As a result, the EU represents only 6% of R&D expenditure among leading
firms in software and computer services, while US firms account for 74%.21
The European Investment Bank (EIB) Report 2025 confirms this gap by explaining that
EU firms are less successful than US firms at scaling and commercialising innovation,
especially in deep tech and breakthrough sectors. Innovation is now largely driven by intangible
assets, with over 90% of corporate value in leading firms coming from intellectual property
(IP). Yet in the EU, intellectual property is still rarely used as collateral in debt financing.
Because financial institutions focus on tangible assets and traditional accounting, IP-rich
companies struggle to secure funding. As a result, EU start-ups raise around 50% less capital
than US peers by their tenth year. This mismatch has created a major growth financing gap for
asset-light, innovative firms, estimated at up to EUR 18 billion per year.22
The European Innovation Scoreboard (EIS) 2025 confirms this pattern across multiple
indicators: the EU performs strongly in research and knowledge-creation metrics, but records
comparatively weaker results on indicators related to commercialisation and scale-up of
innovation. The gap is most pronounced in high-growth firm levels; the EU currently has only
111 unicorns, while the United States has 687 and China has 162. Finally, the EU ranks last
among all global competitors for the level of innovative SMEs collaborating with others, a
critical factor for scaling breakthrough innovation.23 Relocation patterns of high-potential
European startup and scaleups firms, which predominantly move to the United States, provide
additional evidence of impediments to scaling innovation in Europe.24
Intellectual property is inherently difficult to value because it is intangible, uncertain, and
highly context-dependent: its future returns depend on market adoption, legal protection,
complementary assets, and firm capabilities, all of which are hard to predict and verify.
Difficulties in valuing IP makes commercialisation harder because it blocks one of the key
bridges from ideas to markets: financing and transactions. When a patent portfolio, software,
data, or know-how cannot be valued credibly, lenders are reluctant to accept it as collateral,
investors struggle to price equity, and partners cannot agree on licensing terms. Hence, firms
either under-invest, sell early, or fail to scale.25
21 SRIP 2024, EIB 2025 report 22 European Investment Bank. (2025). Investment Report 2024/2025: Innovation, integration and simplification in Europe.
Luxembourg: EIB. 23 European Commission (2025), European Innovation Scoreboard 2025, Publications Office of the European Union,
Luxembourg.
24 Startup relocation, in particular to the US, is a symptom that illustrates bottlenecks for those firms to scaleup successfully
in the EU, while it raises concerns about weaking the EU’s innovation ecosystem and competitiveness.
S Weik, A-K Achleitner, R Braun, ‘Venture capital and the international relocation of startups’, Research Policy, Volume 53,
Issue 7, (2024)
S Weik, A-K Achleitner, R Braun, Venture capital and the international relocation of startups, Research Policy, Volume 53,
Issue 7, 2024,
M Colombo, R Compañó, C Domnick, V Ponferrada, A Quas, B. Tofan What do we know about startup relocation? JRC
Science-to-Policy Brief, forthcoming (2026). 25 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2022). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU 2022 : building a sustainable future in uncertain times. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/78826.
12
In the EU this problem is often more pronounced than in the US because the IP valuation
ecosystem is less mature and less standardised, with fewer widely used valuation practices,
thinner transaction comparable, and more fragmented markets and legal frameworks across
Member States. In the US, by contrast, there is broader use of patents and other IP as financing
and deal-making assets, supported by deeper capital markets, more specialised intermediaries,
and more established valuation and collateralisation practices, which makes it easier to translate
intangible assets into funded and scalable commercial products.26
Stakeholder consultation confirms this gap: 80% (93) of EIA Open Public Consultation
participants that expressed an opinion agreed that there is a prudent attitude toward IPR-backed
financing from banks and institutional investors. 73 % (84) agreed that there is a lack of
trustworthy, widely accepted standards for valuing IPR. 81% (96) agreed that there is a lack of
experience with IPR valuation among startup/scaleup in the EU. 84% (108) agreed that creating
a trustworthy EU wide accepted methodology for IPR valuation and providing templates and
guidance on how to apply it would be a good step forward. 62% (72) agreed that creating an
EU wide IPR marketplace with sufficient critical mass and liquidity would be a good step
forward.
Problem driver 1.1: IPR valuation models in the EU are not standardised, while
being complex and expensive
The EU’s underperformance in translating research and intangible assets into commercially
deployed innovation is partly linked to EU capital market fragmentation; however, this driver
is being addressed through the Savings and Investment Union agenda and related financial
market initiatives. The EIA therefore concentrates instead on the remaining key drivers
within its scope, notably the heterogeneous, complex and expensive IPR valuation models that
hamper the bankability and scalability of intellectual property in the EU, and the lack of
sufficient incentives and capacity for publicly funded institutions to manage IPR and
commercialise research results.
The effective use of intellectual property rights (IPR) as a financing and
commercialisation asset depends on reliable, transparent, and comparable valuation
approaches. However, current evidence shows that IPR valuation practices remain non-
standardised, methodologically diverse, and costly, creating uncertainty for both firms and
financial market participants. The World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) notes that
IP valuation requires case-specific judgement and that in practice there is a lack of a single
framework with a set of commonly agreed methodologies for valuating different types of IPR.
As a result, lenders and investors apply divergent valuation methods and assumptions, leading
to inconsistent outcomes and legal and financial uncertainty in IP-backed transactions.27
This lack of standardisation translates into limited practical use of IP valuation by firms,
especially SMEs. According to a joint study by the European Patent Office and EUIPO, in the
26 European Commission (2025), Commission Staff Working Document accompanying the EU Startup and Scaleup Strategy:
Choose Europe to start and scale, SWD(2025) 138 final, Brussels, 28 May 2025 27 World Intellectual Property Organization (2025). Moving IP Finance from the Margins to the Mainstream.
13
absence of recognised and trusted models, financial institutions tend to apply strong discounts
to IP valuations, reducing their usefulness as collateral and discouraging both borrowers and
lenders. The problem is compounded by the limited development of secondary markets for IP-
backed loans, which further reduces liquidity and increases perceived risk.28
Available evidence provided by the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)
also shows that valuation practices vary widely across investors and jurisdictions. Some
market participants rely on simplified checklist approaches, while others require deep technical
and legal assessments supported by specialised external providers, often located outside the
borrower’s jurisdiction. These specialised valuation services are frequently expensive, with
reported costs often exceeding €100,000 per case, creating a disproportionate burden for
startups and SMEs.29 High transaction and assessment costs, combined with methodological
complexity, reduce the practical usability of intangible assets (including IPR) in attracting
external finance.30
Some Member States have introduced initiatives addressing intellectual property valuation
as a distinct policy area. These initiatives vary in form and scope, ranging from analytical work
to practical guidance. Examples include Austria’s 2024 study IP Financing in Austria, which
analyses the use of intellectual property in financing and balance-sheet treatment, and
Belgium’s federal Practical Guide to valorise IP to raise funds, which provides information to
SMEs on different financing options and the role of intellectual property valuation within those
options.
A European Commission Expert Group on Intellectual Property Valuation has identified
lack of confidence in existing IPR valuation methods as a primary barrier to IP
transactions, monetisation, and commercialisation in the EU.31 In addition, analysis from the
OECD shows that the absence of reliable and predictable liquidation channels (notably
underdeveloped secondary markets for IP assets) makes it difficult for lenders to recover value
in case of default. This structural illiquidity leads financial institutions to heavily discount IP
collateral or avoid it altogether.32
Taken together, this evidence indicates that the absence of broadly accepted and operational
IPR valuation models in the EU increases transaction costs, reduces legal and financial
certainty, and limits the capacity of firms (particularly innovative SMEs) to leverage IP assets
for financing and commercialisation.
Problem 2. Public Procurement is not sufficiently used in the EU to support research and
innovation
28 EPO & EUIPO (2023). Patents, trade marks and startup finance. Funding and exit performance of European startups, Munich
(Germany) and Alicante (Spain). 29 World Intellectual Property Organization. (2024). Unlocking IP-Backed Financing Series – Country Perspectives:
Switzerland’s Journey. WIPO. https://www.wipo.int/publications/en/details.jsp?id=4710&plang=EN 30 Brassell, M. and K. Boschmans (2019), “Fostering the use of intangibles to strengthen SME access to finance”, OECD SME
and Entrepreneurship Papers, No. 12, OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/729bf864-en. 31 (2014). Final report from the Expert Group on Intellectual Property Valuation. Publications Office.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/72196. 32 https://one.oecd.org/document/DSTI/ICCP(2014)17/CHAP9/FINAL/en/pdf
14
Public procurement is the process through which public buyers purchase works, supplies
and services to deliver public services, address societal challenges, maintain infrastructure and
support administrative functions. The EU Public Procurement Directives (most notably
Directives 2014/24/EU, 2014/25/EU and 2009/81/EC) define the entities and contracts subject
to EU procurement rules and the applicable procedures and exemptions.
In general, the Directives apply where a contracting authority or contracting entity purchases
works, supplies or services from an economic operator and the estimated contract value reaches
the applicable financial threshold, unless a specific exclusion applies. For R&D services, they
apply only where the benefits accrue exclusively to the public buyer for use in its own affairs
and the services are wholly remunerated by it.
As a result, a substantial share of R&D procurement, including pre-commercial
procurement, falls outside their scope. Moreover, the forthcoming revision of the EU public
procurement framework, the Public Procurement Act, is expected to exclude all forms of R&D
procurement.
R&D procurement concerns the procurement of research and development services
rather than the acquisition of products or services for commercial-scale deployment. It
may nevertheless include the development and acquisition of prototypes, demonstrators or
limited volumes of first products or services for testing and validation purposes.
For example, a city may launch an R&D procurement to develop environmentally
sustainable asphalt. During the testing phase, a section of existing asphalt may be replaced
with the newly developed material, and the city may retain that test section at the end of the
procurement. This would not constitute commercial deployment, as removing the tested asphalt
merely to restore the previous material would serve no practical or economic purpose. By
contrast, any subsequent purchase of the new asphalt for additional roads or locations would
constitute commercial procurement and would therefore fall under the EU Public Procurement
Directives or their expected replacement, the Public Procurement Act33.
A further real-world example is the Danish hospital disinfection R&D procurement
launched in 2014. Through this process, Blue Ocean Robotics developed an autonomous
ultraviolet disinfection robot capable of eliminating 99.99% of viruses and bacteria. The
participating hospitals retained the robots used during the testing phase, but this did not
constitute commercialisation, as their retention formed part of the R&D procurement and
testing process. Commercial procurement occurred only subsequently, when other Danish
hospitals purchased the solution through separate procedures under the EU public procurement
framework. The project also supported the subsequent creation and growth of UVD Robots,
which reportedly reached a valuation exceeding DKK 850 million, employed more than 200
people and attracted USD 48.7 million in venture funding.
Importantly, the procurement of innovative solutions (PPI) for commercial deployment
may include limited R&D elements without constituting R&D procurement. This is
because, despite the presence of such elements, the objective of the procurement is to develop
and acquire a product or service for commercial use, rather than to procure R&D services as
33 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process.
15
such. It therefore remains within the scope of the EU Public Procurement Directives or their
expected replacement, the Public Procurement Act34.
A pre-commercial procurement (PCP) is a type of R&D procurement in which public
buyers share the risks and benefits of developing, prototyping and testing innovative
solutions with suppliers. The European Commission’s 2007 PCP Communication defines
PCP specifically as an R&D procurement involving risk-benefit sharing under market
conditions and competitive development in phases. In practice, this means that suppliers retain
part of the benefits and intellectual property rights, while the public authority does not fully
finance the R&D costs. Because of this risk-benefit sharing, PCP falls under the exclusion
provided in Article 14 of EU Public Procurement Directive 2014/24/EU and is therefore outside
of its scope.35
Figure 4 provides a schematic overview of the procurement types falling within and outside the
scope of the current EU Public Procurement Directives and the Commission proposal for their
revision, known as the Public Procurement Act (PPA). Under the PPA Commission proposal,
all types of R&D procurement would fall outside the scope of the PPA, irrespective of whether
the R&D services are fully remunerated by the contracting authority and whether risks and
benefits are shared between the contracting authority and the provider. By contrast, the
procurement of innovative solutions would remain within the scope of the proposed PPA, as is
currently the case under the EU Public Procurement Directives. However, as the proposal
remains subject to the legislative process, its final scope and provisions may differ from those
currently proposed.
34 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process. 35 More specifically: Pre-commercial procurement was defined in the PCP communication COM(2007)799 and associated
staff working document SEC(2007)1668. PCP is exempted from the EU public procurement directives according as it is
implemented in line with the conditions for the exemptions for R&D services in article 25 of Directive 2014/23/EU, article 14
of Directive 2014/24/EU, article 32 of Directive 2014/25/EU and article 13(f)(j) of Directive 2009/81/EC.
16
Figure 4: Public procurement typology: financial thresholds and innovation stages
Source: Science, Research and Innovation Performance of the EU (2026) report
Public procurement36 alone accounts for roughly 17 % of EU GDP (EUR 2.8 trillion per
year)37, meaning governments are among the largest buyers in the economy. Large private
firms also spend significant amounts on procurement. The EU private procurement (B2B)
market was valued at €6,5 trillion or 36% of GDP in 2024.
Innovation procurement is the purchase of R&D or innovative solutions, i.e. new or
significantly improved products, services, or processes that are not yet widely available as they
36 From the classical and utilities sectors to the defence sector, all included. 37 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study
report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226.
17
are still in their early adoption phase and are not deployed yet by more than 20% of the
customers in the EU38.
Innovation procurement accounts for around 10% of total public procurement in the
EU27, corresponding to approximately €298.5 billion (including both R&D procurement
and the procurement of innovative solutions), or 1.76% of EU GDP.39 However, the EU lags
behind global peers: the share reaches about 20% in the United States and 25% in South Korea.
Matching U.S. levels of intensity would imply an additional €300 billion annually directed
towards innovative solutions. (See Figure 5)
Figure 5. Public innovation procurement as a share of total public procurement (2022)
Source: Author owns elaboration based on European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC.
(2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study report. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226.
Within this total, R&D procurement in the EU27 amounts to €17.3 billion, representing
0.61% of total public procurement and 0.1% of GDP, and approximately 6.1% of total
innovation procurement.40. This compares to around $50 billion annually in the United States,
where federal agencies allocate approximately 7.5% of their procurement budgets to R&D,
reflecting a more systematic use of procurement to support early-stage innovation. DARPA is
a leading example of buying R&D to trigger high-risk, high-reward R&D for defence
38 See definition of innovation in the context of public procurement in the EU public procurement directive 24/2024/EU and
in the EU’s 2021 guidance notice on innovation procurement.
39 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study
report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226. 40 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study
report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226.
18
innovations for which no market yet exists. Operating outside traditional procurement rules
through Other Transaction Authority (OTA), it contracts flexibly with startups, universities,
and consortia. Its approach is outcome-oriented, milestone-based, and mission-driven, focusing
on creating breakthrough technologies through pre-commercial procurement rather than
optimizing cost or efficiency in known markets. Many important innovations such as the
Internet (ARPANET), Global Positioning System (GPS), stealth technology, and autonomous
vehicles all stemmed from DARPA projects.41
US global leadership in supercomputing is thanks to R&D procurements implemented by
the Department of Energy and the Department of Defense: IBM, Cray, HP, Silicon graphics
and Sun microsystems were all startups when they started their first R&D procurements in the
1950s. In the biotech sector, Amgen and Genentech brought their first blockbuster products to
the market thanks to procurements by the National Institutes of Health (NIH) and the
Biomedical Advanced Research and Development Authority (BARDA).
In the EU, legal barriers discourage experimentation with emerging technologies and favours
well-established solutions, making it difficult for innovative startups and scaleups to compete
and bring novel approaches into the public sector. 73 42 43 44 Different studies show how
procurement frameworks remain highly heterogeneous and uncoordinated across EU
Member States. Diverging rules, standards, and procedures for pre-commercial and innovation
procurement create a fragmented landscape that limits cross-border opportunities. This lack of
alignment makes it challenging for innovative companies to scale solutions across different
national markets, undermining the potential for a true single market for innovation-driven
procurement.45 46 47 48
At national level, pre-commercial procurement (PCP) is used in a limited number of
Member States, primarily through programmes or pilot schemes rather than through national
legal frameworks that provide the legal certainty needed to convince procurers to apply it
widely on their own, reflecting its exclusion from the scope of the EU public procurement
directives. Structured use of PCP can be observed in countries such as Spain, Poland, Sweden,
Germany, where it is integrated into the public procurement of innovation framework and
supported through national funding instruments, and Italy, where PCP has been implemented
through targeted calls supported by national innovation agencies. Finland and the Netherlands
have also applied PCP-type approaches through innovation agencies and sectoral programmes,
notably in health, energy and digital public services. In most other Member States, PCP is
41 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Science, research and innovation
performance of the EU, 2024 : a competitive Europe for a sustainable future. Publications Office of the European Union.
https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/965670. 42 Suresh, K. (2022). Analysing Incentive Issues and Failures in Innovation Procurement. SSRN Electronic Journal. 43 Uyarra, E., Edler, J., Garcia-Estevez, J., Georghiou, L., & Yeow, J. (2014). Barriers to innovation through public
procurement: A supplier perspective. Technovation, 34(10), 631–645. 44 Georghiou, L., Edler, J., Uyarra, E., & Yeow, J. (2014). Policy instruments for public procurement of innovation: Choice,
design and assessment. Technological Forecasting and Social Change, 86, 1–12. 45 L. Rubini, M. Andov, and A. Biondi, Regulating for a Sustainable and Resilient Single Market: Challenges and Reforms in
the Areas of State Aid, Competition, and Public Procurement Law (Brussels: European Trade Union Institute, 2023) 46 M. Andhov, A. Biondi, and L. Rubini, “Regulating for a Sustainable and Resilient Single Market: Challenges and Reforms
in the Areas of State Aid, Competition, and Public Procurement Law,” ETUI Research Paper (2023) 47 P. C. Gomes, EU Public Procurement and Innovation: The Innovation Partnership Procedure and Harmonization Challenges
(Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing, 2021) 48 G. M. Racca and C. R. Yukins, eds., Joint Public Procurement and Innovation: Lessons Across Borders (Cheltenham: Edward
Elgar Publishing, 2020)
19
applied on an ad hoc basis, rather than through permanent national schemes. Joint cross-border
PCPs have been supported mainly by the EU’s R&I funding programs. No mapped national
measures were identified that establish systematic arrangements for joint cross-border pre-
commercial procurement.
Private procurement refers to purchases by firms that are not public buyers, undertaken
to develop products, operate production processes, and maintain infrastructure and services
across the EU economy. Unlike public procurement, there is currently no EU or national
framework encouraging private buyers to adopt innovation-friendly procurement practices,
beyond existing requirements related to environmental sustainability. Available surveys and
studies indicate that, compared to the United States, private buyers in the EU are less mature in
procuring innovative solutions from other firms and tend to prioritise cost reduction and process
standardisation over innovation-oriented sourcing. Studies indeed show that private buyers in
the US are more mature in buying R&D from other companies (they procured €3,3Bn of R&D
from other companies in 2024) than private buyers in the EU (who procured 2,5Bn of R&D
from other companies in 2024).
Problem driver 2.1 - Lack of legal certainty on how to procure R&D services
The limited use of public procurement for innovation is partly linked to framework conditions
under the Public Procurement Directives, which are subject to separate review. The EIA
correspondingly focuses on pre-commercial procurement instruments operating outside those
directives49.
Public authorities can use procurement of R&D services, including pre-commercial
procurement (PCP), to support the development of innovative solutions that are not yet
market ready. However, in practice these instruments are used only to a limited extent in the
EU, partly due to legal and procedural uncertainty.
Pre-commercial procurement falls outside the scope of the EU public procurement
Directives and international procurement agreements and instead relies on Treaty principles
and basic principles in the State aid rules to avoid State aid in procurements. Specifically, the
Research, Development and Innovation Framework (RDIF) set out the conditions under which
pre-commercial procurement does not involve State aid. This regulatory positioning has led to
multiple legal interpretations and complex compliance requirements. A Commission study
quantifying the impact of PCP in Europe finds that this combination of legal complexity,
fragmented interpretation, and procedural uncertainty has been a significant factor behind the
underuse of PCP, particularly in the ICT sector.50
More recent benchmarking confirms that the legal treatment of PCP varies widely across
Member States. According to the 2024 benchmarking of national innovation procurement
frameworks, only two Member States have a clear PCP definition in national legislation that is
49 According to the November 2025 Commission report on the evaluation of the 2024 EU public procurement directives, in
2023 30% of public procurement in the EU was subject to the EU public procurement directives. 70% of public procurement
in the EU does not fall under the scope of the EU public procurement directives. 50 (2015). Quantifying the impact of Pre-Commercial Procurement (PCP) in Europe based on evidence from the ICT sector :
final report. Publications Office. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2759/113472.
20
applicable nationwide and aligned with the EU-level definition in the Commission’s PCP
Communication51. In other Member States, PCP is addressed only through non-binding
guidelines or partial legal provisions, such as R&D service exemptions in procurement law,
resulting in uneven legal clarity and operational approaches across jurisdictions.52
Taken together, this evidence indicates that the fragmented and unclear legal framework
for procuring R&D services increases risk and administrative burden for contracting
authorities. This reduces incentives to use PCP and related R&D procurement approaches,
thereby limiting public sector capacity to stimulate innovation through demand-side
instruments.
Problem driver 2.2 - Procurement practices favour incumbents and limit the
participation of innovative companies in procurement procedures
Current procurement practices in many cases favour established suppliers and make it
difficult for startups and other innovative companies to participate effectively in public tenders.
Tender specifications are often highly prescriptive and frequently reused from past
procedures, describing specific solutions rather than the problem to be solved. This approach
advantages incumbent vendors and reduces the scope for alternative or innovative solutions to
compete.53 54 55
Award and selection practices further reinforce this effect. Contracting authorities often
rely heavily on minimum turnover requirements and prior track record criteria when assessing
eligibility. While intended to reduce risk, these requirements disadvantage startups and
scaleups, which may offer innovative solutions but lack extensive prior track record. At the
same time, procurement decisions frequently prioritise lowest upfront cost over higher potential
lifecycle value, which discourages solutions with higher initial prices but stronger long-term
performance or efficiency benefits.56 57
In addition, procurers often require companies to fully transfer their intellectual property
rights to the procurer, which can deter innovation-driven companies whose business models
depend on retaining and commercialising their IP. Rigid contract structures with little
flexibility and little financial incentives for companies to update solutions during contract
implementation further reduce incentives for companies to propose innovative approaches.
51 COM (2007)799 final and SEC (2007) 1668 defined pre-commercial procurement 52 European Commission (2024). Synthesis report for the benchmarking of national policy frameworks for innovation
procurement, Directorate General for Research & Innovation. 53 Startup and scaleup strategy, EC 54 Uyarra, E., Edler, J., Garcia-Estevez, J., Georghiou, L., & Yeow, J. (2014). Barriers to innovation through public
procurement: A supplier perspective. Technovation, 34(10), 631-645. 55 Uyarra, E., Edler, J., Garcia-Estevez, J., Georghiou, L., & Yeow, J. (2014). Barriers to innovation through public
procurement: A supplier perspective. Technovation, 34(10), 631-645. 56 Herron, T. (2025). Understanding SME Constraints in Public Procurement: A Capability-Based Synthesis of Barriers and
Treatments. SCIENTIA MORALITAS-International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research, 10(2), 356-378. 57 OECD (2017), Public Procurement for Innovation: Good Practices and Strategies, OECD Public Governance Reviews,
OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/9789264265820-en.
21
Together, these practices reduce effective competition, favour incumbents, and limit the
participation of innovative companies in public procurement markets.
Problem driver 2.3 - Fragmentation and barriers to joint cross-border innovation
procurement
Joint and cross-border innovation procurement can generate significant benefits,
including pooling of demand, economies of scale, shared risk, and faster diffusion of
innovative solutions across markets. However, in practice, cross-border public procurement
within the EU remains limited, and joint cross-border innovation procurement is rare.
Available evidence shows that cross-border procurement in the Single Market accounts
for only a small share of total procurement value: around 3% of contract value awarded to
suppliers from other Member States. This low level of cross-border participation is linked to
diverging national legal transpositions of procurement rules, additional national restrictions on
cross-border purchasing, and conflicting language and documentation requirements. These
differences increase legal and operational complexity for contracting authorities and suppliers
seeking to participate across borders.58
Evidence on joint cross-border innovation procurement projects confirms the scale of the
problem. A 2020 survey among European public procurers revealed only 10 out of 41
respondents had previous practical experience with joint cross-border public procurement
projects Reported barriers include legal complexity, lack of experience among contracting
authorities, and difficulties in coordinating funding and procedures across jurisdictions. These
constraints are also highlighted by the EC Expert Group on innovation procurement, which
finds that cross-border joint procurement remains operationally and legally challenging in
practice.59 60
Academic analysis reaches similar conclusions, noting that despite recognised benefits,
cross-border procurement remains uncommon due to legal coordination challenges, high
transaction costs, and incompatible national systems and processes.61.
Taken together, this evidence indicates that regulatory, administrative, and technical
fragmentation across Member States creates persistent barriers to joint cross-border
innovation procurements. This limits the ability of public buyers to aggregate demand and
reduces the scale and effectiveness of innovation procurement as a policy instrument across the
Single Market.
58 Becker, Jörg et al. (2019). Contribution to Growth: European Public Procurement – Delivering Economic Benefits for
Citizens and Businesses” (Study for European Parliament IMCO Committee) – Policy study on cross-border procurement.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/STUD/2018/631048/IPOL_STU%282018%29631048_EN.pdf 59 EC Expert Group on innovation procurement (2025). Overcoming legal barriers for the uptake of innovation procurement
in the EU, final report November 2025 60 Kubinec, J. & Kostolny, M. (2020). Joint cross-border public procurement in Europe, Analysis of the iProcureNet survey
and case studies, iProcurement. 61 Malatinec, T. (2021). Cross–Border Public Procurement in the European Union. EU agrarian Law, 10(2), 2021. 7-12.
https://doi.org/10.2478/eual-2021-0007
22
Problem driver 2.4 - Europe’s strategic autonomy depends on innovation but is
insufficiently considered in procurements
Recent policy and academic work highlight that Europe’s strategic autonomy
increasingly depends on its capacity to develop and retain critical technologies and
innovation capabilities. Research shows that “technology sovereignty” has become a central
rationale for innovation policy, as dependencies in key technologies can limit economic
resilience, security, and policy choice.62 European Parliament studies similarly conclude that
competitiveness and security rely on strengthening Europe’s position in key enabling and
strategic technologies, which requires sustained innovation and industrial capability building.63 64
Overdependency on solutions from third countries is particularly problematic for
solutions that are based on critical technologies that need to be procured by public and
private procurers that are critical entities, because critical entities need to be able to ensure
service continuity in the critical infrastructures that they operate and in the essential services
that they provide to the EU economy and society. Both US and Asia (e.g. China) have a
systematic approach that requires all their critical entities to give preference in their
procurements to suppliers that produce delivered goods, services or works substantially
domestically. The EU lacks such an approach both for public and private procurers that are
critical entities. As a result, critical entities in the EU have become over reliant on critical
technologies from third countries.
Europe’s strategic autonomy is already pursued by some sectoral legislation (such as the
Net-Zero Industry Act, the Critical Raw Materials Act, the proposed Critical Medicines Act,
and the forthcoming Industrial Accelerator Act) by mainly addressing security of supply and
dependency risks in specific sectors. However, those Acts only start reinforcing EU strategic
autonomy when the innovation cycle is already finished and when Europe is already overly
dependent on solutions made in third countries because suppliers have already setup
commercial scale production capacities outside the EU. At this stage it is typically too late and
too costly for suppliers to move back production capacity to the EU for individual procurement
contracts, especially for critical technologies which involve expensive R&I and production
capacity investments. Unlike the US and Asia that start reinforcing strategic autonomy in a
systematic way across all public procurements from the R&D stage onwards and continue to
do so across the innovation cycle up to commercial scale production, in the EU there is no
established innovation-centred approach to apply a EU preference in public procurement to
support early-stage technological development and long-term strategic innovation capacity in
the EU.
62 Edler, J., Blind, K., Kroll, H., & Schubert, T. (2023). Technology sovereignty as an emerging frame for innovation policy.
Defining rationales, ends and means. Research Policy, 52(6), 104765. 63 EPRS/STOA (European Parliament) (2021), Key enabling technologies for Europe’s technological sovereignty.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/thinktank/en/document/EPRS_STU(2021)697184 64 European Parliament study (2025), “Strategic autonomy and European competitiveness: Security now comes first.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/thinktank/en/document/ECTI_STU(2025)764371
23
2.1. How likely is the problem to persist?
Across the problem areas examined, current trends suggest that the problems identified
are unlikely to resolve themselves without significant external intervention capable of altering
the present trajectory. Figure 6 presents the historical trends and naïve linear forecasts for the
EU and the US for the available and relevant economic indicators that can be used to proxy the
scale of the problem. In all cases, the EU-US gap has been historically persistent and, under a
simple linear extrapolation65, is expected to continue. These projections should be interpreted
with caution, as linear forecasts do not account for structural breaks or policy changes; they
serve only to illustrate that, absent EU intervention to modify current framework conditions,
the gap is unlikely to close on its own.
65 A simple linear extrapolation is a basic estimation method used to project values beyond the observed data range by assuming
that the existing trend continues at the same constant rate. In practical terms, it means taking an observed change over time (or
across units) and extending that same straight-line relationship forward to produce an approximate estimate where direct data
is not available. It does not introduce additional behavioural assumptions or model dynamics; it only assumes proportional
continuation of the measured trend.
24
Figure 6. Historical trend and linear forecast for EU vs US economic indicators
0,8 0,9
1 1,1 1,2 1,3 1,4 1,5 1,6 1,7
2 0
1 4
2 0
1 5
2 0
1 6
2 0
1 7
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
R eg
u la
to ry
q u
al it
y In
d ex
( W
o rl
d B
an k)
EU and US trends in regulatory quality, with linear forecasts based on 2014-2023 data
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023) EU (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023)
90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
P u
b lic
-p ri
va te
c o
-p u
b lic
at io
n s
(E IS
)
EU and US trends in Public-private co-publications, with linear forecasts based on 2018-2025 data
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025) EU (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025)
80
90
100
110
120
2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030
Actual Forecast
P C
T p
at en
t ap
p lic
at io
n s
(E IS
)
EU and US trends in PCT patent applications, with linear forecasts based on 2018- 2025 data
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025) EU (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025)
25
Source: Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration according to the
methodology explained above, based on EIS and World Bank data.
3. WHY SHOULD THE EU ACT?
3.1. Legal basis
The appropriate legal basis for the European Innovation Act (EIA) is Article 114 TFEU,
which empowers the Union to adopt measures for the approximation of the laws, regulations
or administrative provisions of the Member States which have as their object the establishment
and functioning of the internal market. This reflects the core objective of the EIA: to remove
the regulatory and structural barriers that hinder the testing, commercialisation and diffusion
of innovation, within the Single Market.
The choice of legal basis is further supported by the fact that the identified problems produce
a direct and demonstrable impact on the proper functioning of the Single Market. The
fragmented approaches to pre-commercial procurement and valuation of intellectual property
rights, impede cross-border movement of goods, services and capital within the Single Market.
Diverging national rules on pre-commercial procurement constitute barriers that prevent
companies from participating in and offering their innovative products and solutions to public
buyers in different Member States. The absence of a harmonised methodology for valuing
intellectual property assets creates divergent conditions across Member States for the use of
such assets in company financing, notably as collateral for debt financing. This fragmentation
undermines companies' access to capital within the Single Market, impeding their cross-border
growth and investment.
The final decision on the most appropriate legal basis will however be subject to a centre of
gravity test done on the basis of a draft legal text.
3.2. Subsidiarity: Necessity of EU action
The innovation gap cannot be overcome by Member States acting alone. This because
innovation ecosystems and markets for innovative companies are increasingly cross-border in
nature yet remain fragmented along national lines. In addition, the objectives of the initiative
to increase commercialisation and diffusion of innovation require a critical mass, both in terms
of support and in terms of potential customers, that individual Member States cannot achieve
in isolation.
EU action is the most feasible way to address the identified problems. While some there
buyers in some Member States that conduct pre-commercial procurements applying the
national rules and procedures, these procedures are often incompatible, making implementation
of cross-border pre-commercial procurements especially difficult. At the same time, diverging
national approaches undermine the ability of innovators and innovative companies to
participate in pre-commercial procurements in other Member States. No single Member State
can establish a pre-commercial procurement procedure applicable in the entire Single Market.
Therefore, only an action at the Union level can achieve the necessary level of harmonisation
opening pre-commercial procedures to all companies established in the Single Market and
enabling the implementation of cross-border pre-commercial procurements by buyers from two
26
or more Member States. Any single Member State would face difficulties in establishing an
IP valuation framework recognised by lenders in the entire Single Market. Therefore,
developing a common EU valuation framework is necessary to ensure that IP assets can serve
as effective collateral on a cross-border basis.
An action at the EU level would achieve the necessary level of harmonisation through
establishing framework conditions at the EU level that support commercialisation and diffusion
of innovation in the Single Market, thus leveraging the potential of the internal market for
innovators and innovative companies to develop, test, and find customers for their innovations.
In this respect, only EU-level frameworks can provide the scale and level playing field
Europe’s innovators need. EU-wide harmonised frameworks for accessing key resources,
including markets and financing can generate the necessary economies of scale and ensure a
level playing field for Europe’s most innovative companies. This reduces duplication,
strengthens spillovers, and positions Europe to compete effectively with global innovation
leaders such as the United States and China.
3.3. Subsidiarity: Added value of EU action
EU-level action generates clear added value by improving efficiency, fairness, and global
impact.
1. Efficiency gains arise from the optimal allocation of resources across the wider
European landscape, enabling better matching of talent, capital, and ideas throughout
the Union rather than within fragmented national ecosystems. This broader matching
unleashes innovation potential that would otherwise remain untapped in smaller or less
connected markets, thereby fostering stronger growth and allowing additional resources
to be directed towards priority policy objectives.66 67
2. Fairness stems from granting all innovative companies across the EU equal access to
resources and a consistent set of rules. This prevents firms in Member States with less
supportive framework conditions from being disadvantaged for reasons unrelated to
their own merit. Ensuring such fairness allows all deserving innovators to benefit
equally, rather than only those located in the most advanced ecosystems.68 69
66 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation, Balland, P.-A., Di Girolamo, V., Benoit, F., Ravet,
J., & Hobza, A. (2025). Divided we fall behind: why a fragmented EU cannot compete in complex technologies, Publications
Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/8548441 67 Oyun Erdene Adilbish, et al. (2024). Europe’s Productivity Weakness: Firm-Level Roots and Remedies. IMF Working
Papers. https://doi.org/10.5089/9798229001441.001 68 Quas, A., Mason, C., Compañó, R., Testa, G., & Gavigan, J. P. (2022). The scale-up finance gap in the EU: Causes,
consequences, and policy solutions. European Management Journal, 40(5), 645-652. 69 Ferrando, Annalisa; Lekpek, Senad (2018): Access to finance and innovative activity of EU firms: A cluster analysis, EIB
Working Papers, No. 2018/02, European Investment Bank (EIB), Luxembourg
27
3. Global impact is achieved by giving EU innovation output the scale and weight needed
to compete with international competitors and to engage with major global priorities
such as the green and digital transition or artificial intelligence.70 71
4. OBJECTIVES: WHAT IS TO BE ACHIEVED?
To address the problems and drivers identified in the previous sections, it is important to
set out a clear hierarchy of objectives. The general objectives reflect the broader EU policy
goals and strategic priorities that the EIA contributes to. The specific objectives translate these
into more concrete aims, directly targeting the main problems identified in section 2. Figure 7
summarises the objectives of this initiative.
Figure 7. EIA intervention logic
70 Fratto, C., Gatti, M., Kivernyk, A., Sinnott, E., & Wielen, W. V. D. (2024). The scale-up gap: Financial market constraints
holding back innovative firms in the European Union. European Investment Bank (EIB), Luxembourg 71 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation, Ambrosio, F., Brasili, A. and Niakaros, K.,
European scale-up gap – Too few good companies or too few good investors?, Publications Office of the European Union,
2021, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/886042
28
4.1. General objectives
The general objective is to improve the functioning of the Single Market for innovation by
reducing barriers to the development, testing and scale-up of innovative solutions,
thereby speeding up their commercialisation in the EU.
This objective derives directly from the problems identified in Chapter 2. All four
problems addressed by the EIA concern barriers that prevent the Single Market from realising
its full potential to bring innovative ideas from development to market across borders. They
reflect fragmented or inconsistent framework conditions across Member States: including
divergent testing and experimentation rules, non-standardised IPR valuation practices, uneven,
and differing interpretations of pre-commercial procurement. Together, these factors reduce
efficiency and predictability for innovators operating cross-border. The EIA therefore aims to
address these framework inefficiencies and improve the functioning of the Single Market for
innovation.
Progress toward this objective is operationalised through the specific objectives set out below
and monitored through defined monitoring indicators.
4.2. Specific objectives
Specific objectives translate the high-level general objectives into more concrete and
operational aims. They are directly linked to the identified problems and describe the targeted
changes that the EIA seeks to achieve through EU action. While general objectives capture the
ultimate purpose of the intervention, specific objectives clarify how the proposed measures will
contribute to those broader goals.
SO1. Lower valuation costs, and increase licensing and transfer of IPRs in the EU in the
next 4 years
This specific objective aims to reduce the cost and complexity of intellectual property rights
(IPR) valuation and to increase the licensing, transfer, and financing use of IPR assets in the
EU over the next four years.
The objective is to improve comparability, transparency, and practical usability of IPR
valuation approaches across the EU, thereby lowering transaction costs and uncertainty in IP-
related transactions. This is expected to facilitate more licensing agreements, technology
transfer operations, and financing transactions involving IP assets, supporting the
commercialisation and scale-up of innovation.
Progress toward this objective will be monitored through indicators covering the cost of IP
valuations, the uptake of common valuation approaches, their use in transactions, and the use
of IP assets in financing operations.
SO2. Increase spending on procurement of R&D services in the next 5 years
29
This specific objective aims to significantly increase the use of public procurement for R&D
services in the EU over the next five years.
The objective is to strengthen the role of public demand as a driver of innovation by increasing
the share of procurement budgets dedicated to R&D purchasing. This is expected to expand
market opportunities for innovative firms, and support early deployment of new solutions.
Progress toward this objective will be monitored through indicators measuring the share of
procurement expenditure dedicated to innovation and R&D procurements and the number and
value of innovation-oriented procurement contracts awarded.
SO4. Increase the procurement of EU-based R&D solutions in the next five years
This specific objective aims to increase the uptake of R&D solutions developed and
commercialised by EU-based companies through public procurement over the next five years.
The objective is to reinforce the contribution of public procurement to Europe’s strategic
autonomy by encouraging contracting authorities to take into account security, resilience and
long-term innovation capacity when designing and awarding procurement procedures, in line
with EU internal market and international obligations. This is expected to increase market
opportunities for EU-based innovative firms in critical sectors, support the scaling of key
technologies within the Union, and reduce strategic dependencies in areas of high economic
and geopolitical relevance.
Progress toward this objective will be monitored through indicators measuring the share and
value of procurement contracts awarded to EU-based innovative companies in identified
strategic sectors, as well as the integration of resilience- and autonomy-related criteria in
procurement procedures.
5. WHAT ARE THE AVAILABLE POLICY OPTIONS?
The Impact Assessment examines 3 potential measures designed to address the problem
drivers identified in Chapter 2. Figure 8 provides an overview of the measures and their
thematic focus. As several measures can be implemented through different instruments, target
populations, sectors, levels of regulatory intensity and ambition, each measure is usually72
presented in up to four mutually exclusive versions (A, B, C, D).
The assessment is carried out at the level of each individual measure, with the different
measure-versions representing alternative policy options for that measure. This approach
is appropriate given the horizontal scope of the EIA and the heterogeneity of both the problem
drivers and the measures addressing them. Depending on the specific problem driver and the
characteristics of the measure, the most suitable implementing instrument, and level of
regulatory intervention may differ substantially across measures.
72 Measure-versions are usually mutually exclusive, when they are not, an additional variant with the combination of the non-
mutually exclusive variants is added.
30
Finally, the preferred option for the whole EIA is constructed as a composite package by
selecting, for each of the 3 measures, the measure-version that performs best in terms of
effectiveness, efficiency, and coherence. Since the EIA covers a wide range of heterogeneous
problem drivers and instruments, assessing measures individually allows the analysis to
identify the most appropriate intervention for each specific problem area. The preferred option
therefore does not correspond to any single predefined bundle but is the coherent combination
of the strongest-performing versions across all measures.
Figure 8: Summary of the analysed measures
5.1. What is the baseline from which options are assessed?
Under the baseline scenario, there would be no specific legislation at European level
comprehensively addressing the innovation-specific problems discussed above. Existing
EU initiatives and national measures would continue to apply in their current form, and no new
intervention would be introduced to tackle the four main problems (described in Chapter 2) that
hinder the optimal uptake and diffusion of innovation in the EU Single Market.
Implementation of ongoing programmes under the EU's Multiannual Financial
Framework for 2021-2027 (e.g. Horizon Europe, Digital Europe, Invest-EU, Innovation fund,
cohesion policy instruments) would proceed as currently planned, without additional
coordination or harmonisation efforts targeting the barriers identified in Chapter 2. While some
Member States may introduce incremental reforms, these efforts are likely to remain uneven
and insufficiently coordinated to address EU cross-border regulatory and market fragmentation.
Incentivising commercialisation of research and innovation results
31
The EU would continue to rely on its initiatives related to intellectual assets, including the
EU Intellectual Property Action Plan, the Unitary Patent and the Unified Patent Court, the IP
SME Helpdesks, and existing guidance on intellectual property licensing. For results generated
by EU-funded projects, Horizon Europe model grant agreements include standardised
provisions on ownership, access rights and exploitation of results, which influence practices
related to intellectual property management and technology transfer.
Without a mandate to EUIPO it would be more difficult to develop a common EU-level
methodology for the valuation of all types of intellectual property rights, and the EU would
continue to lack a valuation framework for the use of intellectual property as collateral in
banking or investment.
Without EU-level action, the EU will continue to underperform in translating strong research
and patent output into commercially successful innovation. The existing EU and Member State
initiatives related to IP will not address the lack of a common, trusted methodology for valuing
intellectual property rights. As a result, IP-rich firms, particularly startups and scaleups, will
continue to face difficulties using intellectual property rights as collateral, limiting access to
finance and scaleup opportunities.
Access to procurement markets
In the field of innovation procurement in the public sector, the baseline is a common EU legal
framework on public procurement. Directive 2014/24/EU, Directive 2014/23/EU, Directive
2014/25/EU and Directive 2009/81/EC provide public buyers with 9 different procurement
procedures that can be applied in ways compatible with innovation-oriented objectives. The
directives also provide for the possibility to divide contracts into lots, which can facilitate
the participation of smaller companies, including SMEs or startups, in procurement calls.
In the field of innovation procurement in the private sector, the baseline is fragmented EU
legislation that regulates bits and pieces (e.g. on the protection of trade secrets, safeguarding
confidentiality and avoiding unlawful practices in contracting) but EU and national legislation
does not stimulate private procurers to organise their procurements in an innovation-friendly
way or in way that reinforces EU strategic autonomy, also not for private procurers that operate
critical infrastructures or provide services that are essential for the EU economy.
At the same time, the directives do not provide an EU wide definition of R&D procurement
or of procurement of innovative solutions, and do not require public buyers to use
procurement practices that stimulate innovation in the available procurement
procedures. In addition, pre-commercial procurement (PCP) is not regulated under these
directives and remains outside their scope. In addition, the directives apply only to public
procurements valued above certain thresholds (EUR 215,000 for supplies and services,
EUR 431,000 for utilities, 5,382,000 for works, EUR 700,000 for health contracts, EUR
900,000 for defence contracts). For procurements valued below those thresholds, national
procurement rules apply which are different per country and also do not sufficiently encourage
public buyers to use procurement practices that stimulate innovation.
The baseline also takes into account the Commission proposal to revise the EU public
procurement framework through the Public Procurement Act (PPA). As currently
proposed, the PPA would exclude all R&D procurement from its scope, while continuing to
32
cover the procurement of innovative solutions, including procurements that contain R&D
elements without constituting R&D procurement as such. This assumption reflects the
Commission proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to possible changes during
the subsequent legislative process in the European Parliament and the Council.
Of stakeholders that replied 82% (116) agreed that public buyers should procure R&D and
innovative solutions in a simpler way. 93% (144) agreed that a fast-track procedure for public
procurements buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, with contracts awarded based not only
on lowest price, but also on other criteria, would be a good step forward. 83% (124) agreed that
a fast-track procedure for public procurements buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, which
make wider use of functional or performance-based specifications, would be a good step
forward. 86% (127) agreed that a fast-track procedure for public procurements buying R&D
and/or innovative solutions, without legal hurdles that make it difficult for public buyers from
different EU countries to procure R&D and/or innovative solutions collaboratively, would be
a good step forward. 65% (123) agreed that when private buyers in the EU procure solutions,
even if without public funding, they should adopt procurement practices that promote
innovation and support the participation of start-ups and innovative companies. 80% of
stakeholders also agreed that both public and private procurers that operate critical
infrastructures should organise their procurements in a more innovation friendly way and in a
way that safeguards EU strategic autonomy.
All 27 Member States have adopted policies (see Annex 11 & 14 on Policy Mapping) that refer
to the stimulation of public or private innovation procurement. At the same time, only a limited
number of Member States have introduced dedicated procedures for pre-commercial
procurement and dedicated procurement practices to foster innovation in procurements
outside the EU procurement directives.
The European Business Wallets will facilitate innovation procurement by enabling public and
private buyers to securely verify suppliers’ identities and credentials and exchange procurement
documents efficiently. They will provide a digital infrastructure to store and manage
procurement data, helping procurers track processes more easily.
Without EU-level action, innovation procurement will remain underused and fragmented, with
public and private buyers continuing to prioritise cost and risk minimisation over innovation.
In particular, the absence of a harmonised EU framework for pre-commercial procurement will
keep its use uneven and largely ad hoc across Member States, limiting legal certainty and cross-
border uptake. As a result, startups and scale-ups will struggle to find early adopters in the EU,
slowing the commercialisation and scaling of innovative solutions and widening the gap with
global competitors.
5.2. Description of the policy options
Measure 1: Establishing IP valuation methodology and facilitating licensing
Measure 1 would address the lack of standardisation, complexity and high costs of existing
intellectual property rights (IPR) valuation models in the EU (problem driver 1.1) by
establishing a centralised and trusted framework for IP-backed finance at Union level. By
33
mandating EUIPO to set up a Competence Centre for IP-backed finance, the measure
would leverage EUIPO’s existing expertise, data and digital infrastructure to develop a
common IP valuation framework, set up a digital match-making platform to facilitate the
licensing and transfer of all types of intellectual property rights, provide secondary market
facilitation services (e.g. collaboration with brokerage services and IP auctioneers), support the
design and implementation of financial instruments related to IP assets, provide training,
awareness-raising and helpdesk services.
This would increase the transparency, comparability and credibility of IP valuations
across Member States, reduce information asymmetries between IP holders and financial
actors, and lower transaction costs. In parallel, support for the design of IP-backed financial
instruments, skills development and helpdesk services would improve the readiness of financial
institutions and innovators to engage in IP-backed finance. Together, these elements would aim
to enable innovative, IP-rich but tangible-poor companies to access finance earlier and more
reliably, thereby improving the allocation of capital to innovation, supporting scale-up, and
contributing to a more integrated and competitive EU innovation and capital markets
ecosystem.
The IP valuation framework would provide for a number of methodologies for valuation of
different types of IPRs and for different purposes (e.g. collateral for financing or for licensing).
The IP valuation framework would be aligned with International Valuation Standards and
principles while adding purpose-driven and sector-specific guidance for all IP rights. The IP
Valuation framework would also include the development of standardised templates and
checklists for credit and investment use in order to translate the IP valuation results into a
format that banks and investors can understand, trust, and use.
Of stakeholder replies 89% (141) of respondents agreed that Member States should adopt
(where not yet in place) strategies to promote the commercialisation of publicly funded
research, including intellectual asset management, spin-off creation, and go-to-market support.
76% (109) agreed that IPR policies in European Universities and RTOs are not sufficiently
geared to fostering the commercialisation of academic research results. 90% (131) agreed that
European universities and RTOs should have an IPR policy in place that clearly outline how
they handle protection, licensing, and transfer of IP.
The digital marketplace would operate as a digital platform enabling IPR holders to offer
their rights for transfer or licensing. An online EU-wide matchmaking platform that connects
IP-rich companies with investors and the resulting transfer or licensing contractors would be
done outside the platform.
Several versions of Measure 1 are envisaged, reflecting different levels of ambition and
scope. Version A would mandate EUIPO, through the European Innovation Act, to develop an
EU-wide IP valuation framework. Version B would focus on establishing an EU-wide digital
marketplace functioning as a secondary market for IP transactions. Version C would assign
EUIPO the role of an EU-wide IP competence centre providing advice, training and support on
IP valuation. Version D would combine the valuation framework and the marketplace, while
Version E would integrate all three elements, representing the most comprehensive approach
to addressing barriers to IP-backed finance.
34
Measure 2: Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public buyers, including cross-
border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly techniques within
R&D procurement
Measure 2 would contribute to addressing the problem that public R&D procurement is
not sufficiently used in the EU to develop and commercialise innovation by tackling three
interrelated problem drivers: lack of legal certainty on how to procure R&D services (problem
driver 2.1), overutilisation of procurement practices that favour incumbents and limit the
participation of innovative companies (problem driver 2.2), and fragmentation and barriers to
cross-border R&D procurement (problem driver 2.3).
The measure establishes a dedicated procedure for R&D procurement for public buyers,
including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly
techniques within R&D procurement. Two versions (A, B) of the measure were considered.
Version A would recommend the use of innovation-friendly techniques for R&D procurement
by public buyers, while Version B would make the use of such techniques mandatory for R&D
procurement procedures carried out by public buyers. Across all versions, a minimum EU
financial threshold,consistent with those used in other provisions of EU law is used, ensuring
compliance with the principles of proportionality and subsidiarity.
By establishing a dedicated procedure for R&D procurement, including cross-border R&D
procurement, the measure would clarify how public buyers can lawfully and effectively
procure R&D services that fall outside of the EU public procurement directives and cooperate
across borders, thereby reducing legal uncertainty and coordination barriers. Importantly, the
measure would not address defence R&D procurement.
As noted in the problem definition chapter, pre-commercial procurement (PCP) is not
subject to the EU Public Procurement Directives, while, under the Commission proposal
for the Public Procurement Act (PPA), the remaining forms of R&D procurement would
also be excluded from its scope73. In the absence of a harmonised EU framework, national
approaches to R&D procurement remain fragmented across the Union. The measure would
address this fragmentation by establishing a harmonised procedure for R&D procurement,
building on existing best practices. The procedure would apply exclusively to public buyers.
Innovation procurement techniques include start-up friendly selection criteria, innovation-
oriented award and contract monitoring criteria, functional specifications, value engineering,
innovation-friendly intellectual property arrangements, multiple sourcing provisions, place-of-
performance requirements and other EU preference clauses.
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public buyers
Measure 3 would address the insufficient consideration of Europe’s strategic autonomy
in R&D procurement (problem driver 2.4) by introducing an EU preference for public
buyers procuring R&D services. This would ensure that there are sufficient suppliers that
produce critical technology-based solutions in the EU by the time that EU preference provisions
in other EU sectorial acts (e.g. in the Industrial accelerator act, Critical medicines act) kick in
73 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that
may be introduced during the legislative process.
35
that focus on the procurement of widely commercially available solutions that fall under the
EU public procurement directives. The EU preference would strengthen incentives for
investment and scale-up in critical technologies, and reduce reliance on external providers.
Over time, this demand-side signal would support the development of resilient EU value chains,
enhance security of supply for critical technologies, and contribute to a more strategically
autonomous and competitive European innovation ecosystem.
The measure would build on approaches already used in recent Union legislation, such as
the Net-Zero Industry Act, the Critical Raw Materials Act, the Chips Act, as well as the
forthcoming European Industrial Accelerator Act, which introduce EU-level tools to reduce
strategic dependencies and strengthen Union supply chains in clearly defined sectors, but focus
only on procurements that target commercial volumes of widely available solutions that are
procured under the EU public procurement directives. The objective of the measure would be
to de-risk innovation procurements that precede large scale deployment contracts and
ensure security of supply by using the EU preference only where strategic dependencies are
evidenced. The provision would be framed as an EU preference obligation with appropriate
escape clauses, e: Global sourcing would remain possible where no suitable EU-made solution
is available or when applying the EU preference would lead to disproportionate costs or
technical incompatibilities for the procurers.
Importantly, the measure does not overlap with other existing or foreseen EU preference
provisions in sectoral acts or in the EU Public Procurements Directives, as those only focus on
procurements that are / will be covered by the EU public Procurement Directives, while the
EIA focuses on procurements that are not / will not covered by the EU Public Procurement
Directives.
Three versions (A, B, C) of the measure were considered. Version A would introduce a non-
mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement. Version B would introduce
a mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement with flexibility clauses
allowing non-EU suppliers to participate where there are no sufficient suitable tenderers within
the Union or where compliance would impose disproportionate costs. Version C would
introduce a strict mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement, with no
exceptions for public buyers.
More specifically, under Alternative B, public buyers may decide not to restrict access to EU-
based tenderers through the following opt-out clauses:
• where no suitable or sufficient EU-based suppliers are available, as demonstrated
through a market search, preliminary market consultation, or a previously unsuccessful
call for tenders;
• where restricting access would result in disproportionate costs or technical
incompatibility. For assessing disproportionate costs, a price difference exceeding 20%
between an EU-based offer and a third-country offer, based on objective and transparent
data, may be considered excessive.
The rationale for these clauses is twofold. First, they aim to mitigate potential negative
economic effects by ensuring that EU preferences are not applied where they would lead to
36
significant inefficiencies or where the EU market cannot meet demand. Second, they help
ensure compatibility with international obligations.
Across all versions, the EU preference could be applied to different types of contracts,
including supplies, works and services. Implementation modalities could combine price
preferences with award-criteria weighting, for example by assigning higher scores under
innovation-related criteria to offers demonstrating stronger contributions to innovation,
manufacturing capacity and EU strategic autonomy contribution within the Union.
Furthermore, across all versions, a minimum EU financial threshold,consistent with those
used in other provisions of EU law, is used, ensuring compliance with the principles of
proportionality and subsidiarity.
Figure 9 shows how the EIA procurement related measures (measure 2, and 3) would
complement, without overlapping with, the revision of the EU public procurement framework,
referred to as the Public Procurement Act (PPA)74.
Figure 9. Scope of the European Innovation Act in relation to the Public Procurement
Act
Source: Author own elaboration. Note: This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without
prejudice to amendments that may be introduced during the legislative process. Unlike the existing EU Public Procurement
Directives, which cover certain types of R&D procurement where the benefits accrue exclusively to the contracting authority
for use in the conduct of its own affairs and the service is wholly remunerated by it, the Commission proposal for the
revision of the EU public procurement framework, the Public Procurement Act (PPA), does not cover any type of R&D
procurement. It would, however, continue to cover procurement of innovative solutions and procurements containing R&D
elements that do not constitute R&D procurement as such.
74 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that
may be introduced during the legislative process.
37
Box 3. How would the EIA R&D procurement procedure work in practice?
In practice, the EIA R&D procurement procedure could operate as follows:
i. A municipality seeks innovative solutions to improve flood prevention, detection,
early warning and mitigation. It launches an EIA R&D procurement preliminary
market consultation to understand the state of the art and identify potential
technological approaches.
ii. Based on the consultation, the municipality identifies the main market players and,
where applicable, applies the EIA R&D procurement EU preference to reduce
dependence on large non-EU suppliers.
iii. The municipality uses the EIA R&D procurement innovation-friendly exclusion
and selection criteria that facilitate the participation of startups and other innovative
companies in the R&D procurement.
iv. The tender is based on EIA R&D procurement functional and performance
requirements that define the problem to be solved and the expected outcomes
without prescribing a specific technical solution, design or technology.
v. As the municipality has no intention of commercialising the R&D results, it allows
suppliers to retain ownership of the intellectual property generated, while
securing the necessary usage rights, thereby strengthening incentives to participate.
If a prototype is developed, the municipality can acquire ownership of that prototype.
vi. To prevent supplier lock-in and foster competition, the municipality applies the EIA
R&D procurement multiple sourcing by awarding parallel R&D contracts to several
competing suppliers, progressively reducing their number as the project advances.
This increases the likelihood of achieving the best solution while generating
knowledge spillovers that strengthen the EU innovation ecosystem.
vii. Contracts are awarded on the basis of the best value for money, with innovation-
related award criteria rather than lowest price alone.
viii. If a promising new technology emerges during contract implementation, the value
engineering EIA R&D procurement provisions allow the municipality to amend the
contract and incorporate the improved solution.
ix. Key performance indicators (KPIs) are used to monitor suppliers' progress
throughout the project and identify the best-performing solution.
x. By the end of the R&D procurement, the municipality has obtained an innovative
solution tailored to its needs while promoting competition, supporting innovative
European firms, and contributing to EU technological sovereignty.
5.3. Options discarded at an early stage
In line with the Better Regulation guidelines, a broad range of potential measures was initially
identified and screened at an early stage of the analysis. This screening assessed their relevance
38
to the identified problems and objectives, proportionality, coherence with existing Union
instruments, expected added value of EU action, and feasibility of implementation.
The measures listed below were examined but not retained for further development in the policy
options, as they were found to be outside the appropriate scope of this initiative, duplicative of
existing frameworks, insufficiently proportionate, or better addressed through non-legislative
or alternative instruments.
Operational rules for applying definitions of startups, scaleups and innovation
companies.
This measure concerned verification and operational eligibility procedures linked to the
adopted Commission Recommendation of 18 March 2026 on the definition of innovative
enterprises, innovative startups and innovative scaleups. It was discarded because, although the
benefits and costs of the initiative are likely to accrue primarily to certain types of firms (e.g.
those engaged in innovation activities, which are more likely to use IP valuation, pre-
commercial procurement, or regulatory sandboxes), the measures themselves are not legally
restricted to specific company categories. There are no formal eligibility criteria limiting access
to these instruments. Introducing such operational eligibility rules would therefore fall outside
the scope and rationale of the initiative.
Common definition, basic principles, and experimentation clauses for establishing
regulatory sandboxes. This measure was identified as potentially beneficial to improve clarity
and consistency in the use of regulatory sandboxes across the Union. By reducing
fragmentation in national approaches, the measure would have increased legal predictability
for innovators and competent authorities and facilitated the testing of innovative solutions
under controlled conditions, enhancing later commercialisation activities.However, it was not
retained, as it was considered would be more appropriately pursued through soft-law
instruments outside the scope of this intervention.
National commercialisation and IPR ownership allocation strategies.
This measure was identified as potentially beneficial for promoting the commercialisation of
publicly funded R&I results. However, it was not retained, as it was considered that such
strategies would be more appropriately pursued through soft-law instruments outside the scope
of this intervention.
Innovation friendly techniques and EU preference for all Innovation procurement. The
procurement measures on innovation-friendly procurement procedures and EU preference were
narrowed to focus exclusively on public R&D procurement to ensure better coherence with the
Public Procurement Directives. Hence, the innovation-friendly procurement techniques
applicable to other forms of procurement, such as public or private innovation procurement
more broadly, was removed from the scope of the EIA. In addition, an EU financial threshold,
consistent with those used in other provisions of EU law, was introduced, ensuring compliance
with the principles of proportionality and subsidiarity.
Innovation procurement target for public buyers. This measure was identified as potentially
beneficial, as it could incentivise Member States to allocate a higher share of public
procurement expenditure to innovation procurement. However, it was ultimately not retained.
39
Since the measure was not limited to R&D procurement and also covered procurement of
innovative solution (PPI), concerns were raised about potential overlaps with the ongoing
revision of those Directives. It was therefore considered that another policy framework could
be more appropriate for such an intervention. In addition, concerns were raised regarding the
potential administrative and financial burden on Member States.
6. WHAT ARE THE IMPACTS OF THE POLICY OPTIONS?
In line with the European Commission’s Better Regulation Toolbox and the OECD’
guidelines on policy evaluation75 , when quantification is not feasible or would rely on
highly speculative assumptions, a transparent qualitative assessment is favoured as it
provides a more appropriate basis for decision-making. This approach is consistent with
established evaluation theory and economic literature, which caution against unwarranted
numerical certainty in the absence of reliable evidence.76 77 78
Where quantification is feasible, costs and benefits are presented at aggregated EU level.
Estimates are derived by combining average unit cost or benefit values with the estimated
number of economically affected entities in the Union.
In practice, aggregate impacts are calculated by multiplying the average unit effect per
entity by the number of entities expected to be affected. In line with the European
Commission’s Better Regulation Toolbox, a distinction is made between the legally eligible
population and the economically affected population. The latter includes only those entities
realistically expected to use or be impacted by the measure and therefore constitutes a subset
of the former.
Although access to instruments such IP valuation services, or pre-commercial procurement is
not legally restricted, their use is concentrated among firms engaged in innovation activities
(e.g. R&D, IP generation, or product testing). Accordingly, entities unlikely to make use of
these instruments are excluded from the quantification to ensure realistic estimates.
6.1. Estimates of economically affected population
For the purpose of the cost-benefit analysis, it is necessary to identify the population of
entities that are economically affected by each measure. This differs from the legally
eligible population. While the legally eligible population includes all entities that could, in
principle, benefit from or bear costs under a measure, the economically affected population
comprises only of those entities realistically expected to use or be impacted by it, and therefore
constitutes a subset of the eligible population. This distinction is essential to ensure that
quantified impacts reflect actual behavioural responses rather than purely theoretical legal
eligibility.
In practice, although access to EIA measures (such as IP valuation services, and pre-
commercial procurement) is not legally restricted, and all 33.5 million enterprises and
75 OECD (2020), Improving Governance with Policy Evaluation: Lessons From Country Experiences, OECD Public
Governance Reviews, OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/89b1577d-en. 76 Manski, C. F. (2013). Public policy in an uncertain world: analysis and decisions. Harvard University Press. 77 Kahneman, D. (2011). Thinking, fast and slow. Farrar, Straus and Giroux. 78 Scriven, M. (1991). Evaluation thesaurus. Sage.
40
approximately 250,000 public authorities in the EU are formally eligible, the estimation of costs
and benefits focuses only on those entities likely to make use of these instruments. For IP
valuation, it includes firms holding or generating intellectual property. For pre-commercial
procurement, the economically affected population includes firms able to provide R&D
services, not any company, as well as public buyers with specific needs for R&D solutions,
rather than all contracting authorities.
The economically affected populations used in the cost-benefit analysis are presented
below:
Innovative firms: The number of innovative firms used in this analysis is 373,722, of which
94% SMEs (n = 350,075) and 6% large enterprises (n = 23,646), based on Eurostat estimates
from the 2022 Community Innovation Survey (CIS).79
The Community Innovation Survey (CIS), coordinated by Eurostat, is a harmonised survey
collecting firm-level data on innovation across EU countries and covers enterprises with 10 or
more employees to ensure statistical reliability and comparability, as very small firms are more
difficult to survey consistently. It follows the Oslo Manual definition, classifying firms as
“innovation-active” if they have introduced a new or significantly improved product or process,
or have ongoing or abandoned innovation activities during the reference period; estimates are
then derived by extrapolating survey responses to the full business population using statistical
weighting.
Startups: The total number used in this analysis is 35,000 startups, with a possible range
between 27,000 and 41,000. This is based on the Invest Europe State of European Tech 2024
report, according to which there are approximately 35,000 early-stage startups in Europe, while
27,000 European companies received VC funding in the past 10 years.
IP rich firms within capacity of EUIPO: the number used for this analysis is 14,515 firms, of
which 1,036 Startups, 10,398 SMEs, and 3,081 large enterprises. This is estimated based on
the following facts:
➢ The number of innovative firms used in this analysis is 373,722, of which 94% SMEs
(n = 350,075) and 6% large enterprises (n = 23,646), based on Eurostat estimates from
the 2022 Community Innovation Survey (CIS).
➢ The number of startups used this study is 35,000 startups.
➢ The number of firms that register IP rights: 10% of EU SMEs; 60% of large firms in
EU.80
➢ The number of startup that that register IP rights is assumed to be 10%, namely the same
as innovative SMEs.
79 Eurostat Online data code: inn_cis13_bas. DOI : https://doi.org/10.2908/INN_CIS13_BAS 80 European Union Intellectual Property Office (2022). 2022 Intellectual Property SME Scoreboard; European Union Intellectual Property Office and European Patent Office (2021). Intellectual property rights and firm performance in the European Union: Firm- level analysis report. Executive summary.
41
By combining this information, we obtain: (94% × 10% × 373,722) + (6% × 60% × 373,722)
+ (10% × 35,000) = (35,130 SMEs) + (13,454 large companies) + (3,500 startups) = 52,084 IP
rich firms in total.
Subsequently, the number of IP-rich firms within EUIPO capacity is estimated using EUIPO
(2025) data, according to which SMEs account for 29.6% of European patent holders, while
large enterprises represent 22.9%.81 Yielding to: (29.6% × 35,130) + (22.9% × 13,454) +
(29.6% × 3,500) = (10,398 SMEs) + (3,081 large companies) + (1,036 startups) = 14,515 IP
rich firms within capacity of EUIPO.
EU Innovation Procurement Volume: EUR 295 billion, corresponding to 10.5% of total public
procurement. Based on EU benchmarking of innovation procurement study.82
EU R&D Procurement Volume: EUR 17.28 billion, corresponding to 0,61% of the total amount
of public procurement, and 6,1% of the innovation procurement. Based on EU benchmarking
of innovation procurement study.83
Public buyers of R&D procurement: the number used in this analysis is 1,500-2,000 public
buyers. This estimate is based on a 2025 European Commission study indicating that more than
1,000 public buyers across Europe have already implemented PCPs. The analysis assumes
2,000 public buyers under Measure 2 Alternative B and 1,500 under Measure 2 Alternative A.
6.2. Costs and benefits by stakeholder by measure
6.2.1. Costs for Measure 1 - Promote valuation of IP
The estimated costs for the EU public sector are based on two elements: (i) the staff time
required for IP valuation and promotion activities, and (ii) the monetisation of that time based
on the salaries of the staff involved. Administrative and adjustment costs are grounded in
evidence provided by the European Union Intellectual Property Office, which was consulted
on the full-time equivalent (FTE) staff needed to implement the different measure options and
the baseline scenario.
Under the baseline, administrative cost for the EU public sector is estimated using the Standard
Cost Model, based on current EU IP Helpdesk services, assuming monthly inputs of 1 person-
81 EUIPO (2025, Table 5). Intellectual property rights and firm performance in the European Union. Firm-level analysis report, January 2025. The report classifies firms into three categories: (i) those holding patents only at the European level, (ii) those holding patents only at the national level, and (iii) those holding both European and national patents. The shares reported in the main text refer exclusively to firms in the first category. However, firms holding both European and national patents could also be included in the calculation of benefits. Due to the lack of access to the underlying raw data, it is not possible to isolate and account for the number of firms in this category 82 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement
observatory : final study report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226. 83 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement
observatory : final study report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226.
42
day (AD10), 3 person-days (AD6), and 2 person-days (AST/SC3), corresponding to 72 person-
days per year (around 0.33 FTE), valued at EUR 40.5 per hour84 (EUR 23,328 annually).
Under the measure, additional tasks would generate administrative costs for the EU public
sector. These are assumed to require no additional FTEs for the EU IP valuation methodology
(Alternative A), 2 FTEs per year for the secondary IP marketplace (Alternative B), and 8 FTEs
per year for the IP competence centre (Alternative C). Alternatives D and E combine the
previous components respectively as A+B and A+B+C.85 Staff time is monetised using an
average hourly rate of EUR 40.5.
Adjustment costs are estimated based on the staff required to establish the different components
of the measure: 3–4 FTEs for the development of the EU IP valuation methodology (Alternative
A), 4 FTEs for the development of the secondary IP marketplace platform (Alternative B), and
10 FTEs for the establishment of the IP competence centre, including training activities
(Alternative C).86 Staff time is monetised using an average hourly rate of EUR 40.5.87
Table 4. Administrative and adjustment costs for EU public sector
Baseline
(continuation of current scenario)
Alternative A –
EUIPO EU wide IP valuation
framework
Alternative B Give
EUIPO EU wide IP marketplace
Alternative C -
Give EUIPO EU wide IP
competence centre
Alternative D (A + B) Alternative E (A + B+
C)
⚫ Adjustment
costs: No costs
⚫
Adjustment costs:
3–4 FTEs per year over 2 years
(1,320–1,760
person-days in total) × EUR 324 =
EUR 427,680 –
EUR 570,240
⚫
Adjustment
costs: 4 FTEs per year over 2 years
(1,760 person-days
in total) × EUR 324 = EUR
570,240
⚫
Adjustment costs:
10 FTEs per year over 2 years (4,400
person-days in
total) × EUR 324 =
EUR 1,425,600
⚫
Adjustment costs:
Combination of A and B. It is conservatively
assumed that it is the
sum of A + B, which results in the range of
EUR 997,920–
1,140,480
The approach is
conservative because the total cost under
this alternative is
likely to be some lower than the simple
sum because of some
overlapping activity,
⚫
Adjustment costs:
Combination of A, B and C. Following the
conservative approach
discussed under Alternative D, the
simple sum of costs
under A, B, and C leads to a range of
EUR 2,423,520–
2,566,080
⚫
Administrative
costs:
6 person-days per month × 12
months × EUR
324
= EUR 23,330
per year (72
person- days/year: 0.33
FTE/year)
⚫
Administrative
costs: No material
increase once the methodology is
established
(broadly in line
with the baseline
level above)
= EUR 23,330 per
year
⚫
Administrative
costs: 2 FTE/year
(440 person-days per year) × EUR
324 = EUR
142,560 per year
⚫
Administrative
costs: 8 FTE/year
(1,760 person-days per year) × EUR
324 = EUR
570,240 per year
⚫
Administrative costs.
Following the same
logic as used for the adjustment costs, the
sum of A and B would
imply around 2.33
FTE/year (2 FTE +
0.33 FTE),
corresponding to approximately EUR
165,890 per year.
⚫
Administrative
costs: Sum of A, B
and C leads to around 10.33 FTE/year,
corresponding to
approximately EUR
736,000 per year.
84 The EU average hourly salary rate for the job category “Professionals” (Category 2 under the International
Standard Classification of Organisations – ISCO) is EUR 40.5 per hour (incl. overhead). 85 FTEs estimates are based on consultation with the EUIPO. 86 FTEs estimates are based on consultation with the EUIPO. 87 The EU average hourly salary rate for the job category “Professionals” (Category 2 under the International
Standard Classification of Organisations – ISCO) is EUR 40.5 per hour (incl. overhead).
43
The estimated costs for the businesses are based on three elements: (i) the time (hours worked),
IP-rich companies spend to valuate and license their IP, (ii) the monetisation of the time spent,
which is based on the salaries of the staff performing the necessary activities, and (iii) the
number of IP rich companies affected by the measures. This translates into the application of
the following Standard Cost Model formula: Cost = (Hours worked × salary rate) × number of
companies affected.
Under the baseline, IP-rich firms are assumed to spend around 40–80 hours per year on IP-
related documentation and coordination activities, corresponding to approximately 20–40% of
total administrative time across functions such as tax, HR, licensing, and compliance.88 This
includes activities such as maintaining inventories of registered rights, drafting short
descriptions of inventions or software, and coordination between technical and legal teams.
Staff time is monetised using an average hourly rate of EUR 40.5.89
Under the measure, firms’ administrative workload is expected to decline progressively across
the different alternatives compared with the baseline. Under Alternative A, the reduction is
estimated at around 20%, reflecting the simplification effects of a common IP valuation
methodology. Under Alternative B, the introduction of an EU-wide matchmaking marketplace
is assumed to reduce administrative effort by around 30%, as firms would no longer need to
rely as extensively on dedicated expertise for buying and selling decisions. Under Alternative
C, firms would benefit from advisory and training services for IP valuation, resulting, for
simplicity, in a similar level of cost reduction as under Alternative B. Alternative D, which
combines Alternatives A and B, is assumed to reduce administrative workload by around 50%,
while Alternative E is estimated to achieve a reduction of approximately 75% compared with
the baseline.
Table 5. Total Administrative costs (in absolute terms) by business type, per year
Baseline
(continuation of
current scenario)
Alternative A -
EUIPO EU
wide IP
valuation
framework
Alternative B -
Give EUIPO
EU wide IP
marketplace
Alternative C -
Give EUIPO
EU wide IP
competence
centre
Alternative D
(A + B)
Alternative E
(A + B+ C)
Effort per year
(hours)
40 – 80h 30 – 60h
(-20%)
28-56h
(-30%)
28-56h
(-30%)
20-40h
(50%)
10-20h
(-75%)
Administrative
costs for Startups
EUR 1.6 – 3.5
million (= (40–
80h) × 40.5 x
1,036)
EUR 1.2 – 2.5
million (=
(30h– 60h) ×
40.5 x 1,036)
EUR 1.1 – 2.3
million (=
(28h– 56h) ×
40.5 x 1,036)
EUR 1.1 – 2.3
million (=
(28h– 56h) ×
40.5 x 1,036)
EUR 0.8–1.7
million (=
(20h– 40h) ×
40.5 x 1,036)
EUR 0.4 – 0.8
million (=
(10h– 20h) ×
40.5 x 1,036)
Administrative
costs for SMEs
EUR 17 – 34
million (= (40–
80h) × 40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 12.6 –
25.3 million (=
(30– 60h) ×
40.5 x 10,398)
EUR 12 – 23.5
million (= (28–
56h) × 40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 12 – 23.8
million (= (28–
56h) × 40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 8.4 – 17
million (=
(20– 40h) ×
40.5 x 10,398)
EUR 4.2 – 8.4
million (= (10
– 20h) × 40.5 x
10,398)
88 KfW (2025); The study estimates that companies spend around 15 hours per month, corresponding to 180 hours
per year, on administrative activities such as tax reporting, HR administration, licensing, and compliance. 89 The EU average hourly salary rate for the job category “Professionals” (Category 2 under the International
Standard Classification of Organisations – ISCO) is EUR 40.5 per hour (incl. overhead).
44
Administrative
costs for large
enterprises
EUR 5 – 10
million (= (40–
80h) × 40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 3.7 – 7.5
million (=
(30– 60h) ×
40.5 x 3,081)
EUR 3.5 – 7
million (= (28–
56h) × 40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 3.8 – 7.4
million (= (28–
56h) × 40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 2.5 – 5
million (=
(20– 40h) ×
40.5 x 3,081)
EUR 1.2 – 2.5
million (= (10
– 20h) × 40.5 x
3,081)
TOTAL (all
companies)
⚫
EUR 23.5 – 47
million
⚫
EUR 17.6 –
35.3 million
⚫
EUR 16.5 –
32.9 million
⚫
EUR 16.5 –
32.9 million
⚫
EUR 11.7 –
23.5 million
⚫
EUR 5.9 –
11.7 million
Tables 6 and 7 summarise the results, highlighting in green the net administrative cost savings
generated by the measure for companies compared to the baseline.
Table 6. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure 1 (IP Valuation)
Costs - EUR EU public sector Business
Baseline
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 23,330 EUR 23,514,956 - 47,029,913
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 23,330 EUR 17,636,217 - 35,272,434
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 427,680 – EUR 570,240 0
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 142,560 EUR 16,460,469 - 32,920,939
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 570,240 0
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 570,240 EUR 16,460,469 - 32,920,939
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 1,425,600 0
Alternative D
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 165,890 EUR 11,757,478 - 23,514,956
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 997,920–1,140,480 0
Alternative E
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 736,000 EUR 5,878,739 - 11,757,478
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 2,423,520–2,566,080 0
Table 7. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 1 (IP Valuation)
Costs - EUR EU public sector Business
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 0 from EUR -5,878,739 to - 11,757,478
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 427,680 – EUR 570,240 EUR 0
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 119,230 from EUR - 7,054,487 to - 14,108,974
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 570,240 EUR 0
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 546,910 from EUR - 7,054,487 to - 14,108,974
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 1,425,600 EUR 0
Alternative D
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 142,560 from EUR -11,757,478 to -23,514,956
45
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 997,920–1,140,480 EUR 0
Alternative E
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 712,670 from EUR -17,636,217 to -35,272,434
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 2,423,520–2,566,080 EUR 0
6.2.2. Benefits for Measure 1 - Promote valuation of IP
The benefits of the establishment of a standardised EU-wide IP valuation framework, a
secondary IP marketplace, and an IP competence centre providing advisory and training
services are estimated in terms of:
• Firms’ efficiency gain. Efficiency gains are calculated as the difference between the
administrative cost supported by companies in each Measure’s Alternative compared to
the baseline. This results in a total cost avoided by firms if the measure were
implemented are estimated at EUR 5.9–11.7 million under Alternative A, EUR 7–14
million under Alternative B, and EUR 17.6–35.3 million under Alternative E.
• Firms’ increased access to IP backed finance. Increased access to IP-backed finance
for firms. Evidence from Dai et al. (2025) 90, using a difference-in-differences analysis
of reforms in the Chinese patent collateral market, shows that measures increasing
patent pledging can raise firms’ likelihood of obtaining IP-backed finance by around
18.5%. In addition, European Union Intellectual Property Office (2023)91 finds that
firms with EU-level IP filings are 5–6 times more likely to obtain early-stage funding
than firms without such filings, compared with around 2.8 times for firms relying only
on national patents. Based on this evidence, the analysis assumes a conservative
increase in IP pledgeability ranging from 18.5% to 50%. Evidence from Bracht and
Czarnitzki (2022)92 further shows that EU firms using patents as collateral can typically
obtain EUR 1.0–1.4 million more in borrowing than comparable firms that do not.
Applying these estimates to the increase in pledgeability among IP-rich firms within
the expected capacity of the measure results in estimated additional IP-backed finance
of EUR 2.7–10.2 billion per year.
Figure 12 present the full formula used to perform the elasticity-based benefit estimation of
Measure 1.
90 Dai, Y., Gao, H., Li, N., & Si, Y. (2025). Patent Collateralization and Entrepreneurship. Available at SSRN 5349951. 91 EUIPO (2023, p. 12). Patents, Trademarks and Startup Finance. Report, 17.10.2023. Last access in March 2026. 92 Bracht, F., & Czarnitzki, D. (2022). Patent collateral and access to debt. ZEW-Centre for European Economic Research
Discussion Paper, (22-033).
46
Figure 12. Measure 1 – Main benefit formula
To distribute the benefits across the different Measure 1 alternatives, the analysis assumes that
increases in IP pledging are greater under scenarios combining the EU IP valuation
methodology, the secondary marketplace for IP licensing and transactions, and the EU IP
competence centre. The combination of these elements is expected to provide the broadest
support for additional IP-backed financing. Accordingly, lower benefits are assumed under
Alternatives A, B, and C individually, while significantly higher benefits are expected under
the combined Alternatives D and E.
These considerations are reflected in the allocation of benefits across the Measure 1 alternatives
and illustrated conceptually in Figure 13.
47
Figure 13. Conceptual visualisation of benefits across Measure 1 Versions (A, B, C, D, E)
Boxes 4-7 explain in detail the assumptions underlying the elasticity estimates derived from
Bracht, F., & Czarnitzki, D. (2022), Dai, Y. et all. (2025), and EPO (2023), the rationale for
selecting these studies for the estimation of Measure 1, and the main strengths and limitations
of the approach.
Box 4. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Benefit Estimations (Measure 1)
I. Bracht, F., & Czarnitzki, D. (2022)
The study provides causal, treatment-effects evidence on the impact of patent pledging on firms' access to debt financing. The authors exploit mandatory patent collateral registration data from Sweden and the Netherlands, two jurisdictions where pledging is formally registered, and then construct firm-level panels spanning approximately 1994–2018 (Netherlands) and 1997–2018 (Sweden). The study estimates that patent pledging enables Swedish (Dutch) firms to borrow about EUR 1.0 –1.4 million per firm more than in the counterfactual situation in which no patents would have been used as collateral. The assessment draws on core elasticity representing the additional debt accessible by firms through patent pledging. This range, anchored by the two European country estimates, is applied to the estimated population of EU firms with registered European patents to compute the aggregate additional debt benefit.
II. Aptness Of This Elasticity
a. Most studies can only show that companies with patents tend to borrow more money through simple correlation and regression analysis, however, this paper goes further and shows that pledging a patent as collateral actually causes a firm to borrow more, through an experiment where instead of comparing all patent-owning firms against all non-patent-owning firms, they focused on the precise moment a firm first pledged a patent to a bank. They then found a group of very similar firms that never pledged, and used those as a comparison group. By looking at what happened to borrowing before and after the
48
pledging event for both groups, they could isolate the effect of the pledge itself. They then ran a randomised experiment to establish confidence in the genuine causal relationship between the variables.
b. The paper is one of very few empirical studies grounded in European data, using firms from the Netherlands and Sweden. These are market-economy jurisdictions with developed banking systems, strong rule of law, and institutional frameworks that are broadly representative of the wider EU context.
III. Limitations and Assumptions
a. The sample covers only Dutch and Swedish firms, both of which have relatively deep financial markets, well-functioning patent enforcement systems, and high levels of institutional trust. The application of the elasticity in the impact assessment to the full EU27 population implicitly assumes that the collateral effect of patent pledging would be similarly sized across Member States, which is not the case as not all Member States have the same level of mature banking cultures, legal systems for creditor rights, and IP enforcement quality.
b. The study does not model the behavioural response to a policy intervention; it only estimates the effect conditional on pledging already occurring.
c. The paper's dependent variable is total firm debt; it does not address venture capital or equity financing.
Box 5. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Benefit Estimations (Measure 1)
I. Dai, Y., Gao, H., Li, N., & Si, Y. (2025)
The paper analyses China's staggered, city-level roll-out of policies permitting firms to use patents as loan collateral between 2009-2016. Using a staggered DiD design across 290 cities and approximately 3,900 city- year observations, the authors identify the causal effect of permitting patent-backed lending on local entrepreneurial activity and on the financing outcomes of new firms.
The elasticity used in the impact assessment is that cities adopting the patent collateralisation policy experienced an approximately 18.5% increase in the likelihood that a firm successfully obtains an IP-backed loan (corresponding to the ~17% increase in startup numbers at the city level and confirmed via channel tests on patent pledge numbers). In the assessment, for the debt benefit calculation, this 18.5% figure is applied as the incremental probability with which Measure 1 would activate patent-backed lending for the estimated population of innovative EU firms. The Chinese pilot programme involves a public authority (SIPO) building institutional infrastructure to overcome the structural barriers that prevent lenders from accepting patent collateral.
II. Aptness Of This Elasticity
a. The paper estimates the behavioural response to a government policy intervention that creates the infrastructure for patent-backed lending. Rigorous identification with staggered DiD. The staggered roll- out of the Chinese pilot, across 55 treated cities entering at different times between 2009 and 2016, enables a credible DiD design. The parallel trends assumption is supported by the absence of significant pre-treatment coefficients in event-study plots.
b. The paper tests three mechanisms i.e., improved access to debt and equity financing, increased patent market liquidity, and an incentive effect on talented individuals to pursue entrepreneurship. The positive and significant results across all three channel tests strengthen confidence that the 18.5% figure reflects genuine causal pathways rather than spurious correlation. It is pertinent to note that there are no other similar studies in Europe neither at the Union level nor at national level, that provide similar analysis.
III. Limitations and Assumptions
Chinese institutional context differs from the EU in fundamental respects: a state-directed banking system with government-owned banks as dominant lenders; a financial system in which the state can directly subsidise interest payments and instruct banks to accept patent collateral; an innovation ecosystem heavily shaped by government planning objectives at commune/regional levels; and a legal framework for creditor rights that differs from EU Member State systems.
49
Box 6. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Benefit Estimations (Measure 1)
I. European Union Intellectual Property Office (2023)
The report examines the relationship between EU-level IP filings and the ability of European startups to obtain venture capital funding. The study links IP filing data from European registers (EPO and EUIPO) with investment data across a broad sample of European SMEs and startups, producing descriptive and econometric estimates of the correlation between IP activity and the likelihood of securing VC or early-stage equity financing. The study builds on and extends earlier EPO-EUIPO joint work (2019), which found that SMEs with prior IP activity were 10% more likely to become high-growth firms (HGFs).
Assessment draws on the finding that startups filing at the European level are approximately 5–6 times more likely to secure early-stage venture capital funding than startups that did not file, compared with 2.8 times for startups that filed only at the national level. EUIPO (2023) is directly relevant to Measure 1's VC-related benefits. The EUIPO (2023) finding that EU-level IP filings are a strong signal of VC fundability supports the hypothesis that institutional quality and standardisation in IP documentation translate into better financing outcomes for startups.
II. Aptness Of This Elasticity
a. Paper’s data is drawn from EU Member State firms, EPO, and EUIPO filings, making it the most contextually appropriate source for the EU-focused VC benefit estimation.
b. Thefindings that EU-level filings (5–6× VC likelihood) substantially outperform national filings (2.8×) are policy-relevant: it provides an empirical basis for the argument that EU-level harmonisation of IP valuation delivers benefits over and above what individual Member State frameworks currently provide.
III. Limitations and Assumptions
a. The study shows that startups filing European-level patents are much more likely to receive venture capital, but it cannot prove that filing the patent is what caused them to get the funding. The study itself acknowledges this, describing the finding as a useful predictor rather than a proven cause-and-effect relationship.
b. Getting a European patent is harder than getting a national one, the EPO applies stricter examination standards. So, startups with European patents may attract more VC simply because their inventions are genuinely stronger and more commercially valuable, not because of anything to do with where they filed.
Box 7. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Benefit Estimations (Measure 1)
Note on the Use of These Elasticities in Combination
The three sources are used in complementary, non-overlapping roles Bracht & Czarnitzki (2022) provides the magnitude of the debt increase conditional on patent pledging; Dai et al. (2025) provides the incremental probability that a policy intervention activates patent-backed lending; and EUIPO (2023) provides the upper bound for the incremental probability of VC access following EU-level IP filing.
Individually, each source involves important contextual limitations, however, collectively they represent the best available empirical evidence for the specific causal channels Measure 1 targets.
Box 8. Stakeholders view on Measure 1 (IP Valuation)
In the Open Public Consultation, 84% of respondents (108 respondents) agreed that
developing a trustworthy, EU-wide accepted IP valuation methodology with templates and
guidance would be a positive step forward. In addition, 62% of respondents (72 respondents)
50
agreed that creating an EU-wide IP marketplace with sufficient critical mass and liquidity
would be beneficial.
6.2.3. Costs for Measure 2 – Establish procedures for R&D procurement for
public buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to
promote the use of innovation-friendly techniques within R&D
procurement
The estimated adjustment costs for the public buyers are based on three elements: (i) the
staff time required for attending training on pre-commercial procurement techniques, and (ii)
the monetisation of that time based on the salaries of the staff involved, and (iii) the number of
public buyers affected by the measure.
Based on desk research, a 1.5-day course on European public procurement costs EUR 1,160
per participant, which is used as the benchmark training cost for procurement staff. In addition,
staff time is estimated at 6.5 person-days, comprising 1.5 days for the course and 5 additional
days for familiarisation with the topics. Staff time is monetised using an average hourly rate of
EUR 40.5, corresponding to EUR 324 per day based on an eight-hour working day. These costs
are applied to 1,500 public buyers under the recommended R&D procurement procedure
(Alternative A), reflecting lower expected uptake, and to 2,000 public buyers under the
mandatory R&D procurement procedure (Alternative B), reflecting higher uptake.
Table 13. Adjustment costs for public buyers – Measure 2 Baseline
(continuation of
current scenario)
A - Recommended techniques for
R&D procurements for public buyers
B – Obligatory techniques for
R&D procurements for public
buyers
Training/
familiarisation costs
⚫ No costs. ⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff member
working on procurement
Total cost: EUR 3,266 X 1,500 public
buyers X 4 staff members working on
procurement
= EUR 19,596,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff
member working on
procurement
Total cost: EUR 3,266 X
2,000 public buyers X 4 staff
members working on
procurement
= EUR 26,128,000
Redesign of
procurement
processes and
documentation
⚫ No costs. ⚫ Moderate adjustment costs. ⚫ High adjustment. costs.
The administrative costs for the public buyers, which are costs deriving from performing
procurement procedures, is estimated following the Standard Cost Model formula: Person-day
worked * salary rate *N of persons involved)* number of R&D procurement procedures*
number of public buyers affected.
51
Under the baseline scenario, administrative costs for public buyers are estimated on the basis
of 10–30 R&D procurement projects carried out annually93, 94, requiring an estimated 20–120
person-days per procurement procedure95. Staff time is monetised using an average hourly rate
of EUR 40.5, corresponding to EUR 324 per day based on an eight-hour working day. The
estimation assumes 1,000 public buyers96 under the baseline scenario.
Administrative costs under the alternatives are expected to decrease due to more efficient R&D
procurement management, reduced fragmentation across the EU, and increased familiarity with
R&D procurement techniques. In this context, it is assumed that each procedure would require
1.5 staff members, compared to four under the baseline, corresponding to an estimated 60%
reduction in administrative costs under both Alternatives A and B.
Table 14. Administrative costs for public buyers – Measure 2
Baseline (continuation of current scenario) A - Recommended techniques for R&D
procurements for public buyers
B – Obligatory techniques for
R&D procurements for public
buyers
⚫
In the baseline scenario, public buyers
incur costs related to legal uncertainty,
fragmentation of R&D procurement
procedures across the EU, and the
inefficiencies arising from the use of
traditional procurement techniques within
PCP (outside the Public Procurement
Directives).
Cost per individual R&D pr. document:
EUR 25,920 – 155,520 (=20 – 120 person-
days X 4 staff member procurement X
EUR 324 per day)
Total cost: EUR 259,200,000-
4,665,600,000 (= cost per one R&D pr.
document (as above) X (10 – 30) R&D pr.
documents per year X 1000 public buyers
⚫
Compared to the baseline, administrative
costs are expected to reduce. Indeed, after
the initial familiarisation phase,
administrative costs are expected to
decrease because of more efficient
management of R&D procurement and
reduced legal and cross-border barriers
Cost per individual R&D pr. document:
EUR 9,720 – 58,320 (=20 – 120 person-
days X 1.5 staff member procurement X
EUR 324 per day)
Total cost: EUR 145,800,000
2,624,400,000 (= cost per one R&D pr.
document (as above) X (10 – 30) R&D pr.
documents per year X 1500 public buyers
⚫
High administrative costs
borne by all public buyers
compared to Alternative A
Cost per individual R&D
pr. document: EUR 9,720 –
58,320 (=20 – 120 person-
days X 1.5 staff member
procurement X EUR 324 per
day)
Total cost: EUR
194,400,000- 3,499,200,000
(= cost per one R&D pr.
document (as above) X (10 –
30) R&D pr. documents per
year X 2000 public buyers
Tables 15 and 16 summarise the results, highlighting in red the net administrative cost increase
generated by the measure for public buyers and suppliers compared to the baseline.
Table 15. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure 2 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators
(suppliers)
Baseline
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 259,200,000 - 4,665,600,000 High
93 European Commission (2019). Impacts of EU funded Pre-Commercial Procurements. Last access in April, 2026.
See also Cordis database for H2020 and FP7. 94 https://wayback.archive-it.org/12090/20220916072752/https:/digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/policies/pcp-
and-pi-projects Last access in April, 2026 95 Stakeholders reported during the focus groups preparation times ranged from as little as two days to as long as
six months, even within the same organisation. 96 According to a 2025 European Commission presentation (available here), more than 1,000 public buyers across Europe have
already successfully implemented PCPs
52
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 EUR 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 145,800,000 - 2,624,400,000 Low
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 194,400,000 - 3,499,200,000 Medium
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High
Table 16. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 2 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) From EUR -113,400,000 to -2,041,200,000 Medium decrease
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium increase
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) From EUR -64,800,000 to - 1,166,400,000 Low decrease
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High increase
6.2.4. Benefits for Measure 2 – Establish procedures for R&D procurement for
public buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to
promote the use of innovation-friendly techniques within R&D
procurement
The benefits of the establishment of a harmonised EU-wide R&D procurement procedure for
public buyers are estimated in terms of:
• Public buyers’ efficiency gain. Efficiency gains are calculated as the difference
between the administrative cost supported by public buyers in each Measure’s
Alternative compared to the baseline. This results in estimated cost savings for public
buyers of EUR 113.4 million to EUR 2.04 billion under Alternative A, and EUR 64.8
million to EUR 1.17 billion under Alternative B.
• Firms (suppliers) increased economic performance. A large body of academic
literature97 finds that each EUR 1 spent on R&D procurement by public buyers applying
innovation-friendly procurement practices can generate up to EUR 3 in additional
profits for suppliers. This effect is commonly referred to in the literature as the “R&D
procurement impact multiplier”. Applying this elasticity to the current level of R&D
procurement expenditure in the EU, while accounting for the fact that a share of public
buyers already uses innovation-friendly R&D procurement techniques (EUR 17.28
billion), results in an estimated increase in firms’ profit of EUR 25.96 billion under the
full uptake scenario (Alternative B), and EUR 12.96 billion under the partial uptake
scenario (Alternative A).
97 Giffoni et al., (2023), Castelnovo et al. (2021), Webb, D and White, R. (2009), Salina (2006), Bezdek and Wendling
(1992), Bach et al. (2022), Bianchi-Streit et al. (1984), Schmied (1982).
53
Figure 16 present the full formula used to perform the elasticity-based benefit estimation of
Measure 2.
Figure 16. Measure 2 – Main benefit formula
To distribute the benefits across the different Measure 2 alternatives, the analysis assumes
different levels of target uptake. Under the recommended techniques (Version A), only 50% of
the uptake is assumed to be achieved, while under the mandatory techniques (Version B), full
uptake is assumed.
For both alternatives, the baseline assumption is that 50% of current R&D procurement does
not make use of innovation-friendly procurement techniques (or/and falls within the provision’s
remit). This is a conservative modelling assumption informed by evidence from the EU
Innovation Procurement Observatory, which points to substantial underuse of such techniques
across Europe. According to the Observatory, techniques aimed at facilitating the participation
of innovative suppliers and the uptake of innovative solutions achieve an average European
score of only 22%. The underutilisation is also reflected in several specific indicators. Only
around 18% of R&D procurement investment is publicly advertised, limiting transparency and
the ability of innovative firms to identify procurement opportunities. Preliminary market
consultations are particularly rare, with only 0.97% of prior information notices published in
TED announcing such a consultation. Similarly, value-for-money award criteria are used in
around 44% of public procurement procedures, implying that approximately 56% still rely on
lowest price alone, while variant offers are permitted in only around 3% of procedures
published in TED. The Observatory also identifies other innovation-friendly techniques,
including functional and performance-based specifications, value engineering, innovation-
friendly exclusion and selection criteria, and multiple sourcing, as insufficiently used.98
These considerations are reflected in the allocation of benefits across the Measure 2 alternatives
and illustrated conceptually in Figure 17. In addition, since PCP is explicitly excluded from the
scope of the EU Public Procurement Directives, the current PPA proposal would exclude all
98 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study
report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226.
54
R&D procurement99, and the Measure includes a minimum financial threshold aligned with
other provisions of EU law, both proportionality and coherence are considered to be respected
under Alternatives A and B.
Figure 17. Conceptual visualisation of benefits across Measure 2 Versions (A, B)
Box 9 explain in detail the assumptions underlying the elasticity estimates derived from the
large corpus of literature referring to the “R&D procurement impact multiplier”, the rationale
for selecting these studies for the estimation of Measure 2, and the main strengths and
limitations of the approach.
Box 9. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Benefit Estimations
I. Overview of sources and chosen elasticity
The benefit estimation for Measure 2 draws on a body of studies that measure how much economic value is generated for every euro that a major public research institution spends through procurement. The studies used span different institutions, methodologies, and time periods, but consistently point in the same direction. Giffoni et al. (2023) estimates the socio-economic impact of CERN's Future Circular Collider procurement using econometric modelling, finding a multiplier of 3.1. Building on a similar institutional context, Bianchi-Streit et al. (1984) and the two earlier works by Schmied (1977 and 1982) also focus on CERN, using supplier surveys to measure the broader economic utility generated by its high-tech procurement
99 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process.
55
contracts. Shifting to the space sector, Castelnovo et al. (2021) uses firm surveys and econometric tools to measure how Italian Space Agency procurement affects supplier performance, finding a multiplier of 3. The European Space Agency is covered by three separate studies: the Danish Agency for Science (2008) uses a survey of Danish firms to assess the economic impact of ESA contributions, finding the highest multiplier in the literature at 4.5, while Brendle et al. (1980) and Bach et al. (2022) apply survey-based approaches to quantify ESA's economic returns for European supplier firms more broadly, finding lower multipliers in the range of 1.5 to 1.6. The variation across these ESA studies likely reflects differences in population of firms, survey design, and the time periods examined. Beyond physics and space, Webb and White (2009) applies an input-output model to quantify the economic returns from research procurement at the UK's John Innes Centre, a public institution for plant and microbial research, finding a multiplier of 3. Salina (2006) similarly uses an input-output model, but applied to procurement at Italy's National Institute of Nuclear Physics, finding a multiplier of 2 to 2.7. Finally, Bezdek and Wendling (1992) estimates the economy-wide effects of NASA's procurement spending using an input-output model, finding a multiplier of 2.1.
Taken together across these studies, the multipliers range from 1.2 to 4.5, with most clustering between 2 and 3.5. This supports the adoption of a central procurement multiplier of 3 for the purposes of the Measure 2 benefit assessment.
II. Aptness of the Chosen Elasticity
A key strength of this evidence base is its internal consistency across very different contexts, methodologies, and time periods. Whether the study looks at CERN, NASA, ESA, or UK agricultural research, and whether it uses surveys, econometric models, or input-output tables, the multipliers converge. This cross-study convergence gives confidence that a multiplier of 3 is a reasonable central estimate rather than an outlier. Crucially, all of the institutions studied are recognised as leading practitioners of pro-innovation procurement techniques that Measure 2 seeks to promote.
III. Limitations and Assumptions
The central limitation of this evidence base is that it is difficult to separate two things that come bundled
together in each study: the effect of applying innovation-friendly procurement techniques, and the effect of
being a world-class research institution. CERN, NASA, and ESA are not typical public buyers. They operate at
the global technology frontier, attract highly specialised suppliers, and have decades of experience designing
and managing complex procurement. A significant part of their high multipliers may stem from the unique
nature of the contracts they award and the calibre of firms in their supply chains, rather than from the specific
procurement techniques used in isolation. This means that applying the same multiplier to a broader and
more varied population of EU public buyers, including regional authorities, utilities, and national agencies
with less experience of innovation procurement, may not yield the same level of benefit, at least in the short
term.
6.2.5. Costs for Measure 3 – Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D
procurement for public buyers
The estimated adjustment costs for the public buyers are based on three elements: (i) the
staff time required for attending training on EU-preferences procedure, and (ii) the
monetisation of that time based on the salaries of the staff involved, and (iii) the number of
public buyers affected by the measure.
Based on desk research, a 1.5-day course on European public procurement costs EUR 1,160
per participant, which is used as the benchmark training cost for procurement staff. In addition,
staff time is estimated at 6.5 person-days, comprising 1.5 days for the course and 5 additional
days for familiarisation with the topics. Staff time is monetised using an average hourly rate of
56
EUR 40.5, corresponding to EUR 324 per day based on an eight-hour working day. These costs
are applied to 1,500 public buyers under the recommended R&D procurement procedure
(Alternative A), reflecting lower expected uptake, and to 2,000 public buyers under the
mandatory R&D procurement procedure (Alternative B), reflecting higher uptake.
Table 17. Adjustment costs for public buyers – Measure 3
Baseline
(continuation of
current
scenario)
A – Non-mandatory
preferences for EU-made
solutions for public buyers
B – Mandatory
preferences for EU-
made solutions for
public buyers, with
clauses
C – Mandatory
preferences for EU-
made solutions for
public buyers
Training/
familiarisation
costs
⚫ No costs. ⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days X
324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff
member working on
procurement, but with likely
lower uptake compared to A
and B because of the non-
mandatory nature of the
requirement.
Total cost: EUR 3,266 X
1,000 public buyers
= EUR 13,064,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days
X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per
staff member
working on
procurement
Total cost: EUR
3,266 X 1,500 public
buyers X 4 staff
members working on
procurement
= EUR 19,596,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5
days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per
staff member
working on
procurement
Total cost100: EUR
3,266 X 2,000 public
buyers X 4 staff
members working on
procurement
= EUR 26,128,000
Redesign of
procurement
processes and
documentation
⚫ No costs. ⚫
Low adjustment costs.
⚫
From moderate to
high adjustment costs
because thr
application of clauses
require a market
analysis.
⚫
High adjustment
costs.
Tables 18 and 19 summarise the results, highlighting in red the net administrative cost increase
generated by the measure for public buyers and suppliers compared to the baseline.
Table 18. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure 3
Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Baseline
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 0 EUR 0
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 EUR 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) Low Medium
Adjustment costs (one-off)EUR 13,064,000Medium
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) Medium From Medium to High
57
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 From Medium to High
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) High High
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High
Table 19. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 3 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) Low increase Medium increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 13,064,000 Medium increase
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) Medium increase Medium/High increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium/High increase
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) High increase High increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High increase
6.2.6. Benefits bundled with indirect economic costs for Measure 3 – Preference
for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public buyers
Studies indicates that EU preference for the procurement of R&D can contribute to
strengthening the EU’s open strategic autonomy, in particular for critical technologies and
strategic infrastructures, by reducing dependency risks and supporting the development of EU-
based supply chains. This provides a robust qualitative basis for the expected direction of
benefits.101 102 103
On the other hand, trade restrictions are usually associated with indirect economic costs due to
the relocation of trades. Mandatory preferences for domestic suppliers in procurement can
entail non-negligible macroeconomic costs.
Oleksandr Shepotylo (2020) estimates that preferential treatment for local producers in
Ukrainian public procurement reduced GDP by around 0.58%. The measure applied broadly
across public buyers and import-intensive sectors. Similarly, Clemens Boer and Malte Rieth
(2024) estimate that economy-wide tariff increases in the United States reduced GDP by 0.1%
to 0.5% annually, suggesting that trade restrictions can generate noticeable but limited
macroeconomic effects.
The Ukrainian localisation requirement is most comparable to Alternative B, as both involve
mandatory preferences in selected procurement areas rather than economy-wide obligations.
However, the Ukrainian measure covered a much broader range of public buyers and
101 Edler, J., Blind, K., Kroll, H., & Schubert, T. (2023). Technology sovereignty as an emerging frame for innovation policy.
Defining rationales, ends and means. Research Policy, 52(6), 104765. 102 EPRS/STOA (European Parliament) (2021), Key enabling technologies for Europe’s technological sovereignty.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/thinktank/en/document/EPRS_STU(2021)697184 103 European Parliament study (2025), “Strategic autonomy and European competitiveness: Security now comes first.
https://www.europarl.europa.eu/thinktank/en/document/ECTI_STU(2025)764371
58
procurement categories, while the Measure under assessment is limited to R&D procurement
outside the scope of the Public Procurement Directives and the PPA104. Accordingly,
Alternative B is assumed to represent only around 20% of the localisation intensity of the
Ukrainian reform.
In addition, the EU Single Market is far larger, more diversified, and more integrated than the
Ukrainian economy, with stronger supplier competition and greater substitution possibilities
across Member States. This increases the EU’s ability to absorb R&D procurement preferences
with lower risks of price, productivity, or supply-chain distortions. Furthermore, Alternative B
still allows global sourcing where no suitable EU solution exists, further limiting trade
restrictions.
Figure 18 presents the full formula used to perform the elasticity-based indirect economic cost
estimation of Measure 3.
Figure 18. Measure 3 – Main indirect economic cost formula
To distribute the benefits across the different Measure 3 alternatives, the analysis considers that
stronger preferences for domestic suppliers increase gross strategic autonomy benefits, up to
the theoretical maximum of fully domestic sourcing. However, the negative GDP effects of
domestic preferences are non-linear: they remain limited under soft preferences but increase
progressively faster as restrictions become more stringent.
As a result, net strategic autonomy benefits follow an inverted “U-shaped” pattern. While
moderate preferences may strengthen strategic autonomy with limited economic costs,
excessively restrictive preferences can reduce overall economic performance to the point where
the net strategic autonomy gains diminish.
These considerations are reflected in the allocation of benefits across the Measure 3 alternatives
and illustrated conceptually in Figure 19. In addition, since PCP is explicitly excluded from the
scope of the EU Public Procurement Directives, the current PPA proposal would exclude all
104 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that
may be introduced during the legislative process.
59
R&D procurement105, and the Measure includes a minimum financial threshold aligned with
those Directives, both proportionality and coherence are considered to be respected under
Alternatives A and B.
Table 19. Conceptual visualisation of benefits across Measure 3 Versions (A, B)
Box 10 explain in detail the assumptions underlying the elasticity estimates derived from
Shepotilo, O. (2020), the rationale for selecting these studies for the estimation of Measure 3,
and the main strengths and limitations of the approach.
Box 10. Assumptions Behind Elasticity-Derived Indirect Economic Cost Estimations
(Measure 3)
I. Shepotilo, O. (2020): Overview of the estimates in the paper and the elasticity chosen
Shepotilo (2020) estimates the economic cost of Ukraine's 2020 draft law requiring that goods purchased through public procurement, particularly specialised products pertaining to transport, machinery, and electrical equipment, to contain a minimum share of locally produced content. Using a gravity model of trade, which is a standard economic tool for measuring how trade barriers affect the flow of goods between countries, the study finds that mandating local content in procurement reduces imports of the affected products, raises costs for firms that rely on those inputs, and lowers overall productivity. The central finding is that introducing these local preferences caused a GDP loss of approximately 0.58% per year.
105 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process.
60
In the context of Measure 3, this figure is used as the starting point for estimating the potential macroeconomic downside of Alternative B, which introduces mandatory preferences for EU-based suppliers in pre-commercial procurement (with opt out provisos).
II. Aptness of the Chosen Elasticity
Shepotilo (2020) is the most appropriate available evidence base for estimating the potential macroeconomic costs of Measure 3's EU preference requirements for several reasons.
a. The structural design of the Ukrainian policy is the closest available analogue to Alternative B. Unlike economy-wide tariffs or broad import restrictions, the Ukrainian localisation requirement was a targeted, procurement-specific preference applied to defined product categories, mirroring the deliberate narrowness of Alternative B, which is confined exclusively to R&D procurement. This makes Shepotilo (2020) a more appropriate comparator than the general trade restriction literature, which tends to capture economy-wide effects that would overstate the costs of a narrowly scoped procurement preference.
b. The assessment applies the Ukrainian elasticity conservatively, through two explicit scaling adjustments that substantially reduce the estimated cost before applying it to the EU context.
III. Limitations and Assumptions
The principal limitation is context transferability. Ukraine in 2020 was a relatively small, open, and import- dependent emerging economy, whereas the EU Single Market is the world's largest integrated trading bloc, with GDP roughly 90 times larger. The economic disruption caused by procurement preferences in Ukraine may therefore might not reflect exactly what the EU would experience, even with the scaling adjustments. The EUR 464 million cost figure should accordingly be read as a broad indicator rather than a precise forecast.
7. HOW DO THE OPTIONS COMPARE?
All measure-versions are compared in term of performance across four criteria:
• Effectiveness: assesses to what extent the proposed intervention is expected to achieve
its objectives by examining the anticipated benefits and the likely effects it will
generate (outputs, immediate outcomes, and longer-term results). Reflecting the
benefits as identified in the literature review and the targeted consultation responses.
• Efficiency: assesses whether the intervention delivers its intended results at a
reasonable cost, i.e. how well resources are used to generate the observed changes.
Reflecting the ratio between the benefits, as identified in the elasticity-based estimates
and targeted consultation responses, and the costs as identified by the targeted
consultation responses and the Standard Cost Model.
• Coherence: assesses how well the intervention is expected to fit within the broader
policy landscape. Internal coherence looks at whether the different elements of the
intervention work together consistently. External coherence examines how it aligns
with, complements, or potentially conflicts with other EU or national policies.
• Proportionality: assesses whether the proposed intervention is appropriate and no
more intrusive than necessary to achieve its objectives
For each measure, the version that performs best across all criteria is identified as the
preferred alternative. Tables 20-24 present the comparative results for all measure-versions
using a RAG rating to indicate performance as following: ⚫ high performance, ⚫ moderate
61
performance, and ⚫low performance. For each criterion, a detailed explanation and the
related calculation steps are provided in Annex 4.
Table 20. Measure 1 – Promote valuation of IP
Criterion Alternative A
- EU wide IP
valuation
framework
Alternative B
- EU wide IP
marketplace
Alternative C
- EU wide IP
competence
centre
Alternative D (A
+ B)
Alternative E (A +
B+ C)
Effectiveness ⚫ Only
addresses EU
valuation
angle
⚫ Only
addresses the
licensing
angle
⚫ Only
addresses the
training angle
⚫ Exploit the
complementarities
between A and B
⚫ Exploit the
complementarities
of A, B and C
Firms cost
savings EUR
5.8–11.7 milion
Les than
additional IP-
backed finance
of EUR 2.7–
10.2 billion per
year.
Firms cost
savings EUR 7–
14.1 million
Less than
additional IP-
backed finance
of EUR 2.7–
10.2 billion per
year.
Firm cost
saving less of
EUR 7–14.1
million
Less than
additional IP-
backed finance
of EUR 2.7–
10.2 billion per
year.
Firm cost
saving less of
EUR 11.7–23.5
million
Less than
additional IP-
backed finance
of EUR 2.7–
10.2 billion per
year.
Firms cost
savings EUR
17.6–35.3
million
Additional IP-
backed finance
of EUR 2.7–
10.2 billion per
year.
Efficiency ⚫ Higher IP-
backed
finance;
business;
overall firm
efficiency
gain ~EUR
11.7 m vs
baseline.
⚫ Higher IP-
backed
finance;
overall firm
efficiency
gain ~EUR
14.1 m vs
baseline.
⚫ Higher IP-
backed
finance;
overall firm
efficiency
gain ~EUR
14.1 m vs
baseline.
⚫ Higher IP-
backed finance;
overall firm
efficiency gain
~EUR 23.5 m vs
baseline.
⚫ Higher IP-
backed finance;
overall firm
efficiency gain
~EUR 35.3 m vs
baseline.
Coherence ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Internal ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
External ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Proportionality ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Preferred
version
Measure 1 aims to promote the valuation of intellectual property (IP) across the European
Union and via the European Union Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO) helping
innovators, including SMEs, better understand, value, and leverage their IP assets to facilitate
investment, commercialisation, and the diffusion of innovation. The measure is designed with
several versions. Version A focuses on developing an EU-wide IP valuation framework to
standardise how IP is assessed. Version B establishes a secondary marketplace for buying and
selling IP, improving liquidity and transaction opportunities. Version C creates an IP
competence centre that provides advice, training, match-making and financial support to
62
innovators and the financial community, relation to IP-backed finance. There are also combined
approaches: Version D merges A and B, pairing the valuation framework with the marketplace,
while Alternative E integrates all three elements (framework, marketplace, and competence
centre) offering the most comprehensive support for IP valuation and commercialisation.
Based on the impact assessment, Version E (mandate to EUIPO to set up a competence centre
for IP-backed finance, and to develop an EU wide IP valuation framework and a digital
marketplace) emerges as the preferred version. In terms of effectiveness, Alternative E is the
alternative with the highest benefits and the better cost benefit ration.
In terms of coherence, Alternative E aligns with the full set of other measures. Externally, the
mandate to the European Union Intellectual Property Office envisaged under this measure
is consistent with its objectives as set out in Regulation (EU) 2017/1001, which establishes the
EU trademark system with a view to ensuring uniform protection of intellectual property rights
and contributing to the smooth functioning of the internal market. By supporting greater
transparency, comparability and reliability in the economic assessment of IP assets, the measure
would enhance the effective use of EU intellectual property rights across the Union, without
affecting their substantive scope or enforcement. It would build on EUIPO’s existing tasks and
expertise related to the administration of EU-wide IP systems, data management and
cooperation with national authorities, and would support uniform conditions for the use of IP
rights in cross-border economic activity. Considering proportionality, Alternative E is expected
to strike a balance between achieving the objectives of improved IP valuation and
commercialisation and the associated costs.
Furthermore, from a legal perspective, a Regulation is necessary to enable the European Union
Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO) to assume these additional tasks and allocate resources to
them, as the Office’s existing mandate, established by a Union legal act, can only be amended
through another Union legal act.
Table 21. Measure 2 - Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public buyers,
including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of innovation-
friendly techniques within R&D procurement
Criterion A – Recommended techniques for
R&D procurement for public buyers
B – Obligatory techniques for R&D
procurement for public buyers
Effectiveness ⚫ Benefits applied over a smaller
sample population. Low uptake.
⚫ Benefits applied over a larget
sample population. High uptake.
+€12.96bn firm profits, administrative
cost savings for public buyers ranging
from EUR 113.4 million to EUR 2.04
billion;
+€25.92bn firm profits,
administrative cost savings ranging
from EUR 64.8 million to EUR
1.17 billion;
Efficiency ⚫ +€12.96bn firm profits,
Administrative cost savings ranging
for public buyers from EUR 113.4
million to EUR 2.04 billion; Medium
adjustment cost for public buyers;
⚫ +€25.92bn firm profits,
administrative cost savings ranging
for public buyers from EUR 64.8
million to EUR 1.17 billion; high
adjustment cost for public buyers
63
Coherence ⚫ ⚫
Internal ⚫ ⚫
External ⚫ ⚫
Proportionality ⚫ ⚫
Preferred version
Measure 2 aims to support the uptake of R&D procurement by addressing the current
lack of legal certainty and the proliferation of divergent R&D procurement procedures across
Member States, which hinder the proper functioning of the Single Market and the free
movement of goods, services, and capital.
The problem affects a significant part of the EU Single Market. In 2022, public buyers in
the classical, utilities, and defence sectors in the EU27 spent EUR 17.28 billion on R&D
procurement, corresponding to 0.61% of total public procurement expenditure.106
The assessment of Measure 2 shows that Version B (Obligatory techniques for R&D
procurement for public buyers) offers the best approach against the considered criteria. The
effectiveness assessment show version B to deliver the highest benefits, while scoring similarly
in efficiency with Version A (Recommended techniques for R&D procurement for public
buyers).
Both alternatives are coherent with the EU Public Procurement Directives, as PCP is explicitly
excluded from their scope. And the current PPA proposal would exclude all R&D
procurement107. The Measure therefore complements, rather than overlaps with, procurement
procedures falling within the remit of the Directives and their revision under the PPA.
From a legal perspective, Version B has a robust legal basis under Articles 114 TFEU. This
is because the lack of legal certainty and the divergence of rules governing the establishment
and operation of pre-commercial procurement directly affect the functioning of the Single
Market, hindering the cross-border movement of goods, services, capital. With R&D
procurement representing a significant share of the EU single Market. Diverging national rules
on R&D procurement constitute barriers that prevent companies from participating in and
offering their innovative ideas to public buyers in different Member States.
Table 22. Measure 3 - Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public
buyers
Criterion A – Non-mandatory
preferences for EU-made
solutions for public buyers
B – Mandatory preferences
for EU-made solutions for
public buyers, with clauses
C – Mandatory preferences
for EU-made solutions for
public buyers
Effectiveness ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Strengthening the EU’s open strategic autonomy
106 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory:
final study report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226. 107 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process.
64
Efficiency ⚫ Strengthens slightly EU
open strategic autonomy;
less than around 464
millions in indirect GDP
economic costs
⚫ Strengthens
significantly EU open
strategic autonomy;
around 464 millions in
indirect GDP economic
costs
⚫ Strengthens
significantly EU open
strategic autonomy; more
than 464 millions in
indirect GDP economic
costs
Coherence ⚫ ⚫⚫
Internal ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
External ⚫ ⚫⚫
Proportionality ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
Preferred
alternative
Measure 3 aims to strengthen EU strategic autonomy by requiring public buyers to give
preference to EU-made solutions when procuring strategic technologies through R&D
procurement.
Version B (mandatory preference for EU-made solutions for public buyers, combined with
opt-out clauses) is identified as the preferred option. It delivers significantly greater strategic
autonomy benefits than Version A (non-mandatory EU preference), while avoiding the
disproportionate indirect economic costs associated with Version C (fully mandatory EU
preference for public buyers).
This is because the opt-out clauses under Version B allow procurement from non-EU suppliers
where no suitable EU alternative exists or where the cost difference between EU and non-EU
suppliers would be excessively high, thereby limiting the macroeconomic costs of the
Measure.
Regarding coherence, Version B is consistent both internally and externally. Internally, it
integrates well with other measures in EIA aimed at supporting innovation, while improving
the resilience of the EU industrial base and reducing risks linked to critical dependencies.
Externally, the measure builds on and is consistent with approaches already used in recent
Union legislation, such as the Net-Zero Industry Act, the Critical Raw Materials Act, as well
as the forthcoming European Industrial Accelerator Act, which introduce EU-level tools to
reduce strategic dependencies and strengthen Union supply chains in clearly defined sectors. It
also takes into account the identification of strategic technologies at Union level, including
through the Strategic Technologies for Europe Platform (STEP), and the outcomes of the risk
assessments on critical technologies performed in the context of the European Economic
Security Strategy of June 2023. Furthermore, since the measure focus on R&D procurement,
there is not overlap with the EU Public Procurement Directive and its planned revision under
the PPA108.
Proportionality considerations further support the selection of Version B, which limit the
economic costs, while maximising the strategic autonomy.
108 This reflects the scope of the PPA proposal at the time of writing and is without prejudice to amendments that may be
introduced during the legislative process.
65
From a legal perspective, establishing an EU preference for R&D procurement through a legal
act would provide greater legal certainty on key implementation aspects. In particular, Member
States currently have limited scope to regulate the access of third-country bidders to R&D
procurement procedures or to introduce EU preference/local content requirements, as these
issues fall within the EU’s exclusive competence on the common commercial policy.
8. PREFERRED OPTION
The preferred policy option is therefore the bundle of the best-performing measure-versions
across the remaining twelve measures, as summarised in Table 25.
Table 25. Summary of EIA preferred policy options
Measure Version
Measure 1. Establishing IP valuation methodology and
facilitating licensing
Version D – Mandate the EUIPO to develop an EU wide IP
valuation framework, an EU wide IP
marketplace/matchmaking, EU wide IP competence centre
Measure 2. Establish procedures for R&D procurement for
public buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement
and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly
techniques within R&D procurement
Version B - Obligatory techniques for R&D procurement
procurements for public buyers
Measure 3. Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D
procurement for public buyers
Version B - Mandatory preferences for EU-made solutions
for public buyers, with clauses
Compared to the baseline, the preferred policy option under the EIA strongly supports
the European Commission simplification agenda, as it is expected to generate net
administrative and adjustment cost savings of approximately EUR 1.1 billion already in
the first year of implementation across all stakeholders. Net savings are expected to increase
further in subsequent years as one-off adjustment costs are phased out.
Table 26 presents the estimated administrative and adjustment costs of the preferred policy
option compared to the baseline, highlighting cost savings in green and cost increases in red.
Estimated annual administrative cost savings include:
• EUR 35 million per year in cost savings for affected firms, due to more harmonised
approaches to IP valuation;
• EUR 1 billion per year in cost saving for affected public buyers, due to more
harmonised approaches to R&D procurement and clearer frameworks cross-borders
R&D procurement
These savings are partly offset by limited additional adjustment for public authorities, estimated
at approximately EUR 2.4 million for EU public sector and EUR 45 million for affected public
buyers.
Compared to the baseline, the preferred policy option under the EIA is expected to
generate strong economic benefits across the innovation ecosystem through improved IP
66
valuation practices, harmonised R&D procurement practices. Table 27 presents the benefits
estimated, the estimated effects include:
• Additional EUR 10.2 billion in IP-backed finance every year
• Additional EUR 25.92 billion in firm profits every year
Detailed methodologies and assumptions are reported in Annex 4.
67
Table 26. Administrative and Adjustment costs compared to the baseline scenario for the EIA preferred policy options
EIA preferred measure
altenative
EU public sector MS public sector Public buyers Businesses
Measure on IPR valuation -
E
• Adj costs: EUR 2,423,520–
2,566,080
• Adm costs: EUR 712,670
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 0
• Adm costs: from EUR -17,636,217
to -35,272,434
Measure on R&D
procurement techniques- B
(Obligatory adoption)
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 26,128,000
• Adm costs: from EUR -64,800,000 to
- 1,166,400,000
• Adj costs: High increase
• Adm costs: Low decrease
Measure on R&D
procurement EU preferences
- B (obligatory with clauses)
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 19,596,000
• Adm costs: Medium increase
• Adj costs: Medium/High increase
• Adm costs: Medium/High increase
EIA TOTAL first year (Adj
+ Adm)
3,278,750 N.r. -1,120,676,000 -35,272,434
EIA TOTAL first year (Adj
+ Adm) All stakeholders
-1,152,669,684
Note: Aggregate TOTAL estimates are calculated exclusively on the basis of quantified costs. Qualitative cost assessments (e.g. low/medium/high) are presented for information purposes only and are not
summed.
68
Table 27. Benefits in absolute terms for the EIA preferred policy option. These are also interpreted as compared to the baseline (all the benefits
are incremental)
EIA preferred measure altenative Public buyers Businesses EU society as a whole
Measure on IPR valuation - E
N.r. • Efficiency gains: EUR 17,636,217 - 35,272,434 • IPR-backed raised finance: EUR 2,685,349,943 - EUR 10,160,783,567
Increased deployment of innovative solutions: qualitative discussion
Measure on R&D procurement techniques- B (Obligatory adoption)
• Efficiency gains: EUR 64,800,000 to EUR 1,166,400,000.
• Impact of R&D procurement on suppliers' profit : EUR 25,920,000,000
• Increased market competition, cross- border collaboration and innovation diffusion: qualitative discussion
Measure on R&D procurement EU preferences - B (obligatory with clauses)
N.r. • EU open strategic automony and increased market access for EU companies: EUR 12,960,000,000(P.S. This benefit is already included in the impact of R&D procurement on suppliers’ profits generated by the measure above.) It reflects the share of these benefits that remains within the EU)
• EU technological sovereignty: qualitative discussion
69
To assess the aggregate macroeconomic impact of the preferred policy option under the
European Innovation Act (EIA), the quantified costs and benefits are modelled as input
shocks in the JRC’s RHOMOLO computable general equilibrium framework, enabling the
translation of micro-level estimates into simulated EU-wide GDP and employment effects. This
implies that the estimated GDP gains generated by the RHOMOLO simulations are not
additional to those identified in the cost-benefit analysis. Rather, the quantified costs and
benefits assessed in the cost-benefit analysis constitute the direct inputs to the RHOMOLO
model. The RHOMOLO simulation then captures how the EU economy adjusts to these shocks,
modelling the general equilibrium effects that result from the underlying cost and benefit
parameters described above. In other words, the costs and benefits showed in tables 26 and
27 are used as input in the RHOMOLO model to estimate EU wide economic effects.
The simulations indicate that EU GDP would increase by around 0.24-0.42% over a ten-
year horizon relative to a baseline scenario without the EIA. This magnitude is well within
a plausible and expected range. For comparison, IMF research suggests that EU capital market
harmonisation (often considered the EU integration initiative with the highest growth potential)
could raise EU GDP by approximately 3%.109 Against this benchmark, the estimated GDP
impact of the EIA appears realistic and proportionate.
Table 28 presents the time profile of cumulated additional GDP and employment generated by
the EIA under the low and high scenarios, measured against the no-policy baseline (in which
by definition the impact of the policy is zero).
Table 28. Aggregate impact of EIA preferred policy option on EU GDP and Employment
Year GDP
diff
from
baseline
(EUR
mn)
GDP
diff
(%
GDP)
Cumulative
GDP impact
(EUR mn)
Employment
diff
(thousands
FTE)
GDP
diff
from
baseline
(EUR
mn)
GDP
diff
(%
GDP)
Cumulative
GDP impact
(EUR mn)
Employment
diff
(thousands
FTE)
Low Scenario High Scenario
1 4,313 0.02% 4,313 17 6,066 0.03% 6,066 39
2 9,853 0.05% 14,165 43 17,019 0.09% 23,085 105
3 15,067 0.08% 29,232 70 26,929 0.15% 50,015 168
4 19,975 0.11% 49,208 96 35,962 0.20% 85,977 227
5 24,585 0.14% 73,793 122 44,222 0.25% 130,199 282
6 28,899 0.16% 102,693 147 51,779 0.29% 181,978 334
7 32,919 0.18% 135,611 171 58,689 0.33% 240,667 382
8 36,646 0.20% 172,257 195 64,994 0.36% 305,661 427
9 40,085 0.22% 212,342 217 70,733 0.39% 376,394 469
10 43,241 0.24% 255,583 238 75,940 0.42% 452,335 507
109 Arnold, M. N. G., Dizioli, A., Fotiou, A., Frie, J. M., Hacibedel, M. B., Iyer, T., ... & Toscani, M. F. G. (2025). Lifting
Binding Constraints on Growth in Europe: Actionable Priorities to Deepen the Single Market (No. 2025/113). International
Monetary Fund.
70
Source: García-Rodríguez, A., Christou, T., Giffoni, F., Lazarou, N.J., Mitra, A., Peralta, C., Pedralli, M., and Salotti, S.., The
RHOMOLO ex ante macroeconomic impact assessment of the European Innovation Act - JRC Working Papers on Territorial
Modelling and Analysis No 05/2026, European Commission, Seville, 2026, JRC147056. Note: GDP shown as cumulated
values in EUR million. Employment in thousands of full-time equivalents (FTEs). The GDP impact expressed as % of GDP
refers to the EU GDP figure in 2024, that is EUR 18,016,190 million (source: Eurostat).
By year 10, the low scenario delivers EUR 255 billion in additional EU GDP (cumulative over
the whole period) alongside 238 thousand extra jobs (FTEs) at its peak impact, while the high
scenario generates almost EUR 452 billion in cumulative GDP impact, and 507 thousand
additional jobs in the year of the maximum impact. In that same year (year 10), the GDP is
between 0.24% and 0.42% above the no-policy scenario. These effects build gradually through
the ten-year phase-in period, with GDP impacts accelerating in years 6-10 as capital deepening
and productivity increases compound through regional production networks.
More details on the RHOMOLO simulation are available in Annex 8 and in the associated JRC
technical paper110.
Beyond impacts on GDP and employment, the European Innovation Act is expected to
generate wider societal benefits by strengthening research-to-market pathways for
technologies addressing climate change and environmental degradation. Empirical
evidence shows that sustained public and private investment in research and innovation
accelerates the development, diffusion, and cost reduction of clean and resource-efficient
technologies, contributing to lower emissions, improved energy efficiency, and environmental
outcomes that are not fully captured by standard macroeconomic indicators.111 112 113 114 115
9. HOW WILL ACTUAL IMPACTS BE MONITORED AND EVALUATED?
A robust monitoring and evaluation framework is essential to assess whether the EIA
achieves its intended objectives. Monitoring indicators measure implementation progress and
intermediate results, while impact indicators (such as turnover, productivity, or growth effects)
are assessed through ex-post evaluation using appropriate counterfactual methods.
For these purposes, and as announced in the Startup and Scaleup Strategy, the Commission will
launch in 2026 a Startup and Scaleup Scoreboard to measure the performance of the EU’s
startup and scaleup ecosystems. The Scoreboard will track variables such as the number of
110 García-Rodríguez, A., Christou, T., Giffoni, F., Lazarou, N.J., Mitra, A., Peralta, C., Pedralli, M., and Salotti,
S.., The RHOMOLO ex ante macroeconomic impact assessment of the European Innovation Act - JRC Working
Papers on Territorial Modelling and Analysis No 05/2026, European Commission, Seville, 2026, JRC147056. 111 Popp, D. (2019). Environmental policy and innovation: A decade of research. International Review of
Environmental and Resource Economics, 13(3-4), 265-337. 112 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Science, research and
innovation performance of the EU, 2024 : a competitive Europe for a sustainable future. Publications Office of
the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/965670. In Chapter 5.1 R&I for green productivity
growth. 113 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2022). Science, research and
innovation performance of the EU 2022 : building a sustainable future in uncertain times. Publications Office of
the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/78826. In Chapter 3 R&I for sustainability. 114 Cervantes, M. et al. (2023), “Driving low-carbon innovations for climate neutrality”, OECD Science,
Technology and Industry Policy Papers, No. 143, OECD Publishing, Paris, https://doi.org/10.1787/8e6ae16b-en. 115 European Commission: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation. (2024). Why investing in research
and innovation matters for a competitive, green, and fair Europe : a rationale for public and private action.
Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/01237.
71
startups and scaleups across Member States over time. In parallel, the Commission will
introduce the Annual Startup and Scaleup Survey, which will capture founders’ perceptions
of changes in the EU’s regulatory and business environment, and will be a survey that is
statistically representative of the EU population.
Annex 13 presents the monitoring indicators linked to each Specific Objective. The
corresponding data sources and monitoring and evaluation methods are listed also in Annex 13.
Monitoring indicators are used to track implementation progress and intermediate
results over time. They show whether the measures are taken up and whether the expected
behavioural and market changes are moving in the intended direction. Changes in these
indicators cannot always be attributed exclusively to the European Innovation Act, as
innovation performance is influenced by multiple external factors and policies. For monitoring
purposes, the baseline is defined as an observed-trend baseline: where time series are available,
it corresponds to the continuation of the historical trend at the time of implementation; where
trend data are not available, it is based on the most recent observed value.
Impact indicators capture broader economic and innovation effects and are assessed
primarily in the ex-post evaluation. For these indicators, attribution to the initiative will be
examined using counterfactual-based quantitative methods, such as difference-in-differences,
regression discontinuity, matching techniques, or synthetic control approaches, depending on
data availability and intervention design. In this context, the baseline is a “counterfactual
baseline” and will be constructed analytically as part of the ex-post evaluation design, and
represents the estimated outcome in the absence of the initiative.116 117
In line with better regulation guidelines, monitoring indicators are designed to track
implementation and outcome trends, while full causal attribution is addressed at evaluation
stage using counterfactual methods.
116 Mitra, A., Niakaros, K. (2023). The Horizon effect : a counterfactual analysis of EU research & innovation grants,
Publications Office of the European Union. https://op.europa.eu/s/AaO6 117 Angrist, J. D., & Pischke, J. S. (2009). Mostly harmless econometrics: An empiricist's companion. Princeton university
press.
72
ANNEX 1: PROCEDURAL INFORMATION
1. LEAD DG, DECIDE PLANNING/CWP REFERENCES
Lead DG: Directorate-General for Research and Innovation
Decide: PLAN/2024/2791
CWP: Commission Work Programme 2026
2. ORGANISATION AND TIMING
Unit RTD.A5, with the support of RTD.G2, was in charge of conducting the impact assessment
and it was supported by an external contractor assisting, among others, with the necessary desk
research, analysis of the results of the public consultation, conducting targeted consultations,
and conducting cost-benefit analysis of the Act’s potential measures. The Joint Research Centre
also contributed to the preparatory work by conducting literature review, analysis of the results
of the call for evidence, as well as conducting the macroeconomic impacts analysis by using
the Regional Holistic Model (RHOMOLO).
The impact assessment process started with the publication of a Call for Evidence and an Open
Public Consultation on the future European Innovation Act (EIA) on 8 July 2025, both of which
closed on 3 October 2025. The kick-off meeting with the external contractor took place on 22
August 2025.
An upstream meeting with the Regulatory Scrutiny Board was held on 15 October 2025.
A targeted consultation on the costs and benefits of the identified policy measures was launched
on 20 October 2025 and closed on 20 November 2025.
Three stakeholder focus groups on the expected impacts of the identified measures were
organised on 24, 26 and 27 November 2025.
The impact assessment on the EIA was coordinated by an Inter-Service Coordination Group
(ISCG). Representatives from Secretariat General (SG), Legal Service (LS), and DGs BUDG,
JUST, FISMA, GROW, HOME, TAXUD, TRADE, EMPL, JRC, ENV, COMP, MOVE,
REGIO, DIGIT, COMM, CNECT, ENER, CLIMA, EAC, SANTE were appointed to the
ISCG.
For the first RSB submission, two meetings of the ISCG were held. The first meeting took place
on 9 April 2025 and the second was held as a joint ISCG covering both the European Innovation
Act and the EU Inc. proposal on 9 December 2025. In the second meeting, DG RTD presented
the draft impact assessment and invited the participating services to provide their feedback.
Following that meeting, the meeting minutes were kept open for additional eight calendar days
to allow all participating services to provide written comments.
In addition to the two ISCG meeting, DG RTD received substantive feedback from and
cooperated closely with a number of services, including DG GROW in relation the measures
73
concerning public procurement and IPR valuation, and DG CNECT in relation to regulatory
sandboxes.
Finally, DG RTD also received inputs related certain aspects of the European Innovation Act
during a number of Cab-Services meetings on the 28th Regime and the European Innovation
Act, organised by the Secretariat-General throughout Q3 and Q4 of 2025.
DG RTD submitted the Impact Assessment to the RSB on 23 December 2025, followed by a
meeting with the RSB on 28 January 2026. Following the review of the Impact Assessment,
the RSB issued a negative opinion on 30 January 2026.
Following the negative opinion, RTD received substantive feedback from both the RSB, the
ISCG and the Cab-Services on how to improve the SWD and made substantial revisions to the
Impact Assessment. Subsequently, DG RTD resubmitted the Impact Assessment to the RSB
on 20 February 2026. On 27 February 2026, following the review of the revised Impact
Assessment, the RSB issued the second negative opinion.
3. CONSULTATION OF THE RSB
Overview of changes following the Regulatory Scrutiny Board opinions
FIRST RSB OPINION
Following the RSB negative opinion on the 30 January/2026, the impact assessment was
extensively revised to address the comments and points raised by the RSB. Following revisions
were made:
RSB comment:
Key issues: (1) The scope of the intervention is not clear.
What to improve: (1) The report must clarify the scope of the intervention. It should better set
the context of the initiative and other initiatives that the Commission is preparing in parallel,
that delineate the scope of the European Innovation Act and could potentially support or
complement it. A better description of the scope will enable to strictly base the impact
assessment on problems identified inside this scope.
How the comment was addressed:
Chapter 1 (“Introduction: Political and policy context”) has been fully redrafted to clarify the
scope, positioning and boundaries of the European Innovation Act (EIA).
A new Figure 1 – “Position of the European Innovation Act within the European
innovation lifecycle” has been introduced. The figure situates the EIA within the broader
innovation cycle (from research to market deployment) and visually distinguishes:
• problems addressed by other EU initiatives (in blue), and
• problems addressed specifically by the EIA (in orange).
74
This graphical mapping clarifies that the EIA targets specific bottlenecks located at two critical
stages of the innovation lifecycle (the pre-commercialisation gap and the scaling gap) which
are currently insufficiently addressed by existing EU instruments.
In addition, new Sections 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 explicitly describe broader challenges in the EU
innovation ecosystem that fall outside the scope of the EIA. For each of these, the report
explains why they are not covered by this initiative and identifies the relevant EU measures or
parallel initiatives that address them.
This restructuring ensures that the problem definition and subsequent analysis are strictly
limited to issues falling within the defined scope of the EIA.
RSB comment:
Key issues: (2) The problems, their scale and their drivers are not well identified and are not
supported with the appropriate evidence.
What to improve: (2) Currently most of the problems and problem drivers overlap. The report
should better differentiate between the presented problems and their drivers, striving to identify
root causes as exhaustively as possible. The report should then transparently consider what can
be addressed better by parallel or future initiatives. The large divergence in the identified issues
among Member States is not analysed. The problem identification should be corroborated by
evidence and should focus on the issues that cannot be solved at the national/regional or local
level, that have a cross-border dimension and could be addressed at the EU level. The
specificities of innovative companies as opposed to SMEs should be explained and supported
by evidence. The report does not provide compelling evidence that support the rationale for
regulating sandboxes at the EU level, rather than proposing general guidance.
How the comment was addressed:
Chapter 2 (“Problem definition and problem drivers for the EIA”) has been fully redrafted to
clarify the analytical structure and strengthen the evidence base.
The problem tree has been revised, under the guidance of the Better Regulation colleagues, to
clearly distinguish between problems and their underlying drivers. Overlaps have been
removed, and drivers have been simplified to ensure a clear causal logic. The revised figure 2
“Problem tree EIA” showcases this.
The chapter now integrates triangulated evidence from peer-reviewed literature, Commission,
WIPO, OECD reports, stakeholder consultations, surveys and a systematic mapping of Member
State policies. This evidence substantiates the scale of the problems and the causal link between
drivers and outcomes. The revised text explicitly analyses divergences across Member States
and clarifies which issues cannot be effectively addressed at national level due to fragmentation
and cross-border effects, thereby strengthening the justification for EU action.
Finally, the rationale for EU-level action on regulatory sandboxes has been reinforced through
additional legal, economic and comparative analysis, including policy mapping and
international benchmarking.
RSB comment:
75
Key issue (3) The report lacks a clear logic of the intervention. The objectives are not
S.M.A.R.T. The policy measures are not clearly defined and it is not demonstrated that they
address those problems at their roots causes.
What to improve (3) The logic of the intervention is not well established in the report. Once
the problems and their drivers are better identified, the general and specific objectives should
be aligned and narrowed down to the adjusted scope of the intervention. Formulating a general
objective that is too multifaceted and vast makes it hardly possible to demonstrate causal links
between the intervention and the future results. The specific objectives, selected based on a
refined problem definition, should be S.M.A.R.T. to clearly understand what is expected to be
achieved and to enable the assessment of the impact of the policy options.
How the comment was addressed:
Chapter 4 (“Objectives: What is to be achieved?”) has been fully redrafted to clarify the overall
intervention logic and define what success of the EIA concretely means.
The objectives have been revised to comply with the S.M.A.R.T. criteria. The general
objectives have been streamlined from three broad formulations to a single, more focused
objective aligned with the Treaty legal basis and proportionate to what the EIA can realistically
achieve. The specific objectives have been reformulated to be more precise, measurable and
time-bound. For each specific objective, targeted monitoring indicators with baselines and
targets have been introduced. The revised Figure 8 (EIA intervention logic) presents this
structure clearly.
RSB comment:
Key issue (4): The report does not provide sufficient evidence supporting the feasibility,
effectiveness and efficiency of many of the proposed policy measures; their proportionality is
not sufficiently assessed.
What to improve (4): The report should propose policy measures that are based on evidence
demonstrating that they can solve the underlying problems/drivers and achieve the desired
objectives. The feasibility of those measures should be checked upfront. Many of the measures
proposed in the report are not well specified, often relying on terms that may be subject to
interpretation, or are simply not fully defined. It is therefore not possible to assess their
feasibility, effectiveness, efficiency, and proportionality. The evidence supporting the
effectiveness of some measures is incomplete or missing. The causal links between a measure
and the problem drivers it is intended to address are often not established.
How the comment was addressed:
Chapter 5.2 (“Description of the policy options”) has been fully redrafted to clearly define
each measure, remove ambiguous terminology and specify their operational design. For each
measure, the causal link with the relevant problem drivers is now explicitly explained.
Chapter 5.3 (“Options discarded at an early stage”) has been added to explain why and which
measures have been originally considered, but subsequently discarded.
Chapter 6 (“Impacts of the policy options”) has been comprehensively revised. The former
high-level RAG summary tables have been replaced with structured analytical tables and
76
narrative assessment detailing the expected costs and benefits of each measure, including
quantitative estimates where feasible. The new tables 1-18 showcase this.
Chapter 7 (“Comparison of options”) has been substantially expanded. Each comparative table
is now accompanied by an explanation clarifying why the preferred measure versions perform
better across the criteria of effectiveness, efficiency, coherence and proportionality, and how
they contribute to achieving the specific objectives.
Together, these revisions ensure that the policy measures are clearly specified, evidence-based
and analytically linked to the identified root causes.
RSB comment:
Key issue (5): The report does not appropriately assess the external coherence of this initiative
with other horizontal initiatives contributing to the European competitiveness and functioning
of the Single Market.
What to improve:
(5): More specifically, the feasibility of establishing a common and future proof definition of
an innovative company across different sectors should be demonstrated better. The feasibility
and consequences of establishing a common definition of a startup, scaleup and an innovative
company and their co-existence with the established definitions of SMEs, micro companies,
and small mid-caps, should be discussed in the report in view of possible overlaps as regards
access to (EU) funding or any other special treatment of such companies. The report should
analyse the risk that the proposed policy measures and their implementation could add more
burdens than benefits.
(6) The report should better analyse the external coherence with other horizontal initiatives
contributing to improving European competitiveness by promoting innovation and functioning
of Single Market. The report should assess the coherence with the simplification agenda
(Omnibus IV); measure 2 and the supporting recommendation should describe how they would
be implemented. It should discuss the coherence of the proposals on public procurement and in
particular the revision of the public procurement rules, in light of the concerns of stakeholders.
The discussion on the external coherence should also cover the coming European Research
Area act and the “28th regime for innovative companies”.
How the comment was addressed:
The assessment of external coherence has been strengthened throughout the report.
Chapter 1 (“Introduction: Political and policy context”) has been revised to position the EIA
clearly within the broader EU innovation policy landscape. The initiative is now explicitly
mapped against other horizontal and sectoral measures, demonstrating its complementary
nature and clarifying that it addresses specific bottlenecks in the innovation lifecycle that are
not covered by existing instruments.
External coherence is further assessed in Chapter 7 (“Comparison of options”), where each
measure is analysed against the criterion of coherence with other EU initiatives and the Single
Market framework.
77
Furthermore, in order to avoid any further confusion, and given that the measures under the
EIA preferred policy option are not limited to specific company categories but are designed to
apply across the broader innovation ecosystem, the measure relating to verification and
operational eligibility procedures linked to forthcoming EU-level company definitions (such as
innovative companies, startups and scaleups) has been discarded.
Finally, additional analysis has been included in Chapter 8 (“Preferred option”) to clearly
demonstrate that the proposed policy measures do not create administrative burdens
outweighing their benefits. On the contrary, the assessment shows a net reduction in
administrative costs across the EU innovation ecosystem, with quantified benefits clearly
exceeding the estimated costs.
RSB comment:
Key issue: (6) The level of administrative burden is not sufficiently analysed.
How the comment was addressed:
The analysis of administrative burden has been substantially expanded and strengthened.
Wherever quantification was feasible, the Impact Assessment now provides administrative cost
estimates aggregated at EU level. Unit costs for affected stakeholders (firms, universities,
public buyers, research and technology infrastructures, etc.) have been multiplied by the
estimated number of affected entities. The same methodology has been applied to one-off
adjustment costs.
This approach allows aggregation across measures and stakeholder groups, leading to an
overall estimate of the net administrative cost impact of the EIA.
The improved quantitative assessment is presented in the revised Chapter 6 (“Impacts of the
policy options”), where costs are shown both in absolute terms and relative to the baseline. For
each measure, administrative costs under both the baseline and the policy options are estimated.
Key assumptions and calculation methods are explained directly in Chapter 6, with more
detailed methodological explanations provided in Annex 4.
Administrative burden estimates are also summarised in Chapter 8 (“Preferred option”).
Key additions include:
• Table 29: “Summary of administrative and adjustment costs – Preferred policy option
(vs baseline)”, presenting estimated costs by measure and stakeholder group.
• Table 2 in Annex 3: providing a summary of the estimated number of affected entities
(firms, RTIs, public buyers, etc.), together with an explanation of the estimation
methodology.
These revisions ensure a clearer, quantified and transparent assessment of administrative
burden.
RSB comment:
78
What to improve (7): The report should be clear on what success will look like; targets and
benchmarks for the specified monitoring indicators should be introduced.
How the comment was addressed:
Targets and benchmarks have now been introduced for the monitoring indicators.
Chapter 9 (“How will actual impact be monitored and evaluated?”) has been revised to clarify
how monitoring indicators define success and how progress will be assessed over time. The
chapter now explains the baseline, the attribution logic of the EIA’s contribution to observed
changes, and how impact indicators will be interpreted.
In addition, Annex 13 now presents a structured monitoring framework for each specific
objective. For each indicator, the direction of change, baseline, target and attribution risk are
explicitly specified. Where a precise numerical target has not been set, the reasons are clearly
explained.
This framework was developed with the support of DG RTD’s Better Regulation Unit to ensure
methodological robustness and clarity.
SECOND RSB’s OPINION
Following the RSB negative opinion on the 27 February/2026, the impact assessment was
extensively revised to address the comments and points raised by the RSB. Following
revisions were made:
Those were as follows:
RSB comment:
Key issue (1): there are apparent overlaps with the public procurement Directives and the report
lacks the assessment of the coherence with the upcoming revision of the public procurement
rules. The subsidiarity and proportionality of the measures in the area of public procurement
are not demonstrated.
What to improve:
(1) The relation to the EU public procurement framework remains ambiguous. On the one hand the
report claims that the scope is restricted to the areas outside of the public procurement Directives’
remit (i.e. below the established financial thresholds and covering also the exempted sectors), on
the other hand some proposed measures seem to go beyond the pre-commercial procurement. In
view of the upcoming revision of the EU public procurement framework, the rationale and the value
added for supplementing it with additional elements in the European Innovation Act should be
better assessed and justified, also in the light of stakeholders’ concerns. The establishment of
mandatory innovation procurement targets would extend to public procurement at large, which
could create an overlap with the public procurement framework, add legal complexity and
unnecessary administrative burden which is not sufficiently analysed in the report. In addition, the
inclusion of public procurement below the financial thresholds established in the EU framework
(currently subject to national procurement law) in the measures proposed by the European
Innovation Act requires further analysis in terms of their proportionality and subsidiarity.
79
How the comment was addressed:
To exclude any potential overlaps with the forthcoming revision of the public procurement
framework, the procurement measures on innovation-friendly procurement procedures
and the EU preference were narrowed to focus exclusively on public R&D procurement.
The innovation-friendly procurement techniques applicable to other forms of public
procurement, including innovation procurement more broadly, were completely removed.
To further enhance the coherence with the public procurement framework, a financial
threshold, consistent with those used in other provisions of EU law, was introduced for the
applicability of the new R&D procurement procedure, also enhancing the measure’s
proportionality as it would exclude very low-value R&D procurements from having comply
with all requirements introduced under the EIA.
The innovation procurement target measure was also removed from the scope of the EIA.
In addition to the changes described above, the definition of Problem 3 in Chapter 2 was
further reinforced, in particular as regards the scale of the problem and the comparison with
Europe’s main economic competitors. The problem definition now clearly explains that the
total value of pre-commercial procurement in the EU27 amounts to €17.3 billion, representing
0.61% of total public procurement and 0.1% of GDP, and approximately 6.1% of total
innovation procurement. This compares to around $50 billion annually in the United States,
where federal agencies allocate approximately 7.5% of their procurement budgets to R&D,
reflecting a more systematic use of procurement to support early-stage innovation.
Finally, the subsidiarity analysis in Chapter 3 was further reinforced, showing the need for an
EU-level action to address the identified problems. Similarly, in Chapter 7, the subsidiarity and
proportionality analysis of each assessed measure, including those related to public
procurement, was further expanded to ensure that the measures identified under the preferred
policy option comply with both principles.
RSB comment:
Key issue (1): the analysis of impacts focusses on innovative companies while the measures
covering the definitions of innovative companies, startups and scaleups have been discarded
and the proposed measures in this initiative are not limited to specific company categories. This
makes the overall analysis incomplete and potentially misleading.
What to improve:
(2) In the revised report the measures for ‘operationalising the definitions of innovative companies,
startups and scaleups’ have been discarded, arguing that the proposed measures would apply to all
companies. Yet the issue of establishing the definitions of such companies in the overall innovation
framework remains unresolved: the report refers to the forthcoming EU level company definition
whereas the analysis of impact of the measures focusses heavily on innovative companies.
However, the potential consequences resulting from overlaps with the existing definitions of SMEs,
micro-companies and small mid-caps are not assessed. Furthermore, the impact on legal certainty
for companies as well as the impact on establishing a threshold in terms of innovation spending for
SMEs should be analysed.
How the comment was addressed:
The revised Impact Assessment clarifies that, following the adoption of the Commission
Recommendation on definitions of innovative companies, innovative startups and innovative
scaleups in March 2026, the EIA no longer aims to include these definitions as part of the
80
proposal. At the same time, it explains that, in line with the Better Regulation Guidelines, costs
and benefits are estimated on the economically affected population (in particular innovative
companies) rather than on all legally eligible entities. In Chapter 6, for each assessed measure,
the Impact Assessment clarifies the difference between legally eligible and economically
affected firms and explains more in depth how the number of affected entities was estimated.
RSB comment:
Key issue (3): some measures are not sufficiently specified to allow for their assessment. The
analysis of costs and benefits of the specific measures is not adequate.
What to improve:
(3) Several of the options and measures analysed, (including measures 1, 2, 5, 7 and 8), are not
specified at a sufficient level of detail. This makes it difficult to assess what impacts would follow
from introducing these measures, including their feasibility, effectiveness, efficiency and
proportionality.
(4) The report should investigate the indirect effects of some measures that may have significant
consequences. For instance, the costs of mandatory innovation procurement targets and other
measures related to procurement are not limited to the administrative and adjustment costs of
establishing the targets. The report would need to assess whether the fact that the targets would
have to be met may lead to procuring (innovative) products and services at higher costs. Similarly,
the EU preference in private and public procurement outside the EU procurement framework may
induce higher costs to public and private stakeholders, which are not properly analysed in the report.
The risk that preset or too narrow definitions and principles for sandboxes could lead to the
exclusion of some potentially beneficial experiments should also be assessed.
(5) The magnitude(s) of the benefits alleged to result from several of the proposed measures,
(including measures 1, 2 and 3), are neither sufficiently assessed nor credibly demonstrated. The
assumptions behind such benefit estimates are not always robust.
How the comment was addressed:
In Chapter 6, additional quantitative estimates and explanations were added. In response
to the RSB comment that the magnitude of the benefits and costs were not sufficiently
demonstrated, and that the assumptions behind such benefit estimates were not always robust,
the Impact Assessment provided additional cost and benefit analysis so that all measures now
include both Standard Cost Model and elasticity-based quantitative estimations of costs and
benefits. And for each estimation an associated box explaining pedagogically the assumptions
behind such estimation was added.
In addition, to address the RSB request to strengthen the estimation of the economic costs
associated with the measures on procurement. Chapter 6 of the Impact Assessment now
includes estimates of the economic risk-related costs linked to both innovation and pre-
commercial procurement and the EU preference mechanisms.
In addition to the revisions summarised above, certain previously considered measures
were eventually discarded from the package. The EIC Forum measure (previous measure 1),
the regulatory sandboxes measure (previous measure 2), the national commercialisation
strategies (previous measure 4), the innovation procurement target measure (previous measure
5), as well as the transparency and cross-border rules on access to research and technology
infrastructure (previous measures 8 and 9) were discarded from the scope of the EIA.
81
4. CHANGES DONE TO ADDRESS ISSG COLLEAGUES’ COMMENTS.
Following the RSB Board’s negative opinion received on the 30 January 2026, and the RTD
extensive revisions of the impact assessment, the inter-service coordination group was also
consulted in writing (from 12/02 to 17/02) ahead of this resubmission.
The feedback from that consultation is summarised below.
Table A1-1: Summary of main ISSG comments and how RTD has addressed them (12/02 to 17/02)
Consulted
DG
Opinion and main
comments
DG RTD answer and adjustments in the IA text
HOME,
TAXUD,
DIGIT, and
COMP
Proposed various
minor track changes
to the main text
RTD accepted most of the proposed track changes
ECFIN ECFIN request of
more explanation
on Measure 7 (EU
preference on
procurements)
assumptions behind
the estimated
negative impact of
the EU preference
on GDP
RTD notes that such explanation was already included in Annex 4 and
Annex 8.
RTD added such explanation in a footnote in the main text of Chapter
6.1.
Footnote 141 text: “Shepotilo (2020) estimates that preferential
treatment for local producers in Ukrainian public procurement
generated a GDP loss of approximately 0.58%, applied broadly across
buyers and import-intensive categories. Scaling this effect to Measure
7's narrower scope; covering roughly one-half to one-third of relevant
buyers and less than one-quarter of affected trade flows, while
preserving global sourcing options where no EU alternatives exist;
implies an upper-bound GDP impact of around 0.3%. This is further
attenuated in the EU context by the Single Market's scale,
diversification, and integration, which enhance substitution possibilities
and competitive intensity relative to Ukraine, yielding an economic cost
of approximately 0.1% of GDP.”
DEFIS DEFIS Request to
exclude defense
from the scope of
measure 5, 6, and 7
(all procurement
measures)
RTD clarifies that Measure 7 Version A (the winning option) does not
include the defence sector already. Measure 6 is only on pre-
commercial procurement; hence it does not include Defence R&D
procurement.
Measure 5 is at Member State level, leaving defence sector public
buyers free to not participate.
RTD added new text in Chapter 5.2 to clarify this:
For measure 5:
“Different versions of the measure can be envisaged, varying in their
level of obligation, scope and degree of differentiation across Member
States. Version A would set innovation procurement target at National
level (nationally differentiated targets linked to a common Union-
82
level objective), allowing Member States to scale up innovation
procurement spending in proportion to their current baseline levels.
Importantly, under measure A, not all public buyers will need to
increase innovation procurement, as Member States will have the
flexibility to exclude or not certain buyers (such as defence buyers)
from the scope of this target.”
For measure 6:
“Importantly, the measure would address only pre-commercial
procurement, and not other forms of procurements of R&D
services. This means that defence R&D procurement that is not
implemented as a pre-commercial procurement will not be addressed by
the EIA.”
For measure 7:
“Under Version A, the measure would envisage an innovation-centred
application of the EU preference for critical entities (excluding the
defence sector) when they do innovation procurements outside of the
EU public procurement directives. Directive (EU) 2022/2557 on the
resilience of critical entities only applied to critical entities that are not
part of the defence sector. Making Version A of Measure 7 not applying
to the defence sector.”
GROW GROW believes
that the
procurement
provisions in the
EIA should be
focussed only on
pre-commercial
procurement, that is
the procurement of
R&D, excluding
innovation
procurements.
RTD clarifies that there are procurements, which are not pre-
commercial, that fall outside of the Public Procurement Directive,
which face legal uncertainty for cross-border activities, and that will not
be addressed in the upcoming Public Procurement Directive, Hence,
they shall be included in the EIA.
RTD added new text in Chapter 1 to explain this better:
“Furthermore, with the increasing digitalisation of the EU economy and
the growing cross-border participation of firms in public tenders,
innovation procurement increasingly attracts operators from other
Member States, including in cases falling below the thresholds of the
Public Procurement Directives118 (such as innovative procurements
below the threshold) or in arrangements excluded from its scope (such
as pre-commercial procurements above the thresholds). While the PP
Directives harmonise procedures for contracts above specific
thresholds, contracts falling outside its scope remain primarily governed
by national rules, subject to the fundamental Treaty principles as
interpreted by the Court of Justice of the European Union. However,
Treaty-based obligations alone do not provide sufficient operational
clarity for innovation-oriented instruments, nor do they address
structural barriers related to scaling demand for innovative solutions
across Member States. For this reason, the European Innovation Act
focuses on innovation procurement instruments that fall outside the
harmonised scope of the Directive, complementing, rather than
duplicating, existing procurement legislation and ensuring greater legal
certainty and policy coherence in support of cross-border innovation.”
RTD added new text in Chapter 2 to explain this better:
118 Public Procurement Directive 2014/24/EU, Directive 2014/25/EU, Directive 2009/81/EC.
83
“The harmonisation of public procurement procedures is primarily
governed by the existing EU framework, notably the Public
Procurement Directive 2014/24/EU, Directive 2014/25/EU, Directive
2009/81/EC. However, that framework mainly applies to procurements
above specific financial thresholds, and focuses on ensuring
transparency, competition and non-discrimination in mature markets.
There are however several cases where the EU Public Procurement
Directives do not apply, including for procurement below the
forementioned financial threshold (for which national rules apply) and
for procurements that fall under specific exception of these directives.
By contrast, overcoming the “valley of death” in the innovation
lifecycle requires targeted support at earlier stages, before market
maturity, including pre-commercial procurement and innovation
procurement outside the Public Procurement Directives, where legal
certainty and cross-border consistency are currently limited.
Addressing these upstream bottlenecks goes beyond the primary scope
of a general revision of the Procurement Directives. The European
Innovation Act therefore complements, rather than duplicates, the
procurement framework by tackling demand-side and legal
fragmentation issues that arise specifically in the pre-commercial and
scaling phases of innovative solutions that fall outside of the Public
Procurement Directive.
With the increasing digitalisation of the EU economy, and difficulties
of companies to sell solutions outside the EU due to the novel geo-
political context, more companies want to participate to procurement in
other EU Member States, both for procurement below the mentioned
threshold and for procurement above but exempted from the PP
directive (such as large precommercial procurement). For this reason,
the EU court of justice emphasised that it becomes more important to
ensure that the treaty principles are applied to every public procurement
contract whether it is falling inside or outside the public procurement
directive. Therefore, the EIA act focuses on innovation procurements
which are not covered in the PP directive (those below the threshold and
above but exempted).
”
GROW DG GROW
underline that the
EIA should not
include a
innovation
procurement
spending target
because the IA
focuses on
administrative and
adjustment costs
and fails to assess in
either a quantitative
or qualitative
manner the costs of
purchasing
innovative
solutions compared
RTD has included in chapter 6.1 more explanation on the requested
qualitative discussion of economic costs coming from the innovation
target.
“The introduction of an innovation procurement spending target may
also entail certain economic costs. Innovative solutions, by definition,
involve higher technological and market uncertainty than established
products, which may increase the risk of unsuccessful procurement
procedures or performance shortfalls in individual projects. However,
if the target is set at Member State level and does not impose obligations
on individual contracting authorities (as it is under version A). It
provides flexibility for Member States to determine how and where to
scale up innovation procurement, allowing efforts to concentrate on
buyers with sufficient capacity, experience and strategic interest. This
reduces the likelihood that innovation procurement is undertaken by
authorities lacking the necessary expertise and supports a gradual shift
based on institutional readiness and long-term value considerations,
thereby limiting systemic economic risk. Due to high uncertainty and
the lack of appropriate data or empirical parameters on failure rates and
84
to other available
solutions
opportunity costs, these potential economic costs are assessed
qualitatively rather than quantified..”
GROW DG GROW
believes that if
public innovation
procurement targets
were to be
mandatory
(preferred option),
this would result in
significant
additional reporting
obligations
RTD clarifies that this is not the case as the Commission already
monitor public innovation procurement and non-innovative
procurement, hence no additional reporting obligations on Member
States would apply.
RTD has added in more explanation on this in chapter 5.2:
“The measure would not require the introduction of new reporting
obligations, as the Commission already monitors public innovation
procurement spending across all Member States through a detailed
analysis of all the call for tenders published on all national and EU
(TED) procurement portals. In this monitoring AI driven text-scaping
us deployed to collect the data from the procurement portals, while
human experts determine which procurements are innovative vs non
innovative.
Importantly, to meet the target public buyers do not need to find new
additional budget because innovation procurement implemented by
making existing procurements more accessible to innovative
companies. In other words, innovation procurement is financed by
existing public procurement budget and savings generated from the use
of innovative friendly procurement techniques that increase competition
in the market. ”
GROW GROW believes
that measure 6
should be focussed
on pre-commercial
procurement
RTD clarifies that measure 6 is already focused on pre-commercial
procurement, as its own name suggest: “Measure 6: Establish a
procedure for pre-commercial procurement, including cross-border pre-
commercial procurement and rules to promote techniques to procure
innovative solutions”
RTD has added more explanation about it in chapter 5.2:
“By establishing a dedicated procedure for pre-commercial
procurement, including cross-border pre-commercial procurement,
the measure would clarify how public buyers can lawfully and
effectively procure R&D services that fall outside of the EU public
procurement directives and cooperate across borders, thereby reducing
legal uncertainty and coordination barriers. Importantly, the measure
would address only pre-commercial procurement, and not other
forms of procurements of R&D services.”
RTD has added more explanation about it in chapter 5.2:
“In parallel, by setting out rules to promote the use of techniques
that stimulate innovation throughout the procurement procedure,
the measure would enable procurers to design more flexible and
innovation-friendly procedures, lowering entry barriers for innovative
and non-incumbent suppliers. Together, these elements would reduce
fragmentation, facilitate joint cross-border procurement, and increase
the use of procurement as a demand-side tool for innovation, thereby
supporting the commercialisation and market uptake of innovative
solutions across the Union. Importantly, the ongoing revision of the
Public Procurement Directive can only introduce techniques that make
procurement more innovation friendly for those public procurements
that fall within these Directives. Therefore, such techniques have to be
85
included also in the EIA for the procurement that fall outside the Public
Procurement Directives.
Similarly, private procurement practices in the EU tend to be more risk-
averse and less innovation-oriented than in other major economies. This
can slow the adoption of cutting-edge technologies, particularly in
sectors operating critical infrastructure. As a result, parts of privately
operated critical infrastructure may remain less technologically up-to-
date, potentially weakening resilience against emerging physical and
cyber threats. Therefore, such techniques are considered important for
inclusion in the EIA also for private procurers that are critical entities.
”
GROW DG GROW
believes that the
measure 7 (EU
preference) must be
focussed on pre-
commercial
procurement to
avoid further
overlaps and
incoherence with
European
preference
provisions in other
legislative act
RTD clarify with additional explanatory text in chapter 5.2:
“Importantly, the measure does not overlap with other existing of
foreseen EU preference provision since sectoral acts of in the EU Public
Procurements Directives, as those only focus on procurements that are
covered by the EU public Procurement Directives. While the EIA
focuses on procurements that are not covered by the EU Public
Procurement Directives.”
5. EVIDENCE, SOURCES AND QUALITY
The impact assessment draws on a comprehensive evidence base assembled between July and
December 2025, combining quantitative analysis, qualitative inputs, and extensive stakeholder
feedback.
External independent consultant
An external contractor supported DG RTD (RTD.A.5, with inputs from RTD.G.2) with the
desk research, the analysis of the open public consultation and targeted consultation results, the
organisation of focus groups and additional stakeholder interviews, as well as the cost-benefit
assessment of the different measure-versions.
Joint Research Centre
Two different units from the JRC supported DG RTD (RTD.A.5, with inputs from RTD.G.2)
with the desk research, the analysis of the Call for Evidence and the macroeconomic modelling.
Specifically:
• JRC T5 produced the analysis for the EIA Call for Evidence
• JRC B7 produced the macroeconomic modelling and some of the desk research
supporting the problem definition
86
Internal analytical work
DG RTD A.5 conducted its own assessment of the policy context, problem definition, scale of
the problem, and intervention logic, drawing on academic and policy literature, international
statistical databases (e.g. OECD, Eurostat, World Bank), previous Commission analyses, and
the strategic priorities outlined in the Startup and Scaleup Strategy. The analysis was refined
following an upstream meeting with the Regulatory Scrutiny Board on 15 October 2025.
Public consultation and Call for Evidence
A Call for Evidence and an Open Public Consultation (OPC) on the future European Innovation
Act (EIA) were published on 8 July 2025 and closed on 3 October 2025. The OPC collected
views from a broad set of stakeholders, including companies, business associations, research
organisations, national authorities, and individual respondents. The analysis of the OPC formed
a central input in identifying problem drivers, validating the relevance of potential measures,
and informing the assessment of their likely impacts.
Targeted consultation
A targeted consultation (consisting of interviews and an online questionnaire) on the expected
costs and benefits of the proposed measures-versions was conducted between October and
November 2025. Three focus groups (24, 26, and 27 November 2025) complemented the results
of the interviews and online survey.
87
ANNEX 2: STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION (SYNOPSIS REPORT)
Results of the Open Public Consultation and its Synopsis Report have been published on the 4
December 2025, and can be consulted at the following link:
https://ec.europa.eu/info/law/better-regulation/have-your-say/initiatives/14593-European-
Innovation-Act/public-consultation_en
As part of the stakeholder consultation activities supporting the preparation of the European
Innovation Act (EIA) Impact Assessment, the following stakeholder engagement actions were
carried out:
1. Startup and Scaleup Strategy - Call for Evidence
This Call for Evidence received a total of 586 responses from stakeholders and was
open from 17 February 2025 to 17 March 2025.
2. European Innovation Act - Call for Evidence
The EIA Call for Evidence received 336 responses from stakeholders and was
conducted from 8 July 2025 to 3 October 2025.
3. European Innovation Act - Public Consultation
The public consultation on the EIA received 202 responses from stakeholders and was
open from 8 July 2025 to 3 October 2025.
4. European Innovation Act - Targeted Stakeholder Consultation, comprising:
a. Interviews: 18 semi-structured interviews with selected stakeholders,
conducted in October 2025.
b. Targeted online survey: 55 responses collected from stakeholders between
October and November 2025.
c. Focus groups: 3 online focus groups conducted in November 2025, primarily
aimed at validating the findings of the cost–benefit analysis.
Table A2-1 list the stakeholders’ interviews as part of the targeted consultation.
Table A2-1. List of interviewed stakeholders in the targeted consultation
Stakeholder
type
Stakeholder Interview Date
Industry representatives Orgalim (with participation of VDMA, Europe-wide association
of the machinery and equipment manufacturing industry)
08/10/2025
SMEs representatives SMEunited 02/10/2025
SMEs representatives European Entrepreneurs CEA-PME (Confédération Européenne
des Associations de Petites et Moyennes Entreprises)
07/10/2025
Startups representatives European Startup Network 07/10/2025
Startups representatives Europe Startup Nations Alliance 08/10/2025
Startups representatives Allied for Startups 24/10/2025
Higher education, research and
technology transfer
representatives
European Strategy Forum on Research Infrastructures (ESFRI) 03/10/2025
88
Higher education, research and
technology transfer
representatives
Fraunhofer 06/10/2025
Higher education, research and
technology transfer
representatives
Dutch Organisation for Applied Scientific Research (TNO) 10/10/2025
Higher education, research and
technology transfer
representatives
Guild of European Research-Intensive Universities 07/10/2025
Financial sector representatives European Banking Federation 20/10/2025
Financial sector representatives Invest Europe 03/10/2025
Financial sector representatives European Business Angels Network 10/10/2025
Standardisation sector
representatives
CEN-CENELEC 06/10/2025
Procurement sector
representatives
European Assistance for Innovation Procurement (EAFIP) 14/10/2025
Representatives of national and
regional organisations
TAFTIE – European Network of Innovation Agencies 09/10/2025
Representatives of national and
regional organisations
European Regions Research and Innovation Network (ERRIN) 07/10/2025
Intellectual Property Rights
organisations
European Union Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO) 03/10/2025
Table A2-2 and figure A2-1 list the types of stakeholders that replied to the online survey of
the targeted consultation. Details about the results are available in Annex 10.
Table A2-2. Types of stakeholders and topic covered in the Targeted Survey
Stakeholder type Problem areas covered in the survey
Public authorities: National and regional public
authorities in charge of support to innovation (policy
level) and public procurement networks
Regulatory framework; Commercially scalable
innovation; Access to talent; Innovation
procurement; Access to research and technology
infrastructure;
Innovation agencies, universities, RTOs: National
innovation agencies (operational level), technology
transfer organisations, universities, RTOs
Commercially scalable innovation; Innovation
procurement; Access to research and technology
infrastructure;
Business associations: National startup associations
(including sectoral associations) and national business
associations (incl. associations representing large
businesses)
Regulatory framework; Commercially scalable
innovation; Access to talent; Innovation
procurement; Access to research and technology
infrastructure;
Financial sector: National financial institutions and
investors
Commercially scalable innovation
89
Figure A2-1. Number of respondents by stakeholder type of the targeted consultation
online survey.
Table A2-3 to A2-5 shows the stakeholders that participated to the focus groups.
Table A2-3. Participants in Focus group 1 on Regulatory framework
Type of stakeholder Organisation
1 Industry Orgalim
2 SMEs SMEunited
3 Representatives of national and regional
organisations
European Innovation Council Forum member
4 Representatives of national and regional
organisations
European Regions Research and Innovation Network
(ERRIN)
Table A2-4. Participants in Focus group 2 on Access to RTIs and Commercially scalable
innovation
Type of stakeholder Organisation
1 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
European Strategy Forum on Research
Infrastructures (ESFRI)
2 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
Guild of European Research-Intensive Universities
3 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
Association of European Science and Technology
Professionals (ASTP)
4 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
Eiroforum
5 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
LEAPS - League of European Accelerator-based
Photon Sources
6 Higher education, research and technology
transfer organisations
VTT
7 Standardisation sector CEN-CENELEC
8 Other European Union Intellectual Property Office
(EUIPO)
21
18
2
14 Authorities
Business organisations
Financial organisations
Universities and research organisations
90
Table A2-5. Participants in Focus group 3 on Innovation procurement
Type of stakeholder Organisation
1 Procurement sector European Networks of National Competence Centers on
Innovation Procurement (P2I – Procure2Innovate) –
Representative from Germany
2 Procurement sector European Networks of National Competence Centers on
Innovation Procurement (P2I – Procure2Innovate) –
Representative from Portugal
3 Procurement sector European Networks of National Competence Centers on
Innovation Procurement (P2I – Procure2Innovate) –
Representative from Norway
4 Industry Eurochambres
5 Representatives of national and
regional organisations
Net Zero Cities
6 Representatives of national and
regional organisations
Council of European Municipalities and Regions (CEMR)
Details on the results of the focus groups are mentioned in the Annex 4.
91
ANNEX 3: WHO IS AFFECTED AND HOW?
1. SUMMARY OF COSTS AND BENEFITS
BENEFITS
Compared to the baseline, the preferred policy option under the EIA is expected to
generate strong economic benefits across the innovation ecosystem through improved IP
valuation practices, harmonised R&D procurement practices. Table 27 presents the benefits
estimated, the estimated effects include:
• Additional EUR 10.2 billion in IP-backed finance every year
• Additional EUR 25.92bn in firm profits every year
Detailed methodologies and assumptions are reported in Annex 4.
Table A3-1. Benefits in absolute terms for the EIA preferred policy options. These are
also interpreted as compared to the baseline (all the benefits are incremental)
EIA preferred measure altenative Public buyers Businesses EU society as a whole
Measure on IPR valuation - E
N.r. • Efficiency gains: EUR 17,636,217 - 35,272,434 • IPR-backed raised finance: EUR 2,685,349,943 - EUR 10,160,783,567
Increased commercialisation of innovative solutions: qualitative discussion
Measure on R&D procurement techniques- B (Obligatory adoption)
• Efficiency gains: EUR 64,800,000 to EUR 1,166,400,000.
• Impact of R&D procurement on suppliers' profit : EUR 25,920,000,000
• Increased market competition, cross-border collaboration and innovation diffusion: qualitative discussion
Measure on R&D procurement EU preferences - B (obligatory with clauses)
N.r. • EU open strategic automony and increased market access for EU companies: EUR 12,960,000,000(P.S. This benefit is already included in the impact of R&D procurement on suppliers’ profits generated by the measure above.) It reflects the share of these benefits that remains within the EU)
• EU technological sovereignty : qualitative discussion
COSTS
Compared to the baseline, the preferred policy option under the EIA strongly supports
the European Commission simplification agenda, as it is expected to generate net
administrative and adjustment cost savings of approximately EUR 1.1 billion already in
the first year of implementation across all stakeholders. Net savings are expected to increase
further in subsequent years as one-off adjustment costs are phased out.
92
Table 26 presents the estimated administrative and adjustment costs of the preferred policy
option compared to the baseline, highlighting cost savings in green and cost increases in red.
Estimated annual administrative cost savings include:
• EUR 35 million per year in cost savings for affected firms, due to more harmonised
approaches to IP valuation;
• EUR 1.16 billion per year in cost saving for affected public buyers, due to more
harmonised approaches to R&D procurement and clearer frameworks cross-borders
R&D procurement
These savings are partly offset by limited additional adjustment for public authorities, estimated
at approximately EUR 2.5 million for EU public sector and 38 million for affected public
buyers.
93
Table A3-2. Administrative and Adjustment costs compared to the baseline scenario for the EIA preferred policy options
EIA preferred measure
altenative
EU public sector MS public sector Public buyers Businesses
Measure on IPR valuation -
E
• Adj costs: EUR 2,423,520–
2,566,080
• Adm costs: EUR 712,670
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 0
• Adm costs: from EUR -17,982,000
to -35,964,000
Measure on R&D
procurement techniques- B
(Obligatory adoption)
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 26,128,000
• Adm costs: from EUR -64,800,000 to
- 1,166,400,000
• Adj costs: High increae
• Adm costs: Low decrease
Measure on R&D
procurement EU preferences
- B (obligatory with clauses)
N.r. N.r. • Adj costs: EUR 19,596,000
• Adm costs: Medium increase
• Adj costs: Medium/High increase
• Adm costs: Medium/High increase
EIA TOTAL first year (Adj
+ Adm)
3,278,750 N.r. -1,120,676,000 -35,964,000
EIA TOTAL first year (Adj
+ Adm) All stakeholders
-1,153,361,250
Note: Aggregate TOTAL estimates are calculated exclusively on the basis of quantified costs. Qualitative cost assessments (e.g. low/medium/high) are presented for information purposes only and are not
summed.
2. RELEVANT SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT GOALS
The EIA seeks to reinforce Europe’s innovation ecosystems by promoting more consistent
valuation of intellectual property rights and facilitating access to finance backed by IP
assets. At the same time, it aims to make public procurement more supportive of innovation
and to strengthen its role in developing European lead markets. Collectively, these
measures are expected to drive economic growth, technological progress, and the diffusion
of sustainable solutions, contributing primarily to SDG8 (Economic Growth) and SDG 9
(Industry, Innovation & Infrastructure), with secondary benefits for SDG 11 and SDG
12.119
The table below discusses the EIA expected impact on SDGs measure by measure.
AREA MEASURE VERSION IMPACT ON SDGs
Commercialisation of R&I results
Measure 1: Promoting valuation of IP
E - Give EUIPO a mandate (in EIA) to
develop an EU wide IP
valuation framework, develop an EU wide
marketplace that functions
as secondary marketplace for inventors and investors
to buy and sell IP, and mandate to act as an EU
wide IP competence centre
that provides advice, training and financial
support to innovators for
IP valuation
This measuresis expected to generate efficiency gains for businesses through reduced
administrative costs and improved access to
capital. The aggregate estimated efficiency
gains amount to between EUR 17.6 and 35.3
million across the affected businesses and
EUR 2.7 – EUR 10.6 billion of addination IP-
backed finance.
Innovation procurement
Measure 2: Establish procedures for R&D
procurement for public
buyers, including cross- border R&D procurement
and rules to promote the
use of innovation-friendly techniques within R&D
procurement
B – Obligatory techniques for R&D procurement for
public buyers
Introducing innovation-friendly approaches in pre-commercial procurement is expected to
accelerate experimentation and reduce time-to-
market, thereby strengthening the link between public demand and business innovation.
According to the IA, the measure could
reduce administrative costs for public buyers
by around 60% compared with the baseline,
generating estimated savings of between
EUR 64.8 million and EUR 1.2 billion.
In addition, the measure is expected to
increase aggregate business profits by
approximately EUR 25.9 billion.
On top of that, by facilitating R&D procurement, innovation-friendly approaches
are expected to strengthen market competition
and innovation diffusion by increasing SME participation, supporting cross-border
collaboration and fostering strategic
partnerships between firms and public
buyers. It also enhances the long-term
innovation capacity of both procurers and
suppliers, facilitating the uptake and commercialisation of innovative solutions and
improving public service delivery over time.
R&D procurement is not a free lunch. R&D
procurement involves higher risk than
119 The reference is to the Better Regulation Tool (Tool#19).
95
innovation procurement because it focuses on
early-stage R&D, where outcomes are uncertain
and solutions are not yet proven. Suppliers may
therefore incur financial losses if projects fail to
meet technical requirements or cannot be scaled. In the case of this Measure, this risk is
already reflected in the profit-based impact
estimates, which account for potential losses, so no additional risk adjustment is applied in the
analysis.
Innovation procurement
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in
R&D procurement for
public buyers
B – Mandatory preferences for EU-made
solutions for public
buyers, with clauses
Prioritising EU-made solutions in R&D procurement is expected to increase
procurement costs for public buyers while also
supporting EU open strategic autonomy by strengthening domestic industrial capacity and
reducing reliance on non-EU suppliers.
The IA estimates adjustment costs of around
EUR 19.6 million for public buyers, alongside
a moderate increase in costs for businesses,
while generating additional business profits
of approximately EUR 12.9 billion.
Evidence also suggests that, when applied at
scale, mandatory domestic preferences in
procurement may lead to macroeconomic
costs. Under this measure, these are estimated
at around EUR 464 million per year.
96
ANNEX 4: ANALYTICAL METHODS
Measure 1: Promoting valuation of IP
Table A4-1. Measure and alternatives
Measure Alternatives
Measure 3: Promote
valuation of IP. • Version A: Give EUIPO a mandate (in EIA) to
develop an EU wide IP valuation framework.
• Version B: Give EUIPO a mandate (in EIA) to
develop an EU wide marketplace that functions as
secondary marketplace for inventors and investors
to buy and sell IP.
• Version C: Give EUIPO a mandate to act as an EU
wide IP competence centre that provides advice,
training and financial support to innovators for IP
valuation
• Version D: A + B
• Version E: A + B + C
Costs
Costs are classified by type and by stakeholder in the table below.
Table A4- 2. Type of costs by stakeholder – Measure 1
Cost Stakeholder Type of assessment
Adjustment costs EU public sector (EUIPO) Mostly qualitative
Administrative costs EU public sector (EUIPO) Quantitative
Administrative costs Businesses Quantitative
Adjustment costs for the EU public sector (EUIPO)
Assessment approach. Adjustment costs refer to the changes the EU public sector, particularly the European Union Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO), must implement to develop a valuation methodology, an EU-wide marketplace, or guidance for assessing and disclosing IP assets that are not yet generating revenue. Based on EUIPO information, Alternative C entails the highest implementation costs, reflecting the requirements of a comparable competence centre. In contrast, Alternative A has the lowest costs, as it is confined to developing an IP valuation methodology. Alternative B sits between the two, involving a similarly complex IT development. Alternatives D and E are incremental, with costs rising as they combine and build on these components.
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline). Under the baseline, these costs do not arise (see table below).
97
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). Based on information from EUIPO, the assessment is grounded in estimated internal staff requirements. Alternative A draws on the Office’s “IP valuation” action and is limited to developing a valuation methodology, requiring an estimated 3–4 full-time equivalents (FTEs) per year over two years. Alternative B covers the development and operation of a secondary IP marketplace platform. In the absence of a dedicated EUIPO action, effort is approximated by reference to a similarly complex IT development, estimated at 4 FTEs per year over two years. Alternative C involves establishing and running an IP competence centre, including training activities. Effort is benchmarked against a comparable centre proposed in the Commission’s withdrawn COM(2023) 232 initiative. 120 Given the scope of support envisaged, covering IP exploitation, commercialisation and access to finance, it is estimated at 10 FTEs per year over two years. Alternatives D (A + B) and E (A + B + C) are incremental, combining the elements outlined above. Staff costs are monetised using an average hourly rate of EUR 40.5, consistent with the approach applied to the other measures.
Administrative costs for EU public sector (EUIPO)
Assessment approach. the EU public sector may incur into administrative costs to operate EU IP valuation methodology. These costs can be monetised as follows: person-days per year of Commission officials dealing with the activity of operating the EU IPR valuation methodology multiplied by their average salary.
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline). Under the current framework, EU-level support for IP management is already provided through services such as the European IP Helpdesk, managed by the European Innovation Council.121 The Helpdesk assists European SMEs and research teams engaged in cross-border business or EU-funded research to manage, disseminate and valorise their IP, covering activities from awareness-raising to strategic use and commercial exploitation. These services constitute ongoing EU- level support and capacity-building and are assumed to continue regardless of the measure. To estimate the additional effort required, it is assumed that implementation would involve a modest level of recurring expert input to maintain general guidance, respond to beneficiary queries, and update training materials. In the absence of detailed data on Commission staff time for such activities, a conservative assumption is applied: one person-day per month at AD10 level, three at AD6 level, and two at AST/SC3 level. This amounts to 72 person-days per year, or approximately 0.33 FTEs. For consistency with other measures, staff time is valued at an average hourly rate of EUR 40.5, resulting in estimated annual staff costs of EUR 23,328.
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). Implementing an EU-wide IP valuation framework for assets that are not yet generating revenue would entail additional analytical and supervisory tasks at EU level, including regular methodological updates. To estimate the resulting increase in administrative effort, the assessment uses projected recurring FTE requirements based on information from the EUIPO. As with implementation costs, these estimates draw on comparable EUIPO actions and, where no direct equivalent exists, on initiatives of similar complexity at EU level. On this basis, the impact assessment concludes that Measure 3 would lead to a noticeable increase in administrative workload compared with the baseline level of support activities.
Alternative B requires a permanent administrative and technical capacity to run and maintain the secondary IP marketplace platform, estimated at around 2 FTEs per year during the operational phase. This estimate is based on an approximation by EUIPO, drawing on a similarly complex IT development action. Alternative C entails the largest increase in ongoing administrative workload. The establishment and operation of an IP competence centre would require continuous analytical, coordination and training functions, estimated at around 8 FTEs per year. This is based on an EUIPO approximation informed by a comparable competence centre proposed in the Commission’s withdrawn COM(2023) 232 initiative. By contrast, Alternative A is not expected to generate additional recurring administrative workload once the valuation methodology has been established.
Table A4-3. Administrative and adjustment costs for EU public sector
Baseline (continuation
of current scenario)
Alternative A -
Give EUIPO a
mandate (in EIA) to develop an EU
Alternative B
Give EUIPO a
mandate (in EIA) to develop an EU
wide marketplace
Alternative C -
Give EUIPO a
mandate to act as an EU wide IP
competence
Alternative D (A
+ B)
Alternative E (A
+ B+ C)
120 https://single-market-economy.ec.europa.eu/publications/com2023232-proposal-regulation-standard-essential- patents_en 121 https://intellectual-property-helpdesk.ec.europa.eu/regional-helpdesks/european-ip-helpdesk_en
98
wide IP valuation
framework
that functions as
secondary
marketplace for
inventors and
investors to buy
and sell IP
centre that
provides advice,
training and
financial support
to innovators for
IP valuation
⚫ Adjustment costs:
No costs
⚫
Adjustment costs:
3–4 FTEs per year over 2 years
(1,320–1,760
person-days in total) × EUR 324 =
EUR 427,680 –
EUR 570,240
⚫
Adjustment
costs: 4 FTEs per year over 2 years
(1,760 person-
days in total) × EUR 324 = EUR
570,240
⚫
Adjustment
costs: 10 FTEs per year over 2
years (4,400
person-days in total) × EUR 324
= EUR 1,425,600
⚫
Adjustment
costs:
Combination of
A and B. It is
conservatively assumed that it is
the sum of A + B,
which results in the range of EUR
997,920–
1,140,480
The approach is
conservative
because the total cost under this
alternative is
likely to be some lower than the
simple sum
because of some overlapping
activity,
⚫
Adjustment
costs:
Combination of
A, B and C.
Following the conservative
approach
discussed under Alternative D, the
simple sum of
costs under A, B, and C leads to a
range of EUR
2,423,520–
2,566,080
⚫
Administrative costs:
6 person-days per
month × 12 months ×
EUR 324 = EUR 23,330 per
year (72 person- days/year: 0.33
FTE/year)
⚫
Administrative
costs: No material
increase once the
methodology is established
(broadly in line with the baseline
level above)
= EUR 23,330 per
year
⚫
Administrative
costs: 2 FTE/year
(440 person-days
per year) × EUR 324 = EUR
142,560 per year
⚫
Administrative
costs: 8 FTE/year
(1,760 person-
days per year) × EUR 324 = EUR
570,240 per year
⚫
Administrative
costs. Following
the same logic as
used for the adjustment costs,
the sum of A and B would imply
around 2.33
FTE/year (2 FTE + 0.33 FTE),
corresponding to
approximately EUR 165,890
per year.
⚫
Administrative
costs: Sum of A,
B and C leads to
around 10.33
FTE/year, corresponding to
approximately EUR 736,000
per year.
Administrative costs for innovative companies
This measure aims to support market operators, such as innovative companies, in disclosing the value of their IPR, streamlining disclosure procedures, and facilitating access to capital through IP-backed finance. It enables IP-rich firms to assess the value of their assets, supports the development of a secondary market for IP disposal in cases of default, and provides guidance on IP-backed finance through a dedicated competence centre. The costs borne by businesses can be estimated by considering the effort they would incur in the absence of the measure.
In line with the methodology applied in this impact assessment, potential costs are estimated in three steps: (i) quantifying the time (in hours) that innovative companies would need to perform the relevant activities in the absence of the measure; (ii) converting this time into monetary terms; and (iii) estimating the number of companies affected. These inputs are then used to calculate administrative costs for each Measure’s
99
Alternative, in accordance with the Standard Cost Model set out in the Better Regulation Toolbox (Tool #58), as reflected in the formula below. The frequency is implicitly intended per year; therefore, the following costs should be interpreted as annual costs.
Cost = (Hours worked * salary rate) *number of companies affected
The total number of the innovative companies per year to be considered for the estimation costs (and
benefits, see below) associated to this measure is 14,515, with the followingbreakdown:
• 1,036 startups, corresponding to 3% of the number of startups in the EU27;
• 10,398 SMEs, corresponding to 3% of the number of innovative SMEs in the EU27
• 3,081 large enterprises, corresponding to 14% of the number of innovative large enterprises in the
EU27.
The box below explains in detail how the number of innovative companies affected by Measure is calculated.
Box A4-1. Calculation of the number of innovative companies affected
The number of businesses affected is estimated using two main inputs:
• The number of innovative companies in EU27. The total number adopted in this study is 373,722,
of which 94% SMEs (n = 350,075) and 6% large enterprises (n = 23,646).122
• The number of startups in the EU27. The total number adopted in this study is 35,000 startups, with a possible range between 27,000 and 41,000 (see below). The average number of 35,000 is used as reference for this measure.
• The number of firms that register IP rights: 10% of EU SMEs; 60% of large firms in EU.123
• The number of startup that that register IP rights is assumed to be 10%, namely the same as
innovative SMEs.
As a result, relevant number of enterprises in the EU with an IPR is 52,084 per year, of which 3,500 startups, 35,130 SMEs, and 13,454 large enterprises.
However, this number represents the total number of companies with national, European or both of them. In order to take in to account the EUIPO capacity (e.g. with the training) and the fact that this Measure operates at the European level, it assumed that only the share of firms with an European registered patent are affected by the Measure.
According to EUIPO (2025), the proportion of SMEs holding a European patent (among those having
patents) is 29.6%, while the corresponding proportion for large enterprises is 22.9%.124 Applying these
proportions to the population of innovative firms with registered patents yields an estimated total number
of 14,515 affected firms, of which
• 1,036 startups (it is assumed that the share of startups with European-level patents is 22.9% as
the share of SMEs;
• 10,398 SMEs;
• 3,081 large enterprises.
122 Eurostat (2024). 2022 Community Innovation Survey (CIS2022) inn_cis13. The CIS does not report enterprises with less than 10 employees; therefore, this number is underestimated. 123 European Union Intellectual Property Office (2022). 2022 Intellectual Property SME Scoreboard; European Union Intellectual Property Office and European Patent Office (2021). Intellectual property rights and firm performance in the European Union: Firm-level analysis report. Executive summary.
124 EUIPO (2025, Table 5). Intellectual property rights and firm performance in the European Union. Firm-level analysis report, January 2025. The report classifies firms into three categories: (i) those holding patents only at the European level, (ii) those holding patents only at the national level, and (iii) those holding both European and national patents. The shares reported in the main text refer exclusively to firms in the first category. However, firms holding both European and national patents could also be included in the calculation of benefits. Due to the lack of access to the underlying raw data, it is not possible to isolate and account for the number of firms in this category
100
This estimate should be interpreted as an upper-bound, since not all of these firms would choose to undertake a valuation or to disclose the value of their not-yet-revenue-generating IP. On top of that, it is likely that primarily startups and SME would benefit from this measure, as large enterprises generally possess internal capacity and resources to assess the value of their intellectual property.
Estimation for the Baseline scenario. Existing studies on internal SMEs’ administrative processes to deals with a ranges of activities (tax reporting, HR administration, licensing, compliance) is about 180 hours per year.125 Applying a conservative estimate, it is assumed that IP-related documentation represents approximately 20–40% of total administrative time for IP-rich companies resulting in a range of about 40– 80 hours per year, with large firms likely to be closer to the upper bound due to larger portfolios and more complex internal coordination.126 This reflects occasional activities such as keeping an inventory of registered rights, drafting short descriptions of inventions or software, and informal interactions between technical and legal teams. This workload is valued at an average hourly rate of EUR 40.5
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). No public data are available on the precise administrative costs that firms would incur when valuing and disclosing IP under an EU framework. To approximate the impact of the different policy alternatives, qualitative evidence from the European IP Helpdesk valuation factsheet is used as a proxy for the level of effort required in a structured valuation process. 127 This evidence indicates that robust IP valuation typically involves a multidisciplinary team, including technical, financial, legal and strategic expertise, and relies on established methods such as discounted cash flow analysis, royalty benchmarking and replacement cost approaches. These methods require financial modelling, access to comparative market data and strategic assessment, making the process complex, resource-intensive and usually dependent on specialist input. 128
• Under Alternative A, firms’ administrative effort is assumed to fall by around 20% compared with
the baseline.
• Under Alternative B, disclosure is linked to buying and selling decisions, which would normally
require dedicated expertise in the absence of the measure. The introduction of an EU-wide
matchmaking marketplace is therefore assumed to reduce administrative effort by around 30%
relative to the baseline.
• Under Alternative C, firms would rely on advisory and training services to value their IPR. For
simplicity, this is assumed to result in a similar level of cost reduction as under Alternative B.
• Alternative D combines A and B and is assumed to reduce firms’ administrative workload by
around 50% compared with the baseline.
• Under Alternative E, the reduction is estimated at approximately 75%.
Based on the upper-bound estimates, administrative costs amount to approximately EUR 3,200 per firm in the baseline scenario and EUR 800 per firm under Alternative E. The table below presents the total estimated costs, calculated by multiplying the per-firm cost by the number of affected firms, taking into account the number of start-ups, SMEs and large enterprises impacted by this measure, as set out above.
Table A4-4. Administrative costs for innovative companies, per year
Baseline
(continuation
of current
scenario)
Alternative
A - Give
EUIPO a
mandate
(in EIA) to
develop an
Alternative
B Give
EUIPO a
mandate (in
EIA) to
develop an
Alternative
C - Give
EUIPO a
mandate to
act as an
EU wide IP
Alternative
D (A + B)
Alternative
E (A + B+
C)
125 KfW (2025). The study mentions 15 hours per months corresponding to 180 hours per year. 126 Although the perceived cost of registering IP is perceived particularly high for SMEs (see European Union Intellectual Property Office. 2022 Intellectual Property SME Scoreboard), the baseline for this measure focuses on the ongoing internal documentation of already registered, not-yet-revenue-generating IP, for which large firms are assumed to incur higher absolute time costs than SMEs due to larger portfolios and more complex internal coordination. 127 European IP Helpdesk (2023). Intellectual Property Valuation: Fact Sheet. April 2023. 128 European Union Intellectual Property Office (2022). Intellectual Property SME Scoreboard.
101
EU wide
IP
valuation
framework
EU wide
marketplace
that
functions as
secondary
marketplace
for
inventors
and
investors to
buy and sell
IP.
competence
centre that
provides
advice,
training and
financial
support to
innovators
for IP
valuation
Effort per year
(hours)
40 – 80h 30 – 60h
(-20%)
28-56h
(-30%)
28-56h
(-30%)
20-40h
(50%)
10-20h
(-75%)
Administrative
costs for
Startups
EUR 1.6 –
3.3 million
(= (40– 80h)
× 40.5 x
1,036)
EUR 1.2 –
2.5 million
(= (30h–
60h) ×
40.5 x
1,036)
EUR 1.2 –
2.3 million
(= (28h–
56h) × 40.5
x 1,036)
EUR 1.2 –
2.3 million
(= (28h–
56h) × 40.5
x 1,036)
EUR 0.8–
1.6 million
(= (20h–
40h) ×
40.5 x
1,036)
EUR 0.4 –
0.8 million
(= (10h–
20h) ×
40.5 x
1,036)
Administrative
costs for SMEs
EUR 17 – 34
million (=
(40– 80h) ×
40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 12.7
– 25.3
million (=
(30– 60h)
× 40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 12 –
23.5
million (=
(28– 56h) ×
40.5 x
10,500)
EUR 12 –
23.5
million (=
(28– 56h) ×
40.5 x
10,398)
EUR 8.4 –
17 million
(= (20–
40h) ×
40.5 x
10,398
EUR 4.2 –
8.5 million
(= (10 –
20h) ×
40.5 x
10,398)
Administrative
costs for large
enterprises
EUR 5.0 –10
million (=
(40– 80h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 3.7 –
7.5 million
(= (30–
60h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 3.4– 7
million (=
(28– 56h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 3.4– 7
million (=
(28– 56h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 2.5 –
5million
(= (20–
40h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
EUR 1.2 –
2.5 million
(= (10 –
20h) ×
40.5 x
3,081)
TOTAL (all
companies)
⚫
EUR 23.5–
47million
⚫
EUR 18 –
35 million
⚫
EUR 16.5–
33 million
⚫
EUR 16.5–
33 million
⚫
EUR 12 –
23.5
million
⚫
EUR 6 –
12 million
Summary of costs
TableA4- 5. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure1
Costs - EUR EU public sector Business
Baseline
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 23,330 EUR 23,514,956 -
47,029,913
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 23,330 EUR 17,636,217 -
35,272,434
102
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 427,680 – EUR
570,240
0
Alternative B
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 142,560 EUR 16,460,469 -
32,920,939
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 570,240 0
Alternative C
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 570,240 EUR 16,460,469 -
32,920,939
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 1,425,600 0
Alternative D
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 165,890 EUR 11,757,478 -
23,514,956
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 997,920–1,140,480 0
Alternative E
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 736,000 EUR 5,878,739 -
11,757,478
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 2,423,520–2,566,080 0
Table A4-6. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 1
Costs - EUR EU public sector Business
Alternative A
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 0 from EUR - -5,878,739 to -
11,757,478
Adjustment costs (one-
off)
EUR 427,680 – EUR
570,240
EUR 0
Alternative B
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 119,230 from EUR - 7,054,487 to -
14,108,974
Adjustment costs (one-
off)
EUR 570,240 EUR 0
Alternative C
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 546,910 from EUR - 7,054,487 to -
14,108,974
Adjustment costs (one-
off)
EUR 1,425,600 EUR 0
Alternative D
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 142,560 from EUR -11,757,478 to -
23,514,956
Adjustment costs (one-
off)
EUR 997,920–1,140,480 EUR 0
Alternative E
Administrative costs
(annual)
EUR 712,670 from EUR -17,636,217 to -
35,272,434
103
Adjustment costs (one-
off)
EUR 2,423,520–
2,566,080
EUR 0
Benefits
The following table summarises the benefits for different stakeholders resulting from the measure alternatives under analysis.
Table A4-7. Main benefits by stakeholder – Measure 1
Stakeholder
affected
Benefit Type of
Benefit
Source of evidence Type of
assessment
Business Efficiency gains
(administrative costs
reduction)
Economic • Cost analysis129
• Public consultation
(see factual
summary report)
• Interviews
Quantitative
Business IP-backed raised
finance
Economic • Documentary
review
• Interviews
Quantitative
Efficiency gains (costs reduction for Innovative companies)130
The efficiency gains generated by this complex measure, where the three components mutually complement each other, can proxied by considering the costs that companies can avoid because of its implementation, not to mention the capital that they can raise because of its implementation.
Following the reasoning set out in the chapter on administrative costs, the table below presents the reduction in workload under the different alternatives, calculated by subtracting the respective costs from the baseline scenario. The total costs avoided by firms if the measure were implemented are estimated at EUR 14–28 million under Alternative A, EUR 17–56 million under Alternative B, and up to EUR 42–85 million under Alternative E. For an individual firm, this would translate into savings of up to more than EUR 2,000 under Alternative E compared with the baseline.
It is important to emphasise that the most important benefit for companies is their increased potential to raise capital for their businesses, which is not considered here because it is a secondary expected effect difficult to estimated. IP valuation helps companies show the value of their IP assets to financial institutions and investors, increasing their chance to get funding. A secondary market creates a reassurance for financial institutions that the IP asset can be offered for sale or license on an EU-wide platform and the competence
129 The documentary review also supports a cost reduction for enterprises generated by the regulatory sandboxes. It shows that regulatory sandboxes function as structured environments that lower regulatory uncertainty, facilitate experimentation, and accelerate market deployment of innovative technologies by reducing the time and cost. See, among others: Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) (2017) Regulatory sandbox lessons learned report. https://www.fca.org.uk/publications/research/regulatory-sandbox-lessons-learned-report Reuters (2025): initiative by the UK FCA (with NVIDIA as partner) UK FCA partners with NVIDIA on an AI “supercharged” regulatory sandbox. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2199853122004383 Goo, J. J., & Heo, J. Y. (2020). The impact of the regulatory sandbox on the fintech industry, with a discussion on the relation between regulatory sandboxes and open innovation https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2199853122004383 130 The source of this chapter is the section of the administrative costs.
104
centre improves the approach of the financial community to IP-backed lending, which would result in more investments or loans for IP-rich but tangible poor companies.
Table A4-8. Efficiency gains (administrative cost reduction) for innovative companies, per
year
Baseline
(continuation
of current
scenario)
Alternative
A - Give
EUIPO a
mandate
(in EIA) to
develop an
EU wide
IP
valuation
framework
Alternative
B Give
EUIPO a
mandate (in
EIA) to
develop an
EU wide
marketplace
that
functions as
secondary
marketplace
for
inventors
and
investors to
buy and sell
IP.
Alternative
C - Give
EUIPO a
mandate to
act as an
EU wide IP
competence
centre that
provides
advice,
training and
financial
support to
innovators
for IP
valuation
Alternative
D (A + B)
Alternative
E (A + B+
C)
Efficiency
gains for
startups
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR 0
(Efficiency
gains: 0%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
419,580 –
839,160
(Efficiency
gains:
20%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
503,496 –
1,006,992
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
503,496 –
1,006,992
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
839,160 –
1,678,320
(Efficiency
gains:
50%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
1,258,740
–
2,517,480
(Efficiency
gains:
75%)
Efficiency
gains for
SMEs
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR 0
(Efficiency
gains: 0%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
4,211,369
-
8,422,737
(Efficiency
gains:
20%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
5,053,642 –
10,107,285
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
5,053,642 –
10,107,285
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
8,422,737
–
16,845,474
(Efficiency
gains:
50%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
12,634,106
–
25,268,211
(Efficiency
gains:
75%)
Efficiency
gains for
large
enterprises
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR 0
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR 1
1,247,790
-
2,495,581
(Efficiency
gains:
20%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
1,497,349 –
2,994,697
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
1,497,349 –
2,994,697
(Efficiency
gains: 30%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
2,495,581
–
4,991,162
(Efficiency
gains:
50%)
Aggregate
cost
reduction:
EUR
3,743,371
–
7,486,743
(Efficiency
gains:
75%)
Total (all
companies)
⚫
EUR 0
⚫
EUR 5,878,739
⚫
EUR 7,054,487 -
14,108,974
⚫
EUR 7,054,487 -
14,108,974
⚫
EUR 11,757,478
⚫
EUR 17,636,217
105
-
11,757,478
-
23,514,956
-
35,272,434
IP backed-finance
This measure establishes a standardised EU-wide IP valuation framework, a secondary IP marketplace, and an IP competence centre providing advisory and training services. The literature from Europe, the United States and China provide strong evidence that facilitating IP valuation can significantly enhance firms’ innovation performance, including improved access to IP-backed finance, namely both debt finance from the traditional banking channel and from venture capital market.
To estimate the expected increase of the IP-backed finance whether additional debt or VC, the following inputs are necessary:
• The current number of innovative companies affected by the Measure. As discussed in the cost section, the number of firms is 14,800, of which, 1,000 startups, 10,500 SMEs and 3,300 large enterprises.
• The incremental likelihood of accessing debt or VC finance through patent pledging. The literature showsanincremental likelihood of 18.5% of obtaining IP-backed loans through patent pledging, 131 while EUIPO (2023),132 EU-level filings are associated with a 5–6 times higher likelihood of early-stage funding compared to 2.8 times for those that only filed for a national patent. This suggests that EU-level filings increase the probability of VC funding by approximately twice as much (i.e. around 100%) as national filings by SMEs, including startups. For this impact assessment it is reasonable to assume that this probability is likely to lie between the lower bound of 18.5% and the upper bound of 50%, considering that the 100% indicated by EUIPO mainly refers to SMEs and startups, while the impact may be diluted for large enterprises.
• The average amount of capital raised. Evidence from Europe indicates that firms using patents as collateral can typically borrow between EUR 1.0 and 1.4 million per firm, compared with peers that do not.133 In the absence of comparable evidence for venture capital, the same range is assumed for funds raised in the VC market.+
On that basis, the increase in the amount of IP-backed finance per year that can be attributed to the measure under assessment is calculated according to the following formula:
− ( ) = 14,515 ∗ ( 1.4 ∗ 50%) = 10,160,783,567
− ( ) = 14,515 ∗ ( 1.0 ∗ 18.5%) = 2,685,349,943
The total benefit results into an amount of EU 2.7 – 10.2 billion per year, distributed as follows
• EUR 0.2 – 0.7 billion raised by startups;
• EUR 1.9 – 7.3 billion raised by SMEs
131See Dai, Y., Gao, H., Li, N., & Si, Y. (2025). Patent Collateralization and Entrepreneurship. Available at SSRN 5349951. 132 EUIPO (2023, p. 12). Patents, Trademarks and Startup Finance. Report, 17.10.2023. Last access in March 2026. 133 This corresponds to approximately 20 - 26% additional debt. This is from Bracht, F., & Czarnitzki, D. (2022). Patent collateral and access to debt. ZEW-Centre for European Economic Research Discussion Paper, (22-033).
106
• EUR 0.6– 2.2 billion raised by large enterprises
It should be noted that this benefit can be attributed to all measure alternatives. As the alternatives build on one another, any attempt to apportion the benefits between them would be speculative and is therefore not undertaken.
Box A4- 2. Literature on the impact of IP valuation frameworks on IP-banked finance.
Credible IP valuation systems and strong institutional support are associated with higher levels of innovation output. The economic and innovation literature, particularly drawing on real options theory and signalling theory, suggests that standardised and reliable IP valuation frameworks can alter firms’ strategic behaviour (see below). When firms are able to assess and communicate the economic value of their IP assets more clearly, patenting decisions tend to shift from purely defensive filings towards the strategic accumulation of IP assets that can support IP-backed financing. This process can generate a virtuous cycle between financing and patenting, whereby stronger IP portfolios facilitate access to external finance, which in turn supports further innovation activity. This dynamic concerns not only the quantity of patent filings, but also their quality. When firms can estimate the expected return on investment of a patent more accurately, they may choose to concentrate on innovations with greater technological or commercial potential.
First, via the real options effect (investment reversibility). A major barrier to patenting is the sunk costs
of filing, legal, and maintenance. A clear evaluation system and a secondary marketplace make these
investments reversible.Specifically, if there is a secondary IP marketplace, a patent isn't just a legal
document or a signal of innovative capacity; it's a tradable asset. The result is that firms are encouraged
to file patents not just to block competitors, but to increase the book value of the company for mergers,
acquisitions, or licensing deals.
• Evidence from Europe. EPO- EIUPO (2019) has shown that SMEs that file for European-level IPRs are significantly more likely to achieve "High-Growth Firm" (HGF) status act as a catalyst for increased registration activity among growth-oriented firms. 134
• Evidence from the USA.A 2025 study from the USA (which claims to be the first one to demonstrate that secondary IPR market exposure creates a real option for innovative firms), shows that secondary markets for patents allows firms to "store value" in patents. For firms in high-tech sectors, this market exposure can reverse the negative impact of economic uncertainty, leading to increased patent filings even when the economy is volatile.135 On top of that, a secondary market allows firms to patent inventions they might otherwise have kept as trade secrets, as it provides a path to monetise R&D.136
• Evidence from China. The implementation of IP valuation methods signals managers to increase risk preference for long-term innovation, resulting in a higher volume of innovation output and registrations.137
Secondly, via the investment readiness channel. IPR assets are notoriously difficult to use as collateral. If a bank or a venture capital (VC) fund can't put a reliable price tag on a patent, they won't lend against it. While the mechanism is the same and aim to reduce information asymmetry, the way it applies to VC and bank loan is different. For a bank loan, a patent is a protection against default, and it is used as collateral. For a VC, a patent signals potential future gains. In both cases, standardised and credible IP valuation systems allow firms, especially SMEs to secure IP-backed financing.138 Moreover, when a firm knows
134 EPO-EUIPO (2019). "High-growth firms and intellectual property rights: IPR profile of high-potential SMEs in Europe." https://www.euipo.europa.eu/en/publications/high-growth-firms-and-intellectual-property-rights-ipr-profile-of-high- potential-smes-in-europe 135 Park, W., Torres, G., Toole, A. A., & Hughes, R. (2025). "Real Options in Patenting: Uncertainty and Secondary Patent Markets." USPTO Economic Working Paper No. 2025-2. https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=5143769 This paper is the first to demonstrate that secondary patent market exposure creates a real option for innovative firms, by allowing for the reversibility of intangible property investments through resale 136 Akcigit, U., Celik, M. A., & Greenwood, J. (2016). Buy, keep, or sell: Economic growth and the market for ideas. Econometrica, 84(3), 943-984. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/abs/10.3982/ECTA12144 137 Li, W., & Li, B. (2023). Intellectual Property Pledge Financing and Enterprise Innovation: Based on the Perspective of Signal Incentive. Sustainability, 15(13), 10448. https://www.mdpi.com/2071-1050/15/13/10448 138 Hottenrott, H., Hall, B. H., & Czarnitzki, D. (2016). Patents as quality signals? The implications for financing constraints on R&D. Economics of innovation and new technology, 25(3), 197-217. https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/10438599.2015.1076200
107
that a patent will directly lead to a loan or a higher VC valuation, the (marginal) benefit of filing an additional patent increase, leading to a higher volume of filings and innovation-related activities.
• Evidence from Europe. EUIPO (2023) reports that startups filing patents and trademarks at the seed or early growth stage are significantly more likely to secure venture capital, with EU-level filings associated with a 5–6 times higher likelihood of early-stage funding compared with national filings. Startups that file both patents and trademarks show the highest probability of obtaining financing, highlighting the role of IP as a signal of quality to investors.139 A 2026 update of the EUIPO study finds that IP-intensive industries attract the lion share of private equity and VC.140 Complementing this, Bracht and Czarnitzki (2022)141 use mandatory collateral registry data from Sweden and the Netherlands to demonstrate that pledging patents as collateral substantially enhances access to debt finance. Firms are able to borrow approximately 21% more in Sweden and 26% more in the Netherlands, corresponding to an average increase of EUR 1.2–1.4 million per firm. The study distinguishes between the collateral and signalling functions of patents, finding that in the Netherlands, the collateral effect dominates, whereas in Sweden, signalling appears more influential. Extrapolations suggest that if all firms fully utilised their patent portfolios as collateral, they could unlock over EUR 13 billion in Sweden and EUR 5 billion in the Netherlands, indicating substantial untapped potential. To further support this, even if quite different from the Measure 3 in the EIA, Gill and Heller (2024) show that the 2004 EU Enforcement Directive, which strengthened patent protection across member states, enhanced firms’ debt capacity. Patent-owning firms increased their leverage by 2.5 percentage points (around 20% relative to the sample mean), reduced borrowing costs by 30 basis points, and predominantly used long-term debt.
• Evidence from the USA. Farre-Mensa et al., (2020) provides causal evidence on the economic value of patents for young and small startups. They show that receiving the first patent significantly improves startup outcomes. The probability of obtaining VC increases by 47% within three years, employment growth increases by 36%, and sales grow by about 80%. The effect is particularly strong for first-time entrepreneurs and firms outside major technology hubs such as Silicon Valley.142 Similarly, Mann (2018)143 shows that patents play an important role as collateral in facilitating debt financing for innovation. Treated firms experienced a 4% increase in leverage relative to a pre-event debt-to-asset ratio or roughly USD 25 million in additional borrowing for the average firm. This increased credit translates directly into innovation spending: R&D expenditure rises by 6.3 relative to the average R&D-to-asset ratio. Importantly, the effect is specific to innovation investment, as the study finds no significant increase in capital expenditures, indicating that debt enabled by patent collateral primarily finances research activity rather than general physical investment.
• Evidence from China. Dai et al. (2025)144 examine the effects of the staggered introduction of policies facilitating the use of patents as collateral for bank loans on firms’ innovation strategies. The authors show that enhancing the pledgeability of patents has two consequent effects: firstly, it raises the likelihood of obtaining IP-backed loans by around 18.5%, and secondly it further increases the firms’ propensity to patent, with a 16.6% rise in patent applications and a 15.4% increase in forward citations, indicating improvements in both the quantity and technological significance of patents and suggesting a strategic shift from trade secrecy to patenting in order to generate pledgeable intellectual property assets. Weixiu Li and Bo Li (2023)145 find that such policies increase by approximate 0.17% the patent output for treated firms relative to the control group. Additional analyses using invention patents as the dependent variable confirm that the policy also supports higher-quality innovation.
139 EUIPO (2023, p. 12). Patents, Trademarks and Startup Finance. Report, 17.10.2023.Last access in March 2026. 140 Approximately 88% of all funding in 2021-23. See EUIPO (2026). IP and Innovation in European Sectors. Industry-level analysis report. January 2026. Last access in March 2026. 141 Bracht, F., & Czarnitzki, D. (2022). Patent collateral and access to debt. ZEW-Centre for European Economic Research Discussion Paper, (22-033). 142 Farre‐Mensa, J., Hegde, D., & Ljungqvist, A. (2020). What is a patent worth? Evidence from the US patent “lottery”. The Journal of Finance, 75(2), 639-682. 143 Mann, W. (2018). Creditor rights and innovation: Evidence from patent collateral. Journal of Financial Economics, 130(1), 25-47. 144 Dai, Y., Gao, H., Li, N., & Si, Y. (2025). Patent Collateralization and Entrepreneurship. Available at SSRN 5349951. 145 Li, W., & Li, B. (2023). Intellectual Property Pledge Financing and Enterprise Innovation: Based on the Perspective of Signal Incentive. Sustainability, 15(13), 10448.
108
Measure 2: Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public buyers, including
cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly
techniques within R&D procurement
Measure 2 aims to support the uptake of R&D procurement for public buyer.146 In 2022,
the total amount of the total amount of R&D procurement by public buyers in the
classical, utilities and defence sectors in the EU27 amounted to EUR 17.28 billion,
corresponding to 0,61% of the total amount of public procurement, and 6,1% of the
innovation procurement across the above three sectors.147
To increase R&D procurement, outside the PP directives and upcoming PPA,148 Measure
2 aims to reduce barriers, including legal uncertainty, by promoting proven techniques and
removing joint cross-border pre-commercial procurement obstacles149,. Proven techniques
(see box below) to boost innovation-minded and start-up friendly innovation procurement
include150:
• prioritising the award of procurement contracts based on value for money instead
of lowest price.
• prioritising the use of functional specifications over the use of solution-prescriptive
tender specifications.
• When possible, prioritising the use of innovation-friendly IPR conditions.
• Applying, if possible, value engineering (see box below)
The box below provides a real case example of how this measure is expected to work,
while in the next sections the analysis of costs and benefits is provided.
Box A4- 3 Examples of how procurement techniques are used in R&D procurement
Imagine a municipality seeking to develop and test new solutions to better protect the city against
flooding, including prevention, detection, early warning and mitigation measures.
146 the terms PCP and R&D procurement are used interchangeably. 147 Directorate-General for Research and Innovation & PwC. (2026). EU innovation procurement observatory: final study report. Publications Office of the European Union. https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/1638226. 148 The European Public Procurement (PP) Directives, which are currently under revision, are a set of laws adopted by the European Union to regulate how public authorities (governments, municipalities, public bodies) purchase goods, services, and works. Their main aim is to ensure fair competition, transparency, and value for money across member states. The main directives are: Directive 2014/24/EU – Covers general public procurement (most public sector contracts) Directive 2014/25/EU – Applies to utilities (water, energy, transport, postal services) Directive 2014/23/EU – Regulates concession contracts (e.g. toll roads, infrastructure operations) 149 Corvers and DG RTD (Nov 2025), Overcoming Legal Barriers for the Uptake of Innovation Procurement In The EU. Final report of the EC Expert Group on innovation procurement. November 2025 Bringing down legal barriers for innovation procurement – DG Research and innovation 150 As explained in the 2021 EU guidance notice on innovation procurement, procurers can buy not only the research and development but also the supply of a limited volume of developed solutions as part of a PCP procurement (as long as the value of supplies purchased is less than half of the total PCP contract value and does not include large scale commercial production). They can also decide to buy resulting solutions through a separate procurement that is started after the PCP procurement. The techniques that are used in PCP to foster innovation are therefore also very useful in such procurements outside the public procurement directives.
109
The process would begin with a preliminary market consultation to inform and engage with
industry, exploring the state of ongoing developments. This could take the form of online
questionnaires, webinars or in-person meetings. Through this consultation, the municipality
identifies a range of suppliers, including SMEs, start-ups and larger firms, offering different
technological approaches (e.g. GPS, cameras, drones, sensors). However, these solutions are still
under development and lack sufficient testing in real urban contexts. The municipality therefore
decides to launch a R&D procurement to steer innovation towards its needs and to test which
solutions are most effective and cost-efficient.
To ensure broad participation, the municipality sets proportionate selection criteria that do not
disadvantage start-ups (e.g. no requirements on past turnover or prior customer references).
Suppliers are assessed based on their technical capacity and expertise. Tender specifications are
drafted in functional terms, describing the problem and required performance (e.g. 24/7 operation,
faster detection, lower cost), without prescribing specific technologies. This approach encourages
diverse and innovative solutions.
Given the need to cooperate with other cities along the same river, the municipality recognises the
potential for a wider EU market. It therefore allows suppliers to retain intellectual property rights
(IPR), while securing licence-free usage rights and the possibility to license the solution to third
parties. This reduces the risk of supplier lock-in and incentivises participation, often leading to
lower bid prices.
As a result, the procurement attracts a higher number of bids and a broader range of innovative
suppliers. The municipality evaluates offers using criteria that balance cost and quality,
rewarding solutions that deliver the best value for money.
During implementation, the contracts include a value engineering clause, allowing suppliers to
propose improvements as new technologies emerge. For example, a supplier may replace an
initially proposed solution with a more efficient and cost-effective innovation. If accepted, cost
savings are shared between the supplier and the municipality, creating incentives for continuous
improvement. The contractor submits a proposal to the city to reengineer his solution to deliver this
higher value solution to the procurer. The city accepts the proposal of the contractor and amends
his contract with the incentive that the contractor will get half of the cost savings that he generates
for the city once he delivers the solution. This solution improvement is only possible because the
procurer incorporated from the beginning a value engineering clause in the R&D procurement
contracts, that incentivises suppliers to keep on proposing improvements to the city using new
innovations that only become available during contract execution.
Throughout the process, the municipality monitors progress against clearly defined key
performance indicators (KPIs) agreed at contract signature.
As the tasks and the contract size for each phase of the R&D procurement gradually grows,
the small companies that started the R&D procurement can attract investors and grow their
business during the R&D procurement. At the end of the R&D procurement, the city ends with one
incumbent supplier that has seriously improved his solution, and two young startups that have more
than doubled the size of their company during the R&D procurement and that are now able to
compete against incumbents in large subsequent deployment contractors. As all suppliers used their
IPR to commercialise their solutions they can reach economies of scale of production and bring the
prices of the solutions down compared to existing solutions and all cities across the EU that need a
110
similar solution can benefit from this. For the city that launched the R&D procurement, the cost
savings on its own large-scale deployment more than compensate the extra cost that the city initially
paid for buying the R&D from multiple suppliers instead of one.
Source: Authors elaboration
Within this context, the proposed measure is articulated as follows:
Table A4-9. Measure and alternatives
Measure Alternatives
Measure 2: Establish procedures for R&D
procurement for public buyers, including cross-
border R&D procurement and rules to promote the
use of innovation-friendly techniques within R&D
procurement
• Alternative A: Recommended techniques for R&D
procurement for public buyers
• Alternative B: Obligatory techniques for R&D
procurement for public buyers
Costs
Costs are classified by type and by stakeholder.
Table A4-10. Type of costs by stakeholder – Measure 2
Cost Stakehoder Type of assessment
Adjustment costs Public buyers Quantitative and
qualitative
Administrative costs Public buyers Qualitative
Administrative costs Economic operators (suppliers) participating in
R&D procurement
Qualitative
Indirect costs (wider economic
costs)
Economic operators (suppliers) participating in
R&D procurement
Qualitative
Adjustment costs for public buyers
Assessment approach. Adjustment costs for public buyers arise from one-off adaptations
to the changes introduced by the alternatives, such as developing new tender document
templates and familiarising staff with procedures for R&D procurement and the associated
techniques. These costs are assessed both quantitatively and qualitatively. Alternative A
allows flexibility in the adoption of R&D procurement techniques by public buyers,
whereas Alternative B requires their mandatory adoption.
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline). Under the baseline, these costs
do not arise.
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). The targeted survey asked
public authorities to assess the adjustment costs for public buyers associated with adopting
techniques typically used in R&D procurement. Value engineering was identified by the
largest number of respondents as generating high adjustment costs. However, for all
techniques, the number of respondents that reported moderate adjustment costs is higher
111
than those that reported high costs. . Innovation agencies, universities and RTOs were
asked the same question, and their responses show less variation between the different
techniques.
Figure A7-1 Answers to question “In your view, how large would be the adjustment costs generated by the
following techniques for public buyers (to adopt these new techniques)?” in targeted consultation to public
authorities, conducted in October-November 2025. N. of replies: 21.
Figure A7-2. Answers to question “In your view, how large would be the adjustment costs generated by the
following techniques for public buyers (to adopt these new techniques)?” in targeted consultation to
Innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs, conducted in October-November 2025. N. of replies: 14.
Evidence from the targeted survey indicates that adjustment costs vary by technique and
stakeholder group. As reported in interviews, these costs are are primarily driven by staff
training and familiarisation, as well as the development of new tender documentation
templates.
• Training and familiarisation costs are estimated using the same approach as
in Measure 2. Based on desk research, a 1.5-day course on European public
2
2
3
6
3
9
14
8
8
6
6
2
4
3
9
4
3
6
4
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Prioritising the award of innovation procurement contracts based on value for money instead of lowest price only
wherever possible
Prioritising the use of functional specifications over the use of solution prescriptive tender specifications wherever
possible
Use of innovation friendly IPR conditions wherever possible
Introduce value engineering where possible to enable outdated solutions to be replaced with more performant less costly innovative ones that appear on the market…
Use more start-up friendly qualification requirements
High cost Moderate cost Low cost Cannot say
1
2
1
1
1
7
7
5
5
4
3
2
4
2
6
3
3
4
6
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Prioritising the award of innovation procurement contracts based on value for money instead of lowest price only
wherever possible
Prioritising the use of functional specifications over the use of solution prescriptive tender specifications wherever
possible
Use of innovation friendly IPR conditions wherever possible
Introduce value engineering where possible to enable outdated solutions to be replaced with more performant less costly innovative ones that appear on the market…
Use more start-up friendly qualification requirements
High cost Moderate cost Low cost Cannot say
112
procurement costs EUR 1,160, which is used as the cost of training a procurement
staff member. In addition, staff time is estimated at 6.5 days (1.5 days for the
course, including fast-track procedures and related techniques and a further 5 days
for additional familiarisation). This time is valued using the hourly rate from the
OIOO calculator. Under Alternative B, where adoption is mandatory, it is
assumed that 2,000 public buyers in the EU27 will incur these costs. By
contrast, under Alternative A, where adoption is voluntary, it assumed that
1,500 public buyers are expected to incur training and familiarisation costs.151
The calculation of these costs is based on the assumption that, in the baseline
scenario, there are no associated costs with Measure 2 by definition. Therefore, it
is assumed that all public buyers including those already using R&D procurement
approaches or engaging in cross-border procurement would need to align with the
new requirements (under the mandatory Alternative B).
• A quantitative assessment of the costs associated with redesigning procurement
documentation would require data on the average cost of developing tools or
templates for each new technique (e.g. redesigning evaluation and award systems).
However, such data, per public buyer are not available, which limits the possibility
of providing a quantitative estimate. Qualitatively, it can be assumed that
Alternative A entails lower adjustment costs, as the scale of adoption is smaller
than under Alternative B.
Table A4-11. Adjustment costs for public buyers – Measure 2 Baseline
(continuation of
current scenario)
A - Recommended techniques for
R&D procurement procurements for
public buyers
B – Obligatory techniques
for R&D procurement
procurements for public
buyers
Training /
familiarisation costs
⚫ No costs. ⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff member
working on procurement
Total cost: EUR 3,266 X 1,500
public buyers X 4 staff members
working on procurement
= EUR 19,596,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days X
324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff
member working on
procurement
Total cost: EUR 3,266 X
2,000 public buyers X 4 staff
members working on
procurement
= EUR 26,128,000
Redesign of
procurement
processes and
documentation
⚫ No costs. ⚫ Moderate adjustment costs. ⚫ High adjustment. costs.
Administrative costs for public buyers
151 To estimate the total cost, the cost per procurement staff member is multiplied by the number of public buyers engaged in PCP. According to a 2025 European Commission presentation (available here), more than 1,000 public buyers across Europe have already successfully implemented PCPs. To avoid underestimating costs, this figure is doubled to 2,000 public buyers for the purpose of the calculation under Alternative B. Under Alternative A the number is reduced to 1,500, between the current situation of 1,000 and 2,000 in Alternative B. It is further assumed that each public buyer employs, on average, four staff members working on procurement. Overall, these estimates are subject to uncertainty and should be interpreted as providing an indicative order of magnitude of the expected impacts.
113
Assessment approach. Recurrent administrative costs for public buyers consist in the
costs deriving from performing procurement procedures. These costs are assessed
quantitatively with the same approach used for the other Measure, namely by first
calculating the administrative effort to produce an individual R&D procurement procedure,
and the multiplying it by the number of public buyers affected under the baseline and the
two Measure’s Alternatives. The formula below further specifies the calculation, which
also in line with the Better Regulation Toolbox’ Standard Cost Model - Tool #58). The
value of each input entering the formula is discussed below.
The frequency is implicitly intended per year; therefore, the following costs should be
interpreted as annual costs.
Total administrative cost = (Person-day worked * salary rate *N of persons involved)*
number of R&D procurement procedures* number of public buyers affected
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline). The targeted survey invited
public authorities, business associations, innovation agencies, universities and RTOs to
indicate their level of agreement with a statement assessing whether the introduction of
R&D-friendly, fast-track procedures in R&D procurement (outside the Public Procurement
Directives / PPA) would reduce legal uncertainty and fragmentation for public buyers (see
the benefit section below for details). Apart from business associations, all the other
stakeholders expressed a strong level of agreement with the statement suggesting that
currently the R&D procurement by public buyers is characterised by non-optimal
procedures, including barriers to cross-border R&D procurement.152
To calculate the baseline cost of performing procurement procedures, the following data
would be necessary:
• an estimate of the number of R&D procurement procedures carried out by
public buyers in the EU. A precise estimate is not available, as R&D procurement
is not systematically recorded in official procurement statistics. To approximate an
order of magnitude, evidence from EU-supported programmes (notably FP7,
Horizon 2020 and Horizon Europe) suggests around 10–30 PCP projects per
year.153, 154 This range is used for the baseline, as it strikes a balance between
potential overestimation (for example, where some projects under the Public
Procurement Directives may be included) and underestimation, given that
nationally funded PCPs are not fully captured. Although highly approximate, this
range represents a reasonable working assumption, reflecting the fact that R&D
152 See also Corvers and DG RTD (Nov 2025), Overcoming Legal Barriers for the Uptake of Innovation Procurement In The EU. Final report of the EC Expert Group on innovation procurement. November 2025 Bringing down legal barriers for innovation procurement – DG Research and innovation 153 European Commission (2019). Impacts of EU funded Pre-Commercial Procurements. Last access in April, 2026. See also Cordis database for H2020 and FP7. 154 https://wayback.archive-it.org/12090/20220916072752/https:/digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/policies/pcp-and-pi- projects Last access in April, 2026
114
procurement remains a niche instrument, with a low double-digit number of
procedures annually across the EU27.
• An estimate of the average cost of using each type of procurement procedure.
Such an estimate is not available and is even more difficult to derive for each
individual technique. To address this gap, evidence from research infrastructures,
namely public buyers that commonly use the techniques envisaged under this
Measure, can be considered (see the benefits section below). During an online focus
group held in November 2026 with representatives from research infrastructures,
participants highlighted significant heterogeneity in the time required to prepare
procurement tenders and collaboration agreements, making it impossible to define
an average duration or cost. Reported preparation times ranged from as little as two
days to as long as six months, even within the same organisation. In light of this
evidence, and considering that preliminary market consultations are often required,
a working range of one to four months is used, with one month as the lower bound
and six months as the upper bound. Considering that each month has 20 workdays,
the applied range is 20 - 120 person-days per procurement document.
Moreover, coherently with the adjustment costs the hypothesis here is that 4 staff
members work on each procurement procedure.
• The salary rate for public buyers’ staff is taken consistently across this impact
assessment from the OIOO online calculator used for reporting administrative
costs, in line with the Better Regulation Toolbox. The EU average hourly earnings
for the occupational category “Professionals” (ISCO Category 2) amount to EUR
40.5 per hour, including overheads. Assuming an eight-hour working day, this
corresponds to EUR 324 per day.
• The number of public buyers considered in the baseline is 1,000 as already
discussed in the case of adjustment costs.155
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). The calculation of
administrative costs under the alternatives is influenced by two opposing effects. First,
administrative costs per procedure are expected to decrease compared to the baseline, due
to more efficient management of R&D procurement and reduced fragmentation across the
EU, as well as the initial familiarisation with the introduced R&D procurement techniques.
Over time, this is expected to lower administrative burdens. In this context, it is assumed
that 1.5 staff members are required per procurement procedure, compared to four
under the baseline, corresponding to about 60% reduction in costs under both
Alternatives A and B. This assumption is also consistent with the share of respondents to
the targeted survey who indicated that the Measure would reduce legal uncertainty and
fragmentation for public buyers (see the benefit section).
Second, total administrative costs are expected to increase under Alternatives A and B
because a larger number of public buyers would adopt the Measure compared to the
baseline. As discussed under adjustment costs, under Alternative B, where adoption is
mandatory, it is assumed that 2,000 public buyers across the EU27 would incur these
155 According to a 2025 European Commission presentation (available here), more than 1,000 public buyers across Europe have already successfully implemented PCPs
115
costs. By contrast, under Alternative A, where adoption is voluntary, an estimated
1,500 public buyers are expected to incur them.
In other words, while the administrative cost per individual R&D procurement procedure
decreases compared to the baseline, the higher number of public buyers adopting the
Measure increases total costs. The final cost estimate reflects the combined effect of these
two opposing dynamics.
Table A4-12 Administrative costs for public buyers – Measure 2 Baseline (continuation of current
scenario)
A - Recommended techniques for
R&D procurement procurements
for public buyers
B – Obligatory techniques for R&D
procurement procurements for public
buyers
⚫
In the baseline scenario, public
buyers incur costs related to legal
uncertainty, fragmentation of R&D
procurement procedures across the
EU, and the inefficiencies arising
from the use of traditional
procurement techniques within PCP
(outside the Public Procurement
Directives).
Cost per individual R&D
procurement document: EUR
25,920 – 155,520 (=20 – 120
person-days X 4 staff member
procurement X EUR 324 per day)
Total cost: EUR 259,200,000-
4,665,600,000 (= cost per one R&D
pr. document (as above) X (10 – 30)
R&D pr. documents per year X
1000 public buyers
⚫
Compared to the baseline,
administrative costs are expected
to reduce. Indeed, after the initial
familiarisation phase,
administrative costs are expected
to decrease because of more
efficient management of R&D
procurement and reduced legal
and cross-border barriers
Cost per individual R&D
procurement document: EUR
9,720 – 58,320 (=20 – 120
person-days X 1.5 staff member
procurement X EUR 324 per day)
Total cost: EUR 145,800,000
2,624,400,000 (= cost per one
R&D pr. document (as above) X
(10 – 30) R&D pr. documents per
year X 1500 public buyers
⚫
High administrative costs borne by all
public buyers compared to Alternative
A
Cost per individual R&D
procurement document: EUR 9,720
– 58,320 (=20 – 120 person-days X
1.5 staff member procurement X EUR
324 per day)
Total cost: EUR 194,400,000-
3,499,200,000 (= cost per one R&D
pr. document (as above) X (10 – 30)
R&D pr. documents per year X 2000
public buyers
Administrative costs for economic operators (suppliers) participating in R&D
procurement
Costs associated with introducing new R&D procurement procedures also arise for
economic operators, primarily supplier firms participating in R&D procurement. However,
there is no available evidence to support a quantitative assessment or to differentiate these
costs across the alternatives. Moreover, the targeted survey focuses on the administrative
burden for public buyers, namely the direct recipients of the Measure, while impacts on
suppliers are indirect. At this stage, and when considering individual R&D procurement
procedures, it is reasonable to assume that costs for economic operators follow a
similar pattern to those for public buyers: highest under the baseline, lower under
Alternative A, and moderate under Alternative B.
Summary of costs
The table below summarises the costs incurred by public buyers and supplier firms in absolute terms and relative to the baseline.
TableA4-13. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure 2 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Baseline
116
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 259,200,000 - 4,665,600,000 High
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 EUR 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 145,800,000 - 2,624,400,000 Low
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 194,400,000 - 3,499,200,000 Medium
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High
TableA4-14. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 2 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) From EUR -113,400,000 to -2,041,200,000 Medium decrease
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium increase
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) From EUR -64,800,000 to - 1,166,400,000 Low decrease
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High increase
Benefits
The table provides a snapshot of the benefits associated to the Measure. Each benefit is
discussed in detail in the next sections.
Table A4-15. Main benefits by stakeholder – Measure 2 Stakeholder
affected
Benefit Type of benefit Source of evidence Type of assessment
Public buyers/EU
society
Efficiency gains; reducing
legal uncertainty and
fragmentation of PCP
procedures across the EU
Economic
• Documentary review
• Targeted survey
Qualitative
Business Impact on innovative
companies’ turover
Economic
• Documentary review
Quantitative
EU society Increased market
competition, cross-border
collaboration and innovation
diffusion
Economic/social
• Documentary review Quantitative
Efficiency gains: reducing legal uncertainty and fragmentation of R&D procurement
procedures across the EU for public buyers
In the targeted survey, public authorities, business associations, innovation agencies,
universities and RTOs were asked to what extent they agreed with the statement according
to which introducing R&D friendly and fast-track procedures in R&D procurement
(outside the Public Procurement Directives / PPA) would help reduce legal uncertainty and
fragmentation for public buyers. Overall, 57% of respondents either totally agreed or
agreed. However, views differ across stakeholder groups. While none of business
associations has selected the “totally agree” option, public authorities and innovation
agencies, universities and RTOs express a stronger level of agreement overall.
117
Figure A7-3 Answers to question “To what extent do you agree with the following statement? Establishing in the EIA
Act a fast-track procedure for R&D procurements that fall outside of Public Procurement Directives, in particular pre-
commercial procurements, would be positive to remove legal uncertainty for public buyers to carry out procurements”
in targeted consultation to public authorities, business associations, and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs
conducted in October-November 2025. N. of replies: 53.
The box below further supports this evidence with examples from the USA.
Box A4- 4. Efficiency gains from PCP techniques: evidence from the USA.
The USA has been applying innovation-friendly procurement techniques, including in PCP since
the 1960s. Evidence shows that these approaches generate significant operational cost savings for
public buyers. Innovative solutions tend to be more efficient and help reduce supplier lock-in and
associated costs. In addition, they improve the quality and efficiency of public services, enabling
businesses and citizens to save time and costs. US experience also highlights substantial benefits
from the use of value engineering. 156 Although its implementation entails costs, typically a few
million USD per contracting authority each year, the resulting savings are considerably higher,
often reaching billions annually. These savings, in turn, enable federal agencies to invest in staff
training and further deployment of such techniques. For example, the Federal Highway
Administration reports annual savings exceeding USD 2 billion (approximately EUR 1.7 billion)
from value engineering, compared with around USD 20 million (approximately EUR 17 million)
spent on staff and training, implying a return on investment (ROI) of around 100:1 for large-scale
projects such as construction. Similarly, the United States Department of Defense reports average
annual benefits of approximately USD 5 billion (around EUR 4.3 billion). The United States Army
Corps of Engineers typically achieves returns of around 20:1 even for smaller contracts (USD 1–3
million, corresponding to EUR 0.85–2.55 million) with programme-wide returns often reaching up
to 50:1
156 https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ve/vereport.cfm https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ve/vereport.cfm
11 19 12 8 3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Establishing in the EIA Act a fast-track procedure for R&D procurements that fall outside of Public Procurement
Directives, in particular pre-commercial procurements, would be positive to remove legal uncertainty for public
buyers to carry out procurements
Totally agree Tend to agree Neither agree nor disagree Tend to disagree Totally disagree
118
In line with the cost-based approach, efficiency gains are calculated by estimating cost
savings per individual R&D procurement procedure and multiplying them by the relevant
number of public buyers. These figures are already presented in the table above in the cost
section and are recalled here for convenience for each alternative. They should be
interpreted relative to the baseline:
• Alternative A (administrative cost savings): from EUR 113,400,000 to EUR
2,041,200,000;
• Alternative B (administrative cost savings): from EUR 64,800,000 to EUR
1,166,400,000.
The impact on businesess: increased economic performance (profit) of
supplier companies
R&D procurement and innovation-friendly procurement practices generate not only
efficiency gains in administrative processes for public buyers, but also contribute to the
economic performance of suppliers through various channels. This section focuses on
quantifying the impact on suppliers’ profit, while other benefits are discussed in the
following sections.
Within the broader literature on innovation procurement (see already discussed in Measure
2), a specific strand examines the impact of R&D procurement by research infrastructures
on supplier firms. For example, suppliers to the European Organisation for Nuclear
Research (CERN) report increased profits as a direct result of procurement contracts.157
Similar findings have been observed among suppliers to the Italian Space Agency. 158 The
procurement practices of these research infrastructures provide a relevant benchmark for
three main reasons:
• they act as public buyers;
• they allocate a significant share of their budgets to R&D procurement and the
development of frontier technologies not yet available on the market;
• they apply innovation-oriented procurement techniques, including preliminary
market consultations, functional specifications, and value engineering and value-
for-money criteria.
This literature has thus developed the concept of a procurement impact multiplier (see
box below), whereby each EUR 1 spent on R&D procurement by research
infrastructures can generate up to EUR 3 in additional profits for suppliers.
These effects arise through several mechanisms. Close interaction between public buyers
and suppliers during procurement fosters technological learning and strengthens absorptive
157 Florio, M., Giffoni, F., Giunta, A., & Sirtori, E. (2018). Big science, learning, and innovation: evidence from CERN procurement. Industrial and Corporate Change, 27(5), 915-936. https://academic.oup.com/icc/article- abstract/27/5/915/5094967 Castelnovo, P., Florio, M., Forte, S., Rossi, L., & Sirtori, E. (2018). The economic impact of technological procurement for large-scale research infrastructures: Evidence from the Large Hadron Collider at CERN. Research Policy, 47(9), 1853- 1867. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S004873331830163X CSIL (2019). Impact of CERN procurement actions on industry. https://cds.cern.ch/record/2670056/files/CERN- BOOKLET_DIGITAL-VPC.pdf 158 Castelnovo, P., Catalano, G., Giffoni, F., & Landoni, M. (2024). The outcomes of public procurements: an empirical analysis of the Italian space industry. The Journal of Technology Transfer, 49(1), 367-399. https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s10961-023-10038-6
119
capacity for both parties.159 It also stimulates R&D and patenting activity, although this
depends on the IPR’s licenses and management agreement,160 improves production
processes, and leads to the development of new technologies that can be commercialised
in other markets beyond the original contract. Evidence from past studies161 provides
numerous examples of technologies developed through such procurement processes being
successfully deployed in other markets, even years after the initial contract has ended.
Further evidence from R&D procurement literature different from the one associated with
research infrastructure is provided in the box below.
Box A4- 5 The concept of R&D procurement impact multiplier.
The high-tech procurement multiplier is a concept developed several decades ago to assess the
impact of CERN’s high-tech procurement on industry.
The multiplier is defined as the ratio of:
′ ℎ &
&
Where profit is calculated as incremental revenues minus incremental costs generated by the
procurement contract.
Revenues include:
• sales to other customers beyond the research infrastructure or public buyer for which the
technology was originally developed;
• cost savings, such as more efficient production processes.
Costs include:
• additional costs incurred to meet technical requirements for developing the procured
technology (e.g. additional R&D investment);
• opportunity costs arising from commitments to develop demanding technologies for the
research infrastructure, including the loss of alternative potential contracts;
• financial losses associated with technological risks in developing and supplying frontier
technologies (see risk section).
159 See for instance: Selviaridis, K., & Uyarra, E. (2025). How intermediaries manage knowledge to support public procurement of innovation: The case of UK defence. Research Policy, 54(10), 105335. Florio, M., Giffoni, F., Giunta, A., & Sirtori, E. (2018). Big science, learning, and innovation: evidence from CERN procurement. Industrial and Corporate Change, 27(5), 915-936. 160 Bastianin, A., Castelnovo, P., & Zirulia, L. (2025). Overcoming the innovation threshold through innovative public procurement: evidence from CERN. Industrial and Corporate Change, dtaf004 https://academic.oup.com/icc/advance- article-abstract/doi/10.1093/icc/dtaf004/8078636 Bastianin, A., Castelnovo, P., Florio, M., & Giunta, A. (2022). Big science and innovation: gestation lag from procurement to patents for CERN suppliers. The Journal of Technology Transfer, 47(2), 531-555. 161 CSIL (2019). Impact of CERN procurement actions on industry. https://cds.cern.ch/record/2670056/files/CERN- BOOKLET_DIGITAL-VPC.pdf
120
Over time, it has been applied to R&D procurement activities of other research infrastructures and
estimated using a range of methods, from micro-econometric analysis to macroeconomic
modelling.
Public buyer Procurement multiplier
estimation method
Estimated
procurement
multiplier (Average
value)
Source
CERN - FCC Econometric regressions model 3.1 Giffoni et al., (2023)
Italian Space Agency Econometric regressions model 3 Castelnovo et al. (2021)
John Innes Centre, UK Input–Output model 3 Webb, D and White, R.
(2009)
Italian National Institute
of Nuclear Physics
Input–Output model 2 – 2.7
Salina (2006)
NASA Space Programmes Input–Output model 2.1 Bezdek and Wendling
(1992)
European Space Agency Survey 4.5 Danish Agency for Science
(2008)
European Space Agency Survey
1.5 – 1.6
Brendle et al. (1980),
Bach et al. (2022)
CERN Survey to suppliers 3 Bianchi-Streit et al. (1984)
CERN Survey to suppliers 1.2 Schmied (1982)
CERN Survey to suppliers 3 Schmied (1977)
Box A4- 6 Additional literature on the impact of PCP on industry suppliers.
A recent study of EU funded PCPs162 that surveyed industry suppliers and public buyers shows
that:
• 95% of suppliers reported that the PCP expanded their offer of products and services;
• 90% of suppliers reported that their PCP participation had impact on business growth both in
terms of financial performance and employment;
• 85% of suppliers report that their PCP participation resulted in securing financial investments
• 79% of the suppliers adopted internal policies or procedures to manage generated IPR.
Public buyers’ responses show that:
• 86% reported fostering technological breakthroughs in areas where the market offers no viable
alternatives;
• 84% improved targeted public service delivery;
• 82% of procurers adopted solutions after the PCP to tackle the PCP challenge: 35% adopted
small scale volumes of solutions that resulted directly from the PCP, 39% launched
procurements after the PCP for larger-scale deployments, and 8% followed alternative
pathways (inhouse development, adaptation or customisation) before adopting solutions;
162 Navigating challenges and unlocking the potential of European funding for innovation procurement to support innovation scale-up - Publications Office of the EU
121
• 78% engaged in international networking;
• 76% reported deepened knowledge in technological advancement;
• 68% aligned procurement with environmental goals;
• Leaving the opportunity to exploit IPR to suppliers reduced R&D costs and risks for procurers
by around 50% on average, as companies are able to commercialise the results more widely
and spread their R&D costs across multiple customers.
Drawing on this literature, and assuming that a share of R&D procurement in the baseline
already applies innovation-friendly techniques, including cross-border R&D procurement,
the benefit is calculated by applying the multiplier to only 50% of the total R&D
procurement volume. The resulting estimates are as follows:
• & ′ = ( 17.28 ∗ 50% ∗ 50%) ∗ 3 = 12.96 (Alternative A)
• & ′ = ( 17.28 ∗ 50% ∗ 100%) ∗ 3 = 25.9 (Alternative B)
Where:
• EUR 17.28 billion represents the total value of R&D procurement in the baseline;
• 50% (applied under both alternatives) reflects the assumption that part of R&D
procurement already uses innovation-friendly techniques, and therefore the
multiplier is applied only to the remaining share (of 50%);
• 50% under Alternative A reflects its voluntary nature, meaning only a portion of
public buyers are expected to adopt the Measure, whereas under Alternative B
(mandatory), full uptake (100%) is assumed.
The impact on society: increased market competition, cross-border collaboration and
innovation diffusion
Another strand of the literature shows that R&D procurement supports competition by
facilitating market access for new entrants, particularly innovative SMEs. Evidence
from PCP actions funded under FP7 and Horizon 2020163 indicates that 61.5% of the total
value of PCP contracts was awarded directly to SMEs, compared with an average of around
29% in public procurement across Europe. In addition, a further 19% of contracts were
awarded to consortia involving both SMEs and large firms.
R&D procurement also appears to promote cross-border participation and
collaboration. Around 33.1% of contracts were awarded to bidders established in
countries other than those of the procuring authorities, compared with an average of 1.7%
163 https://ec.europa.eu/newsroom/dae/document.cfm?doc_id=8949
122
in public procurement across Europe164. Furthermore, evidence from a recent EU-funded
PCP165 study based on interviews with suppliers indicates that such schemes foster the
creation of strategic partnerships. These are typically established within 18 months of
project completion, enabling firms to expand their business networks.
Evidence from European Commission (2024) analyses of PCP practices suggests that it
stimulates both public buyers and firms to build long-term R&D capacity, supporting the
development and delivery of innovative solutions.166 Close collaboration with suppliers
during the design and prototyping phases enables procurers to better understand emerging
technologies, assess their feasibility, and identify potential applications within their
operations. This learning process strengthens the capacity of public buyers to draft more
advanced technical specifications in future procurements, make more informed investment
decisions, and anticipate technological developments. Over time, it allows contracting
authorities to integrate innovations more effectively, improve service delivery, and reduce
implementation risks. 167 In addition, these learning effects support the commercialisation
of innovative solutions and can contribute to reducing their costs for both the public sector
and society as a whole.
Risk associated with R&D procurement
Risks associated with R&D procurement are generally higher than those linked to
innovation procurement, as R&D procurement focuses on the R&D phase, where
uncertainty is inherently greater. In R&D procurement, suppliers are contracted to develop
solutions that do not yet exist on the market, often at low technology readiness levels. This
entails significant technical risk, as there is no guarantee that the R&D process will
result in a viable or scalable solution. By contrast, innovation procurement typically
concerns the deployment of solutions that are already close to market or commercially
available, where performance and feasibility are more certain. As a result, R&D
procurement involves higher technical risk for public buyers and greater financial
and commercial risk for suppliers.
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public buyers
164 Navigating challenges and unlocking the potential of European funding for innovation procurement to support innovation
scale-up - Publications Office of the EU 165 Navigating challenges and unlocking the potential of European funding for innovation procurement to support innovation scale-up - Publications Office of the EU 166 European Commission (2024). Procure Innovation EU, Insight No 3: How to increase R&D and Innovation investment through Public Procurement of Innovation (European Commission, 23 July 2024) https://public-buyers- community.ec.europa.eu/communities/procure-innovation-eu/resources/insight-no3-how-increase-rd-and-innovation- investment 167 Selviaridis, K., & Uyarra, E. (2025). How intermediaries manage knowledge to support public procurement of innovation: The case of UK defence. Research Policy, 54(10), 105335. Chiappinelli, O., Giuffrida, L. M., & Spagnolo, G. (2025). Public procurement as an innovation policy: Where do we stand?. International Journal of Industrial Organization, 103157. Butler, M. J., & Ferlie, E. (2020). Developing absorptive capacity theory for public service organizations: Emerging UK empirical evidence. British Journal of Management, 31(2), 344-364.
123
Measure 3 aims to address the absence of a clear EU legal framework for applying EU
preferences in R&D procurement conducted outside the Public Procurement Directives /
PPA. The measure applies exclusively to R&D procurement carried out by public buyers.
To illustrate how it works in practice, consider the example from Measure 2 of a
municipality seeking to develop and test new solutions to better protect the city against
flooding, including prevention, detection, early warning and mitigation. Following a
preliminary market consultation, the municipality launches a R&D procurement to steer
innovation towards its needs and identify the most effective and cost-efficient solutions,
while also applying value engineering techniques.
In addition to R&D procurement techniques foreseen by Measure 2, Measure 3
introduces a preference for EU-based innovation. Accordingly, award criteria not only
prioritise solutions offering the best value for money through innovative approaches, but
also give additional weight to suppliers committing to carry out more than 70% of
R&D and at least 20% of commercial-scale production within the EU. Preferences for
the EU-based innovation can be mandatory (Alternative B and C), and non-mandatory
(Alternative A).
Table A4-16. Measure and alternatives Measure Alternatives
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in
pre-commercial procurement for public buyers• Alternative A: Non-mandatory preferences for
EU-made solutions for public buyers
• Alternative B: Mandatory preferences for EU-
made solutions for public buyers, with clauses
• Alternative C: Mandatory preferences for EU-
made solutions for public buyers
The difference between Alternative B and C is that Alternative B supplements the
mandatory EU preference with additional conditions specifying when non-EU tenderers
must be excluded and when they may exceptionally be allowed to participate.
In particular, Alternative B introduces mandatory preferences for EU-based suppliers
in public R&D procurement. Furthermore, where justified on grounds of security or public
order, especially in relation to critical technologies or rare materials, public buyers should
also exclude tenderers controlled by third countries or third-country entities.
However, the alternative also includes a number of opt-out clauses in which public
buyers may decide not to restrict access to EU-based tenderers. These are:
• where no suitable or sufficient EU-based suppliers are available, as demonstrated
through a market search, preliminary market consultation, or a previously
unsuccessful call for tenders;
• where restricting access would result in disproportionate costs or technical
incompatibility. For assessing disproportionate costs, a price difference exceeding
20% between an EU-based offer and a third-country offer, based on objective and
transparent data, may be considered excessive.
124
The rationale for these clauses is twofold. First, they aim to mitigate potential negative
economic effects by ensuring that EU preferences are not applied where they would lead
to significant inefficiencies or where the EU market cannot meet demand. Second, they
help ensure compatibility with international obligations.
Therefore, the following assessment is based on a hierarchy of regulatory intensity across
the alternatives:
• Alternative A is the least stringent, as it does not impose any mandatory
requirements.
• Alternative C is the most stringent, as it introduces a mandatory requirement for all
public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions.
• Alternative B represents an intermediate option, combining a mandatory preference
with conditional provisions designed to mitigate potential negative economic
effects.
Costs
The following cost assessments have been performed.
Table A4-17. Type of costs by stakeholder – Measure 3
Cost Stakehoder Type of assessment
Adjustment costs Public buyers Quantitative and qualitative
Administrative costs Public buyers Qualitative
Adjustment costs Economic operators participating in R&D
procurement (suppliers)
Qualitative
Administrative costs Economic operators participating in R&D
procurement (suppliers)
Qualitative
To inform the potential costs for public buyers and economic operators (i.e. suppliers
participating in R&D procurement), the targeted survey asked stakeholders a set of
questions on the impact of introducing EU preferences. The formulation of the measure’s
alternatives presented to respondents reflected the most up-to-date version available at the
time of the survey launch. Subsequently, the measure and its alternatives were further
refined, which explains why the options available in the targeted survey do not fully
correspond to the final version. Nevertheless, the survey results remain a valuable input to
the overall assessment.
Stakeholders were asked to assess the cost implications not only for public buyers
preparing tenders, but also the potential impacts on value chain disruptions and lock-in
effects (see below) resulting from the introduction of preferences for EU-made solutions,
whether mandatory or voluntary. Responses indicate that the highest costs are expected
under the option requiring all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made
solutions, particularly in the procurement of strategic technologies where the EU is highly
dependent on non-EU suppliers. This suggests that costs would be greater under
125
Alternative C, which introduces mandatory EU preferences without conditionalities. Based
on these reflections, the costs discussed for this measure are reported in the table below.
Figure A7-4 Answers to question “In your view, how large would be the costs (drawbacks) generated by the following
alternatives?” in targeted consultation to public authorities, and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs conducted
in October-November 2025. N. of replies: 35.
Adjustment costs for public buyers
Assessment approach. Adjustment costs for public buyers arise from one-off adapting to
the changes introduced by the measure’s alternatives, i.e. mainly for staff
familiarisation/training to apply the EU preferences and for developing new templates for
tender documents. These costs are assessed quantitatively.
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline): not applicable. Under the
baseline, these costs do not arise, because no action is taken that would require public
buyers to adapt to changes.
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). As mentioned above,
adjustment costs relate to staff familiarisation and training to redesign procurement
documentation.
• Training and familiarisation costs are estimated in the same way as for Measures
2, amounting to 6.5 days per staff member. This includes 1.5 days for a dedicated
course (at a cost of EUR 1,160) and a further 5 days for familiarisation with the
new procedures. The additional time is valued using the hourly rate from the OIOO
calculator. While the cost per staff member is assumed to be the same across all
alternatives, total costs vary depending on the number of public buyers
7
9
5
5
15
14
6
6
4
2
16
16
9
10
8
8
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give preference to EU-made
solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to give preference to
EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-
EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that own/operate critical
infrastructures to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying strategic technologies for which Europe is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion, guidance) all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying strategic technologies for
which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
High cost Moderate cost Low cost Cannot say
126
affected. As in Measure 2 concerning R&D procurement, it is assumed that under
Alternative C, where adoption is mandatory, 2,000 public buyers in the EU27
will incur these costs. Under Alternative B, the introduction of conditionalities is
expected to reduce this number to around 1,500 public buyers. By contrast, under
Alternative A, where adoption is voluntary, the number is assumed to be lower, at
around 1,000 public buyers (see Measure 2 about how the number of public buyers
has been estimated).168
• A quantitative assessment of the cost of redesigning procurement documentation
would require data on the average cost of developing tools or templates to
operationalise the EU preference. As such data are not available, a quantitative
estimate cannot be produced. A qualitative assessment is therefore provided, based
on the differing regulatory intensity of the alternatives.
Table A4-18. Adjustment costs for public buyers – Measure 3
Baseline
(continuation of
current
scenario)
A – Non-mandatory
preferences for EU-
made solutions for
public buyers
B – Mandatory
preferences for EU-
made solutions for
public buyers, with
clauses
C – Mandatory
preferences for EU-made
solutions for public
buyers
Training/
familiarisation
costs
⚫ No costs. ⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5
days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per
staff member
working on
procurement, but
with likely lower
uptake compared to
A and B because of
the non-mandatory
nature of the
requirement.
Total cost: EUR
3,266 X 1,000 public
buyers
= EUR 13,064,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5
days X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per
staff member
working on
procurement
Total cost: EUR
3,266 X 1,500
public buyers X 4
staff members
working on
procurement
= EUR 19,596,000
⚫
EUR 1,160 + (6.5 days
X 324)
= EUR 3,266 per staff
member working on
procurement
Total cost169: EUR 3,266
X 2,000 public buyers X
4 staff members working
on procurement
= EUR 26,128,000
Redesign of
procurement
⚫ No costs. ⚫ ⚫ ⚫
High adjustment costs.
168 The number of public buyers is consistent with that used in Measure 3; please refer to that section for details on how the figures were derived. However, this does not imply that the figures apply only if Measure 3 is implemented. The number of public buyers remains the same regardless of whether Measure 3 is implemented or not. 169 To estimate the total cost, the cost per staff member working on procurement needs to be multiplied with the number of public buyers owning/operating critical infrastructures. To estimate the number of critical infrastructures, it is possible to rely (as done under Measure 2) on the 2020 Impact Assessment accompanying the Proposal for a Directive on the resilience of critical entities (SWC(2020) 358). In that Impact Assessment, the number of critical entities is estimated at 5,000 in option 3 and 6,000 in option 4. While the scope of critical entities in the 2020 study is not precisely the same as the one of critical infrastructures in the context of an innovation procurement spending target, the upper bound of the range (6,000) is adopted for a conservative estimate, to avoid underestimating costs. Furthermore, it is assumed that within these entities, 4 staff members work on procurement on average. Under alternative B, the number of public buyers is estimated at 25,000: evidence from European Commission webpages on procurement mentions “over 250,000” public buyers in total (see here). This total number of 250,000 is reduced to one tenth (25,000) because the measure covers only procurement of strategic technologies that are key for EU economic security but for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers. Under C, the number of critical entities is reduced to reflect a likely lower uptake due to the voluntary nature of the alternative. Overall, this estimate is affected by uncertainty, and only serves the purpose of providing an indicative order of magnitude of the expected impacts.
127
processes and
documentation
Low adjustment
costs.
From moderate to
high adjustment
costs because thr
application of
clauses require a
market analysis.
Administrative costs for public buyers
Assessment approach. Recurrent administrative costs for public buyers consist of the
costs associated with carrying out procurement procedures (for an overview of the main
administrative activities of contracting authorities, see Measures 2 – Administrative costs
for public buyers). Compared to Measure 2, public buyers would face additional
recurrent administrative costs to included criteria related to the “EU-made”
requirements. These costs are assessed qualitatively.
Available data, assumptions and data used (baseline). No costs associated with the
introduction of EU preferences in the baseline by definition as it is the scenario without
the Measure
Available data, assumptions and data used (alternatives). A quantitative assessment of
the cost of carrying out procurement procedures under the proposed alternatives would
require additional information compared to the baseline, in particular an estimate of how
much the cost of each type of procurement procedure would increase if EU preference
provisions had to be applied. In the absence of such data, a quantitative estimate is not
possible.
The table below therefore provides a qualitative assessment based on the differing
regulatory intensity of the alternatives and qualitative evidence from the focus group.
During the online focus group, a representative from a business association and one from
an association of local authorities raised concerns about the potential administrative burden
on public authorities linked to verifying whether a solution is EU-made. A participant from
a national competence centre on innovation procurement noted that this burden could be
particularly significant for smaller authorities, depending on how broadly “strategic
technologies” are defined (for example in applying the clauses). The allocation of the
burden of proof will be a key determinant of administrative costs under this measure.
Table A4-19 Administrative costs for public buyers – Measure 3 Baseline (continuation of
current scenario)
A – non-mandatory
preferences for EU-made
solutions for public buyers
B – Mandatory
preferences for EU-made
solutions for public
buyers, with clauses
C – Mandatory
preferences for EU-
made solutions for
public buyers
⚫
No costs ⚫ Under this Alternative
with non-obligatory
adoption, the increase of
administrative costs due to
the introduction EU
preferences is expected to
be lower as compared to
Alternative A and B, where
all the public buyers are
obliged to deal with the new
⚫ From moderate to
high administrative
costs are expected for all
public buyers compared
to the baseline. While
the introduction of
conditionalities is likely
to reduce the number of
cases in which EU
preferences apply
compared to Alternative
⚫
High administrative
costs borne to all public
buyers compared to
baseline.
128
procedures, although under
conditionalities
A, these clauses also
introduce additional
administrative burdens,
for example in carrying
out market analysis to
justify their application.
Adjustment costs for economic operators participating in R&D procurement
Introducing a preference for EU-made solutions is likely to generate a range of
adjustment costs for suppliers, arising both from direct compliance requirements and
from and from the need to adapt or restructure their supply chains. The magnitude of
these costs will depend on the sector, the degree of globalisation of the relevant supply
chain, and the size and capabilities of the firms involved. This section examines these costs
from the suppliers’ perspective, while the broader EU-wide economic implications of EU
preferences are addressed in the risk section.
Costs related to sourcing constraints during the transition period can be relevant. If
public buyers are required or encouraged to select EU-made solutions, suppliers seeking
to remain in the market may need to adjust their supply chains to meet EU-origin
requirements. Evidence from previous assessments of localisation or origin rules shows
that mandatory geographic sourcing tends to reduce the pool of available subcontractors,
particularly in sectors with highly globalised supply chains such as electronics, ICT
hardware, and medical devices. OECD analysis of local content requirements finds that
such measures typically restrict supplier choice, increase input costs, and reduce
operational flexibility170.
For suppliers relying on non-EU inputs, this may require identifying alternative EU-based
partners or relocating parts of production closer to the EU, generating transition and search
costs. These adjustments can lead to higher production costs. Evidence on reshoring and
strategic autonomy policies suggests that shifting production or switching to higher-cost
regional suppliers often increases input prices and may result in short-term efficiency
losses171. In procurement markets, this can compress supplier margins or lead to higher bid
prices. In addition, limiting access to global suppliers may reduce the diversity and
technological sophistication of available inputs, particularly in fast-evolving sectors where
non-EU providers remain dominant.
Sectoral variation is expected. Sectors with globally concentrated value chains, such as
semiconductors, robotics, batteries, cloud hardware, and critical raw material–based
technologies are likely to face higher adjustment costs due to limited EU supplier
availability. By contrast, sectors with strong EU industrial ecosystems, such as
construction materials or industrial machinery, are likely to be less affected. Firm size will
also matter. Large firms are generally better placed to absorb compliance requirements
and diversify sourcing, while SMEs may face higher relative burdens due to tighter
margins and more limited procurement capacity.
170 OECD, Local Content Requirements and Industrial Policy, 2019. Available here. 171 De Backer, K. et al., Reshoring: Myth or Reality?”, OECD, 2016. Available here.
129
The magnitude of these costs will depend on the design of the alternatives and on sectoral
characteristics. At this stage, it can reasonably be assumed that costs borne by economic
operators follow the regulatory intensity of the alternatives and considering the potential
number of operators involved, namely ranging from lower costs under Alternative A to
higher costs under Alternative C.
Administrative costs for economic operators participating in R&D procurement
Under the proposed measure, economic operators would face recurrent administrative
costs linked to participation in R&D procurement procedures, to document and
demonstrate compliance with “EU-made” requirements.
A key source of recurrent costs relates to proving EU origin. In practice, this requires
data collection, certification, and verification across multi-tier supply chains, increasing
administrative effort, particularly for SMEs with limited compliance capacity. OECD
evidence on supply chain transparency confirms that verifying provenance across multiple
tiers typically involves ongoing documentation, contractual updates, and monitoring
systems.172 Additional recurrent costs would stem from updating self-declarations,
technical dossiers, supplier attestations, and traceability records for each procurement
procedure. Overall, the measure would introduce a persistent administrative workload for
suppliers, with cost intensity depending on sectoral supply chain complexity, firm
capabilities, and the specific design of each alternative. Following the same argument as
adjustment costs, it is reasonable to assume that costs range from lower under
Alternative A to higher costs under Alternative C.
Summary of costs
Table A4-20. Summary of costs in absolute terms – Measure 3
Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
Baseline
Administrative costs (annual) EUR 0 EUR 0
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 0 EUR 0
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) Low Medium
Adjustment costs (one-off)EUR 13,064,000Medium
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) Medium From Medium to High
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 From Medium to High
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) High High
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High
Table A4-21. Summary of costs compared to baseline – Measure 3 Costs - EUR Public buyers Economic operators (suppliers)
172 OECD, OECD Due Diligence Guidance for Responsible Business Conduct, 2018. Available here.
130
Alternative A
Administrative costs (annual) Low increase Medium increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 13,064,000 Medium increase
Alternative B
Administrative costs (annual) Medium increase Medium/High increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 19,596,000 Medium/High increase
Alternative C
Administrative costs (annual) High increase High increase
Adjustment costs (one-off) EUR 26,128,000 High increase
.
Benefits
The table provides a snapshot of the benefits associated to the Measure. Each benefit is
discussed in detail in the next sections.
Table A4-22. Main benefits by stakeholder – Measure 3 Stakeholder
affected
Benefit Type of benefit Source of evidence Type of assessment
EU society EU technological sovereignty Economic/social • Documentary review
• Targeted survey
Qualitative
Businesses/EU
society
EU open strategic autonomy
and increased market access
for EU companies
Economic/social • Documentary review Quantitative
EU technological sovereignty
To assess the potential benefits of introducing EU preferences in R&D procurement, the
targeted survey asked stakeholders to what extent such measures would promote
innovation, technological sovereignty, while reducing strategic dependencies in the EU.
As noted in the cost analysis, the alternatives presented reflected the most up-to-date
version at the time of the survey and were subsequently refined. While this means they do
not fully match the final design, the results remain a valuable input to the assessment.
The option receiving the highest share of “highly effective” responses across stakeholder
groups was the requirement for all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made
solutions when procuring strategic technologies for which the EU is highly dependent on
non-EU suppliers. this option was also perceived as the most costly. This suggests that,
while introducing mandatory EU preferences (as in Alternative C) may increase costs in
the short term, it is expected to deliver greater benefits once the adjustment phase has
passed, particularly in the medium to long term. However, it is only when applying this
principle in a in a proportionate manner that risks and value chain disruptions are mitigated
as in Alternative B.
Figure A4-5 Answers to question “A number of other major economies around the world require public buyers to give
preference to solutions that were made in their territory. Introducing such a preference for EU-made solutions also in
the EU could take different forms. In your view, how effective would the following alternatives be in promoting innovation
and technological sovereignty while lowering strategic dependencies in the EU?” in targeted consultation to public
authorities, and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs conducted in October-November 2025. N. of replies: 35.
131
EU open strategic automony and increased market access for EU companies
The EU has since 2011 started to reinforce EU open strategic autonomy in strategic
technologies by starting to selectively apply local content requirements, including in
R&D procurement. Success cases demonstrate that this approach has successfully
propelled small EU based startups into world leaders in strategic sectors (see Danish
robotics company example) and to regain EU strategic autonomy in sectors where the EU
was previously lagging behind and overdependent on the US and Asia (see supercomputing
example).
Some MSs are adopting a similar approach in public procurements of widely
commercially available solutions. For instance, Poland is setting a target of 50% of local
components in wind farm projects in the Baltic Sea 173 The EU public procurement
directive for utilities already allows any utility procurer to reject offers for any supply
contract (so not only for critical technology type products) with products that primarily
(more than 50%) originate in third countries.
Romania forbids any type of public buyer (public authorities as well as utilities) to procure
any products, services or works from third country suppliersfrom countries with whom
the EU does not have an international procurement agreement.
Box A4-7. Applying local content requirements in public procurement
173 The local content indicator in Polish wind farm projects in the Baltic Sea can reach as much as 50 percent - Baltic Wind.
10
13
3
3
11
9
14
16
6
5
13
12
8
8
5
4
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give preference to EU-made
solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to give preference to EU-
made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that own/operate critical infrastructures to give
preference to EU-made solutions when buying strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU
suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion, guidance) all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU- made solutions when buying strategic technologies for which
Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Highly effective Moderately effective Nearly not effective / ineffective Cannot say
132
Since 2011, the EU has encouraged both Member States and EU institutions to apply local content requirements in R&D procurement. Around 50 EU co-funded projects involving groups of buyers from different Member States have jointly implemented pre-commercial procurement (PCP), while the European Commission has also carried out PCPs applying such requirements. Typically, these PCPs require at least 50% of R&D and subsequent commercial production to take place within the EU, rising to up to 100% in security-related cases. Similar strategic autonomy requirements have also been used by Member States in national PCPs.
More recently, the EU has begun to apply local content considerations in other areas. In 2023, the Commission supported Member State decisions to restrict or exclude Huawei and ZTE from supplying equipment and services for 5G networks, as part of the EU’s broader cybersecurity strategy under the 5G toolbox. These companies were considered to pose higher security risks, given the critical nature of the European 5G infrastructure. 174
The EU has also introduced local content elements in public procurement for commercially available technologies. For example, policies linked to climate objectives require a share of key infrastructure to be sourced from European manufacturers, building on provisions in Directive 2014/24/EU that allow environmental and strategic considerations in procurement decisions.
At national level, cases such as public transport procurement in Norway have highlighted related concerns, including situations where non-EU suppliers retained access to vehicle control systems for software updates and diagnostics.175
To quantify the potential benefits of open strategic autonomy under Measure 3, the
procurement impact multiplier discussed in Measure 2 can be applied. Under this approach,
each EUR 1 spent on R&D procurement generates approximately EUR 3 in profits for
industry suppliers. As set out under Measure 2, the impact under the mandatory adoption
scenario (Alternative B) amounts to EUR 25.92 billion. However, this figure provides the
total impact on suppliers’ profits, regardless of whether suppliers are located within or
outside the EU.
However, unlike Measure 2, this impact must be adjusted to reflect the EU preference
embedded in this Measure. This is done by scaling the total impact according to the share
of R&D expected to be carried out within the EU under each alternative. Assuming that
70% of R&D is undertaken within the EU under Alternative C (mandatory preferences),
50% under Alternative B (mandatory preferences with conditionalities), and 20% under
Alternative A (non-mandatory preferences), the corresponding share of benefits
retained within the EU industry would amount to:
• EUR 25.92 billion* 70% = EUR 18.14 billion (Alternative C)
• EUR 25.95 billion* 50% = EUR 12.96 billion (Alternative B)
• EUR 25.95 billion* 50% = EUR 5.18 billion (Alternative A)
These estimates provide an indicative order of magnitude of the potential economic
benefits accruing within the EU under each alternative. It should be noted that this
impact is already captured under Measure 2. In that measure, the procurement
174 European Commission (15, June 2023). Communication from the Commission: Implementation of the 5G cybersecurity Toolbox C(2023) 4049 final. Available at : https://digital-strategy.ec.europa.eu/en/library/communication-commission- implementation-5g-cybersecurity-toolbox. 175 Euronews (6 November 2025). Test results showed that the Chinese bus maker had access to the vehicles' control systems for software updates and diagnostics. https://www.euronews.com/next/2025/11/06/chinese-made-buses-can-be- halted-remotely-in-norway-spurring-increased-security Last access in November, 2025.
133
multiplier is applied to the total additional R&D procurement generated, whereas here it is
applied only to the share of that R&D procurement undertaken by European companies,
which is already part of the total. Consequently, adding the benefits of Measures 2 and
3 would result in double counting.
The purpose of this calculation is therefore not to estimate additional benefits, but to
indicate the share of R&D procurement-related impacts on industry that is likely to
“remain” within the EU.
Risk associated with introducing EU preferences in R&D procurement
On the one hand, the EU preferences are expected to generate positive macro-economic
effects by limiting the EU’s strategic dependency on uncertain sources of supply and by
supporting the scaling up of EU-based technologies. On the other hand, empirical
evidence suggests that, when applied at scale, mandatory preferences for domestic
suppliers in procurement can entail non-negligible macroeconomic costs. The box
below discusses several channels through which this can happen. Shepotilo (2020) 176
estimates that the preferential treatment of local producers in public procurement in
Ukraine resulted in a GDP loss of approximately 0.58%. This measure applied broadly
across public buyers and import-intensive product categories. By comparison, Boer and
Rieth (2024)177 estimate that nationwide U.S. tariff increases, applied economy-wide, led
to GDP losses in the range of 0.1% to 0.5% per year, illustrating that even generalised
trade restrictions generate significant but limited macroeconomic effects.
From a design perspective, the Ukrainian localisation requirement is most comparable to
Alternative B. Both involve mandatory preferences applied in specific procurement
contexts and for selected technologies, rather than economy-wide obligations (Alternative
C) or non-binding guidance (Alternative A). However, the Ukrainian measure applies to a
broader population of public buyers and a wider share of import-intensive procurement
categories than the Measure under assessment, which is deliberately confined to R&D
procurement outside the remit of the Public Procurement Directives / PPA. Accordingly,
it is assumed that, in relative terms, Alternative B mobilises roughly 1/5 (= 20%) of the
transports/infrastructure/innovation procurement local preference covered in Ukrainian
reform.
On the other hand, the EU Single Market is significantly larger (e.g. the EU GDP was
90 times larger than Ukrainian GDP in 2021), more diversified, and more integrated
than the Ukrainian economy, with deeper supplier bases, greater substitution possibilities,
and higher competitive intensity across Member States. These features increase the
capacity of the EU economy to absorb R&D procurement preferences without
generating comparable price, productivity, or supply chain distortions. Moreover,
Alternative B preserves the possibility of global sourcing where no suitable EU-made
solution exists, which further limits the effective restriction on trade. Taking these design
176 Oleksandr Shepotilo (2020). How will preferential treatment of local producers in public procurement impact the GDP of Ukraine 177 Boer, L., & Rieth, M. (2024). The macroeconomic consequences of import tariffs and trade policy uncertainty. International Monetary Fund
134
features and market-size effects together, the realistic upper bound of unintended
macroeconomic costs associated with reduced trade under Alternative B is EUR 464
million calculated as follows:
= (0.58% ∗ 20% ∗ 2.2%) ∗ 18 = 464
Where:
• 0.58% is the negative macroeconomic impact on Ukrainian GDP caused by
national preference on many innovation procurements in many sectors;
• 20% (= 1/5) is scale difference between the amount of R&D procurement and
innovation procurement in the EU;
• 2.25 (= 1/45) is the scale difference between the EU Single Market and Ukraine
internal market divided by a factor of 2;
• EUR 18 trillion is the EU27 GDP (average 2022 – 2025).
To sum up, in a geopolitical context characterised by a higher likelihood of trade
disruptions and frictions, accepting some degree of short-term economic cost in exchange
for greater resilience can be welfare-improving over the long term, as it builds the
redundancies needed to safeguard continuity and sustain future growth.178,179,180
Box A4-8. How EU preferences for domestic suppliers in procurement can entail
macroeconomic costs when applied at scale.
Introducing a preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement could generate a series of unintended impacts on market functioning, innovation dynamics, geopolitical relations, and long-term resilience of EU value chains, that ultimately reflect on GDP losses, at least in the short term.
A key societal cost relates to reduced supplier choice, which may translate into higher public and private expenditure. Where buyers face constraints in sourcing from global suppliers, they may encounter higher prices or longer delivery times, particularly in sectors where EU production capacity remains limited. Restricting access to global inputs can increase overall system costs and may reduce the quality or technological sophistication of procured solutions. These risks are especially relevant in strategic sectors such as semiconductors, advanced digital equipment, robotics, and critical raw materials, although, the Alternative B of the Measure includes safeguards to mitigate such effects.
Reduced competition may generate further societal costs (and negative iompact on GDP). If fewer suppliers are able to participate (due to restrictions on non-EU providers or the inability of EU firms relying on global inputs to comply)
178 Xue, J., & Li, G. (2023). Balancing resilience and efficiency in supply chains: Roles of disruptive technologies under Industry 4.0. Frontiers of Engineering Management, 10(1), 171-176. 179 Berendes K, Arabmaldar A, Hammerschmidt M, Loske D, Klumpp M (2025), "Measuring the resilience-efficiency trade- off: an empirical application for retail logistics". Logistics Research, Vol. 18 No. 1-2 pp. 110–134, doi: https://doi.org/10.1108/LORE-12-2024-0016 180 Katsaliaki, K., Galetsi, P., & Kumar, S. (2022). Supply chain disruptions and resilience: a major review and future research agenda. Annals of operations research, 319(1), 965-1002.
135
procurement markets may become less dynamic. Lower competitive pressure can lead to higher public expenditure and weaker incentives for innovation and efficiency improvements.
Additional negative effects may arise from supply chain restructuring. While shifting production and sourcing towards the EU may strengthen resilience over time, the transition can involve short-term inefficiencies, capacity constraints, and coordination challenges. This may delay the deployment of key technologies or increase costs for end users, particularly in fast-moving sectors such as renewable energy, medical technologies, and electronics.
There is also a risk of international retaliation. Third countries could introduce countermeasures limiting access for EU firms, potentially affecting sectors where the EU is globally competitive, such as pharmaceuticals, green technologies, aerospace, and specialised machinery. While the likelihood and scale of such responses remain uncertain, their impact could be significant. This risk is partly mitigated by the targeted scope of the measure, which applies only to R&D procurement, and by the fact that other major economies like USA and China already apply similar preferences fro local suppliers.
Another consideration concerns relations with closely integrated partners, such as countries in the European Economic Area. If applied too rigidly, EU preferences could strain existing cooperation frameworks and disrupt cross- border value chains. To address this, the measure is designed to apply only where consistent with existing agreements, and may allow participation from such partners where appropriate.
ANNEX 5: COMPETITIVENESS CHECK
1. OVERVIEW OF IMPACTS ON COMPETITIVENESS
Dimensions of
Competitiveness
Impact of the initiative
(++ / + / 0 / - / -- / n.a.)
References to sub-sections of the
main report or annexes
Cost and price competitiveness - Chapter 6.1, 8, and Annex 4
International competitiveness + Chapter 6.2, 8, and Annex 4
Capacity to innovate + Chapter 6.2, 8, and Annex 4
SME competitiveness + Chapter 6.2, 8, and Annex 4
2. SYNTHETIC ASSESSMENT
Cost and competitiveness
The implementation of the European Innovation Act (EIA) is expected to generate both
adjustment and administrative costs for the key stakeholders. Considering the quantified
costs, the EIA is expected to generate one-off adjustment costs of EUR 40 million, 95%
of them borne to European public buyers from the Measures on procurement, namely,
introducing innovation-friendly techniques for R&D procurement and EU preferences in
R&D procurement.
Against these costs, the implementation of EIA is expected to reduce the "price of
innovation” for European public buyers and firms. Overall, the EIA is projected to
deliver approximately EUR 1.1 billion in annual cost savings and price reductions
compared with the baseline.
Specifically,for businesses, the EIA is projected to deliver annual efficiency gains of
around EUR 35 million through more harmonised access to intellectual property valuation
136
frameworks. Public buyers are also expected to benefit, with efficiency gains from the use
of innovation-friendly R&D procurement approaches estimated at EUR 1.07 billion.
International competitiveness
Macro-economic simulations using the RHOMOLO model indicate that EU GDP
would increase by approximately 0.24-0.42% over a ten-year horizon compared with
a baseline scenario without the EIA. By year 10, the low scenario delivers EUR 255
billion in additional EU GDP (cumulative over the whole period) alongside 238 thousand
extra jobs (FTEs) at its peak impact, while the high scenario generates almost EUR 452
billion in cumulative GDP impact, and 507 thousand additional jobs in the year of the
maximum impact. In that same year (year 10), the GDP is between 0.24% and 0.42% above
the no-policy scenario. These effects build gradually through the ten-year phase-in period,
with GDP impacts accelerating in years 6-10 as capital deepening and productivity
increases compound through regional production networks.
Capacity to innovate
The EIA is intended to strengthen the EU’s industrial innovation capacity by raising the
share streamlining access to R&D procurement, including preferences for European-based
industry, and improving access to IP-backed finance through a harmonised intellectual
property valuation framework.
Regarding the improved conditions for IP valuation are expected to help businesses
secure an additional EUR 2.7–10.2 billion in IP-backed finance, including bank lending
and venture capital investment.
Facilitating participation in R&D procurement is expected to provide a further boost
to innovation, with participating firms potentially generating EUR 3 in profit for every
euro of PCP invested in the economy. Based on the projected EUR 17.28 billion of R&D
procurement expected to be channelled through the EIA, the total business impact is
estimated at EUR 26 billion, including EUR 13 billion benefiting the European
economy through the introduction of EU preferences.
Beyond quantified impacts, the evidence reviewed suggests that IP valuation and
R&D procurement generate broad societal benefits by accelerating the development,
adoption, and diffusion of innovative technologies, particularly in strategic sectors such as
healthcare, digital technologies, clean energy, mobility, and AI. At the same time, these
instruments strengthen competition and cross-border collaboration, increasing SME
participation and fostering strategic partnerships across Europe. The literature also
indicates that these mechanisms improve the quality, efficiency, and sustainability of
public services while supporting environmentally beneficial innovation. Evidence shows
that innovation procurement contributes to the uptake of green and digital solutions,
including technologies that reduce emissions, energy use, pollution, and resource
consumption.
Risks and uncertainties
137
The introduction of innovation-related measures is not risk free. While R&D
procurement can generate significant economic and innovation benefits, they also involve
greater uncertainty than conventional procurement because they support solutions whose
technical feasibility, market uptake and commercial viability may not yet be fully proven.
For R&D procurement risks arise from both suppliers failing to meet objectives and
contracting authorities facing difficulties in adopting innovative solutions. Evidence from
the literature suggests potential failure or non-adoption rates of between 5% and 20%.
However, the estimated R&D procurement impacts are measured in terms of profit, which
already accounts for possible financial losses linked to unsuccessful R&D investments or
technology failures. Therefore, no additional risk adjustment is applied to the R&D
procurement benefit estimates.
SME competitiveness
The EIA significantly bolsters the competitiveness of SMEs by lowering financial barriers
and accelerating their ability to bring new technologies to market, while increasing their
probability of survival, especially related to frontier technologies (see the SMEs Test for
details).
3. COMPETITIVE POSITION OF THE MOST AFFECTED SECTORS
The European Innovation Act (EIA) is a cross-sector initiative aiming to deliver a level
playing field for innovators across all sectors and all Member States, rather than targeting
or favouring specific industries. Its measures are horizontal by design and address
structural barriers that affect innovation-intensive activities broadly, such as regulatory
fragmentation, uneven access to infrastructures, barriers to scaling across borders, and
legal uncertainty for innovative business models. As a result, the EIA does not alter
competitive dynamics between sectors, but it does affect more strongly those sectors that
are structurally more exposed to these barriers (namely knowledge-intensive
manufacturing, digital and deep-tech activities, clean and climate technologies, health and
life sciences, and other R&D- and capital-intensive sectors).
By improving horizontal framework conditions the EIA is expected to strengthen the
competitive position of these sectors vis-à-vis global competitors, while preserving a
technology-neutral approach and avoiding distortions between EU sectors.
138
ANNEX 6: SME CHECK
OVERVIEW OF IMPACTS ON SMES AND STARTUPS
The Table below discusses the European Innovation Act (EIA) expected impact on SMEs
measure by measure.
Table A6-1. SME check
AREA MEASURE Preferred Alternative SME Test
Commercialisation
of R&I results
Measure1:
Promoting valuation
of Intellectual
property rights (IP).
E - Give EUIPO a
mandate (in EIA) to
develop an EU wide
IP valuation
framework, develop
an EU wide marketplace that
functions as
secondary marketplace for
inventors and
investors to buy and sell IP, and mandate
to act as an EU wide
IP competence centre that provides advice,
training and financial
support to innovators for IP valuation
The IA estimates that 10,398 innovative SMEs owning
registered European patents could potentially be affected
by this measure. The estimated administrative costs borne
by these businesses are in the interval EUR 4.2 – 8.5
million.
Against them, SMEs benefit from having access to a methodology for valuing IPR, to a secondary market in
which IPR can be bought and sold, and EUIPO training
services. The benefits for SMEs stem from the costs avoided (efficiency gains) compared with a baseline
scenario in which this measure does not exist.
Efficiency gains for innovative SMEs are valued at
EUR 12.6–25.3 million in total corresponding to a 75%
reduction compared to the situation wihout the Measure,
namely the baseline, and up to EUR to up to EUR 2,400
in cost savings per individual SME
On top of that, stronger IPRs valuation systems are associated with higher chances to access to IP-backed
finance, either debt from banks or venture capital. The IA
estimates that this benefits values from EUR 1.9 – 7.3
billion of additional capital raised by SMEs.
Innovation
procurement
Measure2: Establish
procedures for R&D procurement for
public buyers,
including cross- border R&D
procurement and rules to promote the
use of innovation-
friendly techniques within R&D
procurement
B – Obligatory
techniques for R&D procurement for
public buyers
No specific information to report. Under the preferred
alternative, administrative and adjustment costs are calculated primarily for public buyers, while suppliers can
experience higher admnistrative costs compared to the
baseline.
While not directly targeted by the Measure, SMEs may still benefit indirectly as suppliers within the supply chain
(see the Annex on SDGs for a discussion on other benefits
associated with this Measure)
Innovation
procurement
Measure3:
Preference for EU- made solutions in pre-
commercial
procurement for
public buyers
B – Mandatory
preferences for EU- made solutions for
public buyers, with
clauses
No specific information to report. As discussed above,
under the preferred alternative, administrative and adjustment costs are calculated primarily for public
buyers, and firms participanting in the procurement
procedures as suppliers.
Indirectly, the wider economic effects associated with the
impact on EU strategic autonomy may also benefit SMEs
in the European supply chain (see the Annex on SDGs for a discussion on other benefits and risks associated with
EU repreferences in innovation procurement, including
costs and risks).
Table below discusses the European Innovation Act (EIA) expected impact on startups
measure by measure.
139
Table A6-2. Startups check
AREA MEASURE Preferred Alternative SME Test
Commercialisation
of R&I results
Measure1: Promoting
valuation of Intellectual property rights (IP).
E - Give EUIPO a mandate (in
EIA) to develop an EU wide IP valuation framework, develop an
EU wide marketplace that functions
as secondary marketplace for inventors and investors to buy and
sell IP, and mandate to act as an EU
wide IP competence centre that provides advice, training and
financial support to innovators for
IP valuation
The IA estimates that 1,036 startups
owning registered European patents could potentially be affected by this
measure. The estimated
administrative costs borne by these
businesses are in the interval EUR
0.4 – 0.8 million.
Against them, startups benefit from having access to a methodology for
valuing IPR, to a secondary market in
which IPR can be bought and sold, and EUIPO training services. The
benefits for startups stem from the
costs avoided (efficiency gains) compared with a baseline scenario in
which this measure does not exist.
Efficiency gains for startups are
valued at EUR 1.2–2.5 million in
total corresponding to a 75%
reduction compared to the situation wihout the Measure, namely the
baseline, and up to EUR to up to EUR
2,400 in cost savings per individual
startup
On top of that, stronger IPRs valuation systems are associated with
higher chances to access to IP-
backed finance, either debt from banks or venture capital. The IA
estimates that this benefits values
from EUR 0.2 – 0.7 billion of
additional capital raised by
startups.
Innovation
procurement
Measure2: Establish
procedures for R&D
procurement for public buyers, including cross-
border R&D procurement
and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly
techniques within R&D
procurement
B – Obligatory techniques for R&D
procurement for public buyers
No specific information to report.
Under the preferred alternative,
administrative and adjustment costs are calculated primarily for public
buyers, while suppliers can
experience higher admnistrative costs compared to the baseline.
While not directly targeted by the Measure, startups may still benefit
indirectly as suppliers within the
supply chain (see the Annex on SDGs for a discussion on other benefits
associated with this Measure)
Innovation procurement
Measure3: Preference for EU-made solutions in
R&D procurement for
public buyers
B – Mandatory preferences for EU- made solutions for public buyers,
with clauses
No specific information to report.
As discussed above, under the
preferred alternative, administrative
and adjustment costs are calculated primarily for public buyers, and
firms participanting in the
procurement procedures as suppliers.
Indirectly, the wider economic effects
associated with the impact on EU
strategic autonomy may also benefit startups in the European supply chain
(see the Annex on SDGs for a
discussion on other benefits and risks associated with EU repreferences in
innovation procurement, including
costs and risks).
140
CONSULTATION OF SME STAKEHOLDERS
Table A6-2. How has the input from the SME community been taken into
consideration?
1. All responses and descriptive statistics from the Open Public Consultation were disaggregated to distinguish
between businesses in general and SMEs.
2. During the targeted consultation, including focus groups and interviews, the following SME representatives were
consulted:
Interviews:
• Orgalim (with participation of VDMA, Europe-wide association of the machinery and equipment manufacturing
industry) (industru, but also includes SMEs)
• SMEunited
• European Entrepreneurs CEA-PME (Confédération Européenne des Associations de Petites et Moyennes
Entreprises)
• European Startup Network
• Europe Startup Nations Alliance
• Allied for Startups
Surveys:
• VDMA , German Mechanical Engineering Industry Association; includes many SMEs.
• Suomen Yrittäjät, Federation of Finnish Enterprises
• Confartigianato Imprese , Italian association for artisans and SMEs.
• Swedish Federation of Business Owners
• Danske Iværksættere , Danish Entrepreneurs
• CNA, Confederazione Nazionale dell'Artigianato e della Piccola e Media Impresa, Italian confederation for SMEs
and artisans.
• Latvian Startup Association
• Startup Portugal, Associação Portuguesa para a promoção do Empreendedorismo (SPAPPE)
• Krajowa Izba Gospodarcza Elektroniki i Telekomunikacji, Polish association; includes SME members in electronics
and telecom sectors.
• Czech Startup Association
Focus groups:
• SMEunited + Eurochambres (also includes SME).
Are SMEs’ views different from those of large businesses? (No)
141
ANNEX 7: SUPPORTING GRAPHS AND TABLES
Figure A7-1. Entrepreneurship policies and culture (2019-2023)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the Global Innovation Index (GII), Global Entrepreneurship Monitor (GEM), National Expert
Survey (NES). Definition: Average perception scores (five-year average) of experts on entrepreneurial policies and
entrepreneurial culture. (0= completely false; 10 = completely true). EU value is the unweighted average of MSs
performance.
Figure A7-2. Direct and indirect government support of business R&D (2025)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the European Innovation Scoreboard (EIS). Definition: Direct funding for R&D through
instruments such as grants and public procurement, and Indirect support through the tax system. EIS scores are relative
to the performance of the EU in 2018, which is assigned a score of 100 for that year.
2
3
4
5
6
7
U n
it ed
S ta
te s
Eu ro
p e
an U
n io
n
Es to
n ia
Li th
u an
ia
N e
th e
rl an
d s
Fi n
la n
d
Ir el
an d
Fr an
ce
Lu xe
m b
o u
rg
P o
rt u
ga l
A u
st ri
a
G e
rm an
y
La tv
ia
Sw ed
en
Sp ai
n
H u
n ga
ry
Sl o
ve n
ia
B u
lg ar
ia
It al
y
C yp
ru s
G re
ec e
P o
la n
d
R o
m an
ia
Sl o
va ki
a
C ro
at ia
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
United States European Union
142
Figure A7-3. Domestic credit to private sector (2023)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the Global Innovation Index (GII), World Bank's World Development Indicators database.
Definition: Domestic credit to private sector refers to financial resources provided to the private sector by financial
corporations. Expressed in % of GDP. EU value is the unweighted average of MSs performance.
Figure A7-4. Finance for startups and scaleups (2019-2023)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the Global Innovation Index (GII), Global Entrepreneurship Monitor (GEM), National Expert
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200 U
n it
ed S
ta te
s Eu
ro p
e an
U n
io n
D en
m ar
k Sw
ed en
Fr an
ce Lu
xe m
b o
u rg
Fi n
la n
d A
u st
ri a
N e
th e
rl an
d s
P o
rt u
ga l
Sp ai
n G
e rm
an y
B el
gi u
m M
al ta
It al
y C
yp ru
s Sl
o va
k R
ep u
b lic
Es to
n ia
G re
ec e
C ze
ch ia
C ro
at ia
B u
lg ar
ia Sl
o ve
n ia
P o
la n
d Li
th u
an ia
H u
n ga
ry La
tv ia
Ir el
an d
R o
m an
ia
Domestic credit to private sector (% of GDP)
Domestic credit to private sector by banks (% of GDP)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
U n
it ed
S ta
te s
Eu ro
p e
an U
n io
n
Fi n
la n
d
N e
th e
rl an
d s
Li th
u an
ia
Es to
n ia
Fr an
ce
Sw ed
en
P o
rt u
ga l
G e
rm an
y
B u
lg ar
ia
Ir el
an d
A u
st ri
a
La tv
ia
H u
n ga
ry
Sl o
ve n
ia
It al
y
Sl o
va ki
a
Lu xe
m b
o u
rg
P o
la n
d
C ro
at ia
Sp ai
n
G re
ec e
R o
m an
ia
C yp
ru s
143
Survey (NES). Definition: Average perception scores (five-year average) of experts on finance for starting and growing
firms. (0=completely false; 10 = completely true). EU value is the unweighted average of MSs performance.
Figure A7-5. VC deals per bn PPP GDP (2023)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the Global Innovation Index (GII). Definition: Number of venture capital deals received (per
billion PPP$ GDP, three-year average). EU value is the unweighted average of MSs performance.
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1
1,2 U
n it
ed S
ta te
s
Eu ro
p e
an U
n io
n
Es to
n ia
Fi n
la n
d
Sw ed
en
D en
m ar
k
C yp
ru s
Fr an
ce
N e
th e
rl an
d s
Li th
u an
ia
Lu xe
m b
o u
rg
G e
rm an
y
La tv
ia
A u
st ri
a
Ir el
an d
B el
gi u
m
Sp ai
n
P o
rt u
ga l
B u
lg ar
ia
M al
ta
C ze
ch R
ep u
b lic
It al
y
Sl o
ve n
ia
Sl o
va ki
a
G re
ec e
P o
la n
d
C ro
at ia
H u
n ga
ry
R o
m an
ia
144
Figure A7-6. University-industry R&D collaboration (2023)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the Global Innovation Index (GII), World Economic Forum, Executive Opinion Survey 2023.
Definition: Average answer to the survey question: In your country, to what extent do businesses and universities
collaborate on research and development (R&D)? [1 = not at all; 7 = to a great extent]. EU value is the unweighted
average of MSs performance.
Figure A7-7. Innovative SMEs collaborating with others (2025)
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based on data from
the sub-component of the European Innovation Scoreboard (EIS). Definition: Share of Small and medium-sized
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
5
5,5
6
U n
it ed
S ta
te s
Eu ro
p e
an U
n io
n
N e
th e
rl an
d s
Fi n
la n
d Sw
ed en
D en
m ar
k G
e rm
an y
B el
gi u
m Lu
xe m
b o
u rg
C ze
ch R
ep u
b lic
Ir el
an d
A u
st ri
a Li
th u
an ia
It al
y Fr
an ce
Es to
n ia
P o
rt u
ga l
H u
n ga
ry Sl
o ve
n ia
B u
lg ar
ia M
al ta
Sp ai
n C
yp ru
s La
tv ia
P o
la n
d R
o m
an ia
Sl o
va ki
a G
re ec
e C
ro at
ia
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
United States European Union
145
enterprises (SMEs) with innovation cooperation activities including all enterprises that had any cooperation agreements
on innovation activities with other enterprises or institutions in the three years of the survey period. EIS scores are
relative to the performance of the EU in 2018, which is assigned a score of 100 for that year.
Figure A7-8: EU and US trends in regulatory quality, with linear forecasts based on
2014-2023 data
Note: Historical values are from the Global Innovation Index. Projections are obtained by extrapolating the linear trend
over 2014-2023. They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or structural breaks. Definition:
Regulatory quality index captures perceptions of the ability of the government to formulate and implement sound policies
and regulations that permit and promote private sector development. EU value is the unweighted average of MSs
performance. Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation Policy & Access to Finance Unit’s own elaboration based
on GII data.
0,8
0,9
1
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,6
1,7
2 0
1 4
2 0
1 5
2 0
1 6
2 0
1 7
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023) EU (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023)
146
Figure A7-9. EU and US trends in Direct and indirect government support of business
R&D, with linear forecasts based on 2018-2025 data
Note: Historical values are from the European Innovation Scoreboard. Projections are obtained by extrapolating the
linear trend over 2018-2025. They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or structural breaks.
Definition: Direct funding for R&D through instruments such as grants and public procurement, and Indirect support
through the tax system. EIS scores are relative to the performance of the EU in 2018, which is assigned a score of 100
for that year. Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration based
on EIS data.
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025) EU (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025)
147
Figure A7-10. EU and US trends in Domestic credit to private sector (% of GDP),
with linear forecasts based on 2015-2024 data
Figure 2. Historical values are from the World Bank, World Development Indicators. Projections are obtained by
extrapolating the linear trend over 2015-2024. They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or
structural breaks. Definition: Domestic credit to private sector refers to financial resources provided to the private sector
by financial corporations. Expressed in % of GDP. EU value is the unweighted average of MSs performance. Source:
DG Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration based on World Bank data.
0
50
100
150
200
250
2 0
1 5
2 0
1 6
2 0
1 7
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2015-2024) EU (linear trend forecast, 2015-2024)
148
Figure A7-11. EU and US trends in Innovative SMEs collaborating with others, with
linear forecasts based on 2018-2025 data
Note: Historical values are from the European Innovation Scoreboard. Projections are obtained by extrapolating the
linear trend over 2018-2025. They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or structural breaks.
Definition: Share of Small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) with innovation cooperation activities including all
enterprises that had any cooperation agreements on innovation activities with other enterprises or institutions in the three
years of the survey period. EIS scores are relative to the performance of the EU in 2018, which is assigned a score of
100 for that year. Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration
based on EIS data.
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025) EU (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025)
149
Figure A7-12: EU and US trends in Public-private co-publications, with linear
forecasts based on 2018-2025 data
Note: Historical values are from the European Innovation Scoreboard. Projections are obtained by extrapolating the
linear trend over 2018-2025. They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or structural breaks. EIS
scores are relative to the performance of the EU in 2018, which is assigned a score of 100 for that year. Source: DG
Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration based on EIS data.
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025) EU (linear trend forecast, 2018-2025)
150
Figure A7-13. EU and US trends in R&D expenditure in all sectors (% of GDP), with
linear forecasts based on 2014-2023 data
Note: Historical values are from Eurostat. Projections are obtained by extrapolating the linear trend over 2014-2023.
They are indicative and do not account for future policy changes or structural breaks. Source: DG Research and
Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration based on Eurostat data.
Table A7-5. Summary of the open public consultation evidence supporting the
presented measures
Measure Open public consultation support
1. Promote valuation of
IP
Of the participants that expressed an opinion:
• 73 % (84) agreed that there is a lack of trustworthy, widely accepted
standards for valuing IPR.
• 81% (96) agreed that there is a lack of experience with IPR valuation
among startup/scaleup in the EU.
• 84% (108) agreed that creating a trustworthy EU wide accepted
methodology for IPR valuation and providing templates and guidance on
how to apply it would be a good step forward.
• 62% (72) agreed that creating an EU wide IPR marketplace with
sufficient critical mass and liquidity would be a good step forward.
2. Establish a fast-track
procedure for R&D
Of the participants that expressed an opinion:
1
1,5
2
2,5
3
3,5
4
4,5
2 0
1 4
2 0
1 5
2 0
1 6
2 0
1 7
2 0
1 8
2 0
1 9
2 0
2 0
2 0
2 1
2 0
2 2
2 0
2 3
2 0
2 4
2 0
2 5
2 0
2 6
2 0
2 7
2 0
2 8
2 0
2 9
2 0
3 0
Actual Forecast
US EU
US (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023) EU (linear trend forecast, 2014-2023)
151
procurement outside of
PP directives, that
promotes proven
techniques to boost
innovation minded and
start-up friendly
purchasing, and that
removes joint-cross
border procurement
issues
• 93% (144) agreed that a fast-track procedure for public procurements
buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, with contracts awarded based
not only on lowest price, but also on other criteria, would be a good step
forward.
• 83% (124) agreed that a fast-track procedure for public procurements
buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, which make wider use of
functional or performance-based specifications, would be a good step
forward.
• 86% (127) agreed that a fast-track procedure for public procurements
buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, without legal hurdles that make
it difficult for public buyers from different EU countries to procure R&D
and/or innovative solutions collaboratively, would be a good step
forward.
• 65% (123) agreed that when private buyers in the EU procure solutions,
even if without public funding, they should adopt procurement practices
that promote innovation and support the participation of start-ups and
innovative companies.
3. Preference for EU-
made solutions in
private and public
procurements outside of
PP directives
Of the participants that expressed an opinion:
• 76% (112) agreed that clear legal provision should be provided for how
public buyers can reinforce EU technological sovereignty in procurement
that buy R&D and/or innovative solutions.
• 80% (113) agreed that private buyers that own/operate critical
infrastructures should adopt procurement practices that support the
development of strategic technologies within national or European
ecosystems and help reduce dependencies on external suppliers.
Note: Public consultation percentages of this table refer to the share of respondents who selected “strongly agree” or
“agree” out of all respondents who expressed an opinion (strongly agree, agree, neutral, disagree, or strongly disagree).
Respondents who selected “no opinion” are excluded from the calculation to ensure the percentages reflect only those
who expressed a view. Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the
wider population, given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size (202 responses). The
consultation nonetheless provides useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions, with contributions from
businesses (27%), business associations (23%), universities (16%), EU citizens (9%), NGOs (8%), public authorities
(4%), trade unions (2%), non-EU citizens (2%), and others (9%).
Table A7-6. Summary of the call for evidence, and stakeholder’s interviews support
to the presented measures
Measure Call for evidence and stakeholder’s interviews support
1. Promote
valuation of IP
During stakeholder interviews:
• Most of the industry, startups and business associations regarded the valuation
of intangible assets as a major barrier to raising capital for innovative firms and
start-ups. And noted that evaluating intangible assets remains legally complex and
costly due to the absence of harmonised rules and standards at EU level.
• Financial-sector representatives emphasised that IP valuation is inherently
contextual and complex, as it depends on multiple factors.
• Most stakeholders saw the establishment of an EU-wide methodology for IP
valuation as a desirable step towards enhancing comparability and mutual trust
among MS, while simultaneously reducing administrative and procedural
fragmentation.
152
• Few national and regional authorities noted that intellectual property is seldom
valued as an independent asset. Instead, it is typically assessed as part of a firm’s
broader strategic and commercial potential. As a result, IPR functions more as a
strategic enabler (signalling innovation capacity and competitiveness) than as an
asset that can be directly monetised or used as collateral.
2. Establish a
fast-track
procedure
for R&D
procurement
outside of PP
directives, that
promotes
proven
techniques to
boost
innovation
minded and
start-up
friendly
purchasing, and
that removes
joint-cross
border
procurement
issues
In the position papers submitted for the call for evidence:
• Some submission identified that current procurement processes are overly rigid,
slow, and fragmented across MS, reducing their alignment with innovative
solutions (F33070479). While also remaining focused on cost rather than
outcomes, lacking flexibility, and imposing long payment cycles, discouraging
smaller firms from participating (F33068030).
• Several respondents recommended embedding innovation-friendly principles into
procurement frameworks (F33070737, F33070479, F33071387), as well as
introducing standardised templates, and accelerating approval timelines.
(F33070699, F33071387, F33070479)
During stakeholder interview:
• National and regional authorities responded positively to the idea that public
buyers should define the problem to be solved rather than prescribing detailed
technical requirements.
• Associations dealing with public procurement in the EU highlighted that
fragmented e-procurement platforms and differing registration requirements
across regions and MS slow down cross-border participation, particularly for start-
ups.
• SME, and start-up associations highlighted that the “lowest price” principle can
prevent innovative firms from competing effectively, recommending moving away
from it towards evaluation models that integrate quality. And that excessive
prerequisites frequently exclude smaller and newer companies from participation.
• Higher education and research organisations reported that regulatory
frameworks should better balance public interest and private incentives, allowing
suppliers to retain ownership of intellectual property, while granting contracting
authorities appropriate usage or licensing rights.
3. Preference
for EU-made
solutions in
private and
public
procurements
outside of PP
directives
During stakeholder interview:
Innovation procurement experts called for favouring European-based companies within
a competitive framework and set rules covering subcontractors as well as prime
contractors.
Source: DG Research and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own summary of the inputs from
the Study supporting the Impact Assessment of the European Innovation Act. Interviews with stakeholders were
conducted by an external contractor responsible for the drafting of the Study supporting the Impact Assessment of the
European Innovation Act.
153
Figure A7-14. To what extent do you agree with the following statements? Key
barriers preventing start-ups and scale-ups from obtaining IPR-backed financing in
the EU are:
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Table A7-15. To what extent do you agree with the following statements? Key
barriers preventing start-ups and scale-ups from obtaining IPR-backed financing in
the EU are:
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
38
5
3
13
13
11
46
6
8
14
8
11
21
5
6
4
4
6
1
2
3
2
4
1
1
1
53
5
8
14
12
7
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=168)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=51)
Business association (N=37)
SMEs (N=36)
Lack of trustworthy, widely accepted standard practices for valuing IPRs.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
35
7
6
13
14
10
61
2
9
17
8
15
13
1
3
5
1
4
6
2
1
3
1
3
1
51
5
9
13
14
5
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=169)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=28)
Company/business (N=51)
Business association (N=37)
SMEs (N=36)
There is a lack of experience with IPR valuation among start-ups/scale-ups in the EU.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
154
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Figure A7-16. To what extent do you agree with the following statements? The
following measures are important for the wider implementation of IPR-backed
financing in the EU:
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
42
6
1
10
13
13
66
5
16
23
13
13
15
1
2
6
4
4
5
1
4
41
4
5
13
8
8
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=169)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=28)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=38)
SMEs (N=38)
Create a trustworthy EU wide accepted methodology, for IPR valuation and provide templates and guidance on how to apply it.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
155
Figure A7-17. To what extent do you agree with the following statements? The
following measures are important for the wider implementation of IPR-backed
financing in the EU:
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Figure A7-18. To what extent do you agree with the following statements?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
24
2
2
3
7
3
48
5
5
20
10
14
29
2
7
9
6
8
8
2
4
1
1
6
1
2
2
1
2
52
5
7
16
13
7
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=167)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=51)
Business association (N=37)
SMEs (N=35)
Create an IPR marketplace with sufficient critical mass and liquidity (EU wide, and possibly connected to others around the world).
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
50
6
3
14
13
12
59
3
9
17
20
10
15
5
5
1
3
13
1
6
6
4
5
2
3
32
4
3
10
8
7
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=174)
EU Citizen (N=16)
Academic/research institution (N=29)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=42)
SMEs (N=36)
IPR policies in European universities and RTOs are not sufficiently geared to fostering the commercialisation of academic research results.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
156
Figure A7-19. To what extent do you agree with the following statements about
improving the framework conditions for commercialisation of academic research
results?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
79
8
16
17
17
12
62
5
9
22
15
15
12
1
1
7
3
5
4
1
1
2
1
1 17
1
2
4
5
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=175)
EU Citizen (N=16)
Academic/research institution (N=29)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=40)
SMEs (N=36)
Member States should adopt, if not yet in place, strategies promoting commercialisation of publicly funded research results generated in universities and RTOs, including intellectual asset management, spin-off creation, and go-to-market
strategies.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
157
Figure A7-20. To what extent do you agree with the following statements about
overcoming IPR-related barriers that hamper the commercialisation of academic
research results?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Figure A7-21. To what extent do you agree with the following statements about
overcoming IPR-related barriers that hamper the commercialisation of academic
research results?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
67
9
14
14
11
11
64
4
12
19
18
12
11
1
7
3
6
1
10
27
3
2
9
7
6
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=171)
EU Citizen (N=16)
Academic/research institution (N=29)
Company/business (N=50)
Business association (N=39)
SMEs (N=35)
European universities and RTOs should have an IPR policy in place that clearly outlines how they handle not only the protection, but also licensing and transfer of
intellectual assets.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
64
8
12
13
13
10
62
2
13
21
15
16
15
1
2
8
3
5
1
10
27
4
2
8
7
5
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=170)
EU Citizen (N=15)
Academic/research institution (N=29)
Company/business (N=50)
Business association (N=39)
SMEs (N=36)
Incentives and reward mechanisms, both financial and non-financial, should be put in place to motivate researchers and universities/RTOs to pursue robust IPR
protection and to enable them to benefit from successful commercialisation of academic IPRs.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
158
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Figure A7-22. To what extent do you agree with the following expert
recommendations for addressing the barriers faced by innovative companies in such
public procurement?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
97
10
9
34
21
21
47
3
12
11
15
9
7
2
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
21
2
3
3
4
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=175)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=40)
SMEs (N=36)
In public procurements for buying R&D and/or innovative solutions, contracts should be awarded based not only on lowest price, but also on other criteria.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
159
Figure A7-23. To what extent do you agree with the following expert
recommendations for addressing the barriers faced by innovative companies in such
public procurement?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
66
8
5
23
17
18
58
3
11
19
14
12
22
3
6
5
3
3
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
27
3
4
4
6
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=175)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=40)
SMEs (N=36)
To ensure that public buyers give suppliers sufficient room to offer innovative solutions, such public procurements that buy R&D and/or innovation solutions
should make wider use of functional or performance-based specifications.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
160
Figure A7-24. To what extent do you agree with the following expert
recommendations for addressing the barriers faced by innovative companies in such
public procurement?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Table A7-25. To what extent do you agree with the following statements about the
private procurement market in the EU?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
67
7
10
21
16
15
60
6
10
20
15
13
18
2
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
25
2
5
5
5
5
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=172)
EU Citizen (N=15)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=40)
SMEs (N=36)
Legal hurdles that make it difficult for public buyers from different EU countries to procure R&D and/or innovative solutions collaboratively should be removed so
that such procurements can create sufficient critical mass of demand that enables innovative
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
62
5
7
16
15
14
61
6
12
24
10
15
15
3
2
4
4
3
7
1
1
1
2
1
5
3
2
1
22
2
4
3
8
1
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=172)
EU Citizen (N=17)
Academic/research institution (N=26)
Company/business (N=51)
Business association (N=41)
SMEs (N=35)
Private buyers in the EU that receive public funding to procure solutions (e.g. from public R&I or deployment funding programmes), should adopt
procurement practices that promote innovation and support the participation of start-ups and innovative compani
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
161
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
Figure A7-26. To what extent do you agree with the following expert
recommendations for addressing the barriers faced by innovative companies in such
public procurement?
Note: Results from the public consultation should not be interpreted as statistically representative of the wider population,
given the voluntary nature of participation and the relatively limited sample size. The consultation nonetheless provides
useful qualitative insight into stakeholders’ perceptions. The x-axis shows the percentage of respondents within each
stakeholder group, while the figures inside the bars indicate the absolute number of respondents.
ANNEX 8: MACROECONOMIC MODELING - JRC B.7
The RHOMOLO model
The impact assessment of the European Innovation Act includes the results of a scenario
analysis carried out with the spatial dynamic computable general equilibrium model called
RHOMOLO181 182. The model is used for the evaluation of the impact of policies such as
181 Lecca, P., Christensen, M., Conte, A., Mandras, G., and Salotti, S. (2020). Upward pressure on wages and the
interregional trade spillover effects under demand-side shocks. Papers in Regional Science 99(1), 165-182.
https://doi.org/10.1111/pirs.12472 182 Barbero, J., Conte, A., Crucitti, F., Lazarou, N.J., Sakkas, S., and Salotti, S. (2024). The impact of the Recovery Fund
on EU regions. A spatial general equilibrium analysis. Regional Studies 58(2), 336-349.
52
8
2
20
9
16
60
4
10
19
19
13
29
2
9
6
4
3
5
2
1
1
1
1
1
24
1
4
5
6
3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
All participants (N=171)
EU Citizen (N=15)
Academic/research institution (N=27)
Company/business (N=52)
Business association (N=39)
SMEs (N=36)
Clear legal provisions should be provided for how public buyers can reinforce EU technological sovereignty in procurements that buy R&D and/or innovative
solutions.
Strongly agree Agree Neutral Disagree Strongly disagree No opinion
162
Cohesion Policy183 184, the Horizon innovation policy185 186, the European Defence Fund187 188, the European Competitiveness Fund189, as well as the portfolio of the European
Investment Bank190.
The version of the model used for this assessment covers 235 NUTS 2 regions of the EU.
Each region is composed of ten economic sectors operating under monopolistic
competition. Regional goods are produced by combining labour and capital with
intermediate inputs. Final goods are consumed by households, the government and
investors. The representative household in each region supplies labour, consumes goods
and services and saves part of its income. The government collects taxes, purchases public
consumption goods, invests in the economy and transfers resources to the various agents
in the economy. Goods and services can either be sold within the domestic economy or
exported to other regions. Trade between regions is associated with a set of bilateral
regional transport costs based on the Persyn et al. (2022) model191.
The RHOMOLO model incorporates imperfect competition in the labour market and
allows for unemployment. Wage formation is assumed to follow a wage curve
specification as in Blanchflower and Oswald (1995)192, which implies that lower
unemployment increases workers' bargaining power and thus real wages. There are two
types of capital in the model: sector-specific private capital and public capital. Private
capital is accumulated by private investors. The investment-capital ratio is a function of
the rate of return on capital and the user cost of capital, allowing the capital stock to reach
its desired level smoothly over time.
Expectations are assumed to be myopic and the model is solved sequentially, with stocks
being updated at the start of each period. For this particular exercise, capital mobility
within the EU was assumed, but no labour mobility.
It is worth highlighting that the RHOMOLO model allows for scenario analysis, so all
results are obtained by perturbing an initial equilibrium and do not reflect the actual
economic outcomes that are supposed to occur during the period analysed (in other words,
183 European Commission (2025a). Ex post evaluation of the European Regional Development Fund (ERDF) and the
Cohesion Fund for the programming period 2014-2020. SWD(2025) 328 final. Brussels, 10.10.2025. 184 Casas, P., Christou, T., García-Rodríguez, A., Heidelk, T., Lazarou, N.J., Monfort, P., and Salotti, S. (2024). The
updated RHOMOLO impact assessment of the 2014-2020 European cohesion policy (including REACT-EU). MPRA
working paper no. 122873. 185 European Commission (2025b). Interim evaluation of the Horizon Europe Framework Programme for research and
innovation (2021-2024). SWD(2025) 110 final. Brussles, 30.4.2025. 186 Casas, P., Christou, T., Ferreira, V., García-Rodríguez, A., Lazarou, N.J., Pedauga, L., Rueda-Cantuche, J.M.,
Bernard, H., Volpe, R., Neicu, D., and Salotti, S. (2025a). The RHOMOLO and FIDELIO interim evaluation of the
impact of Horizon Europe. MPRA working paper no. 124687. 187 European Commission (2025c). Interim evaluation of the European Defence Fund. SWD(2025) 151 final, Brussels,
17.6.2025. 188 Casas, P., Christou, T., García-Rodríguez, A., Lazarou, N.J., and Salotti, S. (2025b). The RHOMOLO macroeconomic
impact assessment of the European Defence Fund 2021-2027. MPRA working paper no. 125039. 189 European Commission (2025d). Impact assessment report on the European Competitiveness Fund. SWD(2025) 555
final. Brussels, 16.7.2025. 190 EIB (2025). Investment Report 2024/25: Innovation, integration and simplification in Europe. doi: 10.2867/8065730. 191 Persyn, D., Díaz-Lanchas, J., and Barbero, J. (2022). Estimating distance and road transport costs between and within
European Union regions. Transport Policy 124, 33-42. 192 Blanchflower, D.G., and Oswald, A.J. (1995). An introduction to the wage curve. Journal of Economic Perspectives
9(3), 153-167. DOI: 10.1257/jep.9.3.153
163
this is not a forecast model). The results presented here assume that the costs and benefits
estimated with the micro-level measure-by-measure analysis will materialise and activate
the economic channels used in the model to simulate their impact. Also, the results are
affected by the parameterisation of the shocks used to simulate the impact of the policy
(including the elasticity used to govern the changes in TFP brought about by private
investment). We limit the uncertainty of our results by using values that are consistent with
the existing literature on the subject, and by analysing three different scenarios.
Macroeconomic Impact Assessment of the European Innovation Act
This ex-ante impact assessment evaluates the potential macroeconomic effects of the
European Innovation Act (EIA) using RHOMOLO, the European Commission's spatial
dynamic computable general equilibrium model covering 235 NUTS-2 regions across the
EU. Unlike traditional EU investment programmes, the EIA is a regulatory reform package
that addresses innovation bottlenecks through framework condition improvements rather
than direct financial injections.
Micro-level cost–benefit analyses of EIA measures are translated into four core
macroeconomic shocks, simulated over a ten-year horizon and phased in linearly under
both low (conservative) and high (optimistic) scenarios. These comprise: private
investment-driven productivity gains (EUR 27 billion in the low scenario and nearly EUR
102 billion in the high scenario); pure total factor productivity gains (ranging from almost
EUR 260 billion to EUR 271 billion across the two scenarios); modest increases in public
current expenditure (either EUR 32 or 33 million in the two scenarios); and net savings
(EUR 436 million in the low scenario, and more than EUR 11 billion in the high scenario).
National-level figures were regionalised within each country in proportion to GDP shares
(for the public current expenditure and net savings shocks) or R&D expenditure shares (for
the investment and productivity shocks).
Key simulation results (cumulated values vs no-policy baseline):
• Low scenario: almost EUR 256 billion additional EU GDP over ten years; peak
employment impact of 238 thousand full-time equivalents in year 10, when GDP
would be 0.24% above the level of the no-policy scenario (corresponding to EU
GDP in 2024, which is the latest figure available);
• High scenario: almost EUR 452 billion additional EU GDP over ten years; peak
employment of about 507 thousand jobs in year 10, when GDP would be 0.42%
above the level of the no-policy scenario.
Investment responses triggered by measures establishing IP valuation methodology and
facilitating licensing drive most of the GDP gains through capital deepening, reinforced
by productivity improvements coming from those same measures and from procedures for
pre-commercial procurement for public buyers, including cross-border efficiency gains.
Supply-side channels dominate, generating persistent growth dividends as capital stocks
accumulate and productivity diffuses through regional production networks and Single
Market trade linkages.
164
Employment creation accelerates after year 5, peaking when all regulatory benefits
materialise fully. The analysis demonstrates substantial macroeconomic returns from
regulatory innovation frameworks, with effects scaling proportionally to realised
behavioural responses. Administrative costs remain modest relative to efficiency gains and
investment crowding-in effects, confirming the EIA's high benefit-cost ratio.
Not that these results represent counterfactual policy additionality, not forecasts.
Credibility depends on effective implementation and materialisation of micro-level
responses.
A full description of the analysis is provided in: García-Rodríguez, A., Christou, T.,
Giffoni, F., Lazarou, N.J., Mitra, A., Peralta, C., Pedralli, M., and Salotti, S.., The
RHOMOLO ex ante macroeconomic impact assessment of the European Innovation Act -
JRC Working Papers on Territorial Modelling and Analysis No 05/2026, European
Commission, Seville, 2026, JRC147056.
165
ANNEX 9: ANALYSIS OF RESPONSES TO THE EIA CALL FOR
EVIDENCE – JRC T.5
The Call For Evidence for the EIA received a total of 336 responses from stakeholders.
And it was fielded from the 08 July 2025 to the 03 October 2025.
Regulatory Frameworks in the EU Single Market
Overview
The European Union's (EU) regulatory framework plays a crucial role in fostering
innovation within the Single Market. However, stakeholders have identified several
hurdles and proposed actions to improve the regulatory environment. This section provides
an in-depth analysis of the feedback related to regulatory frameworks, highlighting the key
concerns and proposed solutions. The majority of stakeholders (261 out of 336
respondents) addressed the issue of regulatory frameworks, emphasizing the need for a
more innovation-friendly environment. Business associations, academic and research
institutions, and companies were among the most active contributors to this discussion.
The analysis reveals that stakeholders from different countries and sectors share similar
concerns regarding the regulatory burden, fragmentation, and lack of coordination.
Commercialisation of R&I
A total of 121 responses addressed the area of commercial exploitation of publicly funded
research results, highlighting the importance of this issue among stakeholders. While 224
mentioned the area of access to finance. The analysis reveals that stakeholders from various
backgrounds, including academic/research institutions, companies/businesses, NGOs, and
public authorities, share common concerns and propose similar solutions to address the
challenges in this area.
Detailed Hurdles Analysis
The most prominent hurdles identified by stakeholders include the fragmentation and
complexity of intellectual property (IP) policies, the lack of standardization and
harmonization of IP frameworks, and the insufficient commercialization of publicly
funded research results. These hurdles are often intertwined, creating a complex landscape
that hinders the translation of research into marketable innovations.
Table A9-1. Detailed hurdles analysis of EIA Call For Evidence responses related to
R&I commercialisation
Hurdle type Details
Access to finance In terms of hurdles, stakeholders consistently highlighted the limited access to
finance as a major obstacle for innovative companies. This is evident in the quotes
from various stakeholders, such as "access to finance is limited for EU innovative
companies" (F33075553_006) and "Limited access to national and EU funds
remains a challenge" (F33074443_001). Additionally, the lack of long-term
166
financing options and the difficulty in using intellectual property rights as collateral
were also frequently mentioned as hurdles.
Fragmentation and complexity
of IP rules and policies
Stakeholders emphasized the need for clearer and more harmonized IP policies,
citing the current fragmentation and complexity as a significant barrier to
commercialization (F33075620_007, F33075554_008, F33075480_010). The lack
of standardization and harmonization of IP frameworks across the EU is seen as a
major obstacle, making it difficult for researchers and companies to navigate the
system and protect their intellectual property (F33074483_004, F33074348_014,
F33073355_001).
Ineffective technology
transfer
Furthermore, stakeholders highlighted the insufficient commercialization of
publicly funded research results, often due to the lack of effective technology
transfer mechanisms and the limited involvement of industry partners in the research
process (F33074313_001, F33073441_004, F33073386_001). The underfunding of
technology transfer offices (TTOs) and the lack of professionalization in knowledge
transfer are also seen as significant hurdles (F33074292_003, F33073041_001).
State aids rules Additionally, stakeholders noted that the current regulatory framework, including
state aid rules and standardization policies, can create additional complexity and
barriers to commercialization (F33074352_006, F33074296_006,
F33073340_003). The need for more agile and flexible regulatory frameworks that
can accommodate rapid commercialization and innovation is emphasized
(F33074360_007, F33074412_023).
Source: JRC T5
Detailed Actions Analysis
Table A9-2. Detailed actions analysis of EIA Call For Evidence responses related to
R&I commercialisation
Action type Details
Harmonization of IP
frameworks
A common theme is the need for standardization and harmonization of IP
frameworks, including the development of common principles for IP management
and commercialization (F33074296_007, F33074322_007, F33074443_022).
Creation of a clear path to
monetise research
The creation of a European Joint Undertaking to valorise research and the
establishment of a clear path to monetize public R&I IP through regional industrial
actors are also proposed (F33074286_009, F33074360_008, F3575639_006).
Stakeholders emphasize the importance of simplifying intellectual property
exploitation, supporting researchers and SMEs in IPR navigation, and promoting
the reuse of data by industry (F3593698_002, F3593698_003, F33068288_016).
Improvement of technology
transfer mechanisms
Stakeholders suggest the need for more effective technology transfer mechanisms,
including the development of model deal structures for access to academic IP and
the creation of a coordination mechanism aligning EIA with related EU initiatives
(F33073048_003, F33074311_006). The importance of incentivizing knowledge
valorization in universities and promoting the creation of bodies specifically
designed to bridge the gap between frontier research institutions and the economic
system is also highlighted (F33074463_017, F33074381_005).
IP valuation Stakeholders propose the need for more agile and flexible regulatory frameworks,
including the revision of current state aid rules and the removal of barriers for
standardization and certification (F33074352_008, F33074412_024,
F33073340_003). The development of EU guidelines for IP valuation and the
167
reform of the European patent system to shorten time-to-grant are also suggested
(F33074296_007, F33074296_008).
Source: JRC T5
In conclusion, the commercial exploitation of publicly funded research results is a critical
aspect of the European Innovation Act, requiring a coordinated effort to address the
challenges and barriers that hinder the translation of research into marketable innovations.
By standardizing and harmonizing IP frameworks, simplifying intellectual property
exploitation, and promoting effective technology transfer mechanisms, the EU can create
a more favorable environment for innovation and entrepreneurship, ultimately driving
economic growth and competitiveness.
Innovation procurement
Overview
The area of innovation procurement emerged as a critical aspect of the European
Innovation Act, with 119 responses addressing this issue out of 336 total responses
received during the consultation. Stakeholders from various backgrounds, including
business associations, companies, academic and research institutions, public authorities,
and NGOs, provided feedback on the hurdles and actions related to innovation
procurement.
Detailed Hurdles Analysis
Analysis of the feedback reveals that innovation procurement is underutilized in the EU,
with many stakeholders citing the need for more innovation-friendly procurement
practices. The most significant hurdles identified include the complexity of EU
procurement rules, the lack of awareness of innovation procurement opportunities, and the
dominance of established companies in the procurement market.
Table A9-3. Detailed hurdles analysis of EIA Call For Evidence responses related to
innovation procurement
Hurdle type Details
Procurement practices
undervalue innovation
As noted by a business association from Belgium, current "procurement practices
undervalue innovation” (F33073427_004), and it is essential to address this issue to
support the development of innovative solutions.
Procedures that are not funder
friendly
A business association from Belgium noted that "public procurement processes
often favour established companies and recycling over innovative circular
solutions" (F33073250_006). Similarly, an academic institution from Germany
highlighted that "requirements and processes aren't founder-friendly"
(F33073355_006), making it difficult for startups and scale-ups to participate in
innovation procurement.
SMEs at a disadvantage Stakeholders also emphasized the need for a level playing field in procurement, with
many calling for the removal of barriers that prevent small and medium-sized
enterprises (SMEs) from participating in innovation procurement.
Slow public procurements that
do not leverage R&D
An Academic/Research Institution from Finland suggested that "procurement rules
must allow for accelerated procedures" (F33074313_013), while a business
168
association from Belgium recommended that "public procurement should be
leveraged to boost RD&I" (F33074400_006).
Source: JRC T5
Detailed Actions Analysis
In terms of actions, stakeholders proposed a range of measures to enhance innovation
procurement, including the introduction of innovation-friendly procurement frameworks,
the provision of training and support for public buyers, and the establishment of a European
innovation procurement platform.
Table A9-4. Detailed actions analysis of EIA Call For Evidence responses related to
R&I commercialisation
Action type Details
Innovation-friendly
procurement environment
Stakeholders highlight the need for a more innovation-friendly procurement
environment. A public authority from Finland highlighted that " make public
procurement more innovation-friendly" (F33074389_007). These quotes
demonstrate the broad support for innovation procurement among stakeholders. A
business association from Ireland recommended that "public procurement should be
used to stimulate first customer opportunities for SMEs" (F33075644_012), while
an academic institution from Austria suggested that "pre-commercial procurement
and innovation-oriented award criteria" should be used to support innovation
procurement (F33067801_023).
Simplifying access to
procurement
Stakeholders highlighted the importance of simplifying access to public
procurement and reducing administrative burdens. A company from the United
Kingdom proposed that "startup participation in public procurement should be
simplified with one-page digital submissions" (F33070699_010), while a business
association from Denmark recommended that "public procurement rules should be
revised to reduce administrative burdens" (F33073609_014).
Greater coordination and
cooperation between public
and private buyers
The analysis also reveals that there is a need for greater coordination and
cooperation between public and private buyers, as well as between different
Member States. An NGO from Spain suggested to " facilitate cross-border
procurement and collaboration by removing legal and administrative differences
between Member States" (F33074412_020), while a Belgian NGO recommended to
"innovation procurement should be supported through European funding programs"
(F33074338_014).
Source: JRC T5
ANNEX 10: TARGETED CONSULTATION SURVEY EVIDENCE FOR
MEASURES RELATIVE COSTS AND BENEFITS
The survey questions of the targeted consultation were focused on the cost-effectiveness
of the planned measure and their possible versions.
The surveys captured the views of national and regional stakeholders directly affected by
the policy intervention, including:
169
• National and regional public authorities,
• Startup associations and entrepreneurship agencies,
• Financial institutions and investors,
• Innovation agencies, universities, RTOs.
Given the limited consultation timeframe, the surveys were not designed to achieve
statistical representativeness across all Member States. However, efforts were made to
ensure broad geographic and sectoral coverage.
The survey was conducted through the official EU Survey platform. To ensure
accessibility, in addition to the original English version, translations were provided in the
most widely spoken EU languages: German, French, Italian, and Spanish.
A Likert scale is used for the questions in order to capture responses consistently. The
survey was published for a month, from October 20th until November 20th.
To achieve a broad reach across all identified stakeholder groups, a multi-channel
dissemination strategy was applied.
1. For public authorities, key channels included the European Innovation Council
Forum, which brings together high-level representatives from Member States and
Associated Countries on innovation policy; the Network of Regional Innovation
Valleys, connecting regions to strengthen research and innovation ecosystems; and
the European Regions Research and Innovation Network (ERRIN), representing
around 120 regional organisations.
2. For Innovation agencies, universities, and research and
technology organisations (RTOs) dissemination channels included, among
others, networks like ESFRI, EARTO, ASTP and the European Business and
Innovation Centre Network (EBN).
3. Business associations were engaged through umbrella organisations at the EU
level.
The formulation of the measures and their related alternatives reflects the most updated
version available at the time of the survey launch. Subsequently, some refinements of the
measures text were performed, which explains why in certain cases the names of measures
and alternatives presented here do not fully match the final versions. Nevertheless, the
evidence gathered through the surveys remains a valuable input for the overall assessment.
A total of 55 responses were received, with a relatively even distribution among
respondents from public authorities (21), business associations (18) and Innovation
agencies, universities, and RTOs (14), but a couple of entries from the financial sector only
(2).
170
Figure A10-1. Number of respondents by stakeholder type.
A fair geographical distribution of answers was achieved, with most answers received from
entities based in Sweden (n=6), Italy (n=5), and Belgium (n=5) (Figure below).
Figure A10-2 Country of origin of the consulted entities.193
The majority of the respondents represent horizontal organisations (n=41), and only 8 are
defined as sectoral (Figure below)
193 In addition to the chart, single responses from Bulgaria, Latvia, the Netherlands, Poland, Romania, Serbia, Slovenia,
Spain, and the United Kingdom were received.
21
18
2
14 Authorities
Business organisations
Financial organisations
Universities and research organisations
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Ukraine
Austria
Czechia
Denmark
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
Norway
Finland
Lithuania
Portugal
Greece
Belgium
Italy
Sweden
171
Figure A10-3. Type of organisation (horizontal/sectoral)194
Commercially scalable innovation
Measure 1: Promote valuation of IP.
Measure 1 shows high support for each option individually: “Voluntary disclosure of not-
yet-revenue-generating IP value using a Commission-certified EU methodology. Firms
would have their disclosed IP information considered in credit-risk and innovation
assessments under EU-funded finance and guarantee instruments” and “Provide non-
binding guidance to companies on how to disclose the estimated value of their not-yet-
revenue-generating IP assets in supplementary financial information or the notes to the
accounts, using a certified EU methodology for IPR valuation.” There is a slightly higher
positive result for combining both alternatives, with 50% of respondents considering this
approach highly effective (Figure below).
Figure A10-4. Valuing intangible assets, such as IPR, is complex and costly, especially for innovators. The
following alternatives concern the inclusion of Intellectual Property in companies’ annual accounts. In your view,
how effective would the following alternatives be in promoting IPR-backed financing for startups and innovative
companies?
194 The sectoral organisations are as follows: Digital Systems and Services for the Public Sector (1), University sector
(1), Life sciences (2), Economics (1), Health Innovation/ Tech (1), Transport, Media, and AI (1), Machinery (1).
41
2
4
8 Horizontal
Both
Not applicable
Sectoral (please specify sector)
172
Source: Targeted survey (Business associations and Financial sector)
Measure 2: Establish a fast-track procedure for R&D procurement outside of PP directives
that promotes proven techniques to boost innovation minded and startup friendly
purchasing, and that removes joint cross-border procurement issues.
The same stakeholders were consulted for Measure 2, i.e., public authorities, business
associations, and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs. Here, 57% of respondents
totally agree or tend to agree with the statement: “Establishing in the EIA Act a fast-track
procedure for R&D procurements that fall outside of Public Procurement Directives, in
particular pre-commercial procurements, would be positive to remove legal uncertainty for
public buyers to carry out procurements.” However, there is a notable difference among
stakeholder groups: business associations show significant disagreement with the
statement, with 39% opposing it and no respondents selecting “Totally agree,” while public
authorities and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs express stronger agreement
overall (Figure below).
Figure A10-5. To what extent do you agree with the following statement?
8
9
10
7
7
6
3
2
1
2
2
3
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
Voluntary disclosure of not-yet-revenue-generating IP value using a Commission-certified EU methodology.
Firms would have their disclosed IP information considered in credit-risk and innovation assessments under EU-funded finance and guarantee instruments
Provide non-binding guidance to companies on how to disclose the estimated value of their not-yet-revenue-
generating IP assets in supplementary financial information or the notes to the accounts, using a certified
EU methodology for IPR valuation.
All two previous alternatives together
Highly effective Moderately effective Nearly not effective / ineffective Cannot say
173
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in private and public procurements outside
of PP directives.
Measure 3 was assessed separately for public and private procurement. Regarding public
procurement, public authorities and innovation agencies, universities, and RTOs were
consulted. The option receiving the highest rate of “highly effective” responses is “Require
all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to
give preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for
which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers,” supported by 37% of respondents.
This is followed by “Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures
in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions, and only when buying strategic
technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers,” with 29%. While
public authorities show equal preference for these two options, innovation agencies,
universities, and RTOs favor the second option more strongly (36% versus 17% for the
first). Both options are considered the most costly, with the second option receiving 26%
of “high cost” votes and the first 17%, alongside many responses indicating “moderate
costs.”For private procurements, business associations were consulted. The most popular
option is “Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to
give preference to EU-made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for
which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers,” with 22% of respondents rating
it as highly effective. In terms of costs, the option considered most expensive is “Require
all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical nFor private
procurements, business associations were consulted. The most popular option is “Require
only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give preference to
EU-made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers,” with 22% of respondents rating it as highly
effective. In terms of costs, the option considered most expensive is “Require all public
buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to give
preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which
11 19 12 8 3
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%100%
Establishing in the EIA Act a fast-track procedure for R&D procurements that fall outside of Public
Procurement Directives, in particular pre- commercial procurements, would be positive to
remove legal uncertainty for public buyers to carry out procurements
Totally agree Tend to agree Neither agree nor disagree
Tend to disagree Totally disagree
174
the EU is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers,” with 56% of respondents indicating high
cost.
Figure A10-6. A number of other major economies around the world require public buyers to give preference to
solutions that were made in their territory. Introducing such a preference for EU-made solutions also in the EU
could take different forms. In your view, how effective would the following alternatives be in promoting
innovation and technological sovereignty while lowering strategic dependencies in the EU?
Source: Targeted survey (Public authorities and Innovation agencies, universities, RTOs)
10
13
3
3
11
9
14
16
6
5
13
12
8
8
5
4
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give preference to EU-
made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on
non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to give preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that own/operate critical infrastructures to give preference to EU-made
solutions when buying strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU
suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion, guidance) all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying
strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Highly effective Moderately effective Nearly not effective / ineffective Cannot say
175
Figure A10-7. In your view, how large would be the costs (drawbacks) generated by the following alternatives?
Source: Targeted survey (Public authorities and Innovation agencies, universities, RTOs)
Figure A10-8. A number of other major economies around the world require public buyers to give preference to
solutions that were made in their territory. Introducing such a preference for EU-made solutions also in the EU
7
9
5
5
15
14
6
6
4
2
16
16
9
10
8
8
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give preference to EU-
made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on
non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures) to give preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that own/operate critical infrastructures to give preference to EU-made
solutions when buying strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU
suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion, guidance) all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying
strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
High cost Moderate cost Low cost Cannot say
176
could take different forms. In your view, how effective would the following alternatives be in promoting
innovation and technological sovereignty while lowering strategic dependencies in the EU?
Source: Targeted survey (Business associations)
4
2
1
7
4
6
4
1
6
5
7
6
6
6
7
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give
preference to EU-made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures)
to give preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU
suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that
own/operate critical infrastructures to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying
strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) all public buyers in the EU to give
preference to EU-made solutions when buying strategic technologies for which Europe is overly
dependent on non-EU suppliers
Highly effective Moderately effective Nearly not effective / ineffective Cannot say
177
Figure A10-9. In your view, how large would be the costs (drawbacks) generated by the following alternatives?
Source: Targeted survey (Business associations)
4
10
7
2
4
3
1
8
9
6
6
6
6
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%100%
Require only public buyers that own/operate critical infrastructures in the EU to give
preference to EU-made solutions, and only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is
overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Require all public buyers in the EU (also those that do not own/operate critical infrastructures)
to give preference to EU-made solutions, but only when buying strategic technologies for which the EU is overly dependent on non-EU
suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion) public buyers in the EU that
own/operate critical infrastructures to give preference to EU-made solutions when buying
strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
Do not require but only encourage (e.g. via promotion, guidance) all public buyers in the EU to give preference to EU-made solutions when
buying strategic technologies for which Europe is overly dependent on non-EU suppliers
High cost Moderate cost Low cost Cannot say
178
ANNEX 11: POLICY MAPPING (OVERVIEW OF THE STATUS QUO)
This section presents the baseline scenario, referred to as the ‘status quo,’ which describes
the current situation in the absence of the EIA. It provides an evidence-based overview of
existing conditions, with a focus on the absence or insufficiency of current policy,
regulatory, and financing interventions at both EU and Member State levels addressing the
problems and drivers identified in the previous chapter. The analysis is based on an
extensive policy mapping carried out in each Member State, and also includes selected
peer countries, the US, the UK, and Switzerland, to provide a point of comparison and to
identify practices that address the gaps observed within the EU and that could potentially
be addressed through the EIA.
It is important to note that, to maintain a focus on areas relevant to the EIA, data collection
was deliberately aligned with the problem drivers within each thematic area, rather than
presenting a comprehensive overview of all policies and regulatory actions in each area,
which would have considerably expanded the scope of the research. In countries with
decentralised governance structures, where regions hold legislative powers in specific
policy areas, the analysis also considered the regional level. This was the case, for example,
in Belgium, Germany, and Italy. For ease of exposition, the full list of mapped measures
has been included in the Annex 14 “Policy mapping (Detailed list of mapped policies)”.
Policy mapping - Commercially scalable innovation
At EU level, commercially scalable innovation is supported by a broad but
fragmented framework that combines funding, financial regulation and intellectual-
property policy rather than a single, integrated regime. On the finance side,
InvestEU195, the RRF196, cohesion policy funds197 and Horizon Europe (notably the EIC
Accelerator and Innovation Fund)198 provide risk-sharing, equity and grant instruments
that crowd in private capital for intangible-asset-rich firms, while the Capital Markets
Union agenda and rules such as Solvency II199 and CRR/CRD200 gradually clarify how
institutional investors and banks can treat higher-risk innovation investments. In parallel,
the EU IP Action Plan201 and reforms like the Unitary Patent/UPC202, the IP SME
195 European Union. InvestEU. https://investeu.europa.eu/index_en 196 European Commission. Recovery and Resilience Facility. https://economy-finance.ec.europa.eu/eueconomyexplained/recovery-
and-resilience-facility_en
197 European Commission. Cohesion Fund. https://ec.europa.eu/regional_policy/funding/cohesion-fund_en 198 European Commission. Horizon Europe. https://research-and-innovation.ec.europa.eu/funding/funding-opportunities/funding-
programmes-and-open-calls/horizon-europe_en 199 European Insurance and Occupational Pensions Authority. Solvecy II. https://www.eiopa.europa.eu/browse/regulation-and-
policy/solvency-ii_en
200 European Commission. Capital Requirements - CRD IV/CRR. https://ec.europa.eu/commission/presscorner/detail/en/memo_13_690
201 European Commission. Intellectual property action plan implementation. https://single-market-
economy.ec.europa.eu/industry/strategy/intellectual-property/intellectual-property-action-plan-implementation_en 202 European Commission. The unitary patent system. https://single-market-economy.ec.europa.eu/industry/strategy/intellectual-
property/patent-protection-eu/unitary-patent-system_en
179
Helpdesks203 and guidance on IP licensing204 aim to make intellectual assets easier to
protect and exploit across the Single Market, including in public-private partnerships and
EU-funded projects. Horizon Europe model grant agreements already contain standardised
provisions on ownership, access rights and exploitation of results, which implicitly shape
national approaches to IP management and technology transfer. However, there is still no
common EU methodology for valuing early-stage IP, no explicit EU-wide framework for
using IP as collateral in bank and investor regulation, and no binding innovation-
investment roadmap at Union level.
The mapping for commercially scalable innovation shows that MS have already put
in place a dense but uneven set of measures along the whole “idea-to-market” chain.
Overall, the table below suggests that the EU and its MS have made most progress on
helping firms use and monetise intangible assets, while the more structural conditions
for scaling innovation, such as long-term investment planning, pooled funding and
simple, reliable IP valuation, remain underdeveloped and highly fragmented across
MS.
In particular, the following results stand out:
• A small but growing group of countries that have begun to treat IP valuation
as a policy area in its own right, alongside a much larger group with no dedicated
framework. These range from analytical groundwork, such as Austria’s 2024 “IP
Financing in Austria” study, which diagnoses the under-use of IP as collateral and
calls for balance-sheet recognition of self-developed intangibles205, to practical
guidance like Belgium’s federal “Practical Guide to valorise IP to raise funds,”
which walks SMEs through different financing routes and explains how valuation
fits into each206.
• With respect to the rules for institutional investors and banks to foster
financing based on IPR, the mapping shows that while most MS now operate
guarantee schemes or risk-sharing instruments that nominally allow IP-
backed lending, only a smaller group has tackled the more structural
precondition for such financing: clear, predictable frameworks for who owns IP
arising from publicly funded research and how it can be licensed or transferred to
firms. The dedicated review of national IP-ownership and licensing frameworks
identifies ten countries with explicit, post-2000 policies aimed at making IP from
universities and public research organisations easier to commercialise.
• A majority of MS now have at least one national-level strategy, law or
structured framework with this purpose, but that these frameworks take very
different forms and degrees of maturity. Some countries have adopted broad,
system-shaping R&I strategies that embed commercialisation targets and reforms:
203 European Commission. European IP Helpdesk. https://intellectual-property-helpdesk.ec.europa.eu/regional-helpdesks/european-
ip-helpdesk_en
204 European Commission. Licensing and selling intellectual property. https://europa.eu/youreurope/business/running- business/intellectual-property/licensing-selling/index_en.htm
205 patentamt.at
https://www.patentamt.at/fileadmin/root_oepa/Dateien/Allgemein/Analysepaper_IPFinanzierung_2024_EN.pdf 206 Practical Guide to Valorise Intellectual Property with the Goal to Raise Funds | FPS Economy
https://economie.fgov.be/en/themes/intellectual-property/practical-guides-studies/practical-guide-valorise
180
Austria’s RTI Strategy 2030, for example, explicitly aims to double academic spin-
offs and is backed up by dedicated “Spin-off Fellowships”, while Latvia’s Science,
Technology Development and Innovation Guidelines and Slovenia’s R&I Strategy
2030 set goals for more patents, spin-offs and stronger technology transfer
structures. Others have legislated specific spin-off and knowledge-transfer
frameworks, such as Greece’s Law 4864/2021 on academic spin-offs, France’s
PACTE reforms and SATT tech-transfer network, or Spain’s revised Science Law
(17/2022), which clarifies researchers’ rights and makes institutional knowledge-
transfer strategies mandatory. A third group of countries relies on flagship national
programmes rather than framework laws; Germany’s long-running EXIST scheme
and new “Startup Factories”, Finland’s Research-to-Business (R2B) programme,
Ireland’s KT Boost, Poland’s Łukasiewicz Network or Luxembourg’s JUMP
proof-of-concept funding are all designed to move public research outputs closer
to the market and to strengthen TTO capacity.
Table A11-3. Overview of measures to support commercially scalable innovation
Problem drivers Mapped interventions Country coverage
2.1 IPR valuation models in
the EU are not standardised,
while being complex and
expensive
Frameworks for IP valuation At least 6 MS have dedicated
frameworks for IP valuation:
Belgium, Denmark, Finland
France, Luxembourg, Sweden.
Framerworks for IP ownership
and licensing
At least 11 MS have
frameworks explicitly aiming
at strenghing collaboration
between industry and acadmia:
Austria, Bulgaria, Croatia,
Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Ireland, Italy, Spain,
Sweden.
The comparison between the 27 EU Member States and the three peer countries
shows that commercially scalable innovation is supported by broadly similar building
blocks, but the peers tend to combine them in a more coherent and mature policy
mix. The peer-country mapping suggests that the UK, the United States and Switzerland
are closer to the integrated model the EIA would promote.
Table A11-4. Comparison with peer countries on regulatory frameworks for
innovation
Dimension EU & MS Peer Countries
Intangible asset financing & IP
commercialisation
Fragmented IP commercialisation
practices, variable support for
intangible-asset financing.
UK: mature university IP
ecosystem with TTOs, spin-out
181
frameworks, standard
contracts207.
US: venture capital, IP
securitisation, private valuation
expertise, federal legislation
(such as the Bayh–Dole
framework for university IP and
successive technology and
industrial-policy acts) creates a
clear roadmap and governance
for strategic technologies, while
deep venture-capital markets,
active securitisation of IP and
well-developed private
valuation expertise mean that
early-stage intangible assets can
routinely underpin finance.208
Switzerland: stable IP regime,
sophisticated banking/advisory
sectors enabling investment in
intellectual assets.
Policy mapping - Innovation procurement
In the field of innovation procurement, the starting point is a common EU legal
framework. Directive 2014/24/EU (and its utilities counterpart 2014/25/EU) gives
contracting authorities a toolbox of procedures that can be used in an innovation-friendly
way, in particular the innovation partnership, which combines R&D and subsequent
purchase in a single procedure when no suitable solution exists on the market, alongside
competitive dialogue and competitive procedures with negotiation.209 The directives also
encourage division of contracts into lots to facilitate SME participation. However, they
do not define “innovation procurement”, set minimum investment targets, or require
public buyers to use these procedures and pre-commercial procurement (PCP)
remains largely outside their scope. As the recent expert group report on “Bringing down
legal barriers for innovation procurement” underlines, the current framework “already
allows flexibility” but “does not push ambitiously enough” for widespread adoption, so
innovation procurement is still significantly underutilised compared with other leading
economies. 210
All 27 MS have adopted policies aimed at stimulation public and private innovation
procurement. At the same time, only a few MS have adopted binding innovation-
207 WIPO (2023). Unlocking IP-backed financing series: Country perspectives: the United Kingdom´s Journey. https://www.wipo.int/edocs/pubdocs/en/wipo-pub-rn2023-42-en-country-perspectives-the-united-kingdom-s-journey.pdf 208 USC Department of Contracts and Grants (2021). Bayh-Dole Act Obligations for Universities.
https://dcg.usc.edu/2021/05/03/bayh-dole-act-obligations-for-universities/ 209 Directive 2014/24/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on public procurement and repealing
Directive 2004/18/EC Text with EEA relevance. https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/24/oj/eng
210 Bringing down legal barriers for innovation procurement. https://research-and-innovation.ec.europa.eu/strategy/support-policy- making/shaping-eu-research-and-innovation-policy/new-european-innovation-agenda/innovation-procurement/eu-policy-initiatives-
innovation-procurement/bringing-down-legal-barriers-innovation-procurement_en#more-information
182
procurement spending targets, dedicated fast-track procedures outside the directives,
and there are no mapped national measures on preferences for EU-made solutions or
joint cross-border innovation procurement. Countries such as Germany and Spain
demonstrate that coupling legislation with targeted programmes leads to stronger
performance. Germany’s VgV § 19 (Vergabeverordnung - Regulation on the Award of
Public Contracts)211 and UVgO § 20 (regulates what must be documented and how
contracting authorities must record the conduct of the procurement procedure for high-
value contracts)212 provide a clear legal pathway for innovation partnerships and market
exploration. At the same time, KOINNO Competence Centre offers consultation,
information, tools, certification and training to public buyers and suppliers with the goal
of permanently strengthening the innovation orientation of public procurement.213 In
Spain, the public procurement of innovation programme
(Compra Pública de Innovación)214, managed by CDTI, treats public procurement as a tool
for innovation policy, funding first prototypes or innovative solutions validated by public
bodies. This programme demonstrates how targeted funding and guidance can create a
pipeline of innovative solutions ready for wider procurement.
However, many MS rely solely on the directive. Countries such as Croatia, Romania,
Luxembourg and Malta lack dedicated programmes or guidance. Taken together with
OECD work, which similarly finds that PPI is recognised in many strategies but often
confined to pilots and niche sectors215, this suggests that the EU has a broadly
homogeneous legal baseline and a growing set of promotional policies, but still lacks the
stronger obligations, targets and governance mechanisms that would make innovation
procurement a mainstream, systemic driver of commercially scalable innovation.
Table A11-5. Overview of measures to support innovation procurement
Problem drivers Types of mapped interventions Country coverage
3.1 Lack of legal certainty on how
to procure R&D services
Frameworks for innovation
public procurement outside the
EU public procurement
directives
15 MS have Public Procurement
Policies, that explicitly endorse
innovation procurement:
Belgium, Cyprus, Czechia,
Estonia, Spain, Finland,
Germany, Greece, Italy, Latvia,
Netherlands, Poland, Romania,
Slovakia, Sweden.
At least 2 MS have explicit
special legal provisions for
innovation procurement: France,
Spain.
211 Verordnung über die Vergabe öffentlicher Aufträge (Vergabeverordnung - VgV). https://www.gesetze-im-
internet.de/vgv_2016/__19.html
212 Marktverordnung. https://www.vergabevorschriften.de/uvgo/20 213 Das Kompetenzzentrum innovative Beschaffung (KOINNO). https://www.koinno-bmwk.de/koinno/
214 La Compra Pública de Innovación (CPI). https://www.cdti.es/compra-publica-innovadora_ 215 OECD (2025). Implementing the OECD Recommendation on Public Procurement in OECD and Partner Countries. https://www.oecd.org/en/publications/implementing-the-oecd-recommendation-on-public-procurement-in-oecd-and-partner-
countries_02a46a58-en/full-report/implementation-of-the-oecd-recommendation-in-member-and-partner-countries_2305bb1b.html
183
At least 12 MS have centres,
agencies or platforms for
innovation procurement:
Austria, Croatia, Czechia,
Denmark, Estonia, Finland,
Germany, Lithuania, the
Netherlands, Poland, Spain,
Sweden.
3.2 Procurement practices favour
incumbents and limit the
participation of innovative
companies in procurement
procedures
Incentives for private
innovation procurement
At least 11 MS have or had
recently Voucher programs to
allow companies (primarily
SME) to buy R&D&I services:
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria,
Croatia, Cyprus, Czechia,
Estonia, Finland, Germany,
Latvia, Malta.
At least 6 MS have or had
recently Voucher programs for
companies to buy innovation in
the field of digitisation:
Belgium, Denmark, Ireland,
Italy, Slovenia, Spain.
No general incentives for private
innovation procurement were
found.
3.3 Fragmentation and barriers to
joint cross-border innovation
procurement
Frameworks for cross-border
public innovation procurement
At least 2 MS have explicit
frameworks for cross-border
public innovation procurement:
Austria, France.
A bilateral agreement exists
between Belgium and France.
A trilateral agreement exists
between Sweden, Finland and
Iceland.
Compared with the EU baseline, the peer countries do not systematically set
quantitative targets for innovation procurement, but they rely on a mix of legal
openness, procurement flexibilities and SME-oriented instruments that indirectly
stimulate public and private purchasing of innovative solutions.
Table A11-6. Comparison with peer countries on regulatory frameworks for
innovation
Dimension EU & MS Peer Countries
Innovation procurement
frameworks
UK: scores above the European
average on the overall innovation-
procurement framework, with
184
strong support from ICT and
sectoral policies and clear guidance
for public buyers216.
Switzerland: the 2021 Federal Act
on Public Procurement and its
ordinances create an innovation-
friendly regime (functional
specifications, value-for-money
criteria, market dialogue),217
Cross-boder procurement /
domestic preferences
Very limited provisions for
cross-border procurement, no
EU preferences
US: domestic-preference rules such
as the Buy American Act218 and the
newer Build America, Buy America
(BABA) Act219, which require price
preferences or domestic-content
requirements for many federally
funded projects.
Switzerland: operates a very open
procurement market: it is a party to
the WTO Government Procurement
Agreement220 and to a bilateral EU–
Swiss procurement agreement221,
which together grant reciprocal,
non-discriminatory access to a
broad range of public contracts and
facilitate the purchase of innovative
solutions from foreign suppliers.
UK: operates a formally open
procurement regime: as an
independent party to the WTO
GPA222 and under the UK–EU
Trade and Cooperation
Agreement223, contracting
authorities are expected to accept
tenders from overseas “treaty state”
suppliers on a largely equal footing
with domestic firms, subject to
limited exclusion grounds.
216 European Commission (2025). European Innovation Scoreboard 2025. Country profile United Kingdom. https://ec.europa.eu/assets/rtd/eis/2025/ec_rtd_eis-country-profile-uk.pdf
217 Federal Act on Public Procurement (PPA). https://www.fedlex.admin.ch/eli/cc/2020/126/en
218 The Buy American Act. https://www.gao.gov/products/105519 219 The Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act. https://www.epa.gov/baba/build-america-buy-america-baba-overview
220 World. Trade. Organisation. Agreement on Public Procurement. https://www.wto.org/english/tratop_e/gproc_e/gp_gpa_e.htm 221 Agreement between the European Community and the Swiss Confederation on certain aspects of government procurement - Final
Act - Joint Declarations - Information relating to the entry into force of the seven Agreements with the Swiss Confederation in the
sectors free movement of persons, air and land transport, public procurement, scientific and technological cooperation, mutual recognition in relation to conformity assessment, and trade in agricultural products. https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/eli/agree_internation/2002/309(6)/oj/eng 222 World. Trade. Organisation. Agreement on Public Procurement. https://www.wto.org/english/tratop_e/gproc_e/gp_gpa_e.htm 223 The EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement. https://commission.europa.eu/strategy-and-policy/relations-united-kingdom/eu-
uk-trade-and-cooperation-agreement_en
185
ANNEX 12: ANALYSIS OF RESPONSES TO THE STARTUP AND
SCALEUP STRATEGY CALL FOR EVIDENCE
The Call For Evidence for the Startup and Scaleup Strategy received a total of 586
responses from stakeholders. And it was fielded from the 17 February 2025 to the 17 March
2025.
• 144 respondents mentioned Commercialisation of R&I as a key issue
• 124 respondents mentioned innovation procurement as a key issue
Commercialisation of R&I
Hurdles Analysis
Table A12-3. Call for Evidence of the Startup and Scaleup Strategy – EU
commercialisation of R&I hurdles
Hurdle type Details
Access to finance Many stakeholders highlight financing gaps specifically around the translation of
research into market-ready innovation, often framed as proof-of-concept /
demonstration / “valley of death” challenges and the difficulty of mobilising patient
or later-stage capital for science-driven innovation and deep tech (e.g. F3528922,
F3527346, F3529779, F3527345, F3527110).
Fragmentation and complexity
of IP rules and policies
Several submissions point to complexity and unevenness in IP-related frameworks
and practices as a barrier to turning research outputs and intangible assets into
scalable businesses. Stakeholders link this to uncertainty and friction in protecting,
managing, and transferring IP in ways that support commercialisation and cross-
border scaling (e.g. F3527346, F3529779, F3529804, F3528917).
Ineffective technology
transfer
A recurring theme is that technology transfer processes and incentives are not
consistently effective at moving research results into commercially scalable
innovation. Stakeholders note gaps in the pathways from universities/RTOs to
startups/scaleups (e.g., spin-offs, licensing, support structures), which slows
commercial uptake (e.g. F3529779, F3527346, F3527110, F3528922).
State aide rules Some stakeholders highlight that state aid rules / GBER constraints as limiting the
design or duration of support instruments relevant to deep tech and research
commercialisation (including how universities/research actors can support startups,
and how certain funding tools can be deployed) (e.g. F3527345, F3528913,
F3529923).
Source: RTD A.5
Detailed Actions Analysis
186
Table A12-4. Call for Evidence of the Startup and Scaleup Strategy – EU
commercialisation of R&I proposed actions
Action type Details
Harmonization of IP
frameworks
A limited but explicit set of submissions propose improving commercialisation by
making Europe’s IP environment more unified / consistent (e.g., referencing EU-
wide approaches and patent system improvements) (e.g. F3529854, F3528917,
F3529779).
Creation of a clear path to
monetise research
-
Improvement of technology
transfer mechanisms
Stakeholders argue for stronger, more effective technology transfer (including better
pathways for spin-offs/licensing and more capable intermediary structures between
research organisations and startups/scaleups) (e.g. F3528922, F3527110,
F3529779).
IP valuation -
Source: RTD A.5
Innovation procurement
Table A12-5. Call for Evidence of the Startup and Scaleup Strategy – Innovation
procurement hurdles
Hurdle type Details
Procurement practices
undervalue innovation
Several stakeholders argue that public procurement still doesn’t systematically
reward innovative solutions (e.g., being too risk-averse and/or not sufficiently
geared to outcomes and innovation). They describe procurement as insufficiently
designed to act as a lead market or early customer for innovative firms (e.g.
F3529816, F3529829, F3524154, F3529923, F3529829)
Procedures that are not funder
friendly
Several submissions describe procurement and related public funding/tender
processes as administratively heavy and difficult to navigate for startups, including
burdensome application/participation requirements and process complexity that
diverts scarce time and capacity from product development and scaling (e.g.,
F3529818, F3529918, F3525044).
SMEs at a disadvantage Several stakeholders state that procurement design and requirements can
structurally favour established incumbents over SMEs/startups (e.g., through how
tenders are framed and what is implicitly required to qualify/compete) (e.g.
F3529829, F3529816, F3528874).
Slow public procurements that
do not leverage R&D
A limited number of submissions points to slow procurement timelines and argues
that procurement is not used effectively enough to pull through R&D and innovation
(including references to innovation procurement approaches like PPI/PCP). This is
present but less uniformly raised than general procedural burden (e.g., F3529918,
F3529818).
Source: RTD A.5
Detailed Actions Analysis
187
Table A12-6. Call for Evidence of the Startup and Scaleup Strategy – Innovation
procurement proposed actions
Action type Details
Innovation-friendly
procurement environment
Several submissions explicitly call for reshaping public procurement so it rewards
innovation more directly, Stakeholders frame this as a way to create stronger lead
markets and help innovative firms scale. (e.g. F3529829, F3529918, F3529816)
Simplifying access to
procurement
Many stakeholders propose reducing administrative burden and complexity in
procurement so that startups/SMEs can realistically participate (e.g., simplifying
tender participation and lowering procedural friction that currently discourages
smaller firms) (e.g. F3529918, F3529932, F3529829).
Greater coordination and
cooperation between public
and private buyers
Some stakeholders propose stronger buyer-side coordination (including clearer
frameworks for joint procurement across countries) and more public–private
collaboration to help innovation procurement generate demand at scale and connect
innovators with buyers (e.g. F3529816, F3529801, F3529929).
Source: RTD A.5
ANNEX 13: MONITORING AND EVALUATON
FRAMEWORK
The approached outlined in Table A13-1 indicates the high-level methods and approached
that could be deployed to monitor and evaluate the EIA in general.
Table A13-1: Proposed Monitoring and Evaluation Methos and Sources for the EIA
Instrument Type Purpose Key Indicators /
Evidence
Frequency Use in Ex Post
Evaluation
Macro-level
performance
indicators (EU-
US
comparison)
Monitoring
(quantitative,
high-level)
Track whether
the structural
problems
identified in the
baseline
improve over
time and
whether the
EU–US gap
narrows
Direct and indirect
support to firms R&D,
regulatory quality
index,
entrepreneurship
policies and culture
index, finance for
startups and scaleups
index, domestic credit
to private sector,
innovative SMEs
collaborating with
others, public
research-industry co-
publications
Annual or
biannual
(depending
on data
source)
Provides macro-
level trajectory
against which EIA
implementation can
be contextualised;
not suitable for
causal attribution but
essential for
assessing overall
direction of travel
Startup and
Scaleup
Scoreboard
Monitoring
(quantitative)
Measure the
performance of
EU startup and
scaleup
ecosystems
Number of startups;
number of scaleups;
cross-border scaleups;
fundraising; exits;
innovation-related
metrics
Annual Supplies time-series
data to observe post-
EIA changes at
ecosystem level
188
Annual Startup
and Scaleup
Survey
Monitoring
(qualitative)
Capture
founders’
perceptions of
regulatory and
business
conditions
Perceived regulatory
burden; access to
finance; conditions for
scaling; access to IP
valuation, RTIs, and
innovation
procurement
Annual Provides qualitative
evidence on changes
in framework
conditions aligned
with EIA objectives
Administrative
data (IP
valuation,
RTIs,
innovation
procurement)
Monitoring
(quantitative)
Monitor uptake
of EIA-related
support
mechanisms
Number of firms
accessing IP valuation
services; users of
RTIs; number and
volume of innovation
procurement
procedures
Annual Enables before/after
and measure-specific
trend analysis
Targeted ex
post evaluation
studies
Evaluation
(causal
analysis)
Estimate causal
impact of
individual EIA
measures (when
feasible)
Quasi-experimental
methods (DiD, RDD,
PSM, synthetic
control), exploiting
eligibility rules and
timing of
implementation
One-off or
periodic
(e.g. 3–5
years after
entry into
force)
Identifies the causal
contribution of
specific EIA
interventions to
observed micro-level
improvements
Note: Macro-level indicators are used solely to monitor overall trends and the evolution of the EU-US gap; they are not
suitable for attributing causality to the EIA, as these outcomes are influenced by multiple external factors. Scoreboard
indicators and perception-based indicators provide essential micro-level evidence to monitor changes in innovation-
related framework conditions. However, similarly to the macro-level indicators, on their own they cannot be used to
attribute causality to the EIA. Robust causal identification will only be feasible for measures with clear eligibility criteria
or staggered implementation. For horizontal or soft-coordination measures, evaluation will rely on contribution analysis
and qualitative evidence. As a result, the strength of causal inference will vary across measures. Source: DG Research
and Innovation, Innovation policy & Access to finance Unit’s own elaboration.
M&E plan for measures
This section presents the Monitoring and Evaluation (M&E) framework for the measures
included into the EIA. Each measure is assessed through a standardised set of parameters,
including specific monitoring indicators, the intended direction of change, a baseline
representing the current status quo against which the target is benchmarked. These
elements are evaluated against the time horizon reported in the specific objective
associated with each measure. Furthermore, the framework incorporates an Attribution
Risk assessment, categorised as low, medium, or high. It quantifies the degree of direct
causality between the measure and the target. A low-risk rating is assigned to indicators
where the impact is immediate and intrinsically linked to the measure's legal definition,
whereas a high risk rating is applied to indirect or secondary effects where broad market
dynamics make definitive attribution more complex.
M&E plan for measures fostering commercial exploitation of innovation
Measure 1 Promoting valuation of IP
Specific objective: 1. Substantially lower valuation costs, and increase licensing and
transfer of IPRs in the EU in the next 4 years
189
Monitoring
indicator
Direction of change Attribution risk Baseline Target (4-year
horizon)
1. Number of MS
integrating
EUIPO
valuation
standards in
national IP
practices
Increase Low No common
EU-wide
valuation
standard
currently
recognised in
national
practices.
High convergence:
At least 20 MS
(75%) formally
adopting the
standards.
2. Average IP
valuation costs
borne by firms
(survey-based)
Decrease Low The current
effort is
estimated to be
40 – 80h per firm
per year resulting
into EUR 1,600 –
3,200 of
administrative
costs per year per
firm
50% reduction as a
minimum target
3. Number of
transactions
using the EU
valuation
method
Increase Medium No transactions
are currently
conducted using
the (yet to be
developed)
EUIPO
methodology.
No fixed target set,
participation is
voluntary. However,
a rapid uptake in the
volume of
transactions on the
new secondary
marketplace is
expected.
4. Number of
companies
using IP as
collateral or in
financing
rounds (survey-
based)
Increase High There is no
proper data on
the number
of companies
using IP as
collateral or in
financing
rounds.
The ECB SAFE
(Q4 2025) shows
a that 14% of
firms reported
stricter collateral
requirements.224
On top of that,
According to
EUIPO and
EPO (2025),
12.7% of large
No fixed target set,
participation is
voluntary. However.
an increasing trend
in the number of
SMEs using IP as
collateral is
expected.
224 European Central Bank (2026). ECB Survey on the Access to Finance of Enterprises (SAFE) - Feb 2026. Q4 2025 Results - Published
Feb 2026) . https://www.ecb.europa.eu/stats/ecb_surveys/safe/html/index.en.html
190
companies hold
patents,
compared to just
1.1% of
SMEs.225 This
results into about
6,900 large
enterprises and
20, 000 SMEs
holding
patents.226
The study also
highlights that
fewer than 10%
of SMEs own
registered IPRs,
compared to
nearly 50% of
large firms. This
disparity reflects
untapped
potential for
smaller
businesses to
leverage IPRs as
tools for
innovation and
growth.
Measure 2: Establish a fast-track procedure for pre-commercial procurement (i.e. R&D
procurement outside of PP directives) that promotes proven techniques to boost innovation
minded and startup friendly purchasing, and that removes joint cross-border pre-
commercial procurement issues
Specific objective: 2 . Increase spending on procurement of R&D services in the
next 5 years
Monitoring
indicator
Direction of change Attribution
risk
Baseline Target (5-year
horizon)
5. Number of
public buyers
using the fast-
Increase Low Harmonised
fast-track
procedures do
At least all public
buyers in the EU27
225 EUIPO and EPO (2025). EUIPO and EPO study highlights the economic benefits of intellectual property rights for EU companies
https://euipo.europa.eu/tunnel- web/secure/webdav/guest/document_library/observatory/documents/reports/2025_IPRs_firm_performance_in_the_EU/IPRs_firm_pe
rformance_in_the_EU_FullR_en.pdf 226 The number of SMES and large enterprises is our elaboration and it is calculated by applying the % to the total number of SMEs (10 – 49 employees) in the EU, equals to 1,820,735 and the number of large enterprises (250+ employees), equal to 54,219. (source
Eurostat structural business statistics)
191
track R&D
procurement
procedure
not exist.
Fragmented
situation. The
number of public
buyers relevent
for this measure
(i.e. involved in
R&D
procurement)
has been
conservatively
estimated to be
2,000, while no
estimates are
available for
private buyers.
receiving EU-funds
using the procedure.
6. Number of
contracts
(share) of R&D
procurement
outside PP
Directives /
PPA using the
techniques
Increase Low No
requirements
currently exists
for private and
public recipients
of public funds
to use specific
innovation-
friendly buying
techniques.
Systemic alignment:
50-80% of all
eligible
public/private R&D
contracts (outside
directives) adopting
mandatory
techniques.
7. Number or
volume of R&D
procurement
contracts
awarded to
firms
(especially
SMEs and
startups).
Increase Medium
Only about 1/3
of total contracts
go to SMEs. PCP
is a bright spot
with a ~70%
SME win rate,
but scale is
limited.227
In the IA, the
number of
relevant
innovative
enterprises that
could be
potentially
affected by this
No fixed target,
context dependent
(market conditions,
number of public and
buyers adopting the
techniques).
227 Technical University of Denmark (DTU, p.21) (2025). From Strategy to Scale: Unlocking Europe’s Deep Tech Potential (Ascend Innovation Pre-Conference Report 2025. Report in partnership with the European Commission and the European Innovation Council
(EIC). https://ascend.dtu.dk/-/media/onepager-websites/ascend/ascend-innovation-pre-conference-report-2025.pdf
192
measure is
stimated to be:
SMEs: 1% to 5%
of all the
innovative
companies,
corresponding to
n = 2,224 –
18,000;
Large
enterprises: 1%
to 3% (n = 1,496
– 12,000).
8. Number or
volume of R&D
procurement
contracts
awarded to
cross-border
consortia/firms
(i.e. consortia
with
firms/bodies
from different
Ms)
Increase Low Low Integration:
Cross-border
participation is
currently below
5% for standard
contracts and
33% for
specialised
PCPs228
Cross-border share
increase to 50%-
70% for all EU PCP
contracts.
Measure 3: Preference for EU-made solutions in private and public procurements outside
of PP directives
Specific objective: 3. Increase the procurement of EU-based R&D solutions
in the next 5 years
Monitoring
indicator
Direction of
change
Attribution
risk
Baseline Target (5-year
horizon)
9. Number of
public buyers
adopting the
EU-preference
requirement
(survey based)
Increase Low No mandatory
EU-preference
requirement
currently exists.
In the IA, it has
been estimated
that the number
of public buyers
relevant for this
All public buyers
228 Presentation by DG CONNECT F3 unit (“Digital Innovation and Blockchain” ) by Lieve Bos. Update on results from completed and ongoing FP7 and Horizon 2020 funded Pre-Commercial Procurements (PCPs) Lieve Bos DG CONNECT F3 unit (“Digital
Innovation and Blockchain”. Aveilable at https://www.agid.gov.it/sites/agid/files/2024-05/resultseufundedpcpsstatusjan2020pdf.pdf
193
measure is about
2,000
10. Number (share
of)
procurement
contracts
awarded to EU-
made solutions
in strategic
technologies
Increase Low Strategic
Dependency:
Currently, 78%
of strategic
procurement
spending goes to
non-EU suppliers
(63% to US
based
suppliers)229
Strategic shift:
increase (reduce)
EU (non-EU)
dependency by
half (50%)
ANNEX 14: POLICY MAPPING (DETAILED LIST OF MAPPED
POLICES)
Policy mapping for measures addressing the regulatory frameworks for innovative
companies
The mapping of existing policy measures across EU Member States and thematic areas
was based on AI-assisted deep research using large language models (ChatGPT 5.1), which
were applied country-by-country to identify, extract and synthesise relevant policies into
structured tables. Multiple AI passes were used to screen large volumes of measures,
categorise them across analytical dimensions, and enable systematic cross-country
comparison. Results were iteratively refined through secondary AI reviews and
complemented by targeted manual checks and expert judgement, with source verification
applied throughout to reduce bias and hallucination risks. This approach allowed the
compilation of a comprehensive, comparable overview of policy approaches across
Member States, while acknowledging that, as with any large-scale mapping exercise, some
omissions may remain.
The following table presents the measures identified through the policy mapping that are
of particular relevance to the problem area.
Policy Mapping for Commercially scalable innovation
The following table presents the measures identified through the policy mapping that are
of particular relevance to the problem area.
229 Draghi (2024, Part A, p. 54). The future of European competitiveness – A competitiveness strategy for Europe (Part A).
https://commission.europa.eu/document/download/97e481fd-2dc3-412d-be4c-f152a8232961_en
194
Country Type Name Year Short Description
AT Programm
e
Intellectual Property
Strategy for Austria (Strategie der
Bundesregierung für
geistiges Eigentum)
2017 First national IP strategy setting goals to better
valorize IP for economic gain. It identifies legal, institutional, and awareness measures to help
companies use IP assets in business and financing.
Objectives include integrating IP in funding programs and reviewing barriers (e.g. accounting
rules that prohibit capitalizing self-developed
intangibles).
AT Other FFG – Spin-off Fellowships (Sonderrichtlinie /
Guidelines)
2017 Funds researchers/students to develop IP of universities/research institutions towards
start-ups, strengthening spin-off pathway.
AT Programm
e
aws – Impulsprogramm Wissenstransferzentren &
IPR-Verwertung
(Programmdokument/Richtli
nie)
2022 Programme to professionalise knowledge and technology transfer, including IP services and
inter-university Knowledge Transfer Centres.
AT Fund Wirtschaftsagentur Wien –
Innovationsförderung
(Richtlinie 24+)
2024 Regional innovation grant programme supporting
R&D and commercialization in Vienna-based
firms.
AT Other Universitätsgesetz 2002
(UG) – § 106 Verwertung
von geistigem Eigentum
2002 Sets rules for service inventions by university staff
and the university’s right to claim/use inventions,
enabling institutional IP management.
AT Other aws Proof of Concept –
Programmdokument (gültig
ab 2025-01-01)
2025 Supports PoC projects at research organisations to
demonstrate functionality as prerequisite for
further valorisation measures.
BE Other Pandregister – toegang en
gebruik (NL)
Current Access instructions for the national pledge register
(login via eID/itsme).
BE Other Government Order of 29
May 2009 on support for Industrial Research Funds
(IOF) and interface activities
of the university associations
2009 Creates structural funding for university TTOs and
IOF to accelerate valorisation, licensing and
spin-offs from publicly funded research.
BE Other Decree of 3 July 2008 concerning support for
research, development and
innovation in Wallonia
2008 Establishes legal basis and aid schemes for industrial research, experimental development and
innovation, including support to research
organisations and technology transfer agencies.
BE Other Decree of 30 April 2009 on
the organisation and
financing of the science &
innovation policy
2009 Framework decree for Flemish science and
innovation policy, including evaluation and
financing rules that underpin valorisation
instruments.
BG Other Special Pledges Act (Закон
за особените залози)
1996 Framework law enabling non-possessory pledges
over movables and intangible assets via registration in the Central Register of Special
Pledges (CROZ), allowing IP and other
intangibles to be used as collateral.
BG Other Law on Promotion of Scientific Research and
Innovation (Закон за
насърчаване на научните
изследвания и иновациите)
2024 Framework law setting principles, instruments and governance for research & innovation; creates
conditions for IP protection, realisation
(commercialisation) of research results, technology transfer, and cooperation between
science and business.
195
BG Fund Eurostars (Eureka) – National funding rules
(BSMEPA)
2023 National co-funding for Bulgarian SMEs in Eurostars projects; high grant rates reduce
financing barriers for R&D commercialisation.
BG Programm
e
Innovation Strategy for
Smart Specialisation (IS3) 2021–2027 (Иновационна
стратегия за интелигентна
специализация 2021–2027)
2022 National strategic framework to focus R&I
investments and instruments; emphasises effective instruments for research, innovation and
technology transfer.
BG Other Central Register of Special
Pledges – Rules on structure
and activity (Правилник)
2007 Operational rules of the public register for special
pledges at the Ministry of Justice; ensures
transparency and enforceability of security over
intangibles.
CY Other ‘Cyprus Award –
Commercial Exploitation of
Research Results’ (RIF)
2025 National award recognising successful
commercial exploitation of research results to
motivate and encourage knowledge transfer
activities.
CY Fund Apply for an Innovative
Enterprises Certificate (Deputy Ministry of
Research, Innovation &
Digital Policy)
2025 Official service enabling firms to obtain
‘Innovative Enterprise’ certification used for
investor tax relief under Article 9A.
CY Programm
e
Smart Specialisation Strategy (S3CY) 2023–2030
(adopted 30 March 2023)
2023 Sets national R&I priorities and frames funding calls; S3 update approved by Council of Ministers
on 30/03/2023.
CZ Programm
e
Patent pledge registration (Industrial Property Office
service)
2023 Administrative service to register a pledge over a patent/European patent/SPC or patent application
in the patent register.
CZ Programm
e
Utility model pledge
registration (Industrial
Property Office service)
2024 Administrative service to register a pledge over a
utility model in the register maintained by the
Industrial Property Office.
CZ Programm
e
National RIS3 Strategy
2021–2027 (National Research and Innovation
Strategy for Smart
Specialisation)
2021 Defines priorities and measures for RDI and
addresses barriers to applied research; frames
funding programmes for 2021–2027.
CZ Programm
e
TA ČR – SIGMA
Programme (Sub-objective
1: Support for
commercialisation of RDI)
2024 Supports commercialisation of breakthrough
innovative solutions and growth of small
enterprises/startups in Czechia.
DE Fund WIPANO – Wissens- und
Technologietransfer durch
Patente und Normen
(BMWK)
2016 Federal grants to help universities/SMEs protect
and exploit research via patents and
standardisation.
DE Programm
e
EXIST – University-based
Start-ups Programme
(BMWK)
1998 Federal programme promoting academic
entrepreneurship and spin-offs to commercialise
research.
DE Other Act on Employees’
Inventions (Gesetz über
Arbeitnehmererfindungen –
ArbNErfG)
1957 Governs ownership and commercialization of
employee inventions in public and private sectors;
universities can claim staff inventions; inventors
receive revenue share.
DE Other Steinbeis-Stiftung
(Netzwerk der
Steinbeis-Transferzentren)
1971 Public-supported foundation enabling
professors/experts to offer R&D & consulting to firms through Transfer-Zentren; institutionalized
knowledge transfer.
196
DK Fund Tinglysningsloven § 47 c – Virksomhedspant (enterprise
floating charge)
2006 Allows an enterprise to grant a floating charge over present and future assets
(‘virksomhedspant’). The asset classes expressly
include ‘immaterielle rettigheder’ (intellectual
property), enabling IP to be pledged.
DK Other Act on inventions at public-
sector research institutions
(Consolidation Act No. 210 of 17 March 2009; as
amended)
2009 Governs employee inventions at
universities/PROs, institutional claim to rights,
duty to commercialise, and revenue sharing;
establishes decision powers and procedures.
DK Fund Innovation Fund Denmark – Strategy & instruments
(public co-investment)
2024 IFD invests in high-risk, high-potential R&I through grants/co-funding to catalyse private
capital and speed market uptake.
DK Fund Innovation Fund Denmark –
InnoExplorer (proof-of-concept for
publicly funded research
results)
2025 Programme to mature early research-based
entrepreneurial ideas from public institutions so
they are ready for market or further investment.
EE Programm
e
Estonian Research Council –
Proof-of-Concept Grant
(PoC)
2023 Competency-based funding instrument for
experimental development to test and/or create
conditions for commercialisation of research outcomes; aims to enhance technology transfer
and application of results in enterprises and in
society.
EE Other Commercial Pledges Act —
Extent of commercial pledge
1996 (as amended;
consolidate
d 2023)
Creates a non-possessory general pledge over an undertaking’s movable property, covering
existing and after-acquired movable assets unless
excluded.
EE Other Corporate income tax on
distributed profits only
(Estonian CIT regime)
Ongoing
policy
(confirmed
2025)
Deferral of corporate income tax until profit
distribution enhances cashflow for reinvestment in
innovation and commercialisation.
EE Programm
e
Estonian Research,
Development, Innovation and Entrepreneurship
Strategy 2021–2035 (RDIE)
2021 Joint strategy by MoER and MoEAC; includes a
dedicated ‘knowledge transfer’ axis and smart-specialisation focus areas to increase uptake
of research results by enterprises and society.
EE Other ASBG 5 — Property, Plant
and Equipment and Intangible Assets (Estonian
Accounting Guidelines)
2025
(guideline
version)
Sets recognition, measurement and reporting rules
for intangible assets in Estonian GAAP, improving transparency for valuing IP and other
intangibles.
EL Programm
e
GSRI Initiative – Technology Transfer Offices
(TTOs) Action
2021 Government initiative to mature and finance TTO operation across HEIs and research bodies,
addressing gaps in IP management, licensing and
spin-off creation.
EL Other Law 4310/2014 – Research, Technological Development
and Innovation (RTDI)
2014 Horizontal RTDI framework law defining national strategy, governance, and instruments for research
and innovation, including research organisations
and collaboration with enterprises.
EL Other Law 4957/2022 – New
Horizons in Higher
Education Institutions, and provisions for research and
innovation
2022 Sets objectives for HEIs to link with industry,
transfer knowledge, protect and exploit research
results; creates internal structures (Technology Transfer & Innovation Units) and governance to
manage IP and spin-offs.
197
EL Fund General Secretariat for Research & Innovation –
Certification of R&D
Expenditure (Law 4712/2020 / Art. 22A of Law
4172/2013)
2020 Super-deduction increased to +100% for eligible R&D costs; GSRI certifies R&D expenditure
supporting claims.
ES Other Startups Law (Ley 28/2022,
de fomento del ecosistema
de las empresas emergentes)
2022 Creates favourable environment for innovative
firms, including university spin-offs.
ES Other Royal Decree 984/2022 —
Oficinas de Transferencia de Conocimiento (OTC) y
registro
2022 Creates/organises official Knowledge Transfer
Offices and a national registry to professionalise
tech-transfer and valorisation.
ES Other Organic Law 2/2023 of the
University System (LOSU)
2023 Elevates knowledge transfer and societal impact
as core university duties; enables spin-offs and
clarifies IP/compatibility rules.
ES Programm
e
Pact for the Knowledge
Society (PN@SC – Pacte Nacional per a la Societat del
Coneixement)
2020 Multi-actor agreement to boost transfer and
innovation toward the productive sector, with
programmes for valorisation and TT units.
ES Programm
e
Spanish Strategy for
Science, Technology and
Innovation 2021–2027
2020 Sets national goals to improve public–private
collaboration and knowledge transfer to
market/society.
ES Other Science Act Reform (Ley
17/2022, de modificación de
la Ley 14/2011)
2022 Updates the science law to strengthen knowledge
transfer, researcher incentives, spin-offs and
licensing frameworks.
FI Other PRH – Enterprise Mortgage
(business mortgage/floating
charge)
2025 Centralised enterprise-mortgage register managed
by PRH; mortgage may be applied for by the
trader or a creditor on the property of a trader
recorded in the Trade Register.
FI Other Business Finland – Research
to Business funding
(formerly TUTL)
2025 Funding for public research organisations to
prepare commercialization and conduct applied research that supports commercialization of
research-driven ideas.
FI Other Employment Invention Committee (statutory) –
opinions on HEI and
employee inventions
2025 National committee issues opinions on the application of the Act on the Right in Employee
Inventions and the Act on the Right in Inventions
made at HEIs.
FI Programm
e
Government Resolution: National Intellectual
Property Rights Strategy
(2023)
2023 Sets measures to develop competences and administration related to IP and to improve the
operating environment for IP-driven innovation
and commercialisation.
FI Other Act on the Right in
Inventions made at Higher
Education Institutions
(369/2006)
2006 Sets purpose, definitions and procedures for
disclosure, universities’ acquisition of rights,
confidentiality and compensation to inventors in
open vs. collaborative research.
FR Other Code de la recherche – Livre
V (Valorisation des résultats
de la recherche et transfert de technologie) – Article L533-
1 & Section réglementaire
(mandataire unique)
2014 Creates a legal framework for valorisation and
technology transfer. Article L533-1 establishes
co-ownership management between public bodies and mandates appointment of a ‘mandataire
unique’ to manage/exploit co-owned rights; regulatory section (e.g., D533-2; Décret 2020-24)
details designation and duties.
198
FR Fund Fonds Parisien pour l’Innovation (FPI) – Ville de
Paris & Bpifrance
2024 Municipal fund co-financed with Bpifrance to support impactful innovation projects in Paris;
complements regional/national valorisation by
financing early steps toward market.
FR Other Bpifrance – Prêt Innovation (financement des dépenses
immatérielles)
2025 Prêt dédié finançant l’ensemble des dépenses immatérielles nécessaires à l’industrialisation et la
commercialisation d’innovations.
FR Fund Crédit d’impôt recherche (CIR) – Article 244 quater B
du Code général des impôts
(CIR & sous-traitance à des
organismes publics)
2024 R&D tax credit allowing companies to include outsourced R&D to public research organisations
in the CIR base, lowering cost of collaboration
with public labs.
FR Programm
e
SRESRI Île-de-France
2023–2028 (Schéma
régional de l’enseignement supérieur, de la recherche et
de l’innovation)
2023 Regional strategy to consolidate
scientific/industrial leadership; encourages
synergies, consortia and international
partnerships, supporting innovation and transfer.
FR Programm
e
Sociétés d’accélération du transfert de technologies
(SATT) – dispositif PIA
2010 Regional TTO companies created by universities/research organisations; detect, protect
and mature inventions; transfer to firms/startups;
financed under the ‘Programme d’investissements
d’avenir’.
HR Programm
e
Strategija pametne
specijalizacije do 2029. (S3)
2023 Main national strategy for research, development
and innovation; strategic basis for funding projects
and strengthening the national innovation system.
HR Fund Zakon o državnoj potpori za
istraživačko-razvojne
projekte (Law on State Support for R&D Projects) +
Rulebook (2025)
2018 Provides R&D tax incentives and explicitly aims
to boost private R&D investment and
collaboration with scientific organisations, targeting future commercialization of project
outputs.
HU Other Act C of 2000 on Accounting – Intangible assets
definitions and valuation
2000 Defines fixed assets to include intangible assets and sets recognition/measurement rules, including
capitalized R&D and market value adjustments.
HU Fund NRDIO (NKFIH) – Proof of
Concept (PoC) Grant (2024–
2025 call)
2025 Grant to validate market and technology potential
of university research with TTOs; aims at turning developments into patents and products for SMEs
and startups.
HU Programm
e
National Smart Specialisation Strategy (S3)
2021–2027 (Gov. Decision
1428/2021)
2021 Identifies national economic priorities and establishes monitoring via TIPs; frames
programmes that encourage collaboration and
uptake of research results.
HU Programm
e
National Research,
Development and Innovation
Office (NKFIH) – 2025
Programme Strategy
2025 Sets annual and multiannual R&D&I funding
programmes (NKFI Fund) aligned with national
priorities.
HU Programm
e
Act LXXVI of 2014 on
Scientific Research,
Development and Innovation
(RDI Act)
2014 Sets scope over RDI carried out in Hungary using
public funds; regulates public funding,
programmes, certification of R&D and institutions, enabling exploitation requirements in
calls.
IE Programm
e
KT Boost – Knowledge Transfer funding programme
(Enterprise Ireland / KTI)
2024 Four-year €33.4m programme to strengthen knowledge transfer capacity in Irish universities
and technological universities and to increase
research commercialisation outcomes.
199
IE Other Knowledge Transfer Ireland – National IP Protocol
(Resource Guide)
2022 Framework for research commercialisation and managing engagements between industry and
RPOs; guidance on licensing, spin-outs and
valuation norms.
IE Other National IP Protocol (Knowledge Transfer
Ireland)
2019 Ireland’s framework for research commercialisation; sets expected norms for
engagements between industry and State research
performing organisations (RPOs) and for
spin-outs.
IE Programm
e
Impact 2030 – Ireland’s
Research and Innovation
Strategy
2022 Sets national strategy to maximise the impact of
R&I, emphasising enterprise R&I activity and
knowledge transfer.
IE Programm
e
Enterprise Ireland –
Commercialisation Fund
2025 Supports third-level researchers to translate
research into innovative and commercially viable
products, services and companies; includes PoC
steps to de-risk technologies.
IT Fund Decreto 4 dicembre 2020 —
Fondo per il trasferimento tecnologico (attuazione art.
42, DL 34/2020)
2020 Establishes and governs the national Technology
Transfer Fund (managed via ENEA Tech/ENEA
Tech & Biomedical).
IT Fund Decreto–legge 18 ottobre
2012, n. 179 (Startup
innovative) – artt. 25–32
2012 Introduces the ‘startup innovativa’ regime and
related measures (registration, incentives, access to guarantee fund, equity incentives) to foster
financing and growth.
IT Other Linee guida attuative dell’art. 65, comma 5, Legge
102/2023 — contratti tra enti
di ricerca e soggetti
finanziatori
2023 Ministerial guidelines to standardise contractual models for commissioned research and knowledge
transfer with companies.
IT Fund Fondo per il trasferimento
tecnologico — pagina
istituzionale MIMIT
2020 Official page describing scope, ticket size and
eligibility of the Technology Transfer Fund.
IT Fund Pacchetto Investimenti –
Linea Sviluppo Aziendale
(garanzia + contributo)
2025 Regional instrument combines free regional
guarantee on bank loan with capital grant for
investment projects aligned with S3.
IT Other Programma Nazionale per la
Ricerca 2021–2027 (MUR)
2021 Sets national priorities, including strengthening
knowledge transfer and research-industry links for
competitiveness.
Italy — Emilia-Romag
na
Programm
e
L.R. 7/2002 — Promozione del sistema regionale delle
attività produttive
(PRRIITT)
2002 Regional law establishing the Programme for industrial research, innovation and technology
transfer (PRRIITT).
LT Programm
e
Innovation Agency
Lithuania – system reform
(one-stop shop for
innovation support)
2022 Agency launched in April 2022 to reduce
fragmentation and make public innovation support
measures more effective – including services/programmes that enable
commercialisation and partnerships.
LT Other Law on Higher Education
and Research (No. XI-242) – IP management &
commercialisation context
2009 Framework law governing universities/research.
Together with institutional status reforms, it enables HEIs and research institutes to apply IP
management principles that facilitate
commercialisation of R&D results.
LT Fund Tax incentives for
investment and innovations
(R&D super-deduction;
2024 Lithuania offers a triple deduction (300%) of
R&D costs, a 2-year depreciation for R&D assets,
200
accelerated depreciation; 5%
IP commercialisation rate)
and a reduced 5% CIT rate for profits from
commercialisation of inventions created in R&D.
LT Programm
e
Research Council of
Lithuania – Measures for
cooperation between science and business (incl. R&D
funding for spin-offs)
2025 RCL instruments finance market-oriented
science–business projects; dedicated ‘R&D
funding for spin-offs’ promotes transfer of scientific knowledge and development of
innovative products to support spin-off growth.
LT Other Smart Specialisation (S3)
2021–2027 – Lithuania
2022 S3 concept approved on 17 Aug 2022 sets R&I priority areas and aims to strengthen capacities,
create new technologies and increase
competitiveness – guiding calls that incentivise
knowledge transfer and commercialisation.
LT Other InoStartas / InoStartas-2
(Innovation supply & early
commercialisation support)
2023 Supports creation of new high added-value
products, participation of researchers in enterprise
R&D, IP activities, early pilot production and
market-readiness.
LU Other FNR — JUMP
(Proof-of-Concept /
maturation)
2025 Bridges the technical and funding gap between
research-driven discoveries and commercialisation/utilisation; open to all
domains.
LU Programm
e
Ministry of the Economy –
Intellectual Property
(policy/valorisation portal)
2025 Government portal emphasising valorisation of IP
rights as a key method for monetising innovation
and creativity.
LU Other Loi du 3 décembre 2014
portant organisation des centres de recherche publics
(CRP) — valorisation &
coopération
2014 Organises CRPs (e.g., LIST, LIH). Provides
governance, multi-annual conventions and resources; recognises valorisation specialists;
authorises CRPs to cooperate and hold
shareholdings to transfer results to market.
LU Other Loi du 26 juin 2019 sur la
protection des savoir-faire et
des informations commerciales non divulgués
(secrets d’affaires)
2019 Provides common definitions and civil remedies;
ensures confidentiality in proceedings to protect
trade secrets and enable safe knowledge
transfer/licensing.
LU Fund Loi du 27 juin 2018 portant
organisation de l’Université du Luxembourg (consolidée)
— transfert, valorisation, PI
et prises de participation
2018 Sets the missions and governance of the
University of Luxembourg; explicitly mandates knowledge/technology transfer and valorisation of
research results; sets IP ownership, licensing and
allows equity participation/creation of
subsidiaries.
LV Fund Innovation & Technology
Transfer Support Programme
(Cabinet-approved,
implemented by LIAA)
2023 Cabinet approved programme (total €26.55m) to
strengthen and improve the knowledge-transfer system, promote long-term cooperation between
research and business, and support
commercialisation (innovation vouchers, start-up
talent, innovative procurement).
LV Other Commercial Pledge Law
(Komerciālā ķīla) –
registration and scope
1998 Establishes Latvia’s commercial pledge regime
and the Commercial Pledge Register; allows
non-possessory pledges over enterprises’ movable property and rights; third-party effectiveness via
registration.
LV Other Law on Scientific Activity 2005 Framework law for scientific activity and governance. Enables public research institutes to
found and participate in companies and recognises
their intellectual property, facilitating transfer and
commercialisation of results.
201
LV Other Enterprise Register of Latvia – Commercial Pledge
Register (guidance)
2025 Official information on filing a commercial pledge, required forms and fees; public extract
availability.
LV Programm
e
Research and Innovation
Strategy for Smart Specialisation (RIS3) 2021–
2027 (updated 2023)
2023 RIS3 sets priority domains and instruments to
increase value-creation and productivity, guiding programmes that promote knowledge transfer and
collaboration.
LV Other Patent Law (Patentu likums) – open licences and
exploitation provisions
2007 Sets patent system rules in Latvia; includes mechanisms such as open licences and
commercial pledge to facilitate use and financing
of patents.
LV Fund Commercialization support (ERDF) – LIAA
Business.gov.lv programme
(2025–2027)
2025 Support (up to €300k, 50% co-financing) for scientific institutions and businesses to implement
technology-transfer and research projects,
including IP strengthening, licensing and
commercialisation offer preparation.
MT Other University of Malta –
Research & Knowledge Transfer (CR&KTO) –
mission
2025 CR&KTO focuses on discovery, protection and
commercialisation of IP, industry-academia collaboration and contracted research (via Malta
University Consulting Ltd.).
MT Other Civil Code (Cap. 16) –
pledge and security over
movables/rights
consolidate
d (ongoing)
General civil-law framework for pledges and
privileges, including over movable things and
rights (e.g., receivables/shares).
MT Programm
e
Malta’s National Research &
Innovation Strategic Plan
2023–2027
2024 Sets national priorities and reforms following EU
Policy Support Facility exercises; aims to improve
R&I monitoring and align programmes to impact.
MT Other University of Malta –
Intellectual Property (IP)
Policy (last updated 10 July
2024)
2024 Sets objectives, ownership and management rules
for IP arising from University research; mandates
knowledge transfer services and training;
establishes fair/equitable criteria for
commercialisation and spin-outs.
MT Programm
e
FUSION – Commercialisation Voucher
Programme (CVP) –
Activity Guidelines 2023
2023 Supports researchers, micro and SMEs to assess commercial potential of research, start or
accelerate innovative activities, and collaborate
with R&D institutions/service providers.
NL Other Wet op het hoger onderwijs
en wetenschappelijk
onderzoek (WHW) —
Article 1.3 (tasks of HEIs)
2018 Defines the statutory tasks of universities and
universities of applied sciences, including
transferring knowledge for the benefit of society (valorisation), providing a legal basis for TTOs,
licensing and spin-offs.
NL Other NWO ‘Take-off’ – academic
start-ups (phase 1 feasibility
& phase 2 early-stage loan)
2024 Financing for feasibility studies and early-stage
routes for academic/HBO/TO2 starters to bring
research to market; enables spin-off creation and
IP valorisation.
NL Other Kennis- en Innovatieconvenant (KIC)
2024–2027
2023 National covenant aligning government, knowledge institutions and business around
mission-driven innovation with strong PPP and
valorisation focus.
NL Other Rijksoctrooiwet 1995 — employee inventions &
employer ownership (Article
12)
1995 Sets patent law framework including rules for employee inventions and employer ownership,
underpinning universities’ ability to patent and
license research results.
PL Programm
e
Act on the Łukasiewicz
Research Network (Ustawa 2019 Creates a nationwide applied research network
with a statutory mission including
202
o Sieci Badawczej
Łukasiewicz)
commercialization of research results and
cooperation with industry.
PL Other Act of 6 December 1996 on
Registered Pledge and the
Register of Pledges
1996
(consolidate
d)
Creates the non-possessory registered pledge and
the Register of Pledges for movables and rights
(including IP); third-party effectiveness by
registration.
PL Other Law on Higher Education
and Science (Prawo o szkolnictwie wyższym i
nauce)
2018 Defines mechanisms for commercialization by
universities and researchers, establishes technology transfer structures and special purpose
vehicles (SPVs), and sets minimum revenue-
sharing with inventors.
PL Other Amendment to the Act on Combating Unfair
Competition
(implementation of Directive (EU) 2016/943 on trade
secrets)
2018 Implements EU trade secrets protection to safeguard confidential know-how during
academia–industry collaboration and
commercialization.
PL Other Industrial Property Law (Prawo własności
przemysłowej) – employee
inventions
2000 Provides default rules for employee inventions and remuneration when IP rights belong to the
employer, supporting fair sharing and clarity for
commercialization.
PT Other Law No. 62/2007 (RJIES) – Legal framework of higher
education institutions
2007 Defines HEIs’ mission and duties, expressly including dissemination and transfer of
knowledge and the economic optimisation
(valorisation) of scientific knowledge; enables HEIs to link with society and participate in
activities connected to economic use of research.
PT Programm
e
Portugal 2030 – Incentive Systems for RD&I (SI I&D
Empresarial) – official
programme information
2023 Funding lines to support collaborative R&D, technology transfer and implementation of
innovation by SMEs and larger firms, often based
on results from public research.
RO Programm
e
Hotărârea Guvernului nr.
346/2023 – Norme
metodologice privind constituirea, funcționarea,
evaluarea și acreditarea
entităților ReNITT
2023 Approves detailed norms for accreditation and
support of innovation & technology transfer
entities (ReNITT), incl. CTTs, incubators, liaison
offices.
RO Other Ordonanța Guvernului nr. 57/2002 privind cercetarea
științifică și dezvoltarea
tehnologică (consolidată)
2002 Establishes the national framework for research, development and innovation (CDI); defines
innovation and technology transfer; empowers the
state authority to stimulate valorisation and TT.
RO Other Planul Național de CDI
2022–2027 (PNCDI IV) –
aprobat prin HG nr.
1188/2022
2022 National multi-annual RDI funding plan; includes
instruments for collaborative RDI, technology
transfer and valorisation, aligned with SNCISI.
RO Other Legea nr. 64/1991 privind
brevetele de invenție
(actualizată la 2014) + Legea nr. 83/2014 privind
invențiile de serviciu
2014 Patent law and specific regime for employee
inventions establish ownership and reward rules
enabling institutions to patent and license research
results.
RO Other Norme metodologice privind înființarea și susținerea
spin-off-urilor din
organizațiile de cercetare
(2021)
2021 Provides rules for establishing spin-offs by public research organisations; sets IP valuation,
contracts, access to infrastructure, publication
rules and revenue allocation.
203
SE Other Higher Education Act (Högskolelagen 1992:1434)
— 2009 amendment
clarifying universities’ duty to ensure research results are
put to use
2009 Clarifies that universities, besides research and education, must work to ensure research results
are utilised (knowledge transfer/valorisation).
SE Other Lag (2008:990) om
företagshypotek (Business
Mortgage Act)
2008
(consolidate
d)
Establishes ‘företagshypotek’ – a security right
over a business’s assets (incl. movable property and rights) to secure credit; registered via
företagsinteckning.
SE Other Bolagsverket – Företagsinteckningar
(registration & information
service)
Current Explains and operates the registration of business mortgages (företagsinteckningar) used as
collateral.
SE Programm
e
Innovation Offices at Universities
(Innovationskontor) —
national support initiative
2009 Government funded specialised ‘innovation offices’ at leading universities to professionalise
commercialisation support (TTO-like services)
and assist other HEIs.
SE Other Act on the Right to
Employee Inventions (Lag
1949:345 om rätten till arbetstagares uppfinningar)
— includes the
‘lärarundantaget’ (teacher’s
exemption)
1949 Regulates employee inventions. In Sweden,
academic researchers (teachers) at universities are
exempted from employer ownership, so they usually retain IP to their inventions. This
incentivises researchers to commercialise publicly
funded results.
SE Other Higher Education Act —
Amendment SFS 2021:317 (mutual exchange and
utilisation of
knowledge/competence)
2021 Strengthens and broadens universities’
collaboration/valorisation mandate: collaborate with society for mutual exchange and ensure
knowledge/competence benefits society.
SI Other Zakon o visokem šolstvu
(ZViS)
1993 Sets the mission and governance of HEIs, including research and cooperation with
practice/industry; provides basis for internal
IP/TT rules and spin-off engagement.
SK Other Notársky centrálny register
záložných práv (NCRzp) –
Central Notarial Register of
Pledges
Ongoing
(service)
Electronic notice filing for pledges over movable
assets and rights, operated by the Notarial
Chamber; ensures legal publicity and priority for
non-possessory pledges.
SK Other Act No. 172/2005 Coll. on
the Organisation of State
Support for Research and
Development (as amended)
2005
(consolidate
d)
Framework law defining the organisation and
instruments of state support for R&D. It
establishes research projects, specialised organisations and science & technology services
that include support for knowledge/technology
transfer and services enabling uptake of research
results.
SK Programm
e
Technology Transfer Centre
at the Slovak Centre of Scientific and Technical
Information (CVTI SR)
2010s–
ongoing
National centre that builds and operates the
technology transfer support system, provides IP and commercialisation services, and administers
the National Portal for Technology Transfer
(NPTT).
SK Programm
e
Research and Innovation Strategy for Smart
Specialisation of the Slovak Republic 2021–2027 (SK
RIS3 2021+)
2022 National R&I strategy for 2021–2027 that prioritises domains and includes measures to
strengthen technology transfer, cooperation with
industry and exploitation of research results.
204
Source: Supporting Study to the Impact Assessment of the EIA
Policy mapping for innovation procurement in Member States
The following table presents the measures identified through the policy mapping that are
of particular relevance to the problem area.
Country Type Name Year Short Description
AT Other BVergG 2018 – § 118 Ziel der
Innovationspartnerschaft
2018 Defines the aim of an innovation partnership: development and subsequent acquisition of
the results, provided agreed performance and
cost ceilings are met. Innovation partnership with phased R&D and subsequent
acquisition.
AT Programme FFG – Innovationsfördernde
Beschaffung (PCP/PPI)
2025 National R&I agency page on PCP (pre-commercial procurement) and PPI;
notes IÖB Servicestelle at BBG and FFG’s
role in PCP procedures. Advisory and
guidance; linkage to PCP/PPI instruments.
AT Fund IÖB-Servicestelle –
Innovationsfördernde öffentliche
Beschaffung (BMK/BMWET; hosted at
BBG)
2025 One-stop shop to support innovative public
procurement, with advisory services,
challenges, toolbox funding and networking. Advisory; challenge platform; training;
co-funding signposting (aws/FFG).
AT Programme BVergG 2018 – Vertrag über die Innovationspartnerschaft
(Verfahrensverweis § 120)
2018 Specifies that intermediate objectives and adequate staged remuneration must be set in
the innovation partnership contract
concluded via negotiated procedure (§120). Contractual milestones and staged payments
for innovation partnerships.
BE Programme Loi du 17 juin 2016 – Art. 51
Consultations préalables du marché
2016 Authorises pre-market consultations for
planning and running procedures, provided equal treatment and transparency are
maintained. Pre-tender market consultations
to prepare procurement.
BE Programme Arrêté royal du 18 avril 2017 relatif à la
passation des marchés publics (secteurs
classiques)
2017 Implements the 2016 law for award
procedures, including the structure and
phases of the innovation partnership and digital access to documents. Detailed
procedural rules (e.g., phases, negotiation,
publication, electronic access to documents).
SK Programm
e
National Portal for Technology Transfer
(NPTT) – operated by CVTI
SR
2010s–
ongoing
Online platform listing Slovak research results, technologies and collaboration offers to connect
public research with companies.
SK Other Act No. 131/2002 Coll. on Higher Education
Institutions (as amended)
2002 (consolidate
d)
Sets missions and governance of HEIs, including performing research and cooperating with
practice/industry; provides the legal basis for
universities to manage assets and set internal rules for IP and commercial activities (spin-offs,
licensing) under public law constraints.
205
BE Other Loi du 17 juin 2016 relative aux marchés publics – Art. 40 Partenariat
d’innovation
2016 Transposes the EU innovation partnership, structuring R&D and purchase in phases
with best price-quality award and
IP/confidentiality rules. Innovation partnership with phased R&D and
subsequent acquisition.
BG Programme Public Procurement Act (ЗОП) – Article
44 (Пазарни консултации / Market
consultations)
2016 Allows contracting authorities to consult
independent experts, authorities or market participants before launching a procedure.
Article 44 – market consultations (PMC).
BG Programme Public Procurement Act (Закон за обществените поръчки, ЗОП) –
Innovation partnership
definition/procedure
2016 Defines innovation partnership as a negotiated, phased process to establish
partnership(s) for development and
subsequent purchase. Innovation partnership
procedure under ZOP.
CY Programme Law 73(I)/2016 – Article on Preliminary
Market Consultations (Προκαταρκτικές
διαβουλεύσεις αγοράς)
2016 Allows contracting authorities to conduct
market consultations before launching a
procedure, provided competition is not distorted. Pre-tender market consultations
(PMC).
CY Programme Law 73(I)/2016 – Regulation of Public Procurement Procedures (transposing
Directive 2014/24/EU) – Innovation
Partnership
2016 Defines the innovation partnership as a negotiated, phased process to develop and
subsequently purchase innovative works,
supplies or services. Innovation partnership
under Cypriot PPL (Law 73(I)/2016).
CZ Programme Act No. 134/2016 Coll. on Public
Procurement — §33 ‘Předběžné tržní
konzultace’
2016 Allows contracting authorities to conduct
market consultations before launching a procedure, provided competition is not
distorted. Pre-tender market consultations
(PMC).
CZ Fund TA ČR — BETA2 Programme (public tenders in applied research and
innovation for government needs)
2016 Approved by Government Resolution No. 278 (30/3/2016); supports applied research
and innovation for central government
bodies via public tenders. Systematic public
procurement of R&D services (PCP-type).
CZ Programme Act No. 134/2016 Coll. on Public
Procurement — §3(g) ‘řízení o
inovačním partnerství’
2016 Lists innovation partnership among
procedures that contracting authorities may use to acquire innovative solutions.
Innovation partnership as a defined tendering
procedure.
CZ Programme Portál o veřejných zakázkách — Topic ‘Inovace’ (innovation in public
procurement)
2024 Summarises instruments such as negotiated procedure with negotiation, competitive
dialogue, design contests and innovation
partnership; links to ‘Veřejné zakázky na inovativní řešení: Metodika pro zadavatele’.
Government guidance hub and methodology
links.
CZ Programme Věstník veřejných zakázek (VVZ) —
Form E1 for Preliminary Market
Consultation
2025 VVZ added ‘Form E1 – Preliminary market
consultation’ to let contracting authorities
publicly signal upcoming innovation-friendly tenders. Standardised
PMC notice form in national bulletin.
DE Other Auftragsberatungszentrum Bayern (ABZ) – Innovation & Nachhaltigkeit
(Information hub)
2024 ABZ Bayern disseminates information on innovative procurement measures and guides
for public buyers and suppliers. Advisory
content and links to guides/tools fostering
innovation-friendly procurement.
206
DE Programme Vergabeverordnung (VgV) § 19 –
Innovationspartnerschaft
2016 Defines the innovation partnership for supplies and services including staged R&D
and subsequent purchase. § 19 VgV –
Innovationspartnerschaft; staged R&D with
subsequent acquisition.
DE Programme Kompetenzzentrum innovative
Beschaffung (KOINNO) – BMWK
2013 National competence centre run for BMWK
by BME to strengthen innovation orientation
of public procurement and raise the share of innovation procurement. Advisory services,
publications, toolbox, training; guidance on
innovation partnerships and market
consultations.
DE Other Vergabeverordnung (VgV) § 28 –
Markterkundung
2016 Permits market exploration before tendering
while safeguarding transparency and competition. § 28 VgV – Markterkundung
(preliminary market consultation).
DE Programme Gesetz gegen
Wettbewerbsbeschränkungen (GWB), Teil 4 – Vergabe von öffentlichen
Aufträgen und Konzessionen
2023 Primary legal basis for public procurement
and concession award; sets principles (quality and innovation) and procedures. §
97 GWB: consideration of quality and
innovation; framework for procedures including innovation partnership via
ordinances.
DE Other Sektorenverordnung (SektVO) § 18 –
Innovationspartnerschaft
2016 Regulates innovation partnership for entities in special sectors. § 18 SektVO –
Innovationspartnerschaft.
DK Programme Udbudsloven — § 73 Innovationspartnerskab (LBK nr 116 af
03/02/2025, konsolideret)
2025 Allows contracting authorities to use an innovation partnership comprising tender,
development phases and possible follow-on
purchase of the developed solution. Innovation partnership under the Danish
Public Procurement Act.
DK Programme Udbudsloven — § 39 Forudgående
markedsundersøgelser (pre-market
consultation)
2016 Implements EU Article 40 in Danish law;
allows preliminary market studies/consultations prior to launching
procedures. Pre-tender market consultations
(forhånds-/markedsdialog).
DK Programme Step-by-step procesguide til
innovationspartnerskaber (state
recommendations)
2020 State process recommendations for
conducting innovation partnerships and OPI;
published for the Danish government and hosted by KFST resources. Process
guidance, templates and roles for innovation
partnerships.
DK Programme KFST – Guide til innovative indkøb på
sundhedsområdet
2024 Targets frontline staff; focuses on relevant procurement rules and concrete examples for
innovative purchases and partnerships.
Practical guide for innovative
procurement/partnerships in health.
EE Programme EIS programme (2021–2027):
awareness and advisory services for
innovative public procurement
2021 EIS provides information and advisory
services to increase competence of state and local governments as R&D customers and
innovation leaders. Seminars, legal and
sectoral expertise for innovation
procurement to public sector organisations.
EE Fund Value-based procurement – Innovation-
supporting guidance (Innovatsiooni
toetav)
2025 Guidance framing innovation purchases as
tools to develop the economy and living environment; aligns with green and social
policy goals. Encourages ‘innovation
207
procurements’ (innovatsioonihanked) and
provides practical orientation.
EE Programme Public Procurement Act (Riigihangete
seadus) – Innovation Partnership (§§57–
62)
2017 Sets out the rules for innovation partnerships,
including participation, staged R&D /
development steps, confidentiality, and purchasing of the resulting solution. Allows
contracting authorities to set up an
innovation partnership with one or more partners and structure stages and payments
aligned to R&I steps.
EL Programme National competence centre for green & innovation procurement (GDPP within
Ministry of Development)
2024 According to EC 2024 benchmarking, GDPP acts as the national competence centre for
green and innovation procurement in Greece.
Competence centre services and policy
coordination.
EL Programme Law 4412/2016 – Preliminary
consultation with the market (e.g.,
Articles 46, 47, 278, 279)
2016 Authorises contracting authorities to conduct
preliminary consultations before launching
procedures and lays out safeguards to preserve competition and transparency.
Legal basis for market consultation notices
and dialogues.
EL Programme ESIDIS service – ‘Preliminary
Consultation of a Public Contract with
the Market’ (operationalisation)
2025 Dedicated ESIDIS service for preliminary
market consultations referencing Law 4412
articles 46, 47, 278, 279. Online notice and feedback mechanism for consultations;
transparency safeguards.
EL Programme Law 4412/2016 – Article 31 ‘Σύμπραξη
καινοτομίας’ (Innovation partnership)
2016 Transposes EU Art.31 allowing phased R&D and subsequent purchase; may involve one
or several partners; includes provisions for
IP and confidentiality. Innovation partnership procedure under Greek law
(Book I).
ES Fund CDTI – Compra Pública de Innovación
(CPI) programmes (PCP/CPTI)
2011 CDTI defines CPI as a tool to foster
innovation via purchase of innovative solutions or first prototypes validated by
Spanish public entities; CDTI can act as
procurer of R&D services (PCP). Operational support and funding for
PCP/CPTI; CDTI acting as licitante in PCP
to develop and validate prototypes.
ES Fund Línea FID – Fomento de la Innovación
desde la Demanda (Ministerio de
Ciencia, Innovación y Universidades)
2011 Programme to promote Innovative Public
Procurement (CPI) among public sector
bodies; co-funded by ERDF; managed by Subdirección General de Fomento de la
Innovación. Co-funding for CPI operations
(PCP/CPTI), technical support to buyers.
ES Programme Ley 9/2017, de Contratos del Sector
Público
2017 Transposes EU procurement directives into Spanish law; establishes ‘asociación para la
innovación’ to develop and subsequently
purchase innovative products/services; allows market studies and consultations.
Articles 177–182: ‘asociación para la innovación’; Article on preliminary market
consultations.
FI Fund Business Finland – Innovative Public
Procurement funding (PPI)
2024 Grants (up to 50%) for public buyers to
prepare, tender, co-develop and pilot innovative procurements with
market-opening effect. Funding for
preparation, tendering, co-development and
208
pilots; requires PPI of national-level impact;
at least 80% of costs = R&D.
FI Other Hilma – National public procurement
portal (eForms, prior information &
market dialogue)
2025 Hilma hosts notices including prior
information and market consultations; from
16.04.2025 national eForms can also be published EU-wide via TED. Dedicated
notice types for ‘markkinakartoitus’ (market
consultation) and prior information;
searchable interface and API.
FI Programme Act on Public Procurement and
Concession Contracts (Hankintalaki)
1397/2016 – Innovation Partnership
2016 Sections 38–39 establish the innovation
partnership as a multi-phase procurement to develop and then buy innovative
goods/services/works; allows multiple
partners and phased down-selection. Legal basis to run innovation partnerships; partner
down-selection between phases; award on
best price-quality ratio; enables direct
purchase of the developed result within the
partnership.
FI Programme Act on Procurement in Water, Energy,
Transport and Postal Services Sectors
1398/2016
2016 Sectoral procurement act implementing
Directive 2014/25/EU; includes objectives to promote high-quality, innovative and
sustainable procurement. Legal framework
for utilities to use innovation partnerships and market consultations analogous to the
general act.
FR Programme Code de la commande publique — Article R2111-1 (Études et échanges
préalables / sourcing)
2018 Allows consultations, market studies, and informing operators of the project and
requirements; results may be used if
competition is preserved. Preliminary market
consultations (‘sourcing’) with safeguards.
FR Programme Code de la commande publique —
Article L2172-3 (Partenariat
d’innovation)
2019 Defines the innovation partnership’s object:
R&D of innovative goods/services/works and subsequent acquisition if needs cannot
be met by market supply. Partenariat
d’innovation (phased R&D + acquisition).
HR Other Zakon o javnoj nabavi (ZJN 2016) – Chapter ‘Partnerstvo za inovacije’
(Articles 117–126)
2016 Defines innovation partnership aim, publication, IP rules, staged objectives and
payments, negotiation, and equal treatment
in the procedure. Innovation partnership
procedure under Croatian PPA.
HR Other ZJN 2016 – Article 198 ‘Istraživanje
tržišta’ (prethodno savjetovanje)
2016 Requires at least 5-day preliminary
consultation and publication of a report on accepted/rejected comments; allows
expert/market advice while ensuring
competition. Mandatory preliminary market
consultation for certain procedures;
transparency obligations.
HU Programme Act CXLIII of 2015 (Kbt.) — §28 (4)–
(6): Előzetes piaci konzultáció (pre-market consultation) incl. EKR
publication
2015 Authorises preliminary consultations; allows
posting draft technical specifications and draft contract in EKR for stakeholder
comments. Pre-tender market consultations
(előzetes piaci konzultáció).
HU Fund Közbeszerzési Hatóság Tanácsának
útmutatója – az innovációs partnerség
alkalmazásának egyes kérdéseiről
2023 Issued under Kbt. §183(c); explains stages,
documentation, award criteria and risk
management for innovation partnerships. Official guidance, templates and
explanations supporting innovation-friendly
procurement.
209
HU Programme Act CXLIII of 2015 on Public Procurement (Kbt.) — Procedure types
include “innovációs partnerség”
2015 Lists ‘innovációs partnerség’ among procurement procedure types; detailed rules
align with EU Art. 31. Innovation
partnership under the Hungarian Public
Procurement Act.
IE Programme SBIR Ireland – Small Business
Innovation Research (Enterprise
Ireland)
2020 Enterprise Ireland-administered programme
connecting public bodies with technology
businesses to deliver innovative solutions to public sector challenges. Challenge-based
pre-commercial procurement; phased
competitive R&D contracts.
IE Programme S.I. No. 284/2016 — European Union
(Award of Public Authority Contracts)
Regulations 2016
2016 Implements Directive 2014/24/EU in Irish
law; sets procedures, award criteria,
life-cycle costing, PINs, and notices. Legal framework enabling innovation partnerships
and pre-market engagement under Irish law.
IT Other D.Lgs. 36/2023 – Codice dei contratti
pubblici – Art. 75 (Partenariato per
l’innovazione)
2023 Defines the innovation partnership
procedure for staged R&D and subsequent acquisition when market solutions do not
exist. Art. 75 – Partenariato per
l’innovazione (innovation partnership).
IT Fund Appaltinnovativi.gov – Portale
nazionale per gli appalti di innovazione
(AgID / Dip. Trasformazione Digitale)
2019 National portal aggregating innovation
challenges, PCP/PPI calls and resources;
supports administrations and economic operators. Publication of
needs/consultations/appalti; guidance and
resources; Smarter Italy initiatives.
IT Other ARIA S.p.A. – Appalti innovativi
(pagina ufficiale)
2020 Regional central purchasing body promotes
and implements innovative procurement
(incl. pre-commercial procurement). Pre-commercial procurements;
innovation-oriented tenders; market
consultations.
IT Other Intercent-ER – Consultazioni
preliminari di mercato (pagina ufficiale)
2020 Regional central purchasing body uses preliminary market consultations to inform
tender design. Structured use of preliminary
market consultations by Intercent-ER.
LT Programme Republic of Lithuania Law on Public
Procurement — Market consultations
instrument (‘rinkos konsultacijos’)
2017 Authorises buyers to conduct market
consultations and publish draft technical
specifications for comment via the e-procurement system. Legal basis for
market consultations and associated notices.
LT Programme Innovative Public Procurement
Guidelines (Inovatyvių viešųjų pirkimų gairės) – EM + VPT + Innovation
Agency
2023 Guidelines prepared by the Ministry of
Economy and Innovation with VPT and Innovation Agency experts to increase the
scale of innovative procurement. Practical
guidance and templates to implement
innovative procurement under VPĮ.
LT Programme Republic of Lithuania Law on Public
Procurement (Viešųjų pirkimų įstatymas) — Innovation partnership
provisions (e.g., Art. 73–74)
2017 Lists ‘innovation partnership’ among
procedure types and sets conditions and timelines for running such procedures under
Lithuanian law. Innovation partnership
procedure in national law (phased R&D +
acquisition).
LU Programme European Commission — Country
Report 2024 on Innovation Procurement
(Luxembourg)
2024 Notes that Luxembourg’s legal framework
enables innovation procurement but lacks a coordinated strategy, competence centre, or
systematic monitoring. Recommendation to
210
establish competence centre and action plan
to expand innovation procurement use.
LU Programme Law of 8 April 2018 on Public
Procurement (Loi du 8 avril 2018 sur les
marchés publics)
2018 Sets out procedures including the innovation
partnership and allows contracting
authorities to use award criteria other than price (innovation, quality). National legal
framework incorporating innovation
partnership procedure from EU Directive.
LU Other GovTech Lab Luxembourg —
Innovation Partnership Procurement
Model
2024 The GovTech Lab, under the Ministry for
Digitalisation, runs calls for innovative
solutions via an innovation partnership process involving proof of concept and pilot
stages. Innovation partnership call for
solutions, with pilot stage and potential
acquisition by government.
LV Programme Law on the Procurements of Public
Service Providers (Sabiedrisko
pakalpojumu sniedzēju iepirkumu likums) — includes innovation
partnership
2017 Defines ‘innovation partnership procedure’
and applies EU utilities rules in Latvia.
Innovation partnership and flexible
procedures for utilities.
LV Fund Innovation procurement – Ministry of
Economics (EM) policy page
2023 Explains the approach, legal basis and procedures (incl. innovation partnership) to
enable innovation procurement in Latvia.
Policy guidance; references to procedures
and support actions.
LV Programme Public Procurement Law (Publisko
iepirkumu likums) — includes
innovation partnership procedure
2017 Lists ‘innovation partnership procedure’
among procurement procedures; sets related rules on notices, pricing and stages.
Innovation partnership procedure under
Latvian law.
LV Programme Guidelines for implementing innovation procurement (Vadlīnijas inovāciju
iepirkuma īstenošanai)
2021 Prepared by Ministry of Economics with IUB; covers essence of innovation
procurement, implementation under Latvian
law, practical examples and tips. Step-by-step guidance, templates and
examples for contracting authorities.
MT Programme Public Procurement Regulations (Subsidiary Legislation 601.03) —
transposes Directive 2014/24/EU
2016 Consolidated rules for public procurement; DoC directs users to the latest S.L. 601.03
text on Legislation Malta. Legal framework
enabling innovation partnership and
pre-market engagement.
MT Programme Utilities Procurement Regulations (S.L.
601.05) — transposes Directive
2014/25/EU
2016 ePPS legal page points to the up-to-date
consolidation of S.L. 601.05 on Legislation
Malta. Utilities framework including competitive/negotiated procedures and
innovation partnership.
MT Programme Guidance on Innovation Procurement
(Department of Contracts)
2021 Explains importance, stakeholders and process of innovation procurement; reflects
public consultation responses. Guidance,
concepts and process overview for PPI/PCP/innovation partnership under
Maltese/EU rules.
NL Other Aanbestedingswet 2012 — Art. 2.25
Marktconsultatie
2016 Authorises market consultations before tendering; non-discrimination and
transparency principles apply. Pre-tender
market consultations (marktconsultatie).
211
NL Programme PIANOo — Handreiking Marktconsultatie / Stappenplan
marktconsultatie
2023 Defines market consultation and provides step-by-step approach to lawfully organise it
and use insights to sharpen the question.
Guidance and steps for structured PMC.
NL Other Gids Proportionaliteit (3e herziening, 1
januari 2022) — verplicht te hanteren
2022 Explains how to keep demands proportional throughout all phases; explicitly states the
guide is mandatory in EU, national and
multi-party negotiated procedures. Mandatory application of proportionality
principles and concrete rules/examples.
NL Programme Aanbestedingswet 2012 — Art. 2.31a
Innovatiepartnerschap
2016 Implements the EU innovation partnership procedure in Dutch law, enabling phased
R&D and purchase with one procedure.
Innovation partnership (innovatiepartnerschap) as a procedure type
under Dutch law.
PL Programme Public Procurement Law (Act of 11
September 2019) — Preliminary Market
Consultations (Art. 84)
2019 Authorises buyers to conduct preliminary
market consultations to prepare the procurement and inform suppliers about
plans and requirements; requires publication
of intent and subject on the buyer’s website. Legal basis for pre-tender market
consultations (wstępne konsultacje
rynkowe).
PL Programme Public Procurement Law (Act of 11
September 2019) — Innovation
Partnership (Dział VI; Art. 189–207)
2019 Defines innovation partnership as a
procedure to meet a need for an innovative
product, service or works not available on the market; allows phasing aligned with R&D,
including prototyping and subsequent
purchase. Innovation partnership procedure
(partnerstwo innowacyjne).
PL Programme Model documents for organising
preliminary market consultations (UZP)
2022 UZP published a set of model documents:
rules, notice, and application form for preliminary market consultations. Standard
templates to run lawful PMCs.
PT Fund PROCURE+i — Centro de
Competências em Compras Públicas de
Inovação (ANI)
2021 ANI and IMPIC developed services to
support CPI initiatives; the centre aims to help buyers improve purchasing practices
including innovation. Helpdesk, guidance,
training and tools for PCP/PPI and
innovation partnership.
PT Programme Código dos Contratos Públicos —
Artigo 35.º-A Consulta preliminar ao
mercado
2017 Authorises buyers to conduct preliminary
market consultations to prepare procedures and inform suppliers of plans and
requirements. Legal basis for preliminary
market consultations (consulta preliminar ao
mercado).
PT Programme Compras Públicas de Inovação —
toolkit (BASE)
2023 Three-module toolkit: strategic (policy),
operational (buyers), legal/operational (legal
services) with ‘how-to’ guidance and templates. Guidance modules and model
documents to run PCP/PPI.
RO Fund Ghid de Achiziții Publice – ANAP 2023 ANAP publishes guidelines to support procurement practice, which include
innovation procurement approaches.
National procurement guidance including
innovation procurement examples.
212
RO Other Legea 98/2016 privind achizițiile
publice
2016 Defines criteria, phases, and use of the innovation partnership procedure when
market solutions are not adequate.
Parteneriat pentru inovare (innovation
partnership).
RO Programme Parteneriat pentru inovare – Ghid rapid
de practicieni (RO translation of EU
guide)
2021 Describes three phases, selection criteria,
price-quality award basis, and risk sharing in
innovation partnerships. Practitioner’s guide for implementing innovation partnerships
under the law.
RO Other Legea 98/2016 – Art. 139 'Consultarea
pieței'
2016 Enables pre-tender consultations ('consultarea pieței') via public notices
inviting experts/suppliers to provide input.
Legal basis for preliminary market
consultations.
SE Programme LOU — Förkommersiell upphandling
(PCP) i svensk praxis (stöd via
vägledningar)
2020 Authorities use PCP in line with EU PCP
Communication and national guidance from
Upphandlingsmyndigheten/Vinnova. Structured PCP process; early market
dialogue.
SE Programme Upphandlingsmyndigheten —
Vägledning om innovationsupphandling
2024 Guidance, tools and examples for innovation partnerships, needs assessment, functional
requirements and market dialogue. Guidance
suites, checklists and templates.
SE Programme Lag (2016:1145) om offentlig upphandling (LOU) —
Innovationspartnerskap
2016 Transposes EU innovation partnership into Swedish law; enables phased R&D with
subsequent purchase in one procedure when market solutions are unavailable.
Innovationspartnerskap as a procedure under
LOU.
SE Fund Lag (2016:1146) om upphandling inom försörjningssektorerna (LUF) —
Innovationspartnerskap
2016 Transposes utilities directive including innovation partnership and flexible
procedures to support innovative solutions.
Innovationspartnerskap within utilities
procurement.
SE Fund Vinnova — Stöd till
innovationsupphandling (inkl.
förkommersiell upphandling, PCP)
2023 Vinnova provides funding calls, methods
and case support for PCP/PPI and challenge-driven innovation in public
services. Funding programmes, methods and
coaching for PCP/PPI.
SI Programme Zakon o javnem naročanju (ZJN-3) —
prenos EU direktiv
2016 Article 1 of ZJN-3 states it transposes Directive 2014/24/EU into Slovenian law.
National implementation of EU innovation
procurement framework.
SI Programme ZJN-3 — Predhodno preverjanje trga
(64. člen)
2016 Authorises contracting authorities to conduct
market consultations before starting
procurement to prepare it and inform economic operators of plans and
requirements. Legal basis for preliminary
market consultations (predhodno preverjanje
trga).
SI Programme Zakon o javnem naročanju (ZJN-3) —
Partnerstvo za inovacije (43. člen)
2016 Transposes EU innovation partnership into
Slovenian law; enables phased R&D with subsequent purchase in one procedure.
Partnerstvo za inovacije (innovation
partnership) as a ZJN-3 procedure.
213
SK Programme Zákon č. 343/2015 Z. z. — Prípravné (predbežné) trhové konzultácie (§ 25
ods. 1)
2015 Authorises contracting authorities to conduct market consultations before starting the
procurement to prepare it and inform
economic operators of planned procedures. Legal basis for preliminary market
consultations (prípravné/predbežné trhové
konzultácie).
SK Programme Všeobecná metodika verejného obstarávania inovatívnych riešení (ÚVO
/ ZEVO)
2020 Explains suitable procedures for procuring innovative solutions, including innovation
partnership; notes Slovak legal basis in §§
78–80 and § 97 of the Act. Methodology, steps and examples for VO of innovative
solutions.
SK Programme Zákon č. 343/2015 Z. z. o verejnom obstarávaní — Inovatívne partnerstvo (§
97)
2015 Transposes EU innovation partnership into Slovak law; enables phased R&D with
subsequent purchase in one procedure when
market solutions are unavailable. Inovatívne
partnerstvo as a procedure under the Public
Procurement Act.
Source: Supporting Study to the Impact Assessment of the EIA
EN EN
EUROPEAN COMMISSION
Brussels, 9.9.2026
SWD(2026) 568 final
COMMISSION STAFF WORKING DOCUMENT
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY OF THE IMPACT ASSESSMENT REPORT
Accompanying the document
Proposal for a
REGULATION OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
establishing a framework of measures for strengthening the Union innovation
ecosystem and amending Regulation (EU) 2017/1001 (European Innovation Act)
{COM(2026) 567 final} - {SEC(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 567 final}
1
Executive Summary Sheet
Impact Assessment of the European Innovation Act
A. Need for action
What is the problem and why is it a problem at EU level?
The European Union (EU) is a global leader in scientific research, but this strength does not translate into a comparable level of innovation performance and commercial success. Too many innovative ideas developed in Europe fail to reach the market, scale across borders, or generate new growth sectors. Over the past years, the Union has taken significant steps to address these challenges. EU funding programmes, such as Horizon Europe, the Innovation Fund, the Digital Europe Programme and InvestEU, as well as initiatives to deepen capital markets and strengthen the European Research Area, have improved framework conditions for innovation. However, important barriers persist, particularly in the transition from research to market deployment. The EU continues to face difficulties in commercialising and scaling innovation due to fragmented, costly and insufficiently standardised IP valuation practices, which hinder the monetisation of intellectual property and limit access to finance. In addition, R&D procurement remains underused as a tool to support research and innovation. Legal uncertainty regarding the procurement of R&D services, together with divergent national rules and practices, hampers the implementation of cross-border R&D procurement and limits the diffusion of innovative solutions across the Single Market.
What should be achieved?
The general objective is to improve the functioning of the Single Market for innovation by reducing barriers to the development, testing and scale-up of innovative solutions, thereby speeding up their commercialisation in the EU. Specific objectives aim to (i) Lower valuation costs, and increase licensing and transfer of IPRs in the EU in the next 4 years, (ii) Increase spending on procurement of R&D services in the next 5 years, and (iii) Increase the procurement of EU-based R&D solutions in the next five years.
What is the value added of action at the EU level (subsidiarity)?
The problems addressed by this initiative have a strong cross-border dimension and cannot be effectively tackled by Member States acting alone. Innovation ecosystems, markets and value chains are increasingly cross-border, while regulatory and market conditions remain fragmented along national lines. Moreover, increasing the commercialisation and diffusion of innovation requires a critical mass of innovators, investors, buyers and users that individual Member States cannot achieve in isolation. EU action is therefore the most effective way to address the identified problems. In R&D procurement, divergent national rules and practices hinder the participation of innovative firms across borders and limit the implementation of joint cross-border procurements. Only Union action can provide a common framework that opens opportunities across the Single Market and facilitates cross-border procurement activities. Similarly, no Member State can establish an IP valuation framework that is recognised and trusted across the entire Single Market. A common EU approach is therefore necessary to improve the valuation, financing and cross-border use of intellectual property assets.
B. Solutions
What are the various options to achieve the objectives?
In addition to the Baseline, the Impact Assessment examined three potential measures, with each measure having different options/versions.
2
Measure 1. Establishing IP valuation methodology and facilitating licensing. Several versions of Measure 1 were envisaged, reflecting different levels of ambition and scope. Version A would mandate EUIPO, through the European Innovation Act, to develop an EU-wide IP valuation framework. Version B would focus on establishing an EU-wide digital marketplace functioning as a secondary market for IP transactions. Version C would assign EUIPO the role of an EU-wide IP competence centre providing advice, training and support on IP valuation. Version D would combine the valuation framework and the marketplace, while Version E would integrate all three elements, representing the most comprehensive approach to addressing barriers to IP-backed finance. Measure 2. Establish procedures for R&D procurement for public buyers, including cross-border R&D procurement and rules to promote the use of innovation-friendly techniques within R&D procurement. Two versions of the measure were considered. Version A would recommend the use of innovation-friendly techniques for R&D procurement by public buyers, while Version B would make the use of such techniques mandatory for R&D procurement carried out by public buyers. Measure 3. Preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement for public buyers. Three versions of the measure were considered. Version A would introduce a non-mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement. Version B would introduce a mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement with flexibility clauses allowing non-EU suppliers to participate where there are no sufficient suitable tenderers within the Union or where compliance would impose disproportionate costs. Version C would introduce a strict mandatory preference for EU-made solutions in R&D procurement, with no exceptions for public buyers.
What are different stakeholders' views? Who supports which option?
Extensive consultation with stakeholders shows a broad consensus for EU action to promote the commercialisation of EU innovative solutions. Stakeholders broadly supported measures to improve the valuation and monetisation of intellectual property (IP). Respondents highlighted the lack of trusted and widely accepted IP valuation standards, limited experience with IP valuation among startups and scaleups, and the resulting difficulties in accessing finance. Industry representatives, startups and business associations identified the valuation of intangible assets as a major barrier to raising capital, while most stakeholders supported the development of an EU-wide IP valuation methodology to enhance comparability, trust and cross-border use of IP assets. Stakeholders also expressed strong support for measures to strengthen innovation procurement. Respondents considered current procurement procedures to be overly complex, slow and fragmented across Member States, limiting participation by innovative firms and startups. Public authorities, business associations, SMEs and startup representatives supported a dedicated framework for R&D procurement that would provide greater legal certainty, facilitate cross-border procurement, promote innovation-friendly purchasing practices, and reduce barriers for innovative companies. Many stakeholders also supported greater use of quality- and performance- based criteria rather than an exclusive focus on the lowest price. Finally, many stakeholders supported providing greater clarity on how procurement can contribute to strengthening Europe's technological sovereignty and reducing strategic dependencies, including through procurement practices that support the development and deployment of innovative European solutions.
C. Impacts of the preferred option
What are the benefits of the preferred option (if any, otherwise of main ones)?
3
Compared to the baseline, the preferred option is expected to support the Commission's simplification agenda by reducing administrative burdens and legal fragmentation across the Single Market. It is estimated to generate net administrative cost savings of around EUR 1.1 billion in the first year of implementation, even after having accounted for adjustment costs. The preferred option is also expected to generate significant economic benefits by improving access to finance for innovative firms and strengthening demand for innovative solutions. More harmonised IP valuation practices are estimated to mobilise an additional EUR 10.2 billion in IP- backed finance annually, while improved R&D procurement frameworks are expected to increase market opportunities for innovative firms, generating an estimated EUR 25.9 billion in additional annual profits. At the macroeconomic level, the European Innovation Act is estimated to increase EU GDP by around 0.25–0.42% over a ten-year horizon compared with the baseline scenario. This corresponds to a cumulative GDP gain of up to EUR 452 billion and around 507 000 additional jobs ten years after implementation.
What are the costs of the preferred option (if any, otherwise of main ones)?
The costs of the preferred option are limited and consist mainly of one-off adjustment costs for public authorities and contracting bodies associated with the implementation of the new frameworks for IP valuation and pre-commercial procurement. These costs are estimated to be significantly outweighed by the administrative cost savings generated through greater harmonisation, legal clarity and simplification across the innovation ecosystem. In addition, the preferred option is expected to generate limited indirect economic costs associated with measures promoting the uptake of EU-based innovative solutions. These costs are estimated at approximately EUR 464 million. Overall, the benefits of the preferred option are expected to substantially exceed its costs.
What are the impacts on SMEs and competitiveness?
The preferred option is expected to strengthen the competitiveness of the European economy by improving access to finance for innovative firms, increasing opportunities to bring innovative solutions to market, and supporting the diffusion of innovation across the Single Market. It is also expected to contribute to the EU's technological competitiveness and strategic autonomy by facilitating the development and uptake of innovative European solutions. SMEs and startups are expected to benefit in particular from more harmonised IP valuation practices, which will reduce costs, improve access to IP-backed finance, and facilitate the commercialisation of intellectual property. They are also expected to benefit from innovation- friendly R&D procurement procedures that reduce barriers to participation and create new market opportunities for innovative firms.
Will there be significant impacts on national budgets and administrations?
No significant negative impacts on national budgets or administrations are expected. While public authorities and public buyers will incur limited one-off adjustment costs to implement the new frameworks, these costs are expected to be more than offset by administrative cost savings resulting from the harmonisation and simplification of pre-commercial procurement procedures. The costs associated with the development and operation of the EU-wide IP valuation framework will be borne by the European Union Intellectual Property Office (EUIPO) and financed from its own budget. No additional transfers from the EU budget or Member States are expected to be required.
Will there be other significant impacts?
Beyond impacts on GDP and employment, the European Innovation Act is expected to generate
4
wider societal benefits by strengthening research-to-market pathways for technologies addressing climate change and environmental degradation
Proportionality?
The preferred option would achieve the objectives of the initiative while remaining proportionate to the problems identified. A fragmented approach across Member States would be unable to provide sufficient legal certainty for the use of R&D procurement across the Union and would continue to hinder cross-border procurement activities. Similarly, without a common EU framework, IP valuation practices would remain fragmented, reducing comparability, trust and the effective use of intellectual property assets across the Single Market.
D. Follow up
By the fourth year from the entry into force and every five years thereafter, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of this Regulation in light of the objectives that it pursues, and shall present a report thereon to the European Parliament, to the Council and to the European Economic and Social Committee.
ET ET
EUROOPA KOMISJON
Brüssel, 9.9.2026 COM(2026) 567 final
2026/0264 (COD)
Ettepanek:
EUROOPA PARLAMENDI JA NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS,
millega kehtestatakse meetmete raamistik liidu innovatsiooniökosüsteemi tugevdamiseks
ja muudetakse määrust (EL) 2017/1001 (Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus)
{SEC(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 568 final}
(EMPs kohaldatav tekst)
ET 1 ET
SELETUSKIRI
1. ETTEPANEKU TAUST
1.1. Ettepaneku põhjused ja eesmärgid
Euroopa Liit on teadusuuringute valdkonnas maailmas juhtpositsioonil, andes märkimisväärse
osa maailma kvaliteetsest teadusväljundist. See tugevus ei tähenda siiski samaväärset edukust
innovatsioonis ja kaubanduses ELi ühtsel turul ja üle maailma. Liiga sageli ei jõua Euroopas
väljatöötatud uuenduslikud ideed turule, neid ei võeta kasutusele piiriüleselt ega uute
kasvavate sektorite loomiseks. Selle tulemusena kasutab liit vaid osaliselt ära majanduse ja
ühiskonna võimekust, mille aluseks on tema teaduslik ja tehnoloogiline tugevus, ning see
takistab ka ülemaailmselt konkurentsivõimeliste ettevõtete tekkimist, mis vähendab Euroopa
suutlikkust tagada elutähtsaid tehnoloogiaid ja väärtusahelaid ning tootlikkuse pikaajalist
kasvu.
Uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamise, turuleviimise ja ulatuslikuma kasutuselevõtmise
tingimuste parandamine on kujunenud keskseks prioriteediks komisjoni 2024.–2029.
aasta poliitilises tegevuskavas, milles teadusuuringud ja innovatsioon on kesksel kohal, et
parandada Euroopa konkurentsivõimet ja kestlikku heaolu. Samuti on see oluline liidu
vastupanuvõime, majandusjulgeoleku ja strateegilise sõltumatuse tugevdamiseks aina enam
polariseeruvas geopoliitilises keskkonnas. Sellega seoses aitab kavandatav määrus kaasa ELi
idu- ja kasvufirmade strateegia1 rakendamisele ning vastab volinik Zaharieva missioonikirjas
esitatud ülesandele töötada välja raamistik, mis hõlbustab uuenduslike lahenduste katsetamist,
rahastamist ja laiemat kasutuselevõtmist ELis.
Viimase kahe aastakümne jooksul on ELi majanduskasv olnud aeglasem kui teistes suurtes
majandusriikides, eelkõige Ameerika Ühendriikides ja Hiinas, kusjuures sisemajanduse
koguprodukti taseme erinevus on suurenenud. Selle erinevuse peamine põhjus on tootlikkuse
aeglasem kasv ELis. Kuna teadusuuringud ja innovatsioon on need, mille tulemusena
saavutatakse suur osa tootlikkuse kasvust, on liidu suutlikkus muuta teadmised
turuleviidavateks uuenduslikeks lahendusteks tema pikaajalise konkurentsivõime ja heaolu
otsustava tähtsusega tegur. See suutlikkus määrab ka liidu võime vähendada ülemäärast
strateegilist sõltuvust, säilitada oma tegevusvabadus ning tagada turvaline juurdepääs
elutähtsale tehnoloogiale, toodetele ja tööstussuutlikkusele.
Peamine probleem seisneb struktuursetes tõketes kogu innovatsioonitsükli jooksul. Kuigi ELi
tulemused varase etapi teadusuuringutes on head, esineb püsivaid raskusi üleminekul
uuringutulemustelt turuleviimisvalmis toodetele ja laiendamiskõlblikele ettevõtetele.
Innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel võivad ette tulla kaks suurt kitsaskohta: turustamisviive, mille
puhul projektid jäävad erainvesteeringute kaasamiseks liiga riskantseks või killustatuks, ning
kasvuviive, mille puhul ettevõtjatel on finants-, regulatiivsete ja turupiirangute tõttu raskusi
laienemisega. Need kitsaskohad vähendavad motivatsiooni investeerida ning piiravad uute
innovaatiliste ettevõtjate ja sektorite tekkimist.
Viimastel aastatel on liit nende probleemide lahendamisel suurte sammudega edasi liikunud.
Innovatsiooni raamtingimusi on aidanud parandada ELi rahastamisprogrammid, nagu
programm „Euroopa horisont“, taaste- ja vastupidavusrahastu, innovatsioonifond, programm
1 Komisjoni teatis Euroopa Parlamendile, nõukogule, Euroopa Majandus- ja Sotsiaalkomiteele ning
Regioonide Komiteele „ELi idu- ja kasvufirmade strateegia. Euroopa kui eelistatud alustamis- ja
laienemiskoht“, COM/2025/270 final, https://eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-
content/ET/TXT/?uri=celex:52025DC0270.
ET 2 ET
„Digitaalne Euroopa“ ja programm „InvestEU“, ning algatused, mille eesmärk on suurendada
kapitaliturgusid ja tugevdada Euroopa teadusruumi. Need jõupingutused toetavad ka liidu
laiemat eesmärki tugevdada strateegilise tähtsusega sektorites vastupanuvõimet, valmisolekut
ja tehnoloogilist suutlikkust.
Nendele edusammudele vaatamata püsivad liikmesriikide vahel suured tõkked ja
erinevused, eelkõige üleminekul teadusuuringutelt turuleviimisele. Need tõkked mitte ainult
ei kahjusta innovatsiooni toimimist, vaid ka lükkavad edasi selliste tehnoloogiate laiemat
kasutuselevõtmist, mis on Euroopa julgeoleku, vastupanuvõime ja majandusliku suveräänsuse
jaoks eluliselt vajalikud.
Esiteks on teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevate
hangete turud selge õigusraamistiku puudumise tõttu endiselt vähe arenenud. ELi
riigihankedirektiivid hõlmavad teadus- ja arendusteenuseid üksnes juhul, kui on täidetud
mõlemad järgmised tingimused:
• lepingust tuleneb kasu üksnes avaliku sektori hankijale tema enda tegevuse
läbiviimiseks ja
• teenuse eest tasub täielikult avaliku sektori hankija.
Selle tulemusena jääb märkimisväärne osa teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetest, sealhulgas
kommertskasutusele eelnevad hanked, nende direktiivide kohaldamisalast välja. Pärast seda,
kui komisjon selgitas kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete mõistet oma 2007. aasta
teatises,2 on seda liiki teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete arv suurenenud ning edujuhtumid
näitavad, et selle vahendi strateegiline kasutamine võimaldab ELil kõrgtehnoloogia turgudel
taas juhtpositsiooni ja strateegilise autonoomia saavutada. Kogu ELis on areng
investeeringute taseme tõstmiseks endiselt siiski liiga aeglane ja ebaühtlane. Peamised
põhjused on ühtlustatud õigusnormide puudumine ja selle tõttu tekkinud erinevad tavad
liikmesriikides, õiguskindlusetus ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste ühishangete
vähene kasutamine, kuigi selliseid hankeid on sageli vaja uuenduslike tehnoloogiate
väljatöötamiseks otsustava tähtsusega rahalise mahu saavutamiseks. See on eriti
problemaatiline strateegilistes sektorites, kus hajus nõudlus, dubleeritud riiklikud
lähenemisviisid ja sõltuvus ELi-välistest tarnijatest võivad liidule tekitada haavatavusi ja
tarneriske. Lisaks tehakse ELi riigihangete raamistiku (riigihangete õigusakti) eelseisva
läbivaatamise raames ettepanek jätta sellest välja kõik teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete
vormid.
Sellised teadus- ja arendusteenuste riigihanked on väga olulised, et luua uuenduslikke
lahendusi, mis võivad parandada avalike teenuste kvaliteeti ja tulemuslikkust, lahendada
ühiskonnaprobleeme ning luua ELis uuenduslike lahenduste ja tehnoloogiate jaoks piisava
tööstussuutlikkuse, et kaitsta ELi majandusjulgeolekut ja strateegilist autonoomiat. Need on
ka peamine vahend elutähtsa tehnoloogia turu arengu kiirendamiseks, Euroopa tööstusliku ja
tehnoloogilise baasi tugevdamiseks, varustuskindluse parandamiseks ning selle tagamiseks, et
strateegiliselt olulist suutlikkust arendatakse liidus ja võetakse selles kasutusele. Teised
maailma juhtivad majandusriigid investeerivad teadus- ja arendusteenuste riigihangetesse 5–8
korda rohkem kui EL3. Sellega, kui avaliku sektori investeeringuid teadus- ja arendusteenuste
2 Komisjoni teatis Euroopa Parlamendile, Nõukogule, Euroopa Majandus- ja Sotsiaalkomiteele ning
Regioonide Komiteele - Kommertskasutusele eelnevad hanked: Innovatsiooni kiirendamine
jätkusuutlike ja kõrgekvaliteediliste avalike teenuste tagamiseks Euroopas, 14.12.2007, KOM(2007)
799 lõplik. 3 EL kulutab teadus- ja arendustegevusele 0,6 % riigihangetest, USA 3,5 % ja Lõuna-Korea 5 %.
Investeeringute suurendamine 3 %ni kõigist ELi teadus- ja arendusteenuste riigihangetest tooks kaasa
ET 3 ET
hangetesse suurendataks, nii et need moodustaksid kõigist ELi riigihangetest 0,6 % asemel
3 % ehk 17,28 miljardi euro asemel 86,4 miljardit eurot, saaks EL suurendada avaliku sektori
investeeringuid teadus- ja arendustegevusse umbes 0,5 % võrra SKPst. Arvestades et see võib
samas mahus suurendada teadus- ja arendustegevusse tehtavaid erainvesteeringuid, võib
teadus- ja arendustegevuse investeeringute kogusumma ELis seega suureneda 2,2 %-lt 3 %-le
SKPst4.
Teiseks takistab teadusuuringute ja innovatsiooni tulemuste turuleviimist endiselt ebapiisav
selgus ja võrreldavus intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramisel ja rahalisel
väljendamisel. Praegune innovatsioon põhineb suures osas immateriaalsel varal, kusjuures
teatud juhtivates ettevõtetes moodustab üle 90 % ettevõtja väärtusest intellektuaalomand.
Kuid ELis kasutatakse intellektuaalomandit rahastuse tagatisena harva. Kuna ELi
finantseerimisasutused keskenduvad endiselt materiaalsele varale ja traditsioonilisele
raamatupidamisele, on intellektuaalomandipõhiste varade suure osakaaluga ettevõtjatel
raskusi rahastuse tagamisega. Selle tulemusena kaasavad ELi idufirmad kümnendaks
tegevusaastaks ligikaudu 50 % vähem kapitali kui USA idufirmad. See ebakõla on vähese
varaga innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele suure kasvu perioodil tekitanud rahastamispuudujäägi,
mille hinnanguline suurus on kuni 18 miljardit eurot aastas5. Intellektuaalomandipõhise vara
hindamise ühtlustatud metoodika puudumine on üks peamisi põhjuseid, miks ELis puudub
intellektuaalomandiga tagatav rahastamine. See tekitas liikmesriikides erinevad tingimused
selliste varade kasutamiseks ettevõtja rahastamisel, sealhulgas võlapõhise rahastamise
tagatisena, ning nende arvessevõtmiseks omakapitaliinvesteeringutes ja muudes
rahastamisotsustes. Teised peamised põhjused on, et kogu ELi hõlmav immateriaalse vara
järelturg ei ole väljakujunenud ning finantseerimisasutustes ja innovaatilistes idufirmades
puuduvad intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamisega seotud oskused. See vähendab ühtsel
turul ettevõtjate juurdepääsu kapitalile ning ühtlasi takistab nende piiriülest kasvu ja nendesse
investeerimist. Selle tulemusena on ELi ettevõtjad teiste riikide, näiteks USA, Hiina ja Lõuna-
Korea, ettevõtjatega võrreldes innovatsiooni kasutuselevõtmisel ja turuleviimisel vähem
edukad, eelkõige süvatehnoloogias ja murrangulise innovatsiooni sektorites.
Seega võib käesolev ettepanek nende kahe tõkke kõrvaldamisega aidata suurel määral
parandada teadus- ja arendustegevuse investeeringute ühtse turu toimimist ja
intellektuaalomandipõhiste varade turuleviimist, mis toetab Euroopa sõltumatust ja
konkurentsivõimet. Samuti aitaks see tagada, et Euroopa hoiab rahandust ülal ja võtab
elutähtsa tehnoloogia ja sellega seotud intellektuaalomandipõhise vara laiemalt kasutusele
kooskõlas oma julgeoleku, vastupanuvõime ja strateegilise autonoomia eesmärkidega. Seda
arvesse võttes viiakse käesoleva ettepanekuga ellu president von der Leyeni 2024.–2027.
aasta komisjoni poliitilisi suuniseid, milles peetakse prioriteetseks seada teadusuuringud ja
innovatsioon majanduse keskmesse. Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus tehti teatavaks ELi idu-
ja kasvufirmade strateegias ning ELi konkurentsivõime kompassis kui üks peamisi algatusi,
millega tugevdatakse ELi innovatsiooni ökosüsteemi ja suurendatakse suutlikkust
ülemaailmselt konkureerida.
täiendavaid avaliku sektori investeeringuid teadus- ja arendustegevusse mahus 0,5 % SKPst (EU wide
benchmarking of innovation procurement policy frameworks and investments). 4 2023. aastal moodustasid avaliku ja erasektori investeeringud teadus- ja arendustegevusse ELis 2,2 %
SKPst, samal ajal kui Jaapanis oli see näitaja 3,3 %, USAs 3,46 % ja Lõuna-Koreas 4,93 % (Science,
Research and Innovation Performance (SRIP) report 2024, Euroopa Komisjon). 5 Euroopa Investeerimispank (2025). Investment Report 2024/2025: Innovation, integration and simplification in
Europe.
ET 4 ET
Algatuse üldine eesmärk on parandada innovatsiooni puhul ühtse turu toimimist, vähendades
struktuurseid tõkkeid, et ELis kiirendada uuenduslike lahenduste turuleviimist. See eesmärk
aitab otseselt kaasa liidu laiematele prioriteetidele, milleks on konkurentsivõime
suurendamine, kestliku majanduskasvu edendamine ja tehnoloogilise suveräänsuse
suurendamine, ja tugevdab samal ajal ka majandusjulgeolekut, vastupanuvõimet ja liidu
suutlikkust tegutseda strateegiliselt olulistes valdkondades iseseisvalt.
Selle saavutamiseks seatakse ettepanekus konkreetsed eesmärgid. Siia kuuluvad riigihangete
osakaalu suurendamine innovatsiooni hoogustamisel ning intellektuaalomandi väärtuse
määramise, turuleviimise ja kasutamise tõhusamaks muutmine.
Euroopa innovatsioonimääruses on nende eesmärkide saavutamiseks ette nähtud
• liidu tasandil luua teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete, sealhulgas
kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete ühtlustatud raamistik ning
• anda volitus Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametile intellektuaalomandiga
tagatava rahastamise pädevuskeskuse loomiseks liidu tasandil, kogu liidu jaoks
intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise raamistiku loomiseks ja kogu liitu hõlmava
kauplemiskoha loomiseks, mis on mõeldud intellektuaalomandi turuleviimiseks.
Kõnealuseid sõlmküsimusi ühtsel ja sihipärasel viisil käsitledes soovitakse kavandatava
määrusega tagada, et Euroopas väljatöötatud uuenduslikke ideid oleks paremini võimalik
teadusuuringutest turule edasi viia ja piiriüleselt kasutusele võtta, ning aidata kaasa liidu
pikaajalisele konkurentsivõimele ja heaolule, samuti liidu vastupanuvõimele,
majandusjulgeolekule ja strateegilisele autonoomiale.
1.2. Kooskõla poliitikavaldkonnas praegu kehtivate õigusnormidega
Praegu ei ole liidus terviklikku õigusraamistikku, mis käsitleks konkreetselt horisontaalseid
tõkkeid, mis mõjutavad uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamist, katsetamist ja kogu ühtsel
turul ulatuslikumat kasutuselevõtmist. Teadusuuringute ja innovatsiooni valdkonnas
keskendub liidu praegune poliitika eelkõige teadmiste loomise toetamisele, koostöö
edendamisele ning teadus- ja innovatsioonitegevuse rahastamisele, ning vaid vähesel määral
tegeldakse raamtingimustega, mis reguleerivad üleminekut teadusuuringutelt turuleviimisele.
Kavandatav määrus täiendab olemasolevaid algatusi, tegeldes innovatsioonitsükli allesjäänud
kitsaskohtadega, eelkõige nendega, mis on seotud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete
kasutamisega ning innovaatiliste ettevõtjate rahastamisega intellektuaalomandi
turuleviimiseks ja kasutuselevõtmiseks.
Seda arvestades on liidu poliitika kõige olulisemad põhimõtted teadusuuringute ja
innovatsiooni valdkonnas järgmised.
Euroopa teadusruum stimuleerib ja toetab struktuurselt piiriülest teadus- ja arenduskoostööd
ning teadlaste liikuvust, keskendudes peamiselt teadusuuringute ja innovatsiooniga seotud
olelusringi varastele etappidele. Osaliselt viiakse seda ellu selliste liidu programmide kaudu
nagu „Euroopa horisont“, millega rahastatakse teaduskoostööd, liikuvuskavasid ja
teadustaristuid. Samal ajal kasutatakse Euroopa teadusruumi foorumit mittesiduva
koordineerimisvahendina, mille kaudu liikmesriigid kooskõlastavad oma teaduspoliitikat,
prioriteete ja reforme.
Liidu rahastamisprogrammidest saab teadus- ja innovatsioonitegevus innovatsioonitsükli eri
etappidel suurt rahalist toetust. Eelkõige selliste programmidega nagu „Euroopa horisont“
(sealhulgas Euroopa Innovatsiooninõukogu), samuti programm „InvestEU“, programm
„Digitaalne Euroopa“, Euroopa Kaitsefond, ühtekuuluvuspoliitika fondid ja innovatsioonifond
toetatakse uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamist, tutvustamist ja teataval määral ka
ET 5 ET
ulatuslikumat kasutuselevõtmist, kasutades toetusi, segarahastamist, riskijagamismehhanisme
ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid. Ilma et see piiraks järgmist mitmeaastast
finantsraamistikku ja ELi tulevaste rahastamisprogrammide rakendamist, võib järgmises
mitmeaastases finantsraamistikus seda rahalist toetust tugevdada, suurendades liidu
suutlikkust kaasata avaliku ja erasektori investeeringuid innovatsiooni ja strateegilisse
tehnoloogiasse. Kavandatav määrus on nende liidu programmidega kooskõlas, kuna sellega ei
pakuta välja rahastamismeetmeid, vaid tõhustatakse kõigis liikmesriikides innovatsiooni
raamtingimusi, mis võivad liidu rahastamisprogramme täiendada ja aidata nende mõju mitmel
viisil suurendada.
• Mitme sellise liidu rahastamisprogrammiga toetatakse avaliku sektori hankijaid
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete läbiviimisel. Need kogemused on toonud esile ka
selle, et avaliku sektori hankijatel puudub endiselt kindlustunne kommertskasutusele
eelnevate hangete alustamiseks, sest selliste hangete ELi-ülene õigusraamistik ei ole
piisavalt selge. Samuti on avaliku sektori hankijad juhtinud tähelepanu tegevustele ja
ajale, mis neil täiendavalt kulub kommertskasutusele eelnevate piiriüleste
ühishangete korraldamiseks, sest hankelepingute sõlmimise korras on liikmesriigiti
palju erinevusi. Kavandatav määrus aitab seda probleemi lahendada, kehtestades
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevate
hangete ühiste normide ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste ühishangete,
sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevate piiriüleste hangete ühtlustatud raamistiku.
• Mõned nendest liidu rahastamisprogrammidest toetavad innovaatilisi ettevõtjaid
nende intellektuaalomandi turuleviimisel või intellektuaalomandiõiguste kasutamisel
tagatisena investeeringute saamiseks. Kogemused on näidanud, et innovaatilistel
ettevõtjatel on probleeme selliste sobivate osaliste leidmisega, kes on huvitatud
nende intellektuaalomandi või litsentsi ostmisest, ning oma
intellektuaalomandiõiguste hea investeerimisväärtuse näitamisega, kuna teadmisi
napib ning puudub kogu liidus tunnustatud väärtuse määramise raamistik ja kogu
liitu hõlmav intellektuaalomandiga kauplemise koht. Kavandatav määrus aitab seda
probleemi lahendada, laiendades Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti
ülesandeid, et luua intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise pädevuskeskus,
intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise ühine raamistik ja kogu liitu hõlmav
kauplemiskoht intellektuaalomandi turuleviimiseks.
Seega on kavandatav määrus kooskõlas liidu kehtivate õigusnormidega teadusuuringute ja
innovatsiooni valdkonnas, täiendades olemasolevaid rahastamisprogramme teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete sidusa raamistikuga ning Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti
uute ülesannetega, millega aidatakse innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel saada intellektuaalomandiga
tagatavat rahastust.
1.3. Kooskõla muude liidu tegevuspõhimõtetega
Kavandatav määrus kujutab endast sektoriülest algatust, mille eesmärk on luua
innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele kogu liidus ja kõigis sektorites võrdsed tingimused, mitte
keskenduda konkreetsetele rakendussektoritele, tehnoloogiavaldkondadele või
tööstusharudele. Selle meetmed on oma laadilt horisontaalsed ja aitavad kõrvaldada
liikmesriikides esinevaid struktuurseid tõkkeid, mis mõjutavad innovatsioonimahukat
tegevust.
Kavandatav määrus täiendab tulevast äriühingute 28. õigusraamistiku kohast äriühinguvormi
„EU Inc.“, milles esitatakse vabatahtlik ühtlustatud äriühingu raamistik kogu liidus
ET 6 ET
tegutsevatele äriühingutele. Ettepanek täiendab ka hoiuste ja investeeringute liidu reforme,
mille eesmärk on süvendada liidu kapitaliturge ja suunata rohkem erasääste omakapitali,
riskikapitali ja kasvufirmade rahastamisse, et parandada innovaatiliste ettevõtjate
rahastamisvõimalusi. Vaatamata eeldatud edusammudele õigusnormide ühtlustamisel
Euroopa Komisjoni ettepaneku „EU Inc.“ raames, säilib eeldatavasti endiselt suur erinevus
selles, kuidas ettevõtjatel on võimalik innovatsioonitsüklit läbida. Selline killustatus võib
takistada ettevõtjatel uuenduslikke lahendusi turule viia ja see võib piirata innovaatiliste
ettevõtjate kasvupotentsiaali, sealhulgas nende, mis on asutatud ühtlustatud õigusraamistiku
äriühinguvormi „EU Inc.“ alusel. Teisisõnu, kui „EU Inc.“ ettepaneku eesmärk on hõlbustada
ettevõtte asutamist ja käigus hoidmist kõikjal liidus ning aidata kaasata investeeringuid, siis
kavandatava määrusega soovitakse kõrvaldada edasisi kitsaskohti innovatsioonitsüklis ja
tagada, et ettevõtjad saavad oma uuenduslikke lahendusi kogu ühtsel turul lihtsamini arendada
ja turustada.
Samuti ei eemaldata hoiuste ja investeeringute liidu raames oodatavate edusammudega liidu
kapitaliturgude süvendamisel ja erainvesteeringute kaasamisel suuri takistusi
innovatsioonitsükli muudest osadest. Eelkõige piiravad investeerimisvalmis projektide
koondamist endiselt takistused, mis on seotud uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamise,
katsetamise, väärtuse määramise ja kiire kasutuselevõtuga. Hoiuste ja investeeringute liidu
eesmärk on seega parandada juurdepääsu rahastamisele ja toetada innovaatiliste ettevõtjate
kasvu, kavandatava määrusega aga kõrvaldatakse kitsaskohti, mis takistavad uuenduslikel
ideedel tõmmata ligi intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat rahastust, ning aidatakse innovaatilistel
ettevõtjatel kapitaliturgude paremast integratsioonist täit kasu saada.
Kavandatav määrus tugineb ka tulevastele Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutele, mis lihtsustavad
piiriüleseid hankemenetlusi ning digitaalset suhtlust ettevõtjate ja avaliku sektori asutuste
vahel. Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega luuakse ettevõtjatele digitaalne identiteet ning
võimaldatakse turvalist andmevahetust atribuutide elektrooniliste tõendite vormis ja turvalise
sidekanali kaudu. See lihtsustab litsentsimist, registreerimist, maksudeklaratsioonide esitamist
ja hankelubade saamist ning ettevõtjad ei pea enam portaalides olevat teavet dubleerima, mis
vähendab halduskoormust ja nõuete täitmisega seotud kulusid. Seepärast nähakse
kavandatava määrusega ette, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlused viiakse läbi
üksnes digitaalsel kujul ja võimaluse korral Euroopa ettevõtluskukrute või selliste
alternatiivsete elektrooniliste vahendite kaudu, mis on koostalitlusvõimelised Euroopa
ettevõtluskukrutega.
Kavandatav määrus täiendab ka valdkondlikke algatusi, nagu praegune esmatähtsate ravimite
määrus, pilvandmetöötluse ja tehisintellekti arendamise määrus, biotehnoloogia I määrus ning
tulevane kõrgtehnoloogiliste materjalide õigusakt, biotehnoloogia II määrus ja maailmamerd
käsitlev õigusakt, mille keskmes on strateegilised sektorid või tehnoloogiad eesmärgiga
tugevdada liidu positsiooni kõrgtehnoloogia suurjõuna. Vajadust mööda pakuvad need
algatused valdkonna järgi kohandatud lahendusi, kuid Euroopa innovatsioonimääruses
käsitletakse valdkonnaüleseid probleeme, millel on mõju innovatsioonile eri sektorites ja
tehnoloogiavaldkondades. Sellega ei piirata sektoripõhiseid raamistikke ega sekkuta neisse,
vaid tagatakse liidu üldise innovatsioonipoliitika sidusus.
Kavandatav määrus täiendab ka ELi riigihankedirektiive ja nende kavandatud läbivaatamist
riigihangete õigusaktiga. ELi riigihankedirektiividest on välja jäetud kommertskasutusele
eelnevad hanked, aga siiski kuuluvad nende kohaldamisalasse teatavad teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanked ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked on innovatsioonipartnerluse
menetluse kohustuslik osa. Riigihangete õigusakti ettepanekust on seevastu välja jäetud kõik
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke vormid ning praegusest innovatsioonipartnerluse
menetlusest on kohustusliku komponendina välja jäetud ka teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked,
ET 7 ET
mis on asendatud uue innovatsiooni vaidlustamise menetlusega, mille kohustuslikeks
elementideks on katseetapp ja kaubandusliku kasutuselevõtu hanke etapp, mis võib hõlmata
uuenduslike lahenduste mahtusid.
2. ÕIGUSLIK ALUS, SUBSIDIAARSUS JA PROPORTSIONAALSUS
2.1. Õiguslik alus
Kavandatava määruse õiguslik alus on Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepingu artikkel 114, mis
võimaldab liidul siseturu nõuetekohaseks toimimiseks võtta ühtlustamismeetmeid. Seda on
vaja, et kõrvaldada piiriülesed regulatiivsed ja struktuursed tõkked, mis takistavad ühtse turu
nõuetekohast toimimist. Liikmesriikide erinevad õigusnormid teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete kohta kujutavad endast tõkkeid,
mis takistavad ettevõtjatel osaleda ja pakkuda oma teenuseid avaliku sektori hankijatele eri
liikmesriikides. Samuti takistavad intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise ja turuleviimise
erinevad lähenemisviisid innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel kaasata intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat
rahastust ja oma äritegevust kogu liidus laiendada. Selline killustatud lähenemine teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangetele ning intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramisele ja turuleviimisele
takistab kaupade, teenuste ja kapitali piiriülest liikumist ühtsel turul.
2.2. Subsidiaarsus (ainupädevusse mittekuuluva valdkonna puhul)
Kavandatav määrus on kooskõlas Euroopa Liidu lepingu artikli 5 lõikes 3 sätestatud
subsidiaarsuse põhimõttega.
Liidu konkurentsivõime ja strateegilise autonoomia tugevdamiseks on väga oluline
suurendada liidu suutlikkust töötada välja, viia turule ja ulatuslikumalt kasutusele võtta
uuenduslikke lahendusi. Innovatsiooni ökosüsteemid ja innovaatiliste ettevõtjate turud on üha
enam piiriülest laadi, samal ajal kui regulatiivsed ja raamtingimused on liidu liikmesriikides
väga erinevad. See, kui liidu tasandil meetmed puuduvad, ajendab liikmesriike tõenäoliselt
rakendama veelgi ühepoolsemaid meetmeid, et tulla toime tööstuse ees seisvate
konkurentsivõime probleemidega. Sellised sammud võivad olla põhjendatud, sest sellel, kui
riiklikud meetmed jäetakse koordineerimata ja piiriüleste probleemide lahendamiseks ei võeta
riiklikke meetmeid, võib olla negatiivne ja killustatust suurendav mõju ühtse turu toimimisele.
See võib muuta liidu haavatavamaks ja liiga sõltuvaks kolmandate riikide uuenduslikest
lahendustest ja tehnoloogiast, nii et liidul ei ole võimalik ära kasutada ühtse turu eeliseid, mis
tooksid kasu riiklikele ja Euroopa ökosüsteemidele.
Eelkõige ei suudaks liikmesriigid eraldi saavutada vajalikku mahtu, et toetada
teadusuuringutelt turule üleminekut ja tulemuslikult tagada innovatsiooni ulatuslikum
kasutuselevõtt. Liikmesriikide erinevad lahendused intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramiseks
ja turuleviimiseks, et kaasata intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat rahastust, ning teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete korraldamiseks tekitavad õiguskindlusetust, suurendavad kulusid ja
piiravad innovaatiliste ettevõtjate piiriülest tegevust. Nendel erinevustel on otsene ja
tõendatav mõju ühtse turu toimimisele, sest need takistavad liidus kaupade, teenuste ja
kapitali piiriülest liikumist.
Seevastu liidu tasandi meetmetega saab kehtestada ühised raamtingimused ja tagada
koordineerimise liikmesriikide vahel, et innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel oleks võimalik arendada
innovatsiooni, meelitada ligi intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat rahastamist ja oma tegevust
kogu ühtsel turul laiendada. Liidu tasandi meetmed võimaldavad luua võrdsed tingimused,
vähendavad killustatust ja dubleerimist ning aitavad kaasa ressursside otstarbekale jaotamisele
kogu liidu piires.
ET 8 ET
Ükski liikmesriik üksi ei suuda neid probleeme tulemuslikult lahendada, sest tegemist on
kompleksse küsimusega ja siseturg peab hästi toimima, et uuenduslikke lahendusi saaks kogu
liidu piires välja töötada, katsetada, turule viia ja ulatuslikumalt kasutusele võtta. Seepärast on
liidu tasandil vaja ühtlustatud lähenemisviisi, et tagada ühtse turu hea toimimine ning leida
lahendusi liidu konkurentsivõime ja strateegilise autonoomia tugevdamiseks. Ka käesoleva
algatuse meetmed ei oleks sama tulemuslikud, kui neid rakendaksid liikmesriigid üksi, sest
käsitletavad probleemid on seotud ühtse turuga. Need ei piirdu konkreetsete liikmesriikide või
liikmesriikide rühmaga, vaid on seotud liidu tööstusbaasi ja kogu liitu hõlmavate
väärtusahelatega. Peale selle ei vasta liikmesriigi tasandi meetmed tõenäoliselt piisavalt
omavahel tihedalt seotud tarneahelate vajadustele ühtsel turul ning võivad põhjustada turu
edasist killustatust, innovatsiooni väljalekkimist ja tööstuse ümberpaigutamist teistesse
maailma osadesse ning liidu konkurentsivõime ja strateegilise autonoomia üldist nõrgenemist.
Piiriülese laadi tõttu on innovatsiooni puhul vaja liidu tasandi meetmeid, mis piirkondliku,
liikmesriigi ja kohaliku tasandi meetmeid mõjusalt täiendaksid ja tugevdaksid. Meetmete
võtmata jätmine maksab kätte kogu Euroopas. Ilma liidu täiendavate meetmeteta jääb
praegune olukord tõenäoliselt püsima ja see suurendab ohtu, et liit kaotab strateegilise
tööstussuutlikkuse ja tootmisvõime, ühtne turg killustub veelgi ning liit muutub rohe-, digi-,
kaitse- ja majandusjulgeoleku eesmärkide saavutamisel suurel määral sõltuvaks kolmandatest
riikidest. Sellel võib omakorda olla negatiivne mõju liidu majandusjulgeolekule, kaitsele,
sotsiaalsele ja territoriaalsele ühtekuuluvusele ning see on eelkõige tingitud mõjust
tööhõivele, regionaalarengule ja võrdsele juurdepääsule tööstusvõimalustele.
Kavandatud meetmed keskenduvad seega valdkondadele, milles liidu tasandi tegevused
loovad vajalike meetmete ulatuse, kiiruse ja haarde tõttu kindlasti lisaväärtust. Meetmete
eesmärk on parandada innovaatiliste ettevõtjate ärilist huvi tuua turule uuenduslikke
lahendusi. Selleks hõlbustatakse intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramist, turuleviimist ja
rahastuse saamiseks kasutamist ning esimeste klientide leidmist teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete kaudu. See suurendab tasuvust,
võimaldades paremat piiriülest koostööd, tagab innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele nende asukohast
olenemata õiglasema juurdepääsu võimalustele ning suurendab liidu suutlikkust püsida
ülemaailmses konkurentsis. Kavandatud meetmed võimaldavad suurendada ka liidu
konkurentsivõimet ja strateegilist autonoomiat ning ühtlasi järgida liidu rahvusvahelisi
kohustusi oma kaubanduspartnerite ees.
2.3. Proportsionaalsus
Kavandatav määrus on proportsionaalne selle eesmärgiga parandada ühtse innovatsioonituru
toimimist. Kõik määruse komponendid on suunatud konkreetsele eesmärgile ja piirduvad
sellega, mis on selle eesmärgi saavutamiseks asjakohane ja vajalik, tegeldes vaid sellega,
mida on vaja kindlakstehtud tõkete kõrvaldamiseks. Liikmesriikidele ja liikmesriikide
asjaomastele üksustele ei tekitata ebaproportsionaalset koormust, mis oleks eeldatava kasuga
võrreldes ülemäärane.
Esiteks võimaldavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele
eelnevate hangete ühised normid avaliku sektori hankijatel märkimisväärselt kokku hoida
menetluste läbiviimise aega ja kulusid. Samuti saavad avaliku sektori hankijad avalikke
teenuseid kiiremini ajakohastada ja ettevõtjad kiirendada äritegevuse kasvu kogu ühtsel turul.
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste ühishangete ühtlustatud raamistik võimaldab avaliku
sektori hankijatel saavutada otsustava tähtsusega rahalise mahu, mis on vajalik, et
stimuleerida tööstust välja töötama kulutõhusamaid lahendusi ja võimaldada ettevõtjatel oma
äritegevust kogu ühtsel turul kiiremini laiendada. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete nõue, et
ET 9 ET
toode oleks valmistatud Euroopa Liidus, on proportsionaalne Euroopa teadus- ja
arendustegevuse mahuga ja kavandatud nii, et see ei tekitaks halduseelarvetele väga suurt
finantskoormust. Juhtivate turgude loomine on keskse tähtsusega, et suurendada ELi
konkurentsivõimet kõigis sektorites ja tehnoloogiates ning seeläbi tugevdada liidu
tööstusbaasi ja tagada liidu strateegilise autonoomia. Selline teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetega seotud meetmete kombinatsioon on vajalik õiguskindluse tagamiseks, liidu
konkurentsivõime suurendamiseks ning aluslepingu põhimõtete ja liidu rahvusvaheliste
riigihankealaste kohustuste tulemusliku järgimise tagamiseks. Meetmed on proportsionaalsed,
sest need piirduvad oma eesmärkide saavutamiseks vajalikuga, nende väljatöötamisel on
silmas peetud, et need ei tekitaks liikmesriikidele ja avaliku sektori hankijatele lisakoormust,
need tuginevad olemasolevatele ja laialdaselt kasutatavatele tavadele ning võimaldavad
praktilisel rakendamisel paindlikkust.
Teiseks tehakse Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametile ülesandeks luua
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise pädevuskeskus ning töötada kogu liidu jaoks välja
intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise raamistik ja intellektuaalomandi veebipõhine
kauplemiskoht, et võimaldada innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel, äriühingutel, ülikoolidel ja
finantsinvestoritel vähendada väärtuse määramise kulusid ning suurendada liidus
intellektuaalomandiõiguste litsentsimist ja üleandmist. See on keskse tähtsusega
teadusuuringute ja innovatsiooni tulemuste turuleviimise suurendamiseks kogu liidus.
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti olemasolevatele volitustele, eksperditeadmistele ja
ressurssidele tuginedes tagatakse nende meetmete tulemuslik rakendamine. Sellega, et
väärtuse määramise raamistik põhineb parimatel tavadel eri liiki intellektuaalomandi õiguste
jaoks ja et intellektuaalomandi veebipõhine kauplemiskoht on kavandatud täiendama
olemasolevaid kauplemiskoht ja ühtlasi pakkuma täiendavat ELi lisaväärtust, tagatakse nende
meetmete proportsionaalsus, sest need kasutavad olemasolevaid struktuure ja vähendavad
seeläbi liikmesriikide lisakoormust, ning piiratakse liidu sekkumist, mida rakendatakse vaid
siis, kui see on vajalik läbipaistvuse, võrreldavuse ja intellektuaalomandiga seotud tehingutele
juurdepääsu parandamiseks.
2.4. Vahendi valik
Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepingu artikliga 114 antakse seadusandjale võimalus võtta vastu
määrusi ja direktiive. Käesoleva ettepaneku puhul peetakse määrust kõige sobivamaks
vahendiks, kuna seda kohaldatakse viivitamata ja see võimaldab kehtestada nõudeid, mida
kohaldatakse vahetult kõigi avaliku ja erasektori osalejate suhtes, kellele kavandatud meetmed
on suunatud. See aitab tagada, et nõudeid täidetakse õigel ajal ja ühtsel viisil, mis omakorda
suurendab õiguskindlust. Sellega tagatakse kogu liidus järjekindel ja ühtne raamistik ning
välditakse erinevusi liikmesriikide õigusnormides, mis takistaksid uuenduslike lahenduste
väljatöötamist, katsetamist ja ühtsel turul ulatuslikumat kasutuselevõtmist. Määrus on vajalik
selleks, et kehtestada ühtsed raamtingimused, vähendada õiguskindlusetust ning tagada
piiriüleselt tegutsevatele novaatoritele ja innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele võrdsed tingimused.
Direktiiv ei oleks kavandatud eesmärkide saavutamiseks piisav, kuna selle ülevõtmiseks
läheks aega ning liikmesriikides võidakse see üle võtta ja seda rakendada erineval viisil, nii et
innovatsiooni raamtingimuste killustatus jätkub.
Määrus on vajalik ja asjakohane õigusakt ka määruse (EL) 2017/1011 muutmiseks, et
laiendada Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti ülesandeid ja tagada kooskõlas ELi
toimimise lepingu artikliga 207 liidu ainupädevuse tulemuslik kohaldamine nende meetmete
puhul, mis on seotud kolmandate riikide ettevõtjate juurdepääsuga teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlustele.
ET 10 ET
3. JÄRELHINDAMISE, SIDUSRÜHMADEGA KONSULTEERIMISE JA MÕJU
HINDAMISE TULEMUSED
3.1. Konsulteerimine sidusrühmadega
Käesolev ettepanek põhineb ulatuslikel sidusrühmadega peetud konsultatsioonidel, mis viidi
läbi kooskõlas komisjoni parema õigusloome põhimõtete ja miinimumstandarditega.
Komisjon alustas sidusrühmadega konsulteerimist Euroopa innovatsioonimääruses käsitletud
innovatsioonitõkete teemal juba ELi idu- ja kasvufirmade strateegia raames. Tagasisidekorje
kutse ELi idu- ja kasvufirmade strateegia kohta avaldati 17. veebruaril 2025 ja tagasisidekorje
kestis 17. märtsini 2025. Selle käigus koguti teavet paljudelt sidusrühmadelt, sealhulgas
ettevõtjatelt, ettevõtjate ühendustelt, teadusasutustelt, avaliku sektori asutustelt ja
üksikisikutelt. 36 riigi sidusrühmadelt saadi 589 vastust. Peamised tõkked, mille sidusrühmad
kindlaks tegid, olid innovaatiliste ettevõtjate raskused hangetele juurdepääsul ja liiga vähene
investeerimine innovatiivse lahenduse hangetesse ELis, takistused teadusuuringute ja
innovatsiooni tulemuste turuleviimisel ja intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramisel,
innovaatiliste ettevõtjate raskused teadus- ja tehnoloogiataristule juurdepääsul,
katsetamisvõimaluste puudumine ELi õigusaktides ning ebapiisav koordineerimine
liikmesriikide ja ELi innovatsioonipoliitika ja -programmide vahel. 28. mail 2025 vastuvõetud
ELi idu- ja kasvufirmade strateegias on esitatud terviklik strateegia seadusandlike ja muude
kui seadusandlike meetmete koondamiseks, et kõrvaldada kindlakstehtud innovatsioonitõkked
ja leida neile lahendusi Euroopa innovatsioonimääruses.
Seejärel korraldas komisjon käesoleva ettepaneku ettevalmistamise käigus spetsiaalse
tagasisidekorje ja avaliku konsultatsiooni, et saada tagasisidet konkreetsete küsimuste kohta ja
teha kindlaks võimalikud lahendused nende õiguslike tõkete korral, mis olid ELi idu- ja
kasvufirmade strateegias juba kindlaks tehtud. Selle tagasisidekorje ja avaliku konsultatsiooni
kutsed avaldati 8. juulil 2025 ja need kestsid 3. oktoobrini 2025. Nende käigus koguti teavet
paljudelt sidusrühmadelt, sealhulgas ettevõtjatelt, ettevõtjate ühendustelt, teadusasutustelt,
avaliku sektori asutustelt ja üksikisikutelt. Tagasisidekorjele saadi kokku 336 vastust,
sealhulgas 193 seisukohavõttu. Avaliku konsultatsiooni käigus saadi 202 vastust, mida
täiendasid 54 lisatud dokumenti.
Euroopa innovatsioonimäärust käsitleva avaliku konsultatsiooni vastused olid sidusrühmade
vahel ühtlaselt jaotunud. Äriühingutelt ja ettevõtjatelt saadi 27 % vastustest (55 vastust), neile
järgnesid ettevõtjate ühendused (23 %, 47 vastust) ning akadeemilised ja teadusasutused
(16 %, 33 vastust). Vastuseid saadi ka ELi kodanikelt (8 %, 17 vastust), valitsusvälistelt
organisatsioonidelt (8 %, 17 vastust), avaliku sektori asutustelt (4 %, 8 vastust),
ametiühingutelt (2 %, 4 vastust), kolmandate riikide kodanikelt (1 %, 3 vastust) ja muudelt
sidusrühmadelt (9 %, 18 vastust). Osalevatest ettevõtjatest moodustasid suurima rühma (1–9
töötajaga) mikroettevõtjad (33 %, 18 vastust), kellele järgnesid suurettevõtjad (29 %, 16
vastust), väikeettevõtjad (20 %, 11 vastust) ja keskmise suurusega ettevõtjad (18 %, 10
vastust).
Avaliku konsultatsiooni tulemused ja selle kokkuvõttev aruanne Euroopa
innovatsioonimääruse kohta avaldati 4. detsembril 2025 ning on kättesaadavad veebis6.
Peale selle korraldati 2025. aasta oktoobrist novembrini Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse kohta
sihtkonsultatsioon, et toetada kavandatud meetmete eeldatavate kulude ja tulude hindamist.
6 Avaliku konsultatsiooni tulemused ja kokkuvõttev aruanne, 4. detsember 2025,
https://ec.europa.eu/info/law/better-regulation/have-your-say/initiatives/14593-European-Innovation-
Act/public-consultation_et.
ET 11 ET
Konsultatsiooni käigus viidi läbi kokku 18 poolstruktureeritud küsitlust valitud
sidusrühmadega eespool nimetatud sektoritest, saadi 55 vastust veebiküsitlusele ning töötas
kolm teemarühma, kes 24., 26. ja 27. novembril 2025 said kokku veebi kaudu.
Teemarühmade peamine eesmärk oli kontrollida kulude-tulude analüüsi tulemusi.
Lõpuks korraldati Euroopa Innovatsiooninõukogu foorumil osalevate liikmesriikide ja
programmiga „Euroopa horisont“ assotsieerunud riikide teadus- ja innovatsioonipoliitika ja -
programmide eest vastutavate esindajatega sihtkonsultatsioon Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse
teemal. Euroopa Innovatsiooninõukogu foorumi liikmed võtsid 2025. aasta novembris vastu
ühise seisukoha ja soovide loetelu Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse kohta7.
Nende eri voorude ja konsultatsiooniliikide käigus koguti kokku 1210 vastust, mis olid abiks
käesoleva Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse ettepaneku koostamisel. Üldiselt väljendasid
sidusrühmad laialdast toetust ELi meetmetele, mille eesmärk on kõrvaldada kindlakstehtud
innovatsioonitõkked. Enamik vastanutest kinnitas, et kindlakstehtud probleemid on olemas ja
Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse jaoks kavandatud meetmed, mille eesmärk on parandada
uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamist, katsetamist ja ulatuslikumat kasutuselevõtmist kogu
ühtsel turul, on asjakohased.
3.2. Eksperdiarvamuste kogumine ja kasutamine
Käesoleva ettepaneku koostamisel tugineti ulatuslikule tõendusbaasile, sealhulgas
analüütilisele tööle, kirjandusülevaatele, sidusrühmade esitatud teabele ja spetsialistide
nõuannetele.
Komisjon viis läbi dokumentide analüüsi ja vaatas läbi asjakohase akadeemilise kirjanduse,
poliitikaaruanded ja andmeallikad, et toetada probleemide ja poliitikavariantide analüüsi. See
hõlmas muu hulgas Eurostati andmeid, Euroopa innovatsioonitegevuse tulemustabelit,
ühenduse innovatsiooniuuringut, riiklike poliitikaraamistike ja innovatiivse lahenduse
hangetesse tehtavate investeeringute Euroopa võrdlusuuringut ning Maailma Intellektuaalse
Omandi Organisatsiooni andmeid, samuti rahvusvaheliste organisatsioonide, näiteks OECD ja
Euroopa Patendiameti aruandeid ning eelretsenseeritud akadeemilist kirjandust.
Kasutati ka EIC foorumi töörühmade ja ekspertide esitatud teavet, sealhulgas komisjoni
määratud 33 riigi eksperdirühma aruannet,8 milles esitati ELi ja Euroopa
Innovatsiooninõukogu foorumi liikmesriikidele soovitused selle kohta, kuidas ületada
õiguslikke tõkkeid, mis takistavad innovatiivse lahenduse hangete, sealhulgas teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete laiemat rakendamist liidus võrreldes teiste maailma juhtivate
majandusriikidega.
Väline töövõtja toetas komisjoni dokumentide täiendaval analüüsimisel, avaliku
konsultatsiooni ja sihtkonsultatsioonide tulemuste analüüsimisel, teemarühmade ja
sidusrühmade küsitluste korraldamisel ning kavandatavate meetmete kulude-tulude
analüüsimisel.
Komisjoni Teadusuuringute Ühiskeskus pakkus täiendavat analüütilist tuge, sealhulgas
analüüsides tagasisidekorjet ja tehes makromajandusliku analüüsimudeli, et hinnata algatuse
võimalikku mõju.
7 Position paper and wishlist for the European Innovation Act, EIC Forum, november 2025,
https://op.europa.eu/en/publication-detail/-/publication/b690e2af-d0bd-11f0-8da2-
01aa75ed71a1/language-en. 8 Independent expert report „Overcoming legal barriers for the uptake of innovation procurement in the
EU“, mai 2026, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/4586624.
ET 12 ET
3.3. Mõjuhinnang
Kooskõlas parema õigusloome suunistega on käesoleva seadusandliku ettepaneku
toetuseks koostatud mõjuhinnang, milles ülemaailmse konkurentsivõime üha suuremat
probleemi arvesse võttes analüüsitakse vajadust kiirendada uuenduslike lahenduste
turuleviimist ja kasutuselevõttu ning luua innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele innovatsiooni
soodustavad võrdsed tingimused, et nad saaksid laieneda kogu ELi ühtsel turul.
Mõjuhinnangus tehakse kindlaks poliitikavariandid probleemide algpõhjustega tegelemiseks
ja hinnatakse nende tõenäolist mõju. See töötati välja tihedas koostöös komisjoni
talitustevahelise juhtrühmaga Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse teemal.
Mõjuhinnangu kavand esitati õiguskontrollikomiteele (edaspidi „komitee“) 23. detsembril
2025. 28. jaanuaril 2026 toimus kohtumine komiteega, mille järel esitati negatiivne arvamus.
Pärast sisulist läbivaatamist komitee märkuste arvessevõtmiseks esitati mõjuhinnang
20. veebruaril 2026 uuesti. Teises esildises märkis komitee, et tehtud on suuri edusamme,
eelkõige seoses kavandatavate meetmete väiksema ulatusega, algatuse tausta ja mahu
selgitamisega ning aruande üldise esitusviisiga. Mõnede sisuliste märkuste kohta, eelkõige
seoses sellega, et vältida kattumist ELi riigihankedirektiivide eelseisva läbivaatamisega, oli
endiselt raske seisukohta võtta, kuna avalik konsultatsioon nende direktiivide läbivaatamise
üle ei olnud veel lõppenud ning kavandatavad meetmed ja nende direktiivide läbivaatamise
mõjuhinnang ei olnud sel ajal veel kättesaadavad. Seepärast jäi komitee 27. veebruaril 2026
negatiivse arvamuse juurde ja määras kindlaks kolm peamist valdkonda, mida tuleb Euroopa
innovatsioonimääruse mõju hindamise aruandes veelgi parandada. Need on järgmised.
(1) Tagada Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse riigihankemeetmete suurem ühtsus ELi
riigihankedirektiivide eelseisva läbivaatamisega ning hinnata täiendavalt
hankemeetmete proportsionaalsust ja subsidiaarsust, eelkõige seoses innovatiivse
lahenduse hangete kohustuslike eesmärkidega ja riigihangete kasutamisega
väiksemate rahaliste piirmäärade korral, kui on ELi raamistikuga ette nähtud.
(1) Tagada täielikum mõjuanalüüs, hinnates Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse meetmeid
laiemalt, mitte ainult innovaatiliste ettevõtjate hinnangulise arvu alusel, sest
kavandatavad meetmed ei ole õiguslikult piiratud konkreetse ettevõtjate
kategooriaga. Samuti peetakse vajalikuks tegelda innovaatiliste ettevõtjate õigusliku
määratlusega, mida Euroopa innovatsioonimääruses ei ole.
(2) Anda põhjalikum hinnang Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse mõne meetme kulude ja
tulude kohta, pöörates eriti tähelepanu järgmisele:
• hinnata täpsemalt innovatiivse lahenduse hangete kohustuslike eesmärkidega
seotud majanduslikke kulusid ja ELi eelistamist riigihangetes;
• hinnata ohtu, et regulatiivliivakastide liiga kitsad määratlused ja põhimõtted
võivad välja jätta potentsiaalselt kasulikke katsetusvõimalusi.
Pärast komitee teist negatiivset arvamust vaadati mõjuhinnang tuvastatud puuduste
kõrvaldamiseks veel kord põhjalikult läbi. Põhjalikuma analüüsi käigus võeti eespool
nimetatud punkte täielikult arvesse ja vajaduse korral kohandati ettepaneku kohaldamisala.
Eelkõige käsitleti komitee märkusi järgmiselt.
• Innovatsiooni soodustavate hankemenetluste ja ELi eelistamise hankemeetmeid
kitsendati, et keskenduda üksnes avaliku sektori hankijate korraldatavatele
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele. Innovatsiooni soodustavad hankemeetodid,
mida kasutatakse muude riigihankevormide korral laiemalt, jäeti Euroopa
innovatsioonimääruse kohaldamisalast välja. Peale selle kehtestati ELi rahaline
ET 13 ET
piirmäär 216 000 eurot (vastab ELi rahalisele piirmäärale, mida kasutatakse peamises
riigihangete direktiivis keskvalitsusest madalama tasandi ametiasutuste puhul),
millega tagatakse proportsionaalsuse ja subsidiaarsuse põhimõtte järgimine.
• Liikmesriikide kohustuslik eesmärk suurendada üldisi kulutusi innovatiivse
lahenduse hangetele jäeti Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse kohaldamisalast välja.
• Lisati innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, idu- ja kasvufirmade mõistete selgitus.
Mõjuhinnangus selgitatakse, et pärast innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, innovaatiliste
idufirmade ja innovaatiliste kasvufirmade määratlusi käsitleva ELi soovituse
vastuvõtmist ei sisalda Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse ettepanek enam neid
määratlusi. Samas selgitatakse, et kooskõlas parema õigusloome suunistega ei
hinnata kulusid ja tulusid kõigi õiguspäraselt rahastamiskõlblike üksuste põhjal, vaid
selle elanikkonna alusel, keda see majanduslikult mõjutab (eelkõige innovaatilised
ettevõtjad). Selles täpsustati erinevust õiguspäraselt kõlblike ja majanduslikult
mõjutatud ettevõtjate vahel ning selgitati põhjalikumalt, kuidas mõjutatud üksuste
arvu hinnati.
• Lisati kvantitatiivsed hinnangud. Mõjuhinnangus esitati täiendav kulude-tulude
analüüs, kus kõigi meetmete korral võeti arvesse nii standardkulude mudelit kui ka
kulude ja tulude elastsuspõhiseid kvantitatiivseid hinnanguid. Eelkõige lisati
hankemeetmete majandusriskiga seotud kulud, täpsustati intellektuaalomandi
väärtuse määramise hinnanguid ja lisati eraldi jaotised, milles selgitatakse
üksikasjalikumalt iga hinnangu aluseks olevaid eeldusi.
• Regulatiivliivakastide määratlused ja põhimõtted jäeti Euroopa
innovatsioonimääruse kohaldamisalast välja ja viidi üle ettepanekusse võtta vastu
nõukogu soovitus regulatiivsete katsekeskkondade kohta.
Õiguskontrollikomitee arvamused ning ka lõplik mõjuhinnang ja selle kommenteeritud
kokkuvõte avaldatakse koos käesoleva ettepanekuga.
Komisjon tegi mõju hindamise üksikmeetmete tasandil, kaaludes iga meetme puhul
alternatiivsete poliitikavariantidena kuni nelja varianti. See lähenemisviis võimaldas iga
konkreetse probleemse valdkonna jaoks kindlaks teha kõige sobivama meetme.
Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse eelistatud poliitikavariant on esitatud koondpaketina, kuhu
kuuluvad kõigi üheksa hinnatud meetme kõige toimivamad variandid. Iga meetme jaoks on
valitud variant, mis toimivuse, tasuvuse, sidususe ja proportsionaalsuse poolest täidab
eesmärke kõige paremini. Eelistatud poliitikavariant vastab seega pigem kõigi meetmete
kõige tulemuslikumate elementide sidusale kombinatsioonile kui ühele ettemääratud
poliitikapaketile.
Eelistatud poliitikavariant koosneb järgmistest meetmetest.
Esimene meede: Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti kaudu luuakse
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise pädevuskeskus ning töötatakse kogu liidu jaoks
välja intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise raamistik ja veebipõhine kauplemiskoht.
Eeldatakse, et see meede suurendab intellektuaalomandiõiguste üleandmist ja litsentsimist
ning innovaatiliste ettevõtjate suutlikkust tõmmata ligi intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat
rahastust. See tooks Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametile kaasa hinnanguliselt
712 000 euro suurused halduskulud ja ligikaudu 2,5 miljoni euro suurused kohandamiskulud,
mis kaetakse ameti omavahenditest ilma rahalise toetuseta liidu eelarvest. Samas peaks see
meede aitama ettevõtjatel halduskuludelt kokku hoida ligikaudu 35 miljonit eurot.
ET 14 ET
Hinnanguliselt tekitatakse meetmega ettevõtjatele igal aastal 10,2 miljardi euro ulatuses
täiendavat intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat riskikapitali ja deebetväärtust.
Teine meede: teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste
ühishangete jaoks kehtestatakse ühtlustatud kord. See meede peaks asjaomastele avaliku
sektori hankijatele andma kulude 1 miljardi euro suuruse kokkuhoiu aastas ja teenima
igal aastal täiendavalt 25,92 miljardit eurot kindlat kasumit.
Kolmas meede: ELi eelistamisega seoses võetakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes
kasutusele loobumisklauslid, millega võimaldatakse hankida hõlmamata tarnijatelt, kui
hõlmatud tarnijatelt sobivat alternatiivi ei ole või kui hõlmatud ja hõlmamata tarnijate9 vahel
on ebaproportsionaalsed maksumuse erinevused. Eeldatakse, et see meede aitab eelkõige
elutähtsa tehnoloogia ja strateegilise taristu puhul suurendada ELi avatud strateegilist
autonoomiat, vähendades sõltuvusriske ja toetades ELi-põhiste tarneahelate arendamist.
Hinnangute kohaselt vähendavad loobumisklauslid ka ELi eelistamise negatiivset
makromajanduslikku mõju, mis arvatakse olevat ligikaudu 464 miljonit eurot.
Meetmete kombineerimisega tagatakse sidusus kogu innovatsioonitsükli ulatuses ja
kõrvaldatakse nii pakkumise kui ka nõudlusega seotud tõkked. Parandades korraga
raamtingimusi, juurdepääsu ressurssidele ja turulepääsu võimalusi, aitab eelistatud variant
saavutada üksikute meetmete maksimaalse toimivuse ja tekitab kumulatiivse mõju, mis on
üksikute meetmete mõjust suurem. Kokkuvõttes näitab makromajanduslik modelleerimine,
milles sisendina kasutatakse eespool nimetatud kulusid ja tulusid, et ELi sisemajanduse
koguprodukt suureneb võrreldes lähtestsenaariumiga (mille kohaselt Euroopa
innovatsioonimäärust ei ole olemas) kümne aasta jooksul 0,25–0,42 %, mis vastab kümne
aasta jooksul kogu ELis kuni 507 000 uue töökoha loomisele.
3.4. Õigusnormide toimivus ja lihtsustamine
Ettepanek on kooskõlas komisjoni lihtsustamiseesmärkidega. See, kui kogu liidus võetakse
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete läbiviimiseks kasutusele rohkem ühtlustatud lähenemine
ning tehakse Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametile ülesandeks luua intellektuaalomandi
väärtuse määramise ühine raamistik, kogu ELi hõlmav kauplemiskoht intellektuaalomandi
turuleviimiseks ja intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise pädevuskeskus, vähendab
kulude dubleerimist, teabe asümmeetriat ning innovaatiliste ettevõtjate otsingu- ja
tehingukulusid.
Uute tegevuste lisandumise korral tugineb ettepanek olemasolevatele raamistikele ja
protsessidele, mis aitab vähendada täiendavat halduskoormust.
Avaliku sektori asutused peaksid vajama vaid väheseid täiendavaid kohandamiskulusid
(45 miljonit eurot), mis on tingitud suuremast koolitusvajadusest, et rakendada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemeetodeid ja ELi eelistamist. ELi avalikul sektoril tuleb eeldatavasti
kanda kohandamiskulud (2,4 miljonit eurot), et töötada välja ELi intellektuaalomandi väärtuse
määramise raamistik, luua intellektuaalomandikeskus ja sidemete loomise platvorm. Kuid
neid täiendavaid halduskulusid tasakaalustab halduskulude märkimisväärne netokokkuhoid.
9 Hõlmatud tarnijad on siin tarnijad ELi liikmesriikidest ja kolmandatest riikidest, kes on sõlminud
liiduga rahvusvahelised lepingud, ja kus liit on võtnud kohustuse avada nendele kolmandatele riikidele teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanked.
ET 15 ET
Ettevõtjatel ja avaliku sektori hankijatel ei peaks tekkima täiendavaid halduskulusid, sest
kavandatava määrusega ei kehtestata neile täiendavaid kohustusi. Vastupidi, ettevõtjad
peaksid saavutama halduskulude täiendava kokkuhoiu:
• 1 miljard eurot aastas avaliku sektori hankijate puhul, kes soovivad korraldada
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid, ning see tuleneb teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete ühtlustatud raamistikust, sealhulgas teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste
ühishangete jaoks;
• 35 miljonit eurot aastas intellektuaalomandipõhiste varade suure osakaaluga
ettevõtjate puhul tänu ühtlustatumale lähenemisele intellektuaalomandi väärtuse
määramisele ning intellektuaalomandi lihtsamale litsentsimisele ja üleandmisele
intellektuaalomandi kauplemiskoha kaudu.
Kokkuvõttes peaks eelistatud poliitikavariant alates esimesest aastast tagama nii avaliku
sektori kui ka erasektori sidusrühmade iga-aastase kulude netokokkuhoiu (haldus- ja
kohandamiskulud kokku) ligikaudu 1,1 miljardit eurot võrreldes lähtestsenaariumiga.
Netokokkuhoid peaks järgmistel aastatel veelgi suurenema, sest ühekordsed kohandamiskulud
vähenevad järk-järgult ja alles jäävad vaid korduvad halduskulud.
4. PÕHIÕIGUSED
Kavandatav määrus põhineb mittediskrimineerival lähenemisviisil ning edendab läbipaistvust
ja võrdset kohtlemist. Eeldatavasti ei mõjuta see märkimisväärselt liidu aluslepingutega ja
põhiõiguste hartaga kaitstud põhiõigusi.
5. MÕJU EELARVELE
Hinnang alates 2028. aastast kuludele ja personalile avalduva mõju kohta on lisatud
näitlikustamise eesmärgil ja see ei mõjuta järgmist mitmeaastast finantsraamistikku.
Rahastamisallikas ja liidu rahaliste kohustuste ulatus 2027. aasta järgsel perioodil sõltuvad
mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku 2028–2034 üle peetavate institutsioonidevaheliste
läbirääkimiste tulemustest ning seejärel määratakse need kindlaks iga-aastases
eelarvemenetluses. Kõik assigneeringud ja töötajate arv alates 2028. aastast on soovituslikud.
Ettepanekul on mõju komisjoni eelarvele. Täpsemalt on selle elluviimiseks vaja ligikaudu 3
täistööajaga töötajat aastas. Eelarvet mõjutab peamiselt see töö, mis on ette nähtud määruse
rakendamise toetamiseks ja järelevalveks, sealhulgas määrusega ette nähtud delegeeritud
õigusaktide ja rakendusaktide ettevalmistamises. Personali ja muude halduskuludega seotud
eelarvemõju vajadused kaetakse assigneeringutest, mille asjaomane peadirektoraat on
kõnealuse meetme haldamiseks juba andnud, ja/või peadirektoraadi sees ümberpaigutatud
assigneeringutest, mida vajaduse korral võidakse täiendada nendest lisaassigneeringutest, mis
haldavale peadirektoraadile eraldatakse iga-aastase vahendite eraldamise menetluse käigus,
arvestades eelarvepiirangutega.
6. MUU TEAVE
• Rakenduskavad ning järelevalve, hindamise ja aruandluse kord
Ei kohaldata
• Ettepaneku sätete üksikasjalik selgitus
Ettepanekus on kolm peatükki. See on üles ehitatud järgmiselt.
ET 16 ET
1. peatükk sisaldab üldsätteid, millega määratakse kindlaks kavandatava määruse
reguleerimisese ja kohaldamisala, ning kavandatavas määruses kasutatavaid mõisteid. Selles
täpsustatakse, et määruse 1. peatükki kohaldatakse üksnes teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetele, mis ei kuulu direktiivi (EL) 2014/23, direktiivi (EL) 2014/24 ja direktiivi
(EL) 2014/25 kohaldamisalasse, ning et määruse 3. peatükki kohaldatakse üksnes Euroopa
Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti suhtes.
2. peatükis määratakse kindlaks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse rakendamise,
sealhulgas teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankemenetluse suhtes kohaldatavad ühised
normid.
3. peatükis määratakse kindlaks ülesanded, mis käesoleva määrusega antakse Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Ametile, et töötada välja intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise ühine
raamistik, luua kogu ELi hõlmav kauplemiskoht intellektuaalomandi turuleviimiseks ja
pädevuskeskus, mis aitab innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel pääseda ligi intellektuaalomandiga
tagatavale rahastusele.
ET 17 ET
2026/0264 (COD)
Ettepanek:
EUROOPA PARLAMENDI JA NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS,
millega kehtestatakse meetmete raamistik liidu innovatsiooniökosüsteemi tugevdamiseks
ja muudetakse määrust (EL) 2017/1001 (Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus)
(EMPs kohaldatav tekst)
EUROOPA PARLAMENT JA EUROOPA LIIDU NÕUKOGU,
võttes arvesse Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepingut, eriti selle artiklit 114,
võttes arvesse Euroopa Komisjoni ettepanekut,
olles edastanud seadusandliku akti eelnõu liikmesriikide parlamentidele,
võttes arvesse Euroopa Majandus- ja Sotsiaalkomitee arvamust(1),
võttes arvesse Regioonide Komitee arvamust(2),
toimides seadusandliku tavamenetluse kohaselt
ning arvestades järgmist:
(1) Endiselt püsivad suured tõkked, mis liidus takistavad uuenduslike lahenduste
turulepääsu ja innovaatiliste ettevõtjate laienemist. Innovaatilistel ettevõtjatel
puuduvad võimalused viia uuenduslikke ideid kogu liitu hõlmavale riigihanketurule,
kuna teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankimiseks puudub ühine õigusraamistik ning
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise siseturg ei ole piisavalt arenenud.
Liikmesriikide meetmed, mille eesmärk on kõrvaldada need piiriülesed komplekssed
tõkked, on killustatud ja võivad kahjustada siseturu toimimist. Selline killustatus
takistab liidu piiriülest kaubandust ja moonutab siseturgu. Seepärast on vaja
kehtestada ühtlustatud meetmed, et tagada siseturu nõuetekohane toimimine.
(2) Euroopa Kontrollikoda10 on palunud komisjonil liidu riigihangete valdkonnas tegelda
vähese konkurentsi probleemiga. Võttes arvesse liidu majanduse üha suuremat
digitaliseerimist ja avaliku sektori hankijate kasvavat nõudlust liidus loodud
uuenduslike lahenduste järele, on suurenenud ettevõtjate huvi piiriüleselt osaleda teiste
liikmesriikide avaliku sektori hankijate korraldatavates teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetes. Kui Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiividega 2014/23/EL,11
(1) ELT C [...], [...], lk [...]. (2) ELT C [...], [...], lk [...]. 10 Eriaruanne 28/2023„Riigihanked ELis“, Euroopa Kontrollikoda, detsember 2023,
https://www.eca.europa.eu/ECAPublications/SR-2023-28/SR-2023-28_ET.pdf. 11 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 26. veebruari 2014. aasta direktiiv 2014/23/EL kontsessioonilepingute
sõlmimise kohta (ELT L 94, 28.3.2014, lk 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/23/oj).
ET 18 ET
2014/24/EL12 ja 2014/25/EL13 ühtlustatakse nende kohaldamisalasse kuuluvate
riigihangete menetlusi, siis nende kohaldamisalast välja jäävate hangete menetlusi
reguleeritakse praegu peamiselt liikmesriikide ebaühtlaste õigusnormidega või ei
kuulu need riikliku hankelepingute sõlmimise korra alla ja nende kohta kehtivad
üksnes aluslepingute aluspõhimõtted, nagu neid on tõlgendanud Euroopa Liidu Kohus.
See puudutab enamikku teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetest, eriti neid, mis jäävad
kõnealuste direktiivide kohaldamisalast välja, sest hangitud teadus- ja
arendusteenustest tulenev kasu ei teki üksnes avaliku sektori hankijale tema enese
tegevuses kasutamiseks, nagu see on kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete puhul, või
kuna avaliku sektori hankija ei tasu täielikult hangitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste
eest14. Kuid ainuüksi nende põhimõtete kohaldamine ei taga avaliku sektori
hankijatele piisavat õigusselgust, ei vähenda teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete
rakendamise piiriülest killustatust ega kõrvalda struktuurseid tõkkeid, mis takistavad
avaliku sektori hankijatel teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriülestes ühishangetes
osalemist. Seetõttu tuleks teatavat maksumust ületavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete puhul võtta vastu ühised normid, et tagada nende põhimõtete järgimine
praktikas, mis omakorda tagab siseturu nõuetekohase toimimise.
(3) Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste puhul, mille suhtes ei kohaldata direktiivi
2014/23/EL artiklit 25, direktiivi 2014/24/EL artiklit 14 ega direktiivi 2014/25/EL
artiklit 32, tuleks avaliku sektori hankijaid kohustada kohaldama käesolevat määrust.
Kaitsealaste riigihangete eripära tõttu on teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked selles
valdkonnas eriti tundlikud, mistõttu on sageli vaja rakendada väga suurt
konfidentsiaalsust ja suuremat paindlikkust liikmesriikide jaoks. Seepärast ei tohiks
avaliku sektori hankijatelt nõuda käesoleva määruse kohaldamist teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete suhtes, mis kuuluvad Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu
direktiivis 2009/81/EÜ15 sätestatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete erandite alla.
(4) Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste digitaliseerimine on siseturu
nõuetekohaseks toimimiseks esmatähtis, kuna see võib märkimisväärselt vähendada
halduskoormust ning suurendada tulemuslikkust ja läbipaistvust. Seega tuleks kõik
käesoleva määruse kohaldamisalasse kuuluvad teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlused võimaluse korral läbi viia Euroopa ettevõtluskukrute või muude
elektrooniliste vahendite kaudu, mis on Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega
koostalitlusvõimelised.
(5) Selleks et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes parandada juurdepääsu ärivõimalustele
ning suurendada konkurentsi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute sõlmimiseks,
12 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 26. veebruari 2014. aasta direktiiv 2014/24/EL riigihangete kohta ja
direktiivi 2004/18/EÜ kehtetuks tunnistamise kohta (ELT L 94, 28.3.2014, lk 65, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/24/oj). 13 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 26. veebruari 2014. aasta direktiiv 2014/25/EL, milles käsitletakse vee-
, energeetika-, transpordi- ja postiteenuste sektoris tegutsevate üksuste riigihankeid ja millega
tunnistatakse kehtetuks direktiiv 2004/17/EÜ (ELT L 94, 28.3.2014, lk 243, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2014/25/oj). 14 Direktiivi 2014/23/EL artikli 25, direktiivi 2014/24/EL artikli 14 ja direktiivi 2014/25/EL artikli 32
alusel kohaldatakse neid direktiive teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele vaid juhul, kui kasu tekib
üksnes avaliku sektori hankijale tema enese tegevuses kasutamiseks ja osutatud teenuse eest tasub
täielikult avaliku sektori hankija. 15 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 13. juuli 2009. aasta direktiiv 2009/81/EÜ, millega kooskõlastatakse
teatavate kaitse- ja julgeolekuvaldkonnas ostjate poolt sõlmitavate tööde, toodete ja teenuste
riigihankelepingute sõlmimise kord ja muudetakse direktiive 2004/17/EÜ ja 2004/18/EÜ (EMPs
kohaldatav tekst) (ELT L 216, 20.8.2009, lk 76–136, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2009/81/oj).
ET 19 ET
tuleks veelgi hõlbustada ettevõtjate gruppide osalemist. See on eriti oluline VKEde,
innovaatiliste idufirmade ja innovaatiliste kasvufirmade jaoks, kellel on sageli raskusi
suurematele teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankevõimalustele ligi pääsemisel. Seepärast
tuleks selgitada ja lihtsustada korda, mis reguleerib ettevõtjate gruppide osalemist ja
ühendatud suutlikkuse kasutamist, ning tagada, et kehtestatakse üksnes nõuded, mis on
vajalikud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu nõuetekohaseks täitmiseks.
(6) Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu osade alltöövõtud on endiselt praktiline ja
võimas ettevõtjatevahelise koostöö vahend. Käesoleva määruse alltöövõttu käsitlevad
normid peaksid säilitama lepinguvabaduse ning lihtsustama juurdepääsu VKEde,
innovaatiliste idufirmade ja innovaatiliste kasvufirmade jaoks, mis võimaldab neil
tõhusalt osaleda teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes ja nendega seotud tarneahelates.
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste kogu hankelepingu täitmine alltöövõtu korras ei tohiks
siiski olla käesoleva määruse alusel lubatud, eelkõige alltöövõtu väärkasutamise
vältimiseks, eriti sektorites, mis võivad kulusurve ja keerukate alltöövõtuahelate tõttu
olla tööalase ärakasutamise suhtes haavatavamad. Kui konkreetne esitatud teave,
komponent või teenus, mis on avalikes huvides teadus- ja arendustegevuseks oluline,
on kättesaadav üksnes ettevõtjalt, kelle asukohariigil ei ole ligipääsu teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankele, peaks avaliku sektori hankijal olema võimalik selle esitatud
teabe, komponendi või teenuse kasutamist lubada, sealhulgas alltöövõtu puhul.
(7) Kui turgu ei analüüsita, siis riskivad avaliku sektori hankijad teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse algatamisega selliste hanketingimuste alusel, mis
piisaval määral ei vasta turuosaliste tegelikule suutlikkusele, annavad eelise
väljakujunenud lahendustele või ei paku piisavalt võimalusi uuenduslikeks
lahendusteks. Seepärast tuleks kehtestada ühised normid, millega tagatakse selliste
menetluste ettevalmistamisel esialgsete turu-uuringute tegemine läbipaistval ja
üldsusele kättesaadaval viisil.
(8) Läbirääkimised (ja võimalus pidada läbirääkimisi etapikaupa) võivad avaliku sektori
hankijatel aidata parandada hangitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste ja nende
kavandatud tulemuste kvaliteeti ja tulemuslikkust ning suurendada nende
koguväärtust, eriti kui valdkond nõuab hankedokumentide kohandamist vastavalt
tegevus- ja innovatsioonivajadustele või muude strateegiliste kaalutluste
tasakaalustamist. Sellist valikulist paindlikkust tuleks võimaldada avaliku sektori
hankijatele, mis laseb neil otsustada selle üle, kas jätta hankedokumentide teatavad
elemendid, sealhulgas maksegraafik või vaidluste lahendamise mehhanism,
läbiräägitavaks, mis teeb VKEde osalemise riigihangetes oluliselt vähem koormavaks.
(9) Kooskõlas riigihankeid käsitleva rahvusvahelise ja ELi õigusraamistikuga võivad
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevad hanked,
hõlmata piiratud koguse prototüüpide või esimeste toodete, teenuste või tööde tootmist
ja tarnimist, et võtta arvesse kohapealse katsetamise tulemusi ja tõendada, et toode,
teenus või töö sobib masstootmiseks või -tarnimiseks vastuvõetavate
kvaliteedistandardite kohaselt, ning avaliku sektori hankijad võivad saada
omandiõiguse sellele piiratud kogusele prototüüpidele või esimestele toodetele,
teenustele või töödele, mis töötati välja avaliku sektori hankija taotlusel selle
konkreetse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu raames ja selle jaoks. Teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke käigus ei saa avaliku sektori hankijad omandiõigust
prototüüpidele, esimestele toodetele, teenustele või töödele, mis ei ole välja töötatud
nende endi tellimusel või mis on välja töötatud muude lepingute raames. Selleks et
tagada ettevõtjate jaoks läbipaistvus, tuleb ühiste normidega ette näha, et avaliku
sektori hankijad täpsustaksid teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke dokumentides, kas
ET 20 ET
sellega on ette nähtud võimalus saada nende piiratud hulga väljatöötatud prototüüpide
või esimeste toodete, teenuste või tööde omandiõigus.
(10) Teatavate toodete, teenuste või tööde puhul, mis tuleb hankida pärast teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanget, mille eesmärk on kaitsta liidu või selle liikmesriikide
julgeoleku või avaliku turvalisuse huve (sealhulgas vältida elutähtsa tehnoloogia
nappust), peaks avaliku sektori hankijatel teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanget alustades
olema võimalik tagada, et nad saavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankest tulenevaid
tooteid, teenuseid või töid eraldi hankemenetlusega vajalikus koguses osta. Seepärast
peaksid ühissätted võimaldama avaliku sektori hankijatel lisada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingutesse tingimusi, mis annavad neile eelisõiguse selliste
toodete, teenuste või tööde eelnevalt kindlaksmääratud mahus või väärtuses ostmisel,
enne kui neid pakutakse teistele võimalikele ostjatele. Ostueelisõiguse lisamine
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingutesse ei anna avaliku sektori hankijatele õigust
eelistada nende toodete, teenuste või tööde hilisemal ostmisel teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankes osalenud töövõtjaid. Kõik sellised ostud tuleb teha
kohaldatava liidu hankelepingute sõlmimise korra järgi.
(11) Nagu on selgitatud Euroopa Kohtu praktikas, ei laiene liidu riigihankeõigusest
tulenevad õigused ettevõtjatele, kes on pärit kolmandatest riikidest, kellega liit ei ole
sõlminud kaubanduslepinguid oma riigihanketuru avamiseks. Selle kohtupraktika
tulemuslikuks kohaldamiseks ja liidu strateegilise autonoomia tugevdamiseks tuleks
vastu võtta ühissätted, millega antakse juurdepääs teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele
üldiselt ainult ettevõtjatele, kes on pärit kolmandatest riikidest, kellega liit on
sõlminud kaubanduslepingud, millega avatakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete
turg. Kui see tooks kaasa pakkumuste puudumise või ebaproportsionaalsed kulud,
peaks avaliku sektori hankijatel olema lubatud avada teadus- ja arendusteenuste hange
ka ettevõtjatele, kes on pärit kolmandatest riikidest, kellega liit on sõlminud
rahvusvahelised lepingud, millega avatakse tema riigihanketurg, aga ei kohusta avama
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete turgu. Kui kandidaatriigid on sõlminud liiduga
lepingu, millega nähakse ette juurdepääs riigihangetele, tuleks nendest riikidest pärit
ettevõtjaid käsitada kui käesoleva määruse artikli 11 lõike 4 kohaldamisalasse
kuuluvaid ettevõtjaid, järgides asjaomases lepingus sätestatud tingimusi. See
lähenemisviis kajastab laienemise perspektiivi ja kandidaatriikide järkjärgulist
integreerimist liidu siseturuga ning selle eesmärk on toetada tihedamat
majandusintegratsiooni, soodustada õigusnormide ühtlustamist ning tugevdada liidu
normide ja standardite kohaldamist liidu vahetus naabruses. Kui see on põhjendatud
liidu või selle liikmesriikide julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisuse huvidega, peaks avaliku
sektori hankijatel olema võimalik veelgi piirata juurdepääsu teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetele üksnes nende ettevõtjatega, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest ja kes ei ole
kolmanda riigi kontrolli all. Kui liit toetab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlust
liidu programmide ja vahendite, sealhulgas katseprojektide või ettevalmistavate
meetmete raames, tuleks selgitada, et avaliku sektori hankijad peavad tagama, et liidu
toetusega seotud tingimused oleks täidetud ka juhul, kui need tingimused käesoleva
määruse alusel kehtestatud korda täiendavad või neist kõrvale kalduvad.
(12) Selleks et tagada rahvusvahelise hõlmatuse tulemuslik ja järjepidev kohaldamine ning
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid reguleerivate normide kasutamine kõigis teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes, on vaja selget ja ühtset korda päritolu
kindlakstegemiseks. Seepärast tuleks käesolevas määruses kindlaks määrata
päritolureeglid, et saaks rakendada käesolevas määruses teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluses osalemise kohta esitatud korda.
ET 21 ET
(13) Ettevõtjad, kes on liidu õigusaktides määratletud rasketes kuritegudes lõpliku
kohtuotsusega süüdi mõistetud, tuleks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustest
kõrvale jätta. Kui kohustuslike kõrvalejätmise aluste puhul ei tohiks
eneserehabilitatsioonimeetmed olla lubatud, siis valikuliste kõrvalejätmise aluste
puhul, mis on seotud ettevõtjate usaldusväärsusega, peaksid need ettevõtjad suutma
oma usaldusväärsust eneserehabilitatsioonimeetmetega tõendada. Sellega seoses tuleks
nõuetekohaselt arvesse võtta igasugust koostööd uurimisasutustega, kelle eesmärk on
selgitada asjakohaseid fakte ja asjaolusid. Liikmesriigid ei tohiks lisada muid
kõrvalejätmise aluseid, mis põhinevad kriteeriumidel, mis on seotud pakkuja
ametialase olukorraga: see ei tohiks siiski liikmesriikidel takistada muude
kõrvalejätmise õiguspäraste aluste lisamist, näiteks nende, mille eesmärk on ennetada
või käsitleda riiklikku julgeolekut ähvardavaid ohte.
(14) Selleks et tagada võrdsed võimalused kõigile ettevõtjatele kogu liidus, on vaja
kehtestada ühised normid, millega nähakse ette, et avaliku sektori hankijad ei kasuta
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes selliseid kõrvalejätmise aluseid,
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriume ega finantstagatise nõudeid, mis on teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu mahu ja laadiga võrreldes ebaproportsionaalsed. Kui
kohustuslike kõrvalejätmise aluste kasutamine on vajalik, peaks
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide ja finantstagatise nõuete kasutamine jääma
vabatahtlikuks ning neid tuleks kasutada vaid vajaduse korral, et tagada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke head tulemused. Avaliku sektori hankijad ei tohiks nõuda
eelnevat kogemust teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingutega, välja arvatud juhul,
kui see on rangelt põhjendatav asjaomaste teadus- ja arendusteenuste laadiga; samuti
peaksid nad vältima ülemääraseid haldus- ja finantsnõudeid, mis võivad teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankevõimalustest tarbetult kõrvale jätta innovaatilised ettevõtjad.
Kui on vaja minimaalse finantssuutlikkuse nõudeid, ei tohiks jätta kvalifitseerimata
innovaatilisi idu- või kasvufirmasid, kellel ei ole varasemaid käibeandmeid või
finantsaruandeid, kuid kes on tehniliselt ja rahaliselt elujõulised tänu muudele
rahalistele vahenditele, nagu riskikapitaliinvesteeringud või väärtuslik
intellektuaalomand. Kui on vaja finantstagatisi, tuleks neid innovaatiliste idu- ja
kasvufirmade ning VKEde puhul vähendada ning kui need ei ole enam põhjendatud,
peaksid avaliku sektori hankijad neid õigel ajal vähendama või need vabastama.
(15) Selle tagamiseks, et innovatsioon aitaks parandada avalike teenuste kvaliteeti ja
tugevdada strateegilist autonoomiat, peaksid avaliku sektori hankijad teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete puhul kasutama selliseid pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriume
ja lepingu täitmise järelevalve kriteeriume, mis põhinevad pakkumuse kvaliteedil ja
innovatsioonimõjul, mitte üksnes maksumusel. Seepärast tuleks kehtestada ühised
normid selle kohta, kuidas sellised kriteeriumid tuleks sõnastada, et võtta arvesse
pakkumuse lisaväärtust siseturu jaoks. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud
tuleks sõlmida parima hinna ja kvaliteedi suhte meetodi alusel. Seepärast tuleks
käesolevas määruses sätestada, et pakkumuste hindamise etapis on
kvaliteedikriteeriumide osakaal vähemalt 50 % ja innovatsiooniga seotud
hindamiskriteeriumide osakaal vähemalt 15 %.
(16) Liiga üksikasjalikud nõuded vähendavad sageli asjatult ettevõtjate osalemist ja võivad
takistada innovatsiooni. Konkurentsi hõlbustamiseks teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hanketurgudel tuleks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke esemeks olevate teadus- ja
arendusteenuste tingimused üldjuhul koostada nii, et teostusnõuetele eelistatakse
funktsionaalsusnõudeid ja vajaduse korral tulemusnõudeid. See võib hõlmata selle
kindlaksmääramist, kas testimisel peaks olema vähemalt kas koormus- või stressitest
ET 22 ET
või mõlemad või mitte kumbki. See võib hõlmata ka seda, millised peavad olema
katsete kavandatud tulemused, näiteks milline peab olema katsete käigus saadavate
katseandmete nõutav täpsusaste.
(17) Töövõtja võimalus jätta intellektuaalomandi omandiõigus endale aitab teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangetesse kaasata rohkem ja kvaliteetsemaid pakkumisi ning avaliku
sektori hankijad hoiavad kokku intellektuaalomandi registreerimise, ülalpidamise ja
kohtukuludelt. Samuti võimaldab see töövõtjatel oma teadus- ja arendustegevuse
tulemusi turule viia ning müüa arendatud tooteid ja teenuseid turule mastaabisäästuga.
Kui avaliku sektori hankijad saavad asjakohased õigused, et kasutada teadus- ja
arendustegevuse tulemusi enda ja oma teiste töövõtjate jaoks, peaks olema võimalik
säilitada tegevusvabadus ja vältida tarnijatest sõltumist. Kui töövõtjad ei vii teadus- ja
arendustegevuse tulemusi turule või kuritarvitavad neid avaliku huviga vastuolus,
peaks avaliku sektori hankijatel olema võimalik töövõtjate teadus- ja arendustegevuse
tulemusi litsentsida või üle anda, kuid seda tuleks teha üksnes kooskõlas kohaldatava
riikliku ja liidu õigusega ning muude intellektuaalomandit käsitlevate rahvusvaheliste
kohustustega, et töövõtjad ei jääks oma intellektuaalomandiõigustest põhjendamatult
ilma. Seepärast tuleks kehtestada ühised normid, et soodustada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete tulemuste ja intellektuaalomandiõigustega seotud riskide ja
kasu jagamist avaliku sektori hankijate ja töövõtjate vahel turutingimustel.
Nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud ülekaaluka avaliku huvi korral peaks teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete puhul, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele eelnevad hanked,
olema võimalik teha erand riski ja kasu jagamisest turutingimustel, et võimaldada
avaliku sektori hankijatel saada töövõtjate loodud intellektuaalomandi õigused.
(18) On tarvis selgitada teatavaid lepingu täitmisega seotud aspekte, mis on tihedalt seotud
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse endaga, sealhulgas makseid, lepingute
lõpetamist ja lepingute muutmist. Õigeaegsed maksed ja ettemaksete asjakohane
kasutamine on olulised, et minimeerida negatiivset mõju likviidsusele ja kergendada
ettevõtjate finantsjuhtimist. Tuleks sätestada kehtivate lepingute lõpetamise kohustus,
et vältida aluslepingust tulenevate kohustuste või kõrvalejätmise aluste rikkumist.
Lisaks sellele, et avaliku sektori hankijatel võimaldatakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepinguid jätkuvalt muuta olukordades, mis olid algusest peale ette nähtud,
tuleks selgitada, kuidas saab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguid muuta
ettenägematutes tingimustes. Need sätted peaksid võimaldama paremat kohaldamist
olukordades, kus muutmine on õigustatud uue teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluse algatamise asemel. Muudatuste maksumust võrreldes algse teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepinguga tuleks siiski käsitada üksnes eelneva avaldamise ja
võimaliku väärkasutuse vastase võimaliku läbivaatamise piirmäärana.
(19) On vaja tagada õiguskindlus selle kohta, kuidas avaliku sektori hankijad saavad
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingutes õigesti kasutada väärtuskavandamist, sest
see toob avaliku sektori hankijatele kaasa märkimisväärse kulude kokkuhoiu ja
kvaliteedi paranemise,16 võimaldades paindlikkust teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingute muutmisel, et võtta arvesse lepingu täitmise ajal tekkivaid
uuenduslikke lahendusi. Seepärast tuleks kehtestada ühised normid, et aidata kasutada
väärtuskavandamist teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes, eelkõige suure maksumusega
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute puhul, kus võimalik mõju kuludele või
kvaliteedi parandamisele on kõige suurem.
16 Independent expert report „Overcoming legal barriers for the uptake of innovation procurement in the
EU“, mai 2026, https://data.europa.eu/doi/10.2777/4586624.
ET 23 ET
(20) Mitmelt tarnijalt hankimine teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes hõlbustab uute
osalejate turule sisenemist ning võimaldab avaliku sektori hankijatel vähendada
teadus- ja arendustegevuse kulusid ja selle kavandatud tulemusi, luues
arendustegevuses konkurentsi („konkurentsipõhine arendustegevus“). Samuti aitab see
avaliku sektori hankijatel säilitada konkurentsivõimelise tarneahela pärast teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankeid ning vähendada liigset sõltuvust üksikutest ettevõtjatest.
Seepärast tuleks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete puhul kehtestada hulgihanke jaoks
ühised normid. Nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud ülekaaluka avaliku huvi korral peaks
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete puhul, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele eelnevad
hanked, olema avaliku sektori hankijatel võimalik teha hulgihanke kasutamisest erand.
(21) Konkurentsipõhise etapiviisilise arendustegevuse korraldamine etappidena võimaldab
ka avaliku sektori hankijatel vähendada töövõtjate arvu pärast iga teadus- ja
arendustegevuse etappi, mis vähendab teadus- ja arendustegevuse ning
investeerimisriske avaliku sektori hankijatele. Etapikaupa lähenemine võimaldab
töövõtjatel vastavalt teadus- ja arendustegevuse järjestikuste etappide järjest
suurematele ülesannetele ja lepingute suuremale mahule oma äritegevust laiendada
ning see lihtsustab veelgi väiksemate ettevõtjate ja uute osalejate turule sisenemist.
Etapikaupa lähenemine võib samuti aidata parandada toetust rakendusuuringutele ja
tootearendusele, et kaotada püsiv lõhe teadusliku tipptaseme ja tööstusliku
kasutuselevõtu vahel liidus. Seepärast tuleks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete puhul
kehtestada konkurentsipõhise etapiviisilise arendustegevuse jaoks ühised normid.
Nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud ülekaaluka avaliku huvi korral peaks teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete puhul, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele eelnevad hanked,
olema avaliku sektori hankijatel võimalik teha konkurentsipõhise etapiviisilise
arendustegevuse kasutamisest erand.
(22) Kui konfidentsiaalse teavet ja isikuandmeid teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes
piisavalt ei kaitsta, võib see kahjustada töövõtja äritegevuse kasvu, avalike teenuste
ohutust ning teadus- ja arendustegevuses osalevate kolmandate isikute põhiõigusi.
Seepärast ei tohiks ei avaliku sektori hankijad ega töövõtjad avalikustada neile teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hanke raames esitatud konfidentsiaalset teavet. Füüsiliste isikute
järjepideva ja kõrgetasemelise kaitse tagamiseks võivad avaliku sektori hankijad
piirata ka teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete käigus töödeldavate isikuandmete
lokaliseerimist ja neile juurdepääsu kooskõlas isikuandmete väljapoole liitu
edastamise piirangutega, mis on sätestatud Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruses
(EL) 2016/67917 ning Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivis 2002/58/EÜ18.
(23) Julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega seotud kaalutlused võivad esile tulla paljudes
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes, sealhulgas ka mujal kui
kaitsevaldkonnas ja tundlikes julgeolekuvaldkondades. Avaliku sektori hankijatele
tuleks kehtestada ühised normid selliste riskide hindamiseks ja nendele lahenduste
leidmiseks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste kavandamisel ja läbiviimisel
ning lepingute täitmisel.
17 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 27. aprilli 2016. aasta määrus (EL) 2016/679 füüsiliste isikute kaitse
kohta isikuandmete töötlemisel ja selliste andmete vaba liikumise ning direktiivi 95/46/EÜ kehtetuks
tunnistamise kohta (isikuandmete kaitse üldmäärus) (ELT L 119, 4.5.2016, lk 1–88, https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2016/679/oj). 18 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 12. juuli 2002. aasta direktiiv 2002/58/EÜ, milles käsitletakse
isikuandmete töötlemist ja eraelu puutumatuse kaitset elektroonilise side sektoris (eraelu puutumatust ja
elektroonilist sidet käsitlev direktiiv) (EÜT L 201, 31.7.2002, lk 37, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2002/58/oj).
ET 24 ET
(24) Eri liikmesriikide avaliku sektori hankijad on üha enam huvitatud koostööst oma
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste korraldamisel. Seepärast tuleks
ühishangete jaoks kehtestada ühised normid, et ületada kesksete hankijate või
ühishangete, sealhulgas piiriüheste ühishangete abiga tõkked, millega avaliku sektori
hankijad praegu silmitsi seisavad, kuna liikmesriikide õigusnormid teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete ühiseks korraldamiseks on ebaühtlased. Eri liikmesriikide
avaliku sektori hankijad on üha enam huvitatud koostöö tegemisest liidu üksustega
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete valdkonnas. Kuna paljud käesoleva määruse uued
sätted on kasulikud ka liidu üksustele, kuid nende suhtes käesolevat määrust ei
kohaldata, on ELi finantsmääruse eelseisvate läbivaatamiste eesmärk parandada
sätteid, mis võimaldavad liidu institutsioonidel, organitel või asutustel korraldada
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevaid hankeid,
ise, koos teiste liidu üksustega või nende nimel ning koos liikmesriikide avaliku
sektori hankijatega või nende nimel.
(25) Ettevõtjatel on raskusi intellektuaalomandipõhiste varade võimendamisega kasvu
rahastamiseks, kuna immateriaalse vara, immateriaalse vara struktureeritud
järelturgude ja intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise oskuste hindamiseks
puuduvad ühtsed ja usaldusväärsed lähenemisviisid. Seepärast tuleks Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Ametis (edaspidi „amet“) luua pädevuskeskus
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise ja turuleviimise toetamiseks, töötada välja
vabatahtlik liidu raamistik intellektuaalomandiõiguste väärtuse määramiseks ja
avalikustamiseks, luua kogu liitu hõlmav mitmekeelne digitaalne sidemete loomise
platvorm19 ja seda hallata, mis hõlbustab läbipaistvaid ja tõhusaid
intellektuaalomanditehinguid investorite ja intellektuaalomandi omanike vahel, ning
toetada rahandusasutusi intellektuaalomandipõhistele varadele kohandatud
rahastamisvahendite kavandamisel ja rakendamisel, pakkudes nõustamist, kasutajatoe
teenust ja oskuste arendamise programme. Pädevuskeskuse teenuste kasutamine peaks
olema vabatahtlik. Pädevuskeskus peaks võimaluse korral kasutama Euroopa
ettevõtluskukruid ja võimaldama ettevõtjatel suhelda täielikult digitaalselt, turvaliselt
ja tõhusalt, kasutades Euroopa ettevõtluskukruid või alternatiivseid elektroonilisi
vahendeid, mis vastavad käesoleva määruse nõuetele ja on koostalitlusvõimelised
Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega, võimaldades täielikult digitaalseid menetlusi.
(26) Ametil peaks kooskõlas Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruse (EL) 2017/100120
artikliga 178 olema võimalik küsida tasu konkreetsete teenuste eest, mida osutatakse
pädevuskeskuse kaudu konkreetsete kasutajate huvides. Sellised tasud peaksid olema
läbipaistvad, mittediskrimineerivad ja piirduma osutatud teenuse maksumusega.
Teatavad teenused, sealhulgas juurdepääs vabatahtliku väärtuse määramise
raamistikule, põhijuurdepääs digitaalsele sidemete loomise platvormile ja liidu tasandi
kasutajatoele, peaksid jääma tasuta teenusteks.
(27) Liidu vabatahtliku väärtuse määramise raamistiku tulemuslikuks kasutamiseks on vaja
kvalifitseeritud, sõltumatute ja usaldusväärsete spetsialistide hinnanguid. Seega peaks
amet looma intellektuaalomandipõhiste varade hindajate jaoks liidu
sertifitseerimissüsteemi ja seda haldama.
19 Euroopa Komisjoni infotehnoloogia ja küberjulgeoleku nõukogu peab IT-arenduse ja -hangete
strateegiaga seotud valikud eelnevalt heaks kiitma. 20 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 14. juuni 2017. aasta määrus (EL) 2017/1001 Euroopa Liidu
kaubamärgi kohta (ELT L 154, 16.6.2017, lk 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2017/1001/oj).
ET 25 ET
(28) Kogu liidus kättesaadava ja järjepideva teabe puudumine tehingute kohta, mille korral
intellektuaalomandiõigusi kasutatakse tagatisena, on takistuseks tõenduspõhisele
poliitikakujundamisele ja uute rahastamislahenduste väljatöötamisele. Selleks peaks
amet pädevuskeskuse kaudu tegema koostööd liikmesriikide ning asjaomaste avaliku
ja erasektori sidusrühmadega, et koguda ja analüüsida kogu liitu hõlmavaid andmeid
intellektuaalomandiga tagatud tehingute kohta, järgides ühtlasi asjakohaseid
ärisaladuste ja isikuandmete kaitsemeetmeid.
(29) Käesoleva määrusega ametile antud ülesandeid tuleks käsitleda ameti mitmeaastase
strateegilise programmi ja iga-aastase tööprogrammi eraldi osas, milles esitatakse
asjakohased eesmärgid, meetmed, eeldatavad tulemused, tulemusnäitajad ja
hinnangulised ressursid. Iga-aastane tegevusaruanne peaks sisaldama asjakohast
hinnangut eelarve täitmise, kasutatud vahendite ja tasudest saadud tulu kohta.
(30) Määrusega (EL) 2017/1001 on asutatud amet ja kindlaks määratud selle ülesanded.
Seega tuleks kõnealust määrust muuta, et arvesse võtta ametile antud uusi ülesandeid.
(31) Selleks et võtta arvesse tehnoloogia arengut ja säilitada tõhus meetmete raamistik
innovatsiooni ökosüsteemi liidu tasandil tugevdamiseks, peaks komisjonil olema õigus
võtta kooskõlas Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepingu artikliga 290 vastu delegeeritud
õigusakte selleks, et: täiendada käesolevat määrust, jättes kõrvale pakkumused, mis on
pärit kolmandast riigist, kes ei ole taganud liidu ettevõtjate võrdset kohtlemist teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hangetes, mis on vastuolus liiduga sõlmitud rahvusvahelises
lepingus riigihangete suhtes võetud kohustustega; muuta loetelu juhtumitest, mil
avaliku sektori hankijad võivad otsustada mitte kasutada riski ja kasu jagamist,
hulgihankeid või konkurentsipõhist etapiviisilist arendustegevust, täiendada käesolevat
määrust, kehtestades kohustuslikud tehnilised spetsifikatsioonid,
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid, pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumid või lepingu täitmise
klauslid, et käsitleda konkreetsete teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanketeenuste
kategooriate või nende kavandatud tulemuste puhul kindlakstehtud konkreetseid liidu
julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega seotud huve. On eriti oluline, et komisjon viiks
oma ettevalmistava töö käigus läbi asjakohaseid konsultatsioone, sealhulgas ekspertide
tasandil, ja et kõnealused konsultatsioonid viidaks läbi kooskõlas 13. aprilli
2016. aasta institutsioonidevahelises parema õigusloome kokkuleppes21 sätestatud
põhimõtetega. Eelkõige selleks, et tagada delegeeritud õigusaktide ettevalmistamises
võrdne osalemine, peaksid Euroopa Parlament ja nõukogu saama kõik dokumendid
liikmesriikide ekspertidega samal ajal ning nende eksperdid peaksid saama pidevalt
osaleda komisjoni eksperdirühmade koosolekutel, kus arutatakse delegeeritud
õigusaktide ettevalmistamist.
(32) Selleks et tagada käesoleva määruse ühetaolised rakendamistingimused, tuleks
komisjonile anda rakendamisvolitused, et intellektuaalomandiõiguste väärtuse
määramise ja avalikustamise jaoks võtta vastu liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku tehnilised
spetsifikatsioonid selle ühetaoliseks kohaldamiseks; digitaalse sidemete loomise
platvormi ühised tehnilised standardid, koostalitlusvõime nõuded ja
käitamistingimused ning intellektuaalomandi hindajate sertifitseerimissüsteemi
rakendamise üksikasjalikud tingimused. Neid volitusi tuleks teostada kooskõlas
Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrusega (EL) nr 182/2011.
(33) Kui komisjonile antakse käesoleva määruse alusel volitus võtta vastu delegeeritud
õigusakte kooskõlas aluslepingu artikliga 290, on eriti oluline, et komisjon korraldaks
21 ELT L 123, 12.5.2016, lk 1, http://data.europa.eu/eli/agree_interinstit/2016/512/oj.
ET 26 ET
oma ettevalmistava töö käigus asjakohaseid konsultatsioone, sealhulgas ekspertide
tasandil, ja et sellised konsultatsioonid viidaks läbi kooskõlas 13. aprilli 2016. aasta
institutsioonidevahelises parema õigusloome kokkuleppes ettenähtud põhimõtetega.
Eelkõige selleks, et tagada delegeeritud õigusaktide ettevalmistamises võrdne
osalemine, peaksid Euroopa Parlament ja nõukogu saama kõik dokumendid
liikmesriikide ekspertidega samal ajal ning nende eksperdid peaksid saama pidevalt
osaleda komisjoni eksperdirühmade koosolekutel, kus arutatakse delegeeritud
õigusaktide ettevalmistamist.
(34) Kuna käesoleva määruse eesmärke ei suuda liikmesriigid piisavalt saavutada, küll aga
saab neid meetme ulatuse ja toime tõttu paremini saavutada liidu tasandil, võib liit
võtta meetmeid kooskõlas Euroopa Liidu lepingu artiklis 5 sätestatud
proportsionaalsuse põhimõttega. Kõnealuses artiklis sätestatud proportsionaalsuse
põhimõtte kohaselt ei lähe käesolev määrus nimetatud eesmärkide saavutamiseks ka
vajalikust kaugemale,
(35) Käesolev määrus ei tohiks mõjutada riigiabi- ja konkurentsieeskirjade, eelkõige
Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepingu artiklite 101, 102 ja 107 kohaldamist. Käesolevas
määruses sätestatud meetmeid ei tohiks kasutada konkurentsi piiramiseks või
moonutamiseks viisil, mis on vastuolus Euroopa Liidu toimimise lepinguga.
ON VASTU VÕTNUD KÄESOLEVA MÄÄRUSE:
1. peatükk
ÜLDSÄTTED
Artikkel 1
Reguleerimisese
Käesolevas määruses sätestatakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete korraldamise ühine
kord, sealhulgas ühtlustatud raamistik liidu teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishangete jaoks.
Käesoleva määrusega luuakse ka Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti pädevuskeskus
ning määratakse kindlaks Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti ülesanded seoses
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastusega ja intellektuaalomandi turuleviimisega.
Artikkel 2
Kohaldamisala
1. Kui lõikest 3 ei tulene teisiti, kohaldatakse käesoleva määruse 2. peatükki avaliku
sektori hankijate selliste teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete suhtes, mille
hinnanguline käibemaksuta maksumus vastab direktiivi 2014/24/EL artikli 4
punktis c märgitud summale või on sellest suurem.
2. Erandina lõikest 1 ja kui lõikest 3 ei tulene teisiti, kohaldatakse käesoleva määruse 2.
peatükki selliste teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete suhtes, mida korraldavad avaliku
sektori hankijad, kes on innovatsiooniasutused, ja mille eeldatav maksumus
käibemaksuta on võrdne direktiivi 2014/25/EL artikli 15 punktis a
nimetatudsummaga või sellest suurem, tingimusel et
(a) innovatsiooniasutus tegutseb oma volituste alusel, mitte mõne teise avaliku
sektori hankija nimel;
ET 27 ET
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes järgitakse läbipaistvuse,
mittediskrimineerimise ja võrdse kohtlemise põhimõtteid.
3. Käesoleva määruse 2. peatükki ei kohaldata järgmistel juhtudel:
(a) riigihanked, mis kuuluvad direktiivide 2014/23/EL, 2014/24/EL ja 2014/25/EL
kohaldamisalasse;
(b) riigihanked, mis kuuluvad direktiivi 2009/81/EÜ kohaldamisalasse;
(c) riigihanked, mis on direktiivi 2009/81/EÜ kohaldamisalast selle direktiivi sätete
alusel välja jäetud.
4. 3. peatükki kohaldatakse Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti suhtes.
Artikkel 3
Mõisted
Käesolevas määruses kasutatakse järgmisi mõisteid:
(1) „teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked“ – alusuuringute, rakendusuuringute ja
tootearenduse hanked kuni esialgse arendustegevuseni, kus
(a) esimese toote, teenuse või töö esialgne arendustegevus võib hõlmata piiratud
ulatuses tootmist või tarnimist, et võtta arvesse kohapealse katsetamise
tulemusi ja tõendada, et asjaomane toode, teenus või töö sobib masstootmiseks
või -tarnimiseks kooskõlas vastuvõetavate kvaliteedistandarditega, kuid ei
hõlma masstootmist või -tarnimist eesmärgiga saavutada kaubanduslik tasuvus
või katta teadus- ja arendustegevuse kulud;
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked võivad hõlmata selliste prototüüpide või
esimeste toodete, teenuste või tööde omandiõiguse saamist, mis on avaliku
sektori hankija tellimusel välja töötatud konkreetse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames ja selle tarbeks, kuid ei hõlma lõpptoodete, teenuste või
tööde kaubanduslikku kasutuselevõttu;
(2) „kommertskasutusele eelnev hange“ – teadus- ja arendusteenuste hange, mis
hõlmab turutingimustel riski ja kasu jagamist ning konkurentsipõhist etapiviisilist
arendustegevust;
(3) „avaliku sektori hankija“ – direktiivi 2014/23/EL artikli 6 lõikes 1, direktiivi
2014/24/EL artikli 2 lõike 1 punktis 1 ja direktiivi 2014/25/EL artikli 3 lõikes 1
määratletud avaliku sektori hankija või direktiivi 2014/23/EL artikli 7 lõikes 1
määratletud võrgustiku sektori hankija direktiivi 2014/25/EL artikli 4 lõike 1
tähenduses;
(4) „innovatsiooniasutus“ – spetsialiseeritud asutus, mille peamine põhikirjaline
ülesanne on teadus- ja arendusteenuste rahastamine või hankimine;
(5) „teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeleping“ – ühe või mitme ettevõtja ning ühe või
mitme avaliku sektori hankija vahel kirjalikult sõlmitud leping, mille esemeks on
käesoleva määruse kohaldamisalasse kuuluvate teadus- ja arendusteenuste
osutamine;
(6) „pakkuja“ – pakkumuse esitanud ettevõtja;
(7) „töövõtja“ – ettevõtja, kellega on sõlmitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeleping;
ET 28 ET
(8) „teadus- ja arendusteenuste CPV koodid“ – komisjoni määrusega (EÜ) nr
213/200822 kehtestatud ühtse riigihangete klassifikaatori osa 73 kohased koodid;
(9) „ettevõtja“ – füüsiline või juriidiline isik või avaliku sektori asutus või selliste
isikute ja/või asutuste rühm (sealhulgas ettevõtjate ajutised ühendused), kes pakub
turul tööde ja/või töö tegemist, tooteid või teenuseid;
(10) „hankedokument“ – avaliku sektori hankija esitatud või tema poolt osutatud
dokument, milles kirjeldatakse hanke või menetluse elemente või määratakse need
kindlaks, sealhulgas hanketeade, eelteade, kui seda kasutatakse hanke
väljakuulutamiseks, tehniline spetsifikatsioon, kirjeldav dokument, lepingu
kavandatavad tingimused, pakkujate esitatavate dokumentide vormingud, teave
üldkohaldatavate kohustuste kohta ja kõik täiendavad dokumendid;
(11) „hulgihange“ – teadus- ja arendusteenuste hange, mille puhul üks või mitu avaliku
sektori hankijat sõlmivad üheaegselt mitu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingut
mitme ettevõtjaga ning teevad neile ülesandeks osutada täiesti või peaaegu identseid
teadus- ja arendusteenuseid, mida tuleb osutada ühel ja samal ajal;
(12) „pakkumuse väheoluline ebatäpsus või nõuetele mittevastavus“ – pakkumuses
objektiivselt leitav puudus, mis on vaid vormiline ja ei muuda pakkumuse olulisi
elemente ning mille parandamine või selgitamine ei põhjusta pakkumuse muutmist,
uue pakkumuse esitamist, ei moonuta konkurentsi ega riku võrdse kohtlemise ja
läbipaistvuse põhimõtteid;
(13) „innovatsioon“ – uue või suurel määral täiustatud toote, teenuse, töö või protsessi,
turundusmeetodi või korraldusliku meetodi rakendamine ettevõtluses, töökorralduses
või välissuhetes;
(14) „VKE“ – mikro-, väikese või keskmise suurusega ettevõtja, nagu on määratletud
komisjoni soovituse 2003/361/EÜ lisas23;
(15) „innovaatiline idufirma“ – (käesoleva määruse tähenduses ja ilma et see määratlus
oleks muul eesmärgil siduv) ettevõtja, kes vastab komisjoni soovituse (EL) 2026/720
lisa punktis 3 määratletud innovaatilise idufirma kriteeriumidele24;
(16) „innovaatiline kasvufirma“ – (käesoleva määruse tähenduses ja ilma et see
määratlus oleks muul eesmärgil siduv) ettevõtja, kes vastab komisjoni soovituse (EL)
2026/720 lisa punktis 4 määratletud innovaatilise kasvufirma kriteeriumidele;
(17) „innovaatiline ettevõtja“ – (käesoleva määruse tähenduses ja ilma et see määratlus
oleks muul eesmärgil siduv) ettevõtja, kes vastab komisjoni soovituse (EL) 2026/720
lisa punktis 2.1 määratletud innovaatilise ettevõtja kriteeriumidele;
(18) „hädaolukord“ – majandustegevuse äkiline, ootamatu ja raske häire, mis hõlmab
kriitilise tähtsusega toodete, tööde või teenuste nappust, äärmuslikke hinnakõikumisi
22 Komisjoni 28. novembri 2007. aasta määrus (EL) nr 213/2008, millega muudetakse Euroopa
Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrust (EÜ) nr 2195/2002 ühtse riigihangete klassifikaatori (CPV) kohta ning
Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiive 2004/17/EÜ ja 2004/18/EÜ riigihankemenetluste kohta
seoses CPV läbivaatamisega (ELT L 74, 15.3.2008, lk 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2008/213/oj). 23 Komisjoni 6. mai 2003. aasta soovitus mikro-, väikeste ja keskmise suurusega ettevõtjate määratluse
kohta (ELT L 124, 20.5.2003, lk 36, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2003/361/oj). 24 Komisjoni 18. märtsi 2026. aasta soovitus (EL) 2026/720 innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, innovaatiliste
idufirmade ja innovaatiliste kasvufirmade määratluse kohta (ELT L, 2026/720, 24.3.2026, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2026/720/oj).
ET 29 ET
või tarneahela häireid, mille lahendamiseks on viivitamata vaja võtta meetmeid, et
vältida edasist kahju liidu majandusele, ettevõtjatele või tarbijatele;
(19) „funktsionaalsusnõue“ – nõue, milles kirjeldatakse funktsioone, mida on vaja täita,
kuid millega ei nähta ette konkreetseid tehnilisi vahendeid, põhimõtet, lahendust või
meetodeid, mida kasutades need funktsioonid tuleb saavutada;
(20) „tulemusnõue“ – nõue, millega määratakse kindlaks sooritusvõime või tulemused,
mida on vaja saavutada, sealhulgas nõuetele vastavuse kontrollimise kriteeriumid,
kuid ei nähta ette konkreetseid tehnilisi vahendeid, teostust, lahendust ega meetodeid,
mida kasutades need tulemused on vaja saavutada;
(21) „teostusnõue“ – nõue, millega määratakse üksikasjalikult kindlaks tehnilised
näitajad selle kohta, kuidas avaliku sektori hankija tellimusel konkreetse teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu raames ja selle jaoks väljatöötatud tooteid, teenuseid
või töid teostatakse, sealhulgas materjalid, mõõtmed ja lahendused, meetodid või
protsessid, mida tuleb kasutada;
(22) „tulemused“ – teadus- ja arendustegevuse ning innovatsiooni mis tahes materiaalsed
või immateriaalsed tulemused, näiteks andmed, teadmised või oskusteave, olenemata
selle vormist või laadist ja olenemata sellest, kas neid on võimalik kaitsta või mitte,
ning kõik selliste tulemustega seotud õigused, sealhulgas intellektuaalomandi
õigused, mis täielikult või osaliselt tulenevad teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu alusel toimuvast tegevusest;
(23) „väärtuskavandamine“ – tehnika, mida avaliku sektori hankijad kasutavad selleks,
et lasta või lubada töövõtjatel teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal
teha uuendusi, et luua avaliku sektori hankija jaoks lisaväärtust, millega parandatakse
hankega tellitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste ning konkreetse teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu raames ja selle jaoks väljatöötatud mis tahes
prototüüpide, esimeste toodete, teenuste või tööde tulemuslikkust, kvaliteeti,
maksumust või näitajaid, ning jagada sellest tulenevat mis tahes kokkulepitud
kokkuhoidu avaliku sektori hankija ja töövõtja vahel;
(24) „väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanek“ – ettepanek, mille töövõtjad esitavad
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal, et parandada hankega tellitud
teadus- ja arendusteenuseid ning konkreetse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
raames ja selle jaoks väljatöötatud mis tahes prototüüpe, esimesi kaupu, teenuseid
või töid või asendada need teadus- ja arendusteenused või prototüübid, esimesed
kaubad, teenused või tööd teistega, et võtta arvesse tehnoloogia arengut või
uuenduslikke lahendusi, ning mis võib hõlmata konsortsiumipartneri või alltöövõtja
väljavahetamist või lisamist;
(25) „väärtuskavandamisklausel“ – teadus- ja arendustegevuse hankelepingu klausel,
milles määratakse kindlaks ostja, töövõtjate ja alltöövõtjate õigused ja kohustused
seoses sellega, kuidas väärtuskavandamist kõnealuse lepingu alusel rakendatakse;
(26) „elutähtis tehnoloogia“ – komisjoni soovituse (EL) 2023/2113 lisas loetletud
elutähtsate tehnoloogiavaldkondade hulka kuuluv tehnoloogia25;
25 Komisjoni 3. oktoobri 2023. aasta soovitus (EL) 2023/2113, mis käsitleb ELi majandusjulgeoleku
seisukohast elutähtsate tehnoloogiavaldkondade täiendavat riskihindamist koos liikmesriikidega
(ELT L, 2023/2113, 11.10.2023, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reco/2023/2113/oj).
ET 30 ET
(27) „kriitiline toore“ – Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruse (EL) 2024/125226
II lisas loetletud toore;
(28) „rahanduse ja kindlustuse valdkonna avaliku sektori ja erasektori üksused“ –
ametiasutused, avaliku sektori asutused, avalikud ettevõtjad ning muud füüsilised või
juriidilised isikud, kes tegelevad Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivi
2011/83/EL27 artikli 2 punktis 12 määratletud finantsteenuste osutamise, rahastamise,
reguleerimise, järelevalve või vahendamisega.
2. peatükk
TEADUS- JA ARENDUSTEENUSTE HANKED
1. JAGU
TEADUS- JA ARENDUSTEENUSTE HANKEMENETLUS JA LEPINGU TÄITMINE
Artikkel 4
Üldpõhimõtted
1. Avaliku sektori hankijad korraldavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid käesolevas
määruses esitatud korra kohaselt. Avaliku sektori hankijad ja ettevõtjad ei hoia ega
püüa hoida kõrvale käesolevas määruses sätestatud kohustustest.
2. Avaliku sektori hankijad kohtlevad ettevõtjaid võrdselt ja mittediskrimineerivalt ning
tegutsevad läbipaistvalt ja proportsionaalselt. Teadus- ja arendustegevuse hanke
kavandamisel ei tohi lähtuda eesmärgist jätta see käesoleva määruse kohaldamisalast
välja ega eesmärgist konkurentsi kunstlikult piirata. Konkurentsi peetakse kunstlikult
piiratuks, kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanget kavandatakse kavatsusega teatavatele
ettevõtjatele õigustamatult eeliseid anda või neid ebasoodsasse olukorda panna.
3. Avaliku sektori hankijad võivad koostada hankedokumente ning korraldada teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hankeid, sealhulgas turu-uuringuid, pakkumismenetlusi ja lepingu
täitmise toiminguid, ükskõik millises liidu ametlikus keeles ning nad võivad lubada
ettevõtjatel kogu hanke vältel esitada turu-uuringu tagasisidet, pakkumusi ja tulemusi
ning vahetada mis tahes muud teavet ükskõik millises liidu ametlikus keeles.
4. Avaliku sektori hankijad tagavad elektrooniliste vahendite abil ettevõtjatele, kellel on
juurdepääs hankemenetlusele, piiramatu ja täieliku tasuta juurdepääsu mis tahes
elektroonilisele sidele ja hankedokumentidele, sealhulgas avaliku sektori hankijate
poolt turu-uuringu jaoks koostatud dokumentidele, kuni kolme aasta jooksul pärast
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu sõlmimist. Kui nende dokumentide teatavate
osade puhul ei ole juurdepääsu elektrooniliselt võimalik tagada, näitavad avaliku
26 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 11. aprilli 2024. aasta määrus (EL) 2024/1252, millega sätestatakse
kriitiliste toormete kindlate ja kestlike tarnete tagamise raamistik ja muudetakse määrusi
(EL) nr 168/2013, (EL) 2018/858, (EL) 2018/1724 ja (EL) 2019/1020 (ELT L, 2024/1252, 3.5.2024,
ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/1252/oj). 27 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 25. oktoobri 2011. aasta direktiiv 2011/83/EL tarbija õiguste kohta,
millega muudetakse nõukogu direktiivi 93/13/EMÜ ning Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivi
1999/44/EÜ ja millega tunnistatakse kehtetuks nõukogu direktiiv 85/577/EMÜ ning Euroopa
Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiiv 97/7/EÜ (ELT L 304, 22.11.2011, lk 64, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/83/oj).
ET 31 ET
sektori hankijad, kuidas need dokumentide osad tehakse kättesaadavaks muul viisil
kui elektrooniliselt. Avaliku sektori hankijad kasutavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete puhul otsesuhtlust, võimaluse korral Euroopa ettevõtluskukrute või selliste
alternatiivsete elektrooniliste vahendite kaudu, mis on koostalitlusvõimelised
Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega.
5. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes, mis on ette nähtud avaldada Euroopa
Liidu Teatajas, kasutavad avaliku sektori hankijad komisjoni rakendusmääruses (EL)
2019/178028 teadete jaoks esitatud tüüpvorme.
6. Avaliku sektori hankijad võtavad asjakohaseid meetmeid selle tagamiseks, et teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute täitmisel täidavad ettevõtjad käesoleva lõike teises
lõigus esitatud liidu strateegiliste prioriteetidega seotud kohustusi, mis on kehtestatud
liidu või liikmesriigi õigusaktidega või kollektiivlepingutega ning rahvusvahelise
keskkonna-, sotsiaal- ja tööõigusega.
Esimeses lõigus osutatud kohustuste korral kavandavad ja viivad avaliku sektori
hankijad oma teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked läbi viisil, milles võetakse arvesse
liidu strateegilisi prioriteete, eelkõige järgmist:
(a) liidu konkurentsivõime suurendamine eduka siseturu kaudu, innovatsioonilõhe
kaotamine ning liidu tootmis- ja tööstusbaasi tugevdamine;
(b) liidu kliima- ja keskkonnaeesmärkide täitmine;
(c) püüdlemine õiglase ja kaasava ühiskonna poole;
(d) liidu majanduslik turvalisus, julgeolek, vastupanuvõime ja majandusjulgeolek,
mille muu hulgas tagab strateegiline sõltumatus.
Artikkel 5
Ettevõtjad
1. Avaliku sektori hankijatel ei ole lubatud nõuda, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluses osalevatel ettevõtjatel oleks konkreetne õiguslik vorm.
2. Ettevõtjaid, kellel on oma asukohaliikmesriigi õigusaktide alusel õigus asjaomaseid
teadus- ja arendusteenuseid osutada, ei tohi kõrvale jätta üksnes seetõttu, et selle
liikmesriigi õiguse alusel, kus leping sõlmitakse, oleks ettevõtja pidanud olema kas
füüsiline või juriidiline isik.
3. Avaliku sektori hankijad võivad teadus- ja arendusteenuste, tööde või kohaletoomis-
ja paigaldamistoimingute puhul ette näha, et juriidilised isikud teatavad enne nende
ülesannete täitmisega alustamist konkreetse lepingu täitmise eest vastutavate
töötajate nimed ja asjakohase kvalifikatsiooni.
Artikkel 6
Ettevõtjate rühmad
28 Komisjoni 23. septembri 2019. aasta rakendusmäärus (EL) 2019/1780, millega kehtestatakse
riigihankega seotud teadete tüüpvormid ja tunnistatakse kehtetuks rakendusmäärus (EL) 2015/1986 (e-
vormid) (ELT L 272, 25.10.2019, lk 7, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg_impl/2019/1780/oj).
ET 32 ET
4. Avaliku sektori hankijad määravad ettevõtjate rühmadele samad artikli 15 kohased
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid, mis üksikettevõtjatele, välja arvatud juhul, kui
käesoleva artikliga on ette nähtud teisiti.
Ettevõtjate rühmad loetakse kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumile vastavaks, kui:
(a) ühel rühma kuuluval ettevõtjal on olemas vajalik tehniline ja kutsealane
suutlikkus või majanduslik ja finantssuutlikkus või
(b) kui sellise suutlikkuse tõendamiseks on võimalik ühendada kahe või mitme
rühmaliikme asjakohane tehniline ja kutsealane suutlikkus või majanduslik ja
finantssuutlikkus, välja arvatud juhul, kui sellise kombineerimise tulemusena
jääb suutlikkustase samaks.
5. Kui see on põhjendatud lepingu laadiga ja kooskõlas proportsionaalsuse
põhimõttega, võivad avaliku sektori hankijad
(a) teha lõike 1 teise lõigu punktist a või b erandeid teatavate eriti oluliste
ülesannetega seotud kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide puhul;
(b) näha ette, et teatavaid eriti olulisi ülesandeid täidab konkreetselt see rühma
liige, kes vastab asjaomase ülesandega seotud kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumile.
Avaliku sektori hankijad määravad kindlaks olulised ülesanded ja nendega seotud
nõuded ning märgivad need ülesanded ja nõuded koos põhjendustega selgelt ära
hankedokumentides.
6. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise tingimused võivad rühma puhul
erineda üksikettevõtjatele kehtestatud tingimustest vaid juhul, kui selleks on
objektiivsed põhjused, mis on proportsionaalsed ja hankedokumentides selgelt
märgitud.
7. Ilma et see piiraks liikmesriikide pädevust oma sotsiaalkindlustussüsteemide
korraldamisel, ei nõua avaliku sektori hankijad, et ettevõtjate rühmad võtaksid pärast
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu sõlmimist teatava õigusliku vormi.
8. Avaliku sektori hankijad pööravad eriti suurt tähelepanu sellele, et ei loodaks
põhjendamatuid või ebaproportsionaalseid tõkkeid seoses rühmas osalevate
ettevõtjate suurusega, eelkõige VKEdele, innovaatilistele idufirmadele ja
innovaatilistele kasvufirmadele.
Artikkel 7
Teiste üksuste suutlikkusele tuginemine
1. Artikli 15 kohaste kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide puhul võivad ettevõtjad olenemata
nendevaheliste sidemete õiguslikust laadist tugineda teiste üksuste suutlikkusele.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija kontrollib, kas üksused, kelle suutlikkusele ettevõtja
kavatseb tugineda, vastavad ettenähtud kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele või on põhjust
nad kõrvale jätta.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija nõuab, et ettevõtja vahetaks välja üksuse, kes ei vasta
asjakohastele kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele või kes vastab kohustuslikele
kõrvalejätmise alustele. Avaliku sektori hankija võib nõuda, et ettevõtja vahetaks
välja üksuse, kes vastab kohustuslikele kõrvalejätmise alustele.
4. Avaliku sektori hankijad võivad hankedokumentides nõuda ettevõtjalt tõendeid, et
tema käsutuses on kogu lepingu täitmise ajal selle üksuse asjakohased ressursid,
ET 33 ET
kellele ta kavatseb tugineda kogu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise
ajal; selleks sobib näiteks kõnealuse üksuse asjakohane avaldus.
5. Kui ettevõtja tugineb teiste üksuste suutlikkusele seoses majandusliku ja
finantssuutlikkuse kriteeriumiga, võib avaliku sektori hankija nõuda, et asjaomane
ettevõtja ja kõnealused üksused vastutavad avaliku sektori hankija ees teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise eest ühiselt.
6. Kui ettevõtja tugineb tehnilise ja kutsealase suutlikkuse tõendamisel teiste üksuste
suutlikkusele, võib avaliku sektori hankija hankedokumentides nõuda, et neid töid
või teenuseid, mille jaoks sellist suutlikkust nõutakse, teeb see teine üksus, kelle
suutlikkusele tuginetakse.
Artikkel 8
Alltöövõtt
1. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu osade puhul võib kasutada alltöövõttu.
Ettevõtjaga sõlmitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguid ei ole lubatud täies
ulatuses täita alltöövõtuna, samuti ei ole selliste hankelepingute täies ulatuses
täitmiseks lubatud sõlmida edasisi alltöövõtulepinguid.
2. Avaliku sektori hankijad nõuavad, et ettevõtjad märgiksid oma pakkumuses ära kõik
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu osad, mille kohta nad kavatsevad kolmanda
isikuga sõlmida alltöövõtulepingu, ning kõik kavandatavad alltöövõtjad.
Avaliku sektori hankijad nõuavad, et peatöövõtja annaks neile pärast lepingu
sõlmimist ja enne lepingu täitmise algust teada ülesannetest ja tegevustest, mille
suhtes ta kavatseb sõlmida alltöövõtulepingu. Avaliku sektori hankijad nõuavad
teavet ka kõikide alltöövõtjate kohta. Avaliku sektori hankija nõuab, et teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal teataks peatöövõtja talle võimalikult
kiiresti kõigist muudatustest selles teabes.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija nõuab, et ettevõtja vahetaks välja alltöövõtja, kes vastab
artikli 13 kohastele kohustuslikele kõrvalejätmise alustele. Avaliku sektori hankija
võib nõuda, et ettevõtja vahetaks välja alltöövõtja, kes vastab artikli 14 kohastele
valikulistele kõrvalejätmise alustele.
4. Kui see on põhjendatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu laadiga ning
kooskõlas proportsionaalsuse põhimõttega, võib avaliku sektori hankija ette näha, et
teatavaid eriti olulisi ülesandeid täidab peatöövõtja ise. Avaliku sektori hankijad
määravad kindlaks olulised ülesanded ja nendega seotud nõuded ning märgivad need
ülesanded ja nõuded koos põhjendustega selgelt ära hankedokumentides.
5. Käesoleva artikli sätete alusel teostatav alltöövõtt ei piira peatöövõtja vastutust.
6. Artikli 4 lõikes 6 osutatud kohustuste täitmine alltöövõtjate poolt tagatakse oma
vastutusala ja pädevuse piirides tegutsevate pädevate riiklike asutuste asjakohaste
meetmetega. Liikmesriigid võivad vastu võtta või säilitada täiendavad
proportsionaalsed meetmed, millega piiratakse alltöövõttu, kui nad on kindlaks
teinud nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud suurema riski, et sotsiaal- ja tööõigusest
tulenevaid kohustusi ei täideta.
Artikkel 9
Turu-uuring
ET 34 ET
1. Enne artiklis 23 osutatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse algatamist
korraldavad avaliku sektori hankijad turu-uuringu, et teavitada ettevõtjaid eelseisvast
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlusest ning saada turult teadmisi, sealhulgas
uuenduslike lahenduste olemasolu või arendamispotentsiaali kohta ning seoses oma
seisukohtadega teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke kavandatava ulatuse, maksumuse ja
rakendamise korra kohta.
2. Enne turu-uuringu alustamist esitavad avaliku sektori hankijad turu-uuringu kohta
eelteate. See eelteade
(a) avaldatakse Euroopa Liidu Teatajas ja seejärel asjaomase avaliku sektori
hankija liikmesriigi riigihangete portaalis;
(b) sisaldab viiteid teadus- ja arendusteenustega seotud asjakohastele CPV
koodidele ning märget, et turu-uuring viiakse läbi teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hanke jaoks ning et see on seotud innovatsiooniga (tehes eelteates märke
väljale „innovatsioon“ ja lisades vajaduse korral väljale „hanke nimetus“ sõnad
„kommertskasutusele eelnev hange“);
(c) sisaldab vormi, mille avaliku sektori hankija on valinud turu-uuringu
läbiviimiseks, näiteks veebiküsimustikud, veebiseminarid või füüsilised
kohtumised, ning kõiki olulisi linke või kontaktandmeid, mille kaudu on
võimalik saada lisateavet teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke läbiviimise kohta.
3. Avaliku sektori hankijad analüüsivad turgu ulatuslikult. Selleks võivad avaliku
sektori hankijad pärast turu-uuringu eelteadet avaldada turu-uuringu teate mis tahes
laiemalt kättesaadavas meediakanalis ja seda seal tutvustada.
4. Kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, avaldavad
avaliku sektori hankijad erandina käesoleva artikli lõigetest 2 ja 3 sellise eelteate,
millest on välja jäetud kogu tundlik teave, ja levitavad sellist eelteadet meedias, ning
paluvad ettevõtjatel teatada, kui nad on turu-uuringus osalemisest huvitatud.
Tundlikku teavet saadetakse üksnes nendele ettevõtjatele, kes on väljendanud huvi,
vastavad kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele ega kujuta endast julgeolekuriski artikli 28
lõike 4 punkti d tähenduses.
5. Kui eelteate avaldamine ja meedias tutvustamine ning selliste dokumentide
avaldamine, milles selgitatakse turu-uuringu korraldamise tausta ja korraldamisega
seotud üksikasju, oleks vastuolus liidu või ühe või mitme selle liikmesriigi
julgeoleku või avaliku turvalisuse huvidega artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, siis
erandina käesoleva artikli lõigetest 2, 3 ja 9 ei teata avaliku sektori hankija turu-
uuringust nende lõigete kohaselt, vaid saadab turuanalüüsi käigus kindlakstehtud
võimalikele sobivatele ettevõtjatele turu-uuringus osalemise kutse ja edastab turu-
uuringu dokumendid üksnes neile, kes väljendavad asjakohast huvi, vastavad
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele ega kujuta endast julgeolekuriski artikli 28 lõike 4
punkti d tähenduses.
6. Avaliku sektori hankijad ei jäta turu-uuringus osalemisest kõrvale ühtegi ettevõtjat,
kes on pärit artikli 11 lõikes 1 osutatud riikidest.
Kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, võivad
avaliku sektori hankijad erandina käesoleva lõike esimesest lõigust piirduda turu-
uuringute tegemisel üksnes nende ettevõtjatega, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest.
ET 35 ET
7. Avaliku sektori hankijad tagavad turu-uuringu ajal võrdse juurdepääsu teabele.
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke kohta ühele turu-uuringus osalevale ettevõtjale
esitatud mis tahes teave edastatakse ka kõigile teistele selles turu-uuringus
osalevatele ettevõtjatele.
8. Turu-uuringu käigus võivad avaliku sektori hankijad küsida või saada teavet ja
nõuandeid üldsuselt, sõltumatutelt ekspertidelt, avaliku sektori asutustelt,
turuosalistelt või muudelt asjaomastelt isikutelt. Turu-uuring võidakse läbi viia
kirjaliku või suulise teabevahetuse, veebiküsimustike, veebiseminaride või füüsiliste
kohtumiste, kohapealsete külastuste või esitluste vormis või muus sobivas
erapooletus vormis. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke kavandamisel ja läbiviimisel
võib kasutada küsitud või saadud teavet ja nõuandeid, järgides võrdse kohtlemise,
mittediskrimineerimise, ausa konkurentsi ja läbipaistvuse põhimõtteid.
9. Kui ei teki vastuolu liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või avaliku
turvalisuse huvidega artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, avaldavad avaliku sektori hankijad
oma veebisaidil kõik turu-uuringuga seotud dokumendid (sealhulgas kõik
dokumendid, milles selgitatakse turu-uuringu korraldamise tausta ja esitatakse
sellega seotud üksikasjad), ettevõtjate esitatud küsimused koos avaliku sektori
hankija vastustega ja võimaluse korral turu-uuringu tulemuste kokkuvõte või
kirjalikud protokollid või turu-uuringu käigus toimunud kohtumiste video- või
helisalvestised.
10. Ettevõtja osalemine turu-uuringus ei mõjuta tema õigust hiljem osaleda teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke pakkumismenetluses.
11. Erandina lõikest 1 ei kohaldata käesoleva artikli kohast turu-uuringu korraldamise
kohustust selliste teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste suhtes, mille ainus ese
on CPV koodide 73200000-4, 73210000-7 ja 73220000-0 alla kuuluvate teadus- ja
arendustegevuse nõustamisteenuste hankimine.
Artikkel 10
Hankedokumendid
1. Avaliku sektori hankijad peavad hankedokumentides täpsustama vähemalt järgmised
elemendid:
(a) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankevajadus vastavalt lõikele 4;
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke hinnanguline maksumus, mis on kindlaks
määratud vastavalt lõikes 5 esitatud metoodikale, ning mis tahes rahaline või
mitterahaline toetus, mida avaliku sektori hankijad kavatsevad või võivad
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke ajal töövõtjatele pakkuda;
(c) artikli 9 lõigete 7 ja 9 kohaselt kättesaadavaks tehtud teave turu-uuringu
läbiviimise ja tulemuste kohta;
(d) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankele juurdepääsu tingimused vastavalt
artikliga 11 ettenähtud kohustustele;
(e) kohaldatavad menetlusest kõrvalejätmise alused, kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid ja
finantstagatised vastavalt artiklitega 13, 14, 15 ja 16 ettenähtud kohustustele;
(f) miinimumnõuded, mida kõik pakkujad peavad täitma;
ET 36 ET
(g) innovatsiooniga seotud hindamiskriteeriumid, sealhulgas nende osakaalud, mis
on aluseks pakkumuste hindamisel vastavalt artikliga 17 ettenähtud
kohustustele;
(h) intellektuaalomandiõiguste ja tulemuste omandiõigusega seotud õiguste ja
kohustuste jagamine vastavalt artikliga 19 ettenähtud kohustustele;
(i) lepingu muudatuste ja (vajaduse korral) väärtuskavandamise tingimused
vastavalt artiklitega 20–21 ettenähtud kohustustele;
(j) pakkumuskutse tingimused, sealhulgas käesoleva artikli lõigete 2 ja 3 alusel
kohaldatavad sätted läbirääkimiste kohta, ning nende töövõtjate miinimumarv,
kes osadeks jaotatava hanke ja hulgihanke korral välja valitakse, kooskõlas
artikli 22 sätetega hulgihanke kohta ja artikli 23 sätetega pakkumismenetluse
algatamise kohta;
(k) vajaduse korral teadus- ja arendusteenuse etappide arv, mille vahel teadus- ja
arendustegevus on jagatud, ning kas avaliku sektori hankija näeb ette
võimaluse kutsuda ettevõtjaid, kes teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke eelmistes
etappides ei osalenud, osalema teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke järgmistes
etappides kooskõlas artiklis 24 sätestatud konkurentsipõhise etapiviisilise
arendustegevuse kohustustega;
(l) kas ja kuidas kavatseb avaliku sektori hankija saada teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hanke omandiõiguse, sealhulgas teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke raames
väljatöötatud prototüübid või esimesed tooted, teenused või tööd;
(m) innovatsiooniga seotud peamised tulemusnäitajad, mis on võimalikult suures
ulatuses kindlaks määratud tulemusnõuetena, ja nende hindamise meetod, et
jälgida lepingu täitmist kogu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke vältel kooskõlas
artikli 24 lõikega 5 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(n) maksete tingimused kooskõlas artikliga 25 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(o) kohaldatavad konfidentsiaalsus- ja andmekaitsekohustused kooskõlas
artikliga 26 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(p) vajaduse korral mis tahes nõuded, mille kohaselt töövõtjad peavad kaasa
aitama tulemuste standardimisele, sertifitseerimisele või avaldamisele,
sealhulgas tehes need kättesaadavaks avatud andmete või avatud lähtekoodina,
ilma et see piiraks artiklis 26 osutatud konfidentsiaalsus- ja
andmekaitsekohustusi ning artikli 19 kohaseid intellektuaalomandiõiguste
kaitsega seotud kohustusi;
(q) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute lõpetamise tingimused kooskõlas
artiklitega 27 ja 29 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(r) kohaldatavad julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega seotud kohustused kooskõlas
artiklitega 28, 29 ja 30 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(s) vajaduse korral menetluse teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankena läbiviimise
tingimused kooskõlas artikliga 31 ettenähtud kohustustega;
(t) märge, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked kuuluvad käesoleva määruse
kohaldamisalasse.
2. Avaliku sektori hankijad märgivad hankedokumentides, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu oluliste tingimuste üle läbirääkimisi ei peeta. Avaliku sektori hankijatel
ET 37 ET
ei ole lubatud läbirääkimiste tulemusena teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
eset oluliselt muuta. Läbirääkimisi võib pidada kõigi selliste teadus- ja
arendusteenuse tingimuste ning kavandatud tulemuste üle, mis töötatakse avaliku
sektori hankija jaoks välja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke raames tehtava teadus- ja
arendustegevuse käigus, sealhulgas kvaliteet, kogused ning sotsiaal-, keskkonna- ja
innovatsioonialased aspektid, kui need tingimused ei kujuta endast
miinimumnõudeid.
3. Avaliku sektori hankijad märgivad hankedokumentides ära kõik konkreetsed
elemendid, mida ei ole lõikes 1 loetletud, ja paluvad pakkujatel oma pakkumuses
märkida, millist lähenemisviisi nad nende korral eelistavad, kusjuures nende
elementide lõplik vormistamine jäetakse läbirääkimiste teemaks.
4. Avaliku sektori hankijad koostavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke jaoks
hankedokumendid, võttes arvesse turu-uuringu tulemusi ja kõiki avaliku sektori
hankija tehtud turuanalüüse ettevõtjate käimasoleva teadus- ja arendustegevuse ning
tootearenduse tegevuskavade tehnika taseme kohta. Avaliku sektori hankijad
sõnastavad käesoleva artikli lõike 1 punktis a osutatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankevajaduse probleemina, mis tuleb lahendada, ilma et põhjendamatult piirataks
võimalikke lähenemisviise probleemi lahendamisele. Kooskõlas artikliga 18
kasutavad avaliku sektori hankijad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankevajaduse
sõnastamisel eelkõige funktsionaalsus- või tulemusnõudeid. Hankedokumentides
esitatav teave peab olema piisavalt täpne, et ettevõtjad saaksid kindlaks teha teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hanke laadi ja ulatuse ning otsustada, kas esitada pakkumus või
mitte.
5. Avaliku sektori hankijad võtavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke hinnangulise
maksumuse arvutamisel aluseks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu või -
lepingute raames osutatavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste maksimaalse hinnangulise
käibemaksuta maksumuse, mille kohta teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse
raames eeldatavasti leping sõlmitakse, sealhulgas kõik lepingu osad ja sellega seotud
valikuvõimalused või pikendamised. Hinnangulise maksumuse arvutamisel võetakse
arvesse teadus- ja arendustegevusega seotud mis tahes kulude hinnangulist
maksumust, olenemata nende osakaalust hinnangulises kogumaksumuses, sealhulgas
selliste tööjõu, materjalide, komponentide ja vahendite maksumust, mida on vaja
eeldatavate tulemuste saavutamiseks, näiteks asjakohastel juhtudel teadus- ja
arendustegevus, mida tehti enne teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse algust.
Kui avaliku sektori hankijad soovivad saada töövõtjate loodud tulemuste suhtes
intellektuaalomandi ainuõigust, siis sisaldab hinnanguline maksumus ka nende
intellektuaalomandiõiguste hinnangulist maksumust. Hinnanguline maksumus ei
sisalda mingeid rahalisi ega mitterahalisi toetusi, mida avaliku sektori hankijad
kavatsevad või võivad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke ajal töövõtjatele pakkuda.
6. Nende hangitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste tulemusena saadud toodete, teenuste
või tööde kohta, mis on vajalikud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitsmiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, sealhulgas
varustuskindlusega seotud probleemide vältimiseks, võivad avaliku sektori hankijad
hankedokumentides täpsustada, et avaliku sektori hankijatel on eelisõigus
kõnealuseid tooteid, teenuseid või töid eelnevalt kindlaksmääratud mahus või
maksumuses osta enne, kui neid pakutakse teistele võimalikele ostjatele. Sel juhul
märgivad avaliku sektori hankijad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingus
eelisostuõiguse lepingulise kohustusena.
ET 38 ET
Artikkel 11
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustele juurdepääsu tingimused ja
tulemusnõuded
1. Avaliku sektori hankijad avavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked osalemiseks
ainult järgmistele osalistele:
(a) ettevõtjad, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest;
(b) ettevõtjad, kes on pärit riikidest, mis on sõlminud liiduga rahvusvahelise
lepingu, tingimusel et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked kuuluvad liidu
riigihankekohustuste kohaldamisalasse, mis selle lepinguga on ette nähtud.
2. Komisjonil on õigus võtta kooskõlas artikliga 39 vastu delegeeritud õigusakte, et
täiendada käesolevat määrust liidu rahvusvahelisi kohustusi arvesse võttes nii, et
kolmas riik jäetakse täielikult või osaliselt lõike 1 punkti b kohaldamisalast välja,
tuginedes ühele järgmistest kriteeriumidest:
(a) kõnealune kolmas riik ei ole liidu teadus- ja arendusteenustele või neid
osutavatele üksustele taganud lõike 1 esimese lõigu punktis b osutatud
lepinguga ettenähtud võrdset kohtlemist;
(b) selline väljajätmine on põhjendatud, et vältida sõltuvust või muid suundumusi,
mis võivad ohustada asjaomaste toodete, tööde või teenuste varustuskindlust
liidus;
(c) selline piirang on põhjendatud mis tahes muu konkreetsest lepingust tuleneva
erandi alusel.
3. Kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme selle liikmesriigi
julgeolekuhuvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, võivad avaliku
sektori hankijad erandina käesoleva artikli lõikest 1 piirata teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetes osalemist üksnes nende ettevõtjatega, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest ja kes ei
ole kolmanda riigi või kolmanda riigi kontrolli all oleva juriidilise isiku kontrolli all.
4. Erandina lõike 1 punktist b võivad avaliku sektori hankijad anda juurdepääsu teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hangetele ka üksnes neile ettevõtjatele, kes on pärit riikidest, mis
on sõlminud liiduga rahvusvahelise lepingu, milles liit on võtnud küll riigihankega
seotud kohustusi, kuid mitte teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete kohta, ja ainult ühel
järgmistest juhtudest:
(d) avaliku sektori hankija saab ulatusliku ja laialdaselt levitatud turu-uuringu
tulemusel kindlaks teha, et lõikes 1 loetletud riikide ettevõtjatel ei ole võimalik
vajalikke teadus- ja arendusteenuseid osutada ning puudub mõistlik alternatiiv
või asendusvariant;
(e) kui ei ole esitatud sobivaid pakkumusi või osalemistaotlusi, sealhulgas
vastuseks mõnele muule sarnasele teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlusele, mille ükskõik missugune avaliku sektori hankija on lõikes 1
loetletud riikides algatanud kahe aasta jooksul enne kavandatava uue teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse algatamist, või
(f) kui lõike 1 kohase teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustele juurdepääsu
piiramise tõttu peaks avaliku sektori hankija maksma teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankimise eest ebaproportsionaalselt kõrget hinda.
ET 39 ET
Esimese lõigu punkti b kohaldamisel võivad avaliku sektori hankijad objektiivsete ja
läbipaistvate andmete alusel pidada ebaproportsionaalseks rohkem kui 20 %
hinnangulist erinevust lõikes 1 osutatud riigist pärit ettevõtja pakkumuse
hinnangulise maksumuse ja sellise ettevõtja pakkumuse hinnangulise maksumuse
vahel, kes on pärit riigist, mis on sõlminud liiduga rahvusvahelise lepingu, milles liit
on võtnud küll riigihankega seotud kohustusi, kuid mitte teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete kohta.
5. Alltöövõttu ei kasutata teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses osalemise
eeskirjadest kõrvalehoidmiseks ega nende mõjutamiseks. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetes osalemise tingimusi ei kohaldata nende üksuste suhtes, kelle suutlikkusele
pakkuja tugineb, ega alltöövõtjate suhtes, välja arvatud juhul, kui avaliku sektori
hankija piirab alltöövõttu
(a) lõike 1 või 4 kohaldamisel alltöövõtjate suhtes, kes on pärit lõikes 1 loetletud
riikidest, või
(b) lõike 3 kohaldamisel alltöövõtjate suhtes, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest ja kes ei
ole kolmanda riigi või kolmanda riigi kontrolli all oleva juriidilise isiku
kontrolli all, kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme selle
liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks
artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses.
6. Lõike 4 kohaldamisel võivad avaliku sektori hankijad ühe ja sama teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse raames reserveerida mitu teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingut, kui
(a) ettevõtja on pärit lõike 1 esimese lõigu punktides a ja b osutatud riikidest või
(b) see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku
või avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses
nende ettevõtjate puhul, kes on pärit liikmesriikidest ja kes ei ole kolmanda
riigi või kolmanda riigi kontrolli all oleva juriidilise isiku kontrolli all.
7. Kui see ei ole hankedokumentides esitatud põhjustel vastuolus liidu või ühe või
mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või avaliku turvalisuse huvidega artikli 28 lõike 2
tähenduses, näevad avaliku sektori hankijad ette, et töövõtjad viivad lõikes 1
osutatud riikides läbi vähemalt 50 % teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu teadus-
ja arendustegevusest, mille hulka kuulub ka teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
teadusliku poole eest vastutavate peamiste teadus- ja arendustöötajate töö
asjaomastes riikides.
8. Kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, võivad
avaliku sektori hankijad lisaks käesoleva artikli lõikes 7 nimetatud meetmele ette
näha, et töövõtjad viivad liidus läbi kogu kavandatavate tulemuste uute
turvakomponentidega seotud teadus- ja arendustegevuse, mille hulka kuulub ka
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu teadusliku poole eest vastutavate peamiste
teadus- ja arendustöötajate töö.
9. Kui ettevõtja mõistlikku selgitust andmata ei esita avaliku sektori hankija küsitud
teavet või dokumente, mida on vaja lõigetes 7 ja 8 osutatud lepingu täitmise kohaga
seotud tingimuste kontrollimiseks, ning seega takistab avaliku sektori hankijal
kontrollida, kas ettevõtja täidab lepingu täitmise kohaga seotud tingimusi, või
muudab selle kontrollimise praktiliselt võimatuks või väga keeruliseks, jäetakse see
ettevõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale.
ET 40 ET
10. Lisaks käesolevas määruses esitatud normidele või erandina nendest normidest,
sealhulgas lõigetes 1 ja 4 osutatud riikide loetelust, kohaldavad avaliku sektori
hankijad liidu programmist või rahastamisvahendist toetatavate teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingute sõlmimisel ja täitmisel kõiki tingimusi, mis on liidu
toetuse nõuete täitmiseks vajalikud määruse (EL, Euratom) 2024/250929 artikliga 62
ettenähtud eelarve täitmise mis tahes viisi puhul.
11. Komisjon loob ja teeb tasuta kättesaadavaks avalikult juurdepääsetava veebipõhise
vahendi, milles näidatakse tervikliku ja ajakohasena ära liidu riigihangetega seotud
kohustused, sealhulgas teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetega seotud kohustused, mis
sisalduvad rahvusvahelistes lepingutes.
Avaliku sektori hankija määrab konkreetse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluse jaoks lõike 1 punktis b ja lõikes 4 osutatud riigid kindlaks
kohaldatavate rahvusvaheliste lepingute alusel, lähtudes käesoleva lõike esimeses
lõigus osutatud veebipõhisest vahendist.
12. Avaliku sektori hankija määrab konkreetse hankemenetluse jaoks kindlaks
sisestatavad parameetrid (sealhulgas asjaomase avaliku sektori hankija, lepingu
eseme ja lepingu hinnangulise maksumuse, võttes arvesse kehtivaid piirmäärasid)
kindlaks kohaldatavate rahvusvaheliste lepingute alusel, lähtudes lõikes 1 osutatud
veebipõhisest vahendist.
13. Avaliku sektori hankija
(a) piirab artiklis 6 osutatud ettevõtjate rühmade teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlustes osalemise rühmadega, mis koosnevad üksnes sellistest
ettevõtjatest, kes on pärit käesoleva artikli lõigetes 1–4 osutatud riikidest;
(b) lükkab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse käigus pakkumuse tagasi,
kui seda ei esitanud ettevõtjad, kes on pärit käesoleva artikli lõigetes 1–4
osutatud riikidest või sellistest rühmadest, millele on osutatud punktis a.
Artikkel 12
Päritolu kindlaksmääramine
1. Ettevõtja päritoluriigiks loetakse
a) füüsilise isiku puhul riik, mille kodanik ta on või kus tal on alaline elamisõigus;
b) juriidilise isiku puhul üks järgmistest:
i) riik, mille õiguse alusel on juriidiline isik asutatud või muul viisil korraldatud
ning mille territooriumil see juriidiline isik on seotud olulise äritegevusega;
ii) kui juriidiline isik ei ole olulise äritegevusega seotud selle riigi territooriumil,
kus ta on asutatud või muul viisil korraldatud, loetakse tema päritoluriigiks selle
isiku või nende isikute päritoluriik, kes võivad juriidilise isiku suhtes otseselt või
kaudselt kasutada valitsevat mõju juriidilise isiku omandiõiguse, rahalise osaluse
või seda juriidilist isikut reguleerivate normide alusel.
29 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 23. septembri 2024. aasta määrus (EL, Euratom) 2024/2509, mis
käsitleb liidu üldeelarve suhtes kohaldatavaid finantsreegleid (ELT L, 2024/2509, 26.09.2024, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2509/oj).
ET 41 ET
2. Esimese lõigu punkti b alapunkti ii kohaldamisel eeldatakse, et asjaomas(t)el
isiku(te)l on juriidilise isiku üle valitsev mõju järgmistel juhtudel, kui kõnealune isik
kas otseselt või kaudselt
a) omab enamust juriidilise isiku märgitud kapitalist;
b) omab kontrolli juriidilise isiku emiteeritud aktsiatega/osadega määratud häälte
enamuse üle või
c) saab nimetada rohkem kui poole juriidilise isiku haldus-, juhtimis- või
järelevalveorgani liikmetest.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse käigus igal
ajal nõuda, et ettevõtja mõistliku aja jooksul esitaks, lisaks, täpsustaks või täiendaks
ettevõtja päritolu kontrollimisega seotud teavet või dokumente, tingimusel et sellised
taotlused esitatakse kooskõlas võrdse kohtlemise ja läbipaistvuse põhimõtetega. Kui
ettevõtja mõistlikku selgitust andmata ei esita asjakohast teavet ega dokumente ja
seega takistab avaliku sektori hankijal kontrollida ettevõtja päritolu või muudab
sellise kontrollimise praktiliselt võimatuks või väga keeruliseks, jäetakse see
ettevõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale.
Artikkel 13
Kohustuslikud kõrvalejätmise alused
1. Avaliku sektori hankija jätab ettevõtja, sealhulgas ettevõtjate rühma üksiku liikme,
alati teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale, kui selle
ettevõtja või juriidilise isiku tegevuses osaleva ja teises lõigus määratletud
võtmeisiku suhtes on mõnes liikmesriigis tehtud seoses käesolevas lõigus loetletud
mis tahes kuriteoga lõplik süüdimõistev kohtuotsus, nende liikmesriikide eest või
nende liikmesriikide puhul, kelle suhtes asjaomane liidu õigusakt ei ole siduv, nagu
on kindlaks määratud samaväärsetes siseriiklikes õigusaktides:
(a) osalemine nõukogu raamotsuse 2008/841/JSK30 artikli 1 punktis 1 määratletud
kuritegelikus ühenduses;
(b) korruptsioonikuriteod direktiivi (EL) 2026/102131 tähenduses;
(c) liidu finantshuve kahjustav pettus Euroopa ühenduste finantshuvide kaitse
konventsiooni artikli 1 tähenduses ning direktiivi (EL) 2017/137132 artiklites 3,
4 ja 5 osutatud kuriteod;
(d) terroriaktid ja terrorirühmitusega seotud kuriteod, samuti terroristliku
tegevusega seotud kuriteod, nagu on määratletud direktiivi (EL) 2017/54133
artiklites 3–12;
30 Nõukogu 24. oktoobri 2008. aasta raamotsus 2008/841/JSK organiseeritud kuritegevuse vastase
võitluse kohta (ELT L 300, 11.11.2008, lk 42, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dec_framw/2008/841/oj). 31 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 29. aprilli 2026. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2026/1021, milles käsitletakse
korruptsioonivastast võitlust ning millega asendatakse nõukogu raamotsus 2003/568/JSK ja Euroopa
ühenduste ametnike või Euroopa Liidu liikmesriikide ametnikega seotud korruptsiooni vastast võitlust
käsitlev konventsioon ning muudetakse Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivi (EL) 2017/1371
(ELT L, 2026/1021, 11.5.2026, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2026/1021/oj). 32 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 5. juuli 2017. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2017/1371, mis käsitleb võitlust liidu
finantshuve kahjustavate pettuste vastu kriminaalõiguse abil (ELT L 198, 28.7.2017, lk 29, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2017/1371/oj).
ET 42 ET
(e) rahapesu direktiivi (EL) 2018/167334 artikli 3 tähenduses;
(f) inimkaubandus direktiivi (EL) 2011/3635 artikli 2 tähenduses;
(g) direktiivi 2009/52/EÜ36 artiklites 2, 3 ja 9 osutatud kuriteod, mis on seotud
ebaseaduslikult riigis viibivate kolmandate riikide kodanike töötamisega;
(h) direktiivi (EL) 2024/120337 artiklites 3 ja 4 osutatud keskkonnakuriteod;
(i) kuriteod, mis on seotud direktiivi (EL) 2024/122638 artiklites 3 ja 4 osutatud
liidu piiravate meetmete rikkumisega;
(j) direktiivi (EL) 2019/71339 artiklites 3–8 osutatud mittesularahaliste
maksevahendite kasutamine pettuse eesmärgil;
(k) kuriteod, mis on seotud laste seksuaalse kuritarvitamise ja ärakasutamisega
ning lapse seksuaalset kuritarvitamist kujutava materjaliga, nagu on osutatud
direktiivi 2011/93/EL40 artiklites 3–9.
Esimese lõigu kohaldamisel tähendab võtmeisik juriidilise isiku tegevuse seisukohalt
isikut, kes on juriidilises isikus juhtival kohal ühel järgmistest alustest:
(a) õigus esindada juriidilist isikut;
(b) õigus teha juriidilise isiku nimel otsuseid või
(c) õigus kontrollida juriidilist isikut.
2. Käesolevas artiklis esitatud kõrvalejätmise aluseid kohaldatakse viie aasta jooksul
alates lõpliku kohtuotsuse kuulutamise kuupäevast (välja arvatud juhul, kui
kõrvalejätmise aeg on lõplikus kohtuotsuses kindlaks määratud), mis tähendab, et
33 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 15. märtsi 2017. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2017/541 terrorismivastase
võitluse kohta, millega asendatakse nõukogu raamotsus 2002/475/JSK ning muudetakse nõukogu otsust
2005/671/JSK (ELT L 88, 31.3.2017, lk 6, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2017/541/oj). 34 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 23. oktoobri 2018. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2018/1673 rahapesu vastu
võitlemise kohta kriminaalõiguse abil (ELT L 284, 12.11.2018, lk 22, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2018/1673/oj). 35 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 5. aprilli 2011. aasta direktiiv 2011/36/EL, milles käsitletakse
inimkaubanduse tõkestamist ja sellevastast võitlust ning inimkaubanduse ohvrite kaitset ja millega
asendatakse nõukogu raamotsus 2002/629/JSK (ELT L 101, 15.4.2011, lk 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/36/oj). 36 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 11. aprilli 2024. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2024/1203, mis käsitleb
keskkonna kaitsmist kriminaalõiguse kaudu ning millega asendatakse direktiivid 2008/99/EÜ ja
2009/123/EÜ (ELT L, 2024/1203, 30.4.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1203/oj). 37 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 11. aprilli 2024. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2024/1203, mis käsitleb
keskkonna kaitsmist kriminaalõiguse kaudu ning millega asendatakse direktiivid 2008/99/EÜ ja
2009/123/EÜ (ELT L, 2024/1203, 30.4.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1203/oj). 38 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 24. aprilli 2024. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2024/1226, mis käsitleb liidu
piiravate meetmete rikkumisega seotud kuritegude määratlemist ja nende eest mõistetavaid karistusi
ning millega muudetakse direktiivi (EL) 2018/1673 (ELT L, 2024/1226, 29.4.2024, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2024/1226/oj). 39 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 17. aprilli 2019. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2019/713, mis käsitleb
mittesularahaliste maksevahenditega seotud pettuste ja võltsimise vastast võitlust ja millega asendatakse
nõukogu raamotsus 2001/413/JSK (ELT L 123, 10.5.2019, lk 18, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2019/713/oj). 40 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 13. detsembri 2011. aasta direktiiv 2011/93/EL, mis käsitleb laste
seksuaalse kuritarvitamise ja ärakasutamise ning lasteporno vastast võitlust ja mis asendab nõukogu
raamotsuse 2004/68/JSK (ELT L 335, 17.12.2011, lk 1, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/93/oj).
ET 43 ET
pärast käesolevas lauses osutatud tähtaegade möödumist kõrvalejätmise otsust ei
tehta.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija jätab ettevõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse
käigus igal ajal teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale, kui
ta saab teada, et ettevõtja või töövõtja on rikkunud maksude või
sotsiaalkindlustusmaksete tasumisega seotud kohustusi ja see on lõpliku kohtu- või
haldusotsusega kindlaks tehtud, välja arvatud juhul, kui ettevõtja on selleks ajaks
sõlminud siduva kokkuleppe tasumisele kuuluvate maksude või
sotsiaalkindlustusmaksete, sealhulgas kogunenud intresside või trahvide tasumise
kohta (vajaduse korral).
Avaliku sektori hankija võib esimeses lõigus ettenähtud kohustuslikust
kõrvalejätmisest teha erandi, kui kõrvalejätmine oleks selgelt ebaproportsionaalne,
eelkõige juhul, kui tasumata on vaid väikesed summad.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija võib erandkorras otsustada, et teeb käesolevas artiklis
ettenähtud kohustuslikust kõrvalejätmisest erandi avalikust huvist tulenevatel
ülekaalukatel põhjustel, nagu rahvatervis või keskkonnahoid. Seepärast
dokumenteeritakse iga otsus erandi tegemise kohta koos põhjendusega teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse eraldi dokumendis.
Artikkel 14
Valikulised kõrvalejätmise alused
1. Avaliku sektori hankija võib ettevõtja, sealhulgas ettevõtjate rühma üksiku liikme
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse käigus igal ajal teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale jätta, kui
(a) avaliku sektori hankija saab mis tahes asjakohasel viisil tõendada, et ettevõtja
on rikkunud asjakohastest liidu õigusaktidest tulenevaid kohaldatavaid
kohustusi, nagu on osutatud artikli 4 lõikes 6;
(b) ettevõtja on pankrotis või tema suhtes on algatatud maksejõuetus- või
likvideerimismenetlus või ta on muus selletaolises olukorras;
(c) avaliku sektori hankija saab asjakohasel viisil tõendada, et ettevõtja on toime
pannud raske ametialase rikkumise, mis muudab tema aususe või
usaldusväärsuse küsitavaks;
(d) avaliku sektori hankijal on piisavalt usaldusväärseid andmeid, mille alusel
järeldada, et ettevõtja on konkurentsi moonutamise eesmärgil sõlminud
kokkuleppeid teiste ettevõtjatega;
(e) ettevõtjal on varasema avaliku hanke lepingu kohase olulise tingimuse
täitmisel esinenud suuri või püsivaid puudusi, mille tõttu avaliku sektori
hankija lõpetas varasema lepingu ennetähtaegselt, määras kahjutasu või
rakendas muid võrreldavaid karistusi;
(f) asjaomase teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse raames on leitud, et
ettevõtja vastutab sellise teabe olulise moonutamise eest, mida on vaja
menetlusest kõrvalejätmise aluste puudumise või kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide
täitmise kontrollimiseks, või on muul viisil tegutsenud eesmärgiga saada
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses põhjendamatuid eeliseid;
ET 44 ET
(g) avaliku sektori hankija saab mis tahes asjakohasel viisil, sealhulgas salastatud
teabe või avalikkusele avaldamata teabe abil tõendada liikmesriikide pädevate
asutuste hinnangut, mille kohaselt ettevõtja ei ole piisavalt usaldusväärne, et
välistada riske liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeolekule ja avaliku
turvalisuse huvidele;
(h) ettevõtja on kolme aasta jooksul enne hankemenetluses osalemist saanud
siseturgu moonutavaid välisriigi subsiidiume, mille kohta komisjon on vastu
võtnud määruse (EL) 2022/256041 artikli 31 lõike 2 kohase rakendusakti, ning
avaliku sektori hankijal on piisavalt usaldusväärseid andmeid, mille alusel
järeldada, et asjaomased välisriigi subsiidiumid mõjutavad tõenäoliselt
ettevõtja pakkumust.
2. Iga ettevõtja, kelle suhtes kohaldatakse lõike 1 kohast kõrvalejätmist, võib esitada
tõendeid, mis lükkavad kõrvalejätmise aluse olemasolu ümber või tõendavad, et ta on
oma usaldusväärsuse näitamiseks võtnud piisavaid meetmeid, kuigi kõrvalejätmise
alus on olemas.
Selleks peab ettevõtja eelkõige tõendama, et ta on
(a) maksnud või võtnud kohustuse maksta hüvitist rikkumisega tekitatud mis tahes
kahju eest;
(b) selgitanud põhjalikult fakte ja asjaolusid ning teinud uurimisasutustega
aktiivselt koostööd ning
(c) võtnud konkreetseid tehnilisi ning töökorralduse ja töötajatega seotud
meetmeid, mida on vaja edasiste rikkumiste ärahoidmiseks.
Kui avaliku sektori hankija peab esitatud tõendeid piisavaks, ei jäeta asjaomast
ettevõtjat teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlusest kõrvale.
Ettevõtja võetud meetmete hindamisel võetakse arvesse rikkumise raskusastet ja
konkreetseid asjaolusid. Ettevõtja võetud meetmete hindamisel võtab avaliku sektori
hankija arvesse asjaomaste uurimisasutustega tehtud koostöö laadi, ulatust ja aega.
Kui meetmeid peetakse ebapiisavaks, saadetakse ettevõtjale sellise otsuse kohta
põhjendus.
Ettevõtjal, kes on mis tahes liikmesriigis lõpliku otsusega teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluses osalemisest kõrvale jäetud, ei ole selle otsusega määratud
kõrvalejätmise aja jooksul õigust kasutada käesoleva lõikega ettenähtud võimalust.
3. Liikmesriik võib määrata riikliku asutuse, kes on pädev tõendeid hindama ja
otsustama, kas need on käesoleva lõike kohaldamiseks piisavad. Avaliku sektori
hankijad tuginevad oma hankemenetlustes riikliku pädeva asutuse positiivsele
otsusele.
4. Kui lõike 2 kohaseid meetmeid ei võeta ja kõrvalejätmise aega ei ole lõplikus
kohtuotsuses kindlaks määratud, võivad avaliku sektori hankijad jätta ettevõtja
käesoleva artikli alusel menetlusest kõrvale kuni viieks aastaks alates kõrvalejätmise
aluseks oleva tegevuse kuupäevast, jätkuva või korduva tegevuse puhul aga alates
41 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 14. detsembri 2022. aasta määrus (EL) 2022/2560, mis käsitleb
siseturgu moonutavaid välisriigi subsiidiume (ELT L 330, 23.12.2022, lk 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2560/oj).
ET 45 ET
tegevuse lõpetamise kuupäevast, kuid mitte sellest maksimaalsest ajavahemikust
kauemaks.
5. Kui avaliku sektori hankija jätab ettevõtja lõike 1 punkti h alusel menetlusest
kõrvale, teatab ta sellest komisjonile.
Artikkel 15
Kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid
1. Kui avaliku sektori hankijad otsustavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes
osalemise tingimustena kasutada kvalifitseerimiskriteeriume, tuleb nende
kehtestamisel järgida käesolevas artiklis sätestatud tingimusi.
2. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid põhinevad
üksnes järgmisel:
(a) kutsealal tegutsemise sobivus lõike 4 tähenduses;
(b) tehniline ja kutsealane suutlikkus lõike 5 tähenduses;
(c) majanduslik ja finantssuutlikkus lõigete 6, 7 ja 8 tähenduses.
3. Kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide puhul piirduvad avaliku sektori hankijad nõuetega,
mida on vaja selle tagamiseks, et ettevõtjal on olemas teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu täitmiseks ettenähtud suutlikkus ja eeldused. Kõik
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriume käsitlevad nõuded peavad olema seotud asjaomase
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu esemega, proportsionaalsed selle keerukuse
ja asjaomaste riskidega ning vastama läbipaistvuse, mittediskrimineerimise ja
proportsionaalsuse põhimõtetele.
Igale dokumendile, mis tuleb kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumile vastavuse tõendamiseks
esitada, lisatakse märge „või samaväärne“, et pakkujal oleks kriteeriumidele
vastavuse kohta võimalik esitada mis tahes alternatiivseid tõendeid.
4. Kui selles riigis, kus ettevõtja peamiselt tegutseb, nõutakse asjaomase teadus- ja
arendustegevusega tegelemiseks ettevõtjatelt konkreetset luba või teatava
organisatsiooni liikmesust, võib avaliku sektori hankija teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluse puhul ette näha, et need ettevõtjad esitavad tõendid sellise loa
olemasolu või sellisesse organisatsiooni kuulumise kohta.
Esimeses ja teises lõigus esitatud nõuete täitmise eelduseks on see, et pädev asutus
on ettevõtja kandnud ametlikku nimekirja või sertifitseerimisasutus on väljastanud
asjakohase tõendi.
5. Avaliku sektori hankija võib kehtestada nõudeid, millega tagatakse, et ettevõtjatel on
vajalikud inim- ja tehnilised ressursid ning kogemused, et täita teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingut asjakohaste kvaliteedinõuete kohaselt.
Avaliku sektori hankijad ei nõua teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses
osalemise tingimusena eelnevat kogemust muude lepingutega, välja arvatud juhul,
kui see on põhjendatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu keerukuse või
hankelepingu eseme laadiga.
Avaliku sektori hankija võib ühel järgmistest juhtudest teha järelduse, et ettevõtjal ei
ole ettenähtud kutsealaseid eeldusi:
(a) kui avaliku sektori hankija on mis tahes viisil kindlaks teinud, et ettevõtjal on
huvide konflikt, mis võib negatiivselt mõjutada asjaomase lepingu täitmist;
ET 46 ET
(b) kui avaliku sektori hankijat on mis tahes viisil teavitatud sellest, et ettevõtja
kujutab endast liikmesriigi või kogu liidu jaoks julgeolekuprobleemi.
Teiste lepingutega seotud eelneva kogemuse nõudmiseks peab avaliku sektori
hankija olema töövõtjatele esitanud ka nõude, et neil on olemas teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmiseks vajalikud inim- ja tehnilised
ressursid. Avaliku sektori hankija ei loe ettevõtjat tehnilise ja kutsealase suutlikkuse
nõuetele mittevastavaks üksnes seetõttu, et tal puudub eelnev kogemus muude
lepingutega.
6. Kõigis valikukriteeriumides sisalduvates viidetes kvalifikatsioonile või
kvalifikatsioonitasemetele lähtutakse Euroopa kvalifikatsiooniraamistiku tasemetest,
mis on sätestatud nõukogu 22. mai 2017. aasta soovituse42 II lisas.
7. Kui avaliku sektori hankija esitab ettevõtjale minimaalse majandusliku ja
finantssuutlikkuse nõude, võib ta nõuda, et ettevõtjal oleks üks või mõlemad
järgmistest:
(a) teatav minimaalne finantssuutlikkus;
(b) asjakohasel tasemel erialane vastutuskindlustus.
8. Kui avaliku sektori hankija küsib ettevõtjalt minimaalse majandusliku ja
finantssuutlikkuse kohta tõendeid, lubab ta ettevõtjal seda tõendada mis tahes
asjakohasel viisil, kasutades muu hulgas järgmist:
(a) pangaväljavõtted või vajaduse korral tõend asjakohase erialase
vastutuskindlustuse kohta;
(b) finantsaruanded või finantsaruannete väljavõtted, kui finantsaruannete
avaldamine on ettevõtja asukohariigi õiguse alusel nõutav;
(c) väljavõte ettevõtja käibe kohta kuni kolme viimase majandusaasta jooksul,
olenevalt ettevõtte asutamise või tegevuse alustamise kuupäevast, kui need
andmed käibe kohta on kättesaadavad;
(d) äriplaan koos kinnituste või muude tõenditega ettevõtja materiaalse ja
immateriaalse finantsvara kohta, sealhulgas tema intellektuaalomand,
finantsinvestorite või rahastamisasutuste rahaline toetus või tõendid
asjaomasesse ettevõtjasse investeeritud omakapitali kohta.
Kui esitatakse minimaalse finantssuutlikkuse nõue, ei tohi selle suurus ületada 50 %
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu hinnangulisest maksumusest, välja arvatud
nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud juhtudel, mis on seotud hangitud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste laadist tulenevate eririskidega. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankeleping. Avaliku sektori hankija täpsustab sellise nõude peamisi põhjuseid
hankedokumentides.
Minimaalse finants- ja majandusliku suutlikkuse hindamisel võib avaliku sektori
hankija võtta ettevõtja raamatupidamise aastaaruandest saadud andmeid arvesse
üksnes juhul, kui avaliku sektori hankija on hankedokumentides täpsustanud sellise
42 Nõukogu 22. mai 2017. aasta soovitus, milles käsitletakse elukestva õppe Euroopa
kvalifikatsiooniraamistikku ning millega tunnistatakse kehtetuks Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 23.
aprilli 2008. aasta soovitus Euroopa kvalifikatsiooniraamistiku loomise kohta elukestva õppe
valdkonnas (ELT C 189, 15.6.2017, lk 15).
ET 47 ET
arvessevõtmise meetodid ja kriteeriumid. Need meetodid ja kriteeriumid peavad
olema läbipaistvad, objektiivsed ja mittediskrimineerivad.
Kui avaliku sektori hankija kehtestab kooskõlas lõikega 6 majandusliku ja
finantssuutlikkuse kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid, võimaldab ta pakkujatel esitada
käesoleva lõike esimese lõigu punktis d osutatud tõendeid alates kuupäevast, mil
avaliku sektori hankija teatab pakkujatele teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
sõlmimise otsusest, kuni kõnealuse lepingu allkirjastamise kuupäevani.
9. Kui avaliku sektori hankija esitab ametialase vastutuskindlustuse nõude, tagab ta, et
nõutav kindlustussumma on proportsionaalne põhjendatult prognoositava rahalise
kahjuga, mida töövõtjad ja alltöövõtjad võivad teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu täitmise ajal või selle tulemusena põhjustada, ning esitab selle kohta
hankedokumentides põhjenduse.
10. Kui avaliku sektori hankija kasutatav teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlus ei
näe ette ettevõtjate eelkvalifitseerimist menetlusest kõrvalejätmise aluste või
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide alusel, küsib avaliku sektori hankija kõiki tõendavaid
dokumente, mis näitavad sobivust kohaldatavate menetlusest kõrvalejätmise aluste ja
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide korral, üksnes nendelt edukaks tunnistatud pakkumuse
esitajatelt, kelle pakkumus sai pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumide alusel kõrgeima
koha. Andmeid, mida on võimalik kindlaks teha olemasolevatest avaliku sektori
asutuse loodud riiklikest andmebaasidest või ametlike nimekirjade või
sertifitseerimistõendite järgi, ei seata kahtluse alla ilma piisava põhjenduseta.
11. Kui ettevõtja esitatud teave või dokumendid on või tunduvad olevat puudulikud või
vigased või kui konkreetsed dokumendid puuduvad, annab avaliku sektori hankija
kooskõlas võrdse kohtlemise ja läbipaistvuse põhimõtetega asjaomastele ettevõtjatele
võimaluse mõistliku aja jooksul esitada, lisada, täpsustada või täiendada asjakohast
teavet või dokumente, et kõrvaldada pakkumuses esinevad puudused, mis tulenevad
pakkumuse väheolulisest ebatäpsusest või nõuetele mittevastavusest, mis ei sea
kahtluse alla teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu sõlmimise otsust.
Artikkel 10
Finantstagatised
1. Avaliku sektori hankija võib nõuda, et pakkujad esitaksid pakkumuse tagatisi,
täitmistagatisi või lisatagatisi, kui on täidetud kõik järgmised tingimused:
(a) pakkumuse tagatiste summa ei ületa 2 % teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu hinnangulisest kogumaksumusest, kusjuures pakkumuse tagatise
maksimumsumma on 500 000 eurot teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute
puhul, mille hinnanguline maksumus on üle 5 000 000 euro, ja 100 000 eurot
lepingute puhul, mille hinnanguline maksumus on alla 5 000 000 euro;
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute puhul, mille hinnanguline
maksumus on üle 500 000 euro, ei ületa täitmis- ja lisatagatiste summa 5 %
konkreetse lepingu maksumusest ja väga keerukate või riskantsete teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingute puhul võib seda suurendada 10 %ni, kui see on
riskianalüüsiga põhjendatud;
(c) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute puhul, mille hinnanguline
maksumus on alla 500 000 euro, ei tohi nõuda täitmis- ega lisatagatisi.
ET 48 ET
2. Pakkumuse tagatise, täitmistagatise ja lisatagatise suurust, mida avaliku sektori
hankijad pakkujatelt nõuavad, vähendatakse VKEde, innovaatiliste idufirmade ja
innovaatiliste kasvufirmade puhul 50 %.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija tagab finantstagatiste õigeaegse vähendamise või
vabastamise, kui nende nõudmine ei ole enam põhjendatud.
Artikkel 17
Innovatsiooniga seotud hindamiskriteeriumid
1. Avaliku sektori hankija sõlmib lepingu ettevõtjaga, kes pakub parimat hinna ja
kvaliteedi suhet. Selleks hindab avaliku sektori hankija saadud pakkumusi parima
hinna ja kvaliteedi suhte meetodi kohaselt. Parima hinna ja kvaliteedi suhte
kindlakstegemiseks võrdlevad avaliku sektori hankijad pakkumuste hindamisel
nende maksumust ja kvaliteeti, mis põhineb teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
esemega seotud kvaliteedikriteeriumidel. Parima hinna ja kvaliteedi suhte
kindlakstegemisel võib arvesse võtta ka kulusid. Pakkumuste hindamisel parima
hinna ja kvaliteedi suhte meetodi alusel peab kõigi kvaliteedikriteeriumide osakaal
kokku moodustama vähemalt 50 % kõigi hindamiskriteeriumide kogukaalust.
Hinnakriteerium on seotud üksnes pakkumuse maksumusega. Omamise kogukuluga
seotud kriteeriumide osakaal arvestatakse vastava protsentuaalse osa sisse.
2. Kvaliteedikriteeriumide alla kuuluvad kõik kriteeriumid, mida kasutatakse selle
hindamiseks, mil määral pakkumusega on võimalik teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu esemega seoses saavutada kasulikke, mõjusaid või kestlikke tulemusi.
Pakkumuse kvaliteet võib olla seotud näiteks järgmiste aspektidega:
(a) tehnilised eelised, esteetilised ja funktsionaalsed omadused, kättesaadavus,
arvestamine kõigi kasutajatega, teadus- ja arendusmeetodid;
(b) keskkonna-, kliima-, sotsiaalsed- ja innovatsioonieesmärgid kooskõlas artikli 4
lõikega 6, julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisuse huvid kooskõlas artikliga 28 või
ELi eelistamise nõuded, kui avaliku sektori hankija kohaldab neid nõudeid
pakkumustele punktide andmise vormis;
(c) määratud töötajate kvaliteet, mis võib suurel määral mõjutada lepingu täitmise
taset, näiteks teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingut täitma määratud
töötajate töökorraldus, kvalifikatsioon ja kogemused;
(d) töökorralduse kvaliteet, teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmiseks
eraldatud vahendite jaotamise kvaliteet.
3. Pakkumusi hinnatakse mittediskrimineerivate, proportsionaalsete, konkreetsete,
objektiivsete ja mõõdetavate kriteeriumide alusel ning sellise protsessi käigus, mis
sisaldab piisavaid kaitsemeetmeid rikkumiste vastu. See võimaldab avaliku sektori
hankijal arusaadaval viisil võrrelda pakutavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste tugevaid ja
nõrku külgi ning ei anna avaliku sektori hankijale piiramatut valikuvabadust.
4. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses kohaldavad avaliku sektori hankijad
lõikes 2 osutatud kvaliteedi hindamise kriteeriumide hulgas spetsiaalseid kriteeriume,
mille eesmärk on mõõta pakkumuste võimalikku mõju innovatsioonile ja liidu jaoks
lisaväärtuse loomisele. Sellised innovatsiooniga seotud kvaliteedikriteeriumid,
millele on osutatud käesoleva artikli lõike 2 punktis e, hõlmavad järgmist:
ET 49 ET
(a) millisel määral on pakkumus innovatiivne ning kuidas see innovatiivsus aitab
asjaomase teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke pakkumuse objektiks oleva
ettepaneku uurimise, arendamise või katsetamise käigus suurendada selle üldist
kvaliteeti, kasutades hindamiseks võimaluse korral kvaliteedikriteeriume, mis
on otseselt seotud asjaomase hanke kavandatud tulemustega;
(b) pakkumuse eseme omamise kogukulud ja sellega seotud pikaajaline kasu,
sealhulgas kõikide asjaomase pakkumusega seotud
väärtuskavandamismeetodite mõju nendele kuludele ja kasule;
(c) pakkumuse mõju tehnoloogia tarneahela tugevdamisele ja innovatsiooni
ökosüsteemi arendamisele liidus, sealhulgas elutähtsa tehnoloogia puhul;
(d) nende tegevuste väärtuse osakaal, mida kavatsetakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames liidus ellu viia;
(e) (vajaduse korral) millisel määral kavatsetakse hanke esemega integreerida
liidus väljatöötatud tehnoloogiat, sealhulgas teadus- ja arendustegevuse
tulemused, mis on saadud siseturul avaliku sektori rahastatud teadus- ja
arendusprogrammidest, ning millisel määral kasutatakse selliseid vahendeid
nagu standardid, spetsifikatsioonid, tarkvara või mudelid või muu liidus
väljatöötatud tehnoloogia.
5. Avaliku sektori hankija võib lisaks lõikes 4 esitatud kriteeriumidele kohaldada ka
muid pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriume, mis on seotud innovatsiooniga. Kõigi
innovatsiooniga seotud hindamiskriteeriumide osakaal peab kokku olema vähemalt
15 % kõigi hindamiskriteeriumide kogukaalust ning lõike 1 punktides c, d ja e
osutatud innovatsiooniga seotud hindamiskriteeriumide osakaal ei või ületada 15 %
kõigi hindamiskriteeriumide kogukaalust. Innovatsiooniga seotud
hindamiskriteeriumid kuuluvad lõikes 2 osutatud kvaliteedikriteeriumide hulka.
6. Erandina lõigetest 4 ja 5 ei kohaldata käesoleva artikli kohast kohustust kohaldada
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses innovatsiooniga seotud
hindamiskriteeriume, kui hanke ainus ese on CPV koodide 73200000-4, 73210000-7
ja 73220000-0 alla kuuluvate teadus- ja arendustegevuse nõustamisteenuste
hankimine.
Artikkel 18
Hangitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste tingimustele esitatavate nõuete vormistamine
1. Avaliku sektori hankija esitab hanke esemeks olevate teadus- ja arendusteenuste
tingimustele ning kavandatud tulemustele esitatavad nõuded hankedokumentides
järgmises tähtsuse järjekorras:
(a) õigusaktidega ettenähtud nõuded;
(b) funktsionaalsusnõuded;
(c) tulemusnõuded;
(d) teostusnõuded.
Avaliku sektori hankija esitab iga tingimusega seotud nõuded sellises tähtsuse
järjekorras, nagu esimeses lõigus on näidatud.
ET 50 ET
Kui kohaldatavas liidu või liikmesriigi õiguses ei ole ette nähtud teisiti, sõnastab
avaliku sektori hankija kõik käesolevas lõikes osutatud nõuded nii, et pakkujal oleks
nõuetele vastavust võimalik tõendada mis tahes muu samaväärse tõendiga.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija esitab nõude tulemusnõudena või teostusnõudena üksnes
juhul, kui seda ei ole funktsionaalsusnõudena võimalik sõnastada.
3. Kui konkreetse tingimuse kohta ei ole nõuet seadusega ette nähtud ja konkreetset
tingimust ei ole võimalik lõike 1 nõuete abil piisavalt kirjeldada, võib selle tingimuse
nõuete vormistamisel kasutada osutamist ühele järgmistest (tähtsuse järjekorras):
(a) harmoneeritud standardid, samuti standardid ja standardimisdokumendid, mille
viited on käesoleva lõike kohaldamiseks avaldatud Euroopa Liidu Teatajas või
mis tahes muul viisil, mis on kooskõlas liidu õigusaktide ja ühiste
spetsifikatsioonidega, mida käsitatakse muu tehnilise spetsifikatsioonina kui
standard ja mille on vastu võtnud komisjon, ning mille järgimisel võib eeldada,
et see vastab asjakohaste liidu õigusaktide nõuetele;
(b) määruse (EL) nr 1025/2012 artiklis 2 määratletud Euroopa standardid,
sealhulgas Euroopa standardeid ülevõtvad riiklikud standardid;
(c) Euroopa hindamisdokumendid;
(d) rahvusvahelised standardid;
(e) muud standardimisdokumendid, mille on koostanud määruses (EL)
nr 1025/2012 määratletud Euroopa standardiorganisatsioon;
(f) kui punktides a–f loetletud dokumente ei ole, siis riiklikud standardid, riiklikud
tehnilised tunnustused või riiklikud tehnilised spetsifikatsioonid.
Igale osutatavale dokumendile lisatakse märge „või samaväärne“, välja arvatud
juhul, kui osutatakse kohustuslikule ühtlustatud tehnilisele spetsifikatsioonile.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija tagab, et hankedokumentides ei osutata konkreetsele margile,
margitoote nimele või allikale ega teatavale protsessile, mis kirjeldab konkreetse
ettevõtja tooteid, teenuseid või töid, ega kaubamärgile, patendile, tüübile,
konkreetsele päritolule või tootmisviisile, mis annaks teatavatele ettevõtjatele või
toodetele, teenustele või töödele eeliseid või välistaks need.
Erandina esimesest lõigust on selline osutamine lubatud üksnes juhul, kui teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu eset ei ole lõigete 1, 2 ja 3 kohaselt võimalik piisavalt
täpselt ja arusaadavalt kirjeldada. Avaliku sektori hankija ei või sellest kohustusest
kõrvale kalduda, välja arvatud juhul, kui see on põhjendatud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu esemega, ning sellisel juhul lisatakse märge „või
samaväärne“.
Artikkel 19
Riski ja kasu jagamine turutingimustel
1. Avaliku sektori hankija tagab, et töövõtja poolt teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu täitmisel loodud tulemuste intellektuaalomandiõigusi ei saa üksnes
avaliku sektori hankija tema enda tegevuses kasutamiseks, vaid et avaliku sektori
hankija jagab töövõtjaga turutingimustel nende intellektuaalomandiõigustega seotud
riske ja kasu. Selle nõude täitmiseks järgivad avaliku sektori hankijad ja töövõtjad
lõigetes 2–9 esitatud kohustusi.
ET 51 ET
2. Töövõtjatel on õigus jätta teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmisel loodud
tulemuste intellektuaalomandiõigus endale. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepinguga antakse see õigus töövõtjale, kellel on kohustus kaitsta oma
tulemusi, teha kõik endast olenev oma tulemuste turuleviimiseks ja mitte kasutada
tulemusi vastuolus avaliku huviga.
3. Töövõtja teatab avaliku sektori hankijale võimalikult kiiresti kõigist tulemustest,
mida saab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingus märgitud tulemuste loomisest
alates maksimaalse ajavahemiku jooksul kasutada. See teade sisaldab töövõtja otsust
neid tulemusi kaitsta ja turule viia. Kui töövõtja otsustab, et ta teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingus märgitud tulemusi ei kaitse ega vii turule, siis on
erandina lõikest 2 ja ilma et see piiraks autorite isiklikke õigusi, avaliku sektori
hankijal õigus
(a) anda kokkuleppel töövõtjaga töövõtja töötajatele õigus neid tulemusi kaitsta ja
saada endale nende tulemuste intellektuaalomandiõigus või
(b) neid tulemusi ise kaitsta, saada endale nende tulemuste
intellektuaalomandiõigus ning tulemusi õiglastel ja mõistlikel tingimustel ning
mittediskrimineerival viisil üle anda või litsentsida.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija saab töövõtjate poolt teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames loodud tulemustele vähemalt vaba juurdepääsu, et kasutada
neid tulemusi oma tarbeks ning anda kasutamiseks oma praegustele ja tulevastele
töövõtjatele mis tahes lepingu täitmisel, mille nad on avaliku sektori hankijaga
sõlminud. Avaliku sektori hankija võib nõuda ka seda, et selline vaba juurdepääs
hõlmaks lisaks kasutusõigustele ka muid juurdepääsuõigusi, nagu õigus tulemusi
muuta ja talletada.
5. Hädaolukorras, kui töövõtjad ei suuda liidu turul enam rahuldada nõudlust teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu tulemuste järele, on avaliku sektori hankijal õigus
anda litsentse või kohustada töövõtjaid andma kolmandatele isikutele litsentse
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu tulemuste äriliseks all-litsentsimise õiguseta
kasutamiseks mitteainuõiguslikul alusel ning õiglastel ja mõistlikel tingimustel.
6. Kui töövõtja ei vii oma tulemusi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingus ettenähtud
mõistliku aja jooksul turule, kuid esitab selle kohta õiguspärased põhjused, teeb
avaliku sektori hankija järgmist:
(a) kontrollib koos töövõtjaga, kas ta suudab ja soovib tulemusi turule viia, kui
talle antakse mõistlikul määral lisaaega;
(b) üksnes juhul, kui on kontrollitud, et töövõtja ei suuda või ei soovi tulemusi
turule viia või ei ole võimeline tulemusi punktis a osutatud lisaaja jooksul
turule viima, on avaliku sektori hankijal õigus
(a) anda litsentse või kohustada töövõtjaid õiglastel ja mõistlikel tingimustel
andma kolmandatele isikutele litsentse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu tulemuste äriliseks all-litsentsimise õiguseta kasutamiseks
mitteainuõiguslikul alusel või
(b) üksnes juhul, kui punktis i osutatud litsentsimismeede ei ole piisav
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguga ettenähtud turuleviimise
saavutamiseks, kohustada töövõtjat andma õiglastel ja mõistlikel
tingimustel nende tulemuste omandiõiguse üle avaliku sektori hankijale,
ilma et see piiraks autorite isiklikke õigusi.
ET 52 ET
7. Kui töövõtja ei vii oma tulemusi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguga
ettenähtud mõistliku aja jooksul turule ega saa seda põhjendada õiguspäraste
põhjustega või kui töövõtja kasutab neid tulemusi viisil, mis on vastuolus avalike
huvidega, ning kui avaliku sektori hankijal ei ole õnnestunud saada töövõtjalt
mõistliku aja jooksul luba tulemuste litsentsimiseks õiglastel ja mõistlikel
tingimustel, on avaliku sektori hankijal õigus
(a) anda litsentse või ilma töövõtjatele rahalist hüvitist maksmata kohustada neid
andma kolmandatele isikutele litsentse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
tulemuste äriliseks all-litsentsimise õiguseta kasutamiseks mitteainuõiguslikul
alusel või
(b) juhul kui punktis a osutatud meetmest ei piisa, et takistada tulemuste
kasutamist viisil, mis on vastuolus avalike huvidega, või et saavutada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepinguga ettenähtud turuleviimine, on avaliku sektori
hankijal töövõtjale rahalist hüvitist maksmata õigus kohustada töövõtjat ilma
kõnealuste tulemusteta omandiõiguse üle andma avaliku sektori hankijale, ilma
et see piiraks autorite isiklikke õigusi.
8. Lõigete 6 ja 7 kohaldamisel hõlmavad õiguspärased põhjused ka seda, kui töövõtja
tõendab, et ta on teinud kõik endast oleneva tulemuste turuleviimiseks ja tulemuste
avaliku huviga vastuolus oleva kuritarvitamise vältimiseks.
9. Töövõtja teatab avaliku sektori hankijale ette igast teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke
tulemuste ainulitsentsi andmise või omandiõiguse üleandmise kavatsusest. Avaliku
sektori hankijal on õigus teadus- ja arendustegevuse hanke tulemuste ainulitsentsi
andmine või omandiõiguse üleandmine vaidlustada järgmistel juhtudel:
(a) kui selline litsentsimine või üleandmine mõjutaks negatiivselt avaliku sektori
hankija juurdepääsu tulemustele või tulemuste ärieesmärgil kasutamist;
(b) kui selline litsentsimine või üleandmine oleks vastuolus avaliku sektori
hankijate avaliku huviga sektorites, mis on liidu või liikmesriikide sotsiaal-
majandusliku või tehnoloogilise arengu seisukohast väga olulised;
(c) kui kõnealused tulemused läheksid muu kui artikli 11 lõikes 1 osutatud riigi
kontrolli või muude piirangute alla viisil, mis mõjutaks negatiivselt avaliku
sektori hankija juurdepääsu käesoleva lõike punktis a osutatud tulemustele või
nende turuleviimisele, või viisil, mis oleks vastuolus käesoleva lõike punktis b
osutatud avaliku huviga.
10. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete puhul, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele eelnevad
hanked, võivad avaliku sektori hankijad erandina lõigetest 1–9 saada nende
tulemuste intellektuaalomandiõiguse, mille töövõtjad on teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames loonud, kui see on põhjendatud mõne järgmise olulise avaliku
huviga seotud põhjusega, mis täpsustatakse hankedokumentides:
(a) kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud, et tagada liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi
julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses;
(b) kui see on vajalik, et vältida tulemuste kuritarvitamist töövõtjate või muude
kolmandate isikute poolt, ning puudub muu tulemuslik viis sellise kuritarvituse
vältimiseks;
(c) kui avaliku sektori hankija kavatseb töövõtjate loodud tulemustega seotud
intellektuaalomandiõiguste kasutamisel omada ainuõigust.
ET 53 ET
Kui avaliku sektori hankija saab vastavalt esimesele lõigule
intellektuaalomandiõiguse
(a) ja ei kasuta lõike 10 punkti c alusel saadud intellektuaalomandiõigust nelja
aasta jooksul alates intellektuaalomandiõiguse saamise kuupäevast, pakub ta
nende intellektuaalomandiõiguse üleandmist või litsentsib selle õiglastel ja
mõistlikel tingimustel ning mittediskrimineerival viisil;
(b) kui ta otsustab intellektuaalomandiõiguse üle anda või litsentsida, teeb ta seda
õiglastel ja mõistlikel tingimustel ning mittediskrimineerival viisil;
(c) ta tagab, et kõiki tulemusi, millega ei kaasne intellektuaalomandiõigusi, võib
laialdaselt levitada, ilma et see piiraks artiklis 26 osutatud konfidentsiaalsus- ja
andmekaitsekohustusi.
Komisjonil on õigus kooskõlas artikliga 39 vastu võtta delegeeritud õigusakte, et
muuta käesoleva lõike esimeses lõigus esitatud juhtumite loetelu, võttes arvesse
järgmisi kriteeriume:
(a) mõju teadus- ja arendustegevuse tulemuste turuleviimise suurendamisele;
(b) mõju innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, sealhulgas eelkõige innovaatiliste idu- ja
kasvufirmade ning uute turuletulijate turulepääsu parandamisele;
(c) mõju liidu sotsiaal-majanduslikule või tehnoloogilisele arengule;
(d) mõju liidu strateegilisele autonoomiale ja majandusjulgeolekule;
(e) mõju avalike huvide kaitsele.
11. Avaliku sektori hankija
(a) nõuab, et töövõtja seaks alltöövõtulepingutes tingimuseks, et alltöövõtjatele
kehtivad samad intellektuaalomandiõigused ja kohustused, mis teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu alusel on töövõtjal, eelkõige et igas üleandmis-
või litsentsilepingus antakse töövõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingust
tulenevad kohustused üle uuele omanikule või litsentsisaajale ning et uuel
omanikul või litsentsisaajal on kohustus need iga järgmise üleandmise või
litsentsimise korral edasi anda;
(b) järgib teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute raames
intellektuaalomandiõiguste kaitset mõjutavate kohustuste kavandamisel ja
rakendamisel intellektuaalomandi puhul kohaldatavat liidu õigust,
intellektuaalomandi õiguste kaubandusaspektide lepingut43 ning liidu või
asjaomaste liikmesriikide muid rahvusvahelisi kohustusi.
Kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankes osalemine ei ole piiratud liikmesriikidest
pärit ettevõtjatega, võimaldab avaliku sektori hankija esimese lõigu punkti b
kohaldamisel teiste WTO liikmesriikide ettevõtjate suhtes seoses
intellektuaalomandi kaitsega vähemalt sama soodsaid tingimusi kui avaliku
sektori hankija oma riigi ettevõtjatele, välja arvatud juhul, kui
intellektuaalomandi õiguste kaubandusaspektide lepingus on ette nähtud teisiti.
43 Intellektuaalomandi õiguste kaubandusaspektide leping, mis on esitatud Maailma
Kaubandusorganisatsiooni asutamislepingu 1C lisas (EÜT L 336, 23.12.1994, lk 214, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/agree_internation/1994/800(16)/oj).
ET 54 ET
Artikkel 20
Lepingu muudatused
1. Avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuste kohta sõlmitud
hankelepinguid nende kehtivusaja jooksul ilma uue teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluseta muuta, kui see võimalus on muudatuste rahalisest väärtusest
olenemata esialgsetes hankedokumentides ette nähtud selgete, täpsete ja
ühemõtteliste läbivaatamisklauslitega, mis võivad hõlmata maksumuse läbivaatamise
klausleid või võimalusi. Sellistes klauslites märgitakse võimalike muudatuste või
võimaluste ulatus ja laad ning ka tingimused, mille korral neid võib kasutada. Nende
klauslitega ei nähta ette muudatusi ega võimalusi, mis muudaksid teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu üldist laadi.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuste kohta sõlmitud
hankelepinguid nende kehtivusaja jooksul muuta ka ilma uut teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetlust korraldamata, kui on täidetud mõlemad järgmised
tingimused:
(a) muudatus ei ole oluline lõike 3 tähenduses või muudatus on oluline, kuid
kuulub mõne lõikes 4 loetletud juhtumi alla;
(b) muudatus vastab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise käigus
tekkivatele objektiivsetele vajadustele ning piirdub sellega, mis on vajalik ja
asjakohane lepingu täitmise ja järjepidevuse tagamiseks, ning ei muuda lepingu
esialgset majanduslikku tasakaalu töövõtja kasuks viisil, mida ei olnud
esialgses lepingus ette nähtud.
3. Muudatust käsitatakse olulisena ühel või mitmel järgmistest juhtudest:
(a) muudatusega lisatakse tingimusi, mis oleksid võimaldanud osaleda ka muudel
kui algselt väljavalitud kandidaatidel või aktsepteerida muid kui algselt
aktsepteeritud pakkumisi või mis oleksid hankemenetlusse kaasanud
täiendavaid osalejaid, kui neid muudatusi oleks rakendatud algses
hankemenetluses;
(b) sellega muudetakse lepingu põhilisi tingimusi, näiteks
(c) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu majandusliku tasakaalu muutmine
töövõtja kasuks viisil, mida ei olnud esialgses lepingus ette nähtud, nagu
(a) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu ulatuse märkimisväärne
laiendamine;
(b) töövõtja isik muudel kui lõike 4 punktis c ettenähtud juhtudel.
4. Tingimusel et need ei muuda teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu esialgset
majanduslikku tasakaalu töövõtja kasuks viisil, mida ei olnud algses teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingus ette nähtud, on olulised muudatused lõike 2
tähenduses lubatud üksnes järgmistel juhtudel:
(a) kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal on tekkinud vajadus
lisateenuste või asjade hankimise järele, tingimusel et töövõtja vahetamine ei
ole tehniliselt või majanduslikult teostatav, sealhulgas vastastikuse seotuse
tõttu olemasolevate tööde või teenustega või kulude märkimisväärse
suurenemise tõttu;
ET 55 ET
(b) kui muudatus on vajalik asjaolude tõttu, mida hoolas avaliku sektori hankija ei
saanud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse algatamise ajal mõistlikult
ette näha ning mis mõjutavad märkimisväärselt lepingu täitmist või
teostatavust, sealhulgas
(a) olulised muudatused kohaldatavates õigusnormides või kohaldatavas
õigusraamistikus;
ii) tehnoloogia oluline areng;
iii) rasked häired, hädaolukorrad või kriisid, millel on märkimisväärne
majanduslik, ühiskondlik või tegevusalane mõju;
(c) kui algne töövõtja asendatakse mõne teise üksusega ühel järgmistest juhtudest:
(a) pärast ühinemist, ülevõtmist, omandamist, maksejõuetust või muud
äriühingu restruktureerimist lähevad algse töövõtja õigused ja kohustused
täielikult või osaliselt üle teisele ettevõtjale, tingimusel et uus üksus
vastab esialgsetele kvalitatiivsetele kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele,
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingusse ei tehta muid olulisi
muudatusi ning asendamise eesmärk ei ole käesoleva määruse
kohaldamisest kõrvale hoida või
ii) avaliku sektori hankija võtab endale põhitöövõtja kohustused
alltöövõtjate ees, kui selline võimalus on liikmesriigi õigusega ette
nähtud.
5. Muudatust, mille maksumus ei ületa 15 % esialgse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu maksumusest, käsitatakse väheolulisena ja seda võib teha ilma uue
hankemenetluseta, tingimusel et asjaomane muudatus ei muuda teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu esialgset majanduslikku tasakaalu töövõtja kasuks
viisil, mida ei olnud esialgses teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingus ette nähtud.
Kui tehakse mitu järjestikust muudatust, hinnatakse piirmäärasid järjestikuste
muudatuste kumulatiivse netomaksumuse alusel.
6. Enne teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu muutmist teeb avaliku sektori hankija
objektiivsete ja kontrollitavate elementide põhjal kindlaks, et lõikega 2 ettenähtud
tingimused on täidetud. Avaliku sektori hankija hoiab alles üksikasjalikud kirjalikud
protokollid muudatuse oluliste elementide kohta, sealhulgas selle põhjenduse,
vajalikkuse või asjakohasuse ning mõju kohta lepingu majanduslikule tasakaalule,
eelkõige riskide ja majanduslike eeliste jaotumisele, et põhjendada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu muutmise otsuseid ning võimaldada pädevatel
järelevalve-, auditeerimis- ja kontrolliasutustel kontrollida vastavust käesolevale
artiklile.
7. Enne teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu muudatust, mille maksumus ületab
50 % lepingu esialgsest hinnangulisest maksumusest, avaldavad avaliku sektori
hankijad lepingu muutmise teate. See teade peab sisaldama põhjendust muudatuse
kohta, mis tehti ilma uut hankemenetlust korraldamata. Järjestikuste muudatuste
eesmärk ei või olla käesoleva määruse nõuete täitmisest kõrvalehoidmine.
8. Kui avaliku sektori hankija vastavalt lõikele 4 muudab oluliselt teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingut ja muudatuse maksumus ei ületa 50 % lepingu
esialgsest hinnangulisest maksumusest, siis avaldab ta 20 kalendripäeva jooksul
alates muudatuse tegemise kuupäevast lepingu muutmise teate.
ET 56 ET
9. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu muudatusi ei kasutata selliste töövõtja
tegevuses esinevate puuduste kõrvaldamiseks, mis ei ole põhjendatud temast
sõltumatute asjaoludega.
Artikkel 21
Väärtuskavandamine
1. Avaliku sektori hankija lisab väärtuskavandamisklausli kõikidesse käesoleva
määruse kohaldamisalasse kuuluvatesse teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingutesse, mille eeldatav maksumus käibemaksuta ületab
(a) kümme miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: üks
aasta alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast];
(b) üheksa miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: kaks
aastat alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast];
(c) kaheksa miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: kolm
aastat alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast];
(d) seitse miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: kolm
aastat alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast];
(e) kuus miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: neli
aastat alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast];
(f) viis miljonit eurot alates… [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: viis
aastat alates käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäevast].
Väiksema hinnangulise maksumusega teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingusse
võib avaliku sektori hankija lisada väärtuskavandamisklausli.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija peab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingusse lisama
(a) väärtuskavandamisklauslid, mis kutsuvad töövõtjaid üles kogu teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal esitama ettepanekuid
väärtuskavandamise muutmise kohta (edaspidi „vabatahtliku
väärtuskavandamise klauslid“), või
(b) väärtuskavandamisklauslid, millega nõutakse, et töövõtjad kogu teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise ajal esitaksid avaliku sektori hankijale
regulaarsete ajavahemike järel ettepanekuid väärtuskavandamise muutmise
kohta (edaspidi „kohustusliku väärtuskavandamise klauslid“).
Avaliku sektori hankija võib esimese lõigu punktis b osutatud kohustuslikku
väärtuskavandamist kasutada kogu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu või
ainult selle osade puhul.
Kui avaliku sektori hankija kasutab kohustuslikku väärtuskavandamist teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu osade puhul, peab ta hankedokumentides nende
osadega seotud nõuded esitama funktsionaalsus- või tulemusnõuetena.
Töövõtja lisab vastavad kohustusliku või vabatahtliku väärtuskavandamise klauslid
kõikidesse alltöövõtulepingutesse, mille maksumus alltöövõtulepingu sõlmimise
kuupäeval ületab lõikes 1 osutatud künniseid. Nendest künnistest madalama
maksumusega alltöövõtulepingud võivad sisaldada vastavaid kohustusliku või
vabatahtliku väärtuskavandamise klausleid.
ET 57 ET
3. Kui töövõtja esitab väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanekuid, nagu on osutatud
lõike 2 esimeses alapunktis, lisab ta nendesse ettepanekutesse järgmise:
(a) kõik kavandatavad muudatused teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke raames
hangitavates teadus- ja arendusteenustes;
(b) kirjeldus mis tahes mõju kohta, mida käesoleva lõike punktis a osutatud
kavandatavad muudatused võivad avaldada teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu osaliste õigustele ja kohustustele, sealhulgas lõike 2 teises lõigus
osutatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu eri osade maksumusele või
töövõtja ülesannetele;
(c) kavandatavate muudatuste eeldatavate kulude-tulude tõenduspõhine analüüs;
(d) alltöövõtu korral alltöövõtjate esitatud kõik väärtuskavandamise muutmise
ettepanekud, mis on vajalikud töövõtja väärtuskavandamise muutmise
ettepaneku rakendamiseks.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija ei võta vastu väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanekuid,
mis
(a) muudavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu eset;
(b) kahjustavad funktsionaalsus- või tulemusnõuetes kirjeldatud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste või nende kavandatud tulemuste olulisi funktsioone või
omadusi;
(c) hõlmavad üksnes hangitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste tarnitavate koguste ja
nende kavandatud tulemuste muutmist;
(d) hõlmavad muudatusi teadus- ja arendustegevuse lõpptoodetes või teadus- ja
arendustegevuse katsekogustes, mis tulenevad üksnes teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames tehtud varasematest katsetest.
5. Avaliku sektori hankija täpsustab hankedokumentides, et muudatused, mis teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu maksumust vähendavad või suurendavad, võib ta
heaks kiita pärast seda, kui on töövõtjalt saanud väärtuskavandamise muutmise
ettepaneku. Hankedokumentides määratakse kindlaks piirangud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu maksumuse lubatud suurendamisele selliste
lepingumuudatuste tõttu, milles esitatakse väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanek.
Kõik sellised lepingumuudatused, mis puudutavad väärtuskavandamist, tehakse
kooskõlas artikliga 20.
6. Avaliku sektori hankija esitab hankedokumentides stiimulite jagamise määrad, mille
alusel jagatakse avaliku sektori hankijate ja töövõtjate vahel kogu netokokkuhoid,
mille avaliku sektori hankija sai kehtiva teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
väärtuskavandamise heakskiidetud muutmisettepanekutega. Kui väärtuskavandamise
muutmise ettepanek toob avaliku sektori hankijatele võimalike tulevaste teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingute puhul kaasa puhaskulude kokkuhoiu, täpsustatakse
hankedokumentides, kas avaliku sektori hankija maksab töövõtja osa lepingu
kokkuhoiust ühekordse maksena või järjestikuste maksetena pikema aja jooksul, kui
sõlmitakse tulevased teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud. Avaliku sektori
hankija tagab, et töövõtja osa teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu järgsest
kulude kokkuhoiust ei ole sama suur või suurem kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu raames osutatavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste maksumus.
ET 58 ET
7. Avaliku sektori hankija võib ühepoolselt mis tahes väärtuskavandamise muutmise
ettepaneku tervikuna või osaliselt heaks kiita või tagasi lükata. Kui avaliku sektori
hankija ei kiida väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanekut heaks, teatab ta sellest
töövõtjale kirjalikult, selgitades tagasilükkamise põhjuseid. Töövõtja võib mis tahes
väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepaneku täielikult või osaliselt tagasi võtta igal ajal
enne seda, kui avaliku sektori hankija selle heaks kiidab. Seni, kuni teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanek heaks
kiidetakse, jätkab töövõtja kehtiva teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmist.
Artikkel 22
Hulgihange
1. Avaliku sektori hankija kasutab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes
hulgihanget ning sõlmib mitu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingut mitme
töövõtjaga.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija märgib hankedokumentides teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingute miinimumarvu, mis lõike 1 kohaselt eeldatavasti sõlmitakse.
3. Hulgihankega teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud sõlmitakse ja allkirjastatakse
paremusjärjestuse alusel kõrgeimast madalaima punktisummani, mis saadi
pakkumuste hindamisel vastavalt artiklile 11, välja arvatud juhul, kui on
nõuetekohaselt põhjendatud alus toimida teisiti, järgides täielikult võrdse kohtlemise
ja läbipaistvuse põhimõtteid. Kõik teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud
sõlmitakse ühe ja sama teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluse raames.
4. Lõike 1 kohaselt sõlmitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute arvu
kindlaksmääramisel võtab avaliku sektori hankija arvesse kasu, mida hulgihankega
on võimalik saada, et
(a) vältida liigset tuginemist ühele või piiratud arvule töövõtjatele selliste toodete,
tööde või teenuste puhul, mis on olulised avaliku sektori hankija sise- või
välistoimingute jaoks, või selliste toodete, tööde või teenuste puhul, mis
põhinevad elutähtsal tehnoloogial või kriitilisel toormel;
(b) vähendada tehnoloogia- või innovatsiooniriske, sealhulgas stimuleerides
alternatiivsete tulemuste väljatöötamist, katsetamist või integreerimist eri
töövõtjate hulgas;
(c) lahendada olukordi, kus turul puudub piisav konkurents, või vältida või
vähendada sõltuvust tarnijatest, stimuleerides turul suuremat konkurentsi;
(d) vähendada teenusehäireid ja nõrka lüli, tagades avaliku sektori hankija taristus,
võrgus või teenuste osutamise süsteemis tehnilise liiasuse;
(e) reserveerida liikmesriikidest pärit ettevõtjatele kooskõlas artikli 11 lõikega 6
minimaalne arv teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguid, kui see on vajalik ja
põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja avaliku
turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses.
5. Erandina lõikest 1 võib avaliku sektori hankija sõlmida ühe teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu ilma käesoleva artikli kohast hulgihanget
korraldamata, kui see on põhjendatud mõnega järgmistest hankedokumentides
täpsustatud põhjustest:
ET 59 ET
(a) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste puhul, mille ainus ese on CPV
koodide 73200000-4, 73210000-7 ja 73220000-0 alla kuuluvate teadus- ja
arendustegevuse nõustamisteenuste hankimine ;
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete puhul, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele
eelnevad hanked, kui on täidetud üks järgmistest tingimustest:
(a) artiklis 9 osutatud turu-uuringu tulemused ja turuanalüüs näitavad, et turg
on liiga väike selleks, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses
saaks osaleda mitu töövõtjat;
(b) hulgihangetest saadav pikaajaline kasu, mida käsitletakse lõikes 4, ei
kaalu üles hulgihanget kasutava avaliku sektori hankija lisakulusid;
(c) ühe teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu sõlmimine on vajalik ja
põhjendatud, et tagada liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses.
Komisjonil on õigus kooskõlas artikliga 39 vastu võtta delegeeritud õigusakte, et
muuta käesoleva lõike esimeses lõigus nimetatud juhtumite loetelu, võttes arvesse
järgmisi kriteeriume:
(a) mõju teadus- ja arendustegevuse tulemuste turuleviimise suurendamisele;
(b) mõju innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, sealhulgas eelkõige innovaatiliste idu- ja
kasvufirmade ning uute turuletulijate turulepääsu parandamisele;
(c) mõju liidu sotsiaal-majanduslikule või tehnoloogilisele arengule;
(d) mõju liidu strateegilisele autonoomiale ja majandusjulgeolekule;
(e) mõju avalike huvide kaitsele.
Artikkel 23
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke pakkumismenetlus
1. Avaliku sektori hankija teatab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke pakkumismenetluse
väljakuulutamisest hanketeatega. Kõnealune teade
(a) avaldatakse Euroopa Liidu Teatajas ja seejärel ka avaliku sektori hankija
liikmesriigi riigihangete portaalis;
(b) sisaldab järgmisi elemente:
(a) viited teadus- ja arendusteenuste asjaomastele CPV koodidele;
(b) vajaduse korral märge selle kohta, et pakkumuskutse on seotud
innovatsiooniga, tehes hanketeates märke väljale „innovatsioon“ ja
lisades vajaduse korral väljale „hanke nimetus“ sõnad
„kommertskasutusele eelnev hange“;
(c) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke eeldatav maksumus, mis on arvutatud
vastavalt artikli 10 lõikes 5 sätestatud metoodikale.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija levitab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke väljakuulutatud
pakkumismenetlust turul laialdaselt. Selleks võib avaliku sektori hankija pärast
hanketeatega pakkumismenetluse algatamist avaldada pakkumismenetluse
algatamise teate mis tahes laialdaselt kättesaadava meedia kaudu ja seda levitada.
ET 60 ET
3. Kui see on vajalik ja põhjendatud liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või
avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse tagamiseks artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, avaldab
avaliku sektori hankija erandina käesoleva artikli lõigetest 1 ja 2 sellise hanketeate,
millest on välja jäetud kogu tundlik teave, ja levitab seda hanketeadet ning palub
ettevõtjatel teatada, kui nad on asjaomase teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke jaoks
pakkumuste esitamisest huvitatud. Tundlikku teavet saadetakse üksnes nendele
ettevõtjatele, kes on väljendanud huvi ja vastavad kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele
ning ei kujuta endast julgeolekuriski artikli 28 lõike 4 punkti d tähenduses.
4. Erandina käesoleva artikli lõigetest 1 ja 2, kui käesoleva artikli lõigetes 1 ja 2
osutatud hanketeate ja artiklis 10 osutatud muude elementide avaldamine
hankedokumentides oleks vastuolus liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku
ja avaliku turvalisuse huvidega artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses, kutsub avaliku sektori
hankija pakkumusi esitama üksnes need potentsiaalselt sobivad ettevõtjad ja edastab
hankedokumente üksnes nendele potentsiaalselt sobivatele ettevõtjatele, kes on
kindlaks tehtud artiklis 9 osutatud turu-uuringu ja turuanalüüsi käigus , vastavad
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumidele ega kujuta endast julgeolekuriski artikli 28 lõike 4
punkti d tähenduses.
5. Pakkumuste laekumise miinimumtähtaeg on üks kuu alates kuupäevast, mil
hanketeade saadeti avaldamiseks Euroopa Liidu Teatajas. Avaliku sektori hankija
võib seda miinimumtähtaega lühendada, kui on kehtestatud hädaolukorrarežiim
vastavalt määrusele (EL) 2024/274744, kui on kehtestatud hädaolukorraraamistik
vastavalt nõukogu määrusele (EL) 2022/237245, kui on olemas tõsised piiriülesed
terviseohud vastavalt määrusele (EL) 2022/237146 või kui komisjon on välja
kuulutanud kriisi või eriolukorra. Avaliku sektori hankija maksimaalne tähtaeg
pakkumuste hindamise lõpuleviimiseks ja pakkujate teavitamiseks lepingu sõlmimise
otsusest on 60 kalendripäeva alates pakkumuste vastuvõtmise tähtajast.
6. Avaliku sektori hankija kontrollib pakkumuses esitatud teabe põhjal, millised
pakkujad saavad artikliga 11 ettenähtud tingimuste kohaselt teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankes osaleda.
7. Ilma et see piiraks artikli 15 lõike 9 kohaldamist, hindab avaliku sektori hankija kõiki
pakkumusi, mille on esitanud pakkujad, kellel on teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankele
juurdepääs, objektiivsete ja mittediskrimineerivate kriteeriumide alusel, kohaldades
artiklites 13, 14 ja 15 sätestatud kohaldatavaid kõrvalejätmise aluseid ja
kvalifitseerimiskriteeriume, miinimumnõudeid, millele kõik pakkujad peavad
vastama, ning artiklis 17 osutatud kohaldatavaid pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriume,
sealhulgas innovatsiooniga seotud hindamiskriteeriume, ning koostavad hinnatud
pakkumuste paremusjärjestuse.
44 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 9. oktoobri 2024. aasta määrus (EL) 2024/2747, millega luuakse
siseturu hädaolukorra ja vastupanuvõime meetmete raamistik ning muudetakse nõukogu määrust (EÜ)
nr 2679/98 (siseturu hädaolukorra ja vastupanuvõime määrus) (ELT L, 2024/2747, 8.11.2024, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2747/oj). 45 Nõukogu 24. oktoobri 2022. aasta määrus (EL) 2022/2372 selliste meetmete raamistiku kohta, millega
tagatakse kriisi korral oluliste meditsiinivahenditega varustatus liidu tasandi rahvatervisealases
hädaolukorras (ELT L 314, 6.12.2022, lk 64, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2372/oj). 46 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 23. novembri 2022. aasta määrus (EL) 2022/2371, milles käsitletakse
tõsiseid piiriüleseid terviseohtusid ja millega tunnistatakse kehtetuks otsus nr 1082/2013/EL (ELT
L 314, 6.12.2022, lk 26, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2022/2371/oj).
ET 61 ET
8. Pärast esialgsete pakkumuste esitamist võib avaliku sektori hankija ettevõtjaid
küsitleda ja nendega ühes või mitmes voorus läbirääkimisi pidada. Üldsus tagab, et
igas läbirääkimisvoorus arutatavate lahenduste arv pakub tõelist konkurentsi. Pärast
iga vooru ja sõltuvalt läbirääkimiste tulemustest palutakse läbirääkimistel osalevatel
ettevõtjatel esitada muudetud pakkumus ning avaliku sektori hankija võib artikli 17
kohaselt kehtestatud hindamiskriteeriumide alusel otsustada osalejate arvu
vähendada. Avaliku sektori hankija teavitab ettevõtjaid uue läbirääkimisvooru
alustamisest ja sellest, kas neid kutsutakse osalema või mitte. Avaliku sektori
hankijad teavitavad kõiki pakkujaid, kelle pakkumusi ei ole kõrvale jäetud, kõigist
läbirääkimiste tulemusel hankedokumentides või hanke üksikasjade muudes osades
tehtud muudatustest. Avaliku sektori hankijad annavad pakkujatele piisavalt aega
vastavalt vajadusele pakkumusi muuta ja uuesti esitada. Ettevõtjad võivad esitada
muudetud pakkumusi sõltuvalt läbirääkimiste tulemustest. Kui avaliku sektori
hankija on otsustanud läbirääkimised lõpetada ning sõlmida teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankeleping, teeb ta allesjäänud ettevõtjatele ettepaneku esitada
lõplik pakkumus.
9. Avaliku sektori hankija avaldab hiljemalt 30 päeva pärast teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu sõlmimist lepingu sõlmimise teate Euroopa Liidu Teatajas ja pärast
seda ka oma liikmesriigi riigihangete portaalis, välja arvatud juhul, kui avaldamine
oleks vastuolus liidu või ühe või mitme liikmesriigi julgeoleku või avaliku
turvalisuse huvidega artikli 28 lõike 2 tähenduses.
Lepingu sõlmimise teates märgitakse, et menetlus on seotud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke ning innovatsiooniga. Avaliku sektori hankija lisab vajaduse
korral lepingu sõlmimise teatesse väljale „hanke nimetus“ sõnad
„kommertskasutusele eelnev hange“ ning teeb märke väljale „innovatsioon“.
Lepingu sõlmimise teade sisaldab teavet sõlmitud lepingu või lepingute ja kõigi selle
osade maksumuse kohta.
Artikkel 24
Konkurentsipõhine etapiviisiline arendustegevus ja lepingu täitmise hindamine
1. Avaliku sektori hankija korraldab teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke mitmes
järjestikuses teadus- ja arendustegevuse etapis, mis võivad hõlmata alusuuringute,
rakendusuuringute ja tootearenduse mis tahes kombinatsiooni.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija võib korraldada teadus- ja arendusteenuste kiirhankeid, mis
ühendavad üheks etapiks kõik arendus- ja katseetapid, mis on tööstusuuringute ja
tootearenduse osad.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija korraldab teadus- ja arendustegevuse etapid viisil, millega
tagatakse, et teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke iga etapi jaoks kavandatud minimaalne
lepingute arv võimaldab teadus- ja arendustegevuse valdkonna ettevõtjatel üksteisega
tõeliselt konkureerida (konkurentsipõhine arendustegevus).
4. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke igas etapis hindab avaliku sektori hankija
võimalikke väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanekuid ja vajaduse korral muudab
nendele tuginedes kehtivaid teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepinguid kooskõlas
väärtuskavandamist käsitlevate sätetega, mis on esitatud artiklis 21.
ET 62 ET
5. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke iga teadus- ja arendustegevuse etapi lõpus hindab
avaliku sektori hankija töövõtjate tulemusi artikli 24 lõike 13 kohaste
innovatsiooniga seotud peamiste tulemusnäitajate alusel.
6. Hindamise käigus tehakse kindlaks, kas töövõtja on konkreetse teadus- ja
arendustegevuse etapi edukalt lõpule viinud, lähtudes sellest, kas selle konkreetse
etapi tulemused on uuenduslikud, nõuetele vastavad ja majanduslikult tasuvad.
7. Kui hindamise käigus tehakse kindlaks, et töövõtja ei ole konkreetset etappi edukalt
lõpule viinud, võib avaliku sektori hankija selle töövõtjaga sõlmitud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu lõpetada. Kui aga selline töövõtja on rahuldavalt
täitnud kõik ettenähtud ülesanded ja esitanud kõik ettenähtud tulemused, on tal õigus
saada konkreetse etapi eest makse vastavalt teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingus
kokkulepitule.
8. Kui töövõtjad on teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu raames esitanud
väärtuskavandamise muutmise ettepanekuid, mis on toonud avaliku sektori hankijale
kaasa netokulude kokkuhoiu, maksab avaliku sektori hankija töövõtjale tema osa
sellest kokkuhoiust vastavalt väärtuskavandamise makse puhul kokkulepitud
meetodile.
9. Avaliku sektori hankija võib töövõtjate arvu pärast iga etapi lõpuleviimist
vähendada, lõpetades teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud lõikes 7 osutatud
etapi lõpus ja valides järgmise etapi jaoks parimad pakkumused.
10. Kui avaliku sektori hankija on teinud kõik endast oleneva, et tagada
konkurentsipõhine arendustegevus kõigis lõikes 3 osutatud etappides, kuid lõpetas
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu mõne etapi lõpus, nagu on osutatud lõikes 7,
või saab liiga vähe hea kvaliteediga pakkumusi, et valida järgmisesse etappi rohkem
kui üks töövõtja, võib avaliku sektori hankija lubada ettevõtjatel, kes ei ole osalenud
eelmistes etappides ega algses teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses, esitada
pakkumusi üksnes ülejäänud etapi või etappide kohta erilepingute sõlmimise
eesmärgil. Kui avaliku sektori hankija soovib seda võimalust kasutada, annab ta
ettevõtjatele, kes ei ole eelmistes etappides osalenud, võimaluse väljendada oma huvi
osalemise vastu teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke hilisemates etappides kuni viimase
etapini, kus valitakse töövõtjad. Kõik sellised ettevõtjad valitakse samade
menetlusest kõrvalejätmise aluste, kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumide, miinimumnõuete ja
pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumide alusel nagu teised eelmistes etappides osalenud
töövõtjad.
11. Kui avaliku sektori hankija on teinud kõik endast oleneva, et tagada
konkurentsipõhine arendustegevus kõigis lõigetes 3 ja 10 osutatud etappides, kuid
lõpetas teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu mõne etapi lõpus, nagu on osutatud
lõikes 7, või talle esitatakse liiga vähe kvaliteetseid pakkumusi, et valida järgmisesse
etappi rohkem kui üks töövõtja, võib avaliku sektori hankija järgmises etapis jätkata
ainult ühe töövõtjaga.
12. Juhul kui see on põhjendatud ühega järgmistest hankedokumentides märgitud
põhjustest, võib avaliku sektori hankija erandina lõigetest 1–11 otsustada, et ta ei
korralda teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlust mitme järjestikuse teadus- ja
arendustegevuse etapina järgmistel juhtudel:
(a) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlused, mille ainus ese on CPV koodide
73200000-4, 73210000-7 ja 73220000-0 alla kuuluvate teadus- ja
arendustegevuse nõustamisteenuste hankimine;
ET 63 ET
(b) selliste teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanked, mis ei ole kommertskasutusele
eelnevad hanked ning mille sisu on seotud teadus- ja arendusteenustega, mis
piirduvad ühe tehnoloogilise valmiduse tasemega, ning mille ulatus on liiga
kitsas, et jagada teadus- ja arendustegevus mitmeks etapiks.
Komisjonil on õigus kooskõlas artikliga 39 vastu võtta delegeeritud õigusakte, et
muuta käesoleva lõike esimeses lõigus nimetatud juhtumite loetelu, võttes arvesse
järgmisi kriteeriume:
(a) mõju teadus- ja arendustegevuse tulemuste turuleviimise suurendamisele;
(b) mõju innovaatiliste ettevõtjate, sealhulgas eelkõige innovaatiliste idu- ja
kasvufirmade ning uute turuletulijate turulepääsu parandamisele;
(c) mõju liidu sotsiaal-majanduslikule või tehnoloogilisele arengule;
(d) mõju liidu strateegilisele autonoomiale ja majandusjulgeolekule;
(e) mõju avalike huvide kaitsele.
13. Avaliku sektori hankija
(a) hindab regulaarselt töövõtjate tulemuslikkust innovatsiooniga seotud peamiste
tulemusnäitajate alusel, mis hõlmavad ajakavast kinnipidamist, kulude
kontrolli all hoidmist ja eeldatava kvaliteedi saavutamist seoses artikli 10 lõike
1 punktis f osutatud miinimumnõuete, artiklis 18 osutatud
funktsionaalsusnõuete või tulemusnõuete ning artiklis 17 osutatud
hindamiskriteeriumide, sealhulgas innovatsiooniga seotud
hindamiskriteeriumide täitmisega;
(b) nõuab töövõtjatelt parandusmeetmete võtmist, et saavutada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingu kohane lepingu täitmine, kui ta jõuab pärast
punktis a osutatud hindamist järeldusele, et lepingu täitmine ei vasta
innovatsiooniga seotud peamistele tulemusnäitajatele; kui töövõtja ei võta
vajalikke parandusmeetmeid, võib avaliku sektori hankija selle töövõtjaga
sõlmitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu lõpetada;
(c) võtab lepingu täitmist hinnates arvesse heakskiidetud
väärtuskavandamisettepanekuid ja maksab töövõtjale tema osa nendest
väärtuskavandamisettepanekutest tulenevast kokkuhoiust, kui kogu teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke vältel kasutatakse lepingu paremaks täitmiseks
väärtuskavandamist vastavalt artiklile 21 .
Artikkel 25
Maksed
1. Ilma et see piiraks Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivist 2011/7/EL47
tulenevaid kohustusi, tagavad avaliku sektori hankijad, et töövõtjatele ja vajaduse
korral alltöövõtjatele tehakse maksed õigeaegselt.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täitmise
tingimustes ette näha, et töövõtjad kohaldavad kogu tarneahelas samaväärseid
47 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 16. veebruari 2011. aasta direktiiv 2011/7/EL hilinenud maksmisega
võitlemise kohta äritehingute puhul (ELT L 48, 23.2.2011, lk 1, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2011/7/oj).
ET 64 ET
maksetingimusi, nagu on kindlaks määratud Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu
direktiivi 2011/7/EL asjakohastes sätetes.
3. Välja arvatud juhul, kui see on põhjendatud avaliku sektori hankija ülekaaluka
huviga, teeb avaliku sektori hankija töövõtjale sobiva suurusega ettemakse.
4. Alltöövõtja taotluse korral ja kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu laad seda
võimaldab, peab avaliku sektori hankija kandma alltöövõtja poolt peatöövõtjale
pakutud teenuste, asjade või ehitustööde eest tasumisele kuuluvad maksed üle otse
alltöövõtjale. Sellised meetmed võivad sisaldada asjakohaseid mehhanisme, mis
võimaldavad peatöövõtjal alusetud maksed vaidlustada. Kõnealust makseviisi
käsitlev kord nähakse ette hankedokumentides.
Artikkel 26
Konfidentsiaalsus ja andmekaitse
1. Ilma et see piiraks kohaldatava liidu ja liikmesriigi õiguse kohaldamist, ei avalikusta
avaliku sektori hankija ilma eelneva kirjaliku nõusolekuta teavet, mille ettevõtjad on
talle esitanud turu-uuringu käigus, pakkujad pakkumismenetluse ajal või pärast seda,
töövõtjad lepingu täitmise ajal või endised töövõtjad pärast teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke lõppu ning mille need ettevõtjad on tunnistanud
konfidentsiaalseks, sealhulgas tehnilised või ärisaladused ja pakkumuste
konfidentsiaalsed aspektid. Pakkujad, töövõtjad või endised töövõtjad ei avalikusta
ilma eelneva kirjaliku nõusolekuta ka avaliku sektori hankija esitatud teavet, mille
avaliku sektori hankija on tunnistanud konfidentsiaalseks. Eelnevat kirjalikku
nõusolekut ei tohi anda üldise loobumisena, vaid selle andmisel tuleb osutada
konkreetse konfidentsiaalse teabe kavandatavale edastamisele.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija tagab määruse (EL) 2016/679, direktiivi 2002/58/EÜ ja
kohaldatava liikmesriigi õigusega ettenähtud isikuandmete kaitse normide järgimise
igasugusel teabevahetusel ja teabe avaldamisel turu-uuringu, pakkumismenetluse ja
lepingu täitmise ajal ning pärast teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke lõpuleviimist.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija märgib artiklis 10 osutatud hankedokumentides ära töövõtja
töödeldavate isikuandmete asukoha ja neile juurdepääsu nõuded. Selliste nõuete
hulka võib kuuluda järgmine:
(a) isikuandmeid töödeldakse üksnes artikli 11 lõikes 1 osutatud riikide
territooriumil ja neid ei eemaldata sellelt territooriumilt;
(b) andmeid hoitakse üksnes andmekeskustes, mis asuvad artikli 11 lõikes 1
osutatud riikide territooriumil;
(c) sellistele andmetele ei anta juurdepääsu muudele riikidele, kui artikli 11 lõikes 1
osutatud riigid;
(d) töövõtja ei või muuta andmetöötluse asukohta ilma avaliku sektori hankija
eelneva kirjaliku loata;
(e) isikuandmete igasugune edastamine teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
alusel kolmandatele riikidele või rahvusvahelistele organisatsioonidele peab
täielikult vastama määruse (EL) 2016/679 nõuetele.
ET 65 ET
Artikkel 27
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute lõpetamine
Ilma et see piiraks muid käesoleva määrusega või liikmesriigi kohaldatava õigusega
ettenähtud lõpetamise aluseid, lõpetab avaliku sektori hankija teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankelepingu järgmistel juhtudel:
(a) ettevõtja kohta tehakse mõnele artiklis 13 osutatud kohustuslikule kõrvalejätmise
alusele tuginedes lõplik süüdimõistev kohtuotsus, välja arvatud juhul, kui avaliku
sektori hankija teeb kindlaks, et lepingu lõpetamine ei ole ülekaaluka avaliku huvi
tõttu põhjendatud ja lõplik kohtuotsus seda ei välista;
(b) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingut või selle muudatust ei oleks asjaomase
töövõtjaga tohtinud sõlmida, arvestades aluslepingutest ja käesolevast määrusest
tulenevate kohustuste rasket rikkumist, mida ELi toimimise lepingu artikli 258
kohases menetluses on kinnitanud Euroopa Liidu Kohus.
2. JAGU
TURVALISUS
Artikkel 28
Julgeolekukaalutlused teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetes
1. Kui see on asjakohane, võtab avaliku sektori hankija lisaks liidu muude
õigusaktidega nõutavatele või kaasnevatele meetmetele sobivaid meetmeid teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse mis tahes etapis alates kavandamisest ja turu-
uuringutest kuni lepingu sõlmimise ja täitmiseni, et tagada liidu või ühe või mitme
liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisuse huvide kaitse iga teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankemenetluse puhul, millega seoses on kindlaks tehtud, et see
kujutab endast ohtu julgeolekule või avalikule turvalisusele või hõlmab sellist ohtu.
Käesolev peatükk ei piira muudes asjakohastes liidu õigusaktides sätestatud nõuete
kohaldamist.
2. Liidu või liikmesriigi julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega seotud huvid, mis on
konkreetse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu puhul asjakohased, võivad muu
hulgas hõlmata järgmist:
(a) kaitse, mis on seotud elutähtsa taristu ja strateegilise kahesuguse kasutusega
taristuga, mille liikmesriigid on kindlaks teinud kooskõlas [sõjalise liikuvuse
määruse artikliga 33], eelkõige sõjaväelise liikuvuse koridoris asuvate taristute,
elutähtsate teenuste, kriitilise tähtsusega tarneahelate ja elutähtsa tehnoloogia
kaitse, vastupanuvõime füüsilistele, küber- või hübriidohtudele ning mis tahes
häirete ennetamine ja nende eest kaitsmine, sealhulgas seoses selliste häiretega,
mis tulenevad kahjulikust strateegilisest sõltuvusest kolmandate riikide
tarnijatest;
(b) spionaaži, sabotaaži või tehnoloogialekke vältimine;
(c) kriisiks valmisolek, sealhulgas talitluspidevus ja erandolukorra plaanimine
looduskatastroofide või geopoliitilise ebastabiilsuse, pandeemiate või
küberrünnete korral;
ET 66 ET
(d) muude kahjulike sekkumiste, sealhulgas kolmanda riigi ja kolmanda riigi
kontrolli all olemise mõju ennetamine;
(e) süsteemide, võrkude ja töödeldavate andmete küberturvalisus;
(f) salastatud teabe, tundlike andmete, teadusuuringute või intellektuaalomandi
kaitsmine loata juurdepääsu või edastamise eest;
(g) rahvatervis, sealhulgas kriisikindlate ja sõltumatute tervishoiuteenuste
tagamine, või
(h) keskkonna kaitsmine ja vastupanuvõime kliimaga seotud häiretele.
3. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu puhul võivad julgeoleku ja avaliku
turvalisusega seotud riskid tuleneda eelkõige järgmisest:
(a) teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu ese, sealhulgas:
(a) selle rakendamisega seotud või selle rakendamiseks arendatavate varade
tundlikkus;
(b) juurdepääs tundlikele andmetele ja nende käitlemine;
(c) kriitiline sõltuvus või oht kriitiliselt sõltuda piiratud arvust kolmandate
riikide tarnijatest, toodetest, teenustest või tehnoloogiatest;
(d) riskid, mis on seotud juurdepääsuga elutähtsale taristule ja strateegilisele
kahesuguse kasutusega taristule, mille liikmesriigid on kindlaks teinud
kooskõlas [sõjalise liikuvuse määruse artikliga 33], teadusrajatistele, IT-
süsteemidele või kriitilise tähtsusega materjalidele;
(e) hangitud teadus- ja arendusteenuste tulemuste kahesugune kasutus;
(f) sellega seotud avalike huvide laad ning talitlushäire või puuduliku
toimimise võimalikud tagajärjed, nagu avaliku või riikliku julgeoleku,
majandusliku stabiilsuse, terviseohutuse või põhiõiguste kahjustamine;
(b) ettevõtjaid iseloomustavad tunnused, sealhulgas:
(a) omandi-, kontrolli- või rahastamisstruktuur, millega ettevõtjale kaasneb
lubamatu sekkumise või mõjutamise oht;
ii) varasemad andmed turvalisuse kohta, sealhulgas varasemad rikkumised,
turvastandardite mittejärgimine või julgeolekukaalutlustel muudest
hankemenetlustest kõrvalejätmine;
iii) suutlikkus täita juurdepääsuloa, töötajate kontrollimise või infoturbe
suhtes kohaldatavaid nõudeid;
iv) kokkupuude kolmanda riigi õigusaktidega, mis võivad sundida avaldama
tundlikku teavet või segada lepingu täitmist.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija märgib hankedokumentides niivõrd, kui see on võimalik,
selgelt ja piisavalt üksikasjalikult ära asjakohased meetmed, mis on
proportsionaalsed lõikes 3 osutatud riskidega ja mittediskrimineerivad. Selliste
meetmete rakendamiseks võib kasutada eelkõige järgmist:
(a) spetsifikatsioonid ja turu-uuringu dokumendid, sealhulgas kohustuslikud
turvastandardid, sertifitseerimistõendid, töötajate kohustuslik
julgeolekukontroll või juurdepääsuloa kehtestamine ning riskijuhtimis- ja
usaldusväärsusnõuded;
ET 67 ET
(b) pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumid, nagu pakkujate turbehaldussüsteemide,
turbenõuetele vastavuse standardite, intsidentidele reageerimise suutlikkuse ja
tarneahela turvalisuse hindamine;
(c) lepingu täitmise tingimused, sealhulgas tarnijate turvajärelevalve
võimaldamine auditite, kontrollide või dokumentide läbivaatamise kaudu ning
parandusmeetmete rakendamine rikkumiste korral, samuti sätted alltöövõtu,
omandiõiguse muutumisest teatamise ning salastatud või tundliku teabe kaitse
kohta;
(d) kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid, kui need on põhjendatud, näiteks juurdepääsuloa
omamine või muu pakkujatele esitatav nõue tõendada, et nad ei kujuta endast
ohtu julgeolekule või avalikule turvalisusele vastavalt käesoleva artikli lõike 3
punktile b. See ei piira artikli 14 kohaldamist.
(e) kutsuvad pakkumust esitama ainult neid ettevõtjaid, kes vastavad
konkreetsetele objektiivsetele ja mittediskrimineerivatele julgeolekunõuetele,
tingimusel et avaliku sektori hankija on asjaomase teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hanketeates teatanud oma kavatsusest seda teha ja julgeolekunõuetest, mida ta
kavatseb kohaldada.
Avaliku sektori hankija võib hankedokumentides ära märkida ka selle, milliseid
turvameetmeid ta kavatseb rakendada, kui teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluse käigus tekivad riskid julgeolekule või avalikule turvalisusele.
5. Avaliku sektori hankija saab ettevõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlusest
selle käigus igal ajal kõrvale jätta, kui ettevõtja on määratletud suure riskiga tarnijana
vastavalt määruse (EL) XXXX/XXX [küberturvalisuse määrus 2] seoses IKT-
komponentide tarnimisega või selliste komponentide tarnimisega, mis sisaldavad
IKT-komponente, mida kasutatakse peamistes IKT-varades.
6. Kui on tõendeid, et meetmete erinevused mõjutavad siseturu toimimist, on
komisjonil käesoleva määruse täiendamiseks õigus kooskõlas artikliga 39 vastu võtta
delegeeritud õigusakte, millega kehtestatakse kohustuslikud tehnilised
spetsifikatsioonid, kvalifitseerimiskriteeriumid, pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriumid
või lepingu täitmise klauslid teadus- ja arendusteenuste konkreetsete kategooriate või
nende kavandatud tulemuste jaoks, kui sellised elemendid käsitlevad kindakstehtud
ja konkreetseid liidu huve, mis on seotud julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega.
Artikkel 29
Turvameetmed lepingu täitmise ajal
1. Ilma liikmesriikide lepinguõiguse kohaldamist piiramata võib avaliku sektori hankija
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu täielikult või osaliselt lõpetada, kui ta teeb
kindlaks, et töövõtja ei ole kohaldanud meetmeid või täitnud kohustusi, mille
eesmärk on vältida või vähendada julgeoleku ja avaliku turvalisusega seotud riske
või et julgeoleku või avaliku turvalisusega seotud risk on realiseerunud või
tõenäoliselt realiseerub. Samadel tingimustel võib ta teatavad ettevõtjad lepingu
täitmisest kõrvale jätta.
2. Käesoleva artikli kohane lõpetamine ja kõrvalejätmine on turvariskiga või avaliku
turvalisuse riskiga proportsionaalne. Enne teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
ET 68 ET
lõpetamist või ettevõtja kõrvalejätmist teeb avaliku sektori hankija kirjaliku
hindamise. Avaliku sektori hankija võtab eelkõige arvesse järgmist:
(a) julgeolekule või avalikule turvalisusele avalduva ohu suurus;
(b) lõpetamise või kõrvalejätmise mõju avalike teenuste osutamisele;
(c) alternatiivsed leevendusmeetmeid, nagu lepingu muutmine või tõhustatud
järelevalve.
3. Avaliku sektori hankija teavitab töövõtjat kirjalikult oma kavatsusest leping lõpetada
või töövõtja kõrvale jätta, välja arvatud juhul, kui see on põhjendatud kaasnevate
suurte ohtudega, otsese ohu ilmnemisega või kui selline teavitamine võib riski
suurendada, täpsustades järgmise:
(a) lõpetamise või kõrvalejätmise põhjused;
(b) asjaomast otsust toetavad faktid ja tõendid, välja arvatud salastatud teave;
(c) kavandatav lõpetamise või kõrvalejätmise kuupäev.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija määrab töövõtjale asjakohase ajavahemiku, mis ei või olla
lühem kui kümme kalendripäeva, et esitada märkusi lepingu lõpetamise põhjuste
kohta ja pakkuda välja parandusmeetmeid. Kui tegemist on hädaolukorraga, võib
avaliku sektori hankija seda tähtaega lühendada.
5. Töövõtja teeb avaliku sektori hankijaga koostööd, et tagada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepinguga seotud andmete, dokumentide või varade turvalisus
või üleandmine ning kriitilise tähtsusega teenuste järjepidevus kuni lepingu
lõpetamise või kõrvalejätmise jõustumiseni.
Artikkel 30
Küberturvalisus
1. Kõigi digielemente sisaldavate toodete puhul, mida kasutatakse ja arendatakse hanke
esemeks oleva teadus- ja arendusteenuste raames ning mis kuuluvad Euroopa
Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruse (EL) 2024/284748 kohaldamisalasse, peab avaliku
sektori hankija tagama vastavuse kõnealuse määruse I lisas sätestatud olulistele
küberturvalisuse nõuetele, sealhulgas tuleb teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluses arvestada tootjate suutlikkust haavatavusi tulemuslikult kõrvaldada.
2. Käesoleva määrusega ei takistata avaliku sektori hankijaid kehtestamast lõikes 1
osutatud digielemente sisaldavate toodete suhtes täiendavaid küberturvalisuse
nõudeid teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangeteks või nende toodete kasutamiseks
teatavatel eesmärkidel, sealhulgas juhul, kui neid tooteid arendatakse või hangitakse
riikliku julgeoleku või riigikaitse eesmärgil, tingimusel, et need nõuded on kooskõlas
liikmesriikide kohustustega, mis on sätestatud liidu õiguses, ning asjaomaste
eesmärkide saavutamiseks vajalikud ja proportsionaalsed.
48 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 23. oktoobri 2024. aasta määrus (EL) 2024/2847, mis käsitleb
digielemente sisaldavate toodete küberturvalisuse horisontaalseid nõudeid ja millega muudetakse
määrusi (EL) nr 168/2013 ja (EL) 2019/1020 ning direktiivi (EL) 2020/1828 (küberkerksuse määrus)
(ELT L, 2024/2847, 20.11.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/2847/oj).
ET 69 ET
3. Ilma et see piiraks lõike 1 ning Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu direktiivi
(EL) 2022/255549 kohaldamist, võib avaliku sektori hankija vajaduse korral
hankedokumentides kindlaks määrata hangitavate teadus- ja arendusteenuste ning
nende kavandatud tulemuste küberturvalisuse nõuded. Selleks võivad need sisaldada
tehnilisi spetsifikatsioone, kvalifitseerimiskriteeriume, menetlusest kõrvalejätmise
kriteeriume, pakkumuste hindamise kriteeriume või lepingute täitmise tingimusi.
Sellised nõuded peavad olema seotud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingu
esemega ning vastama läbipaistvuse, mittediskrimineerimise ja proportsionaalsuse
põhimõtetele.
4. Avaliku sektori hankija saab ettevõtja teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlusest
selle käigus igal ajal kõrvale jätta, kui ettevõtja on määratletud suure riskiga tarnijana
seoses IKT-komponentide tarnimisega või selliste komponentide tarnimisega, mis
sisaldavad IKT-komponente, mida kasutatakse peamistes IKT-varades.
3. JAGU
TEADUS- JA ARENDUSTEENUSTE ÜHISHANKED
Artikkel 31
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishangete suhtes kohaldatavad ühised normid
1. Avaliku sektori hankijad, kes korraldavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankeid,
peavad järgima käesolevas määruses sätestatud korda.
2. Avaliku sektori hankija võib korraldada teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankeid kahe
või enama avaliku sektori hankijaga ühest või mitmest liikmesriigist. Avaliku sektori
hankijad. Kui kaks või enam avaliku sektori hankijat ühest või mitmest liikmesriigist
soovivad korraldada teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishanke, sõlmivad nad
ühishankelepingu, millega luuakse hankijate rühm ja määratakse juhtiv hankija.
Selles lepingus sätestatakse vähemalt järgmine:
(a) rahalised kohustused, mille on võtnud iga avaliku sektori hankija hankijate
rühmas teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankeks;
(b) juhtiva hankija ja hankijate rühma kuuluvate avaliku sektori hankijate
ülesannete ja kohustuste jaotus seoses teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluse, lepingu täitmise ja endiste töövõtjatega pärast lepingu
lõppemist toimuva suhtlusega, nagu on osutatud 2. peatüki 1. ja 2. jaos;
(c) kohaldatav liidu või liikmesriigi õigus, mis on seotud vaidluste lahendamisega
ning mis tahes menetluste või kinnitustega, mida on vaja teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hanke käigus välja töötatud prototüüpide, esimeste toodete,
teenuste või tööde katsetamiseks, ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishanke
läbiviimise muude aspektidega, mida käesolev määrus ei hõlma;
49 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 14. detsembri 2022. aasta direktiiv (EL) 2022/2555, mis käsitleb
meetmeid, millega tagada küberturvalisuse ühtlaselt kõrge tase kogu liidus, ja millega muudetakse
määrust (EL) nr 910/2014 ja direktiivi (EL) 2018/1972 ning tunnistatakse kehtetuks direktiiv
(EL) 2016/1148 (küberturvalisuse 2. direktiiv) (ELT L 333, 27.12.2022, lk 80, ELI:
http://data.europa.eu/eli/dir/2022/2555/oj).
ET 70 ET
(d) ühise teadus- ja arendusteenuste hanke tulemuste jaotamise ning kasutamise
mehhanism.
Lisaks artiklis 10 loetletud elementidele peavad teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishanke
dokumendid sisaldama käesoleva lõike esimese lõigu punktides b, c ja d osutatud
teavet.
3. Hankijate rühma liikmed võtavad ühiselt teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankega seotud
rahalised kohustused, korraldavad ühiselt turu-uuringu, koostavad hankedokumendid
oma ühise teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankevajaduse jaoks ning hindavad pakkumusi.
4. Juhtiv hankija algatab teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankemenetluse ning sõlmib
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingud kõigi ostjate rühma kuuluvate avaliku
sektori hankijate nimel ja nende eest. Avaliku sektori hankija, kes korraldab teadus-
ja arendusteenuste ühishankeid, võib seda teha ükskõik millises liidu ametlikus
keeles ning ta võib lubada pakkujatel esitada pakkumusi ükskõik millises neist
ametlikest keeltest.
5. Avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuste ühishankeid korraldada ühe
või mitme liikmesriigi kesksete hankijate kaudu.
6. Käesoleva määruse kohaldamisel on kesksed hankijad kõik avaliku sektori hankijad,
kes täidavad järgmisi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetega seotud ülesandeid:
(a) tegutsemine hulgimüüjana, ostes ja müües edasi turult hangitud teadus- ja
arendusteenuseid või nende teadus- ja arendusteenuste tulemusi;
(b) tegutsemine vahendajana, avaldades teateid ning sõlmides teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepinguid avaliku sektori hankijate nimel;
(c) Kesksed hankijad võivad lisaks eespool nimetatud ülesannete täitmisele viia
läbi ühiseid teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid või neis osaleda või osutada
avaliku sektori hankijatele täiendavaid teadus- ja arendusteenustega seotud
hangete tugiteenuseid, sealhulgas taristu, nõustamine või tehniline abi, kaasa
arvatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste ettevalmistamine ning
haldamine asjaomase avaliku sektori hankija nimel ja arvel.
7. Avaliku sektori hankijad märgivad artikli 4 lõikes 5 osutatud teadetes, kas nad
tegutsevad keskse hankijana.
Iga avaliku sektori hankija võib teadus- ja arendusteenuseid hankida ning saada
nende kavandatud tulemusi mõnelt liidus asutatud keskselt hankijalt või tema kaudu.
Avaliku sektori hankija loetakse käesolevast määrusest tulenevaid kohustusi täitvaks,
kui ta hangib teadus- ja arendusteenuseid selliselt keskselt hankijalt või sellise keskse
hankija kaudu, kes asjaomase teadus- ja arendusteenusete hanke puhul oli kohustatud
kohaldama käesolevat määrust ja seda ka kohaldanud. Kesksed hankijad, kes ei ole
avaliku sektori hankijad, viivad teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlused läbi
kooskõlas käesoleva määrusega.
8. Liidu institutsioonid, organid või asutused võivad korraldada teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankeid, sealhulgas kommertskasutusele eelnevaid hankeid, enda
jaoks, koos teiste liidu üksustega või nende nimel ning koos liikmesriikide avaliku
sektori hankijatega või nende nimel kooskõlas Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu
määruses (EL, Euratom) 2024/2509 sätestatud eeskirjadega.
ET 71 ET
3. peatükk
TEADUSUURINGUTE JA INNOVATSIOONI TULEMUSTE
TURULEVIIMINE
Artikkel 32
Liidu pädevuskeskus intellektuaalomandiga tagatavaks rahastamiseks ja
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara turuleviimiseks
1. Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet (edaspidi „amet“) loob pädevuskeskuse, et
toetada ja edendada intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat rahastamist ja
intellektuaalomandi, sealhulgas teadus- ja arendustegevusest ning farmaatsiatoodete
ainuõigustest tuleneva intellektuaalomandi turuleviimist (edaspidi „pädevuskeskus“).
2. Pädevuskeskus toetab oma ülesannete täitmisel järgmisi üksusi:
(a) liikmesriigis tegutsevad teadlased;
(b) liikmesriigis tegutsevad innovaatilised ettevõtjad, sealhulgas innovaatilised
idufirmad, innovaatilised kasvufirmad ja jagufirmad, kelle innovaatilisust ja
konkurentsivõimet aitab suurendada intellektuaalomandiõiguste omamine või
nende kasutamine ja turuleviimine;
(c) muud liikmesriigis asutatud avalik-õiguslikud ja eraõiguslikud üksused, kes on
huvitatud intellektuaalomandipõhise vara turuleviimisest;
(d) üksused, kelle ülesanne on toetada punktides a, b ja c osutatud üksusi.
3. Selleks et parandada lõikes 2 osutatud üksuste juurdepääsu rahastamisele, teeb amet
pädevuskeskuse kaudu järgmist:
(a) töötab hiljemalt [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: neli aastat pärast
käesoleva määruse jõustumise kuupäeva] välja liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara väärtuse määramiseks ja avalikustamiseks, mis
põhineb igat liiki intellektuaalomandi õigustel ja farmaatsiatoodete
ainuõigustel ning mille eesmärk on hõlbustada selle kasutamist eri sektorites ja
kasutuselevõttu finantssektori sidusrühmade poolt, kasutades võimaluse korral
Euroopa ettevõtluskukruid, mis on loodud kooskõlas [Euroopa Parlamendi ja
nõukogu määrusega XXX Euroopa ettevõtluskukrute loomise kohta], või
selliseid alternatiivseid elektroonilisi vahendeid, mis on koostalitlusvõimelised
Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega, sealhulgas:
i) loob intellektuaalomandi avalikustamise, kontrollimise ja väärtuse
määramisega seotud digitaalsed protsessid ja teenused ning haldab neid;
ii) teeb kindlaks ja koondab väärtuse määramise vabatahtliku raamistiku
väljatöötamist toetavad parimad tavad;
iii) töötab raamistiku lahutamatu osana välja vabatahtliku
avalikustamiskorra, mis võimaldab ettevõtjatel rahastamise eesmärgil
esitada võrreldaval ja struktureeritud viisil teavet oma
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara kohta;
(b) loob ja haldab tihedas koostöös komisjoniga hiljemalt [väljaannete talitus,
palun lisada kuupäev: neli aastat pärast käesoleva määruse jõustumise
kuupäeva] kogu liitu hõlmava digitaalse sidemete loomise platvormi, kasutades
võimaluse korral Euroopa ettevõtluskukruid või selliseid alternatiivseid
ET 72 ET
elektroonilisi vahendeid, mis on koostalitlusvõimelised Euroopa
ettevõtluskukrutega, et hõlbustada liidus kaitstud intellektuaalomandi õiguste
vabatahtlikku litsentsimist ja üleandmist;
(c) hõlbustab järelturu arengut, et toetada lõikes 2 osutatud üksuste valduses oleva
intellektuaalomandi võõrandamist;
(d) toetab asjaomaseid avaliku ja erasektori finantssidusrühmi, sealhulgas liidu
institutsioone, organeid ja asutusi, samuti finantseerimisasutusi ja
kommertspanku, intellektuaalomandiga tagatud uute avaliku ja erasektori
rahastamisvahendite kindlaksmääramisel ja rakendamisel, sealhulgas
usaldusväärsete tõendite esitamisel turuvajaduste kohta, selliste
rahastamisvahendite rakendamisest tulenevate andmete analüüsimisel ja
intellektuaalomandiga seotud tehnilise nõustamisteenuste osutamisel;
(e) kehtestab ja rakendab oskuste arendamise programmid kogu innovatsiooni
ökosüsteemis seoses intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise ja
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara turuleviimisega;
(f) suurendab teadlikkust intellektuaalomandi õigustest liidu innovatsiooni,
majanduskasvu ja konkurentsivõime hoogustamisel ning intellektuaalomandiga
tagatavast rahastamisest;
(g) toetab intellektuaalomandiga tagatavat rahastamist käsitleva tõendite
andmebaasi järkjärgulist väljatöötamist, sealhulgas vabatahtlikult kogudes ja
analüüsides intellektuaalomandiga tagatavatest rahastamistehingutest saadud
anonüümitud või muid isikustamata andmeid ning luues vajaduse korral
mehhanismid selliste andmete kättesaadavuse ja kasutamise hõlbustamiseks,
sealhulgas Euroopa ettevõtluskukrute või selliste alternatiivsete elektrooniliste
vahendite kaudu, mis on koostalitlusvõimelised Euroopa ettevõtluskukrutega;
(h) toetab lõikes 2 osutatud isikuid ja üksusi avaliku sektori rahastatud
teadusuuringutest ja innovatsioonist tuleneva intellektuaalomandi
väärindamisel ning turuleviimisel, sealhulgas teadlikkuse suurendamise ja
intellektuaalomandi haldamise suutlikkuse suurendamise kaudu, pakkudes abi
intellektuaalomandi haldamise ning turuleviimise strateegiate
kindlaksmääramisel;
(i) koordineerib liidu tasandi kasutajatuge, mis pakub lõikes 2 loetletud üksustele
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamisega seotud teabe- ja tugiteenuseid.
Komisjon kehtestab rakendusaktidega tehnilised spetsifikatsioonid, mis on vajalikud
käesoleva lõike esimese lõigu punktis a osutatud liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku
ühetaoliseks rakendamiseks, sealhulgas kirjeldused avalikustatava teabe sisu,
võrreldavuse ja koostalitlusvõime kohta. Need rakendusaktid võetakse vastu
kooskõlas artikli 38 lõikes 2 osutatud kontrollimenetlusega. Amet töötab kooskõlas
teise lõigu kohaselt sätestatud tehniliste spetsifikatsioonidega välja liidu vabatahtliku
raamistiku rakendamiseks vajalikud vormid ja nendega seotud töövahendid ning
haldab ja vajaduse korral ajakohastab neid.
Komisjon kehtestab rakendusaktidega käesoleva artikli esimese lõigu punktis b
osutatud digitaalse sidemete loomise platvormi ühised tehnilised standardid,
koostalitlusnõuded ja käitamistingimused. Nimetatud rakendusaktid võetakse vastu
kooskõlas artikli 38 lõikes 2 osutatud kontrollimenetlusega.
ET 73 ET
4. Kumuleerunud eelarveülejäägi olemasolu korral ja pärast ameti eelarvekomiteelt
heakskiidu saamist võib amet sõlmida komisjoniga rahalist toetust käsitlevaid
lepinguid, et rakendada selliseid liidu meetmeid, mis on selgelt määratletud,
kuuluvad ametile käesoleva määrusega antud ülesannete hulka ning on seotud
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamise ja intellektuaalomandipõhise vara
turuleviimisega. Sellistes rahalist toetust käsitlevates lepingutes määratakse kindlaks
lepinguosaliste vastavad kohustused ja rahaline osalus, rahastatavad tegevused ja
tulemused, rahastamiskõlblikud kulud, rakenduskord, aruandekohustused,
sisekontrollimeetmed, auditeerimisõigused ja kasutamata summade käsitlemine.
5. Ametile käesoleva artikliga antud ülesannete täitmise kohta kehtib määrus
(EL) 2017/1001. Pädevuskeskus on ameti osa ning tal ei ole eraldi juriidilise isiku
staatust, finantsautonoomiat ega otsustusõigust. Kogu pädevuskeskuse kaudu
toimuvale tegevusele kehtib ametile kohaldatav juhtimis-, kavandamis-, eelarve-,
raamatupidamis-, sisekontrolli- ja aruandlusraamistik.
6. Pädevuskeskuse loomise kulud ja ametile käesoleva määrusega antud ülesannetest
tulenevad jooksvad kulud kaetakse pädevuskeskuse tegevuseelarvest.
Sisseseadmiskulud võivad hõlmata vähemalt kulusid, mis on seotud IT-
tugisüsteemide arendamise ja vastava haldustaristu loomisega ning uute algatuste
ajaliselt piiratud ettevalmistamise või käivitamisega. Ameti eelarvekomitee võib
lubada ameti kumuleerunud eelarveülejäägi kasutamist vajalike, selgelt määratletud,
ühekordsete ja ajaliselt piiratud asutamiskulude katmiseks.
7. Ameti tegevdirektor võib kehtestada tasud käesolevas artiklis osutatud konkreetsete
teenuste eest, mida osutatakse käesoleva artikli lõikes 2 osutatud üksustele kooskõlas
määruse (EL) 2017/1001 artikliga 178. Sellised tasud peavad olema läbipaistvad,
mittediskrimineerivad ja piirduma konkreetse teenuse maksumusega.
Tasusid ei kohaldata juurdepääsule lõike 3 esimese lõigu punkti a kohaselt
väljatöötatud väärtuse määramise vabatahtlikule raamistikule, juurdepääsule lõike 3
esimese lõigu punkti b kohaselt väljatöötatud digitaalsele sidemete loomise
platvormile, lõike 3 esimese lõigu punktis d osutatud tugiteenustele, mida osutatakse
avaliku sektori sidusrühmadele, sealhulgas liidu institutsioonidele, organitele ja
asutustele, ning juurdepääsule lõike 3 esimese lõigu punktis i osutatud liidu tasandi
kasutajatoele.
Artikkel 33
Andmete kogumine
1. Selleks et toetada ametile artikliga 32 antud ülesannete täitmist, eelkõige nende
ülesannete täitmist, mis on seotud tõendusbaasi väljatöötamise, andmete analüüsi ja
toetusega, et parandada artikli 32 lõikes 2 osutatud üksuste juurdepääsu
rahastamisele, kogub ja analüüsib amet anonüümitud või muid isikustamata andmeid,
mis on antud vabatahtlikult ja mis on seotud tehingutega, mille puhul
intellektuaalomandi õigusi kasutatakse tagatisena krediidi või kindlustuse saamiseks
või mitterahalise osalusena omakapitaliinvesteeringute stsenaariumide korral, ilma et
see piiraks nende eeskirjade kohaldamist, mis käsitlevad salastatud teavet.
2. Käesoleva artikli kohasel andmete kogumisel ja analüüsimisel teeb amet kooskõlas
liidu õigusega koostööd liidu institutsioonide, organite ja asutuste, liikmesriikide
pädevate avaliku sektori asutuste, riiklike ja piirkondlike intellektuaalomandi ametite
ning asjaomaste avaliku ja erasektori sidusrühmadega rahanduse ja kindlustuse
ET 74 ET
valdkonnas, et hõlbustada olemasolevate andmete kättesaadavust, võrreldavust ja
taaskasutamist ning uurida olemasolevatele andmeallikatele ja tavadele tuginedes
võimalikke lähenemisviise läbipaistvuse ja koostalitlusvõime parandamiseks kogu
liidus.
3. Kui see on kättesaadav ja asjakohane, võivad andmed, mille amet on käesoleva
artikli kohaselt kogunud ja analüüsinud, hõlmata teavet, mis pärineb
intellektuaalomandi registritest, äriregistritest, pandiregistritest või muudest
intellektuaalomandiõigustega seotud asjaõiguste registritest ja teistest sellesarnastest
allikatest, samuti muud asjakohast teavet, mille on kättesaadavaks teinud avaliku
sektori asutused või erasektori osalised, sealhulgas teavet selle kohta, kuidas on
hinnatud intellektuaalomandi kasutamist krediidi või kindlustuse tagatisena või
mitterahalise osalusena omakapitali investeerimise stsenaariumides , vastava tehingu
suurust ja omadusi, asjaomase intellektuaalomandi õiguse liiki ning asjakohaseid
näitajaid, nagu omakapitali väärtuse määramine, tagatus või laenusumma ja
tagatisvara väärtuse suhtarv.
4. Amet edendab koostöös asjaomaste sidusrühmadega andmete kvaliteedi, vormingute
ja juurdepääsutingimustega seotud ühiste standardite ja tavade, sealhulgas
diferentseeritud ja proportsionaalse juurdepääsukorra väljatöötamist ning pakub
suuniseid ja toetusmeetmeid, mille eesmärk on võimaldada innovaatilistel
ettevõtjatel, idufirmadel, kasvufirmadel ja VKEdel saada kasu täiustatud
tõendusbaasist ja analüütilistest väljunditest.
5. Kui see on käesolevas artiklis osutatud tegevuse käigus saadud kogemuste põhjal
põhjendatud, võib amet koostöös asjaomaste sidusrühmadega kaaluda digivahendite
või struktureeritud andmesüsteemide väljatöötamist, et veelgi enam toetada artiklis
32 sätestatud pädevuskeskuse ülesannete täitmist, sealhulgas uurides võimalust luua
kogu liitu hõlmav intellektuaalomandipõhisele varale seatud pantide register.
6. Amet kehtestab suunised ja toetusmeetmed tagamaks, et innovaatilised ettevõtjad,
idufirmad, kasvufirmad ja VKEd saavad käesoleva artikli kohaselt kogutud
andmetest tõhusalt kasu.
Artikkel 34
Intellektuaalomandi hindajad
1. Artikli 32 lõikes 2 osutatud isikud ja üksused ning asjaomased finants- ja
kindlustusvaldkonna avaliku ja erasektori üksused võivad taotleda
intellektuaalomandiõiguste väärtuse hindamist liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku alusel
kooskõlas artikli 32 lõike 3 esimese lõigu punktiga a. Sellise hindamise võib läbi viia
artikli 35 kohaselt sertifitseeritud intellektuaalomandi hindaja.
2. Kui hindamine on tellitud seoses rahastamistehinguga, esitatakse hindamiseks vajalik
teave kooskõlas asjaomaste lepinguosaliste vahel kokku lepitud korraga ning
vastavalt kohaldatavatele konfidentsiaalsuse ja ärisaladuste kaitse eeskirjadele.
3. Hindamisel tegutseb intellektuaalomandi hindaja sõltumatult ja väldib huvide
konflikti hindamisega seotud isikute või üksustega.
4. Hindamisega seotud tasud ja muud kulud kannab hindamise tellinud isik või üksus,
kui lepinguosalised ei ole kokku leppinud teisiti. Tasud ja kulud peavad olema
ET 75 ET
läbipaistvad, mõistlikud ning hindamise laadi, ulatuse ja keerukusega
proportsionaalsed.
Artikkel 35
Intellektuaalomandi hindajate sertifitseerimine
1. Amet loob intellektuaalomandi hindajate jaoks liidu sertifitseerimissüsteemi ja
haldab seda. Sertifitseerimine tõendab, et hindaja on omandanud teadmised ja
ametialase pädevuse, mis on vajalikud artikli 32 lõike 3 esimese lõigu punktis a
osutatud liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku kohaseks väärtuse määramiseks.
2. Käesoleva artikli kohane sertifitseerimine on vabatahtlik ja tõendab pädevust
kohaldada liidu väärtuse määramise raamistikku. See ei kujuta endast tegevusluba
ega anna õigust tegutseda reguleeritud kutsealal, samuti ei ole see eeltingimus
intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramiseks liidu või liikmesriigi õiguse kohaselt. See
ei piira kutsealasid, kutsekvalifikatsioone ja väärtuse määramise teenuste osutamist
reguleerivate riigisiseste õigusnormide kohaldamist.
3. Ameti tehtud sertifitseerimine ei pane ametile vastutust sertifitseeritud hindaja poolt
konkreetsete väärtuse määramiste eest ega anna sellistele väärtuse määramistele
siduvat või eeldatavat õiguslikku mõju.
4. Sertifitseerimiseks sobiv tulevane hindaja
(a) on asjakohase haridusliku või kutsealase tausta ja asjakohase erialase
töökogemusega ning tehnilise pädevusega intellektuaalomandipõhise vara
väärtuse määramisel;
(b) peab edukalt läbima erikoolituse artikli 32 lõike 3 esimese lõigu punktis a
osutatud liidu vabatahtliku raamistiku kohaldamise kohta ning ka hindamise,
millega tõendatakse piisavate teadmiste olemasolu ja suutlikkust seda
raamistikku praktiliselt kohaldada;
(c) näitab üles objektiivsust ja usaldusväärsust ning järgib asjakohaseid
kutsestandardeid või kutse-eetikat.
Esimese lõigu punktides b ja c osutatud koolituse ja hindamise korraldab amet. Amet
võib sellise koolituse ja hindamise välja töötada ja seda pakkuda koostöös riiklike
intellektuaalomandiametite ning asjaomaste Euroopa või rahvusvaheliste
kutseorganisatsioonide ja hindamisasutustega.
5. Komisjon kehtestab rakendusaktidega käesoleva artikli kohase
sertifitseerimissüsteemi rakendamiseks järgmised üksikasjalikud tingimused:
(a) sertifitseerimiskavaga liitumiseks nõutav minimaalne hariduslik või kutsealane
taust ja erialane töökogemus ning selle kohta esitatavad tõendid;
(b) lõike 4 esimese lõigu punktis b osutatud erikoolituse miinimumsisu,
õpiväljundid ja praktilised osad, sealhulgas kõik osalemisnõuded;
(c) lõike 4 esimese lõigu punktis c osutatud hindamise vorm, sisu,
hindamismetoodika ja miinimumnõuded;
(d) taotlusmenetlus, sealhulgas esitatavad dokumendid ja tõendid ning lõikes 4
sätestatud tingimuste täitmise kontrollimise kord;
ET 76 ET
(e) sertifitseerimistõendi kehtivusaeg ning selle pikendamise tingimused ja kord,
sealhulgas jätkuva kutsealase arenguga seotud nõuded;
(f) sertifitseerimistõendi peatamise ja tühistamise alused ja kord, sealhulgas
asjakohased menetluslikud tagatised ja asjaomase isiku õigus olla ära kuulatud;
(g) liidu sertifitseerimise ja sertifitseeritud staatuse kasutamist, esitamist ja sellest
teatamist reguleerivad tingimused, sealhulgas kord, mille eesmärk on vältida
sertifitseerimise ulatuse või õiguslike tagajärgede eksitavat esitamist ning
(h) sertifitseeritud hindajatega seotud teave, mis lisatakse käesoleva artikli lõikes 7
osutatud andmebaasi.
Nimetatud rakendusaktid võetakse vastu kooskõlas artikli 38 lõikes 2 osutatud
kontrollimenetlusega.
6. Amet annab pädevuskeskuse kaudu välja sertifitseerimistõendi ning uuendab seda ja
peatab või tühistab selle kooskõlas käesoleva artikliga.
7. Amet loob pädevuskeskuse kaudu käesoleva artikli kohaselt sertifitseeritud
intellektuaalomandi hindajate avalikult kättesaadava liidu andmebaasi ja haldab seda.
8. Tegevdirektor võib kehtestada tasud käesoleva artikli kohaste sertifitseerimis-,
hindamis- ja pikendamisteenuste eest kooskõlas määruse (EL) 2017/1001 artikliga
178. Sellised tasud peavad olema läbipaistvad, mittediskrimineerivad ega tohi
ületada asjaomaste konkreetsete teenuste maksumust.
Artikkel 36
Tegevuse kavandamine ja aruandlus
1. Amet kajastab talle käesoleva määruse kohaselt antud ülesannete täitmiseks
vajalikud tegevused määruse (EL) 2017/1001 artikli 153 lõike 1 punktides a ja b
osutatud mitmeaastase strateegilise programmi ja ameti iga-aastase tööprogrammi
eraldi jaos.
2. Käesoleva artikli lõikes 1 osutatud eraldi jaos sätestatakse nende ülesannetega seotud
eesmärgid, tegevused, oodatavad tulemused, tulemusnäitajad ning hinnanguline
personalivajadus ja rahalised vahendid, võttes arvesse asjakohast liidu poliitikat ja
prioriteete. Mitmeaastase strateegilise programmi ja iga-aastase tööprogrammi
ettevalmistamist, vastuvõtmist, rakendamist ja muutmist reguleeritakse määrusega
(EL) 2017/1001.
3. Amet lisab määruse (EL) 2017/1001 artikli 153 lõike 1 punktis c osutatud ameti
tegevust käsitlevasse aastaaruandesse eraldi osa ülesannete kohta, mis on ametile
käesoleva artikliga antud. See konkreetne osa sisaldab järgmist teavet:
(a) ülevaade eelmise aasta peamistest tegevustest;
(b) iga-aastases tööprogrammis sätestatud eesmärkide ja tulemusnäitajatega seoses
saavutatud tulemused;
(c) üldhinnang asjaomaste ülesannete täitmisele, sealhulgas kasutatud rahalistele
vahenditele ja personalile, tasudest saadud tulule ja mis tahes olulisele mõjule,
mida see avaldab ameti muude põhikirjajärgsete ülesannete täitmisele;
(d) ülevaade järgmisteks aastateks kavandatud tegevustest.
ET 77 ET
Artikkel 37
Määruse (EL) 2017/1001 muutmine
Määruse (EL) 2017/1001 artikli 151 lõikesse 1 lisatakse punkt f:
„f) täita talle Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrusega (EL) 202X/XXXX antud ülesanded.
*+“
___
* Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrus (EL) 202X/XXXX (ELT..., ELI...).“
4. peatükk
LÕPPSÄTTED
Artikkel 38
Komiteemenetlus
1. Komisjoni abistab rakenduseeskirjade komitee, mis on loodud määrusega
(EL) 2017/1001. Nimetatud komitee on komitee määruse (EL) nr 182/2011
tähenduses.
2. Käesolevale lõikele viitamisel kohaldatakse määruse (EL) nr 182/2011 artiklit 5.
Artikkel 39
Delegeeritud volituste rakendamine
1. Komisjonile antakse õigus võtta vastu delegeeritud õigusakte käesolevas artiklis
sätestatud tingimustel.
2. Artikli 11 lõikes 2, artikli 19 lõikes 10, artikli 22 lõikes 5, artikli 24 lõikes 12, artikli
28 lõikes 5 ja artikli 31 lõikes 8 osutatud õigus võtta vastu delegeeritud õigusakte
antakse komisjonile viieks aastaks alates käesoleva määruse jõustumisest. Komisjon
esitab delegeeritud volituste kohta aruande hiljemalt üheksa kuud enne viieaastase
tähtaja möödumist. Volituste delegeerimine pikeneb automaatselt samaks
ajavahemikuks, välja arvatud juhul, kui Euroopa Parlament või nõukogu esitab selle
kohta vastuväite hiljemalt kolm kuud enne iga ajavahemiku lõppemist.
3. Euroopa Parlament ja nõukogu võivad artikli 7 lõikes 2, artikli 19 lõikes 11, artikli
22 lõikes 5, artikli 24 lõikes 12, artikli 28 lõikes 5 ja artikli 31 lõikes 8 osutatud
volituste delegeerimise igal ajal tagasi võtta. Tagasivõtmise otsusega lõpetatakse
otsuses nimetatud volituste delegeerimine. Otsus jõustub järgmisel päeval pärast
selle avaldamist Euroopa Liidu Teatajas või otsuses nimetatud hilisemal kuupäeval.
See ei mõjuta juba jõustunud delegeeritud õigusaktide kehtivust.
4. Enne delegeeritud õigusakti vastuvõtmist konsulteerib komisjon kooskõlas 13. aprilli
2016. aasta institutsioonidevahelises parema õigusloome kokkuleppes sätestatud
põhimõtetega iga liikmesriigi määratud ekspertidega.
+ Väljaannete talitus, palun lisada joonealuse märkuse teksti käesoleva määruse (Euroopa
innovatsioonimäärus) number, kuupäev, pealkiri ja ELT avaldamisviide.
ET 78 ET
5. Niipea kui komisjon on delegeeritud õigusakti vastu võtnud, teeb ta selle samal ajal
teatavaks Euroopa Parlamendile ja nõukogule.
6. Artikli 11 lõike 2, artikli 19 lõike 10, artikli 22 lõike 5, artikli 24 lõike 12, artikli 28
lõike 5 ja artikli 31 lõike 8 alusel vastu võetud delegeeritud õigusakt jõustub üksnes
juhul, kui Euroopa Parlament ega nõukogu ei ole kahe kuu jooksul pärast õigusakti
Euroopa Parlamendile ja nõukogule teatavaks tegemist esitanud selle suhtes
vastuväidet või kui Euroopa Parlament ja nõukogu on enne selle tähtaja möödumist
komisjonile teatanud, et nad ei esita vastuväidet. Euroopa Parlamendi või nõukogu
algatusel pikendatakse seda tähtaega kahe kuu võrra.
Artikkel 40
Hindamine
Hiljemalt [väljaannete talitus, palun lisada kuupäev: neli aastat pärast käesoleva määruse
jõustumise kuupäeva] ja seejärel iga viie aasta tagant hindab komisjon käesolevat määrust
selle eesmärkide seisukohalt, eelkõige riigihangete rolli tugevdamisel innovatsiooni
hoogustajana ning intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise, turuleviimise ja kasutamise
edendamisel, ning esitab selle kohta Euroopa Parlamendile, nõukogule ning Euroopa
Majandus- ja Sotsiaalkomiteele aruande. Vajaduse korral lisatakse hinnangule ettepanek
käesoleva määruse muutmise või kehtetuks tunnistamise kohta.
Artikkel 41
Jõustumine
Käesolev määrus jõustub kahekümnendal päeval pärast selle avaldamist Euroopa Liidu
Teatajas.
Käesolev määrus on tervikuna siduv ja vahetult kohaldatav kõikides liikmesriikides.
Brüssel,
Euroopa Parlamendi nimel Nõukogu nimel
president eesistuja
[...] [...]
ET 1 ET
FINANTS- JA DIGISELGITUS
Sisukord
1. ETTEPANEKU/ALGATUSE RAAMISTIK .............................................................. 2
1.1. Ettepaneku/algatuse nimetus ........................................................................................ 2
1.2. Asjaomased poliitikavaldkonnad ................................................................................. 2
1.3. Eesmärgid ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.3.1. Üldeesmärgid ............................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2. Erieesmärgid ................................................................................................................ 2
1.3.3. Oodatavad tulemused ja mõju ...................................................................................... 2
1.3.4. Tulemusnäitajad ........................................................................................................... 4
1.4. Ettepanek/algatus käsitleb ............................................................................................ 4
1.5. Ettepaneku/algatuse põhjendused ................................................................................ 4
1.5.1. Lühi- või pikaajalises perspektiivis täidetavad vajadused, sealhulgas algatuse
rakendamise üksikasjalik ajakava ................................................................................ 4
1.5.2. ELi meetme lisaväärtus (see võib tuleneda eri teguritest, nagu kooskõlastamisest
saadav kasu, õiguskindlus, suurem tõhusus või vastastikune täiendavus). .................. 5
1.5.3. Samalaadsetest kogemustest saadud õppetunnid ......................................................... 5
1.5.4. Kooskõla mitmeaastase finantsraamistikuga ja võimalik koostoime muude
asjakohaste vahenditega ............................................................................................... 6
1.5.5. Erinevate kasutada olevate rahastamisvõimaluste, sealhulgas vahendite
ümberpaigutamise võimaluste hinnang ........................................................................ 6
1.6. Ettepaneku/algatuse ja selle finantsmõju kestus .......................................................... 7
1.7. Kavandatud eelarve täitmise viis(id) ............................................................................ 7
2. HALDUSMEETMED .................................................................................................. 8
2.1. Järelevalve ja aruandluse reeglid ................................................................................. 8
2.2. Haldus- ja kontrollisüsteem(id) .................................................................................... 8
2.2.1. Eelarve täitmise viisi(de), rahastuse rakendamise mehhanismi(de), maksete tegemise
korra ja kavandatava kontrollistrateegia selgitus ......................................................... 8
2.2.2. Teave kindlakstehtud riskide ja nende vähendamiseks kasutusele võetud
sisekontrollisüsteemi(de) kohta .................................................................................... 8
2.2.3. Kontrollimeetmete hinnanguline kulutõhusus (kontrollikulude suhe hallatavate
vahendite väärtusse), selle põhjendus ja oodatav veariski tase (maksete tegemise ja
sulgemise ajal) .............................................................................................................. 8
2.3. Pettuste ja õigusnormide rikkumise ärahoidmise meetmed ......................................... 9
3. ETTEPANEKU/ALGATUSE HINNANGULINE FINANTSMÕJU ....................... 10
3.1. Mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku rubriigid ja kulude eelarveread, millele mõju avaldub10
ET 2 ET
3.2. Ettepaneku hinnanguline finantsmõju assigneeringutele ........................................... 11
3.2.1. Hinnanguline mõju tegevusassigneeringutele – ülevaade.......................................... 11
3.2.1.1. Heakskiidetud eelarvest saadavad assigneeringud ..................................................... 11
3.2.3. Hinnanguline mõju haldusassigneeringutele – ülevaade ........................................... 13
3.2.3.1. Heakskiidetud eelarvest saadavad assigneeringud ...................................................... 13
3.2.4. Hinnanguline personalivajadus .................................................................................. 13
3.2.4.1. Rahastatakse heakskiidetud eelarvest ........................................................................ 13
3.2.5. Hinnanguline mõju digitehnoloogiaga seotud investeeringutele – ülevaade ............. 15
3.2.6. Kooskõla kehtiva mitmeaastase finantsraamistikuga................................................. 15
3.2.7. Kolmandate isikute rahaline osalus ............................................................................ 16
3.2.8. Detsentraliseeritud asutuse hinnanguline personali- ja assigneeringute vajadus .... 16
3.3. Hinnanguline mõju tuludele ....................................................................................... 18
4. DIGIMÕÕDE ............................................................................................................. 19
4.1. Diginõuded ................................................................................................................. 19
4.2. Andmed ...................................................................................................................... 21
4.3. Digilahendused ........................................................................................................... 23
4.4. Koostalitlusvõime hindamine ..................................................................................... 23
4.5. Digimõõtme rakendamist toetavad meetmed ............................................................. 24
ET 3 ET
1. ETTEPANEKU/ALGATUSE RAAMISTIK
1.1. Ettepaneku/algatuse nimetus
Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määrus, millega kehtestatakse meetmete raamistik
Euroopa innovatsiooni ökosüsteemi tugevdamiseks (Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus).
1.2. Asjaomased poliitikavaldkonnad
Ühtne turg, konkurentsivõime, teadusuuringud ja innovatsioon.
1.3. Eesmärgid
1.3.1. Üldeesmärgid
Algatuse üldeesmärk on parandada innovatsiooni puhul ühtse turu toimimist,
vähendades tõkkeid uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamisel, katsetamisel ja
ulatuslikumal kasutuselevõtmisel ning kiirendada seeläbi nende turuleviimist liidus.
1.3.2. Erieesmärgid
Erieesmärk nr 1
Vähendada väärtuse määramise kulusid ning suurendada intellektuaalomandi õiguste
litsentsimist ja üleandmist ELis järgmise nelja aasta jooksul.
Erieesmärk nr 2
Suurendada järgmise viie aasta jooksul kulutusi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele.
Erieesmärk nr 3
Suurendada ELis asuvate teadus- ja arenduslahenduste hangete hulka järgmise viie
aasta jooksul.
1.3.3. Oodatavad tulemused ja mõju
Märkige, milline peaks olema ettepaneku/algatuse oodatav mõju toetusesaajatele/sihtrühmale.
Majanduslik kasu
Kogu ELi hõlmava intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise ühtlustatud
raamistiku kasutuselevõtmine, mida täiendavad ELi intellektuaalomandi
koolituskeskus ja intellektuaalomandi sidemete loomise platvorm, peaks
vähendama intellektuaalomandipõhise vara väärtuse määramise, haldamise ja
rahalise väljendamisega seotud kulusid ja keerukust. Pakkudes standardseid väärtuse
määramise meetodeid, eriteadmisi ja täiustatud turutaristut, vähendaksid need
meetmed ettevõtjate ja väliste rahastajate vahelist teabe ebaühtlust seoses
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara majandusliku väärtusega.
Intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise suurem läbipaistvus ja usaldusväärsus
hõlbustaks patentide ja muu intellektuaalomandipõhise vara kasutamist tagatisena,
parandades seeläbi juurdepääsu rahastusele nii laenu kui ka omakapitali kaudu.
Eelkõige võivad standardsed väärtuse määramise süsteemid tugevdada
intellektuaalomandi tagatisfunktsiooni pankade jaoks ja märguandefunktsiooni
riskikapitaliinvestorite jaoks, aidates suurendada intellektuaalomandiga tagatava
rahastamise mahtu. Kuna ettevõtjad suudavad paremini arvesse võtta ja edasi anda
oma intellektuaalomandi majanduslikku väärtust, suureneb tõenäoliselt patentimisest
saadav oodatav tulu, mis loob tugevamad stiimulid innovatsiooni investeerimiseks ja
intellektuaalomandi ametliku kaitse taotlemiseks.
ET 4 ET
Kirjanduse andmetel võib see seos tekitada positiivse mõjuringi patentimise ja
rahastamise vahel. Tugevamad intellektuaalomandi portfellid hõlbustavad
juurdepääsu välisrahastamisele, samas paremad rahastamistingimused toetavad
täiendavaid investeeringuid teadus- ja arendustegevusse ning innovatsiooni, mis toob
kaasa täiendava patentide loomise. Usaldusväärsemad väärtuse määramise
mehhanismid võivad lisaks patenditaotluste arvu suurendamisele parandada patentide
kvaliteeti, motiveerides ettevõtjaid keskenduma leiutistele, millel on suurem
tehnoloogiline ja kaubanduslik potentsiaal.
Seda mehhanismi toetab mitu tõendit. Reaaloptsioonide seisukohast suurendavad
usaldusväärsed väärtuse määramise süsteemid ja intellektuaalomandi järelturud
patendiga seotud investeeringute tagasipööratavust, muutes patendid kaubeldavaks
varaks, mitte üksnes õiguslikuks vahendiks. See vähendab patentimise tegelikku riski
ja motiveerib ettevõtjaid esitama patente, mida saab hiljem litsentsida, müüa või
kasutada finantstehingute toetamiseks. Ameerika Ühendriikide kogemus näitab, et
kokkupuude patentide järelturuga suurendab patentimisaktiivsust, eriti majandusliku
ebakindluse tingimustes, motiveerides ettevõtjaid patentima ka leiutisi, mida muidu
hoitaks ärisaladusena.
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete ELi tasandil ühtlustatud raamistiku
kasutuselevõtmine peaks märkimisväärselt vähendama õiguskindlusetust ja
menetluste keerukust, mida praegu liikmesriikides teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetega seostatakse. See peaks hõlbustama piiriüleste teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankeprojektide rakendamist, mis võimaldab avaliku sektori hankijatel koondada
nõudlust ja saavutada suurem otsustava tähtsusega rahaline maht, kasutades seeläbi
innovatsioonihangete ühtse turu kogu potentsiaali.
Innovatsioonile suunatud järeleproovitud hanketavade integreerimine ühisesse
raamistikku parandaks ka teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste tulemuslikkust
ja tõhusust, suurendades innovatsiooni tehtavate avaliku sektori investeeringute
tasuvust. Selgemad menetlused suurendaksid avaliku sektori hankijate suutlikkust
kavandada ja hallata teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeprojekte, vähendades samas
tarnijate osalemiskulusid ja -tõkkeid. See peaks innustama suuremat hulka,
sealhulgas eri liikmesriikidest, ettevõtjaid osalema teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlustes ja sellega omakorda suurendama konkurentsi, parandama
kavandatud lahenduste kvaliteeti ja laiendama juurdepääsu uuenduslikule
tehnoloogiale.
ELi eelistamise kehtestamine teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetlustes
suurendaks ka tõenäosust, et avaliku sektori rahastatud teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetest saadav märkimisväärne majanduslik ja tehnoloogiline kasu jääb Euroopa
Liitu. Nõudluse suurendamine ELis asuvates ettevõtetes väljatöötatud uuenduslike
lahenduste järele toetaks erasektori investeeringuid teadus- ja arendustegevusse,
edendaks Euroopa innovatsiooni ökosüsteemi kasvu ja aitaks kaasa väärtuslike
töökohtade loomisele. Selline tegevus tugevdaks ELi strateegilist autonoomiat ja
tehnoloogilist suveräänsust elutähtsates tehnoloogiavaldkondades ja sektorites.
Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus suurendab ELi sisemajanduse koguprodukti kümne
aasta jooksul hinnanguliselt 0,25–0,42 % võrreldes lähtestsenaariumiga, mille
kohaselt Euroopa innovatsioonimäärust ei ole olemas.
Lisaks mõjule, mis avaldub sisemajanduse koguproduktile ja tööhõivele, peaks
Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus tooma laiemat ühiskondlikku kasu, aidates muuta
teadusuuringuid ja innovatsiooni turuleviidavateks lahendusteks. Märkimisväärne
ET 5 ET
kogum empiirilisi tõendeid näitab, et avaliku ja erasektori järjepidevad
investeeringud teadusuuringutesse ja innovatsiooni kiirendavad puhta tehnoloogia
arendamist, ulatuslikumat kasutuselevõtmist ja selle kulude vähendamist, ning
aitavad vähendada kasvuhoonegaaside heitkoguseid, parandada energiatõhusust ja
soodustada kestlikumate tootmisprotsesside väljatöötamist. Need kasud tekitavad
tõenäoliselt positiivseid keskkonnaalaseid ja sotsiaalseid välismõjusid, mida
tavapärased makromajanduslikud näitajad, nagu sisemajanduse koguprodukt,
kajastavad vaid osaliselt.
1.3.4. Tulemusnäitajad
Märkige, milliste näitajate abil jälgitakse edusamme ja saavutusi.
Erieesmärgi, milleks on intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise kulude
vähendamine ning ELis intellektuaalomandi õiguste litsentsimise, üleandmise ja
rahalise kasutamise suurendamine, saavutamise edusamme jälgitakse mitme näitaja
abil. Nende näitajate hulgas on nende liikmesriikide arv, kes integreerivad Euroopa
Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti väärtuse määramise standardid oma riiklikesse
väärtuse määramise tavadesse, ELi intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise
metoodikat kohaldavate tehingute arv, ettevõtjate keskmised intellektuaalomandi
väärtuse määramise kulud ning nende ettevõtjate arv, kes kasutavad
intellektuaalomandipõhist vara tagatisena või rahastamistehingutes.
Erieesmärgi, milleks on kulude suurendamine teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele,
saavutamise edusamme mõõdetakse teadus- ja arendustegevuse kulude osakaaluga
riigihangete kogumahust ning piiriüleste teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankelepingute
arvu ja maksumusega. Erieesmärgi, milleks on ELis asuvate teadus- ja
arendustegevuse lahenduste hangete hulga suurendamine, saavutamise edusamme
jälgitakse ELis asuvate tarnijate ja lahendustega seoses sõlmitud teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hankelepingute arvu ja maksumuse kaudu.
1.4. Ettepanek/algatus käsitleb
uut meedet
uut meedet, mis tuleneb katseprojektist / ettevalmistavast meetmest50
olemasoleva meetme pikendamist
ühe või mitme meetme ümbersuunamist teise või uude meetmesse või ühendamist
teise või uue meetmega
1.5. Ettepaneku/algatuse põhjendused
1.5.1. Lühi- või pikaajalises perspektiivis täidetavad vajadused, sealhulgas algatuse
rakendamise üksikasjalik ajakava
Ettepanek vastab vajadusele tegeleda ühtse turu praeguse killustatusega teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangete valdkonnas, kehtestades teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste piiriüleste ühishangete ühtlustatud
menetluse, mida kõigi liikmesriikide avaliku sektori hankijad rakendavad kooskõlas
käesoleva määrusega pärast selle jõustumist.
Lisaks sellele antakse määruse jõustudes Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametile
uued ülesanded, sealhulgas Euroopa Liidu pädevuskeskuse loomine
50 Vastavalt finantsmääruse artikli 58 lõike 2 punktile a või b.
ET 6 ET
intellektuaalomandiga tagatavaks rahastamiseks ja intellektuaalomandi
turuleviimiseks. Kui pädevuskeskus on Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametis
loodud, hakkab see täitma talle määrusega antud ülesandeid, sealhulgas toetama eri
sidusrühmi seoses intellektuaalomandiga tagatava rahastamisega ja
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara turuleviimisega. Lisaks sellele töötab Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Amet pädevuskeskuse kaudu 1. septembriks 2028 (mis on
esialgne kavandatud kuupäev, sest IT-arenduseks on vaja aega) välja kogu
immateriaalse vara väärtuse määramise raamistiku ja loob digitaalse sidemete
loomise platvormi, et hõlbustada liidu tasandil kaitstud igat liiki intellektuaalomandi
õiguste litsentsimist ja üleandmist.
1.5.2. ELi meetme lisaväärtus (see võib tuleneda eri teguritest, nagu kooskõlastamisest
saadav kasu, õiguskindlus, suurem tõhusus või vastastikune täiendavus).
Käesoleva punkti kohaldamisel tähendab „ELi meetme lisaväärtus“ väärtust, mis tuleneb liidu
sekkumisest ja lisandub väärtusele, mille liikmesriigid oleksid muidu üksi loonud.
ELi tasandi meetme põhjused (ex ante)
Kavandatud meetmed keskenduvad valdkondadele, mille puhul annab liidu tasandil
tegutsemine selge lisaväärtuse vajalike meetmete ulatuse, kiiruse ja mastaabi tõttu.
Meetmete eesmärk on parandada innovaatiliste ettevõtjate ärilist huvi tuua turule
uuenduslikke lahendusi, hõlbustades intellektuaalomandiõiguste väärtuse määramist,
turuleviimist ja kasutamist tagatisena, et saada intellektuaalomandiga tagatud
rahastust, ning lihtsustades esimeste klientide leidmist teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangete kaudu. See suurendab tasuvust, võimaldades paremat piiriülest koostööd,
tagab innovaatilistele ettevõtjatele nende asukohast olenemata õiglasema juurdepääsu
võimalustele ning suurendab liidu suutlikkust püsida ülemaailmses konkurentsis.
Oodatav tekkiv ELi lisaväärtus (ex post)
ELi sekkumine toob püsivat kasu tänu mastaabisäästule, väiksematele
tehingukuludele ning suuremale õiguskindlusele avaliku sektori hankijate, ettevõtjate
ja investorite jaoks. See tugevdab Euroopa suutlikkust tuua turule uuenduslikke
lahendusi ja intellektuaalomandipõhist vara ning neid ettevõtjate rahastamisel
võimendada. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete ühtlustatud ja digitaliseeritud
menetlused vähendavad avaliku sektori hankijate ning teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hangetes osalevate ettevõtjate tehingukulusid ja halduskoormust, tagades samas
kõigis liikmesriikides ühetaolised turutingimused. Pädevuskeskuse loomine Euroopa
Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ametis suurendab intellektuaalomandiga tagatava
rahastamise kasutuselevõttu Euroopas, suurendades innovaatiliste ettevõtjate
rahastamisvõimalusi.
1.5.3. Samalaadsetest kogemustest saadud õppetunnid
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet on kogunud intellektuaalomandi õiguste
valdkonnas ulatuslikud eksperditeadmised tänu oma ülesannetele, mis on seotud ELi
kaubamärkide, disainilahenduste ja geograafiliste tähiste kaitsega, ning ka igat liiki
intellektuaalomandi õiguste rikkumise seirega, mida tehakse intellektuaalomandiga
seotud õigusrikkumiste Euroopa vaatluskeskuse kaudu. Arvestades seda kogemust
tuginetakse ettepanekus Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti
eksperditeadmistele ning määratakse talle intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramise ja
turuleviimisega seotud lisaülesanded.
ET 7 ET
Innovatsioonipartnerluse menetlust, mis võeti kasutusele ELi 2014. aasta
riigihankedirektiivides, kasutatakse vaid väga piiratud ulatuses. ELi 2014. aasta
riigihankedirektiivide hindamisel jõuti järeldusele, et nende direktiivide käimasoleva
läbivaatamise käigus tuleks kaotada kohustus, et see menetlus peab hõlmama teadus-
ja arendusteenuste hankeid, sest avaliku sektori hankijad ei soovi osta teadus- ja
arendusteenuseid sellise menetluse raames, millega ostetakse lahendusi
kaubanduslikus mahus ja mis on avatud pakkujatele kolmandatest riikidest, kellega
liit on sõlminud rahvusvahelise riigihangete kokkuleppe. Seda kogemust arvesse
võttes on ettepaneku eesmärk ette näha teadus- ja arendusteenuste ostmiseks
hankemenetlus, mis ei hõlma lahenduste hankimist kaubanduslikus mahus ja mis on
avatud üksnes liikmesriikide, EMP riikide ja Lääne-Balkani riikide
teenuseosutajatele.
1.5.4. Kooskõla mitmeaastase finantsraamistikuga ja võimalik koostoime muude
asjakohaste vahenditega
Ettepanek on täielikult kooskõlas mitmeaastase finantsraamistikuga aastateks 2021–
2027 ja seda rakendatakse olemasolevate liidu programmide kaudu, loomata uusi
kogukulusid või finantskohustusi lisaks olemasolevatele vahenditele.
Kui kaasseadusandjad kiidavad ettepaneku heaks ja otsustavad, et Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Amet loob keskuse, haldab seda ja toetab rahaliste vahenditega
(kas tegevuseelarvest või ülejäägist), on oluline teada, et Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Amet ei rahasta seda ELi eelarvest (see ei ole ELi toetus), vaid
rahastab ameti enda eelarvest, mistõttu see ei sõltu mitmeaastasest
finantsraamistikust.
Selles mõttes oleneks otsus konkreetsete eelarveelementide kohta Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Amet haldusnõukogu ja eelarvekomitee otsusest ja heakskiidust.
1.5.5. Erinevate kasutada olevate rahastamisvõimaluste, sealhulgas vahendite
ümberpaigutamise võimaluste hinnang
Kogu rahastamine tagatakse programmide vahendite ümberpaigutamisega. Ilma et
see mõjutaks järgmise mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku üle peetavate läbirääkimiste
tulemusi, on alates 2028. aastast ette nähtud assigneeringud rangelt soovituslikud.
ET 8 ET
1.6. Ettepaneku/algatuse ja selle finantsmõju kestus
Piiratud kestusega
– hõlmab ajavahemikku [PP/KK]AAAA–[PP/KK]AAAA
– finantsmõju kulukohustuste assigneeringutele avaldub ajavahemikul AAAA–
AAAA ja maksete assigneeringutele ajavahemikul AAAA–AAAA.
Piiramatu kestusega
– Rakendamise käivitumisperiood hõlmab ajavahemikku AAAA–AAAA,
– millele järgneb täieulatuslik rakendamine.
1.7. Kavandatud eelarve täitmise viis(id)51
Eelarve otsene täitmine komisjoni poolt
– tema talituste kaudu, sealhulgas kasutades liidu delegatsioonides töötavat
komisjoni personali;
– rakendusametite kaudu
Eelarve jagatud täitmine koostöös liikmesriikidega
Eelarve kaudne täitmine, mille puhul eelarve täitmise ülesanded on
delegeeritud:
– kolmandatele riikidele või nende määratud asutustele;
– rahvusvahelistele organisatsioonidele ja nende allasutustele (nimetage);
– Euroopa Investeerimispangale ja Euroopa Investeerimisfondile;
– finantsmääruse artiklites 70 ja 71 osutatud asutustele;
– avalik-õiguslikele asutustele;
– avalikke teenuseid osutavatele eraõiguslikele asutustele, sel määral, mil neile
antakse piisavad finantstagatised;
– liikmesriigi eraõigusega reguleeritud asutustele, kellele on delegeeritud avaliku
ja erasektori partnerluse rakendamine ja kellele antakse piisavad finantstagatised;
– asutustele või isikutele, kellele on delegeeritud Euroopa Liidu lepingu V jaotise
kohaste ühise välis- ja julgeolekupoliitika erimeetmete rakendamine ja kes on
kindlaks määratud asjaomases alusaktis;
– liikmesriigis asutatud asutustele, kelle suhtes kohaldatakse liikmesriigi
eraõigust või liidu õigust ja kellele võib kooskõlas valdkondlike normidega
usaldada liidu rahaliste vahendite või eelarveliste tagatiste haldamise niivõrd,
kuivõrd selliseid asutusi kontrollivad avalik-õiguslikud asutused või avalikke
teenuseid osutavad eraõiguslikud asutused ja kontrollivad organid annavad neile
solidaarvastutuse vormis piisavad finantstagatised või samaväärsed
finantstagatised, mis võivad iga meetme puhul piirduda liidu toetuse
maksimumsummaga.
51 Eelarve täitmise viise koos viidetega finantsmäärusele on selgitatud BUDGpedia veebisaidil:
https://myintracomm.ec.europa.eu/corp/budget/financial-rules/budget-
implementation/Pages/implementation-methods.aspx.
ET 9 ET
2. HALDUSMEETMED
2.1. Järelevalve ja aruandluse reeglid
Käesolev aruanne sisaldab personalikulusid. Seda liiki kulude suhtes kohaldatakse
standardnorme. Komisjon hindab käesoleva ettepaneku väljundit, tulemusi ja mõju
iga kolme aasta järel pärast kohaldamise alguskuupäeva. Hindamise käigus
hinnatakse käesoleva määruse panust ühtse turu toimimisse, sealhulgas selles
sätestatud eesmärkide saavutamisse.
2.2. Haldus- ja kontrollisüsteem(id)
2.2.1. Eelarve täitmise viisi(de), rahastuse rakendamise mehhanismi(de), maksete tegemise
korra ja kavandatava kontrollistrateegia selgitus
Algatuse eelarve täitmise viis on otsene eelarve täitmine komisjoni poolt. See on
kõige asjakohasem lähenemisviis, arvestades liidu kulude piiratud ulatust, mis
piirdub tavapäraste haldus- ja järelevalvekuludega. Kehtestatud sisemenetluste
kasutamine tagab tulemuslikud ja tõhusad kontrollid, väikesed veamäärad, tehingute
kiire töötlemise ja minimaalsed kontrollikulud.
2.2.2. Teave kindlakstehtud riskide ja nende vähendamiseks kasutusele võetud
sisekontrollisüsteemi(de) kohta
Üldiselt nõuab algatus personalikulusid. Seda liiki kulude suhtes kohaldatakse
standardnorme. Algatuse enamikus aspektides järgitakse käesoleva määruse
rakendamise järelevalveks kehtestatud menetlusi.
Peamine operatsioonirisk on ebapiisav haldussuutlikkus, et jälgida määruses
sätestatud kohustuste täitmist. Käesolevale ettepanekule on lisatud mõjuhinnang,
milles esitatakse valitud poliitilise lähenemisviisi aluseks olev analüüs. Algatuse
ettevalmistamisel tugineti ka avalikule konsultatsioonile ning sihtkonsultatsioonidele
tööstusharu sidusrühmade, liikmesriikide ja kutseorganisatsioonidega, mis tagasid
asjakohaste andmete, teabe ja tagasiside kogumise. Siiski võivad rakendamise ajal
ilmneda soovimatud tagajärjed või ettenägematud mõjud. Need tehakse kindlaks
määruses sätestatud järelevalvemenetluste kaudu, mis võimaldab komisjonil nendega
tegeleda asjakohaselt ja õigel ajal.
2.2.3. Kontrollimeetmete hinnanguline kulutõhusus (kontrollikulude suhe hallatavate
vahendite väärtusse), selle põhjendus ja oodatav veariski tase (maksete tegemise ja
sulgemise ajal)
Algatusega kaasnevad piiratud halduskulud. Kohaldatakse komisjoni standardseid
kontrollimenetlusi. Rahastamisprogramme ega mitmetasandilisi
rakendusmehhanisme ei looda ning seetõttu jääb kontrollitegevus lihtsasti
arusaadavaks ja kulutõhusaks. Kontrolle tehakse täielikult eelarve otsese täitmise
raames, kasutades komisjoni sisekontrolliraamistiku kohaseid standardseid
järelauditeid. See tagab asjakohase tasakaalu kontrollitegevuste ja hallatavate
rahaliste vahendite piiratud väärtuse vahel. Võttes arvesse suure riskiga
finantstehingute puudumist ja lihtsustatud struktuuri, on eeldatav veamäär maksete
tegemisel ja programmi lõpetamisel väike ja selgelt väiksem olulisuse lävest. Seega
tagab kontrollisüsteem usaldusväärsuse kõrge taseme proportsionaalsete kuludega.
ET 10 ET
2.3. Pettuste ja õigusnormide rikkumise ärahoidmise meetmed
Algatusega ei looda rahastamisprogramme ega finantstoetusskeeme. Seepärast
tugineb see komisjoni olemasolevale sisekontrolliraamistikule ja pettustevastase
võitluse strateegiale. Kohaldatakse standardseid ennetus- ja avastamismeetmeid,
sealhulgas riskipõhist sisekontrolli, ülesannete lahusust ja halduskulude jaoks
kehtestatud töövooge.
Amet tagab kooskõlas määrusega (EL) 2017/1001 ja ameti suhtes kohaldatavate
finantsreeglitega, et on kehtestatud asjakohased meetmed liidu finantshuvide
kaitsmiseks ametile käesoleva määrusega antud ülesannete täitmisel, sealhulgas
meetmed pettuste, korruptsiooni, huvide konflikti ja muude rikkumiste ennetamiseks,
avastamiseks ja käsitlemiseks. Komisjon täidab kohaldatava juhtimisraamistiku
kohaselt talle antud järelevalve- ja seireülesandeid.
Nagu kõigi komisjoni hallatavate tegevuste puhul, võivad ka Euroopa
Pettustevastane Amet ja Euroopa Prokuratuur kasutada oma volitusi kooskõlas oma
vastavate õiguslike alustega, et uurida pettusi, korruptsiooni või muud ELi
finantshuve kahjustavat ebaseaduslikku tegevust. Euroopa Kontrollikoda säilitab
oma tavapärased auditeerimisõigused komisjoni kulutuste suhtes.
ET 11 ET
3. ETTEPANEKU/ALGATUSE HINNANGULINE FINANTSMÕJU
Hinnang alates 2028. aastast kuludele ja personalile avalduva mõju kohta on lisatud
näitlikustamise eesmärgil ja see ei mõjuta järgmist mitmeaastast finantsraamistikku.
Rahastamisallikas ja liidu rahaliste kohustuste ulatus 2027. aasta järgsel perioodil
sõltuvad mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku 2028–2034 üle peetavate
institutsioonidevaheliste läbirääkimiste tulemustest ning seejärel määratakse need
kindlaks iga-aastases eelarvemenetluses. Kõik assigneeringud ja töötajate arv alates
2028. aastast on soovituslikud. Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet eelarve
puhul on arvud esialgsed ja Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet juhtorganid
peavad need kooskõlas ELi kaubamärgi määrusega heaks kiitma.
3.1. Mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku rubriigid ja kulude eelarveread, millele mõju
avaldub
• Olemasolevad eelarveread
Järjestage mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku rubriigiti ja iga rubriigi sees
eelarveridade kaupa
Mitmeaasta
se
finantsraam
istiku
rubriik
Eelarverida Kulu liik Rahaline osalus
Nr
Liigendatud
/liigendama
ta52
EFTA
riigid53
Kandidaatri
igid ja
potentsiaals
ed
kandidaadi
d54
Muud
kolmanda
d riigid
Muu
sihtotstarbeline
tulu
02 01 01 01 01
Liigenda
mata JAH JAH EI EI
• Uued eelarveread, mille loomist taotletakse
Järjestage mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku rubriigiti ja iga rubriigi sees
eelarveridade kaupa
Mitmeaasta
se
finantsraam
istiku
rubriik
Eelarverida Kulu liik Rahaline osalus
Nr
Liigendatud
/liigendama
ta
EFTA
riigid
Kandidaatri
igid ja
potentsiaals
ed
kandidaadi
d
Muud
kolmanda
d riigid
Muu
sihtotstarbeline
tulu
ei kohaldata
52 Liigendatud = liigendatud assigneeringud / liigendamata = liigendamata assigneeringud. 53 EFTA: Euroopa Vabakaubanduse Assotsiatsioon. 54 Kandidaatriigid ja vajaduse korral Lääne-Balkani potentsiaalsed kandidaadid.
ET 12 ET
3.2. Ettepaneku hinnanguline finantsmõju assigneeringutele
3.2.1. Hinnanguline mõju tegevusassigneeringutele – ülevaade
– Ettepanek/algatus ei nõua tegevusassigneeringute kasutamist
– Ettepanek/algatus nõuab tegevusassigneeringute kasutamist, mis toimub järgmiselt:
3.2.1.1. Heakskiidetud eelarvest saadavad assigneeringud
miljonites eurodes (kolm kohta pärast koma)
Mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku rubriik Nr 02
DG: teadusuuringute ja innovatsiooni peadirektoraat Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Mitmeaastane finantsraamistik
2028–2034 KOKKU 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Tegevusassigneeringud
Eelarverida Kulukohustused (1a) 0
Maksed (2a) 0
Eelarverida Kulukohustused (1b) 0
Maksed (2b) 0
Eriprogrammide vahenditest rahastatavad haldusassigneeringud55
Eelarverida 01 01 01 01 (3) 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 4,074
Teadusuuringute ja
innovatsiooni peadirektoraat Kulukohustused = 1a + 1b + 3 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 4,074
assigneeringud KOKKU Maksed = 2a + 2b + 3 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 4,074
55 Tehniline ja/või haldusabi ning ELi programmide ja/või meetmete rakendamiseks antava toetusega seotud kulud (endised BA read), kaudne teadustegevus, otsene teadustegevus.
ET 13 ET
miljonites eurodes (kolm kohta pärast koma)
Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta
Mitmeaastane
finantsraamistik
2028–2034
KOKKU 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Mitmeaastase
finantsraamistikuKulukohustused 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 4,074
RUBRIIKIDE 1–4
assigneeringud
KOKKU
Maksed 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 4,074
ET 14 ET
3.2.3. Hinnanguline mõju haldusassigneeringutele – ülevaade
– Ettepanek/algatus ei nõua haldusassigneeringute kasutamist
– Ettepanek/algatus nõuab haldusassigneeringute kasutamist, mis toimub
järgmiselt:
3.2.3.1. Heakskiidetud eelarvest saadavad assigneeringud
HEAKSKIIDETUD EELARVE Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta 2028–
2034
KOKKU 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
RUBRIIK 4
Personalikulud 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,0000,0000,000 0,000
Muud halduskulud 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,0000,0000,000 0,000
RUBRIIK 4 kokku 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
RUBRIIGIST 4 välja jäävad kulud
Personalikulud 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,582 0,5820,5820,582 4,074
Muud halduskulud 0 0 0 0 000 0
RUBRIIGIST 4 välja jäävad kulud
kokku 0,582
0,5820,5820,5820,5820,5820,582 4,074
KOKKU 0,5820,5820,5820,5820,5820,5820,582 4,074
Hinnang alates 2028. aastast kuludele ja personalile avalduva mõju kohta on lisatud näitlikustamise
eesmärgil ja see ei mõjuta järgmist mitmeaastast finantsraamistikku. Rahastamisallikas ja liidu
rahaliste kohustuste ulatus 2027. aasta järgsel perioodil sõltuvad mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku
2028–2034 üle peetavate institutsioonidevaheliste läbirääkimiste tulemustest ning seejärel määratakse
need kindlaks iga-aastases eelarvemenetluses. Kõik assigneeringud ja töötajate arv alates 2028. aastast
on soovituslikud.
3.2.4. Hinnanguline personalivajadus
– Ettepanek/algatus ei nõua personali kasutamist
– Ettepanek/algatus nõuab personali kasutamist, mis toimub järgmiselt:
3.2.4.1. Rahastatakse heakskiidetud eelarvest
Hinnanguline väärtus täistööaja ekvivalendina56
HEAKSKIIDETUD EELARVE Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta
2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Ametikohtade loeteluga ette nähtud ametikohad (ametnikud ja ajutised töötajad)
20 01 02 01 (komisjoni peakorteris ja esindustes)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 01 02 03 (ELi delegatsioonides) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Kaudne teadustegevus) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(Otsene teadustegevus) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
56 Palun täpsustage allpool esitatud tabelis, kui palju täistööaja ekvivalente on juba määratud meetme
haldamiseks ja/või kui palju saab neid teie peadirektoraadis ümber paigutada ja millised on teie
netovajadused.
ET 15 ET
Muud eelarveread (märkige) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Koosseisuväline personal (täistööaja ekvivalendina)
20 02 01 (üldvahenditest
rahastatavad lepingulised töötajad ja
riikide lähetatud eksperdid)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 02 03 (lepingulised töötajad, kohalikud töötajad, riikide lähetatud
eksperdid ja noored eksperdid ELi
delegatsioonides)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Haldustoetuse
eelarverida • peakorteris 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[XX.01.YY.YY]
• ELi delegatsiooni des
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(lepingulised töötajad ja riikide
lähetatud eksperdid kaudse
teadustegevuse valdkonnas)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(lepingulised töötajad ja riikide
lähetatud eksperdid otsese teadustegevuse valdkonnas)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Muud eelarveread (märkige) -
Rubriik 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Muud eelarveread (märkige) - Rubriigist 4 välja jäävad kulud
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KOKKU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ettepaneku rakendamiseks vajatav personal (täistööaja ekvivalendina)
Kaetakse komisjoni
talituste
olemasolevast
personalist
Erakorraline lisapersonal*
Rahastatakse
rubriigist 4 või
teadusuuringute
eelarveridadelt
Rahastatakse BA
ridadelt
Rahastatakse
tasudest
Ametikohtade
loeteluga ette
nähtud
ametikohad
3 (Võttes arvesse
rubriigi 4 üldist
pingelist olukorda nii
personali kui ka
assigneeringute taseme
osas, kaetakse
personalivajadused
peadirektoraadi
töötajatega, kes on
juba määratud meedet
haldama ja/või kes on
ümber paigutatud
peadirektoraadi või
komisjoni muude
talituste siseselt.)
ei kohaldata
Koosseisuväline
personal
(lepingulised
ET 16 ET
töötajad, riikide
lähetatud
eksperdid ja
renditööjõud)
Ülesannete kirjeldus:
Ametnikud ja ajutised töötajad Määruse rakendamise ja jõustamise jälgimiseks on vaja kolme töötajat
(täistööaja ekvivalendina).
Koosseisuvälised töötajad
3.2.5. Hinnanguline mõju digitehnoloogiaga seotud investeeringutele – ülevaade
Kohustuslik: järgmises tabelis tuleks esitada parim hinnang ettepanekust/algatusest
tulenevate digitehnoloogiaga seotud investeeringute kohta.
Erandkorras, kui see on vajalik ettepaneku/algatuse rakendamiseks, tuleks rubriigi 4
assigneeringud esitada selleks ettenähtud eelarvereal.
Rubriikide 1–3 assigneeringuid tuleks kajastada „tegevusvaldkonna IT-kuludena, mis
on eraldatud rakenduskavadele“. Nende kulud kuuluvad tegevuseelarvesse, mida
kasutatakse otseselt algatuse rakendamisega seotud IT-platvormide/vahendite
taaskasutamiseks/ostmiseks/arendamiseks ja nendega seotud investeeringuteks (nt
litsentsid, uuringud, andmete säilitamine jne). Selles tabelis esitatud teave peaks
olema kooskõlas 4. jaos „Digimõõde“ esitatud üksikasjadega.
Digi- ja IT-
assigneeringud
KOKKU
Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Mitmeaastane
finantsraamistik
2028–2034
KOKKU 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
RUBRIIK 4
Institutsiooni tasandi IT-kulud
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RUBRIIK 4 kokku 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RUBRIIGIST 4 välja jäävad kulud
Poliitikavaldkondade IT-kulud rakenduskavadele
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RUBRIIGIST 4 välja
jäävad kulud kokku 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KOKKU 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.2.6. Kooskõla kehtiva mitmeaastase finantsraamistikuga
Ettepanek/algatus:
– on täielikult rahastatav mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku asjaomase rubriigi
sisese vahendite ümberpaigutamise kaudu
ET 17 ET
– tingib mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku asjaomase rubriigi mittesihtotstarbelise
varu ja/või mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku määruses sätestatud erivahendite
kasutuselevõtu
– nõuab mitmeaastase finantsraamistiku muutmist
3.2.7. Kolmandate isikute rahaline osalus
Ettepanek/algatus:
– ei näe ette kolmandate isikute poolset kaasrahastamist
– näeb ette kolmandate isikute poolse kaasrahastuse, mille hinnanguline summa
on järgmine:
assigneeringud miljonites eurodes (kolm kohta pärast koma)
Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta Aasta
Kokku 2028 2029 2030 2031 2032 2033 2034
Nimetage
kaasrahastav
asutus
Kaasrahastatavad
assigneeringud
KOKKU
3.2.8. Detsentraliseeritud asutuse hinnanguline personali- ja assigneeringute vajadus
Pädevuskeskus pakuks tuge sellistes valdkondades nagu intellektuaalomandi kasutamine,
turuleviimine ja juurdepääs rahastamisele. Nende meetmete rakendamiseks on rakendusetapis
hinnanguliselt (täistööaja ekvivalendina) vaja kümmet töötajat aastas, võttes eelduseks, et
arendusperiood kestab kaks aastat. Kui määrus jõustub 2028. aastal, hõlmaks see etapp 2028.
ja 2029. aastat. Kui pädevuskeskus täielikult tööle hakkab, siis väheneb hinnanguline
personalivajadus kaheksale töötajale aastas.
Personalivajadus (täistööaja ekvivalendina)
Asutus: Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi
Amet
Aasta
2028
Aasta
2029
Aasta
2030
Aasta
2031 Aasta
2032
Aasta
2033
Aasta
2034
Ajutised töötajad
(AD palgaastmed) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
Ajutised töötajad
(AST palgaastmed) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ajutised töötajad (AD 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
ET 18 ET
+ AST) kokku
Lepingulised töötajad 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Riikide lähetatud
eksperdid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Lepingulised töötajad ja
riikide lähetatud
eksperdid kokku
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Töötajad KOKKU 10 10 8 8 8 8 8
Detsentraliseeritud asutuse personali- ja assigneeringute (miljonites eurodes) vajadus
ettepaneku/algatuse rakendamiseks – ülevaade
Asutus: Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi Amet
Aasta
2028
Aasta
2029
Aasta
2030
Aasta
2031
Aasta
2032
Aasta
2033
Aasta
2034
Ajutised töötajad (AD +
AST) 6 6 4 4 4 4 4
Lepingulised töötajad 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Riikide lähetatud
eksperdid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Töötajad kokku 10 10 8 8 8 8 8
ELi eelarvest kaetavad
assigneeringud 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
Tasudest kaetavad
assigneeringud
(kui see on asjakohane)
0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalomandi
Ameti
tegevuseelarvest/ülejäägist
kaetavad assigneeringud
(nagu asjakohane)
0,746 1,523 1,173 1,196 1,220 1,245 1,269
ET 19 ET
Kaasrahastatavad
assigneeringud
(kui see on asjakohane)
0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000 0,000
assigneeringud KOKKU 0,746 1,523 1,173 1,196 1,220 1,245 1,269
Amet ei võta seisukohta keskkonnamõju hindamise direktiivi asjakohasest sättest tuleneva
tulu arvutamise kohta.
3.3. Hinnanguline mõju tuludele
– Ettepanekul/algatusel puudub finantsmõju tuludele
– Ettepanekul/algatusel on järgmine finantsmõju:
– omavahenditele
– muudele tuludele
– märkige, kas see on kulude eelarveridasid mõjutav sihtotstarbeline tulu
miljonites eurodes (kolm kohta pärast koma)
Tulude eelarverida
Jooksval
eelarveaastal
kättesaadavad
assigneeringud
Ettepaneku/algatuse mõju57
Aasta
2028
Aasta
2029
Aasta
2030
Aasta
2031
Aasta
2032
Aasta
2033
Aasta
2034
Artikkel ….
Sihtotstarbeliste tulude puhul märkige, milliseid kulude eelarveridasid ettepanek
mõjutab.
Muud märkused (nt tuludele avaldatava mõju arvutamise meetod/valem või muu
teave).
4. DIGIMÕÕDE
4.1. Diginõuded
Viide nõudele Nõude kirjeldus Nõudest
mõjutatud või
sellega seotud
osaleja(d)
Üldised
protsessid
Kategooriad
57 Traditsiooniliste omavahendite (tollimaksud ja suhkrumaksud) korral tuleb märkida netosummad, st
brutosummad pärast 10 % kogumiskulude mahaarvamist, nagu on ette nähtud dokumendis COM(2025)
574.
ET 20 ET
Artikli 4 lõige 4 Teadus- ja
arendustegevus
e hanked, mis
viiakse läbi
TEDi platvormi
kaudu
(digiliides
hanketeadete
üleslaadimiseks
Euroopa Liidu
Teatajas)
Avaliku sektori
hankijad
Ettevõtjad
Teadus- ja
arendusteenuste
hanked
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
Protsesside
digitaliseerimine
ja
automatiseerimin
e
Koostalitlusvõim
e
Artikli 4 lõige 4 Nõue kasutada
hankedokument
ides
elektroonilist
vormingut
Avaliku sektori
hankijad
Ettevõtjad
Teadus- ja
arendusteenuste
hanked
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
Protsesside
digitaliseerimine
ja
automatiseerimin
e
Koostalitlusvõim
e
Artikkel 10 Nõue avaliku
sektori
hankijatele
määrata
kindlaks
nõuded
töövõtjatele,
mille kohaselt
peavad nad
vajaduse korral
aitama kaasa
tulemuste
avaldamisele
avatud andmete
või avatud
lähtekoodina
Avaliku sektori
hankijad
Ettevõtjad
Teadus- ja
arendusteenuste
hanked
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
Protsesside
digitaliseerimine
ja
automatiseerimin
e
Artikkel 26 Nõue järgida
andmekaitsenor
me, sealhulgas
elektroonilise
side norme
Avaliku sektori
hankijad
Ettevõtjad
Teadus- ja
arendusteenuste
hanked
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
ET 21 ET
Protsesside
digitaliseerimine
ja
automatiseerimin
e
Artikli 32 lõike 3
punkt a
Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalom
andi Amet
töötab välja
väärtuse
määramise
raamistiku
immateriaalse
vara ning
sellega seotud
digitaalsete
protsesside ja
teenuste
väärtuse
määramiseks
seoses
intellektuaalom
andi
avalikustamise,
kontrollimise ja
väärtuse
määramisega
Ettevõtjad
Liikmesriigid
Liidu asutused
Intellektuaalom
andi väärtuse
määramine
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
Protsesside
digitaliseerimine
ja
automatiseerimin
e
Artikli 32 lõike 3
punkt b
Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalom
andi Amet loob
digitaalse
sidemete
loomise
platvormi ja
haldab seda, et
hõlbustada liidu
tasandil
kaitstud igat
liiki
intellektuaalom
andi õiguste
litsentsimist ja
üleandmist
Liidu asutused
Ettevõtjad
Intellektuaalom
andi
litsentsimise ja
üleandmise
hõlbustamine
Andmed
Digilahendus
Digitaalne avalik
teenus
Artikli 32 lõike 3
punkt g ja
artikkel 35
Tõendite
andmebaasi
väljatöötamine
intellektuaalom
andiga tagatava
Liikmesriigid
Pädevad
asutused
Andmetöötlus
ja -analüüs
Andmed
ET 22 ET
rahastamise
kohta
Ettevõtjad
Liidu asutused
4.2. Andmed
Andmete liik Viide nõudele
(nõuetele)
Standard ja/või tehniline
kirjeldus (kui see on
asjakohane)
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlustega seotud
andmed hanke ulatuse,
avaliku sektori hankijate ja
pakkujate/töövõtjate kohta
Artikli 4 lõige 4, artiklid
6, 16 ja 17
ELi avalike hangete portaalis (e-
vormid, OASIS UBL, TEDi
rakendusliidesed, e-riigihangete
ontoloogia) kasutatavad standardid
ja spetsifikatsioonid
Andmed, mis on seotud
intellektuaalomandiga
tagatava rahastamisega,
sealhulgas teave selle
kohta, kuidas on hinnatud
intellektuaalomandit, mida
kasutatakse tagatisena
krediidi või kindlustuse
eesmärgil või mitterahalise
osalusena
omakapitaliinvesteeringute
stsenaariumides, vastava
tehingu suuruse ja
omaduste kohta, asjaomase
intellektuaalomandi õiguse
liigi kohta ning
asjakohaste näitajate
kohta, nagu omakapitali
väärtuse määramine,
tagatus või laenu ja
väärtuse suhe.
Artikli 32 lõike 3 punkt g
ja artikkel 33
Standardid ja spetsifikatsioonid,
mille määrab koostöös
komisjoniga kindlaks Euroopa
Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti
intellektuaalomandiga tagatava
rahastamise pädevuskeskus ja mis
hõlmavad järgmist:
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara
liigi, tagatise struktuuri, tehingu
suuruse ja laenutulemuste
ühtlustatud andmenõuded;
kohaldatavate
andmekaitsenormidega kooskõlas
olevad andmejagamise ja
juurdepääsu protokollid;
koostalitlusvõime nõuded, mis
võimaldavad siduda
intellektuaalomandi registrid,
äriregistrid ja avalike vahendite
andmed, ning standardid
tehingutasandi andmete
anonüümimiseks ja koondamiseks,
mis on kogutud ELi toetatavate
intellektuaalomandiõigustega
tagatavate rahastamisvahendite
kaudu.
Kooskõla Euroopa andmestrateegiaga
Selgitage, kuidas nõue (nõuded) on kooskõlas Euroopa andmestrateegiaga
• Ettepanekuga edendatakse digivahendite kasutamist teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetlustes ning intellektuaalomandi väärtuse määramisel ja turuleviimisel, mis
on kooskõlas Euroopa andmestrateegia eesmärgiga edendada digitaliseerimist ja
andmepõhist innovatsiooni.
• Ettepanek tugineb olemasolevatele riigihangete digivahenditele, sealhulgas
ET 23 ET
riigihangete portaalidele. See on kooskõlas Euroopa andmestrateegia eesmärgiga
parandada andmete jagamist ja koostalitlusvõimet.
• Ettepanekuga edendatakse läbipaistvust, järgides samas andmekaitse ja andmete
konfidentsiaalsuse eeskirju, intellektuaalomandi õiguste kaitset ja ärisaladuste kaitset.
See on kooskõlas Euroopa andmestrateegia eesmärgiga edendada andmepõhiste
ökosüsteemide läbipaistvust ja usaldusväärsust.
• Ettepaneku eesmärk on luua idu- ja kasvufirmadele soodne keskkond, mis on
kooskõlas Euroopa andmestrateegia eesmärgiga edendada innovatsiooni ja ettevõtlust
andmepõhiste tehnoloogiate abil.
Selgitus selle kohta, kuidas on uued loodud andmed leitavad, juurdepääsetavad,
koostalitlusvõimelised ja taaskasutatavad ning vastavad kvaliteetsetele standarditele
Andmete kättesaadavus, leitavus, koostalitlusvõime ja taaskasutatavus ning teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangetega seotud andmekvaliteedi nõuded on praegu kindlaks määratud
TEDi portaalis andmete avaldamise ja neile juurdepääsu korras.
Määruse alusel kogutud andmeid haldab Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet.
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti pädevuskeskus haldab kindlaksmääratud
metaandmete standarditega struktureeritud hoidlat, et toetada leitavust ja taaskasutamist.
Amet on andmekogu haldav juriidiline isik. Juurdepääsu reguleeritakse selgete
protokollidega, milles eristatakse avalikult kättesaadavaid andmeid ja andmeid, millele on
juurdepääs ainult volitatud asutustel. Koostalitlusvõimet olemasolevate intellektuaalomandi
registrite ja äriregistrite vahel taotletakse ühiste andmevormingute ja identifikaatorite abil.
Andmekvaliteedi standardid, sealhulgas valideerimiseeskirjad ja osalevate üksuste
aruandluskohustused, määrab kindlaks pädevuskeskus koostöös komisjoniga.
Andmevood
Andmevoogude üldine kirjeldus
Andmete liik Viide
(viited)
nõudel
e
(nõuet
ele)
Osaleja, kes
andmed esitab
Osaleja, kes
andmed saab
Andmevahetus
e ajend
Sagedus
(kui see
on
asjakoha
ne)
Hankedokumendid
ja teated
Artikli
4 lõige
4,
artiklid
6, 16 ja
17
Avaliku
sektori
hankija
Pakkujad Teadete
avaldamine ja
link
hankedokumen
tidele
Intellektuaalomand
i väärtuse
määramise
vahendid
Artikli
32
lõike 3
punkt a
Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalo
mandi Amet
Ettevõtjad
Avaliku
sektori
asutused
Intellektuaalo
mandi väärtuse
määramise
taotlus
Teave Artikli Euroopa Liidu Ettevõtjad Sidemete
ET 24 ET
intellektuaalomand
i sidemete loomise
kohta
32
lõike 3
punkt
b
Intellektuaalo
mandi Amet
Avaliku
sektori
asutused
loomise taotlus
Intellektuaalomand
ipõhise
rahastamisega
seotud tõendid
Artikli
32
lõike 3
punkt
g
Liikmesriikide
garantiiasutus
ed
Finantsvahend
ajad
Euroopa Liidu
Intellektuaalo
mandi Amet
Tõendite
kogumise
taotlus
4.3. Digilahendused
4.4. Koostalitlusvõime hindamine
Selle ettepaneku kohaselt korraldatakse teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankeid TEDi
portaalis kasutatavate digilahenduste kaudu.
Käesoleva ettepaneku kohaselt on Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti ülesanne
töötada välja järgmised digilahendused:
• ettevõtjatele ja finantseerimisasutustele kättesaadavad digivahendid, mis toetavad
intellektuaalomandipõhise vara avalikustamist, taustakontrolli ja esialgset väärtuse
määramist
• intellektuaalomandi litsentsimise ja üleandmise platvorm, mis hõlbustab liidu
tasandil kaitstud intellektuaalomandi õiguste litsentsimist ja üleandmist
• Intellektuaalomandiga tagatud finantstõendite andmebaas, mis kogub tehingutasandi
andmeid intellektuaalomandiga tagatavate rahastamisvahendite kohta
Kõiki kolme lahendust haldab Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet ning need vastavad
kohaldatavatele küberturvalisuse nõuetele ja asjakohastele liidu diginormidele. Kui
kasutatakse tehisintellektipõhiseid vahendeid, eelkõige taustakontrolliks ja esialgseks
väärtuse määramiseks, tuleb tagada tehisintellekti kasutamise suhtes kohaldatavate normide
järgimine ja asjakohast riskiklassifikatsiooni hinnatakse kavandamise etapis.
Määrusega ette nähtud digilahendused nõuavad piiriülest suhtlust ning hõlmavad mitut ELi
üksust ja avaliku sektori asutust, mis vastavad mõlemale koostalitlusvõime hindamise
tingimusele.
Praegu pakub TEDi portaal avaliku sektori hankijatele koostalitlusvõimelist võimalust
laadida ka TEDi portaali üles teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete teateid, mis avaldati
liikmesriikide riigihankeportaalides. Tulevikus peaks ELi digitaalne riigihangete turg veelgi
parandama liikmesriikide ja ELi riigihankeportaalide ja andmebaaside koostalitlusvõimet,
võimaldades ühe liikmesriigi ettevõtjatel hõlpsamini osaleda teise liikmesriigi avaliku
sektori hankija teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluses ning lihtsustades kahe või
enama liikmesriigi avaliku sektori hankijate jaoks teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluste ühist läbiviimist. TEDi portaal jääb avaliku sektori hankijatele liideseks
teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste algatamisel ning ettevõtjatele teadus- ja
arendusteenuste hangetega seotud ärivõimaluste leidmisel. Seetõttu ei ole liikmesriikide ja
ELi riigihankeportaalide ja andmebaaside koostoime käesoleva koostalitlusvõime
hindamise osa.
ET 25 ET
4.5. Digimõõtme rakendamist toetavad meetmed
58 Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu 13. märtsi 2024. aasta määrus (EL) 2024/903, millega kehtestatakse
meetmed avaliku sektori koostalitlusvõime kõrge taseme tagamiseks kogu liidus (Koostalitleva Euroopa
määrus) (ELT L, 2024/903, 22.3.2024, ELI: http://data.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/903/oj).
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti väärtuse määramise vahendid ja sidemete
loomise platvorm on kättesaadavad ettevõtjatele ja avaliku sektori asutustele kõigis
liikmesriikides, mis nõuab semantilist koostalitlusvõimet liikmesriikide intellektuaalomandi
registrite ja äriregistritega. Intellektuaalomandiga tagatud finantstõendite andmebaasi
koondatakse liikmesriikide garantiiasutustelt ja finantsvahendajatelt saadud andmed,
milleks on vaja ühtlustatud andmevorminguid ja ühiseid tunnuseid. ELi tasandil
kättesaadavate asjakohaste koostalitluslahenduste korduskasutamist hinnatakse
kavandamis- ja rakendamisetapis. Peamised allesjäänud tõkked on liikmesriikide
intellektuaalomandi registrite erinevad vormingud ja keskse ELi tasandil
intellektuaalomandi pandiregistri puudumine.
Ettepanekuga kehtestatakse uued siduvad nõuded avalikele piiriülestele digiteenustele
Euroopa Parlamendi ja nõukogu määruse (EL) 2024/90358 tähenduses ja seetõttu on tehtud
koostalitlusvõime hindamine ja selle tulemuste aruanne avaldatakse Koostalitleva Euroopa
portaalis.
Käesoleva ettepaneku kohaste digilahenduste rakendamise toetamiseks on kavandatud
järgmised rakendusmeetmed.
Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete jaoks:
• olemasolevate funktsioonide kasutamine teadus- ja arendusteenuste
hankemenetluste algatamiseks TEDi portaali kaudu ning uute digifunktsioonide
integreerimine teadus- ja arendusteenuste hankemenetluste algatamiseks ELi
digitaalse riigihangete turu kaudu;
• liikmesriikidele, avaliku sektori hankijatele ja ettevõtjatele suunatud suutlikkuse
suurendamise meetmed, et toetada teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete algatamise
laialdast ja õiget kasutamist TEDi portaali kaudu.
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti tegevuste jaoks:
• digivahendite, sidemete loomise platvormi ja tõendite andmebaasi eest vastutava
Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Ameti intellektuaalomandiga tagatava
rahastamise pädevuskeskuse loomine ja töölerakendamine;
• finantseerimisasutustele suunatud suutlikkuse suurendamise programm, mille
töötavad ühiselt välja Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet ja komisjon, et
toetada väärtuse määramise raamistiku ja digivahendite kasutuselevõttu;
• valitud riiklikke garantiiasutusi ja finantsvahendajaid hõlmava tõendite andmebaasi
katseetapp, mis võimaldab enne täielikku kasutuselevõttu järkjärgulist täiustamist.
ET ET
EUROOPA KOMISJON
Brüssel, 9.9.2026 SWD(2026) 568 final
KOMISJONI TALITUSTE TÖÖDOKUMENT
MÕJU HINDAMISE ARUANDE KOMMENTEERITUD KOKKUVÕTE
Lisatud dokumendile:
Ettepanek: EUROOPA PARLAMENDI JA NÕUKOGU MÄÄRUS,
millega kehtestatakse meetmete raamistik liidu innovatsiooniökosüsteemi tugevdamiseks
ja muudetakse määrust (EL) 2017/1001 (Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus)
{COM(2026) 567 final} - {SEC(2026) 567 final} - {SWD(2026) 567 final}
1
Kokkuvõte
Mõjuhinnang Euroopa innovatsioonimääruse kohta
A. Vajadus meetmete järele
Milles probleem seisneb ja miks on see ELi tasandi probleem?
Euroopa Liit (EL) on maailmas üks teadusuuringute liidreid, kuid tema saavutused innovatsiooni alal ja äriline edu ei ole samal tasemel nagu see eesrindlik positsioon eeldaks. Liiga palju Euroopas välja töötatud uuendusi ei jõua kunagi kas turule või ühe riigi piiridest kaugemale või ei too kaasa uute kasvusektorite teket. Viimaste aastate jooksul on liit astunud märkimisväärseid samme nende probleemide lahendamiseks. ELi rahastamisprogrammid, nagu „Euroopa horisont“, innovatsioonifond, „Digitaalne Euroopa“ ja „InvestEU“, samuti algatused, mis on suunatud kapitaliturgude süvendamisele ja Euroopa teadusruumi kindlustamisele, on üldisi innovatsioonitingimusi parandanud. Sellest hoolimata püsivad mõned suured takistused, eriti mis puudutab teadusuuringute tulemuste turule jõudmist. Kuna intellektuaalomandi hindamine on killustatud, kulukas ja ebapiisavalt standarditud, mis takistab intellektuaalomandi rahalise väärtuse määramist ja piirab rahastamisvõimalusi, on ELil jätkuvalt raske innovatsiooni turustada ja laiendada. Lisaks sellele on teadus- ja arendustegevuse alased hanked kui vahend teadusuuringuid ja innovatsiooni toetada endiselt alakasutatud. Teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangete vallas valitsev õiguskindlusetus koos eri riikide varieeruvate normide ja tavadega pärsib piiriüleste teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete käivitamist ning uuenduslike lahenduste levikut ühtsel turul.
Mida tahetakse saavutada?
Üldeesmärk on parandada ühtse innovatsioonituru toimimist, vähendades uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamise, katsetamise ja laialdasema kasutuselevõtu teel seisvaid tõkkeid ning kiirendades nii nende turustamist ELis. Konkreetsed eesmärgid on järgmised: i) vähendada järgmise nelja aasta kestel hindamiskulusid ning laiendada intellektuaalomandiõiguste litsentsimist ja üleandmist ELis, ii) suurendada järgmise viie aasta kestel kulutusi teadus- ja arendusteenuste hangetele ja iii) suurendada järgmise viie aasta kestel EList pärinevate teadus- ja arendustegevuse tulemusel loodud lahenduste hankeid.
Milline on ELi tasandi meetmete lisaväärtus (subsidiaarsus)?
Kõnealuse algatusega käsitletavatel probleemidel on selge piiriülene mõõde ja liikmesriigid ei saa neid üksi tõhusalt lahendada. Innovatsiooni ökosüsteemid, turud ja väärtusahelad on järjest enam piiriülesed, kuid eri riikide erisustest tulenevalt on regulatsioon ja turutingimused endiselt killustatud. Lisaks ei suuda üksikud liikmesriigid saavutada innovatsiooni turustamiseks ja levitamiseks vajalikku novaatorite, investorite, ostjate ja kasutajate kriitilist massi. Kõige tõhusam viis tuvastatud probleeme lahendada on seega ELi tasandi meede. Eri riikide varieeruvad normid ja tavad pärsivad novaatorlike ettevõtete osalemist piiriülestel teadus-ja arendustegevuse alastel hangetel ning piiravad võimalust piiriüleseid hankeid korraldada. Ühtne raamistik, mis loob võimalused kogu ühtsel turul ja lihtsustab piiriüleseid hankeid, saab ilmavalgust näha ainult liidu meetme tulemusena. Ka ei saa ükski liikmesriik üles ehitada intellektuaalomandi hindamise raamistikku, mida tunnustataks ja usaldataks kogu ühtsel turul. Seega on intellektuaalomandi parema hindamise, rahastamise ja piiriülese kasutamise saavutamiseks vaja ühtset ELi lähenemist.
B. Lahendused
Millised on olemasolevad poliitikavariandid eesmärkide saavutamiseks?
Lisaks lähtestsenaariumile vaeti mõjuhinnangu käigus kolme võimalikku meedet, kusjuures kõigi
2
nende puhul olid võimalikud eri valikud/versioonid. 1. meede. Luua intellektuaalomandi hindamise metoodika ja lihtsustada litsentsimist. 1. meetme puhul kaaluti mitut, erineva ulatuse ja kohaldamisalaga versiooni. Versiooni A kohaselt tehtaks EUIPO-le Euroopa innovatsioonimäärusega ülesandeks töötada välja kogu ELis kehtiv intellektuaalomandi hindamise raamistik. Versiooni B puhul keskendutaks kogu ELi hõlmava intellektuaalomanditehingute järelturuna toimiva e-turu loomisele. Versiooni C kohaselt saaks EUIPOst ELi-ülene intellektuaalomandi pädevuskeskus, kelle roll on pakkuda intellektuaalomandi hindamise alast nõustamist, koolitust ja tuge. Versioon D on kombinatsioon hindamisraamistikust ja turust, versioonis E aga on koos kõik kolm elementi, nii et selle puhul on tegu kõige kaugeleulatuvama lähenemisega intellektuaalomandil põhinevat rahastamist takistavate probleemide lahendamisele. 2. meede. Kehtestada teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste avalike hangete – sealhulgas piiriüleste hangete – kord ning eeskirjad innovatsioonisõbralike meetodite kasutamise soodustamiseks teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete puhul. Selle meetme puhul kaaluti kaht versiooni. Versiooni A kohaselt soovitataks avaliku sektori hankijatel kasutada teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete puhul innovatsioonisõbralikke meetodeid, versiooni B puhul oleks selliste meetodite kasutamine teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete korral avaliku sektori hankijatele kohustuslik. 3. meede. ELis välja töötatud lahenduste eelistamine teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste avalike hangete korral. Selle meetme puhul kaaluti kolme versiooni. Versiooni A kohaselt oleksid ELis välja töötatud lahendused teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste avalike hangete puhul eelistatud, kuid see ei oleks kohustuslik. Versiooniga B hakkaks teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste avalike hangete puhul kehtima ELis välja töötatud lahenduste eelistamise kohustus koos paindlikkusklauslitega, mis võimaldaksid ELi-välistel tarnijatel hankes osaleda, kui liidus ei leidu küllaldaselt sobilikke pakkujaid või kui nõuete täitmisega kaasneksid ebaproportsionaalsed kulud. Versiooni C kohaselt oleks ELis välja töötatud lahenduste eelistamine teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste avalike hangete puhul rangelt kohustuslik ja puuduksid erandid avaliku sektori hankijatele.
Millised on eri sidusrühmade seisukohad? Kes millist varianti toetab?
Ulatuslik sidusrühmadega konsulteerimine näitab, et üldiselt ollakse üksmeelel vajaduses võtta uuenduslike lahenduste turustamise edendamiseks meetmeid ELi tasandil. Valdavalt toetasid sidusrühmad meetmeid, millega parandada intellektuaalomandi hindamist ja selle rahalise väärtuse määramist. Vastajad juhtisid tähelepanu usaldusväärsete ja laialdaselt tunnustatavate intellektuaalomandi hindamise standardite puudumisele, idu- ja kasvufirmade kasinatele kogemustele intellektuaalomandi hindamisel ning sellest tingitud raskustele rahastamisvõimaluste leidmisel. Sektori esindajad, idufirmad ja ettevõtjate ühendused leidsid, et suur takistus kapitali kaasamisel on immateriaalse vara hindamine, samas kui enamik sidusrühmi toetas ideed töötada välja kogu ELis kehtiv intellektuaalomandi hindamise metoodika, et suurendada intellektuaalomandi võrreldavust, usaldusväärsust ja piiriülest kasutamist. Lisaks sellele väljendasid sidusrühmad suurt toetust meetmetele innovatiivsete lahenduste hangete tõhustamiseks. Vastajad leidsid, et praegused hankemenetlused on tarbetult keerukad, aeglased ja liikmesriigiti erinevad ning see piirab novaatorlike ettevõtete ja idufirmade osalust. Avaliku sektori asutused, ettevõtjate ühendused, VKEd ja idufirmade esindajad toetasid mõtet luua spetsiaalne teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete raamistik, mis võimaldaks suuremat õiguskindlust, lihtsustaks piiriüleseid hankeid, soodustaks hangete innovatsioonisõbralikkust ja vähendaks novaatorlike ettevõtete ees seisvaid tõkkeid. Paljud sidusrühmad toetasid lisaks sellele kvaliteedi- ja toimivuspõhiste kriteeriumide ulatuslikumat kasutamist selle asemel, et keskenduda
3
pelgalt madalaima hinnaga pakkumustele. Peale selle pooldasid paljud sidusrühmad mõtet luua suurem selgus seoses sellega, kuidas hanked võivad suurendada Euroopa tehnoloogilist suveräänsust ja vähendada strateegilist sõltuvust, sealhulgas lähtudes hangete puhul eesmärgist toetada Euroopa uuenduslike lahenduste väljatöötamist ja kasutuselevõttu.
C. Eelistatud poliitikavariandi mõju
Millised on eelistatud poliitikavariandi (kui see on olemas, vastasel korral peamiste poliitikavariantide) eelised?
Lähtestsenaariumiga võrreldes toetab eelistatud variant komisjoni lihtsustamiskava, kuna sellega vähendatakse halduskoormust ja ühtse turu õiguslikku killustatust. Eelduste kohaselt on sellest tulenev halduskulude netosääst esimesel rakendusaastal ligikaudu 1,1 miljardit eurot (kusjuures juba on arvesse võetud kohandamisega seotud kulud). Lisaks sellele peaks eelistatud variant olema majanduslikus mõttes märkimisväärselt kasulik, kuna see parandab novaatorlike ettevõtete jaoks rahastamisvõimalusi ja suurendab nõudlust uuenduslike lahenduste järele. Intellektuaalomandi hindamise suurem ühtlustatus aitab eelduste kohaselt kaasata intellektuaalomandil põhineva rahastamise vallas aastas täiendavad 10,2 miljardit eurot ning teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete täiustatud raamistik peaks suurendama novaatorlike ettevõtete turuvõimalusi ja tootma aastas hinnanguliselt 25,9 miljardit eurot lisakasumit. Makromajanduslikult kasvatab Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus ELi SKPd kümne aasta jooksul lähtestsenaariumiga võrreldes hinnanguliselt umbes 0,25–0,42%. See tähendab, et kümme aastat pärast rakendamist on SKP kasv kokku kuni 452 miljardit eurot ja loodud on umbes 507 000 uut töökohta.
Millised on eelistatud poliitikavariandi (kui see on olemas, vastasel korral peamiste poliitikavariantide) kulud?
Eelistatud variandi kulud on piiratud ja seisnevad peamiselt avaliku sektori asutuste ja hankijate ühekordsetes kohandamisega seotud kulutustes intellektuaalomandi hindamise ja kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete uute raamistike kasutuselevõtule. Hinnangute kohaselt on need kulud oluliselt väiksemad kui halduskulude sääst, mis tuleneb suuremast ühtlustamisest, õigusselgusest ja lihtsustamisest kogu innovatsiooni ökosüsteemi ulatuses. Lisaks sellele tingib eelistatud variant piiratud kaudse majandusliku kulu seoses meetmetega EList pärinevate uuenduslike lahenduste kasutuselevõtu soodustamiseks. Need kulud on hinnanguliselt umbes 464 miljonit eurot. Üldiselt peaks eelistatud poliitikavariandist saadav kasu olema oluliselt suurem kui selle kulu.
Milline on mõju VKEdele ja konkurentsivõimele?
Eelistatud poliitikavariant suurendab eelduste kohaselt Euroopa majanduse konkurentsivõimet, kuna see parandab novaatorlike ettevõtete juurdepääsu rahastamisele, loob rohkem võimalusi uuenduslike lahenduste turuletoomiseks ja toetab innovatsiooni levikut kogu ühtsel turul. Samuti peaks see uuenduslike Euroopa lahenduste väljatöötamist ja kasutuselevõttu lihtsustades andma panuse ELi tehnoloogilisesse konkurentsivõimesse ja strateegilisse autonoomiasse. VKEdele ja idufirmadele peaks eriti kasulik olema intellektuaalomandi hindamise ulatuslikum ühtlustamine, mis vähendab kulusid, parandab intellektuaalomandil põhinevaid rahastamisvõimalusi ja lihtsustab intellektuaalomandi turustamist. Samuti on neile eelduste kohaselt kasulik teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaste hangete innovatsioonisõbralikud menetlused, mis vähendavad takistusi osalemisel ja loovad novaatorlike ettevõtetele turul uusi võimalusi.
Kas on ette näha märkimisväärset mõju riikide eelarvetele ja ametiasutustele?
4
Ette ei ole näha märkimisväärset negatiivset mõju liikmesriikide eelarvetele ega ametiasutustele. Hoolimata ametiasutuste ja avaliku sektori hankijate mõningastest ühekordsetest kohanemisega seotud kuludest uute raamistike rakendamiseks peaks selle kuhjaga korvama halduskulude sääst, mis tuleneb kommertskasutusele eelnevate hangete menetluste ühtlustamisest ja lihtsustamisest. Kõik ELis kehtiva intellektuaalomandi hindamise raamistiku väljatöötamise ja käitamisega seotud kulud kannab Euroopa Liidu Intellektuaalomandi Amet (EUIPO) ja need kaetakse ameti enda eelarvest. Eelduste kohaselt ei ole täiendavad vahendid ELi eelarvest või liikmesriikidelt vajalikud.
Kas on oodata muud olulist mõju?
Lisaks mõjule, mida Euroopa innovatsioonimäärus avaldab SKP-le ja tööhõivele, on see eelduste kohaselt kasulik ka ühiskonnale laiemalt, kuna sellega suurenevad võimalused viia kliimamuutuste ja keskkonnaseisundi halvenemise vastu suunatud tehnoloogia alase teadustöö tulemused turule.
Kuidas on lugu proportsionaalsusega?
Eelistatud poliitikavariant võimaldaks saavutada algatuse eesmärgid ja oleks samas tuvastatud probleemidega proportsionaalne. Liikmesriigiti erinev lähenemine ei suudaks tagada küllaldast õiguskindlust, et käivitada teadus-ja arendustegevuse alaseid hankeid kõikjal liidus, ja takistaks jätkuvalt piiriüleseid hankeid. Ka intellektuaalomandi hindamine püsiks ühtse ELi raamistikuta killustatuna ning vähendaks nii intellektuaalomandi võrreldavust, usaldusväärsust ja tõhusat kasutamist kogu ühtsel turul.
D. Järelmeetmed
Hiljemalt neljandaks aastaks pärast jõustumist ja seejärel iga viie aasta tagant hindab komisjon kõnealust määrust selle eesmärkide saavutamise seisukohast ning esitab Euroopa Parlamendile, nõukogule ning Euroopa Majandus- ja Sotsiaalkomiteele selle kohta aruande.